MFD 3 00 340 Installation Guide Part I PDF

Multi-Functional Display
Version: 3.00.340
Installation Guide Part I

Date of Issue: February 2016
© 2016 Transas MIP Ltd. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas MIP Ltd. and shall not be duplicated in whole
or in part. The technical details contained in this manual are the best that are available at the date
of issue but are subject to change without notice.
Transas MIP Ltd. pursues the policy of continuous development. This may lead to the product described
in this manual being different from the product delivered after its publication.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
This document contains:
Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 9
Warnings and Cautions ...................................................................................... 11
Electomagnetic Radiation Risk ................................................................. 12
Electrical Shock and Dangerous Voltage ................................................... 12
Safety Switch ........................................................................................... 12
Ground Protection to the Ship Ground .................................................... 12
Compass Safety Distance ........................................................................ 13
Equipment Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) .................................... 13
Warranty Conditions ........................................................................................... 14
How to Use This Manual .................................................................................... 15
List of Documents............................................................................................... 15
Abbreviations in Use .......................................................................................... 16
Printing House Conventions ............................................................................... 18
Chapter 1. Hardware Installation ............................................................................ 19
MFD Hardware and Software Requirements ..................................................... 21
Hardware Requirements .......................................................................... 21
Operational System Requirements .......................................................... 22
MFD Physical Layout ......................................................................................... 22
Console Installation ............................................................................................ 23
Pre-Installation Requirements.................................................................. 23
Console Mounting .................................................................................... 24
Console Ventilation .................................................................................. 28
Installation of Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast ......................... 29
Introduction .............................................................................................. 29
Mechanical Installation ............................................................................. 29
Electrical Installation ................................................................................ 36
Performance Monitor PM 30-02 Installation ............................................ 41
Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast ......................... 45
Introduction .............................................................................................. 45
Units Configuration .................................................................................. 45
Siting ........................................................................................................ 46
Cabling ..................................................................................................... 49
Installation of S-Band Scanner Assembly ................................................ 52
Optional Mains Isolator ............................................................................ 66
Connection of MFD to NGSM Scanners S-Band Up/Down Mast ............ 67
Slave Junction Box .................................................................................. 67
Installation of Scanners NGSM 10/25 kW X-Band Up/Down Mast .................... 70
Introduction .............................................................................................. 70
Top Units Configuration ........................................................................... 71
Siting ........................................................................................................ 71
Cabling ..................................................................................................... 72
Installation of X-Band Scanner Assembly ................................................ 72
Optional Mains Isolator ............................................................................ 87
Connection of MFD to NGSM Scanners X-Band Up/Down Mast ............ 89
Winterisation Heater Kits for NGSM Scanners Turning Units ................................ 89
General Description ................................................................................. 89
Installation and Commissioning ............................................................... 91
Operation ................................................................................................. 97
Applications Guidance ............................................................................. 98
Maintenance and Spares ....................................................................... 101
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I 1

Installation of Network Radome Scanners X-Band Up Mast ........................... 102
Introduction ............................................................................................ 102
Mechanical Installation .......................................................................... 102
Radome Electrical Installation ............................................................... 104
Sensor Connections ........................................................................................ 107
Workstation Installation.................................................................................... 108
Dongle Installation ................................................................................. 108
RS6B Computer Installation .................................................................. 108
TPC24 and PanelPCi7 Computers Installation ..................................... 114
MPC-2240X PanelPC Installation ......................................................... 119
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball Installation .............. 128
ES6 Trackball Switch............................................................................. 131
Radar Integrator Board RIB6/RIB6B ..................................................... 133
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6 .............................................. 149
Weidmüller UPS Installation .................................................................. 164
Transas BAM/BNWAS Components ..................................................... 177
Data Collecting Unit DCU6 .................................................................... 191
Power Connection ................................................................................. 197
RS6B Computer’s Discrete Signal Interface ......................................... 197
WAGO I/O Modules for Conning ........................................................... 198
Network ............................................................................................................ 199
Physical Layout ..................................................................................... 199
IP Addresses ......................................................................................... 200
CCTV Throughput Limitations in MFD Network .................................... 200
RS6B Computer Video Output to VDR ............................................................ 201
New Standard VDR Output ............................................................................. 201
General .................................................................................................. 201
Network Connection of New Standard VDR to MFD ............................. 202
Workstation Settings for VDR Output Functionality .............................. 202
Transas Gateway Installation .......................................................................... 204
Introduction ............................................................................................ 204
Pre-Requirements ................................................................................. 204
Technical Description ............................................................................ 205
MFD Connection.................................................................................... 207
Using UTM-1 WEB Interface ................................................................. 208
Workstation Settings.............................................................................. 210
Network Setup ....................................................................................... 212
Reports/Status View .............................................................................. 219
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 219
VPN/Smart Center ................................................................................. 220
Test Connection .................................................................................... 222
Checklist ................................................................................................ 223
Chapter 2. System Settings .................................................................................. 225
RS6B Computer Extended Mode Settings ...................................................... 227
General .................................................................................................. 227
Extended Desktop Settings ................................................................... 227
RS6B Computer Serial Ports Configuration .................................................... 233
MFD Software Installation................................................................................ 234
2 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

Dongle-less Protection ..................................................................................... 239
General .................................................................................................. 239
Using License Activation Utility .............................................................. 240
Special Cases of License Activation ...................................................... 242
MFD Configuration ........................................................................................... 244
General .................................................................................................. 245
Sensors Settings .................................................................................... 246
MFD Settings ......................................................................................... 264
Workstation Settings .............................................................................. 297
Radar Settings ....................................................................................... 307
Security Settings for MFD ...................................................................... 312
Security Settings for NS 4100 ................................................................ 313
Navi-Conning 4000 Adjustment ....................................................................... 316
General .................................................................................................. 316
Indicator Setup Table ............................................................................. 320
CCTV Setup ........................................................................................... 322
Navi-Conning 5000 Adjustment ....................................................................... 325
General Description of Navi-Conning 5000 ........................................... 325
Navi-Conning 5000 Adjustment ............................................................. 332
Radar Adjustment............................................................................................. 391
GEM Network Scanners Adjustment ..................................................... 391
NGSM Scanners Adjustment ................................................................. 396
Distance and Bearing Offset .................................................................. 405
Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6/RIB6B ............................................... 408
Settings in Autopilot.......................................................................................... 411
General .................................................................................................. 411
Raytheon Heading Control System NP5400 ......................................... 411
Navis Heading Control System AP4000 ................................................ 413
EMRI Heading Control System SEM200 ............................................... 415
Sperry Marine Heading Control System NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK ...... 417
Yokogawa Heading Control System PT900 .......................................... 419
Alerts Handling and Recommended TCS Settings .......................................... 433
BNWAS Alerts Transferring ................................................................... 433
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400 ................................................................... 434
Autopilot Navis AP4000 ......................................................................... 435
Autopilot EMRI SEM200 ........................................................................ 435
Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK ............................... 436
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 .................................................................... 436
Procedure of TCS Control Setup Algorithms ................................................... 437
Essentials ............................................................................................... 437
Fine Adjustment ..................................................................................... 437
BAM Configuration ........................................................................................... 441
General .................................................................................................. 441
Startup of “BAM Config” ......................................................................... 446
Connections Page .................................................................................. 447
Alerts Page............................................................................................. 457
Contacts Page........................................................................................ 460
BNWAS Params Page ........................................................................... 462
Settings Page ......................................................................................... 465
BAM Viewer Servers Configuration ....................................................... 467

Autorun Configuration ...................................................................................... 470
Activation of Transas Integrator ....................................................................... 471
Commissioning Table Creation and System Configuration Back Up .............. 472
Commissioning Table Creation ............................................................. 473
MFD Configuration Back Up .................................................................. 473
MFD Registry......................................................................................... 475
Software Upgrade ............................................................................................ 477
Upgrade All Product MFD ..................................................................... 477
Upgrade of Most Recent MFD Versions................................................ 480
Upgrade Navi-Conning 4000 ................................................................. 486
Radar Diagnostics and Typical Faults ............................................................. 488
Radar Diagnostics ................................................................................. 488
Typical Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 491
Chapter 3. Technical Specification ...................................................................... 493
General ............................................................................................................ 495
Software Technical Specification ..................................................................... 495
Radar ..................................................................................................... 495
ARPA ..................................................................................................... 496
Chart Related Features ......................................................................... 496
Navigation Tools .................................................................................... 499
Sensors (Input/Output) .......................................................................... 500
GUI Capabilities ..................................................................................... 501
Hardware Technical Specification ................................................................... 502
Scanners ............................................................................................... 502
Installation Set ....................................................................................... 514
RS6B Computer .................................................................................... 514
TPC24 Computer................................................................................... 517
PPCi7 Maritime Multi Computers Series X............................................ 521
PanelPC MPC-2240X ............................................................................ 528
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6 .............................................. 531
Weidmüller UPS .................................................................................... 539
Transas BAM/BNWAS Components ..................................................... 549
ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball ............................................... 554
NSI Marine Keyboards and Trackball.................................................... 560
Raytheon Trackballs .............................................................................. 566
Hatteland Maritime Multi Displays Series X .......................................... 569
DuraMON 19”/24”/26” Marine Monitors ................................................. 574
MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X Marine Displays ...................................... 581
AHD 1119 G Display ............................................................................. 599
Data Collecting Unit DCU6 .................................................................... 614
DCU Raytheon NautoPlex 8 / NautoPlex 8plus8 .................................. 616
Network Switch 8xRJ45 EDS-G308 ...................................................... 631
Network Switch 8xRJ45 IE-SW-BL08T-8TX ......................................... 633
Network Switch EDS-G509-T ................................................................ 634
Network Switches IES-0104FT-DNV / IES-0204FT-DNV ..................... 638
Network Switch IES-1204FT-DNV ........................................................ 649
Network Switch IES-2008B-DNV .......................................................... 656
Network Switch IES-2208F-DNV........................................................... 664
Network Switch IGS-2404-E-DNV ......................................................... 672

Network Switch LGS-2624C-DNV ......................................................... 681
Network Switch LGS-2816C-RPS-DNV ................................................. 685
Transas Gateway ................................................................................... 688
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector (TFAP) .................................. 689
VL-66112 DVI-KVMA Switch ................................................................. 692
Autopilots .......................................................................................................... 696
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400 ................................................................... 696
Autopilot Navis AP4000 ......................................................................... 702
Autopilot EMRI SEM200 ........................................................................ 707
Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK ............................... 711
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 .................................................................... 723
Chapter 4. Interface Capabilities .......................................................................... 747
General ............................................................................................................. 749
Format of Data Exchange Used in Accordance with IEC61162-1 Standard ... 750
Input ....................................................................................................... 750
Format of Input Data .............................................................................. 751
Output .................................................................................................... 762
Format of Output Data ........................................................................... 762
Universal AIS Transponder Interface ............................................................... 775
Description of Universal AIS Transponder Interface.............................. 775
NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format ........................................................ 796
NMEA Format ........................................................................................ 796
ASCII Format ......................................................................................... 798
Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface ......................... 798
Annex A. Additional Settings for Navi-Conning ................................................. 801
Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules ....................................... 803
General .................................................................................................. 803
Connection of External MOB Button ...................................................... 808
Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom ......................................... 810
General .................................................................................................. 811
Creating New Sentences Structure ....................................................... 816
Defining Parameter Extraction Rules ..................................................... 821
Editing Sentence Structure .................................................................... 834
Sentences Deletion ................................................................................ 835
Check of Settings and Connection of Parameters to Navi-Conning ................ 836
Annex B. Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment ...................... 839
Workstations Settings....................................................................................... 841
Network Settings .................................................................................... 841
Onboard Firewall Settings ................................................................................ 842
Startup Procedure .................................................................................. 842
Network Settings .................................................................................... 842
Troubleshooting and Test Connection ................................................... 848
Network Settings for Yacht Viewer ................................................................... 852
TFAP Settings ........................................................................................ 852
Yacht Viewer Connection Options and Rules ........................................ 866
Annex C. Upgrade RS3/RS4 to RS6B Computers............................................... 869
RS6B/RS6 Computer with DRSE-00-0017 Extension Board........................... 871
General .................................................................................................. 871
Ports Configuration ................................................................................ 872

Annex D. Scanners Cables Handling .................................................................. 873
GEM Network Scanners Cables Installation.................................................... 875
Cables Installation ................................................................................. 875
CB25 Cable Handling for GEM 25 KW Scanner ................................... 876
NGSM Scanners Cables and Waveguide Installation ..................................... 878
Fitting RF Feeder Cable (S-band Coaxial Cable) ................................. 878
Fitting RF Elliptical Waveguide .............................................................. 883
Annex E. GEM Network X-Band Up Mast Scanners Diagrams ......................... 891
MFD WS. 4/12 kW Scanners. Block Diagram ................................................. 893
MFD WS. 4/12 kW Scanners. Connection Diagram ........................................ 895
MFD WS. 25 kW Scanner. Block Diagram ...................................................... 897
MFD WS. 25 kW Scanner. Connection Diagram ............................................ 899
MFD WS. 4/12/25 kW Scanners. Configuration Settings ................................ 901
MFD WS. 4/12/25 kW Scanners. Power Distribution. Connection Diagram ... 903
4/12 kW Scanners Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram .............................. 905
25 kW Scanner Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram ................................... 907
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Block Diagram........................ 909
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Connection Diagram .............. 911
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Configuration Settings ........... 913
Radome Scanner Interfaces. Connection Diagram ......................................... 915
Annex F. NGSM 30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast Scanners Diagrams................ 917
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Block Diagram ......................... 919
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Connection Diagram ................ 921
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Power Distribution.
Connection Diagram ........................................................................................ 923
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner.
Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Masthead Scanner ................................ 927
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Block Diagram .......................... 929
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Connection Diagram ................ 931
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Configuration Settings .............. 933
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Power Distribution.
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner.
Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Bulkhead Scanner................................. 939
Annex G. NGSM 10/25 kW X-Band Up/Down Mast Scanners Diagrams .......... 941
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Block Diagram .................. 943
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Connection Diagram ......... 945
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Configuration Settings ...... 947
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scannerd. Power Distribution.
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners.
Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Masthead Scanner ................................ 953
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Block Diagram ................... 955
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Connection Diagram .......... 957
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Configuration Settings ....... 959
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Power Distribution.
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners.

Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Bulkhead Scanner ................................. 965
Annex H. MFD Power Supplly Distribution Diagrams ........................................ 967
MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Distribution. Block Diagram No.1 ....... 969
MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Distribution. Block Diagram No.2 ....... 971
MFD. Five Workstations. 220 VAC Main and 24 VDC Emergency Power
Distribution. Block Diagram .............................................................................. 973
MFD. Five Workstations. MGE UPS Power Distribution. Block Diagram ........ 975
Annex I. NS 4000 Dual ECDIS Diagrams .............................................................. 977
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Block Diagram ............... 979
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram ........................... 981
NS 4000 ECDIS. Backup Workstation. Connection Diagram .......................... 983
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Configuration Settings ... 985
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Dual ECDIS and Back of the Bridge
Workstation. Block Diagram ............................................................................. 987
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master Workstation.
Connection Diagram......................................................................................... 989
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Backup Workstation.
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master and Backup Workstations.
Configuration Settings ...................................................................................... 993
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Back of the Bridge Workstation.
Annex J. MFD Additional Diagrams ..................................................................... 997
WAGO Modules for Conning. Functional Diagram .......................................... 999
Dual ECDIS. Weidmuller UPS/NEW Hardware. Connection Diagram .......... 1001
ES6 Keyboard with Three Trackballs. Connection Diagram .......................... 1002
Remote Keyboard. Typical Connection Diagram ........................................... 1003
Connection TFAP to ECDIS MFD WS. Block Diagram .................................. 1005
Connection Four Scanners to MFD. Block Diagram ...................................... 1007
Connection of RIB6 to Some Radar Types. Connection Diagrams ............... 1009
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400 Interfaces. Connection Diagram ....................... 1011
Autopilot NAVIS AP4000 Interfaces. Connection Diagram ............................ 1013
Autopilot EMRI SEM200. AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram ...................... 1015
Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 Interfaces.
Connection Diagram....................................................................................... 1017
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 Overall System Diagram .................................... 1019
Annex K. BAM/BNWAS Diagrams ...................................................................... 1021
BAM/BNWAS. Transas Integrated Navigation System. Block Diagram ........ 1023
BAM/BNWAS. Data Flow Diagram ................................................................ 1024
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W01. Connection Diagram ................................. 1025
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W02. Connection Diagram ................................. 1026
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W03 – W05. Connection Diagram ..................... 1027
Annex L. System Certificates ............................................................................. 1029

PREAMBLE
Copyright Transas MIP Ltd., 2016

Warnings and Cautions
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This document is intended for use by service engineers only, providing installation or
service for Transas MIP Ltd. navigation systems, and holding Transas MIP Ltd.
certificates for aforementioned works.
WARNING!
Important Note!
For correct operation, please, read this document and instruction manual supplied
by the scanner manufacturer carefully, before operating the equipment.
WARNING!
Lethal Voltage Hazard!
Inside the equipment and in the cables lethal voltage hazard is present. When
access covers are removed, lethal voltages may be exposed. Some capacitors used
in the equipment, take several minutes to discharge their stored voltages after
the switching OFF, this is a lethal voltage hazard. Always set the supply switch-fuse
to OFF and remove the fuses, before removing the access covers of the equipment.
Cables must be connected to the power supplies only provided with grounding.
Cables must not have damaged insulation and must exclude contact with parts
conducting current.
WARNING!
Health Hazard!
When cleaning the inside of the equipment, take care not to inhale dust. The dust is
a temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies.
Units radiate heat and must be installed in such way that free air circulation is ensured.
It is necessary to strictly follow the requirements set forth in the operation manuals
for computers and system’s peripheral devices.
CAUTION!
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSD’s)!
The equipment may contain ESSD’s. Take care not to damage these devices
by discharge of electrostatic voltages.
Preamble 11
Electomagnetic Radiation Risk

The radar antenna emits electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency band that can
be harmful, especially for eyes. NEVER look directly the antenna at a low distance
from it while the radar is transmitting. The distances where the radio frequency energy
2 2
levels are 100 W/m and 10 W/m are respectively shown in the following table:
Table 1. Radio-frequency radiation levels for network scanners
Model Distance to 100 W/m2 (m) Distance to 50 W/m2 (m)
Radome 2.2 kW N/A 1
Radome 4 kW N/A 2
Open Array 4 ft 0.5 3
Open Array 6 ft 0.5 3
Open Array 7.5 ft 1 9.5
Table 2. Radio-frequency radiation levels for NGSM scanners

Antenna length Distance to 10 mW/cm2 (m) Distance to 1 mW/cm2 (m)
1.2 m X-band 1.7 17
1.8 m X-band 1.05 10.5
2.4 m X-band 0.75 7.5
3.7 m S-band 0.55 5.5
Electrical Shock and Dangerous Voltage

During installation, the operator must work all the time with power supply
disconnected from the equipment. The operator must always wear individual safety
devices and protections against the risk of electrical shocks, e.g. dielectric insulating
gloves.
Safety Switch
The radar unit is provided with a safety switch, which disable the antenna movement
during maintenance operations and avoids high voltage damage. Always turn the
safety switch off before performing any maintenance or installation procedure.
Ignoring safety switch operation may produce hazard of electrocution as well as
other severe injuries.
Ground Protection to the Ship Ground

The equipment must be connected to ground to avoid electromagnetic disturbances
and electrical shocks.

Compass Safety Distance

Every unit should be located outside the minimum magnetic compass safe distance.
The safety distance to be observed between radar display and magnetic compasses
is of at least 1.5 meters. Compass safety distance for the PC and monitors are
provided in the table below:
Table 3. Compass safety distance for the PC and monitors
Type of equipment Compass safety distance (m)
To Standard Compass Steering Compass
RS6B Computer 0.85 0.85
TPC24 Computer 1.15 0.70
15” PPCi7 Computer (HD 15T21) 0.55 0.40
19’’ TFT Display HD 19T21 TRD(S) 1.25 0.75
24’’ TFT Display HD 24T21 TRD(S) 0.70 0.45
26” TFT Display HD 26T21 TRD(S) 1.3 0.70
19” DuraMON 19 GLASS 1.65 1.05
AHD 1119 G 1.70 1.00
Equipment Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF)

MTBF are provided in the tables below:
Table 4. Workstation parts required for periodic replacement
Type of eguipment Interval Part type Part number
RS6B computer 62837 hrs MC-4506 1813500
(at 25ºC) (TMI-RS6B) V1.x
UPS Battery 5 years QUINT-BAT/ 18162302
24DC/3.4AH
Preamble 13
Warranty Conditions
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
The guarantee will not apply if the system has been used improperly, i.e. the system
is found to have been operated in a manner other than that set out in the user
manuals, or if the system has been connected or adjusted in ways other than
described and recommended in technical and/or installation manuals.
Users shall pay special attention to the following, to avoid damaging the system
and voiding the guarantee. Users shall not:
• Expose the system to any liquids, including but not limited to tea, coffee, juices,
soft drinks or chemical cleaners.
• Expose the system to fire, or to temperatures that exceed the normal operating
conditions specified for the system.
• Expose the system to improper or insufficient ventilation by obstructing
ventilation holes, fans, etc., or by mounting the equipment in such a way that
proper ventilation cannot be achieved.
• Expose the system to incorrect line voltages, voltage spikes, or use incorrect fuses.
• Replace whole or part of the system or components of the system with parts
not specified, approved or certified by Transas or its sub manufacturers, without
prior Transas written approval.
• Expose the system to violent movements, excessive vibration or any situation
where physical damage results.
• Connect any type of storage device or data media that contains a virus or other
malware that can damage the system. It is the customer’s obligation to check
prior to connection that any such device or media does not contain any virus
or malware.
• Install any applications or software on the system besides what has been
supplied by Transas, without prior written approval from Transas.

How to Use This Manual
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual is intended for use by service engineers. It should be used in
conjunction with other related documents (for the full list). The structure of this
manual and layout of the pages can help you to find the information that need.
Chapter 1 Hardware Installation.

Chapter 2 System Settings.
Chapter 3 Technical Specification.
Chapter 4 Interface Capabilities.
Annex A Additional Settings for Navi-Conning.
Annex B Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment.
Annex C Upgrade RS3/RS4 to RS6/RS6B Computers.
Annex D Scanners Cables Handling.

Annex E GEM Network X-Band Up Mast Scanners Diagrams.
Annex F NGSM 30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast Scanners Diagrams.
Annex G NGSM 10/25 kW X-Band Up/Down Mast Scanners Diagrams.
Annex H MFD Power Supply Distribution Diagrams.
Annex I NS 4000 Dual ECDIS Diagrams.
Annex J MFD Additional Diagrams.
Annex K BAM/BNWAS Diagrams
Annex L System Certificates.
LIST OF DOCUMENTS
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). ECDIS User Manual.
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). RADAR User Manual.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Functional Description.
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Additional Functions.
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). ECDIS Quick Reference.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). RADAR Quick Reference.
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I.
Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Utilities.
Navi-Sailor 4100 ECDIS (v.2.00.348). Special Functions.
Navi-Planner 4000 (v.3.00.346) User Manual.
Preamble 15
Abbreviations in Use
The document “Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II”

describes the hardware and software parts listed in the tables below.
Table 5. HW described in “Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II”
23”/27” Deck mount and 19”/23” Desk mount consoles
GEM Network 30 kW S-Band Up Mast Scanner.
Consilium SRT Scanners 12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast.
Consilium SRT Scanner 25 kW X-Band Down Mast.
Consilium SRT Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up Mast.
Consilium SRT Scanner 30 kW S-Band Down Mast.
Navico BR24 Broadband X-Band Up Mast Scanner.
RS6 and I330 (TFAP) Computers
Monitors Series 1: JH19T14; JH23T14; JH26T11 and JH27T11
WAGO I/O Modules (750-314, 750-403, 750-454, 750-476, 750-468, 750-513, 750-600)
Video Splitters 3x1/4x1/5x1 and VGA Splitter LOOP BACK
MOXA VPort 351/354/364A Video Servers
UPC 3002/3005/5000P Serial Line Splitters and NMEA Buffer NM-251A
S2N Gyro Converter
Baboon 4RS 200PNM7 NMEA RS422 and Rabbit6 RS232C Interfaces
MOXA NPort 5430I Server
Industrial Gigabit Ethernet to Fiber Converter IMC-101G
FLIR M-618CS Camera
Autopilots: Yokogawa PT5000A; Raytheon NP 2025 and NAVIS AP3000
Table 6. SW described in “Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II”

RS6 Computer Extended Mode Settings
Installation of National Fonts
Configuration of Synergy Utility
SPOS Weather Module Adjustment
FLIR System Setup
Wave System Setup
Monitoring and Advisor Setup
Autopilots Alerts Lists
ABBREVIATIONS IN USE
• AIS – Automated Identification System;
• ARPA – Automatic Radar Plotting Aids;
• BNWAS – Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System ;
• BAM – Bridge Alert Management;
• BRG – Bearing;
• CCRS – Consistent Common Reference System;
• CCTV – Сlosed Circuit Television;
• COG – Course Over Ground;
• CPA – Closest Point of Approach;
• CTW – Course Over the Water;
• DCU – Data Collecting Unit’
• DDU – Data Distribution Unit;
• DGPS – Differential Global Positioning System;

Abbreviations in Use
• DIS – Draught Information System;

• DR – Dead Reckoning;
• EBL – Electronic Bearing Line;
• ECDIS – Electronic Chart Display Information System;
• ENC – Electronic Navigational Chart;
• FMO – Fleet Management Online
• GPS – Global Positioning System;
• GND – Ground;
• HDG – Heading;
• HL – Head Line;
• HO – Hydrographic Office;
• IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission;
• IHO – International Hydrographic Organization;
• IMO – International Maritime Organization;
• LP – Long Pulse;
• m – metre;
• min – minute;
• MMSI – Maritime Mobile Service Identities;
• MFD – Multi-Functional Display;
• MP – Medium Pulse;
• MSC – Maritime Safety Committee (IMO);
• NAVTEX – Navigational Telex;
• NC – Navi-Conning;
• NM – nautical mile;
• NR – Navi-Radar;
• NS – Navi-Sailor;
• OS – Operating System;
• PM – Performance Monitor;
• PPI – Plan Position Indicator;
• RAM – Random Access Memory;
• RIB – Radar Integrated Board;
• RM – Relative Motion;
• RNG – Range;
• ROT – Rate Of Turn;
• sec – second;
• SENC – System Electronic Navigational Chart;
• SOG – Speed Over Ground;
• SP – Short Pulse;
Preamble 17
Printing House Conventions
• STW – Speed Through Water;

• TE – Test Environment;
• TGT – Target;
• TM – True Motion;
• UTC – Universal Time Coordinated;
• VDR – Voyage Data Recorder;
• VRM – Variable Range Marker;
• WPT – Waypoint;
• WS – Workstation;
• XTD – Cross Track Distance.
PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

Sample of notation Usage comments
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY To highlight names of documents
(V.3.00.340). RADAR USER

MANUAL
RS6B Computer To highlight sections of a document
ECDIS To highlight, in a printed document, user interface

elements and the MFD objects
Setup.exe To highlight messages, commands, files, and other
Windows OS information
<Enter> To highlight names of keyboard keys
“Tasks” To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.
START\CONTROL PANEL\REGIONAL AND To highlight menu items

LANGUAGE OPTIONS
C: To highlight a path to the menu, file, etc.

CHAPTER 1
Hardware Installation

MFD Hardware and Software Requirements
MFD HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
ATTENTION!
The use of these computers for other purposes is discouraged. Other programs
loaded in RAM may adversely affect the video plotter’s operation.
ATTENTION!
To use the ICE charts, ECDIS with RADAR application, Far Sounder option, it is
recommended the use of RS6 computer with 4 GB RAM.
Hardware Requirements
• RS6B Computer (see paragraph RS6B Computer of Chapter 3):
– CPU: Intel® Core™ i5 520E, 2.4GHz, 3MB cache;
– Chipset: Intel® QM57;
– Video: Intel® HD Graphics;
– RAM: 2 GB DDR3 SDRAM;
– Storage: 1 x 60GB SSD/HDD.
• TPC24 Computer (see paragraph TPC24 Computer of Chapter 3) for Planing
Station and for Back of the Bridge Station (BOB) in the configuration with Dual
ECDIS:
– CPU: Intel® Celeron® P4505, 1.86 GHz, 2MB cache, FSB 800MHz;
– System Chipset: Intel® BD82QM57;
– Video Chipset: Intel® Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0;
– System Memory: 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz SO-DIMM;
– Storage: 1 x 250GB HDD.
• Hatteland 15”/19”/24”W/26”W PanelPCi7 (PPCi7) Computers (see paragraph
PPCi7 Computers of Chapter 3) for TA Radar and Workboat Radar/ECS:
– CPU: Intel® Core™ i7-620LE, 2.0GHz, 4MB cache, FSB 1066MHz;

– System Chipset: Intel® BD82QM57;
– Video Chipset: Intel® Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0;
– System Memory: 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz, 200-pin;
– Storage: 1 x 250GB HDD.
• MOXA PanelPC 24” MPC-2240X (see paragraph PanelPC MPC-2240X of
Chapter 3):
– CPU: lntel Celeron® Processor 1047UE (2M Cache, 1.40GHz) or lntel Core™
i3 processor 3217UE (3M Cache, 1.60GHz), TDP 17 watts or lntel Core™ i7
processor 3517UE (4M Cache, 2.80GHz), TDP 17 watts;
– System Chipset: Intel HM65;
– Graphics Controller: Intel HM65 Express chipset built-in;
Chapter 1. Hardware Installation 21

MFD Physical Layout
– System Memory: 8 GB capacity, 4 GB pre-installed: 1 slot of 4 GB DDR3-

1600 204 pin SO-DIMM SDRAM;
– Storage: 2 SATA III interfaces: 6 Gbps, 2.5” removable storage trays.
• Hatteland 19”/24”W/26”W Maritime Multi Displays Series X (see paragraph
Maritime Multi Displays Series X of Chapter 3) and 19”/23”/26”W Maritime
Multi Displays Series 1 (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II, paragraph Maritime Multi
Displays Series 1 of Chapter 3).
• ISIC DuraMON 19”/24”WS/26”WS Marine Displays (see paragraph

DuraMON 19”/24”/26” Marine Monitors of Chapter 3).
• MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X Marine Displays (see paragraph

MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X Marine Displays of Chapter 3).
• AHD 1119 G Display (see paragraph AHD 1119 G Display of Chapter 3).
• ES6 Keyboard (see paragraph ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball of
Chapter 3).
• NSI Marine Keyboards and Trackball (see paragraph NSI Marine Keyboards
and Trackball of Chapter 3).
• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit: UPS6 (see paragraph Uninterruptible Power

Supply Unit UPS6 of Chapter 3).
• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit: Weidmüller UPS (see paragraph Weidmüller

UPS of Chapter 3).
Operational System Requirements

Operational System – Windows XP Pro Service Pack 2 or 3 + DirectX version at
least 9.0, or Windows 7 Pro SP1, English version.
MFD PHYSICAL LAYOUT

MFD is a combined hard- and software system consisting of up to 5 workstations,
sensors interfaces (serial connection or via NMEA distributors), interfaces with radar
scanners, and network.
The following elements are included in the MFD:
• Workstation 1;
• Workstation 2;
• Workstation 3;
• Workstation 4;
• Workstation 5;
• Sensors interface;
• Double network.
MFD hardware installation procedure includes modules installation and connection
them to the system.

Console Installation
MFD display must be installed by taking into consideration the following:
• Install the display unit so that the user can easily conduct observations.
• To reduce effect on the magnetic compass, install the display unit more than one
meter away from the compass.
• Take precautions to prevent water from splashing through the window or door
of the bridge onto the display unit.
• Install the display unit by considering convenience of maintenance.
• Install the LCD monitor so that when the user is looking ahead, the lookout view is
not obscured.
• Install the unit away from direct sunlight and heat source.
In MFD four screen colour palettes are used to suit the outside illumination.
The brilliance and contrast controls serve for setting the most suitable radar image
in order to reduce the operator fatigue.
The nominal viewing distance for the display equipment is 1 metre.
Fig. 1. Operator normal viewing distance
CONSOLE INSTALLATION
Pre-Installation Requirements
When installing the console, it is necessary to take the following into account:
• The signal and power supply cables are fed to the console from the bottom;
• The distance between the console and the compass should be at least 1.4 m
(compass safe distance);
• The distance between the console and the heaters should be at least 1 m;
• The console should be installed in a place with sufficient cooling and ventilation.
It is also necessary to take into account the operating modes of the equipment installed
in the console.
Table 7. Operating modes of the equipment installed in the console
Operating temperature range At relative humidity 0% -15ºC to +55ºC
At relative humidity 95% +40ºC
Vibration levels 1 to 12.5 Hz With excursion ±1.6 mm
12.5 to 25 Hz With excursion ±0.8 mm
25 to 50 Hz With excursion ±0.1 mm
To a constant maximum acceleration of 10 m/s

Before installing the console, check that there is sufficient space before its front
panel for the normal operator work.
Console Mounting
Navigation Deck Console 6
Part No.: 18141306
Navigation Deck Console 6 consists of the following elements:
• Monitor bracket 6 – Part No.: 18141303;

• Keyboard housing 6 – Part No.: 18141304;
• Base Console 6 – Part No.: 18141305 (additionally includes 2 x Fans (18011802)
and Temperature sensor (18011803));
• Transas thermos mug – 18018000.
Navigation Deck Console 6 includes:
• 3 pcs of mounting plates with pre-drilled threads to fit Transas standard HW;
• Pre-mounted DIN-rails (for UPS, Switches, etc.);
• Fixing bolts/screws;
• 2 x Cooling fans and Temperature sensor.
Feed all the necessary cables through the console bottom part and install the
console in accordance with the dimensional drawings below.
After the installation, check that the console has reliable earthing.
Fig. 2. Navigation Deck console 6 dimensions

Fig. 3. Reference dimensional drawing
Fig. 4. Recommended placement of MFD HW units inside Deck console 6

Fig. 5. Placement of MFD HW units
• 1 – Display;
• 2 – ES6 keyboard and Trackball;
• 3 – DCU6;
• 4 – DIN Rail;
• 5 – NMEA Splitter;
• 6 – Power Supply Unit (UPS6);
• 7 – Fuses;
• 8 – RS6B Computer;
• 9 – Ethernet Switch;
• 10 – RIB6 or RIB6B;
• 11 – MOXA Video Server;
• 12 – WAGO.
Monitor Bracket 6 and Keyboard Housing 6

Monitor Bracket 6 can be used as standard bracket for both Series1 and SeriesX
displays, and the combination of the Monitor bracket 6 (18141303) and Keyboard
housing 6 (18141304) is suitable for the Desk mount installations with the 19”, 23”,
26” and 19X”, 24WX”, 26WX” displays.
Note: To fit the new Series X displays, just remove the “side wings” of Monitor
bracket. Monitor bracket has Vesa 75x75, 100x100, 200x100, 280x150 holes
available.

Fig. 6. Keyboard housing 6 dimensions
Fig. 7. Monitor bracket 6 dimensions

Console Ventilation
For ventilation in deck mount consoles, 2 x fans and temperature sensor are used:
• Fan for Consoles, 24V DC, 120x120mm – Part No.: 18011802;

• Temperature Sensor – Part No.: 18011803.
Connect directly to the WAGO terminal:
Fig. 8. Fan connection
For cutout and mechanical mounting, see technical drawing below:
Fig. 9. Fan dimensional drawing

Installation of Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW
X-Band Up Mast
INSTALLATION OF NETWORK SCANNERS 4/12/25 KW

X-BAND UP MAST
Introduction
This section describes all procedures required for correct installation of network
scanners units SU70-14E (12kW) and SU70-25E (25kW) type approved (TA) and
SU78-14E (4 kW) non-TA. These units can be connected to MFD system for radar
presentation and management through ethernet connection. The video signal
acquisition is realized inside the scanner unit and it is available via ethernet on UDP
protocol.
The standard configuration supplied is the following:
• Scanner unit: SU70-14E (12 kW), or SU70-25E (25 kW), or SU78-14E (4 kW);
• Power supply and interconnection unit ASU4100 (only for SU70-25E);
• Antenna unit: AU11-06N - 6 feet, or AU11-07N - 7.5 feet (for 25 kW RTX), or
AU11-04N - 4 feet (for 4 kW RTX);
• Performance Monitor: PM 30-02 (compulsory for SOLAS ship);
• Power and shielded ethernet cables;
• Interface ethernet cable (ASU41000, J3) for SU70-25E scanner (p/n EB540275).
The diagrams of connection between the scanner and MFD console are provided in
Annex E. For scanner cables handling, see Annex D.
Technical specification of the 4/12/25 kW scanners is presented in Chapter 3 of this

document.
For more detailed description of the scanner installation procedure, see scanner’s
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL document. This document is supplied as
part of the equipment delivery set.
Mechanical Installation
The mechanical installation of SU70-14E, SU70-25E and SU78-14E scanner units
consists of fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area should not be subject to high temperatures or excessive vibrations.
Fixing must be carried out to allow easy access to the unit for assuring the easiest
managment of the maintenance operations.
Dimensions and weight are specified in the figures below.

X-Band Up Mast
Fig. 10. Scanner units outline
Fig. 11. Rotating unit dimensions
Fig. 12. 4 feet antenna AU11-04N/S dimensions

X-Band Up Mast
Fig. 13. 6 feet antenna AU11-06N/S dimensions
Fig. 14. 7.5 feet antenna AU11-07N/S dimensions
Scanner Unit Installation

Avoid hoisting the antenna blocks by taking them from the array.
Fig. 15. Scanner unit hoisting
The scanner units equipped with 6 ft, or 7.5 ft, or 4ft array are endowed with a local
safety switch. Such switch inhibits the rotation and the transmission of the scanner
unit and is used when maintenance interventions are carried out on the antenna or
near it. This switch is used to enable (ON) / disable (OFF) the rotation antenna (see
the figure below).
When the safety switch is enabled, no operation performed from the master display
can enable the rotation and/or the radar transmission.

X-Band Up Mast
Note: During normal operating conditions as well as during maintenance, the engine
can be quickly disconnected from its power line by setting “OFF” the safety
switch.
Fig. 16. Safety switch
If not already available, realize a suitable platform for housing the transceiver with 4
or 6 or 7.5 ft array. Such platform must allow to easily lay out the interconnection
cable and to comfortably perform the possible maintenance activities.
Besides, the platform must allow the array free rotation on the 360°. Therefore,
make sure that no obstacles exist in the immediate closeness. For this purpose,
refer to the overall dimensions reported in the installation drawings (see the figure
above). Drill the platform by using the drilling template supplied as an outfit of the
scanner unit.
Make sure that the holes machined on the platform are as parallel as possible with
respect to the ship head-stern line.
Besides, make sure that the scanner unit orientation, when the mechanical
installation is completed, corresponds to that reported in the figure below:
Fig. 17. Scanner unit orientation
Carefully open the package and position the scanner unit on the platform. Unscrew
the four screws fastening the scanner unit upper part and lift it.
Fig. 18. Scanner unit installation

X-Band Up Mast
Align the holes of the scanner unit lower part with the holes machined on the
platform. Secure the scanner unit to the platform by means of the 4 bolts and nuts
supplied in the delivery, by using a 17 mm wrench and by applying a force
comprehended between 20 Nm and 30 Nm. The supplied M10x60 mm bolts are fit
for realizing a mounting on a platform having a maximum thickness of 10 mm.
For the assembly, carefully observe the following instructions.
Fig. 19. Scanner unit installation scheme
Lay out the interconnection cable between the display and the antenna, by taking
into consideration that on the scanner unit side (J7, J8A), the cable is already
connected inside the same one.
Antenna Mechanical Installation

Antenna unit should be installed:
• As high as possible;
• As far as possible from the obstacles which could cause shadow sectors on
the radar picture;
• The minimum distance between the Mast and X-band array is (6 feet)/2+200 mm.
Fig. 20. Distance between the mast and scanner unit

X-Band Up Mast
Remove the protection placed on the input in wave guide of the rotary joint.
Fig. 21. Protective cover removal
Make sure that the o-ring at the array base is correctly positioned, and grease, by
using silicon grease, the o-ring and the array base, as per the figure below.
Fig. 22. Greasing
Position the 6 or 7.5 ft array on the scanner unit, by letting the part in wave guide of
the same scanner unit coincide with the part in wave guide of the array, and tighten
the four M8x35mm fastening screws supplied as an outfit, by using a 13 mm wrench
and by applying a force up to 15 Nm.
Fig. 23. Antenna unit installation
Scanner Unit Grounding

In order to avoid interferences and electric shocks, always connect the scanner unit
to the ship grounding plant.
Connect the ground point of the scanner unit to the ship grounding plant, by using
the 4 mm yellow-green cable ready for use and supplied together with the kit.
Fig. 24. Grounding

X-Band Up Mast
If no ground point is available near the scanner unit, it will be necessary to realize it.
Unavoidable condition is that the platform is metal-realized and that there is an
electric continuity with the metal structure of the remaining hull.
The first method is to drill the platform and to get through it by means of a M10 x 30
mm bolt, on which an end of the ground cable will be connected.
Protect the ground terminal with sealing silicon.
Fig. 25. First method of grounding
The second method is to weld on the platform, on the head side, a M10 x 30 mm
bolt, to which an end of the ground cable will be connected. Protect the ground
terminal with sealing silicon.
Fig. 26. Second method of grounding

X-Band Up Mast
The mechanical installation of Power supply and Interconnection unit ASU41000 only
for SU70-25E scanner consists in fitting and fixing the unit. Dimensions are specified in
the figure below.
Fig. 27. ASU41000 unit dimensions
Electrical Installation
Electrical Installation of Scanner Unit
For scanner cables setting-up procedure, see Annex D.
The SU70-14E, SU70-25E and SU78-14E transceivers require that the plant is
power supplied by 24VDC voltage.
The electric installation of the scanner units only requires that the supplied
interconnection cable is correctly connected. Carefully observe the following
instructions, in order to realize the required connections.
1. Once the scanner unit is mechanically secured to the platform, unscrew the
screws fastening the upper cover of the same one by using a 13 mm wrench,
and open it.

X-Band Up Mast
2. Unscrew the scanner unit stuffing tube by using a 30 mm wrench and remove
the protecting plug inside it.
3. Let the interconnection cable pass through the stuffing tube of the scanner unit.
Secure the cable gauze to the antenna block chassis. Lock the cable inside the
scanner unit, by using the purposed cable-fasteners.
4. Connect the interconnection cable wires to the J8A terminal board, as reported
in the Table 28 and in the figure below. In order to facilitate the connecting
operations, J8A can be removed from its seat and then repositioned; the
terminal board is realized in such a way, not to allow any insertion errors.

X-Band Up Mast
5. Connect the J7 connector to the J7 connector of the card ST850. The figure
below shows the connection for SU70-14E and SU78-14E scanners.
For SU70-25E scanner connection, see below tables 9 and 10 in item
Connections of Scanners Units.
6. Reposition J8A (J8 for SU70-25E scanner) into its original seat. Lightly tighten
the stuffing tube of the scanner unit, in order to assure the seal, by applying a
force not exceeding 15 Nm. Reposition the upper cover of the scanner unit and
screw down again the clamping screws, by applying a force not exceeding 10
Nm.

X-Band Up Mast
Connections of Scanners Units

See drawings presented in Annex E. Scanner cables setting-up procedure is
described in Annex D.
Table 8. J7 connector of the scanner units SU70-14E and SU78-14E

SU70-14E Function Conductor – conductor Destination
SU78-14E section (sq. mm)
J7 RJ45
1 TXD+ WHITE/GREEN – 0.22 To RJ45
2 TXD- GREEN – 0.22 To RJ45
3 RXD+ WHITE/ORANGE – 0.22 To RJ45
6 RXD- ORANGE – 0.22 To RJ45
Table 9. J8A terminal board of the scanner units SU70-14E (12 kW) and SU78-14E (4 kW)
SU70-14E Function Conductor – conductor Destination
SU78-14E section (sq. mm)
J8A Terminal board
1 P_MOT BLACK 3 – AWG20 To power supply # 1*
3 N_MOT BLACK 5 – AWG20 To power supply # 1*
15 +24 V BLACK 1 – AWG20 To power supply # 2*
17 +24 V BLACK 2 – AWG20 To power supply # 2*
19 GND BLACK 6 – AWG20 To power supply # 2*
21 GND BLACK 4 – AWG20 To power supply # 2*
23 ENABLE BLUE – AWG22 To safety switch
25 ENAB_RET WHITE – AWG22 To safety switch
Note: * - The two feedings needed, can come from the same power supply.
Table 10. J7 connector of the scanner unit SU70-25E (25 kW)

SU70-25E Function Conductor – conductor ASU41000 J2
J7 NH4 section (sq. mm) HRS 24p.f.p.
1 TXD+ WHITE/GREEN – 0.22 16
2 TXD- GREEN – 0.22 21
4 RXD+ WHITE/ORANGE – 0.22 17
3 RXD- ORANGE – 0.22 22
Table 11. J8 terminal board of the scanner unit SU70-25E

SU70-25E Function Conductor – conductor ASU41000 J2
J8 Terminal board section (sq. mm) HRS 24p.f.p.
1 P_MOT 3 – 1.25 1 and 2
3 N_MOT 5 – 1.25 3 and 4
5 GND 4 – 1.25 5
7 +24 V 1 – 1.25 7
9 +12 V 2 – 1.25 8
11 -12 V 7 – 1.25 9
13 GND 6 – 1.25 6
Table 12. J1 connector of ASU41000

ASU41000 J1 Function Conductor (sq. mm)
NUVAL 3 p.m.p.
1 +24 V 2.5 mm
2 CHASSIS -
3 GND 2.5 mm

X-Band Up Mast
Table 13. J3 connector of ASU41000

ASU41000 J3 Function Conductor
CANNON 25 p. f. p.
24 Led K CB04-C1
11 Led A CB04-C1
25 On- CB04-C2
12 On+ CB04-C2
20 GND CB04-C3
21 GND CB04-C3
3 GND CB04-C4
4 BD3+ CAT5
17 BD3- CAT5
5 BD4+ CAT5
18 BD4- CAT5
2 RXD+ CAT5
15 RXD- CAT5
1 TXD+ CAT5
14 TXD- CAT5
Fig. 28. ASU41000 (J3) adapter cable
Signal Description
A list of all the scanner units interface signals follows in the tables below.
Table 14. Interface signals for SU70-14E and SU78-14E scanners

Name Description Value/features
P_MOT Positive motor power supply +24 VDC +/- 20 %
I = 0.3 A (typical), 10 A (peak)
N_MOT Negative motor power supply -24 VDC +/- 20 %
GND Ground
GND Ground
+24 V +24 VDC voltage 24 VDC +/- 10 %
I = 1 A (typical), 1.5 A (peak)
TXD+, TXD-, RXD+, RXD- Ethernet 100BASE-T interface
ENABLE, ENABLE_RET Enable / disable switch Contact closure

X-Band Up Mast
Table 15. Interface signals for SU70-25E scanner

Name Description Value/features
P_MOT Positive motor power supply +24 VDC +/- 20 %
N_MOT Negative motor power supply -24 VDC +/- 20 %
GND Ground
GND Ground
+24 V +24 VDC voltage 24 VDC +/- 10 %
I = 1 A (typical), 1.5 A (peak)
+12 V +12 VDC voltage +12 VDC +/- 10 %
I = 0.5 A (typical), 0.7 A (peak)
-12 V -12 VDC voltage +12 VDC +/- 10 %
TXD+, TXD-, RXD+, RXD- Ethernet 100BASE-T interface
The frequencies for TRG trigger signal are show in the tables below.
Table 16. Suitable frequencies for TRG trigger signal for SU70-14E and SU78-14E scanners
Pulse Width SHORT MEDIUM LONG EXTRALONG
(for SU78-14E) (50 ns) (200 ns) (400 ns) (800 ns)
(for SU70-14E) (80 ns) (200 ns) (400 ns) (800 ns)
PRF FAST MEDIUM SLOW VERY SLOW
(3200 Hz) (1600 Hz) (800 Hz) (500 Hz)
Table 17. Suitable frequencies for TRG trigger signal for SU70-25E scanners
(80 ns) (200 ns) (400 ns) (800 ns)
PRF FAST MEDIUM SLOW VERY SLOW
(2000 Hz) (1000 Hz) (750 Hz) (500 Hz)
Antenna Speed Control

For open array, speed control is available with S10 jumper on processor board
(1-2 normal, 2-3 high). High-speed engine is needed for 36RPM in open array.
Performance Monitor PM 30-02 Installation

The standard configuration of PM 30-02 supplied is the following:
• Sensor unit: SPM-010;

• Power supply unit: APM-030;
• Interconnection cable (between SPM-010 and APM-030): EH087818.
The mechanical installation consists of fitting and fixing the unit.
The installation area should not be subjected to high temperatures or excessive

vibrations.
Fixing should be carried out to allow easy access to the unit for assuring the easiest
performance of maintenance operations.

X-Band Up Mast
For the mechanical installation, place the SPM-010 unit opposite the radar antenna
(see the picture below) and APM-030 unit near to MFD consol.
Fig. 29. Performance monitor installation requirements
Dimensions and weights of performance monitor units are specified in the following
pictures below.
• APM-030:
Fig. 30. APM-030 unit dimensions

X-Band Up Mast
• SPM-010:
Fig. 31. SPM-010 unit dimensions
It is recommended that SPM-010 unit should not be fixed finally until after the installation
procedure is completed, as, to reduce the effect of probable environment-caused
reflections on the radar antenna, it could be necessary to change the position of this unit.
Electrical Installation
For electrical installation of Performance Monitor units see the following tables and
“4/12/25 kW Scanners Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram” presented in Annex E.
Table 18. Connection of APM-030 unit J1 for power supply

APM-030 J1 Function Conductor
NUVAL 3p.p.p.
1 24 VDC AWG18
2 24 VDC AWG18
3 GROUND AWG18
Table 19. Connection of APM-030 unit J2 connector for remote switching

APM-030 J2 Function Conductor
030J2HRS 3p.p.s.
A NO AWG20
B COM AWG20
Table 20. Connection between APM-030 unit J3 connector and SPM-010 (through cable gland)
APM-030 J3 Function Conductor SPM-010 CABLE
NUVAL 3p.p.p. GLAND (NH6 of PM510)
1 V12P AWG20 1
2 GND AWG20 2
3 V12N AWG20 3
4 VEE AWG20 4
5 TX_LEVEL AWG20 5
6 RX_LEVEL AWG20 6

X-Band Up Mast
Performance Monitor Mode Setup

Perform the following procedure:
• Connect the sensor cable to J3 connector of APM-030 unit;

• Connect the contact switch cable to J2 connector;
• Supply 24V DC to J1 connector.
The contact switch is used for the remote switching on/off of the equipment.
For this reason the switch on APM-030 should be set to OFF.
Switch on the radar and performance monitor and wait for at least 30 minutes
to allow both systems to get temperature stabilised.
Switch the radar transmission to 24 NM range and check that it is at the maximum tune.
Due to the reflections from the obstacles nearest to the radar antenna,
the presentation of 4 markers may appear outlined; in order to improve the image
of the markers, rotate slightly the SPM-010 unit around the scanner unit axis.
VR2 trimmer allows fine tuning of the performance monitor thus optimising
the image of markers on the display.
The markers intensity can be varied by using VR2 trimmer; to do this, the radar receiver
gain should best be adjusted after the warm-up, to obtain a floor noise just visible.
Now keep rotating VR2 trimmer clockwise until the marker farthest from the centre
is barely distinguishable from the floor noise.
VR1 enables adjustment of the markers distance from the display centre;
as it is rotated clockwise, the markers come nearer to the centre at a step of 2 NM.
The distance from the display centre to the innermost marker should be adjusted
to 14 NM during the normal transmitter operation; the radar VRM should be moved
to 14 NM for reference.
Now rotate VR1 trimmer counter clockwise until the stop, the 4 markers will appear
close the centre with the angular width reduced. Slowly rotate VR1 clockwise until
the innermost marker shifts from 12 NM to 14 NM. If the marker distance from the
display centre is always 14 NM and fails to decrease by with the use of VR1 trimmer
(the SPM-010 unit picks up a signal which is too strong), it is necessary try to lower
the position of SPM-010 relative to the radar antenna, or to reduce the relative
distance, or to vary the SPM-010 inclination.
And the other way round, if you fail to put the markers to a distance of 14 NM
(SPM-010 unit picks up a signal which too weak), try to vary the distance of
SPM-010 unit from the radar antenna.
Now the installation is completed; close APM-030 unit with special clamping screws.

Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW S-Band
Up/Down Mast
INSTALLATION OF SCANNERS NGSM 30 KW S-BAND

UP/DOWN MAST
Introduction
This section describes all the procedures required for the correct installation
and performance check of the scanner unit. The diagrams of connection between
the scanner and MFD console are provided in Annex F.
The full technical specification of the scanner units is given in Chapter 3.
S-band scanner 30 kW manufactured with up and down mast transceiver location

and 12 feet long antenna is used for work with the MFD application. The scanner’s
characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 21. S-band Turning unit specification
Dimensions Weight Power Swing Operating Relative
Width/Depth/Height circle temperature humidity
3700 675x800 mm – 163.5 kg - without 92-276 V / 3700 -25 C… Up to
with 12 ft antenna integral 47-64 HZ mm +55 C 95% at
without integral transceiver. +40 C
transceiver.
3700 718x800 mm – 176.5 kg - with

with 12 ft antenna and integral
integral transceiver transceiver.
ATTENTION!
Special attention should be paid to the scanner antenna and transceiver installation
requirements set forth in the aforementioned document.
Units Configuration
The BridgeMaster E (NGSM) S-band scanner units are configured from the following
unit types:
• 12 feet Antenna Unit – 65612A;
• Antenna Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver 30 kW – 65830M, R or N;
• Antenna Turning Unit without Integral Transceiver – 65830B, R or C;
• Bulkhead Transceiver Unit 30 kW – 65831A or B;
• Scanner Control Unit – 65837A;
• Performance Monitor (option);
• Heating Kits for Masthead Tuning Unit – 65830730 (option);
• Heating Devices for Bulkhead Tuning Unit – 65830731 (option);
• Slave Junction Box – 65849A (option).

Up/Down Mast
Siting
General considerations
The performance of the system depends on the correct siting of the system scanner
unit (Turning unit and antenna). When siting the scanner unit you should consider
the following:
1. Compass safe distance.
2. Satisfactory short-range and long-range performance of the radar.
3. Protection of the equipment (cables and waveguide if applicable) from damage.
4. Ease of access for safe servicing.
5. Minimum practical length of waveguide or S-band coaxial cable, if applicable.
6. Freedom from blind arcs and false echoes, particularly on the starboard side of
the vessel as own ship usually has to give way to vessels approaching from this
direction. Port side visibility is also extremely important for monitoring
approaching vessels, as these normally pass own ship on the port side. This is
particularly important for vessels that navigate in narrow channels or canals.
Ship features which commonly obstruct the radar beam are funnels, masts,
Samson posts and crosstrees. A funnel usually throws a shadow aft, which may
or may not be considered serious. However, it is a probable source of false
echoes aft. Shadows thrown by Samson posts and masts will vary in extent with
their size and proximity to the scanner.
If there are obstacles around the selected site, it may be necessary to position
the scanner towards the starboard side of the vessel (the figure below identifies
this as position B). In this example, position B gives the antenna an
unobstructed area for direction of traffic on own ship’s starboard side. In
practice, in the direction of the ship’s bow, a mast or crane can often reflect or
suppress signals transmitted from the antenna.
Fig. 32. Scanner siting
This type of obstruction can cause the system to show large false returns on the
Display and/or fail to detect target returns within a certain dead angle. On AIS
systems this may also cause the radar to lose automaticallytracked targets that
move into the dead area. If the obstacle forms a significant obstruction, the
scanner height may have to be changed to make sure the angle of depression is
a minimum of 5 degrees (see the figure below).
The scanner must be installed only as high as is necessary to clear major

objects. It must also be remembered that when the scanner height is minimised
the short-range performance is improved along with the effects of sea clutter.
Therefore, position the scanner high enough to secure 5 degrees or greater
angle of depression. The angle is measured between the horizontal line drawn
from the antenna and the top of the mast or obstacle.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 33. Minimum angle of depression
7. To avoid interference from an adjacent radar antenna the vertical separation

between antennas should be as large as practicable. As a minimum, the glare
angle between antennas should not be greater than 70 degrees (see the figure
below).
Fig. 34. Dual scanner positioning (glare angle)
8. Local wind effect due to ship’s structure.
9. Local vibration environment.
Bulkhead Specific Considerations

The site and method of mounting the below-decks equipment should be chosen to
comply, as far as possible, with the wishes of the owner or master of the vessel. The
following points should also be considered:
1. Compass safe distance.
2. Ease of access for servicing.
3. Positioning to avoid the ingress of moisture.
4. Positioning away from doors or ports that are used frequently.
5. Positioning to minimise accidental damage.
6. Environmental considerations such as adequate ventilation, dust, dirt and clean

air.
7. Position the Workstation assembly away from strong magnetic fields.
8. Position the Display Screen away from direct sunlight.
9. Local vibration environment.
Safety Earthing
All company equipment with internal voltages greater than 50 V AC (rms) and
contained in a protective metal chassis must have the chassis connected directly to
earth. This is to stop the chassis becoming live under fault conditions. The earth link
is made by connecting a low resistance conductor between the equipment’s 6mm
stainless steel safety earth stud (marked with) and the main ship’s earth.

Up/Down Mast
Particular care must be taken when protecting the connections from environmental
and electro-chemical corrosion. Before assembly, you must make sure the contact
areas are oxide-free and that they are coated with a thin layer of conducting paste to
seal the joints. The most suitable materials for making connections between the
equipment’s earthing bolt and the ship’s earth are aluminium or tinned copper straps
that give a large contact area.
If an aluminium strap is connected to a ship’s stainless steel earth a zinc-plated

washer must be used between the strap and the ship’s earth.
If a tinned copper strap is connected to a ship’s aluminium earth an aluminium

washer (rather than steel) must be used between the strap and the ship’s earth.
CAUTION!
The connecting of the bonding straps must be made from each piece of equipment
to the ship’s earth. You must not loop from unit to unit. To ensure this is a non-
current-carrying connection no other connection must be made to the earth bolt.
The safety earth must never be removed during normal use or servicing. It is only
safe to remove it once the equipment has been isolated from all external power
sources.
Electromagnetic Continuity Screening

The purpose of EMC screening is to:
• Restrict the emission of electro-magnetic energy from the equipment; and

• Reduce its susceptibility to external electro-magnetic influence.
Individual items of equipment are EMC screened by their protective chassis.
However, the screening should be extended to cover both input and output
connections and cabling. This will maintain overall electro-magnetic efficiency.
Care must be taken when bonding the braids of interconnecting cables where
indicated in the appropriate cable schedules.
System Fuses
Switch – Fuse Current Ratings
The table below shows the ratings for the ship’s switch fuse for the radar and the
S-band motor.
Table 22. Fuses for radar and S-band motor
Ship’s Supply Radar S-Band Motor
Single Phase Three Phase
110/120 VAC 10 A 10 A 10 A
220/240 VAC 5A 5A 5A
380/440 VAC - 5A
Transceiver Unit Fuses

Table 23. Transceiver unit mains fuse (FS1)
Supply S-Band Code No.
110/120 VAC; 3.15 A MA00007245
220/240 VAC
Fuse type: MA00007245 - 3.15A, 1¼” (31mm) ceramic, anti surge, cartridge.
2162326 - 3.15A, 20mm ceramic, anti surge, cartridge.

Up/Down Mast
Cabling
Refer to the Cabling schedules below for details of cables and related terminations.
Inter-unit cabling diagrams are given in Annex F.
Details of the S-band coaxial RF feeder are given Annex D.
Supply Cables
The following points should be considered when you decide which size of cable to
use to connect the ship’s supply to the radar:
• The voltage drop from the supply to the radar must not exceed 2% of the supply
voltage.
• The current required by the radar must not exceed the current rating of the
cable.
If the radar system is to be supplied by a three-phase supply, the radar system must
be connected between two of the three phase lines. If it is a high-voltage supply, an
isolating transformer must be supplied to reduce the voltage to 220/240 V at the
system input.
Note: S-band Turning unit motors are fed directly from the AC supply via the
appropriate Scanner Control Unit (SCU); see below paragraph Scanner
Control Unit.
Power Consumption
The power consumption of the radar is given in Chapter 3.
Control Cables
The control cables detailed on the Inter-unit cabling diagrams may be used up to a
maximum length of 180 m, unless otherwise stated. Special cable kits are available
for cable lengths up to 300 m.
The DATA cable (Service Code MA00007419) conforms to UL Type CL2, AWM
2919 and CSA PCC FT4.
The other multicore cables conform to IEC 92/3 and DEF STAN 61-12 Part 5.
The LSZH (low smoke zero halogen) cables follow the construction of DEF STAN
61-12 Part 5 but have polyethylene insulation over the cores instead of PVC.
The cables are multicore stranded or bunched, and have tinned copper wire
conductors.
Each conductor is insulated with PVC to form cores. The cores are screened with
braided tinned copper wire, and the complete cable is sheathed with PVC.
The temperature range of the cables is -25°C to +70°C.

Up/Down Mast
Table 24. Standard cable detailes
Resistance
Raiting (A)
Number of
per 1000m
Min Bend
(at 20º C)
Diameter
Diameter
Strands/
Voltage
Current
Service
Radius
(RMS)
Cores
Cable
Code
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
Core
Ref.
(W)
V
16-2-2C 3218376 6.9 2 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440 50
16-2-4C 3209342 7.7 4 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440 60
16-2-6C 3211274 8.7 6 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440 65
16-2-12C 3211266 11.0 12 16/0.2 40.1 2.5 440 85
37-3-2R 3228207 10.3 2 37/0.32 6.79 13 440 80
37-3-4R 3214044 11.8 4 37/0.32 6.79 13 440 90
- MA00007419 8.4 4 pairs 7/0.2 - - 30 80
PT1YM 3236862 6 1 1x0.6 95 - - 36
FSJ1-75 MA00012534 7.4 1 49.2 - - 25
FSJ4-75A MA00012880 13.2 1 1x3 4.9 - - 32
Note: PT1YM characteristic impedance is 75Ω, and is double screened; each

screen provides 95% coverage
Cable Core Coour Coding

Multicore Cables
Table 25. Multicore cables colour coding
Abbreviation Colour Abbreviation Colour
R Red BN Brown
B Blue V Violet
G Green O Orange
Y Yellow P Pink
W White L/G Light Green
BK Black GY Grey
Data Cables
Table 26. Standard data cable colour coding
Abbreviation Colour Twisted Pairs
B/W Blue/White Twisted Pair
W/B White/Blue
G/W Green/White Twisted Pair
W/G White/Green
BN/W Brown/White Twisted Pair
W/BN White/Brown
O/W Orange/White Twisted Pair
W/O White/Orange

Up/Down Mast
Coaxial Cables
Signal Coaxial Cables
The coaxial signal cables detailed on the Inter-unit cabling diagrams can be used up
to a maximum length of 300 m depending on the type of cable chosen. These cables
are double screened, and have a nominal impedance of 75Ω. Braiding is made from
tinned copper to reduce corrosion problems.
Table 27. Signal coaxial cable detailes
Service Cable Nominal Attenuation Comments
Code Diameter Impedance at 10 MHz
(mm) (Ohm) db/100 m
3236862; 6.0 75 3.9 Double screened, Mylar insulation
91005248 between screen (PT1YM), use with cable
runs <67m
MA00012534; 7.4 75 1.87 Low-loss, copper-clad steel inner, solid
MA00014142 copper screen, use with cable runs <180m
MA00012880; 13.2 75 0.96 Ultra-low-loss, solid-copper inner and
MA00016089 screen, use with cable runs <300m.
S-Band Coaxial Cable

This is a 7/8" foam dielectric RF feeder cable. The cable has a minimum bend radius
of 250 mm (10"), and may be used up to a maximum recommended length of 30 m.
Longer lengths may be used at the owner’s discretion, but performance will be
significantly degraded for lengths over 30 m.
Table 28. S-band coaxial cable detailes
Service Cable Nominal Attenuation Comments
Code Diameter Impedance at 3 GHz
(mm) (Ohm) db/100 m
RA00002170 28 50 8.31
Crimping co-axial cables

The co-axial cables must be prepared for insertion into BNC connectors as
described below.
Tools Required
You will need a crimping tool (MA00018119).
Procedure
Prepare the cable end as follows:
1. Slide the ferrule onto the cable and strip away the outer cable cover to
dimension C as shown in the figure below.
2. Where the cable is double screened strip back the outer braid, remove the clear
mylar sheath separating the outer and inner braids and strip back the inner braid
and inner dielectric to the lengths shown in the figure below.
Fig. 35. Preparing cable end

Up/Down Mast
3. Slide centre contact onto inner copper wire until the contact bottoms against
cable dielectric. Crimp centre contact using crimping tool.
Fig. 36. Inserting centre contact
4. Fan braids out and slide cable into connector body until the cable bottoms
against insulator. Slide ferrule over braids in the direction shown in the figure
below.
Fig. 37. Inserting cable into connector body
5. Crimp the ferrule with crimping tool, cut excess braid if necessary as shown in
the figure below.
Fig. 38. Crimping the ferrule
Installation of S-Band Scanner Assembly

General Information
Installation of the scanner unit entails carrying out the following operations,
preferably in the sequence outlined below:
1. Preparation of the site (see above paragraph Siting).
2. Bolting the Tuning unit to the mounting platform (ship’s structure) as detailed in
Installation Drawing 65830050 supplied with the Turning unit (Despatch Kit
65830660).
3. Bolting the Support Casting to the Tuning unit as detailed in Installation Drawing
65612050-054 supplied with the Antenna Despatch Kit (65612610).
4. Bolting the Antenna to the Support casting as detailed in Installation Drawing

65612050-054 supplied with the Antenna Despatch Kit (65612610).
5. Laying in and installing the cables for the Motor and the Tuning unit in
accordance with the appropriate Cabling Schedules.
Figure below also show installation details which are intended to duplicate those
provided with the equipment. However, as it is possible that changes may occur to
the equipment take precedence in the event of differences arising.

Up/Down Mast
The figure below shows S-band scanner outline drawing. However, as changes may
occur to the details that may not be reflected in this manual, the installation drawings
supplied with the equipment take precedence in the event of any differences.
Fig. 39. S-band bcanner bulkhead TX/RX 30 kW installation
Fig. 40. S-band scanner masthead TX/RX 30 kW installation

Up/Down Mast
Turning Unit
WARNING!
The Turning unit must be lifted by crane, do not attempt to lift the Turning unit by
hand.
Never lift a combined Turning unit and Antenna unit by the Antenna unit. This is
dangerous and would cause damage to the Antenna unit.
CAUTION!
The weight and spread of the Antenna can cause a freestanding Turning unit to
topple over. The Turning unit should be bolted down onto its mounting platform
before attaching the Antenna and Support casting to the Turning unit.
To lift the Turning unit onto the mounting platform:
1. Screw the three M12 lifting eyebolts, type MA00010272 (part of Lifting Kit
65830701) into the torque tube in the three positions shown in the figure below.
The eyebolts are fitted in a symmetrical pattern in three of the six holes normally
used for attaching the Support casting to the Turning unit; only three of the holes
are tapped.
2. Remove the eyebolts after the Turning unit has been bolted to the mounting
platform.
Fig. 41. Attachment of lifting eyebolts
The Turning unit is attached to the mounting platform using the fixings supplied in
the Turning unit Despatch Kit 65830660.
The figure below shows how these are fitted. Before assembly make sure all threads
and bushes are coated with Denso paste.
Note: The Turning unit is bolted directly to the mounting platform. No intervening
washer or pad is used, except for the purpose of leveling the mounting. This
stops the Turning unit casting from twisting when the bolts are tightened. M16
washers may be used as shims, or purpose made parts, produced locally,
may be used.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 42. Fixing Turning unit to the mounting platform
Support Casting
The Support casting is fitted to the Turning unit torque tube using Fixing Kit
65612611, which is part of the Antenna Despatch Kit 65612610.
The figure below shows how these are fitted. Ensure that all threads and bushes are
coated with Denso paste.
Fig. 43. Fixing support casting to torque tube
Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor consists of the Antenna, the Performance Monitor module
and an associated cable. The equipment is normally factory fitted.
Antenna
The Antenna is fitted to the Support casting using the parts listed below which are
supplied with the antenna:
• 4 x M12 Plain Nuts;

• 6 x Spacers;
• 2 x Lock Tabs.
The figure below shows where these are fitted. Make sure all threads and bushes
are coated with Denso Paste. For full fitting instructions see drawing 65830052
supplied with the equipment.
Note: The lock tab ends must be bent as shown in the figure below to stop the nuts
rotating.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 44. Fixing antenna to support casting
The next step is to connect the S-band coaxial cable from the Antenna to the
Turning unit RF connector as shown in the figure above. The mated connector must
then be wrapped with self-amalgamating tape as an additional precaution against
water ingress.
Motor Connections
Various motor types are available for different mains supplies and standard/high-
speed antenna rotation rate variants.
The following table gives the motor types that are available:
Table 29. Motor type

Mains Supply Characteristics Motor Type for Standard Speed Antenna
110/120/220/240 Volts, 1φ (50/60 Hz) 91003757
110/120 Volts, 3φ (50/60 Hz) 91003752
220/240/380/440 Volts, 3φ (50/60 Hz) 91003751
CAUTION!
As referenced in the table above, dual voltage motors are used for both single and 3
phase supplies. 110-120/220-240Volts for single phase; 220-240/380-440Volts for 3
phase. In addition to the wiring of the mains supply to these motors, the windings
must also be correctly configured for the appropriate voltage. Incorrect configuration
will adversely affect the unit’s performance – refer to connection details below.

Up/Down Mast
For all motor types:
1. First, feed the mains cable through the cable gland on the motor termination box
housing.
2. Connect the cable braid to the motor chassis.
3. Connect the individual insulated conductors to the appropriate terminals as

detailed for each motor type in the following section.
4. Make sure the cable is not under strain in the termination box area, and
sufficient slack is available to remake the connection, should this ever be
necessary, for example, if a motor is changed in service.
5. Make sure the insulated conductors are terminated appropriately:
– Using ring crimp terminals on threaded studs; or

– Stripping insulation back by 5mm for screw compression pillars.
6. Ensure that any gasket fitted for sealing the terminal box cover is correctly
seated when the cover is re-secured.
Single Phase Motor Connections
Make connections according to the label on the inside of the termination box cover.
Ensure that the rated motor volts are matched to the supply. If the radar antenna
rotates in the wrong direction, re-configure the connections on the motor according
to the diagram on the motor housing (the radar antenna should rotate anti-clockwise
when viewed from below).
For dual voltage single phase motors connection details are shown in the figure
below.
There are 6 wires from the motor housing to the terminal block, numbered 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 and 8. Connect the wires to the terminal block as detailed in figure below for the
required motor supply voltage.
Fig. 45. Dual voltage single phase motor connections
Table 30. Single phase motor cable data

Wiring Diagrams Description Motor Label
65900061 or 65900062 Reference
TSH1 AC LINE L, L1 or U1
TSH2 AC NEUTRAL N, L2, U2 or V1

Up/Down Mast
Three Phase Motor Connections

For dual voltage three phase motors, ensure that windings are configured for the
appropriate voltage, see the figure below. Delta (triangle) connected windings are for
low voltage operation, Star (Y) for high voltage.
Fig. 46. Dual voltage 3 phase motor configuration
The label on the inside of the termination box cover gives details of mains supply
connections, and of the winding re-configuration details for alternate voltages if
appropriate.
Ensure that the rated motor volts are matched to the supply. If the radar antenna
rotates in the wrong direction, reversal of any two phases will correct this (the radar
antenna should rotate anti-clockwise when viewed from below).
Table 31. Three phase motor cable data

Wiring Diagrams Description Motor Label
65900061 or 65900062 Reference
TSH1 AC LINE 1 L1 or U1
TSH2 AC LINE 2 L2 or V1
TSH3 AC LINE 3 L3 or W1
Cabling Connections
The figure below shows the cable entry points. Three of these are via cable glands
labelled 1, 2 and 3. Details of these cable glands are given in the table presented in
item Fitting the Cable Glands below.
The RF cable input is only needed when the transceiver is mounted below decks
(bulkhead).
The motor supply cable is connected directly to the motor termination blocks
mounted in the box on the side of the motor.
A 6 mm stud is fitted to let the unit bond to the ship’s structure: this must not be used
for any other connection.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 47. Turning unit – Cable entry locations*
*This drawing is for a Turning unit without integral transceiver. Refer to the table
below for details of cable fitted for different variants
The figure below shows details of the Input Board 65801813 and the Mains Input
connector (integral transceiver only) TSE.
The input board is accessed by removing the cover plate, which is held by four fixing
screws (see the figure above). Links LK3 and LK4 on the Input Board should be set
as shown in the figure below. Link LK5 is fitted.
Fig. 48. Turning unit – Input Board and Mains Input details

Up/Down Mast
Fitting the Cable Glands

The installation cables are connected into the Turning unit (with or without an
integral transceiver) via the appropriate cable glands, see the table below.
Table 32. S-band cable gland details
Cable Gland Turning Unit without Integral Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver
Transceiver
Description Cable Type Description Cable Type
Cable Gland 1 - - Mains Input 37-3-2R
Cable Gland 2 12-Core 16-2-12C - -

Cable Gland 2 PM Trigger 75 Ohm Co-ax - -
Cable Gland 3 - - 2-Core 16-2-2C

Cable Gland 3 - - Radar Video 75 Ohm Co-ax
Cable Gland 3 - - Data T/Pairs
RF Connector RF Feed S-Band Co-ax - -

The body of the gland fits through a hole in the casting and is held in position by the
Top Nut. An ‘O’ ring seal is fitted below the casting surface (input side), see the
figure below.
A waterproof seal and an EMC gasket are supplied with each gland. Some glands
are designed for a single cable; other glands are used for several cables.
Note: Cable glands and blanking plates are normally factory fitted to the Turning
unit.
Information about fitting and terminating the RF feeder cable (S-band coaxial) are
presented in Annex D.
For information on how to terminate the cables into their connector blocks, see
interconnection diagrams presented in Annex F.
Fig. 49. General view of cable glands

Up/Down Mast
The waterproof seal works by clamping onto the cable PVC sheath. The EMC seal
clamps onto the cable braid.
Note: Do not force the outer sheath through the EMC gasket; the gasket can split.
The braid is also formed into a tail that is grounded by means of an adjacent earth
tag. The fitting procedure is detailed in the figure below.
Fig. 50. Cable installation details
Installing the Cables

To install the cables:
1. Unscrew the gland nut.
2. Remove the waterproof seal and the EMC seal.
3. Feed the cable through the gland nut and the waterproof seal.
4. Strip the outer sheath to expose approximately 300 mm of braid.
5. Push the braid back to expose approximately 50 mm of the inner cores.
6. Trim 50 mm off the inner cores.
7. Pull the braid back over the inner cores and twist into a point.
8. Feed the braid through the EMC seal until the cable is positioned as in the figure
above.
– For the multicore cables: Flare out the braid to within approximately 15mm of
the EMC seal, and form it into a tail.
– For the coaxial cables: Do not fit the coaxial connector at this time.
Assembling cables into Turning Unit
To assemble the cables into the turning unit:
1. Feed the assembled cables and seals into the gland body.
2. Tighten the gland nut until the EMC seal is compressed.
3. Crimp the earth tags provided to the braids of the multicore cables
4. Attach them to the earth studs adjacent to the cables: the tails should be as
short as is practicable.
5. Trim and make off the cable inners to the appropriate terminal blocks.
6. Trim the coaxial cables to length.
7. Slide the plastic sleeve supplied in the despatch kit over the exposed braid.
8. Fit the coaxial connectors.

9. Plug them into the appropriate sockets.

Up/Down Mast
S-band Bulkhead Transceiver

The S-band bulkhead Transceiver, 65831A, is installed below decks in a suitable
location such as the ship’s equipment room. The installation should consider
accessibility for maintenance and servicing, and the distance between the
Transceiver and the Scanner Unit.
For maximum performance, this should be kept as short as practicable as the loss
per metre of the S-band coaxial cable is typically 8.31 dB per 100 metres (1.7 dB for
20 m). This loss applies to both the transmitted RF pulse and the received signals.
The maximum recommended cable length using standard coaxial cable (PT1YM) is:
• 30 metres between the Turning unit and the Transceiver unit; and
• 67 metres between the Transceiver and Display.
Greater separation is possible by using a lower loss cable.
Fig. 51. S-Band bulkhead transceiver 30 kW Installation
Assembling the Bulkhead Transceiver

The Transceiver may be attached to the bulkhead by several methods. The actual
method chosen will depend on individual circumstances: consider the likely vibration
and shock loading which may be experienced. The available methods include
through bolting to the bulkhead, or mounting on studs supplied by the shipyard, see
the figure below. Slotted mounts are supplied at the bottom for ease of installation.
Note: The positions of the four fixings for the unit are not on a rectangle. The
horizontal spacing of the top fixings is 364 mm compared with 376 mm for the
lower fixings. When choosing the installation location for the Transceiver,
consider how the RF feeder coaxial cable is to be routed.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 52. Bulkhead transceiver – Mounting alternatives
Installing Cables on a Bulkhead Transceiver

The figure below shows details of the cable inputs. The cable cover plate, which is
secured by two fixing screws, is shown removed.
Note: A cable retainer holds the coaxial cables. This must be fitted after the cables
are in place.
All other cables, with the exception of the RF feeder S-band coaxial cable, are
individually clamped on their cable braids to provide EMC shielding. The braids are
also made off as tails and connected to earth tags provided. The AC mains input is
connected to TSE as shown.
Fig. 53. Bulkhead transceiver – Cable iput details
The figure below shows details of the Input Board, 65801814. Refer to the cabling
schedules for details of the connections, which are made via the two part connectors
provided. Links LK2 and LK3 on the Input Board should be set as shown. Link LK1
is not fitted.

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 54. Bulkhead transceiver – Input Board details
For fitting the RF feeder cable (S-band Coaxial Cable), see Annex D.
Scanner Control Unit

Mounting
Normally, the Scanner Control Unit (SCU) is mounted so that it is accessible to the
radar operator. Also it must be mounted so that a service engineer can get access to
the isolator for the mains supply to the Turning Unit motor. Therefore, it is preferable
to mount the SCU close to the Mains Isolator, see below installation drawing.
Fig. 55. Scanner Control Unit - Internal layout

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 56. Scanner Control Unit installation
Single Phase or Three Phase Mains Supply Voltage

The connection details and relevant cabling schedules for a single-phase supply
(1φ) SCU and three-phase supply (3φ) are shown in the figures below.
Fig. 57. Scanner Control Unit – Single-phase supply arrangement

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 58. Scanner Control Unit – Three-phase supply arrangement
Optional Mains Isolator

It is good practice to include Mains Isolator Switches Type 65800700 in the system
wiring of AC powered systems. Their function is to let the Scanner Unit (with the
exception of the Motor Supply in S-band systems be isolated from the ship’s mains
supply.
The Scanner Unit Motor supply in S-band systems is isolated separately by the
Scanner Control Unit. For safety reasons, the Mains Isolator must be mounted next
to the SCU so that the S-band system can be isolated from a single location .
If needed, the Mains Isolator can be locked in the OFF position using a suitable
padlock.
In multiple radar systems more than one isolating switch may be needed.
For connection of Isolating Switch to the Transceiver, see interconnections diagrams

enclosed in Annex F.
Fig. 59. Isolation Switch installation

Up/Down Mast
Connection of MFD to NGSM Scanners S-Band Up/Down Mast

This paragraph will further describe the equipment, which MFD System is comprised
of, its connection:
1. Connect the MFD components to each other by using the appropriate cables
included in the delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex F):
– MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner. Block Diagram;
– MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner. Connection Diagram;
– MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner. Power Distribution.
Connection Diagram.
2. Connect Turning unit (masthead scanner) or Transceiver unit (bulkhead
scanner) to RIB6/RIB6B via data cable and video coaxial cable according with
“MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner.
Connection Diagram” and “Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Masthead
(Bulkhead) Scanner” enclosed in Annex F.
3. In case of Bulkhead scanner, connect Transceiver unit to Turning unit as per
“Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Bulkhead Scanner”.
4. Connect ship’s main power supply to Turning unit (TSE) for masthead scanner
or Transceiver unit (TSE) for bulkhead scanner and to Turning unit motor’s
power supply (TSH) via Scanner Control Unit as shown on the drawing
“Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner” presented
in Annex F.
Slave Junction Box

General
The Slave Junction Box is used as part of a Marine Radar System for installation
below decks.
The Slave Junction Box allows up to 3 slave radar displays to be connected to a

radar transceiver, in addition to the master display. It also allows for the buffering of
Mutual Interference Suppression Triggers (MIST) to these displays (only required in
multi-transceiver systems). Provision is also made for Log, Nav and Compass cable
distribution to the displays (non-buffered).
Connections between the transceiver and master display are not buffered, ensuring
the highest integrity of communication between these units in the event of a fault
condition arising in the Slave Junction Box. In the event of the master display
malfunctioning, it can be replaced by reconnecting, (by transferring the connectors),
a slave display in its place in the Slave Junction Box.
A Despatch Kit, 65849600, contains all necessary fixings and connectors.
For technical specification of the Slave Junction Box, see Chapter 3.

Up/Down Mast
Installation
Drawings
Refer to the Installation drawings and cables details below.
Fig. 60. Slave Junction Box – General view
Fig. 61. Connector layout for Slave Junction Box PCB Assembly 65849852
Fig. 62. Block diagram of Slave Junction Box PCB Assembly 65849852

Up/Down Mast
Fig. 63. Serial interface unit – Installation drawing
Fig. 64. Displays configured with Slave Junction Box

Installation of Scanners NGSM 10/25 kW X-Band Up/Down Mast
Cables Details
Table 33. PT1YM 75 Ohm CO-AX (259 A, B, C or D)
SJB Function CLR
SKV VIDEO -
Table 34. PT1YM 75 Ohm CO-AX (260 A, B, C or D)
SJB Function CLR
SKM MISS TRIGGER -
Table 35. Data cable 4 T/Pairs (261 A, B, C or D)
SJB Function CLR
TSD1 DU DATA+ B/W
TSD2 DU DATA+ W/B
TSD3 TX DATA+ O/W
TSD4 TX DATA- W/O
TSD5 TX TRIG+ G/W
TSD6 TX TRIG- W/G
TSD7 TX SART+ BN/W
TSD8 TX SART- W/BN
E/TAG EARTH (0 V) SCR
Table 36. Data cable 4 T/Pairs (273)
SJB Function CLR
TSPA1 +12 V B/W
TSPA2 0V W/B
TSPA3 -12 V O/W
E/TAG EARTH (0 V) SCR
INSTALLATION OF SCANNERS NGSM 10/25 KW X-BAND

UP/DOWN MAST
Introduction
This section describes all the procedures required for the correct installation
and performance check of the scanner unit. The diagram of connection between
the scanner and MFD console is provided in Annex G.
Technical specification of the scanners units is given in Chapter 3.
X-band scanner 10/25 kW manufactured with up and down mast transceiver location
and 4 or 6 or 8 feet long antenna is used for work with the MFD application. The
scanner’s characteristics are given in the table below:
Table 37. X-band Turning unit specification
Dimensions Weight Power Swing Operating Relative
Width/Depth/Height circle temperature humidity
1305 586 440 mm – 49 (42*) kg – 92-276 V/ 1305 mm – -25 C… Up to
with 4 ft antenna. with 4ft antenna. 47-64 HZ 4 ft antenna +55 C 95% at
1914x586x440 mm – 52 (44*) kg – 1914 mm – +40 C
with 6 ft antenna. with 6ft antenna. 6 ft
2550x586x440 mm – 55 (47*) kg – antenna.
with 8 ft antenna with 8ft antenna. 2550 mm –
8ft antenna
* - Excluding transceiver.

ATTENTION!
Special attention should be paid to the scanner antenna and transceiver installation
requirements set forth in the aforementioned document.
Top Units Configuration

The BridgeMaster E (NGSM) X-band top units are configured from the following unit
types:
• 4 or 6 or 8 feet Antenna Unit – 65604A or 65606A or 65608A;
• Antenna Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver:
– 10 kW – 65910A or;
– 25 kW – 65925A or;
• Antenna Turning Unit without Integral Transceiver – 65901BAR or CA;
• Bulkhead Transceiver Unit 10 kW – 65810E,F,G,H or L;
• Performance Monitor (optional).
• Antenna Turning Unit without Integral Transceiver – 65901BAR or CA;
• Bulkhead Transceiver Unit 10 kW – 65810E,F,G,H or L or;
• Bulkhead Transceiver Unit 25 kW – 65825E,F,G,H or L;
• Performance Monitor (option);
• Heating Kits for Masthead Tuning Unit – 65901730 (option);
• Slave Junction Box – 65849A (option): for description, see above section
Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast, paragraph
Slave Junction Box.
Siting
See above section Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW S-Band Up/Down
Mast, paragraph Siting.
Transceiver Unit Fuses

Table 38. Transceiver unit mains fuse (FS1)
Supply X-Band Code No.
110/120 VAC 5A 2180413
220/240 VAC 3.15 A MA00007245
Fuse type:
• MA00007245 – 3.15 A, 1¼” (31 mm) ceramic, anti surge, cartridge;

• 2180413 – 5 A, 1¼” (31 mm) ceramic, anti surge, cartridge;
• 2162326 – 3.15 A, 20 mm ceramic, anti surge, cartridge.

Cabling
Refer to the Cabling Schedules for details of cables and related terminations,
described above in section Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW S-Band
Up/Down Mast, paragraph Cabling. Inter-unit cabling diagrams are given
in Annex G.
For details of the X-band RF waveguide, RF termination and installation,

see Annex D.
X-Band Elliptical Waveguide

Table 39. X-band waveguide detailes
Service Waveguide Attenuation Comments
Code Size at 9.4 GHz
(mm) db/100 m
RA00000109 33.5 x 22.9 9.96 Andrew Type EW85
RA00000075 33.5 x 22.9 9.96 RFS Type EP100
Installation of X-Band Scanner Assembly

General Information
Installation of the scanner unit entails carrying out the following operations,
preferably in the sequence outlined below:
1. Preparation of the site (see section Installation of Scanners NGSM 30 kW

S-Band Up/Down Mast, paragraph Siting).
2. Bolting the Tuning unit to the mounting platform (ship’s structure) as detailed in
Installation Drawings 65901050 or 65925051supplied with the Turning unit
(Installation Kit 65901660).
3. Bolting the Antenna to the Support casting as detailed in Installation Drawing

65601275 supplied with the Antenna.
4. Laying in and installing the cables for the Tuning unit in accordance with the
appropriate Cabling Schedules (including X-band co-axial feeder).
5. Ensuring that in the Tuning unit, the Motor Drive Board and the Pulse Bearing
Board are correctly set for the required High or Low Speed operation set via
their relevant jumper links.
The figures below also show installation details which are intended to duplicate
those provided with the equipment. However, as it is possible that changes may
occur to the equipment take precedence in the event of differences arising.

Fig. 65. X-band scanner masthead TX/RX 10/25 kW installation
Fig. 66. X-band scanner masthead TX/RX 10/25 kW installation

Fig. 67. X-band scanner bulkhead TX/RX 10/25 kW installation
Fig. 68. X-band scanner bulkhead TX/RX 10/25 kW installation
Turning Unit
WARNING!
The Turning unit must be lifted using the four fixing holes at the base of the unit.
The weight and spread of the Antenna can cause a freestanding Turning unit to
topple over. The Turning unit must therefore be bolted onto its mounting platform
before attaching the Antenna to the Turning unit. When working on the X-band
Turning unit with the top casting raised, always make sure the locking bolt or latch
on the stay is in the locked position.

The Turning unit is bolted to the mounting platform with four Neoprene isolating
pads (65601251) between the Turning unit casting and the mounting platform, to
prevent galvanic corrosion.
Additional washers or pads may be added to level the mounting so that the Turning
unit casting does not twist when the bolts are tightened. M10 washers can be used
as shims, or purpose made parts, produced locally, may be used.
Fig. 69. Fixing Turning unit to mounting platform
Support Casting
The Support casting is factory fitted to the Turning unit and requires no further
assembly during installation.
Performance Monitor
The Performance Monitor comprises the Performance Monitor module, and an
associated control cable. The equipment is normally factory fitted.
Antenna
The Antenna is fitted to the Support casting using the parts listed below (supplied
with the antenna).
• 4 x M8 Stainless Steel Plain Nut (grade 316S16) 4411544;

• 2 x Washer with locking tab 65602122.
Before assembling the Antenna to the Turning unit, remove the waveguide plug from
the underside of the Antenna and the yellow sealing cap from the waveguide
aperture on the top of the Turning unit. DO NOT remove the plastic membrane over
the Turning unit waveguide aperture.
The holes in the support casting are asymmetrically placed to prevent the antenna
being fitted backwards. The support casting has the word “FRONT” visible from
above to help with initial antenna location.
Figure below shows how these are fitted.
Make sure the four Antenna fixing bolts are well coated with Denso paste before
securing to the Turning unit.
Note: The lock tab ends must be bent as shown in the figure below to prevent
rotation of the nuts.

Fig. 70. Fixing antenna to support casting
After assembling and securing the antenna to the Turning unit apply a bead of
sealant around the joint between the antenna and support casting. Smooth the
sealant finish with a damp cloth.
Turning Unit Link Settings

To access the PCBs housed in the Turning unit loosen the four bolts securing the
top casting to the bottom casting. Lever the top casting up and secure in position
with the stay locking bracket.
Standard Turning units include the following types:
• 65901Bxx;
• 65925Mxx.
For the standard Turning units, two scanner speed settings are available:
“LOW” and “HIGH”, depending on the following settings of the Motor Drive Board
and the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly.
Setting link LK1 on the Motor Drive Board 65801811
This link is set during installation and commissioning, and requires no tools to
change it.
The factory default setting is “NORMAL” speed. If no jumper is fitted, the rotational
speed defaults to high-speed.
WARNING!
Under no circumstances should the link position be moved whilst the motor is
running.
With the jumper in the position marked “LO” (pins 1 and 2 – left hand pair),
the nominal scanner speed is 28 rpm, see figure below.
With the jumper in the position marked “HI” (pins 2 and 3 – right hand pair),
the nominal scanner speed is 45 rpm.

Fig. 71. Motor Drive Board 65801811 – Showing Link position
Setting link LK1 on the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly 65801805

This link does not change the rotational speed of the scanner, but does alter the
ability of the phase-locked loop within the board to track the scanner rotational
speed. The factory default setting is optimised for “LOW” speed. If no jumper is
fitted, the Pulse Bearing PCB Assembly is optimised for highspeed.
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should the link position be moved whilst the motor is
running.
1. Set the jumper in the position marked ‘1’ (pins 1 and 2 – the lower pair) when
the nominal scanner speed is 28 RPM (“LOW”), see the figure below.
2. Set the jumper in the upper pair position (pins 2 and 3) when the nominal
scanner speed is 45 RPM (“HIGH”).
The link is set during installation and commissioning. The link can be moved with the
PCB in place using long nose pliers. This is not easy because the PCB mounting
bracket obscures the position of the link.
The recommended method is:

1. Loosen the two Pozidriv screws that hold the mounting bracket in place.
2. Slide the whole assembly to the right using the slotted screw holes in the
mounting bracket.
3. Move the assembly forward into a more accessible position for the link to be
moved.

During removal and refitting of the mounting bracket, take care not to damage the
teeth on the pulse disc assembly that run between opto-couplers mounted on the
rear of the Pulse Bearing PCB. Before re-tightening the two Pozidriv screws, check
that both pairs of plain and single coil washers are above the top surface of the
mounting bracket and not trapped beneath it.
For an easier installation, it is recommended that you complete this operation, if it is

required, before mounting the Turning unit aloft.
Fig. 72. Pulse Bearing Board 65801805 – Showing Link position
Turning Unit Input PCB Assembly 65801813 (Fitted to Standard Turning Units)
The diagram below shows details of the Turning unit Input Board 65801813.
1. To access the board:
2. Release the four retaining bolts.
3. Lift up the upper casting cover on its hinges.
4. Remove the screening cover.
Fig. 73. Turning unit – Input Board details

Note: The video cable does not plug into the Input Board, but goes directly to the
receiver. Refer to item Fitting the Cable Glands for further details.
Turning Unit Mains Input Connector (Aloft Transceiver)

The figure below shows details of the Mains Input Connector TSE (Integral
transceiver only). These are accessed by removing the support plate that is held by
four fixing screws (see below). Note that the screws need only be partially undone to
allow the plate to be slide out.
Fig. 74. Turning unit – Mains Input details
Installing X-Band Cables

Before fitting the cables in the Turning unit loosen the four bolts securing the top
casting to the bottom casting. Lever the top casting up and secure in position with
the stay locking bracket.
The table below shows the route each cable uses to enter the Turning unit (with or
without an Integral transceiver). The figure below shows the cable entry points; three
of these are via cable glands labelled 1, 2 and 3.
The RF feeder (waveguide) input is only needed when the transceiver is mounted
below decks (bulkhead). The bulkhead lower casting is different from the masthead
variant because the X-band waveguide flange is mounted on the underside face.
A 6 mm bolt is fitted so that the unit can be connected to the ship’s structure. This
must not be used for any other connection.
For details of how to terminate the cables into their connector blocks, see the
interconnection diagram and cabling schedules in Annex G.
Each cable gland has a waterproof seal and a separate EMC seal. These must be
installed as shown in the figure below.
Details for terminating the RF feeder (waveguide) are given in Annex D.

Table 40. X-band cable gland details

Cable Gland Turning Unit without Integral Turning Unit with Integral Transceiver
Transceiver
Description Cable Type Description Cable Type
Cable Gland 1 Blanking Plug - Mains Input AC 37-3-2R
Cable Gland 2 PM Bearing 16-2-12C Blanking Plug -

Cable Gland 2 PM Trigger 75 Ohm Co-ax - -
Cable Gland 2 TU Enable 16-2-2C
Cable Gland 3 Motor 50 V 37-3-2R Radar Video 75 Ohm Co-ax

Cable Gland 3 - - Data T/Pairs
RF Connector RF Feed X-Band Waveguide - -
Fig. 75. Turning unit for use with aloft transceiver – Cable entry positions
Fig. 76. Turning unit for use with bulkhead transceiver – Cable entry positions

Fitting the Cable Glands

The installation cables are connected into the Turning unit via the appropriate cable
glands (see above table). The body of the gland fits through a hole in the casting
and is held in position by the Top Nut. Note the “O” ring seal, which is fitted below
the casting surface (input side).
A waterproof seal and an EMC gasket are provided with each gland as shown in the
figure below. Some glands are designed for a single cable; others are intended or
several cables. Unused glands are fitted with a blanking plug. Unused cable entries
are fitted with a sealing pin to maintain the seal integrity.
Fig. 77. Turning unit – Cable gland assemblies
Note: Cable glands and blanking plugs are normally factory fitted to the Turning unit.
Turning units for aloft transceivers do not have cable gland holes.
The waterproofing seal works by clamping onto the cable PVC sheath whereas
the EMC seal clamps onto the cable braid.
Note: Do not to force the outer sheath through the EMC gasket as the gasket can
split.
The braid is also formed into a tail that is grounded by means of an adjacent earth
tag. The fitting procedure is shown in the figure above.
To install the cables:
1. Unscrew the gland nut.
2. Remove the waterproof seal and the EMC gasket.

3. Feed the cables through the gland nut and waterproof seal.
4. Strip the outer sheath to expose approximately:
– 300 mm of braid for the multicore cables;

– 1200 mm of braid for the video coaxial cable.
5. Push the braid back to expose approximately 50 mm of the inner cores.
6. Trim 50 mm off the inner cores.

7. Pull the braid back and twist into a point.
8. Feed the cable through the EMC gasket until it is positioned as shown in the
figure above.
9. For the multicore cable: flare the braid out to within approximately 15 mm of the
EMC gasket and form a tail.
10. For the coaxial cable: do not fit the connector at this time.
Assemble Cables into Scanner Unit
To assemble the cables into the scanner unit:
2. Tighten the gland nut to compress the waterproof seal.
3. Crimp the earth tags to the braids of the multicore cables, keeping them as short
as possible.
4. Attach the earth tags with the screws provided.
5. Trim and attach the cable inners to the appropriate connectors.
6. The video coaxial cable does not plug into SKV on the Input PCB, but is
connected to SKV on the receiver assembly.
7. Sleeve the braid of the coaxial cable with the 6 mm sleeving supplied.
8. Route the cable through the slot at the end of the filter box cover, along the
cable loom on the right hand side of the scanner unit.
9. Use cable ties to clip it to the loom.
10. Trim to length and fit the coaxial plug.
11. For systems using below-decks transceivers the performance monitor trigger
coaxial cable is terminated in the same way, but only needs to be stripped back
200 mm, as it is plugged into SKP on the Input PCB.
Assemble Cables into Turning Unit
To assemble the cables into the Turning unit:
2. Tighten the gland nut until the EMC seal is compressed.
3. Crimp the earth tags provided to the braids of the multicore cables
4. Attach them to the earth studs adjacent to the cables. The tails should be as
short as is practicable.
5. Trim and make off the cable inners to the appropriate terminal blocks.
6. Trim the coaxial cables to length.
7. Slide the plastic sleeve supplied in the despatch kit over the exposed braid.
8. Fit the coaxial connectors.
9. Plug them into the appropriate sockets.
10. Secure the video coaxial cable to the Turning unit using a cable tie on the top
housing and two cable clamps on the lower housing, see the figure below.

Fig. 78. Securing coax cable in masthead Turning unit
Earthing
The common earth point of the power supply of the ship must be connected to the
chassis (case) of the radar unit receiving the supply. Use the crimp tags at the cable
entry points to make this earth connection.
X-Band Bulkhead Transceiver

The bulkhead transceiver, type 65810A to 65810W (10 kW) or 65825A to 65825W
(25kW) is installed below decks in a suitable location such as the ship’s equipment
room.
The installation should consider accessibility for maintenance and servicing, and the
distance between the Transceiver and the Scanner unit. For maximum performance,
this should be kept as short as practicable: the loss per metre of the X-band
waveguide is typically 10 dB per 100 metres (2 dB for 20 metres). This loss applies
to both the transmitted RF pulse and the received signals.
The maximum recommended cable length using standard coaxial cable (PT1YM) is:
• 30 metres between the Turning unit and the Transceiver unit and;
• 67 metres between the Transceiver unit and display.
Greater separation is possible by using a lower loss cable. Contact Northrop
Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. if greater separation is required.
When choosing the installation location for the transceiver, routing of the RF feeder
(waveguide) should be carefully considered.
The transceiver may be attached to the bulkhead by several methods. The actual
method chosen will depend on individual circumstances, with due regard given to
the likely vibration and shock loading which may be experienced. The available
methods include through bolting to the bulkhead, or mounting on studs supplied by
the shipyard. Slotted mounts are supplied at the bottom for ease of installation.

Fig. 79. X-band bulkhead transceiver – Mounting alternatives
Fig. 80. X-band bulkhead transceiver 25 kW installation

Fig. 81. X-band bulkhead transceiver 25 kW (later version) installation
Bulkhead Transceiver Cabling Information

The figure below shows details of the cable input. The transceiver cover, which is
secured by four fixing screws, is shown removed. A cable-retainer holds the coaxial
cables in place. The cables must be fitted to the retainer after the cables are in
place.
All other cables, with the exception of the X-band RF feeder (waveguide), are
individually clamped on their cable braids to provide EMC shielding. The braids are
also made off as tails and connected to earth tags supplied.
The AC mains input is connected to TSE located underneath the cover plate as
shown in the figure below.
Bulkhead Transceiver Input PCB Details:

The figure below shows details of the Input PCB Assembly 65801814.
Access to the board is made by removing the main transceiver cover and the Filter
Box cover. See interconnection diagram enclosed in Annex G for details of the
connections, which are made by using the two-part connectors supplied.
Configuration for normal operation is by link settings as follows:
• LK2 Link pins 2 and 3;

• LK3 Link pins 2 and 3.

Fig. 82. X-band bulkhead transceiver - Input board details
Fig. 83. X-band bulkhead transceiver – Cable input details

For fitting the RF Elliptical Waveguide, see Annex D.
Sealing the Turning Unit

Before securing the top casting and bottom casting of the Turning unit ensure the
seal groove in the top casting and the mating faces of the top casting and lower
casting are liberally coated with the petroleum jelly supplied (MA00013789).
Apply denso paste (9037446) to the four top casting retaining bolts.
Fig. 84. Sealing the Turning unit
Optional Mains Isolator

It is good practice to include Mains Isolator Switches Type 65800700 in the system
wiring of AC powered systems. Their function is to let the Scanner Unit (with the
exception of the Motor Supply in S-band systems ) be isolated from the ship’s mains
supply.
If needed, the Mains Isolator can be locked in the OFF position using a suitable
padlock.
In multiple radar systems more than one isolating switch may be needed.
For connection of Isolating Switch to the Transceiver, see interconnections diagrams
enclosed in Annex G.

Fig. 85. Isolation Switch installation
Fig. 86. Isolation Transformer unit installation

Winterisation Heater Kits for NGSM Scanners Turning Units
Connection of MFD to NGSM Scanners X-Band Up/Down Mast

This paragraph will further describe the equipment, which MFD System is comprised
of, its connection:
1. Connect the MFD components to each other by using the appropriate cables
included in delivery set, as shown in the following diagrams (see Annex G):
– MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanners. Block Diagram;
– MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanners. Connection
Diagram;
– MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanners. Power
Distribution. Connection Diagram.
2. Connect Turning unit (Masthead scanner) or Transceiver unit (Bulkhead
scanner) to RIB6/RIB6B via data cable and video coaxial cable according with
“MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead (Bulkhead)
Scanners. Connection Diagram” and “Interconnection Diagram for X-Band
Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner” presented in Annex G.
3. In case of Bulkhead scanner, connect Transceiver unit to Turning unit as per

“Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Bulkhead Scanner”.
4. Connect ship’s main power supply to Turning unit (TSE) for masthead scanner
or Transceiver unit (TSE) for bulkhead scanner. See above item Turning Unit
Mains Input Connector (Aloft Transceiver) and “Interconnection Diagram for
X-Band Masthead (Bulkhead) Scanner” enclosed in Annex G.
WINTERISATION HEATER KITS FOR NGSM SCANNERS

TURNING UNITS
General Description
Design Requirements
The Winterisation Heater Kits have been designed to meet the requirements of
vessels operating in cold climates, to enable Marine Navigation Radar Turning units
to be operated in temperatures down to -55°C. They will also keep Turning units free
from ice, though the temperature range for keeping Turning units free from ice
depends on installation location, wind and precipitation conditions. The kits are
designed to be fitted to Turning units in the field at or after installation.
Scope of Supply
The kits consist of heating attachments and the materials required to mount them on
turning units. Additional materials required for electrical installation, such as circuit
protection, isolation switches, junction boxes and temperature control devices are
not supplied, and are expected to be sourced by the shipyard or installer. Some
guidance on selection and specification is given in the paragraph Applications
Guidance and in the Chapter 3 below.

Fig. 87. 659xx series X-band Turning unit with 65901730 heating kit fitted
Fig. 88. 65830 series S-band Turning unit with masthead transceiver,
with 65830730 heater kit fitted
Technical Description
Each heating attachment consists of a self regulating heating element and metal
structure to mount the heating element on the exterior surface of a Turning unit.
The X-band type clips onto the top face of turning units from the 65901, 65910 and
65925 series, while the S-band types are fitted by removing some external covers
from the Turning units of the 65830 series, and replacing them with covers with
integrated heating elements.
Each heater is fitted with a 10 m flying lead for termination in local anti-ice or
de-icing circuits. The cable is of NGSM type MA00014191 which is manufactured to
Def Stan 61-12 Part 5 with designation 37-3-2R but with low smoke, zero halogen
and flame retardant sheath. Note that junction boxes for these connections are
shipyard or local supply.
The heating elements used in the kits are based on self-regulating ‘PTC’ thermistor
modules and are designed for use with 208 V ‘cross-phase’ or 220-240 V single
phase AC electrical supplies at 50 or 60 Hz.
Ambient Temperature Ranges

The heater circuits should only be live in cold conditions, or when ice accretion is
occurring locally to the equipment. If the heating attachments are left powered when
the ambient temperature is higher than 0 °C, the service life of turning units and
masthead transceivers may be significantly reduced. Depending on weather
fluctuations in the area of operation, it may be advisable to use a temperature
controlled winterisation circuit, to ensure that the circuit is only live in cold conditions.
Note that the turning units are rated to operate down to -40°C without heaters.
For further applications guidance, see below paragraph Applications Guidance.

Fig. 89. S-band Turning unit for use with bulkhead transceiver, with 65830731 heater kit fitted
Kit Types and Contents

Table 41. Heater kit for X-band Turning units
Heater Assembly Type
Heater kit for X-band 659xx type Turning units 65901730
X-band heater assembly 65901675
X-band heater assembly installation kit 65901661
Table 42. Heater kit for S-band Turning units with masthead Transceiver
Heater kit for S-band Turning units with masthead Transceiver 65830730
S-band heater assembly transceiver cover 65830657
S-band heater assembly PM/BH cover 65830658
S-band heater assembly gearbox shaft-end cover 65830659
S-band heater assembly installation kit 65830661
Table 43. Heater kit for S-band Turning units for use with bulkhead Transceiver
Heater kit for S-band Turning units for use with bulkhead Transceiver 65830731
S-band heater attachment PM/BH cover x 2 65830658
S-band heater assembly gearbox shaft-end cover 65830659
S-band heater assembly installation kit 65830661
The technical specification of the heater kits is presented in Chapter 3 of this
document.
Installation and Commissioning

Before commencing installation, isolate power from the radar system.
Mechanical Installation – X-Band

1. Ensure the top surface of the Turning unit is clear from debris: Wipe the surface
with a damp rag to remove any accreted salt or other foreign substance.
Anything adhered to the top face of the Turning unit will reduce the effective
transfer of heat into the Turning unit housing and is therefore undesirable.
2. Remove the heating attachment from its packaging and uncoil the factory fitted
power cable. Run the power cable away from the cable gland end of the Turning
unit, over the curved top face and down from the top surface towards the hinge.
3. Keeping the power cable out of the way, place the heater assembly on the top
face of the Turning unit. Note that there is a cut-out in the heater assembly
chassis that fits over the performance monitor radome – see the figure below.

Fig. 90. Fitting heater assembly to X-band Turning unit
Fig. 91. Securing X-band heater using supplied clamps
4. The heat transfer pad on the underside of the heating assembly should sit flat
on the top face of the Turning unit. If it does not; ensure that the heating
assembly is properly aligned with the Turning unit top face and that nothing is
trapped between the Turning unit and the heating plate. It should drop into place
and make good thermal contact.
5. Referring to the figure above, fit the two side clamps, together with the disc
spring washers and vibration-proof retaining nuts. These fasten the assembly
down tightly onto the top face of the Turning unit.
6. Fit the cable-tie clamp block according to the detail given in the figure below and
fasten the cable to it using a cable tie. Secure the cable along its length, as
required.

Fig. 92. Securing X-band heater power cable
Mechanical Installation – S-Band

1. Wipe the underside of the gearbox with a clean rag, removing any accreted salt
or other foreign substance.
2. Remove the gearbox shaft-end cover from the underside of the gearbox
assembly, and again clean away any visible residue.
3. Fit the adaptor plate provided in the kit, referring to the figures below.

Fig. 93. Fitting S-band gearbox heater adaptor plate to the Rehfuss gearbox
Fig. 94. Fitting S-band gearbox heater adaptor plate to the Zurrer gearbox

4. Fit the gearbox heater assembly to the adaptor plate using the fasteners
provided as per the figure below.
Fig. 95. Fitting S-band gearbox heater to the adaptor plate
5. Remove the two Turning unit end-covers from the Turning unit, and replace
them with the heated end-covers provided in the kit as per the figures below.
Fig. 96. Preparing S-band Turning unit for fitting the heater kit
Fig. 97. Fitting the heated S-band Turning unit end covers

When fitting the heater attachments, observe the following detail:
• To ensure a long product life, the Turning unit end-cover seals and mating
surfaces should be liberally coated with the petroleum jelly provided in the
installation kit.
• To reduce corrosion and the accretion of salt, and to aid future maintenance, all
fixing hardware used (nuts, bolts, screws etc.) should be liberally coated with the
Densopaste provided in the installation kit.
• The Turning unit end-covers are fitted with a safety cord. Ensure that the safety
cord is correctly fastened between the heated covers and the Turning unit.
• The end-cover retaining screws are fitted with screw-retaining split washers –
ensure that these are not left in the threaded mounting holes on removing the
unheated covers, and that they do not snag on fitting the heated covers.
Beware that these split washers must be handled carefully, and can present a
sharp point or edge to the installer.
Electrical Installation X/S-Band

Run a protective earth conductor of minimum 4 mm² cross-sectional area from the
M6 earthing stud provided on each heater assembly to the Turning unit protective
earthing stud. Ensure that a protective earth conductor has been fitted from the
Turning unit earthing stud to the ship’s superstructure or protective earthing network.
Apply Densopaste to the earth studs, washers and nuts, once the connection is
made, to protect them from corrosion.
Run the power cable from each heater assembly to a local anti-ice/de-ice junction
box. Note that junction boxes are expected to be shipyard or local supply. Cut the
cable to length, as required. In the junction box, wire the cables into the ships power
circuits that are to be used for the heaters. Ensure that the cable entry method is
weather proof by using sealing glands.
The cable is a flat rounded cable of dimensions 10.5 x 6.5 mm with 37/0.315 tinned
copper conductors and a heavy tinned copper braid shield – see construction below.
See the VMFT manual for more details of this cable. NGSM can supply glands and
gland inserts suitable for this cable type, if required – part numbers 65830206,
65830207, 65830208 and 65830210.
Fig. 98. Cross section of cable MA00014191
The conductor connections are as follows:
• Red conductor - Live or Live 1;

• Blue conductor - Neutral or Live 2;
• Braid shield - Protective earth (connected to Heater Assy. Metalwork).
Electrical Circuit Protection
The heater circuits should be fitted with circuit protection as listed in the table below.
Table 44. Heater circuits protection

Heater Assembly Type # Circuit Breaker
X-band heater assembly 65901675 16 A Type C
S-band transceiver cover heater assembly 65830657 16 A Type C
S-band PM/BH cover heater assembly 65830658 16 A Type C
S-band gearbox heater assembly 65830659 5 A Type C

Electrical Circuit Control

Note that the heater circuits should only be live in very cold conditions, or when ice
accretion is occurring locally to the equipment. If the heating attachments are left
powered when the ambient temperature is higher than 0 °C, the service life of
turning units and masthead transceivers may be significantly reduced. It is advisable
to use a temperature-controlled winterisation circuit, to ensure that the circuit is only
live in cold conditions. For further applications guidance, see below paragraph
Applications Guidance.
Commissioning
There is no setting-up or adjustment required. Commissioning will thus consist of
checking the electrical connection and supply voltage of the heaters and verifying
that each of the heaters is active when its power circuit is energized.
The latter is best done by measuring the surface temperature of the heater
assembly housing before and after energizing the circuit. The heaters will become
appreciably warmer within a few minutes, if the power connection has been correctly
made.
WARNING!
Beware that the surface temperature of the heaters can exceed 100 °C when the
power is on. Hot surface warning labels are fitted for this reason.
Operation
Ambient Oerating Temperature
The winterization heaters should be powered only in very cold conditions, or when
ice accretion is occurring locally to the equipment. The power to the heaters should
be switched off when the outside air temperature is above 0 °C.
Operating instructions (Important Information!)

From a cold start-up in -55 °C, the Turning units reach operational temperature
within 90 minutes. There is no indication available of turning unit temperature.
If a Turning unit is operated before operational temperature is reached, the turning

mechanism will not rotate at the correct operational speed. Typically, if the correct
operational speed is not achieved within two rotations of the antenna, the transmitter
will not operate, and the transceiver will be set back to standby.
If it is repeatedly attempted to start the turning unit below operational temperature,

damage to the turning unit and transceiver can occur.
If operation is attempted and failed, it is advised to wait a further 30 minutes before

attempting again. If a second attempt fails, isolate the transceiver and turning gear
electrical supply and go aloft to check the turning gear is not seized or obstructed
with ice.
Accumulation of Ice
The heaters are not intended to de-ice the Turning unit after a long period of icing
with the heaters turned off. Ice that has accumulated while the heaters are powered
down must be carefully removed using traditional means (mechanical / steam
lances). A prolonged warm up time will loosen the ice, allowing it to be removed
carefully by hand.

Beware that some Turning unit and antenna surfaces can be damaged by impact
and sharp objects.
Applications Guidance
Winterisation Heater Eelectrical Supply and Control
Inrush Current
The inrush current into the large heaters (types 65901675, 65830657 and
65830658) at cold start-up in -55 °C is shown in the graph below.
The inrush current to the S-band gearbox heater (type 65830659) is 1/6 the level for
the large heaters – that is, peaking at 10 A RMS when started from cold in -55 °C.
Fig. 99. Winterisation heater inrush current at 230 V AC
The 15 A warm-up current reduces to 7 A within 15 minutes.

Supply Rating and Cable Sizing
The power cable to each of the large heaters requires circuit protection equivalent to
a 16 A MCB. An MCB with curve Type C is required to avoid inadvertent tripping
with the inrush current shown above.
If more than one heater is fitted, then the circuit protection, isolation and control
regime used depends on whether the supply has the capacity to deliver the total
inrush current of all heaters fitted.
It is the responsibility of the installation designer to ensure the protection, isolation

and control of platform electrical circuits are suitable for the number of winterization
kits installed.
If Supply Has Capacity for Total Inrush

If the supply has the capacity to deliver the combined inrush current, then a group of
heaters can be powered up together. Examples are given below for a main radar
installation of one X-band and one S-band radar. For other configurations, calculate
the total inrush current and total warm-up current from the graph at the beginning of
this section, or contact NGSM for further assistance.
230 V Single Phase and 208 V Cross-Phase Supply
Single phase supplies require 190 A of inrush capacity and 47.5 A warm-up current.
A Type C MCB rated at no less than 50 A would be suitable to avoid inadvertent
tripping. For a 50 A Type C MCB, the incoming main supply cable conductor cross
section will need to be at least 6 mm², depending on the rules applied and the cable
type used.

Fig. 100. 230 V single phase and 208 V cross-phase supply
415 V Three Phase and Neutral Supply

In this case the load can be shared across the three phases, such that the inrush
current on any one line of the incoming supply cable is limited to one large heater
and the S-band gearbox heater – or a maximum 70 A inrush and 17.5 A warm-up
current. The incoming breaker required would therefore be selected for protection
differentiation, rather than to avoid inadvertent tripping on inrush: - A four-pole
Type C MCB rated at 32 A minimum would be suitable. For a 32 A Type C MCB,
the incoming four conductor cable would need a cross section of at least 4 mm² per
conductor, again depending on the rules applied and cable type used.
Fig. 101. 415 V three phase and neutral supply

208 V Three Phase Supply

If a 208 V three phase supply is used, the maximum inrush on any one phase is one
large heater and the gearbox heater, which results in a maximum inrush current of
120 A on any one line, and a warm-up current of 30 A (line current is [square-root of
three] x phase current for ‘delta’ connections). For this load, a three pole 32 A
Type C breaker is suitable. The incoming three conductor cable would need a cross-
section of at least 4 mm² per conductor, depending on the rules applied and cable
type used.
Fig. 102. 208 V three phase supply
Manual Heater Switching and Isolation

Disconnector Rating
If all the heaters are to be powered on at once, then this can be done using a single
manual isolating ‘disconnector’ on the incoming mains supply. The disconnector
needs be rated to support the full inrush current. See the table below for the AC-1
utilization rating for difference supply configurations.
Switching Heater Supplies with a Contactor
If a lower rating isolating switch is preferred, then a contactor can be used to turn the
heater supplies on and off, and the isolating switch used for safety purposes only.
Isolators are typically rated at higher levels for infrequent emergency circuit
disconnection. The contactor can then be controlled using a separate low current
switch with a fused supply.
Contactors are typically specified to tolerate a make and break current three
timestheir nominal rated current. The table below shows typical contactor ratings
required for different supply configurations.
Table 45. Typical contactor

Supply Configuration 230 V 208 V 208 V 415 V
1-phase 2-phase 3-phase 3-phase &
neutral
Max total Inrush / line 190 A 190 A 120 A 70 A
Incoming MCB rating 50 A Type C 50 A Type C 32 A Type C 32 A Type C
Incoming MCB format Two pole Two pole Three pole Four pole
Incoming cable CSA 6 mm² min. 6 mm² min. 4 mm² min. 4 mm² min.
Incoming disconnector 63 A min. 63 A min. 40 A min. 25 A min.
(AC-1)
Incoming contactor nominal 63 A min. 63 A min. 40 A min. 25 A min.

Automatic Temperature Control of Heaters

Automatic temperature control of the heaters can be achieved by using a
temperature switch to bring the heaters on when the outside air temperature is
below a predetermined value. NGSM recommend that the heaters are not used in
above 0 °C.
Fig. 103. Automatic temperature control of heaters
To control the heaters using a temperature switch, suitably rated contactors are
required. The temperature switch then applies or removes power to the contactor
coil, switching the high current circuits to the heaters on and off, depending on the
outside air temperature. If the contactors do not have an integral coil suppression
device then fitting one will preserve the life of the temperature switch contacts.
Reducing Maximum Inrush and Warm-Up Current

If the main supply cannot support the total inrush current of all heaters coming on at
once, or it is desirable to use lower cable and switchgear ratings, then the heaters
should be started in sequence.
The maximum inrush in the 230 V single phase example above can be reduced from
190 A to 90 A by waiting two seconds between starting each heater. It is also
possible to reduce the required rating of the incoming supply cable and breaker to
32 A by starting two large heaters, allowing the warm-up current to reduce for 15
minutes and then start the remaining one large and one small heater.
To turn the heaters on in sequence, either the MCBs themselves can be used as
disconnectors, which may limit their operating life, or each heater can be controlled
by a separate disconnector or by a contactor with a low current switch to control it.
Reducing Maximum Currents with Automatic Temperature Control
Automatic temperature control of the heaters becomes problematic in systems
where the main heater power supply cannot support the total inrush current of all the
heaters being switched on at once. In this case, the heater supplies will need to be
switched by separate contactors, and time-delay relays will be required to switch the
heaters on in sequence, with at least two seconds between each heater being
switched on.
Maintenance and Spares

The Winterisation Heater Assemblies are not serviceable. If replacement assemblies
are required, they can be supplied separately.
Note that the installation materials are not provided with each individual heater
assembly, but are provided in the installation kit, which is available for purchase
separately, too.

Installation of Network Radome Scanners
X-Band Up Mast
The part numbers for these individual items are as follows:
• T65901675: X-band Turning unit heater assembly;

• T65830657: S-band heated transceiver cover assembly;
• T65830658: S-band heated performance monitor / bulkhead cover assembly;
• T65830659: S-band heated gearbox shaft-end cover assembly;
• 65901661: X-band winterization heater installation kit;
• 65830661: S-band winterization heater installation kit.
INSTALLATION OF NETWORK RADOME SCANNERS

X-BAND UP MAST
Introduction
This section describes all procedures required for correct installation of
the SU82-12S (4 kW) Radome 1.8 ft and SU82-01 (2 kW) Radome 1.4 ft non type
approved scanners. These units can be connected to Workboat Radar system for
radar presentation and management through ethernet connection. The video signal
acquisition is realized inside the scanner unit and it is available via ethernet on UDP
protocol.
The standard configuration supplied is the following:
• Scanner unit: SU82-12S (4 kW) or SU82-01 (2 kW);

• Power and shielded ethernet cables.
The diagrams of connection between the scanner and Workboar Radar console are
provided in Annex E. For scanner cables handling, see Annex D.
Technical specification of the scanners is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
In order to assure an ideal installation, for mounting the antenna units some general
rules must be observed:
• Install the antenna unit on a suitable platform;

• Make sure that the antenna view field is clear from obstacles on all the 360°.
The presence of structural obstacles within the radar transmission beam can
cause blanking sectors or dragging effects of the radar image represented on
the display;
• Avoid that the interconnection cable between the display and the antenna unit
covers the same path as other power supply or power cables;
• Observe the compass safety distances;
• In order to assure a correct radar emission, don’t paint the radome or the array;
• Keep the radome and the 4 or 6 ft array surfaces clean from any fumes or dust
residuals;
• Don’t wash the radar antenna with high-pressured water.

X-Band Up Mast
Typically, the radar antennas’ installations are realized as indicated in the following
figure.
Fig. 104. Typical installation of a Radome antenna
If not already available, realize a suitable platform for housing the 1.4 ft. or 1.8 ft
Radome antenna unit, or use one of the optional brackets.
Such platform must allow to easily lay out the interconnection cable and to
comfortably perform the possible maintenance activities.
For that purpose, refer to the radome overall dimensions reported in the installation
drawing below.
Fig. 105. 2 kW Radome scanner dimensions
Fig. 106. 4 kW Radome scanner dimensions
Drill the platform by using the drilling template supplied as an outfit together with the
transceiver.
Make sure that the holes machined on the platform are as parallel as possible with
respect to the ship head-stern line.

X-Band Up Mast
Besides, make sure that the radome unit orientation corresponds to that reported in
the following figure below.
Fig. 107 Radome scanner installation
Carefully open the package and secure the antenna unit to the platform by means of
the 4 bolts supplied in the delivery. The supplied M10x25mm bolts are fit for
realizing a mounting on a platform having a thickness of 5 mm.
Fig. 108. Radome scanner fitting
Lay out the interconnection cable between the display and the transceiver.
Radome Electrical Installation

Electrical Installation of Scanner Unit
The electric installation of the SU82-12S (Radome 62 cm) and SU82-01
(Radome 46 cm) and antenna units only requires that the supplied interconnection
cable is correctly connected. Carefully observe the following instructions, in order to
realize the required connections.
1. In order to remove the transceiver upper cover, unscrew the 5 screws placed on
the edge of the cover itself.
2. Remove the protection plug situated in the radome cable entry hole.

X-Band Up Mast
3. Unscrew the 32mm fastening nut placed on the interconnection cable stuffing
tube. Let the connectors’ complete interconnection cable pass through the hole,
up to bring the stuffing tube installed on the cable against the radome cable
entry hole; then let the interconnection cable connectors pass through the
locking nut of the previously removed stuffing tube. Secure the stuffing tube to
the radome, by screwing down the locking nut by means of a 32mm wrench and
by applying a force comprehended between 19 and 24 Nm.
4. Remove the metal cover of the radome connectors’ housing.
5. Connect the eight poles-mobile connector of the interconnection cable to the

Radome J5 connector, and the six poles-connector to the J8 connector. These
connectors are configured in such a way, not to allow any connection errors.

X-Band Up Mast
6. Position the interconnection cable gauze into the groove dedicated to the
connectors’ housing; remount the metal cover of the connectors’ housing and
make sure that it assures the cable gauze chassis connection.
7. Reposition the radome upper cover and screw again the screws placed on its
edge, by applying on them a light coat of silicon grease.
Connections of Radome Scanner

Table 46. J8 connector of the Radome scanner
SU82-12 Function Conductor – conductor Destination
SU82-01 section (sq. mm)
J8 RJ45
1 TXD+ WHITE/GREEN – 0.22 To RJ45
2 TXD- GREEN – 0.22 To RJ45
5 RXD- ORANGE – 0.22 To RJ45
6 RXD+ WHITE/ORANGE – 0.22 To RJ45
Table 47. J5 terminal board of the Radome scanner

SU82-12 Function Conductor – conductor Destination
SU82-01 section (sq. mm)
J5 Terminal board
1 VIN (+24V DC) BLACK 1 – AWG20 To power supply # 1*
4 VIN_RET (GND) BLACK 4 – AWG20 To power supply # 1*
7 ENABLE BLUE – AWG22 To safety switch
8 ENABLE_RET WHITE – AWG22 To safety switch
Note: * - The two feedings needed, can come from the same power supply.

Sensor Connections
SENSOR CONNECTIONS
For the connection of the MFD with navigational sensors, use double core screened
cable in the insulating shell, category TP5. The screen is connected to earthing on
the sensor side. Where the level of electromagnetic field is insignificant, “twisted
pair” type unscreened cable may be used. As the electric current in the cable does
not exceed 20 mA, the conductors’ cross section is of no importance. The maximum
length of the cable will depend on the type of interface and is shown for each
specific sensor in the appropriate connection schedule.
The block diagram of connection between the sensors and MFD is provided below
(for more detailed information, see diagrams presented in Annex E – Annex J):
Fig. 109. Sensors connection
You should select a suitable connection schedule for each sensor.

Interface and power cables must be laid in cable routes, fixed and marked
with labels.
Fig. 110. AIS transponder, sensors and MFD connection

Workstation Installation
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION
The MFD Workstations consist of the following elements:
• RS6B computer;
• TPC24 computer for Planning station and Back of the Bridge workstation;
• TFT monitor;
• ES6 keyboard with trackball, or NSI keyboard with trackball;
• Radar Integrator Board RIB6, or RIB6B (optional for NS MFD);
• Power connection board X1;
• Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS6, or Weidmuller CP DC UPS 24V 20A/10A, or
other UPS IEC 60945 approved (optional);
• Data Collector Unit DCU6, or DCU Raytheon NautoPlex 8 (optional);
• Ethernet switches 8xRJ45 EDS-G308, EDS-G509-T, or IE-SW-BL08-8TX, or
Lantech IES, IGS, LGS series;
• WAGO Ethernet Programmable Fieldbus Controller 750-882 for BNWAS;
• WAGO modules for Conning (optional).
For connection the all MFD units, see diagrams presented in Annex E – Annex G for
different scanners and diagrams in Annex I for NS 4000 Dual ECDIS.
Dongle Installation
After the computer has been mounted securely in its place, connect the dongle
to the computer’s printer port, as marked “DONGLE” (see picture below).
The dongle should be connected to the printer port of a personal or industrial
computer before the software installation.
Fig. 111. RS6B LPT port for the dongle
The MFD System will not operate unless the dongle is connected to the computer.
Description of the dongle is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
RS6B Computer Installation

Part No.: 18131501.
Transas RS6B computer is the next generation hardware platform for Transas
software. RS6B marine computer has same form fit function as Transas previous
RS6. The computer has a fanless design with one removable hard drive in front.
The RS6B is based on the Intel Core i5 520E processor and comes with 4 serial
ports, 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 6 USB hosts, digital input/output channels, and a
storage socket, offering high performance and versatile peripherals for marine
applications.

Mounting
Specification of RS6B computer is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
The RS6B Marine Computer has been pre-installed with two brackets on both ends
of the computer. Use two screws per side to attach the RS6B Marine Computer to a
wall or cabinet.
Use two screws for each bracket and attach the bracket to the rear of the RS6B
Marine Computer.
Fig. 112. RS6B mounting
Wiring Requirements
This paragraph describes how to connect serial devices to the embedded computer.
You should read and follow these common safety precautions before proceeding
with the installation of any electronic device:
• Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and
device wiring paths must cross make sure the wires are perpendicular at the
intersection point;
Note: Do not run signal or communication wiring together with power wiring in the
same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal
characteristics should be routed separately.
• Use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires
should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that shares similar
electrical characteristics can be bundled together;
• Keep input wiring and output wiring separate;
• It is advisable to label the wiring to all devices in the system.

Appearance
Fig. 113. RS6B front view
Fig. 114. RS6B rear view
LED Indicators
Table 48. LED Indicators
LED Name LED Color LED Function
Power Green Power is on and functioning normally
Off Power is off or a power error exists
Storage Red (on) Storage is inserted and detected
Red (blinking) Storage is reading/writing
Off No activity
LAN Green 100 Mbps Ethernet mode
Yellow 1000 Mbps (Gigabit) Ethernet mode
Off No activity or 10 Mbps Ethernet mode

Display Connection
RS6B computer has D-SUB 15-pin (female) and DVI-I connectors on the rear panel
to connect VGA and DVI-I displays.
Use VGA output for connection WS to monitor.
Use DVI-I output for connection WS to VDR or to monitor working in extended or

clone mode. If the monitor has no DVI-I input or in case of connection to VDR, DVI-
I/VGA adapter can be used.
It is recommended COM port of monitor to connect to serial port COM3 of RS6B

computer.
Note: If Navi-Radar 4000 application will be used, it is necessary to change video

RAM Total Gfx Mem from 256 MB to 512 MB in BIOS when using D3D
rendering (SOLAS-compliant Overlay mode must be set in the System
Configuration utility on the page “Additional settings” of the panel
“Workstation” (see Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph
Workstation Settings, item 5). RAM 512 MB should be set only on the
computer with radar application. These changes are not recommended for
the ECDIS computer, because it reduce total amount of available memory.
Network Connection
Plug your network cable into the embedded computer’s Ethernet port. The other end
of the cable should be plugged into your Ethernet network. When the cable is
properly connected, the LEDs on the embedded computer’s Ethernet port will glow
to indicate a valid connection.
The 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN port uses 8-pin RJ45 connectors.
The LED indicators on the right top and right bottom corners glow a solid green color
when the cable is properly connected to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network. The LED will
flash on and off when Ethernet packets are being transmitted or received.
The LED indicators on the left top and left bottom corners glow a solid yellow color
when the cable is properly connected to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network. The LED
will flash on and off when Ethernet packets are being transmitted or received.
Fig. 115 Network connectors
Note: In order to avoid MFD software freezing, it is necessary to disable the all
unused network adapters in the Device Manager.
Serial Device Connection

Use a serial cable to plug your serial device into the embedded computer’s serial
port. Serial ports 1 and 2 (COM1 and COM2) have male DB9 connectors and can be
configured for RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 communication by software. Meanwhile,
serial port 3 and 4 (COM3 and COM4) run RS-232 serial communication with DB9
connectors. Additionally, 4 NMEA serial ports with Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connectors are also available on the rear panel of the computer.

The location and the pin assignments for the serial ports are shown in the following
figures:
Fig. 116. Serial ports
Fig. 117 Serial connectors
Digital Input/Output Channels Connection

The RS6B computer offers four digital input channels and four digital output
channels on the rear panel allowing users to connect to various I/O devices (see
figure above). Use Phoenix 3.81-mm compatible connectors to connect to the
devices.
SATA Storage Installation

The RS6B Marine Computer has one storage slot for installing 2.5-inch SATA II
SSD/HDD. To install the SSD/HDD drive, follow these steps.

1. Remove the two screws and then pull out the handle to take the cover out of
the slot.
2. Attach the SSD/HDD with two screws on the back of the cover.
3. Place the cover back into the slot, and fasten the screws. Meanwhile,
there’s a storage protection lock on the right of the slot. Turn the key
clockwise to lock the slot, and counter-clockwise to unlock the slot.
Power Connection
The RS6B computer offers 24 VDC power input with the terminal block. If the power
is supplied properly, the Power LED will light up. To power on the RS6B computer,
connect the “terminal block to power jack converter” to the RS6B computer's DC
terminal block (located on the rear panel), and then connect the power. Make sure
you have connected to the correct pin. Press the Power switch button on the front
panel to turn on the computer. It takes about 30 seconds for the system to boot up.
Once the system is ready, the Power LED will light up.
Fig. 118. Power connection

“Garbage” Data Elimination

It may happen so that “garbage” data is received on NMEA ports if they are not
connected to any data source. This data will cause no harm, but may look strange.
“Garbage” data is easy to eliminate, even though it does not interfere with our
applications. We suggest to short unused NMEA inputs with a jumper-wire between
RA-RB on the NMEA plug.
Fig. 119. Jumper-wire connection
This jumper-wire is installed in all deliveries as shown below.
Fig. 120. Jumper-wire installation
Please be aware to remove it during installation in order to use the NMEA input.
TPC24 and PanelPCi7 Computers Installation

General
TPC24 Computer
Part No.: 18131119.
The TPC24 computer is based on the Intel® Celeron P4505 processor.It have 4
serial isolated RS422/485 ports, 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 4 USB hosts, and storage
sockets. The unit has a dual input power supply which will accept both AC and DC
input, ensuring that they are compatible with all power systems on all vessels. If both
inputs are connected, the units will be powered by AC. If AC power is disconnected,
it will automatically switch over to DC without affecting the operation of the unit.
It makes it possible to use AC as primary power and a 24V battery as secondary

power, eliminating the need for expensive UPS systems. It is also fanless with no
moving parts inside which will prolong lifetime and reduce service costs.
The TPC24 computer is the workstation which is used as “Back of the Bridge” and/or
Planning station for installation of ECDIS PREMIUM MFD and/or NAVI-Planner
software.
ATTENTION!
DO NOT install NAVI-Radar and BAM Server applications on TPC24 computer!
ATTENTION!
DO NOT install ICE charts on TPC24 computer!

ATTENTION!
Track Control System TCS 4000 software module is not allowed on the “Back of the
Bridge” station!
Technical specification, dimensional and installation drawings of the computer are

presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
PanelPCi7 Maritime Multi Computers Series X

The PanelPCi7 computers (PPCi7) are based on the Intel® Core™ i7-620LE
processor. PPCi7 computers have 4 serial isolated RS422/485 ports, 2 Gigabit
Ethernet ports, 4 USB hosts, and storage sockets. The unit has a dual input power
supply which will accept both AC and DC input.
The Series X Panel Computer range is a flexible all in one monitor and PC solution,
designed and type approved for the professional marine segment.
With cast aluminium, compact and sleek by design chassis, the units can be desk
mount or console integrated.
The Series X Panel Computer feature: Glass Display Control™, LED Backlight
Technology, full dimming, multipower, touch screen, optical bonding, sunlight
readability and ECDIS calibration.
19”/24”/26” PPCi7 computers are used as NR4000 MFD type approved Radar
workstations with 12/25/30 kW scanners.
15”/19”/24” PPCi7 computers are used as Workboat Radar/ECS workstations with

Network Radome or 4 kW Open Array scanners.
Technical specification and dimensional drawings of the computers are enclosed

in Chapter 3 of this document.
Installation and Mounting Requirements

• Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the product. The
air inlet and outlet openings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which
restrict ventilation are not permissible.
• Do not install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), as this will cause
heat to build up inside the unit which will damage the LCD panel. To prevent this
problem, it is recommended installing the unit in a vertical position (±30
degrees) to improve the airflow through the unit.
• To further improve the cooling of the unit, it is recommended installing cooling
fans underneath blowing upwards into the unit air inlet. This may be required in
high temperature applications and also when there is reason to expect
temperature problems due to non-optimal way of mounting.
• Exposure to extreme direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the
temperature of the unit, and might under certain circumstances lead to
overtemperature. This point should already be taken into consideration when the
bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows,
ventilation, etc.).
• Space necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures
and for maintenance, must be provided.
• Mounting position must carefully be selected to avoid heavy vibration and
acoustic noise.

• The distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard compass or
the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic
protection distance. This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic
system of the compass to the nearest point on the corresponding unit
concerned.
Connections
Use only high quality shielded signal cables.
Fig. 121. Cable entries and connectors
Any cable should generally be kept as short as possible to provide a high quality
input/output. The maximum signal cable length will depend on the signal resolution
and frequency, but also on the quality of the signal output from the computer/radar.
Layout of the connectors is presented in the figure below:
Fig. 122. Connection area of TPC24 and 15/19/24/26” PPCi7 computers
COM Module 4 x RS-422/RS-485 ECDIS/NMEA is installed in the expansion area of

the unit. Connect and secure cables to the Phoenix Terminal Block 3.81.
Fig. 123. COM module illustration and pinning

To reduce tension of the cables you connect, secure them with a cable tie to the
available chassis hinges located near the connectors as shown in the figure below:
Fig. 124. Cables fixing
Note: The unit is required to be properly grounded to the body of the ship via the
grounding screw located on the unit (see figures above). The wire used
should have a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm2.
230VAC/50Hz or 115VAC/60Hz power cable must be connected to “AC IN” power
input (Std IEC inlet).
24VDC power cable is connected to “24V DC” input via Phoenix 2pin 1927564
MSTB 2,5/2-GF-5,08 THT connector. Required polarization should conform to the
markings on the connector area of the unit. Ignoring the markings on the unit or its
add-on modules might damage the unit and/or external equipment in which end,
warranty will be void.
Fig. 125. 24 VDC power connection
Operation
WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
Please note, that it take some time for the display to warm and providing correct
display of ECDIS colors. Time can be 20-45 minutes depending on the surrounding
temperature.
Please note, that use of the brightness or contrast control may inhibit visibility of
information, particulary when using the night colour tables

The units are designed by using HATTELAND® Glass Display Control™ (GDC)
touch technology to allow interactivity adjusting brilliance (brightness) and control
power on / off with the use of illuminated symbols. Note that none of the symbols
shown below are visible as they are all backlight illuminated when the unit has
suitable power connected.
Fig. 126. User controls overview
• Light Sensor:
Used to sense level of ambient light in the surrounding environment in order to
adjust the image brightness automatically for “best eye viewing” conditions. This
sensor is not visible for the eye or has any illumination behind to indicate its
position. Further, by touching or covering this area will naturally make the
automatic brightness adjustment inoperable after a small delay!
• Action Indicators:
– HDD - whenever there is a storage device activity (HDD/SDD read or write
operations) this area will illuminate and blink in accordance with the read/write
operations while the unit is powered.
– SERVICE - built in functionality to determine when the unit requires service in
order to perform within preset factory standards. This area will illuminate
constantly until the unit is powered off.
Note that by touching these symbols no action will be performed or has been
assigned.
• Brightness Adjust:
Brilliance / Brightness adjustment of the displayed image is adjusted by touching
the (-) or (+) illuminated symbols. The entire area of text and symbols are
always visible as long as the unit is powered.
Note that only the (-) and (+) are touch sensitive while the “*” and “BRILLIANCE”
symbols are not.
• ECDIS Status / Indicator:
For unit that has been factory ECDIS calibrated the text “ECDIS” will illuminate
in green constantly as long as the unit is powered. The “+” and “-” symbols will
illuminate in red when the Brightness/Brillance is adjusted either above or below
ECDIS factory calibration point.
To be able to stay within ECDIS calibrated range, please assure that both the
“+” and “-” are not illuminated and that “ECDIS” text remains illuminated during
operation. Note that by touching these symbols no action will be performed or
has been assigned.
• Power ON/OFF:
This symbol and all text will illuminate in red when suitable power is connected
and the unit is turned off. When the unit is on and operating, this symbol will
change into green color and illuminate constantly.

– Power ON: to turn the unit on, verify that the symbol is illuminated in red
(indicates suitable power is connected) and touch the power symbol and hold
until the the symbol changes to green light or a image appears on the screen.
– Power OFF: to turn the unit off, touch the power symbol and hold until it either
illuminate/change from green to red or the image on screen disappears.
MPC-2240X PanelPC Installation

Introduction
The MPC-2240 series of panel computers features advanced Intel processors - 3rd
generation Ivy Bridge Core or Celeron - matched to 4 GB of system memory,
delivering a reliable, high-performance platform of wide versatility for use in
industrial marine environments. With its RS-232/422/485 serial, NMEA 0183, and
Gigabit Ethernet LAN ports, the MPC- 2240 panel computer supports a wide variety
of serial- and marine-specific interfaces alongside high speed IT communications, all
with native network redundancy.
The MPC-2240 series comes with a range of standard display enhancements useful
in industrial environments (including 0 to 100% full range dimming, 178°/178° wide
viewing angles, optional optical bonding, and/or multi-touch screen), as well as
Moxa’s innovative SavvyTouch display controls.
The MPC-2240 series of panel computers are compliant with several industrial
marine standards, such as IEC 60945 4th, IEC 61174, IEC 61162, DNV2.4, and
IACS E10, verifying their resilient durability in marine operations.
An optional IP65-rated unibody shell provides strong additional protection against

the harsh conditions found in marine environments. The MPC-2240 delivers a
rugged, type approved, high performance and user friendly panel computer perfect
for ECDIS navigation systems and other marine IBS applications.
MPC-2240 panel computers feature Smart OSD Control, LED backlight technology,
full dimming and multi-power all as standard. In addition there are options such as
SSD storage device, multiple interface configurations and several OS options
Technical specification, dimensional and installation drawings of the computer are

presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
Features
• 24 inch full HD display screen;
• Color calibrated for ECDIS compliance;
• Fanless design;
• SavvyTouch display controls;
• 3rd Generation Intel® Core™ or Celeron® processor (Default: Celeron®
1047UE, 1.40 GHz with Intel® HD Graphics);
• Built-in NMEA 0183 and software selectable RS-232/422/485 interfaces;
• Dual AC/DC power supply units.

Appearance
Fig. 127. MPC-2240X front view
Fig. 128. MPC-2240X bottom view
SavvyTouch Display Control Buttons

The MPC-2240X comes with SavvyTouch display controls situated in the lower right
corner of the screen. These intelligent buttons will light up automatically when your
fingers draw near. Refer to the following table for more information on each button.
Table 49. Display control buttons

Name Displayed Control Function/Color Legend
Color
Green Computer is powered on and functioning normally
Red Power standby and system shut down
Power
Off Power is off
White +: To increase brightness of panel
-: To decrease brightness of panel
Brightness
Off System functioning normally
Red System hardware error
Info
Red (on) Storage drive is functioning properly
Red (blinking) Drive is accessing or writing data
Storage
Off Drive is offline
White Displays the brightness mode
Off Panel brightness out of ECDIS standard range
Display mode

WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
display of ECDIS colors. Time can be 20-45 minutes depending on the surrounding
temperature.
information, particulary when using the night colour tables
Installation and Handling Notes

Before installing and mounting the MPC-2240X panel computer, please read the
following notes:
• The MPC-2240X is designed for mounting on a desktop, wall, or an FDMI/VESA

interface. Please refer to the relevant mechanical drawings in the next few
sections for detailed instructions on each method.
• To prolong product lifespan good ventilation must be maintained around the
machinery. The chassis’ heat-sink area MUST keep clear from other heat
generating items, otherwise damage to the system motherboard may occur. The
minimal distance that must be maintained between the heat sink and another
heat source is 150 mm.
• DO NOT install the unit horizontally (i.e.: lying down, on its back), as the heat
will not be dissipated effectively and will damage the LCD panel. To assure
adequate heat dissipation the unit should be installed vertically, or within a ±40
degrees slope off the vertical.
• Exposure to extreme direct sunlight may cause a considerable increase in the
temperature of the unit, and under certain circumstances might lead to
overheating. Please take this point into consideration when the bridge
equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows,
ventilation, etc.)
• Exposure to strong vibration or loud, chronic noise might affect functionality
and/or product lifetime. It is advised to take vibration and noise into
consideration during system assembly and installation, so that the mount point
may be carefully selected to avoid exposure to undue vibration.
• For maximum safety, at least two persons should work together to lift, place,
and fasten the computer at its mount point. Before you lift or move the
computer, first verify both it is turned off and no power is being supplied to the
system. In addition, make sure you have prepared the correct screws for the
mounting.
Desktop Mounting
The MPC-2240X comes with optional brackets that allow you to install the panel
computer on a horizontal surface such as a desktop. Please keep in mind that desktop
mounting is only offered as a temporary mount; permanent use of the MPC-2240X as a
desktop computer is not recommended.
Three round head screws are required for each bracket. See the figure below for screw
specifications and their torque value.

Fig. 129. Desktop mounting
Place the MPC-2240X panel computer on a clean, flat, well-ventilated desktop. For
better ventilation, leave some space between the MPC-2240X and other equipment.
Do not place equipment or objects on top of the computer, as this might damage the
computer’s internal components.
Note: These desktop brackets are intended for temporary use when conducting lab
tests, and are not intended to be used in permanent deployments.
Wall Mounting
The MPC-2240X comes with 14 optional clamp mounts that allow for installation onto a
wall (where space has been cut out to accommodate the rest of the hardware), or into
computing stations where a flush mount is desired. The maximum thickness of the
surface to which the computer may be clamped is 11 mm. For a secure mounting, all
14 clamps must be used. The clamp arms are fastened into slots on all four sides of
the MPC-2240X.
Use the short M4 SUS (stainless) screws to fasten the clamp arms to the MPC-2240X
mounting slots, as shown in the magnified inset in the diagram just below. Next, use
the clamps to fasten the computer to its mounting point; please note the torque value
that is shown in the figure inset below.

Fig. 130. Wall mounting

FDMI/VESA Mounts
The MPC-2240X also comes with an optional VESA mount assembly. Six flat head
screws and four round head screws are required to fasten the VESA mounting bracket.
See the figure below for detailed screw specifications and torque values.
Fig. 131. FDMI/VESA mounting
An additional four screws (not included in the kit) are required to mount the computer
on a VESA rack. For this purpose, use M6 screws with a length between 10 and 12
mm.
Wiring Requirements
This paragraph describes how to connect serial devices to the embedded computer.
You should read and follow these common safety precautions before proceeding with
the installation of any electronic device:
• Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring and
device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular at the
intersection point.
Note: Do not run signal or communications wires together with power wires in the
same conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal characteristics
should be routed separately.

• Use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine which wires
should be kept separate and which bundled together. The rule of thumb is that
wiring that shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together.
• Keep input wiring and output wiring separate.
• It is advisable to label all wires used in the system.
ATTENTION!
Safety First!
Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or wiring the MPC-2240X.
Wiring Caution!
Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire and common wire.
Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire
size. If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring could overheat,
causing serious damage to your equipment.
Temperature Caution!
Be careful when handling the unit. When the unit is plugged in, the internal
components generate heat, and consequently the outer casing may feel hot to the
touch. We recommend taking the following precautions to minimize heat build-up
within the display:
• Position the display within ±40° of the vertical;
• Install an external fan to increase airflow upwards through the display if (a) the
display is not positioned within ±40° of the vertical, (b) the ambient temperature
exceeds 25°C, or (c) the display is used in a location with minimal ventilation.
Important Safety Precaution!
Even though the display is rated to operate within the IEC 60945 standard of -15 to
55°C for marine applications, it is best to ensure that the ambient temperature does
not exceed 25°C. Doing so will increase the life of your display and minimize service
costs.
Grounding
Before you power on the MPC-2240X, first ground it. Proper grounding and wire
routing help limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run
the ground connection from the ground screw to the grounding surface prior to
connecting the power.
Fig. 132. Grounding
ATTENTION!
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface, such as
a metal panel.

Connecting Data Transmission Cables

This section describes how to connect the MPC-2240X panel computer to serial
devices and the network.
Connecting to the Network

Plug the network cable into the MPC-2240X Ethernet port. The other end of the cable
should be plugged into your Ethernet network. When the cable is properly connected,
the LEDs on the embedded computer’s Ethernet port will glow to indicate a valid
connection.
The 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet LAN port uses 8-pin RJ45 connectors.
See the following figure for the location of the Ethernet ports, the pinouts and the
descriptions for these ports.
Fig. 133. Network connection
Connecting Serial Devices

Serial ports 1 and 2 have male DB9 connectors and can be configured for RS-232,
RS-422, or RS-485 communications. See the figure below for the location of the serial
ports and the pin assignments.
Fig. 134. Serial devices connection
For instructions on how to set the serial port for RS-232/422/485 communications, refer
to the examples provided on the software CD.

Connecting NMEA 0183 Devices

The MPC-2240X comes with eight NMEA 0183 ports on the bottom panel. Check the
following figures for the location of these ports and the pin assignments.
Fig. 135. NMEA 0183 devices connection
Connecting Speakers or Headphones

The MPC-2240X panel computer comes with standard 3.5 mm monaural line-in and
line-out ports for connecting microphone, speakers, and headphones. See the
following figure for detailed location.
Fig. 136. Speakers/headphones connection
Connecting a PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse

The MCP-2240-MP computer comes with two PS/2 connectors to connect to a PS/2
keyboard (upper connector) and PS/2 mouse (lower connector). See the following
figure for the detailed location.
Fig. 137. PS/2 keyboard/mouse connection
Connecting to USB Devices

The MPC-2240X comes with 4 USB 2.0 ports on the bottom face of the computer. The
ports may be used, among other things, for an external flash disk or hard drive for
storing large amounts of data. You can also use these USB ports to connect to a
keyboard or a mouse.
Fig. 138. USB devices connection

Installing SATA Hard Disks

The MPC-2240X has two trays for SATA hard disks. To install the 2.5-inch SATA
hard disks, follow these instructions. For the best reliability, we suggest you use solid
state drives.
1. First, locate the SATA trays on the bottom surface of the computer. For ease of
installation, we strongly suggest you lay the MPC-2240X on a non-abrasive
surface with its display panel face down.
2. Insert the drive door key and turn it left to unlock the cover of the storage trays.
3. Open the tray cover by lifting the lever on the tray door.
4. Install the SATA drive into the tray. Make sure you insert it in the correct
direction. Close the tray by pushing the door lever inwards. If you cannot
smoothly secure the hard drive in the slot, it is most likely that you have inserted
the drive in the wrong direction.
5. Make sure you have securely fastened the door lever. Use the same method to
install another SATA hard disk into the other tray. If you need to install only one
hard drive, we strongly suggest you install it in the tray nearest the display
panel. If you need to install two hard drives, install the first disk in the tray
nearest the display panel first, and then install the second disk in the other tray.
When finished, use the protection key to lock the storage trays in place.
6. To remove a drive, simply pull up the door lever and fold the tray door back. The
drive should automatically eject part way.
Fig. 139. USB devices connection
Transas ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball Installation

Keyboard Part No.: 18151701.
Trackball Part No.: 18151702.
Specification of ES6 keyboard with trackball is presented in Chapter 3 of this

document. For connection ES6 keyboard with trackball to RS6B computer, see
diagrams enclosed in Annex E – J of this document.

ES6 Keyboard Configuration Switch

ES6 keyboard connected to computer can work in following master modes: ES6, or,
ES3, or ES4. For position of the Configuration switch and connections to the RS6
computer in the different master modes, see table below:
Table 50. ES6 keyboard master modes

Master modes Configuration switch position Connection to the computer
Full ES6 mode (default) 8 USB
Full ES6 mode 7 PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse;
COM port RS232
ES3 compatible mode 0 PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse;
COM port RS232
ES4 compatible mode 9 PS/2 keyboard;
PS/2 mouse
Configuration switch settings 1–6 designates CAN network node addresses when
keyboard is used as an ES6 slave (secondary) keyboard.
ES6 Keyboard Connections

CAN
Both ends of the CAN network must be terminated with 120 ohm resistor.
Node number is selectable 0–9 by jumpers (configuration switch).
Node number 0 (ES3 mode), or 7 (ES6 mode), or 8 (ES6 mode), or 9 (ES4 mode) is
considered master node, and must be selected for the keyboard connected to PC by
PS/2 or USB. This must be true even if only one node exists.
Information received by the master from the PC is sent out on the CAN-bus, and slave
units will act accordingly (indicators on/off etc.). Information received by the master
from the CAN-bus will be transferred to the PC if there is no risk for misinterpretation
(e.g., if any key is down, no keys on other keyboards may be sent to PC).
Units with node numbers 1–6 are considered peripheral (slave) units. Each unit must
have a unique number (not two with the same number).
Data from the keyboard is transferred to the CAN-bus. Data from the CAN-bus
(regarding indicators, background light etc.) is received and action is taken.
Fig. 140. ES6 keyboard. View of 24 VDC and CAN connectors
For connection ES6 keyboard to trackballs, see “ES6 Keyboard with Three Trackballs.
Connection Diagram” in Annex J.

RS232
Data from the PC received by the master will be transferred to the CAN-bus and
also handled locally.
Data regarding function keys and encoders will be sent to the CAN-bus by slaves
and to the RS232 port by the master.
USB
Pointer data from CAN-bus will be transferred to USB port if node number 8 is set
and no PC is connected to PS/2 mouse port.
Keyboard data from CAN-bus and keyboard matrix will be transferred to USB port
if node number 8 is set and no PC is connected to PS/2 keyboard port.
Fig. 141. ES6 keyboard. View of USB, PS/2 and RS232 connectors
Fig. 142. ES6 keyboard. View of configuration switch
Note: For correct functioning of the ES6 keyboard connected to RS6 computer,
“USB2 Enhanced Host Controller” must be disabled in Device Manager.
Before this, ES6 should be disconnected from RS6 computer.
Note: For correct functioning of the ES6 keyboard connected to RS6B computer,
ES6 must be connected to RS6B via USB 1.1 port on the rear panel.
Trackball Connections
The ES6 Trackball can be connected using the CAN Interface to a CAN master
(the ES6 keyboard) or using the USB Interface to connect to a computer’s USB Host.
Switch 4 on the DIP-Switch is used to set CAN (switch OFF) or USB (switch ON)
interface active.

Switch 1–3 set CAN node address (must be in range 1–7):
1= 1 = on 2 = off 3 = off 4 = off

2= 1 = off 2 = on 3 = off 4 = off
3= 1 = on 2 = on 3 = off 4 = off
4= 1 = off 2 = off 3 = on 4 = off
5= 1 = on 2 = off 3 = on 4 = off
6= 1 = off 2 = on 3 = on 4 = off
7= 1 = on 2 = on 3 = on 4 = off
One trackball may be powered from each ES6 keyboard. Other trackballs must have
external 5VDC power supplies (or supply from other ES6).
USB uses a USB-B contact to connect to the USB Host and CAN uses a 4-pin
Phoenix contact for CAN-Bus IN (supplied 5 VDC) and a 3-pin Phoenix contact
for CAN-Bus OUT.
It is possible to supply power by USB port even if CAN interface is selected.
Both ends of the CAN network must be terminated with 120 ohm resistor.
Fig. 143. ES6 Trackball. View of CAN, USB connectors and DIP-switch
ES6 Trackball Switch

General
ES6 Trackball Switch is designed to control up to three workstations, choosing these
stations by means of three buttons.
The system consists of two units connected together by a standard straight RJ45
cable:
• Trackball unit:
Fig. 144. View of ES6 Trackball unit

• Interface unit:
Fig. 145. View of Interface unit
The Interface unit may be placed conveniently close to the workstations.

The Trackball unit can be placed in a suitable remote location i.e. in the armrest of
officers’ chair.
The Interface unit is connected to the ES6 CAN busses of the different workstations.
Up to four workstations can be connected. The Interface unit must also be
connected to 24VDC power supply (see below item Connections).
The Interface unit consists of a circuit board placed in a box that can be mounted by
screws or put on a DIN rail. The circuit board has all the connectors for power,
trackball, digital I/O and CAN connectors up to four workstations.
By pushing one of the three buttons on the trackball unit the corresponding
workstation is selected. This means that all CAN messages from the trackball will be
routed to the CAN bus connected to that specific workstation.
Fig. 146. ES6 Trackball unit dimensions

Connections
Connect 24 VDC power to the Interface unit.
Connect ES6 keyboard of the WS1-WS3 to CAN1-CAN3 respectively on the

Interface unit as shown on the drawing below.
Pressing left push button on the Trackball unit will select CAN1 (WS1) and all
actions made on the trackball must operate WS1 only. Press middle button to select
WS2, check that trackball will operate WS2. Press right button to select WS3, check
that trackball will operate WS3.
Fig. 147. ES6 Trackball switch connections
J11-J14 connectors of the Interface unit are reserved for future use.
Radar Integrator Board RIB6/RIB6B

RIB6 Part No.: 18011201.
RIB6B Part No.: 18011202.
Specification of RIB6/RIB6B is presented in Chapter 3 of this document.
ATTENTION!
Check that technical characteristics of the connected equipment match characteristics of
the RIB6/RIB6B Input/Output signals specified in Chapter 3, section Hardware
Technical Specification, paragraph Radar Integrator Board RIB6/RIB6B, item
Electrical Characteristics.
For connection of RIB6 unit to different types of scanners, see Annex J.

ATTENTION!
In the event of connection two or more (up to four) scanners to MFD, set appropriate
IP addresses for each RIB6/RIB6B as described in items below Checking and
Setting RIB6 IP Addresses and Checking and Setting RIB6B IP Addresses
See also “Connection Four Scanners to MFD. Block Diagram” in Annex J.
Cables
Cables are run and installed in accordance with the cabling schedules.
RIB6/RIB6B is connected with the Ethernet ports of RS6B Computer by means of a

standard category 5 screened cables used in Ethernet 10/100 Mbit networks. The
cable contains 4 twisted pairs within the common screen and has RJ-45 connectors
on both ends. Connection of cable cores with the connector contacts is identical
on both sides.
External lines of Video and Trigger signals to the RIB6/RIB6B are connected by
means of coaxial cables with BNC connector plug.
External lines of Bearing, Heading, RS422 Control signals to the RIB6/RIB6B are
connected by means of screw connectors. Any types of cables with a wire cross
2
section of up to 1.5 mm can be used. In case of considerable length of external
cables, a screened cable is recommended.
RIB6B Connections
For connection, see the figure below “RIB6B layout drawing”.
• 24 V nominal supply voltage: use connector X11 (pin 1 is minus, pin 2 is plus);
• Ethernet port 1:
– Use connector X4 (IP: 10.8.1.209, Netmask: 255.255.255.0,
Gateway: 10.8.1.240);
– It will send out video data and can receive a TCP connection on port 4172
(Max 1 connection globally).
Gateway: 10.8.2.240);
– It will send out video data and can receive a TCP connection on port 4172
(Max 1 connection globally for RIB6/RIB6B).
• Video:
– Connect to J3;
– Termination can be selected using “SW5”. The following combinations are
possible:
50 Ohm 1: ON 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: OFF;
75 Ohm 1: OFF 2: ON 3: OFF 4: OFF;
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF.

• Trigger pulse:
– Connect to J2 (singled ended);
possible:
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF;
Composite 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: ON.
X15 – closed.
– Connect to J2 (differential input);
– Termination must be set using “SW2”:
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF.
X15 – open.
• Bearing pulse:
– Connect to X9;
possible:
560 Ohm pull-up 1: ON 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: OFF;
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: ON 3: OFF 4: OFF;
Composite mode 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: ON.
• Heading pulse:
– Connect to X9;
possible:
• RS 422 control signal – connect to X10.

Fig. 148. RIB6B layout drawing
RIB6 Connections
For connection, see the figure below “RIB6 layout drawing”.
• 24 V nominal supply voltage: use connector X11 (pin 1 is minus, pin 2 is plus);
Gateway: 10.8.1.240);
– This port can be used after Linux has booted. It will send out video data and
can receive a TCP connection on port 4172 (Max 1 connection globally).
Gateway: 10.8.2.240);
– This port must be used for firmware upgrades. (It is possible to use Port 1, but
a few extra commands are needed);
– This port can be used after Linux has booted. It will send out video data and
can receive a TCP connection on port 4172 (Max 1 connection globally).
• Video:
– Connect to J3;
possible:
75 Ohm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF;
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: OFF 4: ON.

• Trigger pulse:
– Connect to J2;
possible:
1,2 kOhm 1: OFF 2: OFF 3: ON 4: OFF;
• Bearing pulse:
– Connect to X9;
possible:
• Heading pulse:
– Connect to X9;
possible:
• RS 422 control signal – connect to X10.
Fig. 149. RIB6 layout drawing

Signal Input Resistor Selector

General Recommendation
If the video signal is too weak for the normal work of the RIB6/RIB6B, it is required
to increase the input resistance, with small deterioration of the picture’s quality.
For RIB6 and RIB6B, SW2 – SW5 DIP-switches are shown in the figures below.
For RIB6, example of DIP-switches positions on the SW1 – SW5 for GEM
10 kW (SU70-10N/S), Consilium and BridgeMaster E (NGSM) scanners are shown
in the table below:
Table 51. RIB6 status SW1 – SW5 switches
Type of Radar Signal switch Input 1 2 3 4
GEM 10 kW Mode select (SW1) Master ON OFF OFF OFF
X-band scanner
Video (SW5) 50 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2) 50 Ohm ON OFF OFF OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3) 560 Ohm pull-up ON OFF OFF OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4) 560 Ohm pull-up ON OFF OFF OFF
Consilium Mode select (SW1) Master ON OFF OFF OFF
scanners
Video (SW5) 75 Ohm OFF OFF ON OFF
Trigger Pulse (SW2) 75 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3) 1.2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4) 1.2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF
BridgeMaster E Mode select (SW1) Master OFF OFF ON OFF
(NGSM)
Video (SW5) 75 Ohm OFF OFF ON OFF
scanners
Trigger Pulse (SW2) High OFF OFF OFF OFF
Bearing Pulse (SW3) Not used
Heading Pulse (SW4) Not used
RIB6 SW5 (Video) DIP-switch:
1 – Composite;
2 – 50 Ohm;
3 – 75 Ohm;
4 – 1.2 kOhm.
Note: Default settings of DIP-switches positions on the SW2 – SW5 are the
following: 2 - ON, the rest - OFF.
Note: Jumper X15 (Trigger signal termination) must be CLOSE for Consilium
10/12.5/25 kW X-band and 30 kW S-band radars, and it must be OPEN for
BridgeMaster E (NGSM) 10 kW X-band radar.

For RIB6B, example of DIP-switches positions on the SW2 – SW5 for different
scanners are shown in the table below:
Table 52. RIB6B status SW2 – SW5 switches
Consilium Video (SW5) 75 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
scanners
Trigger Pulse (SW2) 75 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
X-band;
S-band Bearing Pulse (SW3) 1.2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4) 1.2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF
NGSM (Sperry, Video (SW5) 75 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
BME)
Trigger Pulse (SW2) High OFF OFF OFF OFF
X-band;
S-band Bearing Pulse (SW3) Not used
Heading Pulse (SW4) Not used
RIB6B SW5 (Video) DIP-switch:
1 – 50 Ohm;
2 – 75 Ohm;
3 – 1.2 kOhm;
4 – N/A.
Note: Jumper X15 (Trigger signal termination) must be CLOSE for Consilium
scanners, and it must be OPEN for NGSM scanners.
Examples of RIB6 switches positions for different radars are shown in the table
below:
Table 53. RIB6 status SW2 – SW5 switches for different type of the radars
Raytheon Pathfinder Video (SW5) 1,2 kOhm OFF OFF OFF ON
Trigger Pulse (SW2) Not connected OFF OFF OFF ON
Bearing Pulse (SW3) Not connected OFF OFF OFF ON
Composite mode
Heading Pulse (SW4) Not connected OFF OFF OFF ON
Composite mode
JRC JMA 9000 Series Video (SW5) 50 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
JRC JMA 5300 Series Video (SW5) 50 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
Sperry Rascar Video (SW5) 50 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
Furuno FR 21XX, Video (SW5) 50 Ohm OFF ON OFF OFF
FR 28XX Series,
Furuno FR 15XX Series
Bearing Pulse (SW3) 1,2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF
Heading Pulse (SW4) 1,2 kOhm OFF ON OFF OFF

Fig. 150. RIB6 resistor selectors
Fig. 151. RIB6B resistor selectors
When interfaced to NGSM (BME) scanners for radar overlay, you should connect to
Sperry Interswitch (part no: 65842 or 95848) on TSDx connector (TSDC and SKVC
or TSDD and SKVD – tested on 2-WAY Interswitch with following jumpers settings:
LK1 1/2, LK2 1/2, LK3 1/2).
If Interswitch is not available, a Sperry Slave Junction Box (part no: 65849a) is
required. Connect to TSDB (see above section Installation of Scanners NGSM
30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast, paragraph Slave Junction Box).
When everything connected and Trigger signal properly distinguished, red LED on
front of RIB6 blinks equally to heading pulse information reception.

Fig. 152. RIB6 to BME Interswitch or Slave Junction Box connection
For connection of RIB6 to some radar types, see diagrams “Connection of RIB6 to
Some Radar Types. Connection Diagrams” enclosed in Annex J of this document.
For fine tuning RIB6/RIB6B, see Chapter 2, section Radar Adjustment, paragraph
Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6/RIB6B.
Checking and Setting RIB6B IP Addresses

Checking RIB6B IP Addresses
In the event of absence of the connection between PC and RIB6B, check values
RIB6B IP addresses. For this, connect RS232 port of PC to RS232 service COM of
RIB6B:
1. Start terminal emulation program (i.e. “Hyper Terminal”) and enter name,
for example “RIB6B”:
2. Select port number of PC:

3. Configure the terminal for 115200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, none
flow control. Press “Apply” and “OK” buttons:
4. Restart RIB6B by means of small buttons on RIB6B panel:
5. When the words “Press any key” appear, press any key.
If the loading continues, perform the restart by using the “Reset” button.

6. For printing configuration, type “printenv” and press <Enter> button:
7. Check IP and Net mask values for LAN1 and LAN2 in correspondence to values
given below:
For the first type (factory default), RIB6B values must be following:
– Lan1ip Address:10.8.1.209;
– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2ip Address: 10.8.2.209;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the second type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the third type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.

For the fourth type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
Setting RIB6B IP Addresses
1. Set the IP addresses by using the following commands (press <Enter> button
after entering each command):
– Setenv lan1ip <value>;
– Setenv lan1mask <value>;
– Saveenv.
2. Wait until new data is recorded.
3. Then switch off/on RIB6B power and check preservation of all settings.

Checking and Setting RIB6 IP Addresses

Checking RIB IP Addresses
In the event of absence of the connection between PC and RIB6, check values RIB6
IP addresses. For this, connect RS232 port of PC to RS232 service COM of RIB6:
1. Start terminal emulation program (i.e. “Hyper Terminal”) and enter name,
for example “RIB6”:
2. Select port number of PC:
3. Configure the terminal for 115200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, none
flow control. Press “Apply” and “OK” buttons:

4. Restart RIB6 by means of small buttons on RIB6 panel:
5. When the words “Hit any key to stop autoboot” appear, press any key.
If the loading continues, perform the restart by using the Reset button.
6. For printing configuration, type “printenv” and press <Enter> button:

7. Check IP and Netmask values for LAN1 and LAN2 in correspondence to values
given below:
For the first type (factory default), RIB6 values must be following:
– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the second type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the third type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.
For the fourth type, RIB6B values must be following:

– Lan1mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Lan2mask: 255.255.255.0.

Setting RIB6 IP Addresses

1. Set the IP addresses by using the following commands (press <Enter> button
after entering each command):
– Saveenv.
Wait until new data is recorded.
Then switch off/on RIB6 power and check preservation of all settings.

Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6

General
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 3.4AH – Part No.: 18160200.
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 7.2AH – Part No.: 18160202.
Phoenix UPS kit 220VAC/24VDC 12AH – Part No.: 18160201.
MFD systems may be powered from 24 VDC ship’s emergency power supply or from
any UPS type approved in accordance with standard IEC 60945 such as UPS6.
This paragraph describes all the procedures required for the correct installation and
performance check of the UPS6.
UPS6 installation consists of installation the following units:
• EMC Filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A;

• Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20;
• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20;
• Battery Module 24 V DC, 3.4 Ah QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH (7.2 or 12 AH).
Fig. 153. View of UPS6
Technical specification of UPS6 is given in Chapter 3.
For connection of the units, see also connection diagrams in Annex E – Annex J.

Installation of the Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit

QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20
Fig. 154. Structure
Table 54. Structure

No. Comments
1 AC input: 85...264 V AC input voltage, 45...65 Hz frequency
2 DC output: 24 V DC output voltage (default), can be set between 18 and 29.5 V DC
3 Active POWER BOOST switching output
4 DC OK output active
5 DC OK output floating
6 Potentiometer (covered) 18V DC...29.5 V DC
7 “DC OK” LED
8 “BOOST” LED
9 Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107/30
WARNING!
The device contains dangerous live elements and high levels of stored energy.
Never carry out work when the power is turned.
The housing temperature can reach high values depending on the ambient
temperature and the load of the device.
In order to guarantee sufficient convection, we recommend observing the following

minimum distance to other modules: 5 cm in the vertical direction and 0.5 cm in the
horizontal direction. A lateral distance of 5 mm, and in case of active components,
that of 15 mm is necessary for proper functioning of the module.
The power supply unit can be snapped onto all DIN rails in according with
EN 60715. They must be horizontal (connecting terminal blocks above and bellow).

Fig. 155. Convection
Installation Position
Fig. 156. Mounting position drawing
• Slim-style installation:
Fig. 157. View of slim-style position

– Assembly:
Position the module with the DIN rail guide on the upper edge of the DIN rail,
and snap it in with a downward motion.
– Removal:
Pull the snap lever open with the aid of a screwdriver and slide the module out
at the lower edge of the DIN rail.
• Low-profile installation:
Low-profile installation can be achieved by mounting the device at right-angles
to the DIN rail. Mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107/30) as described in the
figure below. No additional mounting material is required. Fixing screws: Torx
T10 (torque 0.8...0.9 Nm).
Fig. 158. View of low-profile position
Connection
Use a screwdriver with the correct blade width for wiring. The cable cross sections
listed in the table below can be connected.
Note: For reliable and safe-to-touch connections, strip the cable ends according
to the table.
Table 55. Connecting cables
Solid [mm²] Stranded [mm²] AWG Torque [Nm] Stripping Length [mm]
Input 0.2–6 0.2–4 18–10 0.5–0.6 7 mm
Output 0.2–6 0.2–4 12–10 0.5–0.6 7 mm
Signal 0.2–6 0.2–4 18–10 0.5–0.6 7 mm
The 100...240 V AC connection is established using the L, N and PE screw connections.

The device can be connected to 1-phase AC networks or to two of the phase conductors
of three-phase systems (TN, TT or iT systems in according with VDE 0100-300/IEC
60364-3) with nominal voltages of 100 V AC...240 V AC.
Fig. 159. Connection to various network forms drawing

Note: For operation on two of the phase conductors of a three-phase system,

an isolating facility for all poles must be provided.
• Input:
Fig. 160. View of Input
– Protecting the primary side:

The device must be installed in according with the regulations as in
EN 60950. It must be possible to disconnect the device using a suitable
isolating facility outside the power supply. The primary side line protection,
for example, is suitable. For device protection, there is an internal fuse.
Additional device protection is not necessary.
– Recommended backup fuse for mains protection:
Power circuit breaker 10 A or 16 A, characteristic B (or identical function).
In DC applications, a suitable fuse must be wired in upstream.
Note: If an internal fuse is triggered, there is most probably a malfunction
in the device. In this case, the device must be inspected in the factory!
• Output:
Fig. 161. View of Output

– Connecting the Output:

The connection is established using screw connections on the screw
connection of the DC output:
24 V DC: “+” and “-”;
DC OK switching output active: “DC OK” and “-”;
DC OK output floating: “13” and “14”;
POWER BOOST switching output active: “I < IN” and “-”.
At the time of delivery, the output voltage is 24 V DC. The output voltage can
be set on the potentiometer.
– Protecting the Secondary Side:
The device is electronically protected against short circuit and idling.
In the event of a malfunction, the output voltage is limited to 35 V DC.
Note: Make sure that all output lines are dimensioned according to the maximum
output current or are separately protected. The cables on the secondary side
must have sufficiently large cross sections in order to keep the voltage drops
on the lines as low as possible.
• Signaling:
The active signal output, the floating signal contact and the active POWER
BOOST switching output are provided for function monitoring. The DC OK-LED
and the BOOST-LED also enable the function evaluation of the power supply
unit directly on the operation site (see table below).
Table 56. Signaling
I < In (20A) I > In (20A) Uout < 0.9 x Un (24V)
“DC OK” LED ON ON Flashing
“BOOST” LED OFF ON ON
Active DC OK switching ON ON OFF
output
Floating DC OK output Closed Closed Open
Active POWER BOOST ON OFF OFF
switching output
Meaning Normal operation of POWER BOOST Overload mode, e.g.,
the power supply operation, e.g., to consumer short circuit
(Uout > 21.5 V) start loads or overload
– Floating contact:
The floating signal contact opens and signalizes a drop in the output voltage
as set of more than 10%. Signals and ohmic loads of up to 30 V and currents
of up to 1 A can be connected. For heavily inductive loads such as a relay,
a suitable protection circuit (e.g., damping diode) is necessary;
Fig. 162. Floating contacts drawing

– Active signal outputs:

The 24 V DC signal is applied between the “DC OK” and the “-” connecting
terminal blocks or between “I < IN” and “-” and can carry up to 1 mA. By
switching from “active high” to “low”, the DC OK signal output signalizes when
the output voltage is more than 10% below the output voltage. The DC OK
signal is decoupled from the power output. It is thus not possible for parallel
switched devices to provide external supply. The 24 V DC signal can be
directly connected to a logic input for evaluation. The POWER BOOST signal
output signalizes that the nominal current is exceeded;
Fig. 163. Active signal outputs drawing
– Signal loop:
Monitoring two devices: use the active signal output of device 1 and loop
in the floating signal output of device 2. In the event of malfunctioning, a
common alarm is output. Any number of devices can be looped in. This signal
combination saves wiring costs and logic inputs.
Fig. 164. Signal loop drawing
Installation of the Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use

QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20
Fig. 165. Structure

Table 57. Structure

No. Comments
1 Input voltage 24 V DC unbuffered (internal fuse 25 AT)
2 Output voltage 24 V DC buffered (the device is idling-proof and short-circuit-proof)
3 24 V battery module connection
4 Floating PDT (11, 12, 13): Alarm
5 Floating PDT (21, 22, 23): Battery Mode
6 Floating PDT (31, 32, 33)
7 24 V supply voltage, maximum current limit 0.2 A for grouped contacts 11, 21, 31
8 Remote shutdown (R1, R2)
9 Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107
10 Red LED: Alarm
11 Yellow LED: Battery Mode/Battery Charge
12 Green LED: Power In OK
13 Buffer time setting 0.5–30 minutes
14 Battery module/Service setting selection
CAUTION!
Never carry out work when the power is turned, this is highly dangerous.
Mounting
The uninterruptible power supply unit together with the battery module can be
snapped onto all DIN rails according to EN 60715 and should be mounted
horizontally (input terminal blocks facing downwards).
Note: No minimum spacing to other modules at the sides is required for proper
operation of the device.
• Narrow Mounting Position:
The device is supplied ex works for a narrow mounting position.
Fig. 166. Narrow mounting position
– Assembly:
Place the module with the DIN rail guide way on the top edge of the DIN rail
and then snap it downwards.
– Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the module
from the bottom edge of the DIN rail.

• Flat Mounting Position:

A flat mounting position can be achieved by mounting the module onto the DIN
rail at a 90° angle. To do this, mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107) as shown
in the figure below. No additional assembly material is required. Mounting
screws: Torx T10 (torque 0.8...0.9 Nm).
Fig. 167. Flat mounting position
Connections
Fig. 168. Connection diagram
The cable cross sections which can be connected are shown in the table below:
Solid [mm²] Stranded [mm²] AWG Torque [Nm]
Input 0.5–16 0.5–10 20–6 1.2–1.5
Output 0.5–16 0.5–10 20–6 1.2–1.5
Battery 0.5–16 0.5–10 20–6 1.2–1.5
Signal 0.2–4 0.2–2.5 24–12 0.5–0.6
For reliable and safe-to-touch connections: strip 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the input
and output side connector ends and 7 mm (0.28 in.) from the signal connector
ends:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating
temperatures >75°C (167°F). To meet GL requirements, unused terminal
compartments should be closed.

• Input:
The QUINT-DC-UPS is connected to the 24 V DC output of the power supply via
the “Input +” and “Input -” terminal blocks. The output is isolated from the input
by the internal diode. The stored power is only supplied to the output.
The device is protected against over current and short circuit by an internal
input fuse. Additional device protection is not required.
Note: If an internal fuse is blown, this is most probably due to a device fault. In this
case, the device should be checked in the factory.
• Output:
All devices that must be supplied without interruption in the event of a supply
voltage failure (“Buffered Load”), are connected to the “Output +” and “Output -”
terminal blocks of the DC output. It is recommended that all other loads, which
do not require buffering (“Unbuffered Load”), are connected to the 24 V DC
output of the power supply. This increases the buffer time, as this time depends
on the output current. The internal diode ensures that the buffered loads
are isolated from the unbuffered loads.
• Battery module:
Note: Adjust Battery capacity according to real battery you have on board.
The battery module is connected to the QUINT-DC-UPS via the “Battery +”
and “Battery -” terminal blocks. To interrupt the charge/discharge current of
the battery module, the “Battery module selection” selector switch 14 must be
set to “Service” (see figure below).
Fig. 169. “Battery Module Selection” selector
The QUINT-DC-UPS is optimized for use with QUINT-BAT/24DC type battery

modules.
The following battery modules are recommended:
– QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH (Order No. 2866349);

– QUINT-BAT/24DC/7,2AH (Order No. 2866352);
– QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH (Order No. 2866365).
Following successful installation, the capacity of the connected battery module
must be selected using the “Battery module selection” rotary switch 14.
Note: The fuse on the battery module must be removed when installing or replacing
the battery module.

• Signaling outputs:
The signal outputs are connected via terminal blocks 11/12/13 (4), 21/22/23 (5)
or 31/32/33 (6). The contacts are floating contacts. The plug-in bridge provided
can be used to supply +24 V to grouped contacts 11, 21, 31. This means that
N/C contacts 12, 22, 32 and N/O contacts 13, 23, 33 can be evaluated as
switching outputs with 0 V and +24 V voltage levels.
• Remote Shutdown:
The device has a UPS remote shutdown function for specific shutdown.
Remote shutdown must be deactivated for the device to switch to buffer mode
in the event of a supply voltage failure.
– Remote Shutdown Off:

The “Remote shutdown R1” and “Remote shutdown R2” terminal points
are short circuited (e.g., with a plug-in bridge) OR. The “Remote
shutdown R2” terminal point is supplied with a 24 V DC voltage.
The QUINT-DC-UPS switches to buffer mode in the event of a supply
voltage failure.
– Remote Shutdown On:
The “Remote shutdown R1” and “Remote shutdown R2” terminal points
are not connected.
All LED’s are off.
The QUINT-DC-UPS does not switch to buffer mode in the event of a
supply voltage failure, instead the device is shut down. When the supply
voltage is reapplied, the battery module is charged and the device
remains off until remote shutdown is deactivated.
Connected loads are supplied as long as the supply voltage is present.
Fig. 170. Remote shutdown
Setting options on the device

• Buffer Time Setting:
Buffer mode can be exited after a predefined time has elapsed or by external
shutdown. If the device is to be shut down after a specific time has elapsed,
the time can be set via the selector switch 13 on the front of the device. When
the supply voltage is reapplied, the device can switch to buffer mode again.
ATTENTION!
The buffer time setting must be set to value not less than 1 minute according
to MFD requirements.

Note: Adjust Buffer time tmax to ”∞”.

• Battery Module Setting:
Before startup, the capacity of the battery module used must be set on the
device via the selector switch 14. When replacing the battery, the selector switch
must be set to “Service”.
Fig. 171. Settings
Method of Operation
In the event of a power failure at the output, the QUINT-DC-UPS supplies all
connected devices with a 24 V DC voltage without interruption at a load current up
to 20 A. When the 24 V supply voltage is applied, the connected battery module is
charged. In the event of a supply voltage failure, the battery module is connected
to the output, and the stored power ensures that all connected devices continue
to operate without interruption. The professional signaling via function LED’s and
floating PDT contacts enables reliable evaluation of all the main operating states.
• Output Voltage:
In normal operation, the QUINT-DC-UPS output voltage corresponds to the
usual supply voltage. If the supply voltage drops more than 1 V in the space of
0.1 seconds or falls below the minimum threshold of 22 V, the device switches
to buffer mode. If the output voltage drops below 20.4 V in buffer mode, this is
indicated by the Alarm indicator. If the output voltage drops to 19.2 V because
the battery module is flat, the device is shut down completely. When the supply
voltage is reapplied, the device automatically switches on again. The device is
electronically short circuit- proof and idling-proof.
• Signaling:
Three floating PDT contacts and three indicators are provided for function
monitoring.
Table 59. Status Indicators
Key/Indicators Green Yellow Red
Power IN OK Bat. Mode/Charge Alarm
Supply voltage OK, battery module ON Flashing OFF
charging
Supply voltage OK, battery module ON OFF OFF
charged (normal operation)
Buffer mode OFF ON OFF
Battery module flat OFF OFF ON
Battery module quality test negative; ON OFF ON
No battery module;
Service
Buffer time elapsed; OFF OFF OFF
Remote shutdown activated

Table 60. Status Contacts

Key/Output Bat. Charge Bat. Mode Alarm
Supply voltage OK, battery module 31–33 21–22
charging
Supply voltage OK, battery module 31–32 21–22
charged (normal operation)
Buffer mode 31–32 21–23
Battery module flat 31–32 21–22 11–13
Battery module quality test negative; 31–32 21–22 11–13
No battery module;
Service
Buffer time elapsed; 21–22 11–13
Remote shutdown activated
where:
– xx – xx: contact closed;
– 1x Alarm, 2x Battery Mode, 3x Battery Charge;
– x1 group contact, x2 N/C contact, x3 N/O contact.
• Temperature Response:
The charging rate of the connected battery module depends on the temperature.
• Testing the Battery Module:

A quality test is carried out on the battery module once a week and its presence
is verified every minute. A negative test result is indicated by the Alarm indicator.
Connection of UPS Alarms to RS6 Computer

It is necessary to connect Quint UPS alarms to RS6 computer due to fact that UPS
has no acoustic information about its problems.
WARNING!
Remove jumper connecting 24V-11-21-31 terminals on UPS if it is not removed you
can damage UPS or RS6 computer.
Do not remove jumper from R1-R2.
Connect 4 wires as shown on drawing below and on diagrams presented

in Annex E – Annex J:
• First input from RS6B computer to UPS alarm output: “Low Battery” alarm
(Normally Closed contact terminals 11-12).
• Second input from RS6B computer to UPS Battery mode output: “Power Supply
Failure” (“Buffer Mode”) alarm (Normally Closed contact terminals 21-22).

Fig. 172. Connection of UPS alarms to RS6 computer
For alarms settings in the System Configuration utility, see below Chapter 2,
section MFD Configuration, paragraphs Sensor Settings item 7 and
MFD Settings, item 25. See also below section BAM Configuration, paragraph
Alerts Page.
Alarms Test
To test UPS alarms you have to:
• For “Power Supply Failure” (“Buffer Mode”) alarm test, switch power off from the
switchboard where UPS is connected.
• For “Low Battery” alarm test, take out fuse from battery pack.
Installation of the Battery Modules QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH,

QUINT-BAT/24DC/7.2AH, QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH
QUINT-BAT/24DC are maintenance-free lead gel rechargeable batteries for use
with QUINT-DC-UPS 20A/40A.
Fig. 173. View of battery modules

Safety and Warning Notes

In order to guarantee safe operation of the device, please read these instructions
thoroughly! The operating instructions for the particular QUINT-DCUPS must also be
observed.
The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel.
The corresponding national regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must be observed.
The VDE 0510 regulations regarding storage, installation and operation of
the rechargeable battery module must be observed.
The site in which the rechargeable battery module is located must have sufficient
ventilation. The rechargeable batteries may only be disposed of when fully
discharged and in acc. with the valid regulations.
The fuse must be removed from the rechargeable battery module when work is
being performed!
When replacing rechargeable batteries, please note that only rechargeable batteries
from the same batch may be used together!
Device Connections
The connection to QUINT-DC-UPS is established using the black (-) and red (+)
connecting cables. The fuse is not inserted until installation has been completed:
1 – DC fuse.
2 – Connection cable, red = +24 V, black = 0 V.
3 – DIN rail adapter QUINT-ADAPTER/4 (only QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH).
Installation
In conjunction with adapter QUINT-ADAPTER/4, it is possible to snap the
rechargeable battery module onto all 35 mm DIN rails in acc. with EN 60 715,
or “keyhole” fixing eyelets can be used for rear wall mounting (drilling diagram
on reverse). Only QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH is supplied with QUINTADAPTER/4.
QUINT-ADAPTER/4 (Order No. 28 66 85 7) can be ordered separately for other
rechargeable battery modules.
The module should be installed horizontally in the coolest part of the control cabinet.
For the device to function in the manner intended, it is not necessary to observe any
minimum spacing to other modules.
Fig. 174. Installation of battery module

Weidmüller UPS Installation

CP DC UPS 24V 20A/10A
Part. No.: 18162320.
Introduction
The UPS control units CP DC UPS 24V are built-in installation units featuring IP20
protection. They should be installed in an appropriate enclosure (such as an
electrical cabinet or distributor box) which provides a sufficient level of protection so
that live current-carry components cannot be touched and so that dust and water
cannot penetrate the unit. The UPS control units, along with the battery modules CP
A Battery 24V DC and Weidmüller PRO-M power supplies, can be assembled into a
DC-UPS. The DC-USV bridges mains interruptions and mains voltage dips and
ensures an interruption-free power supply to connected loads.
Note: Selection charts for choosing the right battery according buffering time and
load current can be found in the Technical specification for battery modules
enclosed below in Chapter 3.
The UPS control unit detects the failure or drop down of the DC input voltage and
switches immediately over to battery mode. The battery module takes over
supplying the connected load for a specified time. The UPS control unit will switch
back to normal mode when the main supply is reinstated and will recharge the
battery module. Battery charging follows a temperature-compensated IU
characteristic.
An easy to use LED display and multiple signal outputs provide comprehensive
status monitoring. The connected batteries are tested cyclically for availability.
Fig. 175. View of CP DC UPS 24V 20A/10A
General Installation Instructions

Please note the following rules for a reliable installation and a reliable operation of
the UPS:
• The electrical facility should be set up by qualified specialists in compliance with

the applicable electrical regulations, standards and directives.
• Observe the regulations and standards according DIN EN 50272 (VDE 0510).
• You must ensure that the facility remains voltage-free (i.e. a power supply
cannot be reconnected).
• Ensure protections against electrical shock.
• Ensure a sufficient convection.

WARNING!
The battery module is an active power source with high short circuit current
capability. A short circuit can cause injury to the human body or damage machinery.
It is therefore imperitive that all battery fuses are removed before starting any work.
UPS Commissioning Instructions

The following points must be noted:
• Remove the bridge at terminals 1 and 2 to avoid any unintended battery

operation during installation and initial test (interlock).
• Set the battery selector switch into „Service“ position.
• All system components must be fully installed and wired.
• Check polarities and the solid fit of all terminal connections.
• Lay in the bridge at the terminals 1 and 2 (release battery operation).
• Lay in the battery fuses.
• Set the selector switch in the required “Ah” position.
• Switch on power supply.
Mounting
The UPS control units are latched onto a horizontally mounted DIN rail in
accordance with EN 60715).
Fig. 176. DC UPS mounting
Electrical connections
The control unit is designed for construction of a complete DC UPS system with the
following connection options:
• Input / Output / Battery / Temperature sensor:

The UPS control unit is fitted with terminals for connecting the power supply, battery
module and the output load. Please ensure correct polarity even if the voltage input
and the battery connection are protected against incorrect polarity. Two additional
terminals for connecting the temperature sensor of the Weidmüller battery module
CP A Battery 24V DC are provided. The temperature sensor should be connected to
the UPS controller as this will provide an optimal charging of the battery.

Fig. 177. DC UPS connection
LED Displays
The UPS control unit is fitted with a triple color LED for displaying the battery module
capacity and with three DUO LEDs for displaying operating status and failures.
Fig. 178. LED display

Event LED (Gr/Ye) LED (Ye/Rd) LED (Ye/Rd)
Normal/Buff. Temp./Alarm Cut-off/Bat.
Fault
DC IN OK, no Interlock battery charged Green x x
(≥ 85%)
DC IN OK, no interlock charge (< 85%) Green blinking x x
Battery operation, no Interlock (no DC Yellow x x
IN, battery is available)
Interlock/Service x Red blinking Yellow blinking

Fig. 179. LEDs block diagram

Event LED (Gr/Ye) LED (Ye/Rd) LED (Ye/Rd)
Normal/Buff. Temp./Alarm Cut-off/Bat.
Fault
Failure: No temperature sensor or x Yellow x
temperature outside of range,
temperature sensor is activated via DIP
switch
Failure: Overload Yellow Red Yellow blinking
Failure during battery operation, cut-off Yellow Red Yellow
due to:
Time out buffering time;
Discharge voltage of < 19.2 V DC;
Overload
Battery failure; x Red Red
Battery almost discharged
Interlock
The battery operating mode can be blocked with the interlock input. The bridge laid
in at the works between the (+) Interlock and (-) Interlock terminals enables the
battery operation. The battery operating mode can be blocked by removing this
bridge. Alternatively, an external, potential-free contact can be used for enabling or
blocking. Laying in an active 24 V signal also enables the battery operation.

Fig. 180. Interlock
DIP Switch
A DIP switch (4-pole) is located on the front. The signals (Alarm, Buff. and Charg.)
can be inverted with the DIP switches INV3, INV4 and INV5.The DIP switch “Temp.”
can be used to deactivate the temperature sensor.
Fig. 181. DIP switch
Signal Relay and Transistor Outputs

The UPS is fitted with 3 status relays with potential-free CO contacts for remote
control. Active 24 V signals can be used on the additional transistor outputs for an
easy connection to a PLC system. For the best logic adaption, the output signals
can be inverted via the DIP switch located on the front.
Table 63. Signal relay and transistor outputs
Event Relays: Relays: Relays:
“Alarm” “Buff.” “Charg.”
Input voltage OK OFF OFF ON
Battery is charging (< 85%) (11-14)* (21-22)* (31-34)*
Input voltage OK OFF OFF OFF
Battery charged (> 85%, normal (11-14)* (21-22)* (31-32)*
operation)
Battery operation (buffering) OFF ON OFF
(11-14)* (21-24)* (31-32)*
Failures:
Battery voltage very low;
Battery failure;
Service; ON OFF OFF
Remote shut-down of battery operation (11-12)* (21-22)* (31-32)*
(Interlock);
Overload;
Battery cut-off:
After time out of buffering timer or due
reaching deep discharge threshold
*) Contact between the terminals xx-yy.

Basically the alarm relay has a negative logic, means it´s energized when everything
is OK and is de-energized in case of an alarm.
By the way, if you need a positive logic, then you can invert the alarm by setting the
DIP switch (see above item DIP Switch).
The UPS controller is frequently looking whether a battery is available (once a
minute). If not, then the alarm relay will be de-energized.
The same can happen in buffering mode when the battery is low and will be cut-off.
Connection of UPS Alarms to RS6 Computer
It is necessary to connect Quint UPS alarms to RS6/RS6B computer due to fact that
UPS has no acoustic information about its problems.
Connect 4 wires as shown on drawing below and on diagram “Dual ECDIS.

Weidmuller UPS. Connection Diagram” presented in Annex J:
• First input from RS6B computer to UPS alarm output: “Low Battery” alarm
(Normally Open contact terminals 11-12).
• Second input from RS6B computer to UPS Battery mode output: “Power Supply
Failure” (“Buffer Mode”) alarm (Normally Open contact terminals 21-24).
Fig. 182. UPS Buffering and Low Battery alarms connection
For alarms settings in the System Configuration utility, see below Chapter 2,
section MFD Configuration, paragraphs Sensor Settings item 7 and
MFD Settings, item 25. See also below section BAM Configuration, paragraph
Alerts Page.
Alarms Test
To test UPS alarms you have to:
• For “Power Supply Failure” (“Buffer Mode”) alarm – switch power off from the
switchboard where UPS is connected.
• For “Low Battery” alarm – take out fuse from battery pack.

Battery Selector Switch / Replacing Battery

The battery selector switch must be set to the right “Ah” position for optimal battery
charging and setting of the internal monitoring function. In the event, that a battery or
replacement battery is not available, the “No Batt.” Switch setting can be used. All
battery relevant signals, failures and displays will be suppressed.
For replacement or any work on the battery module, the selector switch must be set
into “Service” position. This will switch off the charger. The following sequence must
be adhered to:
• Set selector switch into „Service“ position;

• Remove the battery fuses intergated in the battery module;
• Disconnect the wiring or the battery plug;
• For commissioning, the reverse sequence must be used.
Fig. 183. Battery selector switch
Note: Adjust Battery capacity according to real battery you have on board.
Settings for Battery Operation
There are 3 different operating modes:
• Battery shut-down after preset time (0.5…45 min);

• Battery shut-down on reaching deep discharge threshold of 19.2 V DC (∞);
• Battery deep discharge up to 15 V DC (w/o ∞).
When shutting down at the preset time, the battery voltage is also monitored for
deep discharge threshold. If the deep discharge threshold is reached before the time
expires it will also be shut down. In operating mode “w/o ∞”, the battery will be
discharged up to 15 V DC. This action is likely to cause damage to the battery.
Therefore this type of battery deep discharge should only be chosen if required for
safety-related reasons.
Fig. 184. Settings for battery operation
Note: Adjust Buffer time to ”w/o ∞”.

Changeover Switch for Output Current
The changeover switch (20A/10A) can be used to set the overload detection on the
output (during battery operation).
Fig. 185. Changover switch for output current

Power Supply Unit PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A

Part. No.: 18162322.
Introduction
PROmax offers diverse solutions for demanding automation.
Our high performance and durable PROmax switchmode power supply units are
designed for especially demanding requirements. PROmax reliably copes with
continuous overload of up to 20% or short-term peak loads of 300% occurring with
high control cabinet temperatures.
High boost capability and full power are also made possible in a wide temperature
range. Our switch-mode power supply units can be used around the world and are
also suitable for confined spaces thanks to their low width.
Together with our uninterruptible DC USPs, the diode modules or CAP modules, you
can create a power supply solution that is tailored to your requirements.
Fig. 186. View of PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A
Installation
The electrical facility should be setup by qualified specialists in compliance with the
applicable electrical regulations. All regulations and standards which apply locally
should be followed. In particular, this includes the following measures:
• Protection against electrical shock;

• Arrangements for a switching or disconnecting mechanism to isolate the power-
supply circuit;
• Sufficient space for fusing and connection lines;
• Allocation of sufficient ventilation (50-mm clearance for air intake from above
and below);
• Installation on a mounting rail (in compliance with DIN 50022-35) in housing that
is appropriate for the environmental conditions. Be sure to install in a vertical
position.
The unit can be snapped onto the mounting rail with no need for tools (refer to figure
below).
Fig. 187. Mounting

Connection
The electrical connection should only be carried out by a qualified technician. The
following points must be observed:
• The entire electrical facility should be disconnected from the power supply
before the installation begins;
• You must ensure that the facility remains voltage-free (i.e., power supply cannot
be reconnected);
• Use a screwdriver with the proper blade width (refer to the Technical
specifications enclosed below in Chapter 3.);
• All connection lines should be seated and fastened securely. Pay particular
attention to the protective earth connection (observe the connecting torque!).
Fig. 188. With DC connection, note polarity
Fig. 189. Connection to various network forms drawing

Mains Voltage and Fusing

The device can be connected to either a three-phase or DC power network. Two-
phase operation is also possible. Be sure that the poles are connected properly
when connecting to a DC system. The device is equipped with internal fuses for
every phase. Thus no external device protection is required. The recommended
back-up fuse is listed in the Technical specifications enclosed below in Chapter 3.
Note: When the internal fuse is triggered, the probable cause is an internal
malfunction. The device must then be inspected in the factory!
Output
The front potentiometer can be used to adjust the output voltage in the 22.5...29.5
range. A green LED signals that the device is ready for use.
IV Curve
The power supply unit has an IU curve as shown in the figure below. This allows it to
be operated safely, even in shortcircuit spans, without a shutoff mechanism
(no hick-up). The device returns immediately to routine operations after the short
circuit has been cleared or after the surge has passed.
Boost and peak-current capabilities are listed in the Technical specifications
enclosed below in Chapter 3.
Fig. 190. Output characteristic curve
Parallel connection option

Up to three power supply units can be connected in parallel in order to increase
performance. The output voltages must then be set uniformly (±50 mV) and the
wiring must be symmetric to ensure that the current is distributed evenly (refer to
figure below).
Fig. 191. Parallel connection

Redundancy
The key to a redundant power supply is that is consists of fragmented power
supplies which are independent from each other. Such a power supply makes use of
isolating diodes (diode modules).
Temperature Characteristics
These power supply units are designed to operate in a temperature range of -25 to
+70 °C. A derating of 2.5 %/K takes effect above 60 °C, as shown in the figure
below. The unit will shut off if it overheats as a result of excessive environmental
conditions. It will then automatically restart after the necessary cool-down period.
Fig. 192. Temperature characteristics
WARNING!
Suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations, or
nonhazardous locations only.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD.
Do not disconnect equipment while the circuit is live or unless the area is known to
be free of ignitable concentrations.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD.
Substitution of any component may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
WARNING:
Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of materials used
in the relays.
Use copper conductors only in accordance to UL 508.

CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH/12AH

CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4 Ah - Part No.: 18162323.
CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12 Ah - Part No.: 18162325.
Introduction
The battery modules in the Weidmüller product family CP A Battery 24V DC contain
maintenance-free valveregulatedlead-acid (VRLA) batteries with absorbed glass mat
(AGM) technology. The devices are designed to comply with IP20.
Fig. 193. View of CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH/12AH
Application
The battery modules in the Weidmüller product family CP A Battery 24V DC can be
combined with the UPS control devices in the Weidmüller product family CP DC
UPS 24V and the power supplies in the Weidmüller product family PRO-M to build
uninterruptible DC power supplies (DC-UPS).
The DC-UPS bypasses line interruptions and line voltage dips and provides a
reliable supply voltage to the connected loads.
Fig. 194. Battery connection
Installation
For safe installation and safe operation the following must be observed:
• The module may only be installed by qualified personnel familiar with the
national and international laws, directives and standards that apply to this
region;
• Observe the safety regulations in accordance with DIN EN 50272 (VDE 0510);
• The entire electrical facility should be disconnected from the power supply
before the installation begins;
• Take measures to protect against electrical shock;
• Ensure sufficient ventilation.

WARNING!
Avoid flames, sparks and embers in the vicinity of the battery module.
Remove the fuse(s) before any work on battery module or the entire uninterruptible
power supply (UPS).
Prevent a short circuit across the battery terminals.
Note the correct polarity of the device.
Mounting
Horizontal or vertical mounting is achieved either by latching onto the mounting rail
in accordance with EN 60715 or by screwing on the wall.
Fig. 195. Mounting
Fig. 196. Drilling plan
Fuse
Protection of the battery module is achieved with 1 or 2 ATO blade fuses from the
automotive sector, for example, type Littlefuse® FCS-80.
Buffer Times
The maximum buffer time for a given load current can be seen from the diagram. If
using, for example, two batteries connected in parallel, it is possible to work with half
the current given in the diagram.
For parallel connection it is recommended to use only batteries of the same type as
well as same size and production batch.

Fig. 197. Buffer times
Disposal
Note: Always dispose of batteries at approved recycling locations in accordance with

applicable national regulations.
Batteries must be fully discharged before recycling.
Transas BAM/BNWAS Components

WAGO Ethernet Programmable Fieldbus Controller 750-882
Description
For detailed information, see WAGO manufacturer’s manual
for WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 ETHERNET Fieldbus Controller 750-882.
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 is a modular, fieldbus independent I/O system. It is

comprised of a fieldbus coupler/controller (1) and connected fieldbus modules (2) for
any type of signal. Together, these make up the fieldbus node. The end module (3)
completes the node.
Fig. 198. Fieldbus node
Couplers/controllers are available for different fieldbus systems.
The standard couplers/controllers and extended ECO couplers contain the fieldbus
interface, electronics and a power supply terminal. The fieldbus interface forms the
physical interface to the relevant fieldbus. The electronics process the data of the
bus modules and make it available for the fieldbus communication. The 24 V system
supply and the 24 V field supply are fed in via the integrated power supply terminal.
The coupler/controller communicates via the relevant fieldbus. The programmable

fieldbus controller (PFC) enables the implementation of additional PLC functions.

Programming is done with the WAGO-I/O-PRO CAA in accordance

with IEC 61131-3.
Bus modules for diverse digital and analog I/O functions as well as special functions
can be connected to the coupler/controller. The communication between the
coupler/controller and the bus modules is carried out via an internal bus.
The WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 has a clear port level with LEDs for status indication,
insertable mini WSB markers and pullout group marker carriers.
The 3 wire technology supplemented by a ground wire connection allows for direct
sensor/actuator wiring.
The programmable Ethernet Medium redundancy fieldbus controller 750-882 (MRC)

combines the functionality of a fieldbus controller for connection to the fieldbus
Ethernet and possesses two independent Ethernet interfaces.
This controller can be used for applications in machine and plant construction as
well as in the process industry and building technology.
The two Ethernet interfaces are independent interfaces (no hub or switch).
Both interfaces support Auto negotiation and Auto-MDI (X).
With the DIP switch the last byte of the IP address, as well as the assignment of the
IP address (DHCP, BootP, firm setting) for each Ethernet interface can be given.
In the Fieldbus Controller, all input signals from the sensors are combined.
After connecting the ETHERNET TCP/IP Fieldbus Controller, the Fieldbus Controller
determines which I/O modules are on the node and creates a local process image
from these. Analog and specialty module data is sent via words and/or bytes;
digital data is grouped bit-by-bit.
The local process image is divided into two data zones containing the data received
and the data to be sent.
The data of the analog modules is mapped first into the process image.
The modules are mapped in the order of their physical position after the controller.
The bits of the digital modules are combined into words and then mapped after the
analog ones in the process image. If the number of digital I/Os is greater than 16
bits, the Fieldbus Controller automatically begins a new word.
According to IEC 61131-3 programming, data processing occurs in the PFC.

The process results can be output directly on sensors/actuators or transmitted via
fieldbus to the higher-order controller.
The fieldbus connection consists of two independent ports (RJ-45).
Both ports support:
– 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX;
– Full / Half duplex;
– Auto negotiation;
– Auto-MDI(X).
View
The view below shows the three parts of the device:
The fieldbus connection is on the left side.
LEDs for operation status, bus communication, error messages and diagnostics, as
well as the service interface are in the middle area.

The right side contains a power supply unit for the system supply and power jumper
contacts for the field supply via I/O modules. LEDs show the operating voltage for
the system and jumper contacts.
Fig. 199. View ETHERNET TCP/IP Fieldbus Controller
1 – Status LEDs Fieldbus (LINK ACT 1, 2, MS, NS, I/O, USR);
2 – Group marking carrier (retractable) with additional marking possibility on two

miniature WSB markers;
3 – Status LED’s System/Field Supply;
4 – Data Contacts (A, B or C);
5 – CAGE CLAMP® Connections System Supply (24 V, 0 V);
6 – CAGE CLAMP® Connections Field Supply DC 24 V (+);
7 – Power Jumper Contact 24 V DC;
8 – Unlocking Lug;
9 – CAGE CLAMP® Connections Field Supply 0 V;
10 – Power Jumper Contact 0 V;
11 – CAGE CLAMP® Connections Field Supply (Earth);
12 – Power Jumper Contact (Earth);
13 – Service Interface (open flap);
14 – Fieldbus connection 2 x RJ-45 (2 independent Ethernet interfaces, X1, X2);
15 – Locking Disc;
16 – Address Selection Switch.
Device Supply
The device is powered via terminal blocks with CAGE CLAMP® connections.
The device supply generates the necessary voltage to power the electronics of the
device and the internal electronics of the connected I/O modules.
The fieldbus interface is galvanically separated from the electrical potential of the
device via the transducer.

Fig. 200. Device supply
Fieldbus Connection
The connection to the fieldbus is made via two RJ-45 plugs (also called "Western
plugs").
Each port supports the transmission speeds 10/100 Mbit as well as the transmission
modes full and half-duplex. The wiring of these plugs corresponds to the
specifications for 100BaseTX, which prescribes a category 5 twisted pair cable as
the connecting cable. Cable types S-UTP (Screened Unshielded Twisted Pair) and
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) with a maximum segment length of 100 m
(approximately 328.08 feet) can be used. The RJ-45 socket is physically lower,
allowing the coupler to fit in an 80 mm high enclosure once connected.
Table 64. RJ-45 Connector and RJ-45 connector configuration
View Contact Signal
1 TD + Transmit +
2 TD - Transmit -
3 RD + Receive +
4 Free
5 Free
6 RD - Receive -
7 Free
8 Free
Display Elements
The operating condition of the controller or the node is displayed with the help of
illuminated indicators in the form of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
The LED information is routed to the top of the case by light fibres. In some cases,
these are multi-colored (red, green or red/green (=orange)).
Fig. 201. Display elements

Table 65. Display elements Fieldbus status

LED Color Meaning
LINK ACT 1 Green Indicates a connection to the physical network at port 1
LINK ACT 2 Green Indicates a connection to the physical network at port 2
MS Red/green Indicates the status of the node
NS Red/green Indicates the network status
Table 66. Display elements Node status

LED Color Meaning
I/O Red/green/orange Indicates the operation of the node and signals via a
blink code faults encountered
USR Red/green/orange Indicates information to the Internal bus faults, controlled
from the user programm according to the visualization
programming
Table 67. Display elements Supply voltage

LED Color Meaning
A Green Indicates the status of the operating voltage – system
B Red/green/orange Indicates the status of the operating voltage – power
jumper contacts
Service Interface
The service interface is to find behind the flap.
The configuration interface is used for the communication with the WAGO-
I/OCHECK and for downloading firmware.
Fig. 202. Service interface for programming and configuration (closed and opened door)
1 - Open the damper;

2 - Configuration and Programming Interface.
Note: Device must be de-energized!

To prevent damage to the device, unplug and plug in the communication
cable only when the device is de-energized!
The 750-920 Communication Cable is connected to the 4-pole header.
Mode Selector Switch
The mode selector switch is located behind the cover flap.
Fig. 203. Mode selector switch (closed and open damper of the service port)

1 - Open the damper;
2 - Operating mode switch.
The operating mode switch determines the loading, starting and stopping of the
PLC-application by the controller. This multifunction sliding switch features 3 slide
lock positions and a push-button function.
The sliding switch is designed for a number of operations in compliance with

EN61131T2.
Note: Property damages due to set outputs!

Please note that set outputs remain set, when you switch the operating
switch from "RUN" to "STOP" during the current operation. Since the
program is no longer processed, software-related switch offs, i.e. by
initiators, are ineffective. Therefore, program or define all outputs, so that
these switch to a safe mode at a program stop.
Note: Defining the outputs for a program stop!

In order to switch the outputs to a safe mode at the program stop, define the
status of the outputs at "STOP".
1. For this, open in the Web-Based Management System (WBM) a website
via the "PLC Settings" link, on which you can define the function Process
image - Set outputs to zero, if user program is stopped.
2. Now activate this function by placing a check mark in the control box, then
all outputs are set to zero, if this function is not activated, the outputs remain
at the last current value.
Note: Mode selector switch position is negligible in software start/stop!

The position of the mode selector switch is not important when starting or
stopping the PFC application from WAGO-I/O-PRO CAA.
One of the following functions is active, depending in which of the three static
positions - "top", "center" or "bottom" - the switch is located at a power on or
in a hardware or software reset:
Table 68. Mode selector switch positions, static positions at Power On / reset
Positions of the Mode Function
Selector Switch
Top position "RUN" - activate program processing,
Boot project (if available) is started
Center position "STOP" - stop program processing,
PFC application is stopped
Bottom position Do not use. This position is not relevant for the user

The fieldbus controller performs the following functions, if a position change of the
switch is performed during the current operation:
Table 69. Mode selector switch positions, dynamic positions during the current operation
Position change of the Function
Mode Selector Switch
From the top to the center "STOP" - stop program processing,
position PFC application is stopped
From the center to the top "RUN" - activate program processing,
position Boot project (if available) is started
From the center to the No reaction.
bottom position The bootstrap loader is started after Power On/Reset
From the bottom to the No reaction
center position
Press down (e.g., using a Hardware reset.
screwdriver) All outputs are reset; variables are set to 0, FALSE or to an initial value.
Retain variables or markers are not changed.
A hardware reset can be performed either at STOP or at RUN at any
position of the mode selector switch!
Restart the fieldbus controller
The operating mode is changed internally at the end of a PFC cycle.
Address Selection Switch:
Fig. 204. Address selection switch
The 8-pole DIP switch is used to set the IP address and to select the protocol for
setting the IP address.
Table 70. Meaning of DIP switch positions
Address Meaning
0 The IP parameter is configured via the web-based management. BootP, DHCP and
application of the values from the EEPROM are available to the user. In the default
status, configuration via BootP is activated
1-254 The configuration of the IP address consists of the network address and the value set for
the DIP switch. The network address is configurable and 192.168.1 for Port 1 and
192.168.2 for Port 2 by default
255 The DHCP protocol is used to configure the IP parameters
Configuring via Web-Based Management System (WBM)

An internal file system and an integrated Web server can be used for configuration
and administration of the system. Together, they are referred to as the Web-Based
Management System (WBM).
The HTML pages saved internally provide you with information about the
configuration and status of the fieldbus node. In addition, you can also change the
configuration of the device here. You can also save HTML pages created yourself
via the implemented file system.
Note: Always restart after making changes to the configuration!

The system must always be restarted for the changed configuration settings
to take effect.

1. To open the WBM, launch a Web browser (e.g., Microsoft Internet Explorer or
Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter the IP address of the fieldbus coupler/controller in the address bar

(192.168.1.1 by default or as previously configured).
3. Click [Enter] to confirm. The start page of WBM loads.
4. Select the link to the desired HTML page in the left navigation bar.
A query dialog appears.
5. Enter your user name and password in the query dialog (default: user = "admin",
password = "wago" or user = "user", password = "user").
The corresponding HTML page is loaded.
6. Make the desired settings.
7. Press [SUBMIT] to confirm your changes or press [UNDO] to discard the

changes.
8. Restart the system to apply the settings.

Information
The default start page of the WBM "Information" contains an overview of all
important information about your fieldbus coupler/controller.
Fig. 205. WBM page "Information"

Ethernet
Use the "Ethernet" HTML page to set the data transfer rate and bandwidth limit for
each of the two switch ports for data transfer via Ethernet.
Fig. 206. WBM page "Ethernet"
Note: Set the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for fragmentation only!
Only set the value for MTU, i.e. the maximum packet size between client
and server, if you are using a tunnel protocol (e.g. VPN) for ETHERNET
communication and the packets must be fragmented. Setting the value is
independent of the transmission mode selected.
Note: Configure ETHERNET transmission mode correctly!

A fault configuration of the ETHERNET transmission mode may result in a
lost connection, poor network performance or faulty performance of the
fieldbus coupler/controller.
TCP/IP
You must configure network addressing and network identification on the "TCP/IP"
HTML page.
Note: Set the DIP switch to "0" and enable "use IP from EEPROM"!
Before you change parameters on this page, set the DIP switch to zero and
on the "Port configuration" WBM page, set the "use IP from EEPROM"
option! If these conditions are not met, the DIP switch settings are applied
instead.

Fig. 207. WBM page "TCP/IP"
Port
Use the "Port" HTML page to enable or disable services available via the IP
protocol.
Fig. 208. WBM page "Port"

Note: Alternative IP address assignment!

You can only select the DHCP, BootP and "use IP from EEPROM" settings
as an alternative!
For detailed information, see WAGO manufacturer’s manual
for WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 ETHERNET Fieldbus Controller 750-882.
Alarm Buzzer/Reset Button/Silence Button

Alarm Buzzer - Part No.: 11124210.
Reset Button - Part No.: 11124211.
Reset Button - Part No.: TBD.
The Alarm Buzzer is used for alarm triggering on the stages: Backup Officer or Crew
for installation in sufficient areas.
The Reset Button is used for BNWAS down counter, triggered alarm reset and
Emergency Call facility.
Fig. 209. Appearance of Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer
Dimensional drawing of the units is given in Chapter 3.

For connection the Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button to the MFD system depending
on the configuration, see diagrams enclosed in Annex K.
Alarm Buzzer Connection

For connection Alarm Buzzer to the MFD, perform the following step:
• Connect terminals “A” (+) and “–“ to 24 VDC Power Supply via Connection
Board and Digital Output (DO) port of the Ethernet WAGO PLC 750-882 as per
diagrams (see Annex K). Status of DO channel contacts should be set to NO
(normal open) in the BAM Config (see below Chapter 2, section BAM
Configuration, paragraph BNWAS Params Page);
Reset Button Connection

For connection Reset Button to the MFD, make the next actions:
• Connect terminals “+” and “-“ to 24 VDC UPS Battery via Fuse 200 mA and
Connection Board, and Digital Output (DO) port of the Ethernet WAGO PLC
750-882 as per diagrams (see Annex K). Status of DO channel contacts should
be set to NC (normal close) in the BAM Config (see below Chapter 2, section
BAM Configuration, paragraph BNWAS Params Page);
• Connect terminals “S” to Digital Input (DI) port of the Ethernet WAGO PLC
750-882 as per diagrams (see Annex K). Status of DI channel contacts should
be set to NO (normal open) in the BAM Config (see below Chapter 2, section
BAM Configuration, paragraph BNWAS Params Page).

Silence Button Connection

• Connect terminals “S” to Digital Input (DI) port of the Ethernet WAGO PLC
750-882 as per diagrams (see Annex K). Status of DI channel contacts should
be set to NO (normal open) in the BAM Config (see below Chapter 2, section
BAM Configuration, paragraph BNWAS Params Page).
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40

Device View and Connections
Part No.: 18162309.
Technical specification and description of the module are given in Chapter 3.
Fig. 210. Redundancy module QUINT-DIODE/40 view
Safety Notes and Warning Instructions
Note: To ensure that the device can be operated safely and all functions can be
used, please read these instructions carefully.
Installation and startup must only be carried out by qualified personnel. The relevant
country-specific regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed.
Before startup it is particularly important to ensure that:
• All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and are the correct size:
• All output cables are the correct size for the maximum device output current
or have separate fuse protection;
• Sufficient convection is ensured;
• To protect the device, the input current of 56 A must not be exceeded. This is
ensured if the supply is provided from an automatic current limiting source
(e.g., QUINT POWER) or if a suitable fuse is connected.
To meet directive 94/9/EU (ATEX), the following safety notes must be observed:
• The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module corresponds to standard EN 50021;

• This redundancy module may be installed within a potentially explosive area, in
which Category 3 equipment is required;
• When working on the redundancy module, observe the national safety rules and
regulations for the prevention of accidents;

• The module must only be installed and operated by qualified personnel;

• Installation should be carried out following the instructions given in this
document;
• The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module should be installed in the control
cabinet so that IP54 protection according to EN 60 529 or higher is ensured;
• If dust is present, the device must be installed in suitable housing. The device
must not be subject to mechanical strain or thermal load, which exceed the
limits described in this document;
• To ensure sufficient convection, the following minimum spacing should be
provided between other modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation and 2
cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation;
• During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation in potentially
explosive areas of zone 2, can be connected to the redundancy module;
• The redundancy module does not require maintenance, is closed ex works, and
should not be opened. Repairs can only be carried out by the manufacturer.
Installation
The redundancy module can be snapped onto all DIN rails according to
EN 50 022-35. The module can be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks
facing upwards or downwards) or vertically on the DIN rail.
Note: To ensure sufficient convection, we recommend the following minimum

spacing be used between modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation
2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal.
• Mounting: place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the top edge of the
DIN rail and then snap it downwards (see figure below).
• Removal: release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and then detach the
module from the bottom edge of the DIN rail (see figure below).
Fig. 211. Installation of Redundancy module
• Connection Cable: the cable cross sections which can be connected are shown
in the table below:
Solid [mm²] Flexible [mm²] AWG Torque [Nm]
Input 1, Input 2, Output 0.2–16 0.5–10 20–6 1.2–1.5
For reliable and safe-to-touch connection: strip 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the
connector ends:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which are designed for operating
temperatures of at least 75°C (167°F).

Function
• Input. The maximum permissible current depends on the cross section
of the connected cables and the ambient temperature (see table below).
Only one redundancy module is required to decouple two power supplies that
are connected in parallel (A and B) with nominal currents up to 20 A.
The individual modules are wired together as shown in the figure below. One
redundancy module per power supply is required to decouple power supplies
with nominal currents from 20 A to 40 A.
Both inputs “1” and “2” of the redundancy module must be connected to the
power supply via two cables as shown in the figure below. This is required as
the maximum current carrying capacity of 30 A per input must not be exceeded.
For connecting the redundancy module to the power supply, we recommend
using two cables of the same length and with identical cross sections.
• Output. During operation only devices, which are suitable for operation
in potentially explosive areas of Zone 2, can be connected to the output
of the redundancy module in Zone 2. The plus pole of the device is wired
to the output of the redundancy module as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 212. Redundancy module connection
• Temperature Response. In the horizontal mounting position (input terminal

blocks facing upwards or downwards), the redundancy module can lead
maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient
temperatures of up to 40°C (104°F). The permissible current carrying capacity
reduces according to the ambient temperature as shown in the figure below,
curve (a) for a cable cross section of 10 mm² (8 AWG).
At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140°F), the module can lead maximum
continuous load currents of 2 x 21 A or 1 x 43 A. In the vertical mounting
position, the redundancy module can lead maximum continuous load currents
of 2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to 30°C (86°F).
The permissible current carrying capacity reduces according to the ambient

temperature as shown in the figure, curve (b) for a cable cross section of 10
mm² (8 AWG). At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140°F), the module can lead
maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 20 A or 1 x 40 A.

Fig. 213. Redundancy module temperature response graphic
Data Collecting Unit DCU6

Part No.: 301000.
Technical specification and dimensional drawings of DCU6 are given in Chapter 3.
For proper connection DCU6 to WS, see connection and block diagrams enclosed
in Annex I.
Connections
Up to eight DCU6 can be connected to the MFD system: 4 main DCU with
connected to them 64 different sensors and 4 backup DCU with connected to them
the same sensors. Thus it is possible to connect 64 different sensors to the MFD.
DCU6 is connected with the Ethernet ports LAN1 and LAN2 of RS6 Computer by
means of a standard category 5 screened cables used in Ethernet 10/100 Mbit
networks. The cable contains 4 twisted pairs within the common screen and has
RJ-45 connectors on both ends. Connection of cable cores with the connector
contacts is identical on both sides.
Navigational sensors to the DCU6 are connected by means of screw connectors.

In case of considerable length of external cables, a screened cable is recommended.
For the connection of the DCU6 with navigational sensors, use double core screened
cable in the insulating shell, category TP5. The screen is connected to earthing on the
sensor side. Where the level of electromagnetic field is insignificant, “twisted pair” type
2
unscreened cable up to 1.5 mm cross section may be used. As the electric current in
the cable does not exceed 20 mA the conductors’ cross section is of no importance.
The maximum length of the cable will depend on the type of interface and is shown
for each specific sensor in the appropriate connection schedule.
Fig. 214. DCU6 rear view
Fig. 215. DCU6 front view

DCU6 interfaces and cables fixing are shown in the figures below.
DCU6 ports number 1–14 are RS422 bi-directional channels.
DCU6 ports number 15–16 are RS422 bi-directional channels by default and may be
configured by jumpers X16 and X17 accordingly as follows:
• Output channels transmit RS232 signal;

• Input channels receive RS422 signal.
Fig. 216. DCU interfaces
Fig. 217. DCU cables fixing
WARNING!
In case of connection DCU to MFD via network, you must have LAN 1 and LAN 2 of
this DCU identical connected. Otherwise, there will be problem with intermittent lost
sensor data.
If LAN 1 and LAN 2 cannot be identical, only LAN 1 or LAN 2 shall be used for DCU.
For proper connection, see the picture below and the diagrams enclosed
in Annex I.

Fig. 218. Connection DCU to MFD
Diagnostic Indication
DCU is equipped with the following Diagnostic Indicators, reflecting current
processes of the device:
• Indicator of the RS-422 interface activity with use of TX/RX Channels.

The corresponding indicator is lit while transmitting/receiving of
the NMEA message;
• DCU modes indicator are sown in the table below:
Table 72. DCU status indicator
Indicator condition Mode
Green, blinking DCU data receiving
Yellow, blinking DCU data transmitting
Checking and Settings DCU IP Addresses

Checking DCU IP Addresses
In the event of absence of the connection between PC and DCU, check values DCU
IP addresses. For this, connect RS232 port of PC to RS232 COM1 of DCU.
1. Start terminal emulation program (i.e. “Hyper Terminal”) and enter name
for example “DCU”:

Select port number of PC:
Configure the terminal for 57600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, none flow
control. Press “Apply” and “OK” buttons:
This screen appears. Otherwise, restart DCU by means of small buttons

on DCU panel:
Press <Escape> button.

For printing configuration, type “1” and press <Enter> button:
Check IP, Netmask, Gateway values for LAN1 in correspondence to values given
below. If necessary, change them by means of “Set IP Address” option
in “DCU Main Menu”:
For the first type, DCU values must be following:
– IP1 Address: 10.8.1.200;

– Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Default Gateway: 10.8.1.240;
For the second type, DCU values must be following:
– IP1 Address: 10.8.1.201;

– Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
– Default Gateway: 10.8.1.240.
For IP addresses of the rest DCU types, see table in section Network below.

Connect PC RS232 port to DCU RS232 COM2 and perform procedure described
above. Check IP, Netmask, Gateway values for LAN2 in correspondence to values
given below:
If necessary, change them by means of “Set IP Address” option in “DCU Main Menu”.
For the first type, DCU values must be following:
– IP2 Address – value 10.8.2.200;

– Subnet Mask – value 255.255.255.0;
– Default Gateway – 10.8.2.240.
For the second type, DCU values must be following:
– IP2 Address – value 10.8.2.201;

– Subnet Mask – value 255.255.255.0;
– Default Gateway – 10.8.2.240.
For IP address of the rest DCU types, see table in section Network below.
Setting DCU IP Addresses

1. In “DCU Main Menu”, type “4” and press <Enter> button:

2. Enter values (IP Address, Mask, Default Route) specified above for LAN1
and for LAN2. Press <Enter> after typing of each value.
3. Then switch off/on DCU power and check preservation of all settings.
Power Connection
Workstation requires 24 VDC. This power must be provided from 24 VDC ship’s
distribution board or from optional UPS6 connected with 110/220 VAC ship’s
distribution board with Main/Emergency Automatic Switch. For details, see diagrams
for different MFD power supply configuration presented in Annex H and connection
diagrams for each scanner enclosed in Annex E – Annex G and in Annex I
depending on the system configuration.
RS6B Computer’s Discrete Signal Interface

General
Discrete signal interface for alarms distribution is provided by digital I/O ports
of RS6B computer. Four digital output (DO) ports provide issue MFD alarm signals
on Alarm Panel. Four digital input (DI) ports are used for MFD alarms
acknowledgment (silence) from Alarm Panel and for receiving alarm signals from
UPS (see above section Workstation Installation paragraph RS6B Computer
Installation). See also connection diagrams presented in Annex E – Annex J of
this document).
Digital Input
Digital input ports are designed for dry contact (5VDC@1mA) closure to GND.
DI ports receive control signals from digital field devices (sensors, switches, etc.).
Each pair of the port’s terminals shall be used for connection with digital devices.
Each pair of the ports has one ground terminal. The inputs use a Phoenix 3.81 mm
6-pin connector.
Digital Output
DO ports switch the connected load by means of internal, isolated relays.
The relays are capable of the switching 30VDC@1A and 100VAC@300mA for RS6
computer and at least 36 VDC, 100mA for RS6B computer.
Each pair of the port’s terminals shall be connected to the certain indication unit
(Alarm Panel optical indicators, etc.). The each port has separate ground.
The outputs use a Phoenix 3.81 mm 8-pin connector.

WAGO I/O Modules for Conning

The technical specification of WAGO I/O modules used in MFD is presented
in Chapter 3 of the document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V. 3.00. 340).
INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II. The example of connection diagram is shown in
drawing “WAGO Modules for Conning. Functional Diagram” enclosed in Annex J of
this document.
General
Fig. 219. WAGO modules set
WAGO I/O Set of Modules used in MFD System for Conning includes the following parts:
• MODBUS Coupler/Controller: the module is intended for communication

of the set of WAGO I/O Modules with the Working Station via RS-232 protocol.
Baud rate value recommended for use in MFD is 9600. Voltage supply –
DC 24 V. Power AC/DC Adaptor might be used as a power supply source.
With its I/O functions the coupler/controller forms the logic operation between
the Fieldbus used and the field area. All control tasks necessary for the perfect
operation of the I/O are performed by the coupler/controller;
• I/O modules: the input and output of the process data is made at the I/O
modules. I/O modules are available for various tasks in accordance with varying
requirements. Available are digital and analog input and output modules,
I/O modules for angle and path measurement as well as communication
modules.
• End module: the module completes the internal data circuit and ensures correct
data flow. One is required for each bus-coupler. The node end module is
indispensable. It is always fitted as the last module, to guarantee the internal
node communication. The end module has no I/O function.
All modules forming the above set must be mounted on the DIN rail to provide
the common grounding contact.
List of I/O modules used in MFD

List of I/O modules used in MFD is presented in the table below:
Table 73. List of WAGO modules
No. Module Ref. No.
1 MODBUS 750-314
2 4-Channel Digital Input Module DC 24 V 750-403
3 2-Channel Analog Input Module 4–20 mA 750-454
4 2-Channel Analog Input Module 10 V 750-476
5 4-Channel Analog Input Module 0–10 V 750-468
6 2-Channel Relay Output Module AC 230 V, DC 30 V 750-513
7 End Module 750-600

Network
Assembling of the WAGO I/O Set Modules

All system components can be snapped directly on a carrier rail (DIN rail) in
accordance with the European standard EN 50022 (TS 35). All modules have
the same shape to minimize the project commitment. The reliable positioning and
connection of the coupler/controllers and the individual I/O modules is made using
a tongue and groove system. Due to the automatic locking the individual
components are securely seated on the rail after installing.
The coupler/controller must be fixed on the carrier rail with the lateral orange-
coloured locking disk. To fix the coupler/controller, apply pressure on the upper
groove of the locking disk using a screwdriver.
To remove the coupler/controllers, release the locking disk by pressing on the
bottom groove. It is also possible to release an individual I/O module from the unit by
pulling an unlocking lug.
The following sequence of modules must be observed in the course of assembling:
• MODBUS Module;
• Digital/Analog Input Modules;
• Relay Output Modules;
• End Module.
Cabling of the WAGO I/O Modules

The following requirements must be taken into consideration prior to cabling
of the WAGO I/O Modules within the MFD system:
• Relay Output Modules: each pair of active contacts of the modules shall be
connected to the certain indication unit (Alarm Panel optical indicators, etc.);
• Input Modules: each pair of active contacts on the modules shall be used for
connection with different type of sensors (digital and analog);
• MODBUS: 24 V DC input contacts are marked on the module accordingly.
The other contacts of the module are used for the power distribution only.
NETWORK
Network is basement of MFD System for communication between Workstations,
RIB6/RIB6B and optional DCU6. The network redundancy is provided by double
network. The physical layer is Ethernet; the transport layer is TCP/IP.
Physical Layout
The example of network connection of two worksations is shown on the diagrams
presented in Annex H.
The examples of network connection of five worksations are shown on diagrams

presented in Annex H. For ships under DNV classification society, the bridge
network connection is shown on the “MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power
Distribution. Block Diagram No.1”. For ships under other classification societies as
GL and LRS, the bridge network connection is shown on
the “MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Distribution. Block Diagram No.2”.
In this case, both networks (LAN1 and LAN2) of RS6B and RIB6/RIB6B can be
connected to Network switches.
For proper connection DCU to MFD via network, see above section Workstation
Installation, paragraph Data Collector Unit DCU6.

Network
The Ethernet switches are the multiport high-speed switches which can be used for
building of the high-performance communication.
Technical specification of Ethernet switches is given in Chapter 3.
IP Addresses
IP addresses table is shown below:
Table 74. WS’s IP addresses
STATION LAN 1 LAN 2 Subnet mask
IP address IP address
Workstation 1 (W01) 10.8.1.101 10.8.2.101 255.255.255.0
Workstation 2 (W02) 10.8.1.102 10.8.2.102 255.255.255.0
Workstation 3 (W03) 10.8.1.103 10.8.2.103 255.255.255.0
Workstation 4 (W04) 10.8.1.104 10.8.2.104 255.255.255.0
Workstation 5 (W05) 10.8.1.105 10.8.2.105 255.255.255.0
DCU I type 10.8.1.200 10.8.2.200 255.255.255.0
DCU II type 10.8.1.201 10.8.2.201 255.255.255.0
DCU III type 10.8.1.202 10.8.2.202 255.255.255.0
DCU IV type 10.8.1.203 10.8.2.203 255.255.255.0
DCU V type 10.8.1.204 10.8.2.204 255.255.255.0
DCU VI type 10.8.1.205 10.8.2.205 255.255.255.0
DCU VII type 10.8.1.206 10.8.2.206 255.255.255.0
DCU VIII type 10.8.1.207 10.8.2.207 255.255.255.0
RIB6/RIB6B I type 10.8.1.209 10.8.2.209 255.255.255.0
RIB6/RIB6B II type 10.8.1.210 10.8.2.210 255.255.255.0
RIB6/RIB6B III type 10.8.1.211 10.8.2.211 255.255.255.0
RIB6/RIB6B IV type 10.8.1.212 10.8.2.212 255.255.255.0
CCTV Throughput Limitations in MFD Network

Network Average Traffic reserve for Maximum Total traffic
objects/services traffic stable work number of (Kbytes / sec)
(Kbytes / sec) (Kbytes / sec) objects
MFD network 112 112 1 224
Workstation 50 30 12 960
Radar integrator board 531 63 4 2376
DCU 153 77 4 920
WAGO 8 1 10 90
TFAP/Gateway 2 2 1 4
Raytheon Nautoplex 153 77 4 920
8PLUS8
Moxa Nport 5430I 38 19 8 456
CCTV Video Stream
Full D1 H264 617 150 6 4600
VGA H264 423 120 8 4344
Note: Network assumed to have maximum throughput 10625 Kbytes/sec

(100MBit, 85% data transfer effectiveness).

RS6B Computer Video Output to VDR
RS6B COMPUTER VIDEO OUTPUT TO VDR

The second video output (graphics controller onboard Intel HD) allows the radar
picture image to be sent to VDR.
The RS6B video output VGA must be connected to radar display via standard VGA
cable.
The RS6B video output DVI-I can be connected to Frame grabber board
(VDR component) via standard VGA cable using DVI-I/VGA adapter.
NEW STANDARD VDR OUTPUT
General
To ensure the MFD compatibility with a new standard of the VDR which has a
network interface, a module outputting data to the VDR can operate on each
workstation.
With appropriate settings in the System Configuration utility (see below Chapter 2,
section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 24), the following data
is output to the network:
• For the radar and additional stations:

– Screenshots – once every 15 seconds.
• For the ECDIS:
– Screenshots – once every 15 seconds;
– Chart list (source info) – once every 10 minutes or within 2 seconds of the
displayed charts set change.
Information is not sent unless the relevant application is in the active mode.
The protocol for sending binary files with acknowledgements is used for sending
screenshots. A simplified protocol without acknowledgements is used for the chart
list (source info).
When data is output to the VDR, the workstation name is specified for the source
position, and the station’s main task set during the configuring – for the source
identifier.
The sending of data to the VDR should be set for all the ECDIS stations on the
bridge.
The VDR output functionality complies with the following standards:
• IEC 61162-450 ed. 1;

• IEC 61174;
• IEC 61996 ed. 2 CDV.

New Standard VDR Output
Network Connection of New Standard VDR to MFD

The VDR with the network interface is connected to the MFD system via Ethernet
switch as shown on the figure below.
Fig. 220. VDR – Radar/ECDIS connection diagram
For the VDR output settings in the System Configuration utility, see below
Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 24.
Workstation Settings for VDR Output Functionality

For the correct operation of the VDR output functionality, it is necessary to add one
more IP address to Network 1 (LAN1) on all workstations in the MFD network as
described below.
• To access network settings, go to “Control Panel”, select “Network Connections”

and double click on “Network 1” (LAN1) and click on “Properties” button.
• Select and double click on “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” option:
• Click on “Advanced…” button:

New Standard VDR Output
• In the “IP addresses” field, press “Add” button:
• In the “TCP/IP Address” window, enter the IP address from the range
172.16.1.101 – 172.16.1.199 and subnet mask 255.255.0.0 as follows:
– Enter IP address 172.16.1.101 for W01 workstation.
The last number must be the same as the workstation number:
102 for W02;
103 for W03 and so on.
• Press “Add” button.

• Press “OK” button and close all open windows.

Transas Gateway Installation
ATTENTION!
Do not forget to adjust the above settings on all workstations in the MFD network.
For the VDR output settings in the System Configuration utility, see below
TRANSAS GATEWAY INSTALLATION
Introduction
The Transas Gateway operates as a part of Transas Multi-Functional equipment
only and is intended for performing automatic chart updating and for downloading
data directly from Transas Chart server. Transas Gateway is required to be installed
between Transas MFD (workstation) and communication equipment onboard of
vessel providing firewall and antivirus protection.
Technical specification of the Transas Gateway is presented in Chapter 3 of this

document.
For the Transas Gateway settings in the System Configuration utility, see below
Pre-Requirements
Before configuration and use of the Transas Gateway, you must have received the
following information from Transas production.
1. Vessel’s subnet (printed on the Gateway):
• Individual for all vessels;

• It is crucial that you ONLY use the subnet that you have been provided from
production.
2. Answers from the Gateway pre survey form:
• Static or DCHP settings. In case of static IP, Gateway, Netmask and DNS
information.
3. Local username and password.

Good to have but not necessary:
4. Smart Center IP address, username and password.
If you do not have the above mentioned information, there is no need to continue
with this installation.
For assistance, please contact service@transas.com.
General
Transas Gateway is used as a bridge between Transas MFD workstations and ships
network/Internet. The purpose of Transas Gateway is to protect and secure the
navigational network.
Transas Gateway has a state of the art firewall provided by the same company that
secures the Fortune 100. The company name is Checkpoint and is a known brand
for securing networks.
Transas Gateway is based upon Checkpoint UTM Edge Industrial.
The Gateway provides multilayer inspection firewall and providing network/transport

layer access control based on addresses, ports and protocols.
It has built in antivirus software that monitors and control the communication
between internal network and external network (Internet).
VPN tunnels are initiated between bridge network and shore network based upon
certificate towered the central VPN cluster. The VPN cluster authenticates the VPN
gateway based on the ship carriers in addition to Firewall. All traffic from the
navigational network to shore is within Transas VPN. On shore side there is an
additional firewall that verify that all Vessels VPN connections only have access to
approved servers as listed below.
Firewall Rules
The firewall is strictly limited to allow the following connections:
• Allow “Transas Chart Server 1” with destination address 82.140.75.132

on port 21;
• Allow “Transas Chart Server 2” with destination address 82.140.75.17
on port 9000;
• Allow “FMO-Wave” with destination address 81.3.124.97 on port 20080;
• Allow “Remote Service” traffic to allow remote access from inside Transas office
to MFD workstations;
• All other type of connections is blocked, with settings to deny any source,
destination address and port.
Remote Service
The customer support group of Transas is the only people who can access any
Remote functionality.
The individuals are trained before they can gain access to any remote software.
Every user of remote software has the own credentials and the software can only
run within the Transas domain.

As an option it is possible to configure the system so that a popup window will be

displayed on each MFD workstations asking if the remote connection should be
allowed or rejected.
The users of RDM are under no circumstances allowed to connect to any vessel
without captain’s approval; this can be achieved from a telephone call from vessel or
by email.
Transas Gateway Simplified Schematics
Fig. 221. Transas Gateway simplified diagram
Gateway Connectors
The picture below shows Transas Gateway’s connectors layout.
Fig. 222. Transas Gateway connectors

1 - 4x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ45 LAN ports;
2 - 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ45 or 1 x 1000Base-F DMZ ports;
3 - 1x10/100/1000Base-T RJ45 WAN port (EXTERNAL);
4 - Console RJ45 port;
5 - USB port;
6 - Reset button;
7 - +24 VDC power;
8 - External 12 VDC power adaptor connection (only to be used during in house

testing);
9 - DIN rail adaptor mount point.
MFD Connection
Any of the “LAN” ports on the Gateway can be connected to MOXA switch (LAN1) or
ECDIS MFD (workstation).
WAN port on the Gateway must be connected to external/outside network such as

direct to Internet or too ships network.
TFT TFT
Monitor Monitor
W01 W02
MASTER BACKUP
ES6 KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD

GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL
ES6 ES6
GPS
GPS GYRO
RS6B ETHERNET SWITCH RS6B
GYRO LOG
11
12
7
5
9
1
LOG LAN 1 LAN 1 AIS

EDS-316-M-SC
100M
10M
10
12
14
6
8
4
2
AIS
15
16
Rx
Tx
100M
PWR2
PWR1
EtherDevice Switch
FAULT
LAN
Fuse 2A GATEWAY
UPS6 UPS6
1 2 3 4
LAN DMZ WAN SERIAL USB POWER
WAN
Internet / Ship's Network
EMC AC/DC UPS Battery EMC AC/DC UPS Battery

Filter Convertor CU Pack Filter Convertor CU Pack
24 VDC 24 VDC
220 VAC
220 VAC
Fig. 223. Gateway connection

Using UTM-1 WEB Interface

The UTM-1 Portal is a Web-based management interface, which enables you to
manage and configure the UTM-1 appliance operation and options.
The UTM-1 Portal consists of three major elements presented in the table below.
Table 75. UTM-1 Portal elements
Element Descripton
Main menu Used for navigating between the various topics (such as Reports, Security and
Setup)
Main frame Displays information and controls related to the selected topic. The main frame may
also contain tabs that allow you to view different pages related to the selected topic
Status bar Shows your Internet connection and managed services status
Fig. 224. UTM-1 Web Interface
Main Menu Submenus

Table 76. Submenu items description
Submenu Items Description
Welcome Displays general welcome information
Reports Provides reporting capabilities in terms of appliance status, traffic monitoring,
active computers, established connections, and more
Logs Provides a general event log displaying appliance events, and a security event
log displaying firewall events
Security Provides controls and options for setting the security of any computer in the
network
Antivirus Allows you to configure VStream Antivirus settings
Antispam Allows you to configure VStream Antispam settings
Services Allows you to control your subscription to subscription services
Network Allows you to manage and configure your network settings and Internet
connections
Setup Provides a set of tools for managing your UTM-1 appliance. Allows you to
upgrade your license and firmware and to configure HTTPS access to your
UTM-1 appliance
Users Allows you to manage the UTM-1 appliance users
VPN Allows you to manage, configure, and log in to VPN sites
Help Provides context-sensitive online help
Logout Allows you to log out of the UTM-1 Portal

Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of each page. It displays the fields below, as
well as the date and time.
Table 77. Status bar
Field Display Comments
Internet Connected The UTM-1 appliance is connected to the Internet
(displays
Connected – Probing OK Connection probing is enabled and has detected
Internet
that the Internet connectivity is OK.
connection
status) Connected – Probing Failed Connection probing is enabled and has detected
problems with the Internet connectivity
Not Connected The Internet connection is down
Establishing Connection The UTM-1 appliance is connecting to the Internet
Contacting Gateway The UTM-1 appliance is trying to contact the
Internet default gateway
Disabled The Internet connection has been manually
disabled
Note: You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection.
When both connections are configured, the Status bar displays both statuses. For
example “Internet [Primary]: Connected”. For information on configuring a
secondary Internet connection, see below Network Setup.
Service Center Not Subscribed You are not subscribed to security services
(displays your
Connection Failed The UTM-1 appliance failed to connect to the
subscription
Service Center
services
status) Connecting The UTM-1 appliance is connecting to the Service
Center
Connected You are connected to the Service Center, and
security services are active
Your Service Center may offer various subscription services. These include the
firewall service and optional services such as Web Filtering and Email Antivirus.
Status LEDs
Table 78. Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
Power Off Power off
On (Green) Normal operation
System On (Red) Boot failed or TFTP mode
Flashing quickly (Red) High temperature or system failure
Flashing slowly (Orange) Writing update to flash memory
Flashing quickly (Green) System boot in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
On (Green) Normal operation
Security Off Normal operation
Flashing for 5 sec (Orange) Virus blocked
Flashing for 1 sec (Red) Hacker attack blocked
VPN Off No VPN tunnel established
On (Green) VPN idle / No activity
Flashing (Green) VPN activity
RS232/Serial Off No data terminal connected
On (Green) Data terminal ready
Flashing (Green) Serial activity
USB Off No USB device connected
On (Green) USB device connected

Workstation Settings
Before you can configure or access the Transas Gateway, you must change MFD
workstations settings as described below.
The only thing you need to configure on the workstations is to add one more IP
address to Network 1 (LAN1) on all workstations in the MFD network.
1. To access network settings, go to Control Panel, select “Network Connections”

and double click on “Network 1” (LAN1) and click on “Properties” button.
2. Select and double click on “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” option:
3. Click on “Advanced…” button:

4. In the “IP addresses” field, press “Add” button and “TCP/IP Address” window will
appear:
5. Enter the IP address as follows:
Type the first 3 subnet numbers together with workstation number.
The last number must be the same as the workstation number:
101 for W01;

102 for W02 and so on.
For example, if you have received subnet or Gateway IP address
10.250.250.100 from production and you are configuring workstation W01, the
IP address must be set to 10.250.250.101.
ATTENTION!
It is vital that you fill in this information correctly!
Set subnet mask to 255.255.255.0 and press “Add” button.

6. Then make TCP/IP Gateway setting as follows:
If one default Gateway already exists, press “Edit” button or if empty, press
“Add” button in the field “Default Gateways”. It shall be only one Gateway.
Enter the first 3 numbers from subnet and 100.
The IP address of the Gateway always ends with number 100.
For example, if you have subnet 10.250.250.0, the IP address must be set to
10.250.250.100.
Press “Add” button.
7. Press “OK” button and close all open windows.
ATTENTION!
Do not forget to adjust the above settings on all workstations.
Network Setup
Before Gateway network configuring, perform the following steps:
1. Connect 24 VDC power and Internal LAN ONLY according with connection
drawing in paragraph MFD Connection above;
2. Switch on the Gateway power;

3. Use any workstation and start Internet Explorer;
4. In address field type “my.firewall” or the Gateway IP address: such as

10.x.x.100.
If you cannot access the Web page you have done something wrong in
paragraph Workstation Settings above or if you are using “my.firewall”, DNS
must be set to 8.8.8.8.
Network
Login
1. In the open Web page, enter username and password as follows:
• In the field “Username”, type “admin”;

• In the field “Password”, type password which you have received;
• Press “OK” button.

2. Connect Internet cable to WAN port on the Gateway.
Internet connection
There are two different options for configuring Internet:
• Internet wizard, see below the appropriate item;

• Manual setup, see below item Manual IP Settings.
If the device is configured from factory, DHCP client should already be set on WAN
port and the Gateway should already be connected to Internet.
See Internet and Service Center status in the left bottom side of the Web interface:
they should be “CONNECTED”.
If both are connected, check connection status as described below in paragraph

Reports/Status View.
Internet Wizard
1. Click on “Network” item in the Main menu, and click the “Internet” tab;
2. Click “Internet Wizard”.
The Internet Wizard opens with the “Welcome” page displayed:

3. Click on “Next >” button.
The “Internet Connection Method” dialog box appears:
Select the Internet connection method that you want to use for connecting to the
Internet and press “Next >” button.
Using a “DHCP (Dynamic IP)” connection, no further settings are required, go to

step 5.
If you selected the “Static IP” connection method, the “Static IP Configuration”
dialog box appears:

4. Complete the fields using information below. These values should have been
available from the TFAP/Gateway pre survey form. Otherwise use DHCP.
• In the field “IP Address”, enter proper static IP address;

• In the field “Subnet Mask”, use 255.255.255.0/24, if not specified other;
• In the field “Default Gateway”, enter the Gateway address;
• In the field “Primary DNS Server”, enter DNS address, if not specified use
8.8.8.8;
• You can leave “Secondary DNS Server” and “WINS Server” fields empty.
5. Press “Next >” button. The “Confirmation” screen appears:

6. Press “Next >” button. The “Connecting” screen appears:
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
7. At the end of the connection process, the “Connected” screen appears and the
Gateway is connected to the Internet:
8. Press “Finish” button.

9. If the connection is not successful, the following dialog box will appear:
10. If you have select static IP setup, go back in the Internet wizard and make sure
that you have entered proper static values.
If you are trying with DHCP, make sure the onboard DHCP server is responding.
See below paragraph Troubleshooting for more details.
Manual IP Settings
If you have followed the Internet setup wizard, your system is already setup for
Internet and you can check connection status as described below in paragraph
For manual IP address settings, click “Network” item in the Main menu, and click the
“Internet” tab.
The “Internet” page appears:
Next to the desired Internet connection, click “Edit”.
Depending on what type of information you have received from vessels IT

department, choose DHCP or static mode, for DHCP continue on item DHCP
(Dynamic IP) Configuration below.
For static IP address, continue on item Static IP Configuration below.
DHCP (Dynamic IP) Configuration

In the open page “Internet Setup”, make the following settings:
• Leave port setting on WAN;

• Make sure that connection type is “Local Area Network”;
• Check the checkbox “Obtain IP addresses automatically (using DHCP);

• Press “Apply” button.

Static IP Configuration
Enter the values that you have received from vessels IT department or the Gateway
pre survey form (You must have received IP address, Gateway and DNS number):
• Leave port setting on WAN;

• Make sure that connection type is “Local Area Network”;
• In the field “IP Address”, enter IP address;
• In the field “Subnet Mask”, use 255.255.255.0/24, if not specified other;
• In the field “Default Gateway”, enter Gateway address;
• In the field “Primary DNS Server”, enter DNS address, if not specified use
8.8.8.8;
• Leave “Secondary DNS Server” and “WINS Server” fields empty;
• Press “Apply” button.

Reports/Status View
Select “Reports” item in the Main menu and open “Status” page:
Verify in the “Status” field that:
• Internet: “OK”;
• VPN: “Tunnels are established”;
• Services: “Connected”.
The Gateway is now setup and operating.
If some of the status fields do not look exactly as above, see below
Troubleshooting paragraph.
Troubleshooting
No VPN Tunnels are Established
• Make sure that you have entered proper Gateway address and workstation IP,
and only one Gateway is in the list as per paragraph Workstation Settings
above;
• Make sure that you are connected to Service center and the stated information
is correct (see below paragraph VPN/Smart Center for procedures);
• If no VPN tunnels are established open a Web browser and try to connect to
Chart server by typing ftp://82.140.75.132 or open “cmd” and try to ping 8.8.8.8;
• Make sure that Internet provider has IPSEC available;
• Look in Report view again.

No Internet Connection
• Make sure that you have entered proper values in the “Internet Setup” page;
• Make sure that you have received proper values from Internet provider;
• Even if static IP should be used, try to set Internet settings to DHCP and try
again.
VPN/Smart Center
Connect/Reconnect to VPN/Smart Center
1. Click on “Services” item in the Main menu and the “Account” page appears:
2. In the “Connect to a Service Center” line, click on “Connect”.
The “Service Center” dialog box will appear:
Make sure the “Connect to a Service Center” checkbox is selected.
To specify a Service Center, in the “Specified IP” field, enter the desired Service
Center’s IP address. Specified IP address: 193.108.6.76.
Click on “Next >” button.

3. The “Connecting” screen will appear.
If connecting fail, see above paragraph Troubleshooting.
4. The “Service Center Login” dialog box appears:
In the fields “Gateway ID” and “Registration Key”, enter Vessel’s UNIQUE ID
and password.
5. The “Confirmation” dialog appears:

6. Press “Finish” button:
7. Verify connectivity in the “Reports” view as described above in paragraph

ATTENTION!
The device is now being remotely configured and the IP address will be applied to
the device.
In order to get access to the unit again, follow the procedure described above in
paragraph Network Setup.
Test Connection
For connectivity test, click on “Logs” item in the Main menu and select the “Event
log” page:

Checklist
1. Make sure that you are using the proper SUBNET for your vessel;
2. Make sure you have added correct IP addresses to all workstations;
3. Make sure you have entered correct Gateway address on all workstation;
4. Make sure that Transas Gateway is connected to Service Center;
5. Make sure that VPN connection is established;
6. Make sure that VNC is installed on all workstations;

7. Make sure you are able to access Chart server(s);
8. Make sure that Remote functionality is working with CSG.

CHAPTER 2
System Settings

RS6B Computer Extended Mode Settings
RS6B COMPUTER EXTENDED MODE SETTINGS
General
RS6B computer has two video outputs VGA and DVI-I which can be connected with
two displays.
Main applications ECDIS, RADAR, AMS must be displayed only on the primary
monitor connected to VGA output.
In extended mode DVI-I port can be used for the displaying CONNING application
on the secondary monitor. If the monitor has no DVI-I input DVI-I/VGA adapter
should be used.
In this case, the pointer can be moved between the two screens.
Main applications on the primary display are switched by means of using ECDIS,
RADAR, AMS buttons of “Applications” window of Control Panel or function key
on keyboard.
During the first start, the Navi-Conning 4000 application must be activated on the
secondary display by means of hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M>.
Also hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <M> are used for switching of the displaying
the Navi-Conning 4000 application with one monitor on another.
For the Navi-Conning 5000, use hot keys <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <F> to drag the Conning
application window on to extended display and press hot keys
<Ctrl> + <Alt> + <F> again. After restarting the application, it will appear on
extended display.
Extended Desktop Settings

To set extended mode, perform the following procedure:
1. Click the right mouse/trackball button on the desktop. Select “Properties”.
Open the page “Settings” and press “Advanced” button:
Chapter 2. System Settings 227

Switch to “Intel® Graphics and Media Control Panel” tab:
Press “Graphics Properties” button:

In the open window, select “Multiple Displays” option:
Select “Extended Desktop” mode from the drop-down list “Operating Mode”:

Select Monitor (connected to VGA port) from the drop-down list “Primary Display”
and press “Apply” button:
Choose “General Settings” option.
Select the appropriate screen resolution for the primary monitor from the drop-
down list “Resolution” and “16 Bit” from the drop-down list “Color Depth”:
Press “Apply” button.

To adjust the secondary display select “Digital Display” (connected to DVI-I port)
from the drop-down list “Display”:
Select the appropriate screen resolution for the secondary display and “16 Bit” from
the drop-down list “Color Depth”. Press “Apply” button:

Press “OK” button:
Drag the monitor icons in accordance with physical position of monitors comparatively
each other:
Press “OK” button.

RS6B Computer Serial Ports Configuration
RS6B COMPUTER SERIAL PORTS CONFIGURATION

Serial ports 1 and 2 (COM1 and COM2) can be configured for RS232, RS422, or
RS-485 communication by software. To reconfigure from default RS232 to RS422
interface perform the following procedure:
1. Open “Device Manager” and double click on “Moxa Port 7 (COM1)” or “Moxa
Port 8 (COM2)”:
Switch to “Port Settings” tab and select “RS422” from the drop-down list “Interface”:

MFD Software Installation
MFD SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

ATTENTION!
On the basis of the detected hardware during MFD installation, it is automatically
allowed or prohibited to install certain software components. It is prohibited to install
“Navi-Radar”, Navi-Conning”, and “Alarm Monitoring Station” applications on TPC24
and RS7 computers. Also the appropriate default settings are made automatically in
the System Configuration utility on the page “Additional settings” of the panel
“Workstation” (see below section MFD Configuration, paragraph Workstation
Settings, item 5).
At each workstation, perform the following procedure.

On a disk D: create the folder D:\MFD and insert MNS CD with product to the
CD/DVD-drive.
Copy all files from the folder with product on MNS CD disk to D:\MFD.
Run Setup.exe file in the folder D:\MFD:
Press “Next >” button. A window containing the licensing agreement text will be displayed:

Press “Yes” button. The copyright information window will be displayed:
Press “Next >” button.
For the MFD software installation on the RS6B computer, press “Next >” button.
To install the MFD on other computer, it is necessary to make sure that the computer
parameters and pre-installed software comply with specified requirements.
If any critical non-compliance is identified, the installation will not be continued:

Press “Next >” button. A window containing system information will be displayed:
Press “Next >” button. Specify the path to the product license (A:\by default)
in displayed window:
The license information will be displayed:

Select components to be installed by the Setup Wizard (on each WS as per

the licensed MFD configuration):
For the operation with the Navi-Planner 4000 software on the WS, the “Pure Slave
support server” component is required to be installed.
For the operation with the Remote Keyboard, the “Remote keyboard server” should
be installed.
To prohibit the installation of selected component, select option “This feature will not
be available”:

Keep component “Integrator Activation” not available, it will be activated later:
Press “Install” button.

Dongle-less Protection
The program will perform the product installation. In the displayed window,
press “Finish” button:
Press “Yes” button to restart PC:
DONGLE-LESS PROTECTION
General
In the work with dongle-less protection, the role of a hardware dongle is played by a
special set of binary data stored in the registry (activation code). All the information
which, in the ordinary work scenario, is stored in a physical dongle is contained in
the activation code.
The activation code is associated with unique characteristics of a particular user

computer. The activation code cannot be used on other computers.
Each license sets a restriction on the number of computers which the product can be
installed on. In line with this restriction, the user will not be able to activate the
product more than the fixed number of times. For a network, product activation on
each computer is required.
With the Internet connection available, after the system installation the user should
run a dedicated application, which collects information on the computers and sends
it to Transas activation service, which sends back an activation code to enable the
license.
If there is no Internet connection, the user e-mails information to

activate@transas.com and receives the activation code in much the same way.

ATTENTION!
With the use of the dongle-less protection, it is necessary to remember that if the
computer configuration is changed (e.g., faulty parts replaced, software re-installed,
etc.) the available activation code cannot be used any more. It is necessary to notify
Transas (via the distributor) about the replacement and repeat the procedure to
receive a new activation code.
Using License Activation Utility

Install the product as described above in section MFD Software Installation.
Run the License Activation utility by selecting the appropriate item

in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\LICENSE ACTIVATION UTILITY).
If there is no Internet connection, copy information (as shown in the figure below)
and e-mail it to activate@transas.com.

The following rules must be observed to ensure automatic processing of the e-mail
with activation request:
• A separate e-mail with request must be submitted for each computer (System
ID) where the license activation is required;
• The names of the parameters, their number, format and sequence should be as
shown in the figure below.;
• No space symbol allowed in beginning of the lines with parameter;
• No other lines (including empty lines) allowed before the first line with
parameter;
• The subject of the e-mail has to be formed according to the template shown in
the figure below. The System ID has to be duplicated in the subject.
After a certain time interval after the e-mail has been sent, the activation code will be
provided by a reply e-mail with the same subject. Copy the received activation code
and paste it into the corresponding field of the utility as shown in the figure below.
(including “===” symbols before and after the code) and press the “OK” button.
If there is an Internet connection, press the Get activation key online button.
After a certain time interval, the key will be generated and received by the user
automatically.
After receiving the key, press the “OK” button.

After the activation is completed, press the “OK” button.
Make the product settings as described below.
Special Cases of License Activation

1. No reply will be send in case the automatic processing service fails to recognize
a received e-mail as a license activation request. If there is no reply within
reasonable period, (within several minutes) check if the sent e-mail meets the
rules stated in the paragraph above.
2. In case a license activation request cannot be fulfilled, one of the following

issues will be reported (interactively or by e-mail, depends what way the request
has been made):
• “HWID is incorrect” – means wrong value of “System ID” parameter;

• “The copy is not dongle-less” – means the Registered Copy in the Distribution
System intended for use with hardware key protection;
• “The copy is closed” – means Registered Copy is disabled in the Distribution
System manually;
• “The copy is expired” – means Registered Copy is disabled in the Distribution
System due the expiration date has been reached;
• “There are no more free workstations for this copy” – means that number of
allowed activations is exceeded.
3. In case of “The copy is not dongle-less” issue, the Registered Copy in the
Distribution System can be switched to the “Dongle-less” mode by e-mail
request to production@transas.com. See example for such request in the figure
below. The following data to have be provided in the request:
• Full Name of Requesting Person (Requested by);

• Product Name (Product);
• Registered Copy Number (RN).

Several requests from one requester can be combined into one e-mail.
4. In case of “There are no more free workstations for this copy” issue, the
activation records related to the Registered Copy in the Distribution System can
be reset by e-mail request to production@transas.com. See example for such
request in the figure below. The following data to be provided in the request:
• Full Name of Requesting Person (Requested by);

• Product Name (Product);
• Registered Copy Number (RN);
• System ID.
Several requests from one requester can be combined into one e-mail.
5. The requests mentioned in items 3 and 4 will be accepted and processed only
if authorized persons send them (from authorized email accounts).
If you are not authorized to make such requests, please contact support service
by service@transas.com.
6. The requests mentioned in items 3 and 4 are processed manually.

MFD Configuration
MFD CONFIGURATION
Run the System Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item
in the START menu
(for the MFD: START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\SYSTEM CONFIGURATION or
for the NS 4100: START\PROGRAMS\NAVI-SAILOR 4100\SYSTEM CONFIGURATION):
Enter the password:
Press the “OK” button and go on to the next installation step.
If the NS 4100 is being installed, in the “Logon” dialogue box, which will appear,
from the User list box select the “root” user. Press “OK” button.
The screen will display a window showing the automatically generated master
password intended for unlocking the system (the system is locked by default after
three unsuccessful attempts to enter the password).
Save it and store in a safe place to prevent the unauthorised access.
Press the “OK” button and go on to the next installation step.

MFD Configuration
General
The System Configuration utility consists of 6 panels; pages divide each panel.
To open the required panels, press the appropriate buttons:
Panel Name Purpose Button
INS Configuration of the entire MFD
Workstation Configuration of each Workstations separately
Sensors Sensors settings, configuration of alarms, and warnings
Radar Configuration of scanners and RIB-equipped workstations
Security To create users permitted to edit the NS settings and set

passwords permitting this access.
Commissioning Table Formation of MFD commissioning table

MFD Configuration
Sensors Settings
Press Sensors button. The Workstation drop-down list specifies the name of
the workstation which settings will be made for, and “ALL” line for all WS’s.
ATTENTION!
Perform individual settings for each Workstation, selecting them consecutively from
the Workstation droop-down list. All data will be synchronized at all the Workstations
after the settings saving.
1. Select “ALL” line from the Workstation drop-down list.
2. Open “Sensors” page to set the WS connected sensors:

MFD Configuration
– During the NS 4100 installation, this page looks as follows:
– Adjust COM ports for operation with connected sensors. The following actions
shall be done for this purpose:
Select required sensor from the drop-down list in the column Sensor;
Note: If you need to download the route from GPS to ECDIS, specify
DOWNLOAD_ROUTE sensor. On the contrary, to send a route from ECDIS
to GPS, you have to specify sensor UPLOAD_ROUTE and use the Upload
button in the “Route Planning” panel.
In the Alias column, specify the sensor name to enable its identification
for the purpose of the redundancy concept. After the input of an alias,
it becomes possible to connect this sensor to other ports. I.e., should
one COM port fail, data will be received from the next port on other WS
connected to this sensor;
In the column Port, select from drop-down list the required COM port of
the Workstation computer, which this sensor is physically connected to.
In case of TCP connection, select TCP port, and in the columns Baudrate
(IP address) and Bits (IP Port), enter IP address of connected device and
port of connection accordingly;

MFD Configuration
In the Check sum column, if required, disable the checksum by selected

“OFF” from drop-down list.
– In case of connection of the WAGO sensor to the DCU (via RS232/RS422

converter), for networked stations there is a possibility to use the “global” dry
contacts for acknowledging alarms, outputting the alarm status outside,
receiving the external alarms, transferring the timer reset signal “Dead Man”
to the outer Alarm Panel and etc. For adjustment of this connection, make the
following actions:
Configure the DCU connection to the MFD on the page “DCU settings” of
the panel “Sensors” as described below in item 4;
In the Sensor column, select “WAGO1” from the drop-down list;
In the Port column, select from drop-down list the required DCU port
(DCU1-DCU16) which this sensor is physically connected to;
In the Baudrate (IP address) column, select baud rate 9600.
– Check for the relevant port of the connected sensor:

If COM-port was selected, specify in the drop-down list the following
COM port exchange parameters, defined in technical description
of connected sensor: Baud rate, Bits, Parity, and Stopbits;
To check the propriety of sensor connection, press the Test button
in the Port test column.
Note: Baud rate 19200 bit/sec should be selected for ES6 keyboard, and 9600
bit/sec for LCD display. For MODBUS sensors, select baud rate 38400
bit/sec.
Note: The above mentioned checking can be carried out only on the workstation,
which COM-port the sensor is connected to.

MFD Configuration
– Press Start Monitoring button:
– If incorrect data is received, or there is no data, change the COM port

parameters in Port Settings group. COM port parameters:
Baud Rate: 50–115200 (by default, 4800);
Data Bits: 7, 8 (by default, 8);
Parity: None, Event, Odd, Space, Mark (by default, None);
Stop Bits: 1, 2 (by default, 1).
All the changes in the communication channel parameters are required
to be made with the data monitoring turned off.
If data from some sensor is not processed by the MFD but is nonetheless
displayed in the monitoring window, it is necessary to turn off the processing
of data checksum from the device in the System Configuration Utility
(System Configuration Utility\Sensors\Sensors).
– Finish testing by pressing Stop Monitoring and Cancel buttons;
– Enter as required, the log and gyro reading accuracy in Log Accuracy and
Gyro Accuracy fields;
– Use the button Remove Sensor for deletion of unnecessary sensors;
– Press “Apply” button.

MFD Configuration
3. For the NS 4100, in addition to item 2, to use the INS (Inertial Navigation
System) sensors, it is necessary to specify these sensors as follows:
– Select “INSPOS1” sensor from the drop-down list in the column Sensor:
– INSGYRO1” and “INSOUT1” sensors will also appear in the column Sensor;
– If necessary, in the Alias column, enter the sensor name to enable its
identification for the purpose of the redundancy concept as described above
in item 2;
– In the column Port, select from the drop-down list the required COM (TCP)
ports of the Workstation computer, which INS sensors are physically
connected to;
– In the same way, specify “INSPOS2” sensor, if it is available;

MFD Configuration
– To use the functions for sending AIS bogus data on the own ship and target
parameters, it is necessary to the WS with NS 4100 which the AIS sensor is
connected to, in addition connect any free AIS port – Sensor 1, 2 or 3
(see INSTALLATION MANUAL R4 AIS CLASS A TRANSPONDER SYSTEM
under Wiring Cable Connections). Connection should be made via ports
with the RS-422 interface. This functionality is only available with the use of
the SAAB R4SW Secure WAIS Transponder System. For the additional data
on the functionality operation, see NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS
(V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section Warship AIS Features,
paragraph AIS Targets Simulation.
– From the drop-down list in the Sensors column, select BOGUS_OUT, and assign
the necessary COM port to it. By default, the Baudrate is 4800, the value can be
checked or modified by using the AIS MKD (see under Port Rate Config in the
OPERATOR'S MANUAL R4 AIS CLASS A TRANSPONDER SYSTEM);
– From the drop-down list in the Sensors column, select GOLD_MSG_OUT,
and assign the necessary COM port to it.

MFD Configuration
4. Switch to “DCU settings” page (if the DCU is available in the equipment set):
– In DCU 1-1 group, check Enabled checkbox:

In IP 1 input box, enter “10.8.1.200” IP address;
In IP 2 input box, enter “10.8.2.200” IP address.
– In DCU 1-2 group, check Enabled checkbox:
In IP 1 input box, enter “10.8.1.201” IP address;
In IP 2 input box, enter “18.1.2.201” IP address.
– If more than two DCU are connected to the MFD, enter IP addresses for the
rest DCU in appropriate fields. For IP addresses of DCU III – DCU VIII types
see table in Chapter 1, section Network. The picture below shows settings
for eight DCU:
Main: DCU1-1, DCU2-1, DCU3-1, DCU4-1;
Backup: DCU1-2, DCU2-2, DCU3-2, DCU4-2.

MFD Configuration
– In DCU connection group, press Connect button:

MFD Configuration
– After the connection of the DCU, press the Launch DCU Test button and in the
“DCU Client Simulator” utility window select the CONFIG/DCU CONFIG menu item:
– For the devices connected to the DCU ports, specify in the drop-down list
the following COM port exchange parameters, defined in the technical
description of connected sensor: Baud rate, Bits, Parity, and Stop bits:
– Press the Flush and “Apply” buttons and then close the “Dialog” window;

MFD Configuration
– To check correctness of the sensor connection in the “DCU Client Simulator”

utility window, select the VIEW /SHOW ALL menu item:
– If the settings are correct, the utility windows will display information supplied
to the DCU ports:
– Close “DCU Client Simulator” utility;

– Switch to the “Sensors” page and in the line of the device connected
to the MFD via the DCU press the Test button in the Port test column.
The “Port DCU monitoring” window will display information supplied via
the DCU to the MFD.

MFD Configuration
5. In the Workstation drop-dawn list, select the name of the workstation, which
settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
the Workstation droop-down list. All data will be synchronized at all the workstations
– Check the RS6 I/O ports checkbox if you intend to work with the
alarms/warnings via the RS6 computer discrete ports (for the port setup see
below item 6).

MFD Configuration
6. Switch to “Alerts Output Settings” page:
– To transfer the alert from the MFD to the external device via NMEA interface
(Output), check the checkbox in the column NMEA Alarm. Therefore, when
the certain alert triggering off in the MFD, NMEA sentences with ID specified
in the column Pub Id, will be outputted;
– To transfer the alert from the MFD to the external device via WAGO Module,
check the checkbox in the column WAGO Alarm. In this case, when the certain
alarm is triggering off in the MFD, the WAGO Module output contact specified
in the column WAGO1 OUT ALM Status will be close or open, depending on
selected status of the contact in normal state: N/O (normal open), or N/C
(normal closed), or PO (pulse mode: normally open – close – open), or PC
(pulse mode: normally close – open – close). This alert will be confirmed in
the MFD from the outer source by closing/unclosing the WAGO Module input
contact specified in the column WAGO1 IN Ext. ACK. The outer source alert
will be confirmed from the MFD by closing/unclosing the WAGO Module
output contact specified in the column WAGO1 OUT ACK Status:
In the column WAGO1 IN Ext. ACK, specify the WAGO Module contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alert will be acknowledged in the
MFD from the outer source. Select the outer source alert acknowledge
mode N/C, or N/O;
In the column WAGO1 OUT ALM Status, specify the WAGO Module contact
by closing/unclosing of which the specified alert will be transfered to the
external device. Select the alarm status mode N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC;
In the column WAGO1 OUT ACK Status, specify the WAGO Module contact
by closing/unclosing of which the specified outer source alert will be
acknowledged from the MFD. Select the mode of outer source alert
acknowledge N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC.

MFD Configuration
– To transfer the alarm from the MFD to the external device via RS6 output
contacts, check the checkbox in the column RS6 I/O Alarm. In this case, when
the certain alert is triggering off in the MFD, the RS6 output contact specified
in the column RS6 I/O OUT ALM Status will be closed or opened, depending on
selected status of the contact in normal state: N/O (normal open), or N/C
(normal closed), or PO (pulse mode: normally open – close – open), or PC
(pulse mode: normally close – open – close).This alert will be confirmed in the
MFD from the outer source by closing/unclosing the RS6 input contact
specified in the column RS6 I/O IN Ext. ACK. The outer source alarm will be
confirmed from the MFD by closing/unclosing RS6 output contact specified
in the column RS6 I/O OUT ACK Status:
In the column RS6 I/O IN Ext. ACK, specify the RS6 input contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alert will be acknowledged in the
MFD from the outer source. Select the outer source alert acknowledge
mode N/C, or N/O;
In the column RS6 I/O OUT ALM Status, specify the RS6 output contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified alert will be transfered to the
external device. Select the alert status mode N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC;
In the column RS6 I/O OUT ACK Status, specify the RS6 output contact by
closing/unclosing of which the specified outer source alert will be
acknowledged from the MFD. Select the mode of outer source alert
acknowledge N/O, or N/C, or PO, or PC.

MFD Configuration
7. Switch to “Additional contacts” page:
– In the Input contacts group settings, make the following adjustments:

In the Alert sound input box of the group RS6 I/O contacts or WAGO1
contacts, depending on the system configuration, specify the number of
RS6 or WAGO module input contact intended for silencing the alert
sound signal came from outer equipment. Closing/unclosing the
specified contact performs the silencing of all the active alerts.
Select status of the contact N/O or N/C.
In the Power Supply Failure, Low Battery and Autopilot Power Failure input
boxes of the group RS6 I/O contacts or WAGO1 contacts, depending on the
system configuration, specify the number of RS6 or WAGO module input
contact intended for triggering off these alerts in the MFD.
Note: Depending on the model of UPS, it is recommended to connect and
configure the system as described above in Chapter 1, section
Workstation Installation, paragraphs Uninterruptible Power Supply
Unit UPS6 and Weidmüller UPS Installation, items Connection of UPS
Alarms to RS6 Computer.
– In the Output contacts group settings, make the settings described below:
In the Dead man signal input box of the group RS6 I/O contacts or WAGO1
contacts, depending on the system configuration, specify the number of
RS6 or WAGO module output contact intended for transferring the timer
reset signal to the outer Alarm Panel. Therefore, the specified contact
will be closed or opened, depending on the selected status of the contact
(N/O, or N/C), by trackball movement with resetting the “Dead Man”
timer on the outer Alarm Panel. Select status of the contact N/O, or N/C.
If there will be the user activity only at one workstation in the network,
the timer reset signal will be transferred to the outer Alarm Panel.

MFD Configuration
In the Sailor failure, Radar failure, Conning failure, BAM failure input boxes of
the group RS6 I/O contacts or WAGO1 contacts, depending on the system
configuration,specify the number of RS6 or WAGO module output
contact intended for transferring these alerts to the external device.
Thus, if the application is aborted (turned off, station broken), the alert is
triggered off and transferred to the external device via the specified dry
contact of the selected workstation or through WAGO contacts
connected to the external device.
– In the Alert sound contact behaviour group, select one of the following settings:
Silent until new alert (default) – the alarm sound signal will be silenced
when new alarm is triggered off;
Silent until timeout – the alarm sound signal will be silenced during the
interval specified in the input box (from 5 to 60 sec).
– If the WAGO sensor is connected to the MFD via DCU port, select “ALL” line
from the Workstation drop-down list and make all necessary alerts settings as
described above. Configuration of WAGO sensors connection to the MFD is
performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”.
8. Switch to “External Hot Keys” page:
– In the Hotkey column, enter the Hotkey combination for performing the
necessary operation, which should correspond to the combination assigned in
the Hotkeys Editor utility (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). UTILITIES, Chapter 11, section Work with HotKeys
Editor);
– In the Repeatable column, check the checkbox if the action is required to be

performed while the external hotkey button is depressed;
– In the Type column, select the sets of contacts which the external hotkey
button will be connected to;

MFD Configuration
– In the Contact In column, specify the contact intended for receiving external
hotkey button ON signal.
9. Switch to “CCTV” page:
– In the Sensor column, select the type of the sensor which the camera is
connected to (see document NC4000 VIDEO ADJUSTMENT on MNS CD
(TRANSAS_MNS\DRIVERS\MoxaVPort_351);
– In the IP address column enter IP address of this server (see document

NC4000 VIDEO ADJUSTMENT on MNS CD
(TRANSAS_MNS\DRIVERS\MoxaVPort_351);
– In the IP port, User and Password columns leave everything unchanged.
Note: For the Navi-Conning 4000 adjustment, see the appropriate section,
paragraph CCTV SETUP below.
For the Navi-Conning 5000 adjustment, see the appropriate section,
paragraph Video Image Adjustment below.
For the FLIR adjustment, see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II, Chapter 2, section FLIR
System Setup.

MFD Configuration
10. For the NS 4100, if INS sensors are selected on the page “Sensors”
(see above item 3), switch to “INS Contacts” page:
– In the Sensor alias column, it will be displayed a sensor alias, which specified
in the column Alias on the page “Sensors” (see item 3 above);
– For the “INSGYRO1” sensor, from drop-down list in the column Contact type,
select the set of the Workstation’s GPIO or WAGO contacts connected to the
external device Gyro Switch;
– In the column Contact host, select from drop-down list the Workstation
computer, which the INS sensor is physically connected to;
– In the column Contact index, specify the contact by closing/unclosing of which
the signal will be transfered to the Gyro Switch when the INS sensor is
selected on the page “Heading” of the panel “Sensors”
(see NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ,
section Navigation, paragraph Use of Inertial Navigation System (INS)
Sensor);
– In the column Contact normal state, select from drop-down list the normal status
of the contact (N/O – normal open, or N/C –normal closed);
– In the same way, make all settings for the “INSGYRO2” sensor;

MFD Configuration
11. Switch to “DDU Settings” page (for the NS 4100 only):
The DDU provides the ECDIS with relevant sensor data like vessel position,
vessel heading, water/ground speed/heading, depth, wind and etc.
– From the DDU Protocol Port drop-down list, select the WS’s port, which the
required sensor is physically connected to. Configuration of the sensors
connection to the NS 4100 ports is performed on the page “Sensors”
(see above items 2 and 3);
– From the DDU NR Port drop-down list, select the required port of
the Workstation computer, which the ARPA sensor (ARPA_A or ARPA_B) is
physically connected to. Configuration of these sensors connection to
the NS 4100 ports is performed on the page “Sensors” (see above item 2);

MFD Configuration
– In the field DDU Platform, press the appropriate radio button to choose your
vessel’s type;
MFD Settings
1. Press INS button. Open “Network settings” page to set the MFD network
parameters (in the case of MFD network configuration). This page is intended
for specifying the Navigation MASTER priority for the tasks on each MFD
Workstation. The priority can only be set for a WS with the “Backup” role. The
highest priority (“0”) has a task engaged in primary navigation data processing.
The function of navigation data processing is transferred to the tasks and
Workstations with the lower priority in a queue (“1”, “2”, etc.) in the case of
Navigation MASTER with “0” priority failure. If the “Slave” role is set
for a workstation, it can never be used as the Navigation MASTER.
Note: The Electronic Ship Log Book will be accessible only on workstations with
priorities “0”, “1” and “2”. On workstations with priorities “0” and “1”, there is
an opportunity to edit events. On the WS with priority “2”, it is possible only
to view events.
– In Role column, by default set “Backup” role for ECDIS task on all WS’s;
– Use Priority column to set the workstation priority in accordance with
the MFD configuration.

MFD Configuration
2. Switch to “General” page (the page looks as follows, if MFD-FMO exchange

option is available):
– In the Watches field, set the navigation watches schedule;

– In the Navigational data settings group, specify the period of the navigation data
processing (milliseconds) (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, Navigational
Sensors section, paragraph Consistent Common Reference System);
– Use the System time synchronization threshold input box to set the time
difference in days (by default, 365). If the UTC time sensor supplies time
which differs from the current system time by more than the set number of
days, the system time will not be synchronized with time received from the
satellite. If the difference equal to 0 is set, the standard time processing
algorithm is used;
– Check the Double ended vessel checkbox if it is this type of ship which MFD is
installed on. In this case, the radar picture will be turned by 180 degrees
in RADAR task when the appropriate button is pressed;
– Check the SOG calculation from STW+drift enabled checkbox if it is necessary
to have such source for the SOG;
– Keep the Integrity check enabled checkbox unchecked for non-certified
(DNV, Lloyd’s Register) installations (it is strictly recommended!).
If the Integrity check enabled checkbox is checked, then it is necessary to
specify Internal or External (NSR sentence) (from INSBRIDGE sensor) integrity
check. The ECDIS indicates the received integrity and plausibility of the basic
CCRS values using the information in the NSR sentence (see Chapter 4,
paragraph Format of Input Data);
– Check the Accept Manual Heading input {not recommended to use if Navi-Radar
installed} checkbox, if the manual heading input will be used with the gyro
connected. If the NR is installed, this function must be disabled;
– Check the Heading Monitor checkbox to activate Heading Monitor (HM)
function.

MFD Configuration
Note: Heading Monitor (HM) function should be activated only in one device.
If HM is available in autopilot or in other external equipment, disable HM in
ECDIS. IF HM is not available in external equipment, HM should be
activated in ECDIS.
– In the HDG monitor threshold input box, set the maximum value of heading
deviation from connected gyrocompasses (two compasses must be
connected to the system according with IEC 62065 Ed.2) in exceeding of
which, “Heading Monitor” alert will be generated (from 3 to 15 degreas);
– In the MFD - FMO exchange group, leave default values of the IP addresses and
ports without change and check the appropriate checkboxes if it is necessary:
Routes exchange - to exchange routes with the FVO;
Send Own Ship track to FVO – to send the simplified track to the FVO;
Text Communication – to enable the chat functionality with the FVO;
Using Proxy {direct connection} – to enable the text message exchange with
the FVO by means of Transas Text Communication instrument directly
address to address without broadcasting;
Using Maritime Cloud – to enable the text message exchange with the FVO
by means of third-party instrument: Maritime Cloud client;
Use RTZ format – to exchange routes with the FVO using RTZ route
format according with IEC 61174 standard,
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MFD-FMO Routes and
Tracks Exchange).
If the NS 4100 is installed, the “General” page looks as follows:
– In the Navigational data settings group, check Fast POS,COG, SOG, HDG data
checkbox if you expect to use the high-rate own ship data (see document
NAVI-SAILOR 4100 (V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section
Navigation, paragraph High Speed Data Sensors Support);
– In the Logbook settings group, in the window Logbook master copy host, select
the workstation in the network where the master ship logbook will be stored;
– Check the Manual Heading enabled checkbox if the manual heading input will be
used with the gyro connected;
– Check the Use AIS as PS checkbox if the AIS will be used as a position source.

MFD Configuration
3. Switch to “Ship settings” page:
– In the Ship Setup field, enter the following own ship identification data to be used in
the AIS transponder work (to enable this, the Use AIS MKD (Own AIS device)
checkbox should be checked on the “AIS Settings” page, see item 10):
MMSI;
Call Sign;
Name;
IMO No.
– In the field Ship Setup, enter the principal dimensions of the own ship:
Beam Overall (in metres);
Length Overall (in metres);
Bridge Elevation (in metres), the value which is used for lights visibility
calculation;
– Enter the Conning Station coordinates and coordinates of the next connected
sensor antenna units. Configuration of external devices connection to
the MFD ports is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”
(see above). If external device is not connected, the group will be blank:
POS1 – (D)GPS1;
POS2 – (D)GPS2;
DLOG1 head sensor – the head Dual-Axis Bottom Speed sensor, which will
be used for calculations in the MFD;
DLOG1 stern sensor – the stern Dual-Axis Bottom Speed sensor, which
will be used for calculations in the MFD;
DLOG1 head conning – head point, which the calculated transverse vector
will originate from when displayed on the “Dual” panel of ECDIS task in
Docking Mode;
DLOG1 stern conning – stern point, which the calculated transverse vector
will originate from when displayed on the “Dual” panel of ECDIS task
in Docking Mode;
Radar External 1 – scanner X-band;
Radar External 2 – scanner S-band;
AIS External GPS – (D)GPS for the AIS;
AIS Internal GPS – DGPS for the SAAB R4 AIS type only.

MFD Configuration
Note: Input can be made either with the cursor on the ship’s scheme in the middle
part of the page or by the direct coordinates entering in Station Position (meters)
field. Geographic coordinates of the ship are always referred to the reference
point. See document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2, Navigational Sensors section,
Consistent Common Reference System paragraph.
Note: For the Track Control mode, positions of the GPS antenna and Conning
Station should be precisely set. It is advisable to set the Conning Station in
the ship centreline plane (Y = 0).
– In the field Height (from keel, meters), specify the heights from the keel for
transducers of each Echosounder (±);
– In the field Loading depended settings, specify lead distance in meters for
empty, half-loaded and loaded ship (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 5, Route
Planning section, Route Elements paragraph);
– In User Ship Contour field, select the User Ship Contour, which is to be
displayed on the ECDIS task screen when the ship size comparable scale is
selected (the licensed option to be ordered in Transas).
If the Draught Information System (DIS) is used, make adjustments in the “DIS
Settings” field (for description DIS, see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section Draught
Information System):
Note: Since “DIS sounder” warning is triggered off by the UKC (under-keel
clearance) value calculated in the sounder position, it is necessary to pay
attention to the correctness of the sounder antenna position settings
(X and Y) and its offset (Height).
– In the DIS Settings group, from the Ship model drop-down list, select the ship
type for squat calculations:
To install the New Laker ship model, press the Default State button.
Pressing this button restores the following default settings:
The ship type – New Laker;

The Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox is checked (page “AIS”);
The frequency of tracks recording (page “Tracks”) – 2 sec;
The ship bow/stern draught (DIS WS, “UKC Data” display) – 8.08 m.

MFD Configuration
– From the DIS-Viewer station drop-down list, select the WS on which the DIS
Viewer will be installed:
Note: By default, the DIS Viewer is installed on the workstation with the priority
Backup “1”. In case of ECDIS standalone, it will be installed on the WS with
the priority Backup “0”.
– On the page “AIS Settings” (see below item 10), make sure that
the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox in the Advanced Abilities group is
checked (checked by default);
– On the page “Tracks” (see below item 13), check that in the Track of Own Ship
group, from the Primary Position & General Nav.Data, Route Monitoring Data and
Track of Targets drop-down lists, the “2” value is selected (selected by default).
If the NS 4100 is installed, the “Ship settings” page looks as follows:
– In addition to the above settings, in the Ship Setup field, check the Submarine
mode checkbox, if it is necessary to show the ship symbol in the form of a
submarine on the “Depth Viewer” page of the “Underwater” panel (see
document NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS,
section Underwater Features).

MFD Configuration
4. Switch to “Chart collections” page:
– In Chart Collections field, specify chart formats required for work with
the application. All checkboxes are checked by default, i.e. upon installation
of charts of specified formats they will be displayed; if checkbox is not
checked, the charts of this format will not be displayed;
– In Databases field, specify databases required for work with the application
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7);
– In Tidal databases group, specify databases sources required for work with
the MFD in Databases group. Total tide source can be chosen if Total Tide SW
product had been pre-installed and the appropriate option is opened by
the license. Select NOAA, if required to work with NOAA database source.
5. Switch to “Fallback” page:

MFD Configuration
If an alarm is required to be generated by the loss of the GPS differential mode,

check the Diff. mode lost checkbox.
The rest of the parameters of shifting to the reserve data sources are set
by default and not accessible for editing (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 2,
Navigational Sensors section, Navigational Sensors Selection paragraph,
under Automatic Source Selection with Actuation of Fallback
Functionality).
6. Switch to “NMEA Input filter”:
The table provides all the messages from the data sources processed in the MFD:
– Press the button with the message name to prohibit its processing (the button
will be displayed in a red color). To permit processing the message, press
once again this button (the button will be displayed in a green color);
– Press the ALL button to prohibit the processing of all messages from
the source in question (the all buttons will be displayed in a red color). To
permit processing the all messages, press once again ALL button (the all
buttons will be displayed in a green color);
– In Not processed talkers input field, enter talkers of sensors messages from
which will be ignored. If necessary to switch-off the talker filter, uncheck
Talker filter checkbox.
In this case, entered talkers EC and TE will not be processed:

MFD Configuration
7. Switch to “NMEA Output” page:
– In the field Sensor, select the NMEAOUT where the NMEA sentences will be
transmitted from MFD. Configuration of NMEAOUT connection to the MFD
ports is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors” (see above).
If external device is not connected, the page will be blank;
– By default, GLL, GGA, VDR, WPL, RTE, ZDA sentences available for
transmitting to the external devices will be transmitted by the MFD. Check the
corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences transmitting.
– To transmit EVE sentences (actions by the crew on the bridge) to the
BAM/BNWAS server, check “EVE” checkbox. On the page “Sensors” of the
panel “Sensors”, in the column Port, the appropriate TCP port should be
selected and the checkbox Parity (Server mode) must be checked, the required
port number should be specified in the column Bits (IP port).
For adjustments of transferring EVE sentences to the BAM/BNWAS server,
see below section BAM Configuration, paragraph Connections Page,
item 4 and paragraph Alerts Page;
– For the Online vessel monitoring in FMO functionality to operate, the
checkboxes of the following sentences should be checked: GLL, GGA, VTG,
VHW, ZDA and HDT;
– For the GLL, GGA, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE, APB and RDX sentences
(if they are used), select the required precision (a number of decimals after
the comma) in the Precision column. If necessary, for the GGA, VTG, VHW
and VDR sentences, enable the status value transmitting by checking the
checkbox in the Status/Magnet column;
– In the Talker input box, it is possible to enter the necessary talker (see
documentation on the device);
– To disable the NMEA sentences checksum transmitting, uncheck
the checkbox Check Sum in the Append To All field;
– By default, sentences will be sent to the output with a 1 second interval. If it is
necessary to change the sentence sending interval, check the Interval
checkbox and set the necessary value in the input box;

MFD Configuration
– If it is necessary to send EVE sentences for local workstation only, check the
appropriate checkbox in the Additional settings field.
– For the MFD-FMO exchange option, check the checkbox next to the VDM
sentence to send AIS targets from the MFD to the FVO
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MFD-FMO Routes and Tracks
Exchange):
If the NS 4100 is installed, the “NMEA Output” page looks as follows:
– In addition to the above described settings, for the THS sentences

(if they are used), select the required precision (a number of decimals after
the comma) in the Precision column;
– Check the checkbox for the R00 sentences to enable these sentences
transmitting to the output (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS
(V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, Annex, section Route Data Output).

MFD Configuration
With the use of INS sensor, in the Sensor field, select the INSOUT where NMEA
sentences will be transmitted from the NS 4100 to an external device.
Configuration of the INSOUT sensor connection to the NS 4100 ports is
performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors” (see above items):
– By default, GGA, VBW sentences available for transmitting to the Inertial

Navigation System will be transmitted by the NS 4100. Uncheck the
corresponding checkboxes to disable sentences transmitting;
– For the GGA sentence (if it is used), select the required precision (a number
of decimals after the comma) in the Precision column. If necessary, for the
GGA sentence, enable the status value transmitting by checking the
checkbox in the Status/Magnet column;
checkbox and set the necessary value in the input box.

MFD Configuration
With the use of the Track Control mode, in the field Sensor, select the TCS (the
configuration of TCS sensor is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel
“Sensors”):
– By default, ZDA, GLL and RDX, sentences available for transmitting to the
external devices will be transmitted by the MFD.
If necessary, check the checkboxes of additional messages used in the
operation with the autopilot.
Note: It is advisable to use the minimum quantity of additional messages (or
remove them at all for the “Autopilot output” port in case of TCS connection)
as a large size of transmitted information may result in delays in transmitting
necessary messages and, ultimately, in the autopilot failure.
– For the GLL and RDX sentences, select the required precision (a number of
decimals after the comma) in the Precision column;

MFD Configuration
With the use of the sensor Autopilot NMEA out, in the field Sensor, select the
AP_NMEAout (configuration of this sensor is performed on the page “Sensors”
of the panel “Sensors”):
– Check the corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences

transmitting:
– For the GLL, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE and APB sentences (if they are
used), select the required precision (a number of decimals after the comma)
in the Precision column. If necessary, for the VTG, VHW and VDR sentences,
enable the status value transmitting by checking the checkbox in the
Status/Magnet column;

MFD Configuration

– In the Additional settings group:
To enable APB message of short format, uncheck the APB message full
format checkbox;
To disable transmitting APB and XTE messages if the route is unloaded,
uncheck the Send APB and XTE messages when route is unloaded checkbox.
With the use of the sensor UPLOAD_ROUTE, , select it in the field Sensor
(the configuration of this sensor is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel
“Sensors”):
– If necessary, check the checkbox for RDX message transmitting;

– For the WPL and RDX sentences, select the required precision (a number of
decimals after the comma) in the Precision column;
– To disable the Waypoint names sending to the output, uncheck the checkbox
WP Names in the Output Options field;
– To enable the Route name sending in every RTE sentences to the output,
check the checkbox Route name in every RTE.
With the use of the sensor ALARM_STATION, select it in the field Sensor,
(the configuration of ALARM_STATION sensor is performed on the page

MFD Configuration
“Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”. In the column Port, the appropriate port
P450_x should be selected):
– By default, HBT, ALF, ALC and ARC sentences available for transmitting to
the external devices will be transmitted by the MFD. If necessary, uncheck
the appropriate checkboxes of messages which will not be used in the
operation with the autopilot;
the checkbox Check Sum in the Append To All field.
With the use of the sensor INSBRIDGE (for transmitting NSR, POS, THS
sentences from INS to the other station), select it in the field Sensor, (the
configuration of this sensor is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel
“Sensors”):

MFD Configuration
– If necessary, check the checkbox for the appropriate message transmitting;

– For the THS sentences, select the required precision (a number of decimals
after the comma) in the Precision column;
– In the Talker input box, it is possible to enter the necessary talker;
8. Switch to “ARPA Output” page:
– In the Sensor field, select the ARPA_OUTPUT where the NMEA sentences
will be transmitted from MFD. Configuration of ARPA_OUTPUT connection to
the MFD ports is performed on the “Sensors” page of the “Sensors” panel
(see above). If external device is not connected, the page will be blank;
– Check the corresponding checkboxes to enable the necessary sentences
transmitting to the external devices from MFD (only TTM or TTD messages
can be selected);
the Check Sum checkbox in the Append To All field;

MFD Configuration
9. Switch to “NMEA Input” page:
– For each connected DLOG (Dual-Axis Bottom Tracking Log), uncheck

checkboxes for VBW sentence fields which should not be processed in
the MFD (e.g., due to the absence of relevant sensors). Configuration of
external devices connection to the MFD ports is performed on the page
“Sensors” of the “Sensors” panel (see above). If external DLOG sensor is not
connected, the page will be blank.
10. Switch to “AIS Settings” page:

MFD Configuration
If the NS 4100 is installed, the “AIS Setting” page looks as follows:
– Use UAIS Model group to select the model of the transponder:

Press AIS (IEC) radio button to operate with any transponder complying
with IEC 61993-2;
Press SAAB R4 radio button to operate with SAAB R4 transponder;
Press SAAB R5 radio button to operate with SAAB R5 transponder;
Press T-104 radio button to operate with T-104 transponder;
Press T-603 radio button to operate with T-603 transponder.
– In the Advanced Abilities group:
Check the Use AIS MKD (Own AIS device) checkbox to enable the use of the
ECDIS as an MKD;
Check the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox to enable the display
of the St.Lawrence Seaway AIS Data Messaging.
Note: If DIS is used, the Use St-Lawrence Seaway Protocol checkbox must be
checked (see above item 3).
If it is necessary to prohibit an opportunity of the data change on the
“Voyage and Static data” page of the “AIS” panel, check the Read-Only
AIS Device checkbox (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). ECDIS USER MANUAL, Chapter 10, section AIS,
paragraph Setting of Voyage Data).
– If the “AIS Output” option is available, in the AIS Output group set the following
parameters:
Maximum Range – enter the radius (up to 100 NM) of an area within which
the AIS targets will be transmitted to the external device via NMEA
Output (see above item 7);
Maximum targets – enter the maximum number of targets within an area
specified in Maximum Range input box, which will be transmitted to the
external device via NMEA Output;

MFD Configuration
– Use Miscellaneous group to set AIS targets display mode:

In Maximum Range input box, enter the radius (up to 100 NM) of an area
within which the AIS targets will be displayed;
In the AIS safety messages history input box, specify the number of days
(from 0 to 100; by default, 30 days) during which the AIS safety
messages will be stored (upon the expiry of this period all the messages
will be deleted).
Check Always “Active” target status checkbox for activation displayed AIS
targets (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 8, section
Display of AIS Targets, paragraph Activated and Non-Activated
AIS Targets).
– Use the AIS class settings group to select a class of AIS equipment connected
to the MFD (for class B AIS equipment select the Safety Messaging and/or
Binary Messaging status of messages (Safety and/or Normal) which can be
sent from the MFD);
– Use the Bogus targets settings group to set bogus functionality parameters
(for NS 4100 installation only when working with the AIS SAAB R4):
From the Read Port drop-down list select the SAAB R4 transponder port
which the BOGUS_OUT port in the NS 4100 is connected to (see item 3);
In R4 Admin password input box enter SAAB R4 administrator transponder
password (see document Operator's Manual R4 AIS Class A
Transponder System).
– Use Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M Settings group for RDF settings (see also
document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MOB Mode with Use of RDF Rhotheta
RT-202/RT-500M):
In Angle Correction input box, enter an exact correction between the initial
direction of RDF Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M bearing origin and
the ship’s centreline plane;
Set the necessary correction polarity Positive or Negative by pressing
the appropriate radio button.
Note: The correction should be within 180 degrees with a positive (0–179º clockwise)
or negative (0–179º counter-clockwise) relative to the own ship centreline plane.
Check MOB Alert Alarm checkbox to turn on the MFD alarm upon
reception of bearing from Rhotheta RT-202 or AIS targets
(see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 1, section MOB Mode with Use of
RDF Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M). Connection of the external MOB
button is detailed in the relevant paragraph of Annex A in
the Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules section.
– Use Seetrac Tracking group to specify the necessary Seetrac tracking mode:
Channel Mode or Address Mode, by pressing the appropriate radio button.

MFD Configuration
11. Switch to “Track Control” page. This page is intended for configuration
Track Control functionality.
– Configuration of TCS connection to the NS 4000 ports is performed on

the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors” (see above). If external device is
not connected, the page will be blank;
– In Autopilot type group, select the name of the autopilot used for Track Control
mode:
Navipilot 4000– with the use of Navipilot 4000 autopilot by “Sperry Marine”
for TCS Class C installation;
Autopilot PT500A – with the use of PT500 autopilot by “Yokogawa” for
TCS Class C installation;
Autopilot PT900 – with the use of PT900 autopilot by “Yokogawa” for TCS
Class C installation;
NautoPilot 2025 “C” – with the use of NP2025 autopilot by “Raytheon” for
TCS Class C installation;
NautoPilot 5000 – with the use of NP5400 autopilot by “Raytheon” for TCS
Autopilot AP3000 Navis – with the use of AP3000 and AP4000 autopilots by
“Navis” for TCS Class C installation;
EMRI SEM200 – with the use of SEM200 autopilot by “EMRI” for TCS
None – Track Control is switched off.
– In Ship limits and Settings group, set the limitations required for the operation
of Track Control mode:
Max speed – maximum ship speed (up to 30 knots) (for an empty, half-
loaded and loaded ship);
Max ROT – maximum rate of turn within the range of 1.0 to 10.0 degrees
per second (for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Min turn radius – minimum radius within the range of 0.1 to 3.0 miles
(for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Altering gain – coefficient of the ownship control accuracy adjustment
within 0.1 to 20.0 (for an empty, half-loaded and loaded ship);
Min manoeuvre speed – minimum speed within the range of 1.0 to 10.0 knots;

MFD Configuration
Max Rudder angle within the range of 25 to 70 degrees;

Initial Pos-Track – maximum distance of the ship position from the
monitored route leg for steering to this leg at the time of turning on Track
Control mode. The value is forcedly synchronised with the Max XTD value;
Max XTD – maximum distance from the leg of the monitored route
expected to be used in Track Control mode. It is set within the range
of 1.0 to 5.0 mile;
Initial HDG-Track – maximum deviation of the current ship course from the
monitored route leg for steering to this leg with Track Control mode ON.
It is set within the range of 20 to 60 degrees;
Max course deviation – maximum possible deviation of the current ship
course from the leg of the monitored route as it is proceeded along in
Track Control mode. It is set within the range of 5 to 30 degrees;
Set the turn arc radius to be used by default when Quick Track mode is
turned on (Default radius), not less than 0.1 mile.
For the autopilot PT900 only, in the Rudder limit on straight leg input box,
set the necessary value (from 5º to the value set in the Max Rudder angle
input box (within the range of 25 to 70 degrees));
For the autopilot Navipilot 4000 only, in the Default ROT on straight legs
input box, set the necessary ROT value (from 0 to 300 º/min):

MFD Configuration
Below is the table of settings usage depends on autopilot.

Parameter / Yokogawa Raytheon EMRI Sperry
Autopilot PT500A; NP2025 Plus; SEM 200 Marine
Navis Raytheon Navipilot
AP3000; NP5400; 4000
Navis Yokogawa
AP4000; PT900
Max speed x x x x
Max ROT x Not applicable Not applicable x
Min turn radius x x x x
Altering gain x Not applicable Not applicable x
Min manoeuvre speed x x x x
Max Rudder angle x x Not applicable x
Initial Pos-Track x x x x
Max XTD x x x x
Initial HDG-Track x x x x
Max course deviation x x x x
Default radius x x x x
Note: Pay special attention to the accuracy of setting the F-Distance parameter on
the “Ship settings” page.
12. Switch to “Speed Maneuvering” page. This page is intended for configuration
Trial Manoeuvre functionality:
– In the Ship loading drop-down list, select the ship loading option;
– In the Max. Speed (kt) group, set the ship speed in the conditions of the
selected ship loading option for the following main engine operating modes
(from the Pilot Card):
On Full Ahead;
On Half Ahead;
On Slow Ahead;
On Dead Slow Ahead.

MFD Configuration
– In the Stopping\acceleration (sec) group, set the ship acceleration (stopping)

time in the conditions of the selected loading option for the following modes
(from Pilot Card):
STOP to FULL AHEAD – from 0 (“Stop” engine operating mode)
to the maximum speed (“Full Ahead” main engine operating mode);
FULL AHEAD to FULL ASTERN – maximum speed (“Full Ahead” main
engine operating mode) to 0 (“Full Astern” main engine operating mode);
FULL AHEAD to STOP – maximum speed (“Full Ahead” main engine
operating mode) to 0 (“Stop” main engine operating mode).
– In the Turn parameters (0-360) group, set the ship turning circle parameters
in the conditions of the selected loading option for the “Full Ahead” main
engine operating mode:
End Speed (rudder 15) – steady turn speed at 15º rudder angle;
End Speed (rudder 35) – steady turn speed at 35º rudder angle;
Turn Radius (rudder 15) – turn radius at 15º rudder angle;
Turn Radius (rudder 35) – turn radius at 35º rudder angle.
13. Switch to “Tracks” page:
– In the Track of own ship group, set the time interval for recording the following
data (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, General and Own Ship Track sections):
Primary Position & General Nav. Data – for own ship position and its motion
parameters (HDG/STW/COG/SOG): 2 or 10 sec (by default, 2 sec).
Note: If DIS is used, in the Track of Own Ship group from the Primary Position &
General Nav.Data, Route Monitoring Data and Track of Targets drop-down lists, the
“2” value must be selected (see above item 3).
Secondary Position – for own ship secondary position: 2 or 10 sec (by
default, 10 sec);
Route Monitoring Data – for the monitored route name, monitored WPT,
XTD, WPT selection mode: 2 or 10 or 20 sec (by default, 2 sec);
Depth – for depth from echosounder: 2 or 10 or 20 sec (by default, 10
sec);
Wind – for wind: 2, 10, 20, 30, or 60 sec (by default, 60 sec);
Temperature – for temperature: 2, 20, 30, or 60 sec (by default, 60 sec).

MFD Configuration
– In the Tracks of Targets group, set the time interval (2, 10, 20, or 60 sec)
for recording the targets’ information (identifiers, coordinates and motion
parameters) (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, General and Target Data
sections);
– In the Miscellaneous settings group, set the remaining free space on the disk
which actuates an appropriate warning when achieved
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 4, Main Alerts Generation Principles section,
paragraph Hardware Alerts).
Use the Track storage period box to specify the number of days (from 30 to 365)
during which the tracks will be stored (upon the expiry of this period all
the tracks will be deleted);
– In the Detailed Track group, use the Storage period box to specify the number of
days (from 5 to 15) during which the own ship detailed track will be recorded
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, Own Ship Track section, paragraph Display of
the Own Ship Track in the ECDIS Task);
Note: On the DIS workstation detailed track will not be recorded.

– In the Radar Overlay group, set the radar picture recording parameters
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 6, section Radar Overlay):
Recording enabled – to turn on (by checking the checkbox) the radar
picture recording function;
Interval – to set the recording interval (1–60 seconds);
Storage period – to specify the number of days (from 1 to 10) during which
the radar overlay will be recorded.
– If the Far Sounder is available, in the Far Sounder group, check the Recording
enabled checkbox, set the recording interval and specify the number of days
(from 1 to 10) during which the Far Sounder track will be recorded.
14. Switch to the “NMEA Custom” page. For setting up of the reception of
customised NMEA-like sentences for the CONNING task, see Annex A,
Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section.
15. Switch to the “WAGO” page. For setting up the reception of analog and discrete
parameters for the CONNING task via the WAGO modules, see Annex A,
Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules section.

MFD Configuration
16. Switch to “NavTex” page:
– Configuration of NAVTEX receiver connection to the MFD ports is performed

on the “Sensors” page of the “Sensors” panel (see above). This page is
available if only NMEA NAVTEX receiver (no ASCII) connected, otherwise
the page will be blank;
– In the Device polling timeout field, enter the time interval (from 5 to 60 min)
which the NAVTEX Messages database will be updated at
DESCRIPTION, Chapter 7, NAVTEX Messages section);
– By default, RMC sentence available for transmitting to the external devices
will be transmitted by the MFD. Uncheck the checkbox to disable the
sentence transmitting to the external devices from MFD;
– Select the required precision (a number of decimals after the comma) in the
Precision column;
the Check Sum checkbox in the Append To All field;
Note: Where messages are required to be transmitted to the NAVTEX receiver,
use the NMEAOUT (see item 7).

MFD Configuration
17. Switch to “Language” page and select a suitable language:
18. Switch to “Predictor” page:
– Check the Enable Adaptive predictor checkbox if you intend to use the adaptive
predictor (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS document, Chapter 1, section Precision Instruments,
paragraph Using the Predictor);
– In the Adaptive predictor settings group, from the Rudder data source drop-down
list select the parameter containing the rudder angle data. Parameter
extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and “WAGO” pages (see
Annex A);

MFD Configuration
– From the RPM data source drop-down list select the parameter containing
the RPM data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and
“WAGO” pages. (see Annex A);
– In the Engine related settings group, in RPM, Power and Speed input boxes set
the respective values for the following main engine operating modes
(from the Pilot Card):
Slow Ahead;
Full Ahead.
– In the Engine related settings group, use the Displacement and Ship’s draft input
boxes to set the respective values.
19. Switch to “Advanced predictor” page:

MFD Configuration
– From Ship model drop-down list, select the necessary ship model:
– In the Propeller and rudder data sources group, from the Propeller/Impeller RPM
drop-down list select the parameter containing the propeller RPM data.
Parameter extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and “WAGO”
pages (see Annex A). Perform this procedure for all the propellers (propellers
are specified from the portside to the starboard):
– From the Propeller pitch/Reversing jet deflector drop-down list, select the parameter
containing the propeller pitch data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the
“NMEA Custom” and “WAGO” pages (see Annex A). Perform this procedure
for all the propellers (propellers are specified from the portside to the starboard);
– From the Rudder/steering bucket angle drop-down list, select the parameter
containing the rudder angle data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the
“NMEA Custom” and “WAGO” pages (see Annex A). Perform this procedure
for all the rudders (rudders are specified from the portside to the starboard);
In the Thruster data sources group, from the Tunnel thruster power drop-down list
select the parameter containing the thruster power data. Parameter extraction
rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and “WAGO” pages (see Annex A).
Perform this procedure for all the thrusters (thrusters are specified
from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft):
– From the Tunnel thruster pitch drop-down list, select the parameter containing
the thruster pitch data. Parameter extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom”
and “WAGO” pages (see Annex A). Perform this procedure for all the thrusters
(thrusters are specified from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft);
– From the Tunnel thruster force and pitch combined drop-down list, select the
parameter containing the combined thruster power and pitch data. Parameter
extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and “WAGO” pages
(see Annex A). Perform this procedure for all the thrusters
(thrusters are specified from the portside/forward to the starboard/aft);
– In the Interceptor position data sources group, from the Portside and Starboard
drop-down lists select the parameters containing the Interseptor position data
sources. Parameters extraction rules are set on the “NMEA Custom” and
“WAGO” pages (see Annex A);

MFD Configuration
– In the Wind gust filter input field, specify if the wind effect is taken onto account
(100% – wind is not taken into account, 0% – wind is fully taken into account);
– If necessary, check the Enable log files writing checkbox.
20. To configure the Wave system on the pages “MODBUS” and “Wave”, see
document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE
PART II, Chapter 2, section Wave System Setup.
21. To configure the Monitoring and Advisor option on the page “Fuel model”, see
document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE
PART II, Chapter 2, section Monitoring and Advisor Setup.
22. Switch to “Transas Gateway” page (if it is available):
Make the following settings for each station in the network:
– Check the Gateway Enabled checkbox;

– In the Gateway IP address input box, enter IP address 10.x.x.100 which you
have received from production (see above Chapter 1, section Transas
Gateway Installation, paragraphs Pre-Requirements and Workstation
Settings);
– In the field “User name”, type user name which you have received from
production;
– In the field “Password”, type password which you have received from
production (see above Chapter 1, section Transas Gateway Installation,
paragraphs Pre-Requirements and Network Setup);

MFD Configuration
23. Switch to “P450” page.
Press “Generate SFIs” button;
The page will display SFI (Source Function Identification) for applications
INS, NS, NR and TCS installed on the workstations in the network.
In the TCS SFI input box, it is possible to enter SFI, it is possible to enter SFI,
which shuld be the same for all workstations of the Bridge.
– Switch to “Route transfer” tab:
– Check the Enabled checkbox to send and to receive information on a

monitored route and alternate routes with other navigation equipment
(for example, backup ECDIS, planning workstation, radar, etc) according with
IEC 61162-450;

MFD Configuration
– From the Binary address/port drop-down list, select the multicast address of the
sender (default 239.192.0.25 port 60025) to transfer the route as a block data
(“binary image”) in RTZ format (Route Plan Exchange format). A receiver
shall per default receive on the same multicast address or as configured at
installation (see document IEC 61174 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD,
Annex S);
– From the NMEA address/port drop-down list, select the address (default
239.192.0.1 port 60001) to notify a device about a route transmission and to
report the status of a received route transmission by means of RRT
sentences (see Chapter 4, section Format of Data Exchange Used in
Accordance with IEC61162-1 Standard, paragraph Format of Input
Data, item RRT – Report Route Transfer);
– From the Network interface drop-down list, select the workstation’s IP address
from which it is necessary to transfer route to other navigation equipment.
24. Switch to “VDR” tab:
– In the VDR SFI input box, enter the VDR Function ID (see documentation on
the VDR device);
– In the Subnet IP drop-down list, select the workstation network interface.
Make the following settings for each station in the network from which data
should be received in the VDR:
– In the Source ID column, from the drop-down list select the workstation main
task:
None – Data output is off;
ECDIS.1 – ECDIS Master (ECDIS.2 – ECDIS.N: ECDIS stations with
respective priorities);
XBand.1 (and XBand.2, if available only X-band radars on board) – Radar
Master X-band (XBand.3 – XBand.N: X-band radar stations with respective
priorities);
SBand.1 – Radar Master S-band (SBand.2 – SBand.N: S-band radar
stations with respective priorities);

MFD Configuration
Conning.1 – Conning station (Conning.1 – Conning.N: Workstations with the

Conning application);
Combined.1 – It is not used at present;
Other.1 – Other station (e.g., stations with the AMS application);
Note: Sending of data to the VDR is required to be set for all the ECDIS stations
on the bridge.
– The VDR Address/port column: Broadcast address for operation according to
the full protocol (sending of screenshots). The setting is made where it is
necessary to set the network specific configuration, should be coordinated
with the VDR setting;
– The Sync time, sec column: second of the data transmission slot beginning for
the station in question within the 15-second interval. It is advisable to leave
the following default values:
ECDIS.1 – 2 sec;
ECDIS.2 – 8 sec;
XBand.1 – 5 sec.
For SBand.1, the synchronization time should be changed from the default
value 10 to 12 sec.
SBand.1 – 12 sec.
The rest of the stations should as much a possible uniformly fill the other
slots.
25. Switch to “Alerts Settings” page:
– Depending on the installed applications, select the appropriate list of alerts in

the Alerts list (see the table of alerts list presented in document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,
Annex D):

MFD Configuration
– If necessary, in the Backup Officer column, check the alert checkbox; if no

acknowledgement is received within a certain time interval, the “Backup
navigator” alert should be triggered off;
– In the the Backup Officer timeout, sec. column, set a necessary time interval in
seconds (by default 30 sec.);
Note: The “Backup navigator” alert is set by default only for the mandatory Track
Control alarms which are listed in the table presented below in section
Alerts Handling and Recommended TCS Settings.
26. Switch to “Far Sounder” page (if it is available):
– Enter IP address of the Far Sounder data server (for information, see the
manufacturer documentation for FarSounder-500);
– The Far Sounder ports leave without changes;
– Press “Apply” and “OK” buttons.

MFD Configuration
Workstation Settings
Press Workstation button. The drop-down Workstation list specifies the name
of the workstation which settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
1. Open “Sound” page to set the WS sound parameters:
– In Sound group, select the device for the reproduction of acoustic alarms:
PC Speaker – via the speaker built in PC;
Sound Card – via the sound card and external speakers;
Alarm Sound checkbox must be check on.
– In Additional sound devices group, select the additional device for the
reproduction of acoustic alarms:
ES Keyboard – via the speaker built in ES keyboard;
LCD Display – via the speaker built in LCD Display.
Note: With the use of a WS without keyboard for the reproduction of acoustic
alarms, the built-in monitor speaker is used. To this end, the monitor should
be connected to the MFD as a sensor. The LCD_DISPLAY connection to
the MFD ports is configured on the “Sensors” page of the “Sensors” panel.

MFD Configuration
2. Switch to “Display” page:
– In the Monitor Type field, press the Start detection button and wait until the
monitor type will be detected (the LCD_DISPLAY sensor connection to the
MFD ports must be configured properly on the page “Sensors” of the
“Sensors” panel);
– If the monitor with the function of display type detection and auto-calibration is
connected to Transas computer equipped with the appropriate video card
(RS6 with GeForce 9600M GT or RS6B, RS7 and TPC24 with Intel ® HD
Graphics), then the following window will appear:
– In case of any different PC type (i.e. the graphics card) or RS6 with Intel
945GME on motherboard is used, the next window appears:

MFD Configuration
Note: Transas cannot guarantee the accuracy of colour reproduction, if the PC

different from the mentioned above is used.
Note: The monitor detection procedure must be performed at the workstation
which is physically connected to this monitor. Auto-detection of display type
for remote stations is impossible (see picture below).
– For the monitor with the function of display type detection only (auto-
calibration is not supported), after pressing the Start detection button, the
following window appears:
– In this case, it is necessary to choose display type manually. Press “Specify

Model” button;
– Select display type from the Specify Model drop-down list. By default, the list
Specify Model consists only of the same size models as the detected one:

MFD Configuration
– For the monitor without function of display type detection, it is necessary to

specify the monitor model manually. In this case, after pressing the Start
detection button, the following window will appear:
– Press “OK” button. In the open window, select LCD in the Monitor Type field:
– In the Select Monitor field, choose the monitor size from the Size Filter drop-
down list:
– From the filtered Model drop-down list, select the appropriate monitor model
and press “OK” button:
– To add a new monitor manually in the Model list, press the Add new model
button of the “Display” page.

MFD Configuration
– In the open window, select the display type (by default, LCD) and press “OK”
button:
If LCD type is chosen, the following window appears:
If CRT type is selected, the window looks as follows:
In the Model input box, enter the monitor model;

In the Settings file input box, specify the path to the configuration file;
In the Colors file for each palette field, specify the path to the colour
calibration files for Day, Dusk and Night palettes respectively;
Press “OK” button. The new monitor will be available in the Model list;
Select this for all WS in the network where same monitor type is used.
– In the Monitor Size input window of the “Display” page, enter the display
diagonal size in mm;
– For monitors with auto detection function, check the appeared
DVI connection checkbox, if RS6 computer is connected to display via DVI port:
– In the Portrait mode group settings, set the necessary orientation of the display;
– In case of Non-SOLAS Workboat radars installation with 15” and 17” displays
(with resolutions 1024x768 and 1280x1024), to set special square PPI layout
for normal radar operation, check the Use simplified layout checkbox in the Quad
Radar Layout field (see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
RADAR USER MANUAL, Chapter 1, section Radar User Interface
Structure);

MFD Configuration
– For SOLAS radars with 26” and 27” monitors (with resolutions 1920x1080 and
1920x1200), the Quad Radar Layout field will look as shown on the picture
below. To set square PPI layout, check the Use widescreen layout checkbox
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). RADAR USER MANUAL,
Chapter 1, section Radar User Interface Structure):
– For the monitor with the touch screen function, check the checkbox Touch
screen support and make the appropriate settings:
Enable Hand cursor – to turn on/off the Hand cursor for scaling and moving
charts (only for Windows 7);
Enable Move cursor– to turn on/off the Move cursor;
Enable on-screen numpad – to turn on/off the screen numeric keypad for
input fields;
Ignore active cursor click – to turn on/off the touch screen function for
active cursors exept the acquisition marker (for displays with a bad touch
screen processing);
Correct active cursor activation – for the correct operation of the WP Editor
cursor on the virtual machine;
Chart area scroll zone input box – area on the edges of the screen, in which
the active cursor scrolls chart (from 0 to 50 %).
Note: It is necessary to install a suitable driver for the monitor with the touch
screen function.
3. Switch to “Keyboard” page:
– Check Virtual keyboard enabled checkbox for use the virtual keyboard.

MFD Configuration
4. Switch to “Collections” page.
– If necessary to backup routes and maps, specify the folder in the Collection for
mapped folder path input window (C:\TransasMappedFolders, by default);
– Check the checkboxes in the Collection for mapping group for:
Route – storing routes collection;
Addinfo – storing maps collection.
Note: In this case the specified folder will be created automatically.
5. Switch to “Additional settings” page:
– Check the Use video acceleration for ICE charts checkbox if the Ice, Geotiff,
JPEG2000 raster satellite charts are to be installed;

MFD Configuration
ATTENTION!
DO NOT install ICE charts on TPC24 computer!
– To disable reset counter function on workstation( with BAM/BNWAS Viewer

application) located outside the navigation bridge, check the checkbox Disable
Reset BNWAS counter;
– In the Overlay settings group, Simplified overlay or SOLAS-compliant setting is
selected automatically during MFD software installation depending on type of
the computer;
Note: If Navi-Radar 4000 application will be used, SOLAS-compliant overlay should
be set for RS6B computer. It is necessary also to change video RAM Total
Gfx Mem from 256 MB to 512 MB in BIOS when using D3D rendering. 512
MB should be set only on Radar computer (Radar application running).
These changes are not recommended for ECDIS computer, because it
reduce total amount of available memory.
– Check the Enable Yacht Viewer integration to use this option for operation in a
network on the iPad;
– Check the Stern conning workstation checkbox on the aft bridge WS.
In this case the heading value will always be with the 180 degree
correction. The counting of the speed will be in the reverse
direction;
– If necessary, use the Application auto-activation group to set up the activation of
application in the absence of the user activity:
From the Application drop-down list, select the application which will be
activated in absence of the user activity during the set timeout:
Use the Timeout input box to set the interval between the latest operator
action and automatic activation of the selected application.

MFD Configuration
6. Switch to “Integrator” page:
– In the Integrator background group, select the necessary product for setting
the appropriate background for the Transas Integrator;
– In the Navi-Conning version group, select the installed Navi-Conning version.
7. Switch to “External buttons” page.
The external buttons connected to workstations via RS6B (WAGO) dry contacts
allow switching of the keyboard and trackball between workstations in the
network using the “Synergy” utility. This utility must be installed and configured
at these stations as described in document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II, CHAPTER 2, section
Configuration of Synergy Utility.

MFD Configuration
– In the Station activation contacts field in the Station column, select the
workstation which the external button will be connected to;
– In the Type column, select the sets of contacts which the external button will
be connected to. If you intend to use RS6 I/O discrete ports, the RS6 I/O ports
checkbox on the “Sensors” page of the “INS” panel must be checked (see
above paragraph Sensors Settings, item 5);
– In the Contact In column, specify the input contact intended for receiving
external button ON signal;
– In the Normal state column, select the state of the contact:
N/O (normal open), or N/C (normal closed);
8. Switch to “Voice Records” page (only for NS4100 software):
– In the Number of records input box, set the number of voice messages to be
recorded;
– In the Maximum record length input box, set the maximum length of the
recorded voice messages (see document NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS
(V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section Voice Records).

MFD Configuration
Radar Settings
Press Radar button. The Workstation drop-down list specifies the name
of the Workstation which settings will be made for.
ATTENTION!
1. Open “General” page:
If Radar adjustments were done earlier, the “General” page looks as follows:

MFD Configuration
– Leave Simplified Radar processing checkbox blank (it is used only for installation
ECDIS standalone);
– The Interswitch button is pressed by default for the control of the RIB6/RIB6B
with the MFD (it is strictly recommended that it should remain in the depressed
state).
2. Switch to “Radar settings” page:
– For the workstation with the radar slave status, select “Radar Slave” from the
Radar mode drop-down list;
– To disable “Take over control” function, check the checkbox Monitoring mode.
Disable function “Take Over Control”. If this setting is enabled, the radar at this
station can not become the radar master for any scanner on the navigation
bridge both automatically and on the command from the GUI.
This setting is local for selected workstation (see document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). RADAR USER MANUAL,
CHAPTER 2, section Transfer of Scanner Control Rights).
– If the checkbox Monitoring mode. Disable function “Take Over Control” is checked
the Enable additional VTS-target symbols checkbox appears. If it is necessary to
display additional VTS symbols for ARPA target on the radar screen, check
this checkbox. The option is available only for radar with slave status;

MFD Configuration
3. If the scanner is connected to the workstation directly via network,

select “Radar External 1” from the Radar mode drop-down list:
4. For Transas Network scanner adjustment, perform the following actions:
– In the window Scanner type, select the “Transas scanner” from drop-down list;
– In the Antenna settings group, set the following:
In the Scanner model window, from the drop-down list, select model of the
scanner;
In the Antenna height window, set antenna installation height above the
waterline;
For Radome 2/4 kW scanners, in the Rotation speed window, choose the
rotation speed of the antenna (standard or high speed).

MFD Configuration
– In the Scanner connection settings field, in the Network window, select the
network connected to the scanner;
5. If the scanner is connected to the workstation via RIB6/RIB6B, select

“Radar External 1” from the Radar mode drop-down list and make the settings
described below:
There may be two configurations in setting up the radar operation:

– The scanner is connected to the WS. The signals (video, trigger, heading
marker and bearing marker) is supplied via RIB6/RIB6B, scanner control is
provided by RIB6/RIB6B’s COM port;
– Connected to the WS is an external radar which only supplies the signals
(video, trigger, heading marker and bearing marker) via RIB6/RIB6B;
If the scanner is connected to the WS via RIB6/RIB6B:
– In the Radar mode ,select “Radar External”;
– Select the scanner connected to the WS in the window Scanner type;
– Select “RIB6” in the window Connection;
– If scanner control is provided by RIB6/RIB6B’s COM port, the checkbox Master
mode must be checked;
– Set the following antenna parameters in the Antenna settings group:
In the box Band, select the range of scanner connected to the WS;
Check the HSC mode checkbox if the High Speed Craft mode is used (for
the Consilium SRT scanner only);
If the scanner in use has a Performance Monitor, check PM enable
checkbox;
Antenna rotation speed – rate of revolutions (rpm);
Bearing number per rev. – number of bearing sensor pulses per one
revolution;
Antenna beam width – beam width;
Antenna height – antenna installation height above the waterline.

MFD Configuration
– Specify IP addresses:
In the IP Primary input box, enter 10.8.1.209;
In the IP Secondary input box, enter 10.8.2.209.
WARNING!
Up to four scanners can be connected to the system simultaneously. Not more than
two scanners are connected to one WS (see also Chapter 1, section Workstation
Installation, paragraph Radar Integrator Board RIB6/RIB6B and “Connection
Four Scanners to MFD System. Block Diagram” presented in Annex J).
If two RIB6/RIB6B are connected to a single WS, when the RIB6/RIB6B is

selected from the Connection drop-down list, an additional tab appears where
you can select the second radar:
– Make settings in much the same way as for the previous radar,
for the IP addresses specify the following values:
In the IP Primary input box, enter 10.8.1.210;
In the IP Secondary input box, enter 10.8.2.210.

MFD Configuration
Security Settings for MFD

Press Security button.
– In the User column, enter the name of the user permitted to change NS
settings (alarm settings and etc), and press <Enter>.
– Enter the password and the password confirmation and press the “OK”
button;
– Set all the users whom access is granted to.

MFD Configuration
ATTENTION!
After completion of settings of all the Workstations, press the “Apply” button to save
all changes done without exiting the System Configuration utility; or press the “OK”
button to save all settings and exit the System Configuration utility.
After restart PC, run ECDIS and RADAR tasks on all the WS’s and check performed
settings.
Security Settings for NS 4100

Press Security button.
Switch to “Permissions” page:
The “Permissions” page is intended for setting the protection of access to

the NS 4100 functionality. The page contains the following items:
• The Table which contains rows with NS4100 functions and columns levels of
access to this functionality.
A checked checkbox in the intersection of a row and a column means that the
functionality is permitted for the level in question and higher levels.
To disable password protection and make functionality available to all the users,
check the function’s checkbox in the User column. When any functionality is thus
assigned, no user/password will be requested and such function will be
executed instantly. However, some functions cannot be made available to all
access levels. In this case, the checkbox in the User column is greyed. These
are the following functions:
– Sys. Config: Run;
– Security: Config;
– Security: Passwords;
– Restore: Run.

MFD Configuration
• Custom – to set a user configuration whereby the functionality for each access
level is assigned by the user (if the user selects the “High” or “Low” configuration
and presses “Apply” and “OK”, these settings will also be applied to the
“Custom” level);
• Low – to set a standard configuration for the lowermost access level (means all
functions will be available except those listed above which should be at the
“Admin” level);
• High – to set a standard configuration for the topmost access level (means all
functions will be assigned to the “Admin” level);
• Route Monitoring: Approved routes only – to set a capability to load approved routes
only in the monitoring mode.
The list of the NS 4100 functions available for protection is given in the document
NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section
NS 4100 Security Access System.
Switch to “Levels/Passwords” page:
This page is used for adding users, setting passwords and access levels. The page
contains the following items:
• Use – column for switching on/off the use of the relevant level in the NS 4100;
• Tag – the level tag:
– Admin – Administrator (Level 1);
– CO – Commanding Officer (Level 2);
– NO – Navigation Officer (Level 3);
– WO – Watch Officer (Level 4);
– User – any user, no logon required.
• Maximum logon attempts for all users before lockout – to specify the number of
possible incorrect password input attempts (“0” means the absence of this
restriction).

MFD Configuration
The NS 4100 system has the following five users and corresponding access levels:
User Access level Tag Password

Administrator 1 Admin admin
Commander 2 CO transasco
Navigator 3 NO transasno
Watch 4 WO transaswo
Unrestricted Access N/A User No password
When the System Configuration utility is run for the first time, the above passwords
are used for the four users.
To create a new user, in the Use column check the checkbox of the required level.
A password request window will automatically open up:
Use the Password and Verify password text boxes for entering a new password (empty
password is not accepted). Press “OK” button.
In the Tag input box, enter the user name (the name can include the following
characters only: “A”–“Z”, “a”–“z”, “0”–“9”, “.”, “_”). On the “Permissions” page,
a column with the same name will be added to the table.
To change a password, use the Change button in the Password column next to the
user whom the password should be changed for.
To remove the user, uncheck the appropriate checkbox in the Use column.
For a more detailed description of the NS4100 access protection system configuring,
see NAVI-SAILOR 4100 ECDIS (V.2.00.348). SPECIAL FUNCTIONS, section
NS 4100 Security Access System.
ATTENTION!
After completion of settings of all the Workstations, press the “Apply” button to save
all changes done without exiting the System Configuration utility; or press the “OK”
button to save all settings and exit the System Configuration utility.
After restart PC, run ECDIS on all WS and check performed settings.

Navi-Conning 4000 Adjustment
NAVI-CONNING 4000 ADJUSTMENT
ATTENTION!
The Navi-Conning 4000 program setup is made separately for each WS, which it is
installed in. For the correct setup it is necessary that the ECDIS or RADAR tasks be
run on this WS. In the ECDIS task, create a route and load it for monitoring
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ECDIS USER MANUAL,
Chapter 4, Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode section).
General
The indicators contained in the CONNING Screen View windows are set up
automatically except for the following indicators:
• Weather window:
– Air temperature;
– Barometric Pressure;
– Humidity.
• Ship Contour window:
– Bow Thruster;
– Rudder;
– Lights.
• Engine window:
– Engine Telegraph;
– RPM.
These indicators are set up by the service engineer at the installation stage.
ATTENTION!
Parameters for the setup of these indicators will not be available in the program
database unless they were previously created in the System Configuration utility.
If the data is supplied via the WAGO interface, the parameter will have
the WAGO_ADC_parameter_name for a name (see Annex A, Adjustment of MFD
Operation with WAGO Modules section). If the data is supplied via the NMEA
Custom, the parameter will be named NMEA_CUSTOM_parameter_name (see
Annex A, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section). To avoid
the incorrect operation of the NC 4000 program, it is not advisable to connect to the
indicators parameters whose names are different from those listed above.
We will consider the indicator setup procedure using the Air Temperature as
an example.

Run the CONNING task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY/NAVI-CONNING):
After the program start, the NC 4000 Screen Views will be displayed.
Press Setup button.

In the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window, select the Screen Views
Configuration/Navigation SV/Weather Window/Temperature Window menu.
In the right-hand part of the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window,

select the Air temperature value line from the menu and press the button.

From the menu which will open up, select the DATA ACCESS/NMEA_CUSTOM_AIR_TEMPERATURE/
VALUE line.
The selected source for the parameter value will be displayed in the right-hand part
of the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window in the Air temperature value line.
In the right-hand part of the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window,

select the Air temperature value view data line and press the button.

From the menu which will open up, select the DATA ACCESS/NMEA_CUSTOM_AIR_TEMPERATURE/
VIEWDATA line.
If connected correctly, parameters will be shown dynamically on the relevant

indicators, there is not need to restart Navi-Conning 4000.
Press the Save button in the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window.
WARNING!
For each indicator both characteristics VALUE and VIEWDATA should be adjusted. For
each Screen View the indicator is set up individually. I.e., in the “Screen View
Configuration Utility” window, it is necessary to repeat the setup procedure for the
“NavData” Screen View (Screen Views Configuration/NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window).
Indicator Setup Table

Set up the indicators in accordance with the above procedure by using the following table:
Indicator Window Screen Path
Views
Air Temperature Weather/Temperature Navigation Screen Views Configuration/
Tab Navigation SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
NavData Screen Views Configuration/
NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
Barometric Pressure Weather/Temperature Navigation Screen Views Configuration/

Temperature Window
NavData SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window


Views
Humidity Weather/Temperature Navigation Screen Views Configuration/
Temperature Window
Navigation SV/Weather Window/
Temperature Window
Bow Thruster Ship Contour Docking Screen Views Configuration/
Docking SV/Ship Window
Navigation Screen Views Configuration/
Navigation SV/Ship Window
Rudder Digital Ship Contour Docking Screen Views Configuration/

Docking SV/Ship Window
Rudder Graphic Ship Contour Docking Screen Views Configuration/

Docking SV /Ship Window
Lights Ship Contour Navigation

1 – Top Light, Front Screen Views Configuration/
2 – Anchor Light, Front Screen Views Configuration/
3 – Top Light, Rear Screen Views Configuration/
4 – Port Side Light Screen Views Configuration/
5 – Stb Side Light Screen Views Configuration/
Navigation SV/Ship Window/
6 – Anchor Light, Rear Screen Views Configuration/
7 – Stern Light Screen Views Configuration/
Navigation SV/Ship Window/
Engine Telegraph Engine Docking Screen Views Configuration/
Docking SV/
Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation SV/
Chart Screen Views Configuration/
Chart SV/Engine Telegraph Window
PORT RPM Engine Docking Screen Views Configuration/

(see the next Item) Docking SV/Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation SV/


Views
STBD RPM Engine Docking Screen Views Configuration/
(see the next Item) Docking SV/Engine Telegraph Window
Navigation SV/
Note: Do not forget to set up the same indicators individually for each Screen View
(see the Warning in the previous item).
If there is one engine on the ship, neither the parameter source nor the rules
of displaying the second engine telegraph handle are specified for the Engine
Telegraph indicator.
CCTV Setup
Press Setup button to enter Screen View Configuration utility. Enter the password.
Press Edit button.
Select the necessary Screen View (or any other place) where you would like to add
a window which will display data from the video camera.
Press Edit button.

Press the button in the left side of the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window.
From the menu which will open up, select the READY-TO-USE WINDOWS/MOXA VPORT WINDOWS/
VIDEO VPORT WINDOW line.
The “Video VPort Window” will be added to the selected Screen View.
Select the Video VPort Window menu.In the right-hand part of the “Screen View
Configuration Utility” window, double click on the Sensor ID line.
From the drop-down list select the necessary CCTV sensor (it should be set on the
“CCTV” page of the “Sensors” panel in the System Configuration utility, see section
MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensor Settings, item 9).

In the right-hand part of the “Screen View Configuration Utility” window, double click
on the Camera No line. From the drop-down list select the camera whose data will be
displayed in the “Video VPort” window.
Check the checkbox in Connected line.
Press Save button.

NAVI-CONNING 5000 ADJUSTMENT
General Description of Navi-Conning 5000

General
The NC5000 is the first product to have been made on the Uninav platform.
It was initially presented for commercial purposes last year within the T-Bridge
product for the Silver Wind mega yacht. This was a prototype whose setup was
performed manually by configuring xml files and writing scripts.
Starting with MNS34, the NC5000 will be used for commercial purposes as part of
the MFD product (ECDIS Premium). It will be possible to use both the NC4000 and
the NC5000 at the same time. As a standalone commercial product, the NC5000 will
have configuring tools and be integrated with the MFD.
What is the reason for having two conning programs (4000 and 5000) in the
MNS34? Since none of the service engineers now has experience of prompt
conning deployment and setup, and also considering that the layouts in the 4000’s
are incompatible with layouts of the 5000’s, we can work out the following
recommendation: any complexly modified conning should best be left on the 4000th
platform (there are many sophisticated projects).
In fact, whenever the conning layout is critical, it is now possible to keep the 4000th.
It is highly desirable that in the cases of failure to promptly set up the NC5000, data
from the layouts (conning.dat) should reach the developers to provide
a collection of layouts from the 4000’s to have something to analyze in order to
create an automatic converter from 4000 to 5000 series, and for us to know what
was easily done by using the 4000 facilities, and presents difficulties when
implemented by using facilities of the 5000.
The NC5000 is currently attaining the level of the NC4000, but it is reasonable to
expect that there may be things which we are used to doing easily, and which can
be done in the NC5000, with some difficulties however.
In the NC4000, bitmaps (raster) and “emf” (vector) were the main objects for the
information display. In the NC5000, we switched to more advanced and broadly
supported “swg” format. This was done because the NC5000 is based on the QT,
a new cross-platform technology (framework) for creating user interfaces.
This allowed us to abandon the self-written user items (indicators in the conning) in
favour of the already written and debugged items. The QT library supports the “swg”.
Layout Configuring. Conning Architecture

There are some differences in the editing procedure between the NC4000 and
NC5000 versions. In both applications, on the left there is a “tree” of items which we
can see on the screen. The difference consists in that in the NC4000 it is always
necessary to press on Edit button to modify or add items, and to press on the Back
button to return. Whereas in the NC5000, there is a pass-through tree,
and the editing buttons are always at the top (i.e., any item can be edited at any
time). For the understanding of which item is currently being handled, you can
enable the Show highlighter option: it highlights in green the boundary and internal
structure of the item you are editing.
In the NC5000, there is a fully operative Undo/Redo tool.
Since it is the end-to-end editing which is underway, there is the Locate object tool
which allows prompt identification of the item which is at the top.
If this tool is used for clicking the pod information indicator, in the “GUI Designer”,
we will see that the item at the top is the “SVGDrawer”.

Objects are arranged hierarchically. When the graphic interface tree is described,
the terms parent, child, sibling are used. In the case of the default screen view, the
“Ship”, “Messages” and “Config” screen views are siblings, i.e., objects on the same
nesting level. There is always one parent, and there may be thousands of the rest.
1. The base item is “Application”, the root of all the items.
2. It is followed by the only child item – “Simple Pager” which determines the set of
applications (“Conning Screen”, “Plotter Screen”). It permits switching among its
siblings but provides no graphic component. To switch applications, it is
necessary to find the “Simple Pager” in the special script buttons, and use it for
switching pages. In the case in question (NC5000), the “Simple Pager” item has
only one sibling: the “Conning Screen” which occupies the entire screen.
3. The “Tab Pager” item determines that all its siblings are arranged in the form of
tabs. This is done by analogy to what was in the NC4000. For the “Tab Pager”
siblings, the sequence is essential (z-order, i.e., the order of layers – what is on
top of what). E.g., in the case of the wind indicator, the picture is at the bottom,
the scale lying on top of it. The “Tab Pager” arranges tabs in the z-order. The
“Bring to Front”, “Bring Forward”, “Send Backward” and “Send to Back” buttons
are used for the control of the layers arrangement order.
4. The “Grid Layouter” forms space to be filled in with the required items.
Each object including the “Grid Layouter” has a set of properties. The list of
properties is determined by the QT technology, and we do not add anything.
This permits us to create interactive and complex layouts.
The title parameter from the “Grid Layouter” determines the tab name.
If the Show Objects by ID parameter is disabled, it is possible to understand what the
type of the selected object is. If the item is shown in italics, it means it is assigned
with an ID. The title is what is shown to the user. The ID is an internal attribute by
which the item is accessible from the scripts (there are rules that the ID is formed by
the Latin letters, that a digit cannot be placed at the beginning, etc.).
E.g., the “Wind Speed” is an ID because it is used for access from the scripts.
The most significant difference between the NC4000 and the NC5000 now is the
arrangement of items on the screen view. In the NC4000, the container items
(panels) were uniformly divided into nominal 100*100 (horizontally, vertically) zones.
With a change of the container item size, zones change proportionally.
Within the framework of a container item (panel), position and size were set for an
item. In the NC5000, the container items are represented by the layouters
(this is control that has no visual presentation but has dimensions and is capable of
organizing siblings within itself).
The Layouters can be of several types (it is necessary to read the QT technology
documentation):
1. “Tab Pager” is a layouter for the formation of tabs. The item placed in a pager
can occupy its entire internal space.
2. “List Pager” is a dropdown list.
3. “Stacker” stacks its siblings in turn one after another. An example can be
provided by the ECDIS side panel or the application switcher control.
4. “Grid Layouter” splits space into a grid and permits items to be arranged in
proportion to this grid. There is a difference from the NC4000: the grid and the
number of its divisions depend on the size of items in them. I.e., reduction of
size of some items results in the automatic growth of other items dimensions.
Which means, that in the real time mode various effects can be obtained, items
having actually no size. For them, there is a size obtained from the combined
operation of all the layouter from the top to the bottom.

All these things are calculated for a specific resolution, and each item acquires
its own size accordingly. Each item’s properties include the maximum and
minimum size parameters for an automatically formed item not to be too small or
too large. E.g., for buttons the minimum size now is 20 pixels.
Advantages of such approach are that a correctly written layout can sustain
stretching, scaling to suit various resolutions or aspects.
But from the experience of preparing screen views for the T-Bridge it is clear
that this is expensive and not really necessary for us, since we deal with the
monitor resolutions known in advance, etc.
5. Fixed “Grid Layouter” is a counterpart of the panel which was available in the
NC4000 for creating new customized screen views – this is the main way of
drawing and modifying Conning.
6. “Scroller” is a container item which permits accommodating in itself more objects

than its visual size (e.g., the “Config” panel in the default screen view).
To copy or move use the Copy\Paste tools for which the Undo\Redo is available.
It is impossible to select several items for moving/copying at a time.
Instead, you can copy the root item which will drag its siblings.
By default, the NC5000 provides an incorrect display of gradients in the 16 bit

palette. It is, therefore, advisable to use the 32 bit palette, or draw a “bitmap” and
insert it in the “swg” item, or discard the gradient.
Active Conning
The NC5000 to a greater extent than the NC4000, supports scripting. For scripts it
uses the all-inclusive java script interpreter, almost as powerful and complying with
the standards as that in browsers. The main advantage is that this is a full featured
programming language. In the NC4000, scripts could be used, too, but this was a
self-written language with a large number of limitations (i.e., as a rule, this was one
mathematical operation). Scripts in the NC5000 are integrated in the framework, and
this permits performing a large number of operations.
Scripting requires qualification and skills, but not as much as in the programming.
Where the tasks are simple (e.g., a value should be divided by 10), scripts will look
as simple as in the NC4000. If the 5000 default layout is studied, there will be many
examples of scripts (e.g., how to show a value in red if the data is invalid, how to
replace a value with asterisks if it is not supplied). If the default script is relied upon,
the task consists in the substitution of required parameters.
More complicated scripts permit, e.g., a press on the button connected to the WAGO
to switch pages in the Conning. The Virtual Keyboard functionality is based on this
principle. A scripted item has some advantages: it needs no programmer
involvement, it can be adapted in suit to suit the changing requirements.
Very complicated and feature-packed scripts may slow down the system
(e.g., serious animation or large real-time computation), since the script is compiled
and checked for errors on the run. But for the up-to-date computers the margin is
very large.
Various tasks should be accomplished by different people:
1. Simple things are done on the fixed “Grid Layouter” in much the same way as in
the NC4000. These scripts are single-string templates of mathematical
expressions. They are included in part in the default layout and are described in
the documentation (including the NC4000 among others).
2. Active Conning, a special GUI which we can make without programmers by

using the Nav. Sales Support resources.

3. Creating screen views for particular projects – experts should be involved.
4. Complex graphics, uncharacteristic behaviour, large computations –

programmers should be involved.
I.e., the NC5000 pushed away limit item 4, accordingly, the task accomplishment
may prove to be prompter and cheaper.
Examples of Active Conning: Virtual Keyboard, Pointing Device, T-Bridge

Wheelhouse Control, Automation.
Switching applications: a press on the button sends a command to the TeamItalia
PLC, it leafs through its pages and produces a new one. Fulfilment of a script can be
made dependent not only on the button stroke, but also on the change of data (e.g.,
on a timer). In the autopilot, when a button is pressed and held, the checkbox is
checked, when the button is released, the checkbox is unchecked. The script traces
the availability of a check and then automatically adds or subtracts a value.
Application switching buttons in the fast access panel also contain scripts with a
record of the script execute action and of the action it performs.
The Virtual Keyboard is fully compiled of the scripts and made without programmers.
For the automation we are able:
1. In the way of external inputs to communicate via the Modbus protocol. i.e., this
is output of values to the WAGO, to the Team Italia PLC, to the flow meters and
to any automatics supporting the Modbus.
2. To output NMEA sentences, arbitrarily formed it should be noted (i.e., with

the aid of a script any NMEA string can be compiled) to any of the channels.
And this is exactly how the remote control, control of the autopilot on
the T-Bridge works (a link to the simulator – the simulator is listening to the
NMEA commands).
3. The remote control is an MFD 4000 sensor (NMEA protocol), the Virtual Touch
Keyboard simply uses this remote control for the control. This allows doing
everything the ES6 keyboard does, but more flexibly (e.g., to select at once
exactly the thing you need rather than leaf through sequentially NUP, CUP and
HUP). E.g., it is possible to make a MOB button from the Master’s cabin (either
a hardware item, or with the aid of our Virtual Keyboard) whereby a NMEA
message is sent whenever the button is pressed. For the integrator companies
(e.g., Radio New Zealand DMP) that produce their own panels, this permits the
use of the ES6 to be omitted. From their work experience: an ES6 was taken, a
cover was removed and contacts were closed. Coming together with the remote
control sensor is a remote keyboard server which is part of the NC5000
installation.
If it is added to the startup menu of some station, it will be possible to press
buttons and move the mouse on this station controlling the MFD via the network.
I.e., this is an imitation of an ordinary keyboard which requires no PS\2 or USB
connection. Our Virtual Keyboard gets connected to this server and outputs key
stroke commands. This service is used for imitating button presses, and it is
possible to initiate hot keys among other things. E.g., it will be possible to imitate
pressing on several buttons by pushing one button (to enter the password by
pushing one button).
4. Touch panel is a virtual panel which, as you are passing a finger, is constantly
calling a script with the current finder coordinates.

Data Reception
Today, for all the sources including the NMEA custom, data can be set up in the
NC5000 with similar names.
To view the availability of parameters in the data access database you can use the
C:\Transas\IBS\win32\data access client.exe application.
The indicator can be selected by using the Locate object tool.

Let us consider STW as an example. This is a widget text. It can be used for both,
display of a static text, e.g., captions (the HDG test is entered in the text properties),
and the processing and output of received values (the input script property is used for
this purpose). E.g., available for a button is an input script which behaves as an item
with a change of the system internal parameters, and an output script which as an
item responds to the user actions.
An ordinary script for the parameter output consists of two parts:
widget.alarmed =
${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Stw.ViewData} > 0; – a widget has
an alarmed (True\False) property which changes colour when there is alarmed
indication. Red colour in this case, if ViewData is not zero. This can be read from the
first line.
if (${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Stw.ViewData} != 2) {
– if ViewData is not 2, which means that the data is available, we return a specially
formatted parameter value (including dimensions and units of measurement).
formatValue("speed.ship",${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Stw.
Stw}, true);
} else { – in all the other cases (if we have 2) asterisks are output:
"***.*";
By analogy with the NC4000, there is view data which is the parameter status and
value data which is the parameter value per se. 0-data normal, 1-data invalid,
2-no data\no input.
It is recommended that you should copy/paste this script replacing the parameter as
required.
The data access browser is used for this purpose. The nav_kernel\mfd data
access bridge is selected from it (the rest of the tree parts are used for the
standalone Uninav plotter, i.e., they are not suitable for Conning 5000 which is part
of the MFD). This tab contains all the data supplied by the MFD4000 to 5000.
All this data will be available if only NC5000 is installed, even without the ECDIS, but
not from the MNS34. STW.STW and STW.ViewData is then selected.
The parameter value is shown on the run in a window on the right.
Available in the script editing window are the undo\redo, copy\paste functions. For
testing there is a test button which displays the script operation result in a window.
A value is described in the ${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Stw.Stw}
format. Which means that in replacing the parameter it should all the selected.
When the items are copied, they are saved together with a script. If, however, an
item is added from a template, the input script should be added for it manually.
Functions are intended for the parameter formatting (course, speed, coordinates,
etc.).

(${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Stw.Stw}) .toFixed(2) permits

rounding off.
If, e.g., there is no need to show the alarmed status for the POD information\Power,
script lines for formatting are unnecessary, it is sufficient to specify the parameter
value. This indicator consists of two objects: a vertical scale (the display is formed
by the properties: graduation marks big - major tick counter) and a bar gauge. The
value can be varied from -180 to 180. The gradient for the infill is adjusted by
parameters from the base positive colour to positive colour. This permits work with
presentations without involving the swg drawer item.
Grid_row, grid_col – this is where the item starts from (i.e. these are the X, Y
coordinates).
Grid_rowspan, Grid_colspan – how many cells it occupies (these are the item
dimensions).
In the gridlayout the cell size is not fixed, it depends on the size of items it
accommodates.
In the swg drawer object, a swg picture can be selected with the aid of the “source”
property. To prepare pictures in the swg format it is possible to use the Inkscape
program. Bitmaps can be inserted inside the swg file. By using this indicator
properties, you can rotate the picture, shift it, change its size and aspect. Many
visual effects were based on these properties on the Silver Wind yacht.
To add a new panel, the tab pager should be selected, and the fixed grid layouter be
added to it.
The template accommodates large blocks of items. There are currently no scripts in
them. Adding is made from the template browser by using the “create item with
selected template” button. The scripts in the templates are currently not exactly
correct, they are from the standalone Uninav. This is why for the depth indicator the
${nav_kernel/PrimaryData/Depth} should be replaced with the Depth.Depth from the
data access. The safety contour should be replaced with the safety depth value. The
time span forms the display history. Depending on the depth supplied, the scale
numerical indication changes automatically within the history size range.
The nc5000.ini (next to the nc5000.exe) shows what is taken from where.
A modified layout can be saved to an individual folder by using the “save as…”
button. During the saving, a set of files is saved rather than a single nc5000.xml
file (although in fact this is one large file with references to other files).
The default configuration is saved by default to the
C:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg\uninav folder.
The plotter_gui.xml includes a description of the GUI designer, of the root item.
The Plotter_kernel.xml includes a description of available sensors. I.e., for the
configuration import\export it is necessary to save several files or to take the whole
ConningScreen item, copy it to any text editor and save as a txt file. Unlike the Data
tool, this method does not collect pictures which there are references to. If a backup
is required, the whole of the “active_cfg” folder can be taken.
The configuration saving support via the Data Tool utility will be provided in the
immediate future.

Configuration Replacement Example

Configuration for the “whc” and “remote_kbd” in the application (for the NC5000
within the MFD).
1. The “active_cfg” folder should be replaced for the required configuration.
2. For the “whc” configuration, “svg” folders should be placed in the C:/root.
3. For the “remote_kbd”, the “keyboard” and “Remote_Keyboard” folders should be

placed in the D:/disk root.
Properties
Properties are defined by the QT library. There is a set of properties common for all
the items, and there are individual properties for each item. For the detailed
description see the open access QT documentation.
Some essential properties:

1. Object name – ID. This name can be referred to from the scripts.
2. Horizontal / vertical policy -s used for flexible layouters (not for the fixed grid
layouter).
3. Min/max width/height - set the min/max absolute size limits for flexible layouters.
4. Frame - adds a border around items.
5. Stylesheet - permits flexible adjustment of the item outward appearance with the
aid of scripts. The behaviour is of cascade type. Which means that if the
stylesheet is specified for a parent, the same settings will be automatically
applied to the siblings.
6. Input script - is executed for the change of external parameters.

7. Output script – external action.
8. Disable script for hidden - permits the script not to be executed when an item is
not on the screen.
9. Margin, spacing – for item external design.
10. Text – default values setting field for the display in a text indicator. If there is a
script, this default value is redefined by the value received from the script.
11. A set of items for the text formatting.
12. Grid - is the item situation (numbering starts with zero).
13. Hidden – not to display an item.
14. SVG Drawer: source – path to the picture.
15. A set of items for the control of the swg picture within the indicator.
16. Colour mapping – to correct colour when palettes are switched.
The main visualization types can be taken from the default screen view:
1. From the nav. data (alarmed, starts, white).
2. From the azipod – how to turn.
3. Pod – how to arrange the scales, how to set the beginning/end.

4. Wind – an assembled item, how the items operate: substrate, scale with digits
and a wind point. The true\relative switch is made with the aid of a simple pager,
and these are in fact two layouts in the same place; as the true\relative button is
pressed, the script merely swaps indicators (primitive animation capabilities).
5. Depth – an assembled item.
Practice
1. Install conning 5000 and some components from the MFD;
2. Adjust some MFD sensors for virt ports;
3. Create a new page in the conning and put several indicators on it:
• copy from the existing pages;

• from the templates;
• create anew from scratch;
4. Adjust indicators for parameters from the data access database;
5. Create some new NMEA custom messages (in accordance with the comtrace)
and adjust indicators for such parameters.

Additional Options Activation
By means of Notepad, open the nc5000.ini file located in the following folder:
<System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\bin.
Enter the appropriate strings to enable the necessary options and save your
changes in the file:

Startup
ATTENTION!
Parameters for the setup of these indicators will not be available in the program
database unless they were previously created in the System Configuration utility.
If the data is supplied via the WAGO interface, the parameter will have
the WAGO_ADC_parameter_name for a name (see Annex A, Adjustment of MFD
Operation with WAGO Modules section). If the data is supplied via the NMEA
Custom, the parameter will be named NMEA_CUSTOM_parameter_name
(see Annex A, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section).
To avoid the incorrect operation of the NC5000 program, it is not advisable to
connect to the indicators parameters whose names are different from those listed
above.
ATTENTION!
The Navi-Conning 5000 program setup is made separately for each WS, which it is
installed in. For the correct setup it is necessary that the ECDIS or RADAR tasks be
run on this WS. In the ECDIS task, create a route and load it for monitoring
(see MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ECDIS USER MANUAL,
Chapter 4, Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode section).
Run the Navi-Conning 5000 task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\NAVI-CONNING 5000):

After the program start, the NC 5000 Screen Views will be displayed.
Adjustment for Cobham Equipment

Press Ctrl+Alt+D keys simultaneously.
In the open “GUI Designer” window, select the APPLICATION/CNSGSIMPLEPAGER/CONNING

SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER menu item in the left part of the screen:
Press the “Add new widget” button located on the buttons panel in the top
part of the screen:

Select the CONTAINERS/STACKER menu item:
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” window, specify the name of the object
in the objectName line.
In the title line, specify the name of the page by clicking on the line in the Value
column (“Cobham”, for example):
To create the “Grid Layouter”, press the “Add new widget” button:

From the drop-down CONTAINERS menu, select the GRID LAYOUTER or FIXED_GRID_LAYOUTER
item:
To create the Cobham RS6222 VHF radiostation control panel, press the
“Add new widget” button:
Select the CONTROLS/COBHAM RS6222 menu item:

In the host line, specify IP address of the device (see documentation on this device):
To create the Cobham SAILOR 6103 alarm control panel, in the left-hand part of the
“GUI Designer” window, select the APPLICATION/CNSGSSIMPLEPAGER/CONNING
SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER/COBHAM/CNSGGRIDLAYOUTER menu item.
Press the “Add new widget” button:
Select the CONTROLS/COBHAM SAILOR 6103 menu item:

In the peer line, specify IP address of the device (see documentation on the device):
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” window, use the max_width and
max_height lines to adjust sizes of the Cobham devices control panels.
Place the Cobham devices control panels in the desired position on the “Cobham”
page by changing the default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col
and grid_row for every control panel:
To delete the objects, use the “Delete” button:
To move the created controls objects, use the “Cut” and “Paste” buttons:
To save the created configuration, press the “Save” button:

In the open window “Warning”, click on “Yes” button:
The picture below shows the example of the configured Cobham RS6222 VHF radio
station control panel and SAILOR 6103 alarm control panel:
Video Image Adjustment

Run the Conning application.

SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER menu:

In the title line, specify the name of the page by clicking on the line
in the Value column (“Video”, for example):

Select the CONTROLS/GLVIDEOWIDGET menu:
In the url line, specify IP address of the MOXA VPort device by clicking on the line in
the Value column (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II, Chapter 3, section Video Splitters and Servers,
paragraphs MOXA 351 Video Server (VPORT351), MOXA 354 Video Server
(VPORT354) and MOXA VPort 364A Video Server):

It is also possible to create the video widget by selecting the DIRECT CREATE… menu:
In the open window, press the button:
Find and choose the nav_widgets.dll file and press “Open” button:
From the drop-down list “Object type”, select NAVVIDEOGLWIDGET item:

In the url line, specify IP address of the MOXA VPort device:
To delete the object, use the “Delete” button:
In the open window “Warning”, click on “Yes” button:
If the all devices are connected to the system correctly, the image from the camera
will be displayed on the screen:

MFD SCOM Monitors Remote Control Adjustment

Plotter_kernel.xml File Editing
Before configuring SCOM monitors remote control, it is necessary to adjust the
Plotter_kernel.xml file.
By means of Notepad, open the Plotter_kernel.xml file located in the following

folder <System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg\uninav.
Under line <object module="monitor_control" name="MonitorManager"
/>, create the necessary quantity of strings:
<host address="10.8.1.101" port="9090" />

Where:
• host address="10.8.1.101" – IP address of the WS which the managed
monitor is connected to;
• port="9090" – the port number.
Save your changes in the file.

Adjustment for SCOM Monitors Remote Control
In the open “GUI Designer” window, select the APPLICATION/CNSGSIMPLEPAGER/ CONNING

SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER menu item:

In the title line, specify the name of the page by clicking on the line
in the Value column (SCOM, for example):

From the CONTAINERS menu, select the GRID LAYOUTER or FIXED_GRID_LAYOUTER item:
To create the control button, press the “Add new widget” button:
Select the CONTROLS/BUTTON menu item:
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” window, specify the name of the control
button for remote workstation’s W01 monitor in the objectName line.

In the text line, enter the title of the button:
In the same way, create and configure the other controls button for all remote control
workstation’s displays (W02, W03 and etc.).
Create the button of decreasing brightness (“Dimming – “) as described above.
In the text line, enter the title of the button (DIM - , for example):

Select output_script line, double click in the Value column and for the created
button “DIM - “, press the button:
In the open window, enter the appropriate script according with the table presented
below in item SCOM Monitors Remote Control Scripts and press “OK” button:
In the same way, create and configure the rest controls buttons: the button of
increasing brightness (“Dimming + “), the button of switching monitors power on/off
(ON/OFF, for example).as described above.

In the same way, configure the brightness slider by selecting this item from the list of
controls:
Place the all controls in the desired position on the “SCOM” page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row for every
button and slider:
max_height lines to adjust sizes of the created controls.
To delete objects, press the “Delete” button:
In the open “Warning” window, click on “Yes” button to save configuration:

The picture below shows the example of the configured the MFD SCOM monitors
remote control panel for three workstations:
SCOM Monitors Remote Control Scripts

Table 79. SCOM monitors remote control scripts
ON/OF Brightness slider
var w01 = "10.8.1.101"; var w01 = "10.8.1.101";
var w02 = "10.8.1.102"; var w02 = "10.8.1.102";
var w03 = "10.8.1.103"; var w03 = "10.8.1.103";
var w01b = findWidget("w01_button").checked; var w01b = findWidget("w01_button").checked;

if(w01b) if(w01b)
SetPower(w01, 0, widget.checked); SetBacklight(w01, 0, widget.value);
if(w02b) if(w02b)
if(w03b) if(w03b)
Dimming “ – “ Dimming “ + “
var slider = var slider =
root_widget.findChild("Brightness_slider"); root_widget.findChild("Brightness_slider");
slider.value -= 10; slider.value += 10;
var value = slider.value; var value = slider.value;
var w01 = "10.8.1.101"; var w01 = "10.8.1.101";

var w02 = "10.8.1.102"; var w02 = "10.8.1.102";
var w03 = "10.8.1.103"; var w03 = "10.8.1.103";

if(w01b) if(w01b)
SetBacklight(w01, 0, value); SetBacklight(w01, 0, value);
if(w02b) if(w02b)
if(w03b) if(w03b)

Adjustment for MFD Workstation Remote Control
ATTENTION!
For the operation with the Remote Keyboard, it is necessary to install the Remote
Keyboard Server (see above section MFD Software Installation).
Note: For all remote MFD workstations, sensors REMOTE_CONTROL must be

specified in the System Configuration utility on the page “Sensors” of the
panel “Sensors” on the TCP connecnion, server mode, port 58000
(see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings).
Plotter_kernel.xml and nscfg.xml Files Editing

Before configuring MFD remote control, it is necessary to adjust the
Plotter_kernel.xml and nscfg.xml files.
1. By means of Notepad, open the Plotter_kernel.xml file located in the

following folder:
<System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg\uninav:

Change the following below string:

<object module="nav_kernel" id="MFD_RC"
name="CompositeNmeaSource" key="rc" dot_input="yes" />
to the next strings:

name="CompositeNmeaSource" key="rem" dot_input="yes" />

name="CompositeNmeaSource" key="rkb" dot_input="yes" />
Save your changes in the file.
2. By means of Notepad, open the nscfg.xml file located in the following folder:
<System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg:
To use the functional buttons of the Remote Keyboard, it is necessary to add the
following strings:
<rem><sensors_config>
<network_port nmea_mux_port="58000"
nmea_mux_host="10.8.1.101" />
</sensors_config>
</rem>

To use the numeral and alphabetical keys of the Remote Keyboard, it is necessary
to add the following strings:
<rkb><sensors_config>
<network_port nmea_mux_port="45000"
nmea_mux_host="10.8.1.101" />
</sensors_config>
</rkb>
Where:
• <rem>/<rkb> – ID that we set in the plotter_kernel.xml file (see above);
58000 – the port specified in the System Configuration utility on the page “Sensors”
of the panel “Sensors” (see above);
45000 – the port that the rem_kbd_srv.exe application uses;
10.8.1.101 – IP address of the workstation, from which the remote control is

executed.
Adjustment for MFD Remote Control


SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER menu:

in the objectName line:
In the title line, specify the name of the page by clicking on the line in
the Value column (RC, for example):

From the CONTAINERS menu, select the GRID LAYOUTER or FIXED_GRID_LAYOUTER item:
To create the control button, press the “Add new widget” button:
Select the CONTROLS/BUTTON menu item:

In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” window, specify the name of the control
button in the objectName line.
In the text line, enter the title of the button:
In the output_script line, press the button:
In the open “Text editor” window, enter the necessary script to execute the desired
MFD remote command (see below item MFD Remote Control Scripts)
and press “OK” button:

Place the control button in the desired position on the “RC” page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row:
max_height lines to adjust size of the button.
In the same way, configure the other needed controls.
To delete the object, use the “Delete” button:
In the open “Warning” window, click on “Yes” button:
The picture below shows the example of the configured of MFD Remote Keyboard:
When you change the setting on the workstation (for examle, NUp to CUp), the
display of this setting will also change on the Remote Keyboard (with NUp to Cup).
The switching between all workstations in the network is made by pressing

W0X buttons. When you switch to a specific workstation, the settings will be
changed on the Remote Keyboard for the workstation.

MFD Remote Control Scripts

Table 80. MFD remote control scripts
Command Function Comments
Colour Palette Change
$--RS1,0,1,Day*41 Setting of screen colour palette Daylight
$--RS1,0,1,Night*41 Setting of screen colour palette Night
$--RS1,0,1,Dusk*41 Setting of screen colour palette Dusk
$--RS1,0,1,Inverted*41 Setting of screen colour palette Night
Inverted
$--RG1,0,1*25 Request of current screen colour palette
$--RN1,0,1*2C Setting of next screen colour palette
$--RP1,0,1*32 Setting of previous screen colour palette
Switching off Workstation
$--RS1,1,2*33 Switching off workstation
Start / Switching of ECDIS and RADAR application
$--RS1,1,3 Start / switching of ECDIS
$--RS1,1,4 Start / switching of RADAR
Settings of Screen Graphic Presentation (Skin)
(Indexes of skins correspond to the list of skins in the NS "Config" panel)
$--RS1,0,2,X Setting of skin Where: X – number of skin
(numbering starts from”0”)
$--RN1,0,2 Setting of next skin
$--RP1,0,2 Setting of previous skin
$--RG1,0,2 Request of current skin
Settings of Chart Layers “All” / “Standard”
For ECDIS
$--RS1,2,2 Settings of “All” layers
$--RS1,2,7 Settings of “Standard” layers
$--RG1,2,2 Request of “All” layers
$--RG1,2,7 Request of “Standard” layers
For RADAR
$--RS1,3,103 Settings of “All” layers
$--RS1,3,108 Settings of “Standard” layers
$--RG1,3,103 Request of “All” layers
$--RG1,3,108 Request of “Standard” layers
“Ahead” Command
$--RS1,2,3 “Ahead” activation command
Settings of N/H/C UP Orientation
$--RS1,2,4,X Setting of orientation Where: X - N/H/C UP
$--RN1,2,4 Setting of next orientation
$--RN1,2,4 Setting of previous orientation
$--RG1,2,4 Status request
“Event” Command
$--RS1,2,5 Command of initiation message
Display of AIS & ARPA Targets
$--RS1,2,6,ON To enable display of AIS & ARPA targets
$--RS1,2,6,OFF To disable display of AIS & ARPA targets
Settings of “Relative Motion” and “True Motion” Modes
$--RS1,2,8,RM Setting of “Relative Motion” mode
$--RS1,2,8,RM Setting of “True Motion” mode


$-RN1,2,8 Request of next status
$-RP1,2,8 Request of previous status
Alarm Aknowledgement
$--RS1,2,9 Alarm acknowledgement command
Radar Overlay Turning ON/OFF
$--RS1,2,10,ON Radar overlay turning ON
$--RS1,2,10,OFF Radar overlay turning OFF
“MOB” Mode Turning ON/OFF
$--RS1,2,11,ON,,,,, “MOB” turning ON Without additional fields
on the location and
$--RS1,2,11,OFF,,,,, “MOB” turning OFF
number of elapsed
seconds*
* There may be additional fields with place and number of seconds that have elapsed since the event.
For example, $--RS1,2,11,ON,5542.2389,N,03741.6063,E,10.
If there is no information about the location and number of elapsed seconds, the fields remain empty.
Settings of EBL / VRM
EBL1 Settings of Turning ON/OF and Status Request
$--RS1,2,14,ON EBL1 turning ON
$--RS1,2,14,OFF EBL1 turning OFF
$--RG1,2,14 EBL1 status request
EBL2 Settings of Turning ON/OF and status request
$--RS1,2,18,ON EBL2 turning ON
$--RS1,2,18,OFF EBL2 turning OFF
$--RG1,2,18 EBL2 status request
VRM1 Settings of Turning ON/OF and Status Request
$--RS1,2,16,ON VRM1 turning ON
$--RS1,2,16,OFF VRM1 turning OFF
$--RG1,2,16 VRM1 status request
VRM2 Settings of Turning ON/OFF and Status Request
$--RS1,2,20,ON VRM2 turning ON
$--RS1,2,20,OFF VRM2 turning OFF
$--RG1,2,20 VRM2 status request
Settings of EBL1 Value / Next Value/ Previous Value / Request of Current Value
$--RS1,2,13,X Setting of EBL1 value Where: X – value of
parameter. Step of
parameter change – 0.5
$--RN1,2,13 Setting of next EBL1 value
$--RP1,2,13 Setting of previous EBL1 value
$--RG1,2,13 Request of EBL1 value
Settings of EBL2 Value / Next Value/ Previous Value / Request of Current Value
$--RS1,2,17,X Setting of EBL2 value Where: X – value of
parameter. Step of
$--RN1,2,17 Setting of next EBL2 value
$--RP1,2,17 Setting of previous EBL2 value
$--RG1,2,17 Request of EBL2 value
Settings of VRM1 Value / Next Value/ Previous Value / Request of Current Value
$--RS1,2,15,X Setting of VRM1 value Where: X – value of
parameter. Step of
$--RN1,2,15 Setting of next VRM1 value

$--RP1,2,15 Setting of previous VRM1 value

$--RG1,2,15 Request of VRM1 value
Settings of VRM2 Value / Next Value/ Previous Value / Request of Current Value
$--RS1,2,19,X Setting of VRM2 value Where: X – value of
parameter. Step of
$--RN1,2,19 Setting of next VRM2 value
$--RP1,2,19 Setting of previous VRM2 value
$--RG1,2,19 Request of VRM2 value
Settings of Chart Display Scale
$--RS1,2,12,X Setting of scale Where: X – scale
$--RN1,2,12 Zoom In
$--RP1,2,12 Zoom Out
“Auto Sea” Turning ON
$--RS1,2,22,ON Turning ON
$--RS1,2,22,OFF Turning OFF
Settings of Noise Rejection from Sea (SEA)
$--RS1,2,21,X Setting of value Where: X – value of
parameter
$--RN1,2,21 Setting of next value
$--RP1,2,21 Setting of previous value
$--RG1,2,21 Request of current value
Settings of Noise Rejection from Rain (RAIN)
parameter
Settings of Radar Signal Gain (GAIN)
parameter
Settings of Radar Range (Radar Range)
$--RS1,2,25,1.0 Setting of value
$--RG1,2,25 Setting of next value
$--RN1,2,25 Setting of previous value
$--RP1,2,25 Request of current value
Settings of Transmit / Standby Modes (TX/STBY) – Only for RADAR
$--RS1,3,101,TX Setting of Transmit mode
$--RS1,3,101,STBY Setting of Standby mode
$--RN1,3,101 Next status
$--RP1,3,101 Previous status
Center Offset Mode Turning ON – Only for RADAR
$--RS1,3,104,ON Turning ON
$--RS1,3,104,OFF Turning OFF

Settings of Center Offset Value – Only for RADAR

For example: Shift at the angle of 45º to 50%
$--RS1,3,105,45,50
Adjustment for Button Closing WAGO Contact

Configuration of WAGO module connection to the MFD ports is performed on the
page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”.The WAGO1 sensor should be selected.
(see chapter Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors
Settings).
Additional Settings
Note: To activate MODBUS, edit nc5000.ini file according with Additional

Options Activation item above. The following string should be entered:
MODBUS_ENABLED=1
By means of Notepad, open Plotter_kernell.xml file located in the following
folder <System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg\uninav:
It is necessary to add the following below string.
For connection with the network WAGO 750-882:

<?if BCS?>
<object module="nav_modbus" name="ModbusClient"

id="PointingModbusClientA" polling_period="100">
<server address="10.8.1.251" port="502" slave_id="1"

retry_count="5" retry_period="1000" switch_delay="5000" />
</object>
<object module="nav_modbus" name="ModbusValuesAggregator"

id="ModbusValuesAggregatorA"
modbus_client_id="PointingModbusClientA" />
<?endif ?>
Where: 10.8.1.251 – IP addres of the network WAGO 750-882. It is necessary to

enter the WAGO IP address.

For connection with WAGO module via RS232 interface:

id="TestModbusClient">
<server type="rtu" address="COM1" baud="115200" parity="N"

data_bit="8" stop_bit="1" slave_id="1" retry_count="5"
retry_period="1000" switch_delay="5000" polling_period="1000"
response_timeout="1000"/>
</object>
For connection with WAGO via DCU:

id="TestModbusClient" polling_period="200" >
<server type="dcu" address="127.0.0.1:50019" port="1"

slave_id="1" retry_count="5" retry_period="1000"
switch_delay="5000"/>
</object>
Where: 127.0.0.1 – IP addres of DCU. It is necessary to enter DCU’s IP address.
GUI Designer Adjustments

In the open “GUI Designer” window, create the button as described above in
paragraph Adjustment for MFD Workstation Remote Control.
In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select the created button:
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, in the output_type line, enter
“OnPressed\OnReleased”.

In the output_script line, press the button:
Enter the script for closing WAGO contact:
The example of script for closing WAGO contact is shown below:

if(widget.pressed)
{
setModbusRegister("WAGO1", 5, 1)
}
else
{
setModbusRegister("WAGO1", 5, 0)
}
Where:
WAGO1 – name of device.
5 – number of WAGO contact.

1 – cotact closed.
0 – contact open.
Adjustment for Flashing Indicator when Closing WAGO Contact

Configuration of WAGO module connection to the MFD ports is performed on the
page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”.The WAGO_ADC sensor should be selected.
Settings).
Configure WAGO module as described in Annex A, section Adjustment of MFD

Operation with WAGO Modules, paragraph Connection of External MOB
Button below.
Additional Settings
Note: To activate MODBUS, edit nc5000.ini file according with Additional

MODBUS_ENABLED=1.
Edit the Plotter_kernell.xml file as described in item Adjustment for
Button Closing WAGO Contact above.


Select the CONTROLS/CNAVSVGDRAWER menu item:
Create the drawing of the Flashing Indicator.
in the objectName line:
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, incheck disable_script_for_hidden.
In the input_script line, press the button:

In the open “Text editor” window, press “Data sources” button.
In the open “Data Access Browser”, select the appropriate NMEA_CUSTOM sensor
which configured in the System Configuration utility before
(NAV KERNEL/MFDDATAACCESSBRIDGE/WAGO_ADC1_...) and press “OK” button:
The example of script for Flashing Indicator when closing WAGO contact is shown
below:
if(${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/WAGO_ADC1_MOB_IN_CONTACT.V
alue})
{
if((${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/Time.LocalSecond} % 2)
== 0)
{
widget.hidden=false;
}
else
{
widget.hidden=true;
}
}
else
{
widget.hidden=true;

Adjustment of Tunnel Thruster Indicator with NMEA_CUSTOM Sensor

Configure NMEA_ CUSTOM sensor in the System Configuration utility as described
below in Annex A, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom section.
In the open “GUI Designer” window, press the “Add new widget” button:
Select the DIRECT CREATE… menu item:
In the “Module name” drop-down list, select the nav_widgets.
In the “Object type” drop-down list, select NAVBARGAUGE item:

In the “Object type” drop-down list, select NAVHORZSCALE item:
For NAVBARGAUGE, in the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, in the
orientation line, select the Horizontal orientation from drop-down list:

In the open “Text editor” window, press “Data sources” button:

(NAV KERNEL/MFDDATAACCESSBRIDGE/NMEA_CUSTOM_...) and press “OK” button:
The example of script is shown below:

widget.value = ${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/
NMEA_CUSTOM2_LoadTunnelTruster.Value}
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, set the necessary size of Tunnel
Thruster indicator and place it in the desired position on the page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row for
CNAVBARGAUGE and CNAVHORZSCALE item accordingly:
Adjustment of Rudder Indicator with NMEA_CUSTOM Sensor


Rudder Arrow Indicator Setting

Press the Options button and enable the Show highlighter option:
To locate the Rudder arrow, use the Locate object button:


widget.rotation = 180-${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/
NMEA_CUSTOM3_RudderFeedback.Value};

Rudder Digital Indicator Setting

In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select the
APPLICATION/CNSGSIMPLEPAGER/CONNING
SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER/CNSGGRIDLAYOUTER/CENTER/RUDDER/DI menu item:


widget.value_sign =
${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/NMEA_CUSTOM3_
RudderFeedback.Value};
widget.value = Math.abs
(${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/NMEA_CUSTOM3_
RudderFeedback.Value}) + " °";
Check the Rudder angle position:
Display of Becker Rudder

Configure NMEA_ CUSTOM sensors in the System Configuration utility as
described below in Annex A, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA
Custom section.
Make the drawing of Becker rudder (two-sectional rudder) using

“:/nav_widgets/images/arrow_1.svg” drawing:
In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select the CNAVSVGDRAWER item for
basic Rudder.

The example of script for basic Rudder is shown below:

var val =
${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/NMEA_CUSTOM3_RudderFeedback1.
Value};
widget.rotation = 180.0-val;
In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select the CNAVSVGDRAWER item for
Flap Rudder.

In the open “Data Access Browser”, select the appropriate NMEA_CUSTOM

sensors for basic and flap rudders which configured in the System Configuration
utility before (NAV KERNEL/MFDDATAACCESSBRIDGE/NMEA_CUSTOM_...) and press “OK”
button:
The example of script for flap rudder is shown below:

var val =
Value};
var val2 =
Value};
var dx = 100 * Math.cos(val / 180.0 * 3.1415);
var dy = 100 * Math.sin(val / 180.0 * 3.1415);
widget.horz_shift = dy;
widget.vert_shift = dx;
widget.rotation = 180-(val + val2);

BAM Servers Settings

Note: To activate the BAM, edit the nc5000.ini file according with Additional
BAM_ENABLED=1
By means of Notepad, open the Plotter_kernel.xml file located in the following
folder: <System disk>:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\active_cfg\uninav:
Check the presence of the following strings for display of alerts:

<?if BAM_ENABLED?>
<object module="bam_client" name="BAMServersConfig" />
<object module="bam_client" name="BAMClient" />
<?endif ?>

In the open “GUI Designer” window, press the “Show templates browser”
button:
In the “Templates Browser” window, open CONTROLS menu item and select
BAMSERVERSCONFIGURATIONBUTTON.

Press the “Create item with selected template” button:
In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select CNSGTOOLBAR and set
the necessary button’s size and place in the desired position on the page by
changing the default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and
grid_row.
Press the “Servers Config” button:
In the open ”Password required” window, enter the password and press “OK” button.
The “BAM Servers” window will appear:
Use the following buttons for adding, deleting and checking of the BAM servers:
– To add the BAM server, press the “Add Server” button:

Specify IP addresses and ports of connection for both networks.
– To delete server, select it and press the “Remove Server”
button:
– For testing of connection to specified BAM servers, use the
“Check servers” button:

From This BAMViewer on bridge drop-down list, select a location of workstation

where BAM server is installed:
Once you have completed settings, press ”OK” button.
Parsing of Bits from NMEA_CUSTOM Field

An example of parsing bits from NMEA_CUSTOM field:
var ss = parseInt(${nav_kernel/DataAccessReceiver/PORT_MP},
2);
var vv = "";
if (ss & 1)
vv = "Backup control";
if (ss & 2)
vv = "Thruster running";
if (ss & 4)
vv = "DP";
if (ss & 8)
vv = "JS";
if (ss & 16)
vv = "Spare";
if (ss & 32)
vv = "Spare";
if (ss & 64)
vv = "Autopilot";
if (ss & 128)
vv = "Rudder panel";
widget.text = vv;
The description of creating the NMEA Custom sentences is presented below in

Annex A, section Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom.

Navi-Conning 5000 Information Display – NAUT (AW)

To comply with NAUT (AW) requirements, proper basic layout should be used, and
DNV GL RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION, SHIPS, Part 6 Additional class
notations, Chapter 3 Navigation, manoeuvring and position keeping,
Section 3 Nautical safety – NAUT (OC) and NAUT (AW), paragraph 6 Bridge
equipment – Specific requirements should be followed.
AW Bow View Screen
Navigation View Screen

Conning Information Display Categories – Specific Requirements

1. Control system data:
• Present system orders and set-values:
– Set heading (heading to steer, e.g. from $..HTC);

– Set turn radius (only during turn, i.e. subsequent to WOL);
– Set speed (only if speed pilot is provided): N/A;
– Rudder angle order;
– Present steering control mode.
• Corresponding sensor data and actual values:
– Heading;
– Turn rate;
– Rudder angle;
– Propeller revolutions;
– Pitch indication, when relevant;
– Thruster indication, when relevant;

– Speed over ground;

– Longitudinal;
– Athwart ship.
2. Voyage plan data:
• General:
– Identification (name) of selected route.
• TO-waypoint:
– Number (name) of waypoint;
– Planned course;
– Planned turn radius;
– Bearing to WOP;
– Time to go to WOL (h,m,s <24h<d,h,m);
– Cross-track-limit;
– Cross-track-distance, XTD (m if <0.5nm).
• NEXT-waypoint:
– Planned course;
– Distance to WOP.
3. Wind, depth, and set and drift data. Graphical and alphanumeric presentation of:

– Wind vector (velocity and direction);

– Set and drift vector (velocity and direction);
– Present and preceding depth sounding(s).
Adjustment for Navi-Conning 5000 Information Display – NAUT (AW)

Adjustment of Tunnel Thruster Indicators
We will consider the setup procedure of Tunnel Thruster Indicators with
NMEA_CUSTOM sensors as an example.
Configure NMEA_ CUSTOM sensors in the System Configuration utility as

described below in Annex A, Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA
Custom section.

SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER menu item in the left part of the screen.
Create the “Stacker” and “Fixed_Grid_Layouter” as described above in item
Adjustment for Cobham Equipment, for example.
Select the DIRECT CREATE… menu item:

In the “Module name” drop-down list, select the nav_widgets.
In the “Object type” drop-down list, select NAVBARGAUGE item:
In the “Object type” drop-down list, select NAVHORZSCALE item:

For NAVBARGAUGE, in the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, in the
orientation line, select the Horizontal orientation from drop-down list:


widget.value = ${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/
NMEA_CUSTOM2_LoadTunnelTruster.Value}
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, set the necessary size of Tunnel
Thruster indicator and place it in the desired position on the page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row for
CNAVBARGAUGE and CNAVHORZSCALE item accordingly:
By the same way, make adjustments for all Tunnel Thruster Indicators.

Adjustment of Rudders Indicators

We will consider the setup procedure of Rudders Indicators with NMEA_CUSTOM
sensor as an example.


From the drop-down PANELS menu, select the RUDDER item:
• Rudder Arrow Indicator Setting:

To locate the Rudder arrow, use the Locate object button:



• Rudder Digital Indicator Setting:

In the left-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, select the
APPLICATION/CNSGSIMPLEPAGER/CONNING
SCREEN/CNSGTABPAGER/CNSGGRIDLAYOUTER/CENTER/RUDDER/DI menu item:


widget.value_sign =
${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/NMEA_CUSTOM3_
RudderFeedback.Value};
widget.value = Math.abs
(${nav_kernel/MfdDataAccessBridge/NMEA_CUSTOM3_
RudderFeedback.Value}) + " °";
In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, set the necessary size of
Rudder Indicator and place it in the desired position on the page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row.
Make above described adjustments for all available rudders.
Adjustment of AZIPOD Indicators

We will consider the setup procedure of AZIPOD Indicators with NMEA_CUSTOM
sensor as an example.




From the drop-down PANELS menu, select the AZIPOD item:
To locate the AZIPOD Indicators, use the Locate object button:


In the right-hand part of the “GUI Designer” screen, set the necessary size of
AZIPOD Indicator and place it in the desired position on the page by changing the
default settings in the lines grid_rowspan, grid_colspan, grid_col and grid_row.
By the same way, make adjustments for all AZIPOD Indicators.

Radar Adjustment
RADAR ADJUSTMENT
GEM Network Scanners Adjustment

Run RADAR task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\NAVI-RADAR):
Receiver Adjustment
To switch the scanner to the transmission mode, press the mode button
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX.
Set the 24 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down list
in the top right corner of the Display Panel.
Switch pulse width to LP and wait for scanner to warm up for 10-15 minute.
Switch off the Auto mode (AUTO button depressed). Use the and buttons to set
Tune parameter to value 500.
In the Control Panel’s “GAIN/RAIN/SEA” window, position the cursor on the controls
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way set
GAIN value to maximum level.

Radar Adjustment
Open “Settings” panel by selecting the appropriate menu line in the Control Panel’s
“Multipanel” window:
Use the tab in the top part of “Settings” panel which will open up, to switch
to the “Radar-Scanner” page.
Enter the password on “Settings” panel.

Note: These settings should be set up and changed only by certificated engineer.
Uncontrollable changing of any settings may lead to serious deterioration of
the system work.
Press the enabled Radar Settings button.
Set the Reg parameter to value 96 (if differs from this value).

Radar Adjustment
Using the Coarce adjustment on the “Radar-Scanner” page, find the value
corresponding to most bright image (Tune level cannot be used for this purpose).
Probably, GAIN settings on the indicator panel would be required in the course
of adjustment.
Video Indication Adjustment

In the Reg field, press A button:
Adjustment is carried out automatically approximately within 2-3 minute. Upon

completion of adjustment, the button A will be released and the best value will be
displayed in the Reg field (approx. 50-130).
If the Reg value is approx. 200, changing Reg, find the value corresponding to
maximum tune level (should be around 230-240). See the picture below:
After making all the settings, turn on the Auto mode and check that the mode
operates on all the scales and with all the pulse lengths.
If the Tune Level is 100%, change the Reg setting on the “Radar-Scanner” page:

Radar Adjustment
Check that after this the Auto mode operates steadily and that the radar picture
quality is good.
For interference rejection, use the Stagger adjustment to set the change of the outgoing
pulse repetition rate in % of the average value. Recommended values for stagger are 2,
8, 15 (see also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION, Chapter 8, Video Signal Processing Principles
section, Clutter Suppression Facilities paragraph).
Blank Sector Setting
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep over it does not transmit radar.
This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ship’s
superstructure or funnel to prevent radar reflections.
“Multipanel” window:
Enter the password on “Radar-Scanner” page.
Uncontrollable changing of any settings may lead to serious deterioration
of the system work.

Radar Adjustment
In the Start window specify the beginning of blank sector; the end of blank sector
should be specified in the End window. Press the Apply button.
Press ON button. Established blank sector will be displayed on the PPI.

Radar Adjustment
NGSM Scanners Adjustment

Radar Setup
It is recommended to perform the radar tuning as described below.
To switch the scanner to the transmission mode, press the mode button
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX. Leave the radar
in the transmission mode for 20–30 minutes.
Set the 12 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down

list in the top right corner of the Display Panel.
Switch the pulse width to LP (Long Pulse).
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level. In the same way, set
GAIN value to maximum level (100 %).
Switch off the Auto mode (AUTO button is depressed).

Radar Adjustment
Using the and buttons, set the Tune parameter to get the brightest image of a
signal on a radar, while controlling theTune LEVEL indicator.
The indicator Tune LEVEL will be displayed in a gray color.
When the setting is complete, switch on the Auto mode (AUTO button is pressed).
The noise marks should be clearly discernable on the screen. With the signal too
weak or too strong, adjust the RIB6/RIB6B gain.
“Multipanel” window.
Enter the password on the “Radar-Scanner” page.
of the system work.

Radar Adjustment
On the “Radar-Scanner” page, press Diagnostics button.
By using this table you can check the radar visual setup accuracy.
Performance Monitor Setup

The performance monitor (PM) is used for simplifying the process of adjusting the
radar transceiver and checking the device service status in the course of operation.
The PM facility is available when:
• The radar is a Master radar and is in Transmit mode;

• The connected transceiver is fitted with performance monitoring equipment.
The PM has two modes of operation:
• RX/TX - System mode (default), which monitors the performance of the overall
system.
• RX - Receiver mode, which monitors the receiver path for incoming signals,
including the receiver located in the Transceiver unit.
Switch the pulse width to LP (Long Pulse).
Switch on the Auto mode (AUTO button is pressed).
and by trackball using set RAIN and SEA values to zero level.
In the same way, set GAIN value to optimum level (if the setting is too low or too high
the four tuning arcs may not be visible).

Radar Adjustment
Enter the password on the “Radar-Scanner” page.
of the system work.
Press the enabled PM button.
The PM signal is displayed in the form of four arcs.
Note: If sector blanking is active the system displays a warning prompt informing
the operator that sector blanking is inhibited while the PM is switched on
(see item Blank Sectors Setting below).

Radar Adjustment
When the PM is accessed in Service mode, the Monitoring mode (Receiver or

System) and Attenuation (Xt or Xr) tune levels can be adjusted (see below).
The Monitoring mode selected will determine the attenuation adjustment available.
Receiver mode (RX) enables Xt to be adjusted; System mode (RX/TX) enables Xr to
be adjusted.
Note: When the PM is the Monitoring mode tuning level is being adjusted, four
arcs are shown on the video circle. These arcs are approximately 0.3 NM
apart and start at a range of 8 NM. The arcs extend from 290° to 320°
(S-band) or from 155° to 185° (X-band), with respect to the heading line.
The precise bearing value will alter depending on the Heading/Stern line
offset value.
CAUTION!
The adjustment of the attenuation (Xt or Xr) tune levels should only be done when a
major component such as the magnetron or receiver is changed.
To adjust the Performance Monitor, press PM Settings button on the “Radar-Scanner”

page. Initial state for adjustment is shown on the picture below:
Press the RX button, the PM tune Rx and Xt area becomes active.

Radar Adjustment
By varying the value in the PM tune Rx input field, achieve the maximum brightness
and clearness of the four PM arcs that should be visible in the following video
sectors: 290º to 320º for S -band and 155º to 185º for X-band:
Change the value in the Xt input field until the outermost arc is just visible in the
noise background:

Radar Adjustment
Press the RX/TX button, the PM tune Tx and Xr area becomes active:
Repeat the adjustment with PM tune Tx and Xr input fields:

Radar Adjustment
Check behavior of PM in standard mode and repeat adjustment if necessary.
Blank Sectors Setting
ATTENTION!
A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep, over it does not transmit
radar. This is commonly used to prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ship’s
superstructure or funnel to prevent radar reflections.
of the system work.

Radar Adjustment
In the Start window specify the beginning of blank sector; the end of blank sector
should be specified in the End window. Press the Apply button. To establish second
blank sector, select Sector 2 from the fall-off list and specify limits of the one.
Note: If sectors are overlapped, the single united sector should be displayed on the PPI.
Press ON button. Established blank sectors will be displayed on the PPI.

Radar Adjustment
Distance and Bearing Offset

Introduction
Adjustment of the RIB in azimuth, i.e. an offset to the fixed azimuth errors of the
radar antenna. The magnitude of the offset is determined as the difference between
the bearing value of a clearly observed and uniquely identified stationary radar
object measured on the chart or by using other measurement method, and a mean
value of several bearing measurements made for the same object by using the RIB.
The offset corresponds to the value of an angle, which the picture should be turned
to in the clockwise direction for it to match the actual situation. The offset is entered
with an accuracy of up to one tenth of a degree.
Adjustment of the RIB in range, i.e. an offset to the delays in the radar and RIB
circuits. The magnitude of the offset is determined by comparing the results of range
measurements made for clearly observed and uniquely identified stationary radar
objects by using the RIB radar picture, and measurements made on the chart or
by using other methods. The offset is entered with an accuracy of up to 1 m.
Distance and Bearing Offset Setting

To switch the scanner to the transmission mode press the mode button
in the top right corner of the Display Panel and select TX.
Set the 1.5 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down list
On the radar picture, find an echo from even coastline: a pier,

building, etc. Check that there is no curvature of the coastline
and\or there is no bright/dark noise at the scan origin.
Use VRM1 to measure the distance to the electronic chart object used
for the adjustment purposes. Use VRM2 to measure the distance to the echo
of the object used for the adjustment purposes.

Radar Adjustment
Calculate the Distance Offset value as the difference between the VRM1 and VRM2
readouts.
Set the 6–12 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down
Find a point radar mark of a navigational object, e.g., a buoy, lighthouse, etc.
Use EBL1 to measure the bearing to the electronic chart object used for the adjustment
purposes. Use EBL2 to measure the bearing to the echo of the object used for
the adjustment purposes.

Radar Adjustment
Calculate the Bearing Offset value as the difference between the EBL1 and EBL2
readouts.
Press the enabled BRG/DIST OFFSET button.
Press Change button. Enter Bearing Offset value in Bearing input field and Distance
Offset value in Distance input field.

Radar Adjustment
Press Apply button.

Make several iterations as required, achieving the maximum possible alignment of
the radar picture and chart information. Where there is no chart collection, or there
are no clearly expressed point marks, tuning can be performed by bringing the AIS
marks into coincidence with a radar echo.
To return the display of standard “Radar-Scanner” page, press Back button.
ATTENTION!
In making the adjustment, use the differential positioning mode in order to obtain
the required accuracy.
The adjustment is made by using the radar observed conspicuous features whose polar
coordinates are known with accuracy not inferior to 0.1° in azimuth and 2 m in range.
Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6/RIB6B

At this stage, parameters of the radar processor analog-digital converter are set up
to ensure the best signal processing quality.

Radar Adjustment

to the “RIB6” page.
Enter the password on “RIB6” page.
of the system work.

Radar Adjustment
Press Oscillograph button. Provides below are oscillograms showing different

adjustments:
• Signal in the closest zone limited, incorrect amplification (AMP);
• Correct amplification (AMP) and offset (SFT) settings;
• Noise suppression, incorrect offset (SFT).
Keep varying the parameter value in the AMP input field until the signal level does
not exceed 80% of the maximum. Check that there is no signal saturation.
Check the level on different scales.
ATTENTION!
The larger the value in the AMP input field, the lower is the signal level, and
the other way round.

Check that there are noises in the far-off zone and no compact noises. Make the
adjustments as required by using the Shift input field. The reduction of the value
results in the larger noise level.

Settings in Autopilot
SETTINGS IN AUTOPILOT
General
Track Control Mode is described in document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 2.
The autopilots should be adjusted in the Heading Control mode. This setting is
normally made by the autopilot manufacturer representatives.
The Heading Control mode setting should generally be made so as to ensure:
• Fast picking up of the set rate of turn;

• Stable maintaining of the set rate of turn without considerable deviations;
• Turning in to a new course without overshooting and without lengthy bringing to
the course;
• Keeping steady on the course during the sailing along the straight line.
The mandatory parts of Track Control System:
• NS 4000 ECDIS including UPS unit;

• Heading Control System – build-in function of the autopilot;
• Sensors:
– Position 2 satellite navigation systems (PS1 and PS2);
– Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS) and Position Monitor function (built-
in ECDIS alarm “Prim./Sec.Diverge”). Two independent EPFS are
recommended (GPS and GLONASS);
– Gyrocompass (HEADING and MAG.HEAD) and Heading Monitor function
(External alert has to be available):
ATTENTION!
Heading Monitor (HM) function should be activated only in one device: in autopilot,
or in ECDIS. If HM is available in autopilot, disable this function in ECDIS.
If HM is not available in autopilot, this function should be activated in ECDIS.
HM is activated in the System Configuration utility on the “General” page of the “INS”
panel (see above paragraph MFD Settings, item 2).
– Independent speed data source (data on speed through the water).

• Alarm transfer system (BNWAS or other means).
Raytheon Heading Control System NP5400

ATTENTION!
Installation of equipment, NS 4000 ECDIS and connection of the external devices
should be done by the service engineer in accordance with MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART I document.
Autopilot’s description and technical characteristics are presented in Chapter 3,
section Autopilots, paragraph AUTOPILOT RAYTHEON NP5400.
Ensure that autopilot works correct as a Heading Control System.
Information below given for some TCS related settings.

For detailed description of the autopilot’s installation procedure and settings,

see NAUTOPILOT 5000 SERIES INSTALLATION MANUAL, NAUTOPILOT 5000
SERIES OPERATOR MANUAL and NAUTOPILOT 5000 SERIES AUTOPILOT
INTERFACE AS SERVICE MANUAL documents supplied as part of the equipment
delivery set.
HW Settings
• Sensors connection as per service manual and “Autopilot Raytheon NP5400.
Connection Diagram” presented in ANNEX J.
On each specific vessel the drawing can vary depending on the hardware
configuration (see manufacturers manual).
• NS serial data connection (“Autopilot” port) as described below:
Autopilot Operator Unit, plug B9, terminals 1-5 should be connected to the
ECDIS workstation COM port.
Software Settings
The setup of ship limits and settings is made in the ECDIS System Configuration
utility (see section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 11).
Service Menu
The recommended settings are provided in the table below:
Parameter Recommended Settings/Comment
Serial 2 ECDIS 4800 baud
Rudder Gain [%] 100;
The possible range is 10.0% to 200.0%
Adaptive Inactive
Time/Position Filter 0 (the values for different ships types are presented below in the table of the item
User Menu);
Possible values are:50 to 200 (seconds)
Pivot Point Distance (in meter) from the ship‘s position reference point (normally the bridge) to the
turning point of the ship (approximately position of the bow).
Possible values are from 100 to 500
Track Scale 2;
Use this parameter to increase the straitness of the controller in mode “Track Control”.
By increasing this value the accuracy of a straight track as well as the compensation of
a track error after a track change can be accelerated.
Adjustments of this parameter should be performed only after the Autopilot is optimal
(adjustments for Rudder and Counter Rudder) adjusted in mode Heading Control”.
Possible values are from 0 to 5
RoT from ECDIS Trough water
Drift Freeze Inactive

Eff. Ship Length This parameter should be set to the actual ships length.
It may be used to influence the suitable value for the counter rudder. Some more length
results in less counter rudder and less length results in more counter rudder.
Possible values are from 10 to 999 meter
Note: Other data is ship’s type depending and/or ship’s model tuning
characteristics and for the most cases shall be equal to values in the
DEFAULT PARAMETER FOR NAUTOPILOT NP 5000 section of the NP5X00
INSTALLATION MANUAL document.
User Menu
Parameter Y/R/C – correct settings shall be provided before track control settings.
For the different type of vessel should be used different values, as a default next
settings can be applied, note that this parameters can be changed depend on
environment.
In the table below the typical settings are provided for the following ship’s type:
• Fast Ferry (IEC ship A, length 60m, max speed 30kn);

• Container ship (IEC ship B, length 250m, max speed 25kn);
• Tanker (IEC ship C, length 350m, Max speed 10kn).
Parameter Fast Ferry Container Ship Tanker
Rudder 7 7 5
Counter Rudder 4 1 1
Yawing 2 2 1
Pivot Point 60 100 150
Time/Pos. Filter 0 seconds 50 seconds 50 seconds
Rudder Gain 100 % 100 % 100 %
Note: Pay attention that only one additional parameter from the ECDIS influent on
Track Mode accuracy:
Parameter Fast Ferry Container Ship Tanker
F-Distance. meters 210 180 200
Navis Heading Control System AP4000

ATTENTION!
Autopilot’s description and technical characteristics are presented in CHAPTER 3,
section Autopilots, paragraph AUTOPILOT NAVIS AP4000.
HW Settings
• Sensors connection as per service manual and “Autopilot NAVIS AP4000
Interfaces. Connection Diagram” presented in Annex J.

Autopilot Control Unit CU-M, plug J16, terminals 39-43 should be connected to
the ECDIS workstation COM port.
For detailed information of the autopilot’s installation procedure and HW settings,

see NAVIS AP4000 HEADING CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION GUIDE and
NAVIS AP4000 DRAWING LIST documents supplied as a part of the equipment
delivery set.
Software Settings
Service part:
• “INSTALLATION” main menu – (provided by service engineer only);

• “DOCKTRIAL” menu:
– TrackMode: ExtHTC.
• “PARAMETERS” menu:
– Vessel Length: actual vessel length in meters;
– Vmax: actual maximum speed in knots;
– Vmin: minimal manoeuvring speed in knots;
– Wmax: maximum Rate of Turn, deg/per minute.
Make “AP Turning” procedure as described in
NAVIS AP4000 HEADING CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION GUIDE.
ATTENTION!
Autopilot settings should match the ship characteristics. Otherwise, frequent
deviations from the course and, as a consequence, frequent use of the steering gear
will be inevitable.

EMRI Heading Control System SEM200
ATTENTION!
Autopilot’s description and technical characteristics are presented in Chapter 3,
section AUTOPILOTS, paragraph Autopilolt EMRI SEM200.
Sailing accuracy in the Track Control mode is divided into two parts:
• Sailing along the straight line – the autopilot receives all the necessary route
data and controls the ship on its own. The ECDIS does not send any orders;
• Sailing along the curved line (turning) – the ECDIS sends all the necessary
route data and additional orders to alter the course. The setup of the additional
order is made in the ECDIS (section MFD Configuration, paragraph
MFD Settings, item 11).
HW Settings
• Sensors connection as per service manual and “Autopilot EMRI SEM200.
AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram” presented in ANNEX J.
Autopilot AEU511 Unit, plug X5, terminals 2-4 should be connected to the
ECDIS workstation COM port.
For more detailed description of the autopilot’s installation procedure and HW settings,
see autopilot’s INSTALLATION MANUAL document. This document is supplied as part
of the equipment delivery set.
Typical Settings for the AP:

Sensor/Parameter Port/Setting Comment
Primary Heading source CHB $xxHDT or $xxTHS
Secondary Heading See SW settings for the Heading Monitor
source adjust
LOG CHA $xxVHW or $xxVBW
Steering Gear system Order signal = X4.9 Signal
ground = X4.10

Sensor/Parameter Port/Setting Comment

Mode Selector Digital Ground = X4.22;
AP In Control = X4.24
Autopilot failure OUT via X4/37 to 39 opens To the ECDIS (External Alarm), to stearing
dry contact gear, to EMRI SSF10 box – Freeze rudder
Ships Alarm System via Additional connection, does not required for
dry contact the minimum configuration
ECDIS TXD1+ = X5.2; TXD1- =
X5.3; RXD1- = X5.4;
RXD1+ = X5.5
Software Settings
Table below contain recommended setting for three types of vessels:
• Fast Ferry: Lpp=60, W=16, SPD=35;

• Container Ship: Lpp=250, W=28, SPD=25;
• Tanker: Lpp=350, W=40, SPD=10.
Table content main settings which influent on Track Control:
Parameter Comment Fast Ferry Container Tanker
ECDIS settings
F dist 0.11 0.09 0.07
RotDriftKoef 0.25* 0.15* 0.15*
AP settings
SW1 PDGain=1.0 5 6 6
SW2 5 4 4
SW3 1, 3, 7 1, 3, 5 1, 3, 5
Kp Deg/Meter 20 30
Klci Deg/Meter*Second 0.0271 0.0271
Sleng Length 60 250 350
U_norm Max. cruising speed 30 25 10
URMIN 0.5–0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5
XTEMax 9.9–200 30 99 99
FIRW 0.5–0.1 0.05 0.05 0.05
FPDGN 1–2, rudder blade dimensions 1 1 1
and efficiency dependence
FLCIM 0.2–0.4 Approach angle 0.2 0.4 0.4
(drift compensation)
FLCPMax 0.4 0.2 0.4 0.4
GyroErrorLimit Value in Radian, set value: 0.1 0.1 0.1
GYRO-GYRO: 0.1
GYRO-MAG: 0.2
E2KDamp Kalman filter (?) 0.3 0.3 0.3
Note: *The value of RotDriftKoef depends on F-Distance value and it can be

reduced or increased during sea trails.
ATTENTION!
will be inevitable.

Sperry Marine Heading Control System NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK
ATTENTION!
should be done by the service engineer in accordance with NAVIPILOT 4000.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL and MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART I documents. Autopilot’s description
and technical characteristics are presented in CHAPTER 3, section Autopilots,
paragraph AUTOPILOT SPERRY MARINE NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK.
HW Settings
• Sensors connection as per service manual and “Autopilot Sperry Marine
NAVIPILOT 4000 Interfaces. Connection Diagram” presented in Annex J.
• NS serial data connection (“Autopilot” port) as described below.
Autopilot Steering Control Unit, plug TB NAV RS422, terminals 37-41 should be
connected to the ECDIS workstation COM port.
For detailed description of the autopilot’s installation procedure and HW settings, see
NAVIPILOT 4000. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL document supplied
as a part of the equipment delivery set.
Software Settings

NAVIPILOT 4000 Configuration

Service Setup
Setup parameter Configuration location Purpose
NAV Status Service Setup 2 / Serial This setting will allow the IBS to identify the
Message Interface / NAV INTERFACE / master SCU and determine the correct status of
NAV STATUS MSG / Set to the autopilot. By setting this value to YES only
YES the master SCU will send a “pilot mode” value of
NAV. All non-master SCUs will always send
STY. NAV Steering Mode Message
NAV Steering Mode Service Setup 2 / Serial By setting this value to “YES”, autopilot will
Message Interface / NAV INTERFACE / automatically switch to AUTO mode whenever
NAV STEERING MODE MSG the PSMI message indicates that NAV mode is
/ Set to YES not permitted. If this value is set to “NO” then the
autopilot will only switch to AUTO if it fails to
receive any message from the IBS within a
configured time limit
Message Type Service Setup 2 / Serial This setting determines the set of messages that
Interface / NAV INTERFACE / the Navipilot 4000 will send over the serial
MESSAGE TYPE / Set to interface to the IBS. When set to “HSC, Prop
HSC, PROP HTC, HTR HTC, HTR”, the Navipilot 4000 will communicate
with the IBS
Lost Nav Service Setup 2 / Serial This setting determines how the Navipilot 4000
Interface / NAV INTERFACE / will steer the ship if, while in a turn being
LOST NAV / Set to COMPL controlled by the IBS, the Navipilot 4000 loses
TURN communications with the IBS or the IBS sends a
PSMI message indicating that NAV mode is not
permitted. With the “COMPL TURN” setting, the
Navipilot 4000 will complete the turn, using the
heading and turn radius provided in the HTC
message last received from the IBS
Nav Ack Service Setup 2 / Serial Setting this to “NO” will prevent the Navipilot
Interface / NAV INTERFACE / 4000 from generating an alarm whenever a
NAV ACK / Set to NO course change of more than 15 degrees is made
while in NAV mode
Echo To VMS Port* Service Setup 2 / Serial Select “YES” to echo Central Alarm Manager
Interface / Central Alarm (CAM) messages on NAV interface port.
Interface On VMS Port / Set to
YES
Note: *If the parameter “Echo To VMS Port” set to “YES”, baud rate for NAV
INTERFACE should be set to 19200 (Service Setup 2 / Serial Interface / NAV
INTERFACE / BAUD RATE).
For detailed description of the autopilot’s configuration settings (service setup), see
NAVIPILOT 4000. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL document supplied
as a part of the equipment delivery set.
ATTENTION!
will be inevitable.

Yokogawa Heading Control System PT900
ATTENTION!
Installation of equipment, NS 4000 ECDIS, and connection of the external devices
and settings should be done by the service engineer in accordance with PT900
AUTOPILOT SYSTEM. USER’S MANUAL (IM 80B20T01E), PT900 AUTOPILOT
MAINTENANCE MODE. OPERATION MANUAL (SM80B22H01E) and
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART I
documents. Autopilot’s description and technical characteristics are presented also
in Chapter 3, section AUTOPILOTS, paragraph Autopilot Yokogawa PT900.
HW Settings
Sensors connection as per service manual and “Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 Overall
System Diagram” presented in Annex J. On each specific vessel the drawing can
vary depending on the hardware configuration (see manufacturers manual).
• The Compass and Log sensors are connected to the following terminals:
– Gyro1 – Main Control Unit (MCU), NAV I/F UNIT MPT590, TB41,
terminals 4(“+”) – 5(“-“).
– Gyro2 - MCU, NAV I/F UNIT MPT590, TB41, terminals 9(“+”) – 10(“-“).
– Log1 - MCU, NAV I/F UNIT MPT590, TB41, terminals 14(“+”) – 15(“-“).
– For the alarms handling, see below section Alerts Handling and
Recommended TCS Settings, paragraph Autopilot Yokogawa PT900.
Nav RS422 interface of Main Control Unit (MCU), NAV I/F Unit MPT590,
TB42, terminals 1(“-“) – 2(“+”) [output] and 7(“-“) – 8(“+”) [input] should be
connected to the ECDIS RS6B computer COM port.

NAV I/F UNIT Settings

It is necessary that setting of SW (switch) and JP (Jumper) on NAV I/F UNIT
depending on interface format (IEC61162-1/-2). For detail of setting, see below the
following table.
Interface Transfer rate IEC61162-1/-2 Terminator(On/Off) GND IEC/ITU

(bps) Switch Position Switch Position Jumper Position
Ch1 compass 4800 SW3 2-3 (-1) SW4 2-3 (Off) JP5 1-2 (IEC)
38400 1-2 (-2) 1-2 (On) 2-3 (ITU)
Ch2 compass 4800 SW5 2-3 (-1) SW6 2-3 (Off) JP6 1-2 (IEC)
38400 1-2 (-2) 1-2 (On) 2-3 (ITU)
THD 38400 SW7 1-2 (-2) - - JP7 2-3 (ITU)
Speed log 4800 - - - - - -
GPS 4800 - - - - - -
ECDIS 4800 SW8 2-3 (-1) SW9 2-3 (Off) JP8 1-2 (IEC)
38400 1-2 (-2) 1-2 (On) 2-3 (ITU)
BAMS 4800 SW10 2-3 (-1) SW11 2-3 (Off) JP9 1-2 (IEC)
38400 1-2 (-2) 1-2 (On) 2-3 (ITU)
S-JOY 9600 SW12 2-3 (-1) SW13 2-3 (-1) JP10 1-2 (IEC)
IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.
ITU: International Telecommunication Union.
Fig. 225. NAV I/F BD ASSY
Autopilot General Setup Procedure for Vessels

For the autopilot’s function and operation, see PT900 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM.
USER’S MANUAL (IM 80B20T01E).
For the detail setting for interface, unit adjustment automatic steering parameter in
Maintenance mode, see PT900 AUTOPILOT MAINTENANCE MODE. OPERATION
MANUAL (SM80B22H01E) and pargraph below Access to AP CDU Maintenance
Mode.

The recommended autopilot’s settings for the various types of vessels are shown in
the tables below. Those settings are valid for IEC62065ed2 models and given for
information only.
Fast Ferry Vessels - Class A (Max. ROT=200 deg/min)
Menu Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings Menu Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings
Command rudder angle of the alarm Keeping HC moving average time 14
occurs
Counter rudder angle limit Off Rudder order moving average time 2
Rough seas steering mode Off Filter time constant for ch1 compass(ROT) Disable
Helm adjustment in steering mode 0 Filter time constant for ch2 compass(ROT) Disable
switch
Number of rudders Single Filter time constant for THD(ROT) Disable
Course deviation limit function Enable Deviation correction of external compass 0
Steering gear deadband Disable ECOP Gain 500
compensation
Exponential smoothing time for ship 16 ECOP Average time 30
speed
Ch1 compass moving average time Disable DRIFT comp. Average times 30
Ch2 compass moving average time Disable Hand mode selectable Off
THD moving average time Disable BG adjustment 0.0
4-4 Settings 4-9-2-1 Heading control Settings

PARAMETER
Vs 20 Heading sensor switch Auto
Lpp 60 Heading jump detection threshold Disable
B(Mid) 20 Heading jump integration threshold 200
Ki 0.07 Heading jump tuning threshold 0.10
Tv 12 Sway time constant 6
Kv 0.07 Data 0
MQ 1.0 Rate down check 1.00
Gd 1.0 Turn mode reset in power on Disable
Gp 1.4 HDG changeover on HDG mon. / err. Alarm Disable
Gi 1.0 Turning proportional gain multiplier 1.5
INT Unstable Turning differential gain multiplier 1.0
IDENT Incomplete Turning integration gain multiplier 3.5
RESULT Stable
4-9-2-2 BNAAC:1 Settings 4-9-2-2 BNAAC:2 Settings

BG 25.5 BRT：Weight of the steering speed 10
BQG:Weight of course deviation 1.0 BG1:BNAAC Differential gain 0.3

BRG:Weight of rudder angle 1.0 MAT:Moving average time 7.0
ROTL:R.O.T limit 0.5

4-9-2-4 Track control Settings Settings 4-9-2-5 Safety Settings

Tracking differential 1.00 Angle limit 40.0 Hold rudder gain
1.00
gain multiplier during turn
Tracking integration 1.00 Integral delay 60 Max rate of turn
200
gain multiplier [ﾟ/min]
HTD data at the time of Null TG steps 20
Min turning radius 0.2
the gyro error
Kp 250 TG1 0.35 Max rate of turn[º/t] 20
Ki 0.01 TG2 0.7 Max manual speed 21
Kd x 10 100 TG3 0.85
Moving average 10 TG4 1.00
Dead band Off XTE compensation Enable
Integral limit 40 Drift compensation Enable
Container Vessels - Class B (Max. ROT=50deg/min)

Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings
occurs
switch
compensation
speed

PARAMETER
Kv 0.03 Data 0
INT Stable Turning differential gain multiplier 2.8
RESULT Stable




1.10
50
the gyro error
Kd x 10 540 TG3 0.85
Tanker Vessels - Class C(Max. ROT=30deg/min)

Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings Screen 4-3 CONTROL Settings
occurs
switch
compensation
speed


PARAMETER
Kv 0.02 Data 0
INT Unstable Turning differential gain multiplier 0.5
RESULT Stable Heading Sensor change over Auto



1.29
30
the gyro error
Kd x 10 750 TG3 0.85
Some Recommended Settings for All Ships

Setting items Setting item No. Setting
Interface 4-9-1 (Screens 4-9-1-1/4-9-1-2)
Input data format Setting item 3 NMEA THS & ROT
ECDIS interface (Screen 4-9-1-6)
Transfer rate Setting item 2 4800
Input data format Setting item 3 Standard
XTE input data format Setting item 6 XTE/XTE with Mode
BAMS interface (Screen 4-9-1-7)
ARC output Setting item 3 Enable
AMS heartbeat monitoring Setting item 4 Enable

Access to AP CDU Maintenance Mode

The detail setting for interface, unit adjustment automatic steering parameter can be
set in Maintenance mode. This mode is usually locked by key code to avoid the
accessing by the public user.
Unlock of AP CDU Maintenance Mode

• Unlock the procedure of Maintenance modeb are the following:
• Touch [Menu] on Home screen, then press [4 Setting] and [9 Maintenance]
buttons in order to move to the 4-9 Maintenance menu.
• Input key codes (4-digit: “1-8-3-6”) for unlock, and then touch the number area.
• If the correct key code is recognized, the group list for maintenance will be
appeared on the screen automatically and each menu becomes available.
• You can access Maintenance mode without re- entering of key code for 1 hour
after unlock.
Lock of AP CDU Maintenance Mode

It is nothing to special operation for lock to Maintenance mode.
Maintenance mode will be locked automatically after the following timing for operation.
• Maintenance mode will lock automatically after 1 hour from unlock even if AP
CDU is operated.
Maintenance mode will be locked automatically after restart of autopilot.

Maintenance Menu (4-9 Maintenance)

The maintenance menu consists of the following setting functions:

Maintenance Group List (Screen 4-9)

This is the screen of Group list for maintenance menu.
The setting items are listed in the following 9 groups from 4-9-1 to 4-9-9.
1. Interface: Interface setting for external equipment that is connected to NAV I/F
UNIT.
2. Control: Setting items for HCS and TCS. And available range of maximum ROT,
minimum turn radius and ship’s speed.
3. Alert: Setting items for alert monitoring function of servo loop and rudder
keeping function.
4. Unit registration/position: Registration for each unit which is connected by

CANBUS. It is able to set like a Resister, Not register, installation position in
W/H.
5. Unit adjustment: Adjustment items for HAND STEERING UNIT and several units
that can be sent analog signal.
6. Parameter: Setting items for ship’s parameter that should be changed by drift
mode.
7. Output the simulated signal: Outputs the simulated rudder command signal.
8. Others: Exhibition mode, Course reminder, Button press sound and alert log
clear.
9. Backup/Restore: Backup and Restore of maintenance data.
See PT900 AUTOPILOT MAINTENANCE MODE. OPERATION MANUAL

(SM80B22H01E) for the detail setting for interface, control, alert, units adjustment,
and etc.

NS 4000 ECDIS TCS Settings

1. Run the System Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item
in the START menu.
2. Switch to “P450” page:
– Press “Generate SFIs” button;

– In the TCS SFI input box, it is possible to enter SFI, which should be the same
for all workstations in the bridge.
3. Press Sensors button and open “Sensors” page (see above section MFD
Configuration, paragraph Sensor Settings, items 1-2).

– In the column Sensor, select fom drop-down list TCS sensor and set the
necessary parameters for this sensor;
– Select the NMEAOUT sensor, set TCP connection and Server mode;
– Select the ALARM_STATION sensor and in the column Port, choose from
drop-down list the appropriate port P450_x.
Note: For the configuration of the BAM Server, see below section BAM
Configuration, paragraph Connections Page.
4. Switch to “Alert Output Settings” page:
– To transfer the TCS alarm/warning from the MFD to the BAM or to the
external device via NMEA interface (output), select the necessary TCS
alarm/warning by checking the appropriate checkboxes in the column NMEA
Alarm;
– To transfer the TCS alarm/warning from the MFD to the external device via
WAGO Module (output), see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph
Sensor Settings, item 6.

5. Press INS button. Open “Ship settings” page:
– In the field Loading depended settings, specify lead distance in meters for
empty, half-loaded and loaded ship;
– To configure other settings, see above section MFD Configuration,
paragraph MFD Settings, item 3.
6. Switch to “Track Control” page. This page is intended for configuration

Track Control functionality:
– In the Autopilot type group, select the Autopilot PT900;

– In the Max Rudder angle input box, set the necessary value within the range of
25 to 70 degrees;

– In the Rudder limit on straight leg input box, set the necessary value
(from 5º to the value set in the Max Rudder angle input box);
– For the setup of ship limits and other settings is made in the ECDIS System
Configuration utility, see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph
MFD Settings, item 11.
7. Switch to “NMEA Output” page:
– In the field Sensor, select the TCS (the configuration of TCS sensor is
performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”);
– By default, ZDA, GLL and RDX sentences available for transmitting to the
external devices will be transmitted by the MFD. It is advisable to disable
these sentences;
– In the Talker input box, leave default talker;

– In the field Sensor, select the ALARM_STATION (the configuration of

ALARM_STATION sensor is performed on the page “Sensors” of the panel
“Sensors” – see above item 3):
– By default, HBT, ALF, ALC and ARC sentences available for transmitting to
the external devices will be transmitted by the MFD. If necessary, uncheck
the appropriate checkboxes of messages which will not be used in the
operation with the autopilot;
– In the Talker input box, leave default talker;
ATTENTION!
will be inevitable.

Alerts Handling and Recommended TCS Settings
ALERTS HANDLING AND RECOMMENDED TCS SETTINGS

For description of BAM/BNWAS components, see Chapter 1, section Workstation
Installation, paragraph Transas BAM/BNWAS Components.
For standard diagrams of connection, see Annex K.
BNWAS Alerts Transferring

For detailed information on the BNWAS operation, see document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS,
Chapter 6, section Description of BNWAS.
The description of alarms and warnings is presented in the document

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION,
Annex D.
The “Backup navigator” alarm is set by default only for the mandatory Track Control
alarms which are listed in the table below.
ID Alert Name Alert priority Explanation/Hint Backup
information Officer
timeout
150 Early course change Warning/Cat. A Warning, which warns the 30 sec
operator about the turn to
the new leg of the
monitored route 5 minutes
before its start. The ship
continues to proceed in
Track Control mode
151 Actual course change Warning/Cat. A Warning, which warns the 30 sec
operator about the turn to
the new leg of the
monitored route 30
seconds before its start.
The ship continues to
proceed in Track Control
mode
153 Track Control stopped Warning/Cat. B Warns the operator about 30 sec
the turning off of Track
Control mode
1000103 End of TCS track Warning/Cat. B 5 min to the last WP on 30 sec
TCS track
The generation of the “Backup navigator” alarm with the specified timeout can be set
for any other alarms for which the Alarm Transferring is required (see above section
MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 25).
The “Backup navigator” alarm must be configured to activate the Second Stage of
the BNWAS functionality (see below section BAM Configuration, paragraph Alerts
Page).
The following scheme of the Alarm Transferring operation is recommended as the

basic:
• The alarm is triggered off in the MFD;

• If this alarm is not acknowledged during the specified time interval, the “Backup
Navigator” alarm is triggered off;
• After the generation of the “Backup navigator” alarm, the BNWAS External
alarm is simultaneously triggered off. After the timeout set in the BAM Config,
the BNWAS Second Stage audible alarm will be activated.

For the implementation of such Alarm Transferring operation, perform the necessary
settings on the BNWAS station as described below in Chapter 2, section BAM
Configuration, paragraph BNWAS Params Page.
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400

For connection of the autopilot NP5400 to the NS 4000 ECDIS MFD, see drawing
“Autopilot Raytheon NP5400 Interfaces. Connection Diagram” enclosed in Annex J.
The detailed information on the autopilot alerts is presented in the document

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II ,
Annex L, section Autopilot Raytheon NP5400 Alerts List and in the
documentation on the autopilot.
The recommended connections and settings are provided below:
• Autopilot Interface AS unit, WATCH ALARM RESET plug B36, terminals 1 and 2
is connected to the digital output (DO) of the BNWAS WAGO PLC (in parallel to
the Reset Button) for the BNWAS reset function;
• For the “Autopilot Power Failure” alert handling, DI port of workstation can be
connected to the Autopilot Interface AS unit, plug B13, terminals 2 and 3.
• For transferring the all autopilot’s alerts to the BAM via serial interface
(Autopilot Operator unit, plug B9, terminals 1-5), in the System Configuration
utility on the “Sensors” page of the “Sensors” panel, make the following settings:
– Select TCS_AlertRedirectior sensor;
– Set TCP connection and Server mode;
– Change the default IP port 50000 to any free, for example 1500.

For NS 4000 TCS System Configuration settings, see above section Yokogawa
Heading Control System PT900, paragraph NS 4000 ECDIS TCS Settings.
For configuration of the BAM server, see below section BAM Configuration,
paragraph Connections Page.
Autopilot Navis AP4000

For connection of the autopilot AP4000 to the NS 4000 ECDIS MFD, see drawing
“Autopilot Navis AP4000 Interfaces. Connection Diagram” presented in Annex J.

Annex L, section Autopilot Navis AP4000 Alerts List and in the documentation
on the autopilot.
The recommended connection for alerts handling is provided below:
• Control Unit CU-M, module APM3000, plug J17, terminals 34-38 should be
connected to the BAM via DCU serial interface for transferring/acknowledging
alerts by means of ALF/ALC/ACN/HBT NMEA sentences;
• Control Unit CU-M, module APM3000, dry contacts J5 (DOUT1), or
J202 (DOUT2), or J15 (DOUT3) can be connected to the ECDIS workstation for
the BNWAS reset function by means of NMEA EVE sentences
For NS 4000 TCS System Configuration settings, see above section Yokogawa
Heading Control System PT900, paragraph NS 4000 ECDIS TCS Settings.
For configuration of the BAM server, see below section BAM Configuration,
paragraph Connections Page.
Autopilot EMRI SEM200

The drawing “Autopilot EMRI SEM200. AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram” is
presented in Annex J of this document.

Annex L, section Autopilot EMRI SEM200 Alerts List and in the documentation
on the autopilot.

Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK

For connection of the autopilot NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK to the NS 4000 ECDIS
MFD, see drawing “Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 Interfaces.
Connection Diagram” enclosed in Annex J.

Annex L, section Autopilot Sperry NP4000 Alerts List and in the documentation
on the autopilot.
The recommended connections and settings for alerts handling are provided below:
• Autopilot Steering Control Unit, Nav RS422 interface (terminals 37-41) is

connected to the ECDIS Master WS via NMEA interface.
• The transfer and acknowledgment of alarms by means of ALR/ACK NMEA
sentences will be carried out through Nav RS422 interface (terminals 37-41) on
condition that SCU configuration parameter ECHO TO VMS PORT in the
autopilot Service Setup 2 (Service Setup 2 / Serial Interface / Central Alarm
Interface On VMS Port) is set to “YES” (see document NAVIPILOT 4000.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL, APPENDIX A).
• Autopilot Steering Control Unit, Central Alarm RS422 interface (terminals 42-46)
can be connected also to ECDIS Master WS for transferring/acknowledging
alarms by means of ALR/ACK NMEA sentences. The configuration parameter
CENTRAL ALARM PORT in the autopilot Service Setup 2 (Service Setup 2 /
Serial Interface / Central Alarm Interface) should be set to “CAM ONLY”.
The external NMEA alarms should be configured in the BAM Config (see below
section BAM Configuration). For the NS 4000 TCS System Configuration
settings, see above section Yokogawa Heading Control System PT900,
paragraph NS 4000 ECDIS TCS Settings.
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900

For connection of the autopilot PT900 to the NS 4000 ECDIS MFD, see typical
drawing “Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 Overall System Diagram” enclosed
in Annex J. On each specific vessel the drawing can vary depending on the
hardware configuration.

Annex L, section Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 Alerts List and in the
documentation on the autopilot.
The recommended connections and settings for alerts handling are provided below:
• MCU, NAV I/F Unit MPT590, TB42, terminals 9(“-“) – 10(“+”) [output] and 15(“-“)
– 16(“+”) [input] should be connected to the BAM via DCU serial and Ethernet
interfaces for transferring/acknowledging alerts by means of ALF/ALC/ACN/HBT
NMEA sentences.
• For the “Autopilot Power Failure” alert handling, connect DI port of workstation
to MCU, Man Terminal Board, TB11, terminals 9 – 10 or 11 – 12.
• For the BNWAS Reset handling, connect DO port of workstation to MCU, NAV
I/F UNIT MPT590, TB45, terminals 5 and 6.

Procedure of TCS Control Setup Algorithms
PROCEDURE OF TCS CONTROL SETUP ALGORITHMS
Essentials
ATTENTION!
Autopilot has to be adjusted correct as a Heading Control System before any Track
Control settings are applied.
Track Control System with different autopilots use different steering algorithms,
respectively accuracy setting depends on autopilot in use.
• Raytheon NP5400 – accuracy fully controlled by the autopilot on legs and turns.
• Yokogawa PT900 – accuracy fully controlled by the autopilot on legs and turns.
• EMRI SEM 200 – accuracy controlled on legs by the autopilot and several
parameters on ECDIS influent on turn steering.
• Navis AP4000 – accuracy fully controlled by the ECDIS on legs and turns.
On ECDIS Track control algorithm settings are stored in nm.cfg, tcs.cfg,
tcsfull.cfg and tcshalf.cfg files.
To adjust control algorithms for a particular ship, use the following procedure:
1. Adjust “Track control” section in the System Configuration utility as per settings
specified for the given ship type.
2. Open tcs.cfg, tcsfull.cfg and tcshalf.cfg files is stored in
C:\Transas\IBS\win32 directory.
3. Change the settings as required by using the fine adjustment procedure

described below, and save the files.
Fine Adjustment
The fine adjustment procedure is intended for improving accuracy of steering
the ship along the route and should be made, as required, by a system engineer
only, and checked in the process of sea trials. It is necessary to take into account
the fact that the TCS system adjustment is maid for “ship+autopilot” combination
on the whole, so considerable changes in the autopilot settings may require
the re-adjustment of the control system parameters as well.
Fine adjustment consists primarily in the selection of correct temporal ship
characteristics. Such characteristics are set separately for a loaded
(tcsfull.cfg file), half loaded (tcshalf.cfg) and empty (tcs.cfg) ship
condition. tcsNNNN.cfg files are expected to be edited with the aid of NotePad
editor included in Windows OS or TCStune.exe utility located in the same path as
tcs.cfg files.
Raytheon NP5400
Only F-Distance setting influent on Track Mode accuracy.
F-Distance is set in the System Configuration utility on page “Ship Settings” of panel
“INS” (see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 3).
All the rest accuracy steering settings performed on the autopilot side.

Yokogawa PT900
• Only F-Distance setting influent on Track Mode accuracy.
F-Distance is set in the System Configuration utility on page “Ship Settings” of
panel “INS” (see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings,
item 3). All the rest accuracy steering settings performed on the autopilot side.
Note: When moving on a straight leg, the accuracy may be degraded, if the
parameter Rudder limit on straight leg is set significantly less than the
parameter Max Rudder angle (see above section MFD Configuration,
paragraph MFD Settings, item 11).
EMRI SEM200
F-Distance and ROTDriftKoeff parameters influent on starting of the turn.
F-Distance is set in the System Configuration utility on page “Ship Settings” of panel
“INS” (see above section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 3).
All the rest accuracy steering settings performed on the autopilot side.
ROTDriftKoeff set the initial heading change angle, increase results in greater
rudder activity.
Typical Parameters:
Ship Type Fast Ferry Container Ship Tanker
Parameter (value) 0.25* 0.15* 0.15*
Note: *The value of RotDriftKoef depends on F-Distance value and it can be

reduced or increased during sea trails.
Navis AP4000
All accuracy steering settings performed on the ECDIS side.
Passing-of-Turn Settings
1. PivotX. Average shift of the ship’s pivot point forward relative to the ship’s
geometric centre, in metres. If set incorrectly, the ship may tend to go inside
(to correct this, it is necessary to increase PivotX) or outside (reduce the PivotX)
relative to the set turn trajectory. PivotY is normally “0”.
2. TurnRelaxROTChange. Characteristic time of the ship ROT change in

milliseconds. The larger TurnRelaxROTChange corresponds to smaller ship
manoeuvrability relative to the present configuration, and the other way round.
Typical Parameters:
Parameter in milliseconds 5000 4000 8000
3. ROTDriftKoeff Characteristic of the ship ROT change. The approximate value

can be calculated as a constant ship drift angle during the turn/ROT grad/min.
If set incorrectly, the ship always goes inside (to correct this, it is necessary to
increase value) or outside (reduce the value) relative to the set turn trajectory.
Typical Parameters:
Parameter (value) 0.26 0.14 0.115
Note: In the case of excessive value reduction which is not commensurate with
the actual manoeuvring characteristics, there may be the ship track oscillation.

Motion-Along-Straight-Line Settings
1. TimeOnLeg – characteristic time of the ship’s HTS change in milliseconds.
The larger TimeOnLeg corresponds to smaller ship manoeuvrability relative
to the ready configuration, and the other way round.
Typical Parameters:
Parameter in milliseconds 12 000 50 000 30 000
2. XTEs; XTE_Ks – values which determine width of ranges and their corresponding
course correction in the direction which will bring back to the route leg. The change
of values is required in the case of incorrect ship behaviour as it moves along the
straight line under constant environmental conditions (motion along a pronounced
sinusoid or motion at a large distance off the route leg). If the ship moves along
a sinusoid around the route leg, the course correction coefficient should be
decreased within the observed amplitude. If the ship’s mean position is off the route
leg, the koefficient is required to be increased, or a new band should be set. In any
case, it is advisable to leave a band with zero coefficient (deadband). The table
provides initial range value and their corresponding correction coefficients.
XTEs (Width of Range, NM) XTE_Ks (Course correction, deg) Value (example)
0.000 0.0 Deadband
0.01 0.0
0.0101 2.0 2 deg
0.04 2.0
0.04001 4.0 4 deg
0.10 4.0
0.10001 6.0 6 deg
0.5 6.0
0.50001 6.0
0.75 8.0 8 deg
1.00 8.0
Plausibility Check Adjustments

1. MaxHDGJump – threshold value of course change in degrees. As the course
changes by a value larger than the setting within the period of one second,
the Track Control mode will be stopped. On ships with a high rate of turn (Fast
Ferry), it is necessary to set the appropriate value in order to avoid unfounded stops.
Typical Parameters:

Parameter in degrees ~ 15–20 ~ 15–20 ~ 10–15
2. MaxLogJump – threshold value of speed change in knots. As the speed changes by

a value larger than the setting within the period of one second, the Track Control
mode will be stopped. On ships with high acceleration/stopping value(Fast Ferry),
it is necessary to set the appropriate value in order to avoid unfounded stops.
Typical Parameters:
Parameter in knots ~ 15–20 ~ 5–10 ~5

Sample of tcsNNNN.cfg file (Editable strings are highlighted).

[DeltaHTS_XTE]
LinesCount=10
MaxDTW=0.1
XTEs=0.000,0.01,0.0101,0.04,0.04001,0.10,0.10001,0.5,0.50001,
0.75,1.00
XTE_Ks=0.0,0.00,2.0000,2.00,4.00000,4.00,6.00000,6.0,6.00000,
8.00,8.00
FixedXTE=ON
Test=ON
[DriftCalc]
DriftAddPeriod=2000
DriftMaxROT=4
DriftAvgPeriod=10000
UseSmartWay=OFF
Test=ON
IgnoreDriftTest=OFF
UseDeltaDrift=ON
[COG_Evaluator]
PivotX=60
PivotY=0
Test=ON
[TurnManager]
EndOutrun=0.07
EndOfTurnTime=5
StopTurnAsCurve=OFF
DriftPredictDist=0.3
Tau=60000
QTrackXTE=0.15
XTEReduceTime=300000
TurnDeltaHTS_K=1.0
[COGCalc]
MaxROT_Min=0.5
TimeOnLeg=90000
LargeDeltaCOG=99
TurnPercChangeROT=0.000001
TurnRelaxROTChange=10000
NoDriftROT=6.0
DecreaseDriftLock=OFF
ROTDriftKoeff=0.571
[ConstantError]
Use=ON
TotalPeriod=600000
KoefAvgError=0.0
[DriftUpload]
Use=ON
DriftUploadTime=000000
Dgr2XTE=-5
[JumpDetector]
MaxHDGJump=5
MaxLogJump=5

BAM Configuration
BAM CONFIGURATION
General
Description of Central Alert Management (CAM) Functionality
For the data flow diagram, see “BAM/BNWAS. Data Flow Diagram” enclosed in
Annex K.
The purpose of the Bridge Alert Management (BAM) is to enhance the handling,
distribution and presentation of alerts. The BAM harmonizes the priority,
classification, handling, distribution and presentation of alerts, to enable the bridge
team to devote full attention to the safe operation of the ship and to immediately
identify any alert situation requiring action to maintain the safe operation of the ship.
Transas BAM features two BAM/BNWAS Servers (Master and Backup) and several
BAM Viewers connected to the BAM Servers by using a proprietary protocol.
The BAM/BNWAS Server collects alerts from all the external devices (Alert Sources)
and serves for the alert classification and management. The BAM Server
communicates with the external devices via the following interfaces:
• Alarm dry contact signals (implemented on the basis of the WAGO modules);
• Alarm/ack dry contact signals (implemented on the basis of the WAGO
modules);
• ALR, ACK, EVE, ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT sentences (implemented on the basis of
DCU6 which communicates with the BAM Server by using the proprietary
protocol, and with external devices - via RS 422 IEC 61162);
• ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT, EVE sentences (implemented on the basis of
the IEC 61162-450 network protocol, in according with IEC 61162-1 standard);
• ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT, EVE sentences (implemented on the basis of the
proprietary format for communication with the Transas MFD).
The aforementioned protocols serve as the basis for the BAM Server communication
with external BNWAS and VDR by any manufacturers (implemented on the basis of
the WAGO modules).
The BAM and BNWAS internal acoustic and light alerts are implemented on the
basis of the Transas Buzzer and Transas Reset Button connected via the WAGO
modules.
Thus set of the BAM/BNWAS Servers, BAM Viewers and interface converters (DCU,
WAGO) is Central Alert Management (CAM).
For CAM-HMI, BAM Viewers installed on different bridge WS’s are used.
The BAM Viewer which serves for presenting alerts as individual alerts or as
aggregated alerts, supports the bridge team in the immediate identification of any
abnormal situation, of the source and reason for the abnormal situation and supports
the bridge team in its decisions for the necessary actions to be taken.
The BAM Viewer displays information on the current list of alerts, alert history,
BNWAS status information, as well as the BNWAS user setup.
The BAM Servers setup is performed from the BAM/BNWAS Config application.
Description of Redundancy Concept

See “BAM/BNWAS. Transas Integrated Navigation System. Block Diagram;”
enclosed in Annex K.

BAM Configuration
The Redundancy Concept is based on the use of two independent networks, two
BAM/BNWAS Servers, several BAM Viewers and interface converters
(DCU, WAGO).
The BAM/BNWAS Servers are interconnected via the proprietary protocol, whereas
the backup BAM/BNWAS Server is constantly synchronized with the main
BAM/BNWAS Server.
In the case of the Master BAM/BNWAS Server failure, all the BAM Viewers and
interface converters switch automatically to the Backup BAM/BNWAS Server.
Should any of the networks fail, the BAM/BNWAS Servers, all the BAM Viewers and
interface converters use the other network for interaction.
Network Devices of IEC 61162-450 Standard

Note: System configuration cannot be changed during BAM operation!
Ethernet Interfaces and Standards
• Cables and Connectors Cat6: standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568;
• Network Protocol:
– 100BASE-TX: standard IEEE 802.3u;
– 1000BASE-T: standard IEEE 802.3ab;
– IPv4 (RFC791).
• Maximum Data Rate:
– 800 Packets/second;
– 870 Kbytes/second.
Environmental specifications
See also document IEEE STANDARD FOR ETHERNET (second printing: 28 June
2013), section Five, Annex 67A (informative) Environmental characteristics
for Ethernet subscriber access networks.
• General safety:
All equipment meeting this standard shall conform to IEC 60950-1.
• Network safety:
This subclause sets forth a number of recommendations and guidelines related
to safety concerns; the list is neither complete nor does it address all possible
safety issues. The designer is urged to consult the relevant local, national, and
international safety regulations to ensure compliance with the appropriate
requirements.
LAN cable systems described in this subclause are subject to at least four direct
electrical safety hazards during their installation and use. These hazards are as
follows:
a) Direct contact between LAN components and power, lighting, or

communications circuits.
b) Static charge buildup on LAN cables and components.
c) High-energy transients coupled onto the LAN cable system.
d) Voltage potential differences between safety grounds to which various LAN

components are connected.

BAM Configuration
Such electrical safety hazards must be avoided or appropriately protected

against for proper network installation and performance. In addition to provisions
for proper handling of these conditions in an operational system, special
measures must be taken to ensure that the intended safety features are not
negated during installation of a new network or during modification or
maintenance of an existing network.
Isolation requirements are defined in 14.3.1.1 of document IEEE STANDARD

FOR ETHERNET, section 1.
 Installation:
Sound installation practice, as defined by applicable local codes and
regulations, shall be followed in every instance in which such practice is
applicable.
 Grounding:
Any safety grounding path for the MAU shall be provided through the circuit
PG of the AUI connection.
WARNING!
It is assumed that the equipment to which the MAU is attached is properly earthed,
and not left floating nor serviced by a “doubly insulated ac power distribution
system.” The use of floating or insulated equipment and the consequent implications
for safety are beyond the scope of this standard.
 Installation and maintenance guidelines:

During installation and maintenance of the cable plant, care shall be taken
to ensure that uninsulated network cable conductors do not make electrical
contact with unintended conductors or ground.
 Telephony voltages:
The use of building wiring brings with it the possibility of wiring errors that
may connect telephony voltages to 10BASE-T equipment. Other than voice
signals (which are low voltage), the primary voltages that may be
encountered are the “battery” and ringing voltages. Although there is no
universal standard, the following maximums generally apply.
Battery voltage to a telephone line is generally 56 VDC applied to the line
through a balanced 400 Ω source impedance.
Ringing voltage is a composite signal consisting of an ac component and a
dc component. The ac component is up to 175 V peak at 20 Hz to 60 Hz
with a 100 Ω source resistance. The dc component is 56 VDC with a 300 Ω
to 600 Ω source resistance. Large reactive transients can occur at the start
and end of each ring interval.
Although 10BASE-T equipment is not required to survive such wiring
hazards without damage, application of any of the above voltages shall not
result in any safety hazard.
Note: Wiring errors may impose telephony voltages differentially across 10BASE-T
transmitters or receivers. Because the termination resistance likely to be
present across a receiver’s input is of substantially lower impedance than an
off-hook telephone instrument, receivers will generally appear to the
telephone system as off-hook telephones. Therefore, full-ring voltages will
be applied for only short periods. Transmitters that are coupled using
transformers will similarly appear like off-hook telephones (though perhaps a
bit more slowly) due to the low resistance of the transformer coil.

BAM Configuration
• Environment:
 Electromagnetic emission:
The twisted-pair link shall comply with applicable local and national codes
for the limitation of electromagnetic interference.
 Temperature and humidity:
The twisted-pair link is expected to operate over a reasonable range of
environmental conditions related to temperature, humidity, and physical
handling (such as shock and vibration). Specific requirements and values for
these parameters are considered to be beyond the scope of this standard.
It is recommended that manufacturers indicate in the literature associated
with the MAU (Medium Attachment Unit) the operating environmental
conditions to facilitate selection, installation, and maintenance.
It is recommended that manufacturers indicate, in the literature associated
with the components of the twisted-pair link segment, the distance and
operating environmental conditions over which the specifications of 14.4
(see document IEEE STANDARD FOR ETHERNET, section 1) will be met.
Available Transmission Groups
The available Transmission Groups are presented below in the form of the table with
the specified parameters (names, default addresses and ports, allowed talkers):
 <tgroup port="60001" name="MISC" desc="" address="239.192.0.1">
 <talker name="BI" desc="Bilge system" />
 <talker name="DU" desc="Duplex repeater station" />
 <talker name="ER" desc="Engine room monitoring system" />
 <talker name="II" desc="Integrated instrumentation" />
 <talker name="NL" desc="Navigation light controller" />
 <talker name="RC" desc="Propulsion machinery including remote control" />
 <talker name="SG" desc="Steering gear/steering engine" />
 <talker name="SS" desc="Sounder, scanning" />
 <talker name="UP" desc="Microprocessor controller" />
 <talker name="U#" desc="User configured talker identifier" />
 <talker name="VR" desc="Voyage data recorder" />
 <talker name="YX" desc="Transducer" />
 <talker name="SI" desc="Serial to Network Gateway Function" />
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60002" name="TGTD" desc="Target data (AIS), tracked
target messages (Radar)" address="239.192.0.2">
 <talker name="AI" desc="Automatic identification system" />
 <talker name="RA" desc="Radar and/or radar plotting" />
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60003" name="SATD" desc="High update rate, for example
ship heading, attitude data" address="239.192.0.3">
 <talker name="HE" desc="Heading sensors:gyro, north seeking" />
 <talker name="HN" desc="Heading sensors:gyro, non-north seeking" />
 <talker name="TI" desc="Turn rate indicator" />

BAM Configuration
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60004" name="NAVD" desc="Navigational output other than
that of TGTD and SATD groups" address="239.192.0.4">
 <talker name="AG" desc="Heading/track controller (autopilot) general" />
 <talker name="AP" desc="magnetic" />
 <talker name="DF" desc="Direction finder" />
 <talker name="EC" desc="Electronic chart system (ECS)" />
 <talker name="EI" desc="Electronic chart display and information system
(ECDIS)" />
 <talker name="GA" desc="Galileo positioning system" />
 <talker name="GP" desc="Global positioning system (GPS)" />
 <talker name="GL" desc="GLONASS positioning system" />
 <talker name="GN" desc="Global navigation satellite system (GNSS)" />
 <talker name="HC" desc="Heading sensors: compass, magnetic" />
 <talker name="HF" desc="Heading sensors:fluxgate" />
 <talker name="IN" desc="Integrated navigation" />
 <talker name="SD" desc="Sounder, depth" />
 <talker name="SN" desc="Electronic positioning system, other/general" />
 <talker name="VD" desc="Velocity sensors: Doppler, other/general" />
 <talker name="VM" desc="Velocity sensors: speed log, water, magnetic" />
 <talker name="VW" desc="Velocity sensors: speed log, water, mechanical"
/>
 <talker name="WI" desc="Weather instrument" />
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60005" name="VDRD" desc="Data required for the VDR
according to IEC 61996" address="239.192.0.5">
 <talker name="BN" desc="Bridge navigational watch alarm system" />
 <talker name="FD" desc="Fire door controller/monitoring system" />
 <talker name="FE" desc="Fire extinguisher system" />
 <talker name="FR" desc="Fire detection system" />
 <talker name="FS" desc="Fire sprinkler system" />
 <talker name="HD" desc="Hull door controller/monitoring system" />
 <talker name="HS" desc="Hull stress monitoring" />
 <talker name="WD" desc="Watertight door controller/monitoring system" />
 <talker name="WL" desc="Water level detection system" />
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60006" name="RCOM" desc="Radio communication
equipment" address="239.192.0.6">
 <talker name="CD" desc="Communications: digital selective calling (DSC)"
/>
 <talker name="CR" desc="Communications: data receiver" />
 <talker name="CS" desc="Communications: satellite" />

BAM Configuration
 <talker name="CT" desc="Communications: radio-telephone (MF/HF)" />

 <talker name="CV" desc="Communications: radio-telephone (VHF)" />
 <talker name="CX" desc="Communications: scanning receiver" />
 <talker name="EP" desc="Emergency position indicating radio beacon
(EPIRB)" />
 </tgroup>
 <tgroup port="60007" name="TIME" desc="Time transmitting equipment"
address="239.192.0.7">
 <talker name="ZA" desc="Timekeeper, time/date: atomic clock" />
 <talker name="ZC" desc="Timekeeper, time/date: chronometer" />
 <talker name="ZQ" desc="Timekeeper, time/date: quartz" />
 <talker name="ZV" desc="Timekeeper, time/date: radio update" />
</tgroup>
Startup of “BAM Config”

For software installation, see above section MFD Software Installation.
1. Start the BAM server by running bam_server_run.exe file in the folder

C:\Transas\IBS\nc5000\bin.
Note: Autorun should be activated for BAM server (see below section Autorun
Configuration).
Note: The BAM server should be running at least on two workstations

(for example, ECDIS Master and ECDIS Backup).
2. Run the “BAM Config” by selecting the appropriate item

in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\BAM CONFIG):

BAM Configuration
The following screen will appear:
Connections Page
1. To set the parameters of connections with physically connected devices, switch
to “Connections” page by pressing the appropriate tab at the bottom of the
screen.
2. To add the connection with equipment of 450 standard, click on the +450 button
and enter the following parameters.
– In the Connection name input box, enter the connection’s name that will be
displayed in the columns of Alerts page (see below paragraph Alerts Page);

BAM Configuration
– In the Transmission group drop-down list, from drop-down list select the
multicast group for reception and transmission messages depending on the
device;
– In the right third of the screen, the following connection statuses are
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
Not active – connection is established, but work is under way on another
network.
– If necessary to delete the connection, select it and press Remove button.
3. To add the connection with MFD workstation via 450 standard connection type,
click on the +Device button at the left bottom corner of the screen and enter the
following parameters in the Parameters group settings:
– In the Device name input box, enter the name of WS application (ECDIS, in our
case) that will be displayed in the column of Alerts page (see below paragraph
Alerts Page);
– From the Connection type drop-down list, select 450 connection;

– From the transmission group drop-down list, select the necessary group which
has been created by means of adding a connection of 450 standard
(see above item 2);
– In the SFI input box, specify the appropriate Source Function Identification for
application (see below section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD
Settings, item 23);
– Check the No connection alert checkbox and make the following settings:
From the Priority drop-down list, select a type of alert, which will be
triggered off in case of disconnection from the MFD workstation;
In the Title input box, enter a title of “No connection” alert, which will be
displayed in the column Title of the Alerts page in the BAM Viewer
application.

BAM Configuration
– In the Communication Protocol group settings, in the Input field, select the
necessary type of NMEA messages ALF/ACN or ALR/ACK (IEC61162-1 Ed.4.0) or
Hoglund to handle these messages from the MFD;
– Check the Ignore checksum checkbox, if required;
– Check the HBT and/or EVE checkbox(-es) to handle these messages from the
MFD;
– In the Output field, check the HBT BAM and/or HBT BNWAS and/or ALC/ALF
and/or BNALR checkbox(-es) to transmit these messages to the MFD;
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
network.
– Make the above described settings for all applications of all workstations
(ECDIS, RADAR, TCS) in the network.
4. To add the TCP connection with WS, press on the +Device button:
– In the Device name input box, enter the name of connection (EVE, in our case
– to receive EVE sentences from WS) that will be displayed in the column of
Alerts page (see below paragraph Alerts Page);
– In the Connection type drop-down list, leave default setting TCP;
– In the Communication Protocol Type field, leave default NMEA setting;
– In the First Network group settings, in the Address input box, enter the IP
address of connected workstation;
– In the Port input box, enter the required port number of connection.

BAM Configuration
Note: For transferring of EVE sentence to the BAM, the NMEAOUT sensor should
be selected and configured on TCP connection in the System Configuration
utility on the “Sensors” page of the “Sensors” panel.
The checkbox Parity {Server mode} must be checked and the required
appropriate port number should be specified in the column Bits {IP port} (see
above section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings,
items 1, 2). The connection’s port should be the same as set in the BAM
Config on the page “Connections.
Note: The EVE sentence checkbox must be checked on the “NMEA Output” page
of the “INS” panel (see above MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD
Settings, item 7).
– To set the IP address and port number for the second network, check the
Second Network checkbox;
– In the Address input box, enter the workstation’s IP address for the second
network;
– In the Port input box, enter the required port number for the second network;
triggered off in case of disconnection from the MFD workstation;
application.
Hoglund to handle these messages from the MFD;
– Check the EVE checkbox to handle the message from the MFD;
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
network.

BAM Configuration
5. To add the connection with Modbus PLC device, click on the +Device button.
Enter the following parameters in the Parameters group settings:
– In the Device name input box, enter the Modbus device name that will be
displayed in the columns of Alerts page (see below paragraph Alerts Page);
– In the Connection type drop-down list, leave default setting TCP;
– In the Communication Protocol Type field, select the Modbus(WAGO) setting;
– In the Ethernet settings group, in the First Network field, in the Address input
box, enter the IP address of Modbus device;
– In the Port input box, enter the required port number of connection;
– If necessary to set the IP address and port number for the second network,
check the Second Network checkbox;
– In the Address input box, enter the device’s IP address for the second
network;
From the Priority drop-down list, select a type of alert which will be
triggered off in case of disconnection from the Modbus device;
application.
– In the Offset for WAGO field, press the appropriate radio-button:
WAGO – WAGO for BAM alerts;
BNWAS WAGO – WAGO for BNWAS alerts (it is used a special firmware
to work from battery for 6 hours);
Manual – to set the register manually: if the WAGO/Modbus has several
modules at the beginning which are not used for the alarm, it would be
reasonable to use the Manual setting. In this setting, it is necessary to
specify the number of dry contacts which go from the first contact to the
alarm, minus one.

BAM Configuration
Then in the alerts table, the number of this WAGO's first contact will be
equal to one. The setting is used for the WAGO which have many
unused modules at the beginning, and it is more convenient to set an
offset for the numbering to start from the first used module.
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
network.
– Use the Remove button for deletion of connection, if necessary.
6. To add the connection with DCU, click on the +DCU button and set the following
parameters in the Parameters group settings.
– In the DCU name input box, enter the name that will be displayed in the column
of Alerts page (see below paragraph Alerts Page);
– In the DCU0_1 input boxes, enter the IP addresses of the DCU Master for both
networks;
– In the DCU0_2 input boxes, enter the IP addresses of the DCU Backup for both
networks;
triggered off in case of disconnection from the DCU;
application.

BAM Configuration
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
network.
– If necessary to delete connection, select it and press Remove button.
Select the MFD connection and make the settings for DCU connection:
– From the Connection type drop-down list, select the DCU setting;
– In the DCU settings, from drop-down list select the DCU connected to this
device;
– From the Channel drop-down list, select the appropriate DCU port;
– Check the Serial port checkbox and set the necessary port’s parameters;
triggered off in case of disconnection from the DCU port;
application.
Hoglund to handle these messages from the DCU port;
DCU port;
and/or BNALR checkbox(-es) to transmit these messages to the DCU port;

BAM Configuration
7. To add the connection with UDP device, click on the +Device button, and set the
following parameters in the Parameters group settings.
– In the Device name input box, enter the device’s name that will be displayed in
the column of Alerts page (see below paragraph Alerts Page);
– From the Connection type drop-down list, select the UDP setting;
– In the Ethernet Settings group settings, in the First Network field, in the Address
input box, enter the IP address of connected UDP device;
– In the Port input box, enter the required port number of connection;
– To set the IP address and port number for the second network, check the
Second Network checkbox;
– In the Address input box, enter the workstation’s IP address for the second
network;
– In the Server port input box, enter the required port number of BAM server for
UDP-connection;
– Check the No data alert checkbox and make the following settings:
triggered off in case of disconnection from the UDP device;
application.
Hoglund to handle these messages from the device;
device;
and/or BNALR checkbox(-es) to transmit these messages to the device;

BAM Configuration
displayed:
Active;
No connection;
Not configured;
network.
8. To load the configuration of connection from the appropriate file, press

Load XML button in the top of the screen.
Select the appropriate .xml file and press “Open” button.
9. To save the configuration of connection to .xml file, press Save XML button.
Type file’s name and press “Save” button.

BAM Configuration
10. To load the table of alerts specified in the System Configuration utility on the
“Alerts Settings” page of the “INS” panel (see above section MFD
Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 25), press Load Alerts from 4000
button:
Open the folder C:\Transas\IBS\win32, select the appropriate .xml file and press
“Open” button.
To save or discard the current configuration, press the appropriate button in the
opened window (This dialog box appears if any configuration has been loaded).
11. To obtain the configuration from the BAM server, press Get From Server button.
To save or discard current configuration, press the appropriate button in the

opened window (This dialog box appears if any configuration has been loaded).
12. To send the configuration to the BAM server, press Send To Server button.

BAM Configuration
Alerts Page
1. Switch to “Alerts” page by pressing the appropriate tab at the bottom of the
screen.
2. To add the alert, press the Add Alert button in the top left corner of the screen,
and in the appeared line execute the following settings:
– In the Source column, double click, and enter the name of alert’s source that
will be displayed in the BAM Viewer application on the page Alerts in the
column Source (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 6, section Description of BAM Viewer
Application Interface, paragraph Alerts Page);
– In the Title column, double click, and specify the name of alert;
– In the Id column, double click, and specify Id number of alert by means
of direct input number or using the buttons in the right part of a cell:
Note: For the alert’s Id, see documentation on the appropriate device.
The MFD alert should be specified in the System Configuration utility on the
page “Alerts Output Settings” of the “Sensors” panel (see above section
MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensor Settings, item 6).
The ALARM_STATION sensor should be configured on the page “Sensors”
of the “Sensor” panel. In the column Port, the appropriate port P450_x
should be selected. The IP address and port for the connection should be
the same as set as in the BAM Config on the page “Connections” (see
paragraph Connections Page, item 2).
Note: For autopilots alerts lists, see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

(V.3.00.340). INSTALLATION GUIDE PART II, Annex L.

BAM Configuration
– In the Text column, double click, and enter the detailed description of alert
which will be displayed at the bottom part of the screen in the BAM Viewer
application for chosen alert. This description is not present in the table of
alerts (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340).
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 6, section Description of BAM Viewer
Application Interface, paragraph Alerts Page);
– In the Aggregation column, double click, and specify the group of alerts;
– In the Priority column, double click, and from drop-down list, select type of
alert:
– For the emergency alert, in the Emergency Icon column, double click, and from
drop-down list, select the appropriate icon, if necessary:
– In the Cat. column, double click, and from drop-down list, select the category
of NMEA alarm: A or B or C (in compliance with the criteria for classification
and categories of alerts defined in MSC.302 (87) and the alerts for Radar/AIS
listed in IEC 61924-2:2012 Annex C);
– In the Where to Acknowledge column, double click, and enter the location where
the alert will be acknowledged, if the alert cannot be acknowledged from the
BAM Viewer (only for alerts of category A and C);
– In the Repeat As column, double click, and from drop-down list, select the
Alarm only for warning type of alert (when the Warning was selected in the
Class column) to repeat the alert as alarm;
– In the Normal After Rectification column, check the checkbox for automatic
acknowledgement of alert when condition of its occurrence is disappeared;
– In the Normal After Acknowledge column, check the checkbox for disappearance
of alert after acknowledgment.
– In the BNWAS use column, double click, and from drop-down list select
the By timeout item, if it is necessary to initiate the BNWAS second stage
through interval which set on the “BNWAS Params” page, in the Second Stage
Alarm Time input box.
If it necessary to initiate the BNWAS second stage immediately after
triggering off alert, select Immediately item (see document
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS,
Chapter 6, section Description of BNWAS):

BAM Configuration
– In the Can be Aggregated column, check the checkbox to sort alerts by groups
specified in the Aggregation column (see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS,Chapter 6, section
Description of BAM Viewer Application Interface, paragraphs BAM
Viewer Control Panel and Alerts Page);
– In the Send to VDR column, check the checkbox to transfer the alert to VDR.
3. Further there are columns of connections which have been specified on page
“Connections” (see above paragraph Connections Page):
– In the columns of connections, check the checkboxes for use this connections
for receiving and sending data;
– In the State Contact In column, double click, and specify the WAGO module
contact for receiving of information on the state of alert (active/rectified);
– In the Contact Normal State column, double click, and from drop-down list,
select status of WAGO module contact in normal state: NO (Normal Open:
contact is open in case of absence of alert or its acknowledgement), or NC
(Normal Close: contact is close in case of absence of alert or its
acknowledgement), or OC (Pulse mode: Normally Close – Open – Close.
By default, duration of closure: 1 second; for Emergency button duration of
closure: 2 seconds), or CO (Pulse mode: Normally Open – Close – Open):
– In the Acknowledge Contact In column, double click, and specify the WAGO
module contact for receiving of information on acknowledgement of alert
(acknowledged/unacknowledged);
– In the Contact Normal State column, double click and from drop-down list, select
status of contact in normal state: NO, or NC, or OC, or CO;
– In the Acknowledge Contact Out column, double click, and specify the WAGO
module contact for sending to sensor the information on acknowledgement of
alert by user (acknowledge);
– In the Contact Normal State column, double click, and from drop-down list,
select status of contact in normal state: NO, or NC, or OC, or CO.
4. The Chosen column is used to change the settings for multiple alerts:
– Select the necessary alerts in this column by checking the checkboxes, and
use the appropriate tools settings in the top of the screen to set the required
parameters (Source, Aggregation, Priority, Category, Repeat As, Responsibility,
Rectification, Can Be Aggregated, BNWAS use);

BAM Configuration
– To create source and aggregation group, enter the name of

source/aggregation in the appropriate input box and press the corresponding
Create button;
– To remove source and aggregation group, select source / aggregation from
the appropriate drop-down list and press the corresponding Delete button;
– To remove alerts selected in the Chosen column, use Remove Selected button.
5. Use the appropriate button with name of column to sort of alerts by Source, Id,
Title, Text and etc.
6. To use the buttons at the top of the screen (Load XML, Load Alerts from 4000,
Save XML, Get From Server and Send To Server), see above paragraph
Connections Page, items 8-12.
7. Make the all above described adjustments for necessary alerts.
8. Send the configuration to the BAM server according with item 12 of paragraph
Connections Page above.
Contacts Page
1. Switch to “Contacts” page by pressing the appropriate tab at the bottom of the
screen.
2. If necessary, change a time interval in the following input boxes:

– Sound Duration - to set a time interval of the audible signal;
– Pause Duration - to set a time interval of the pause between the audible
signals;
– After Sound Duration - to set a time interval of the pause between the audible
signals of the different types;
– In the Notify always on group settings, check the Alarm and/or Warning
checkbox (-es) to get notifications on every alarm and/or warning.

BAM Configuration
3. In the Modbus Connections window, select the name of connection (see above
4. In the Buzzer Contacts group settings, make the following settings:
– In the Contact # column, double click, and specify the WAGO module contact
for transferring the specified alert to the Alarm Buzzer (see above paragraph
Alerts Page, item 3);
– In the Normal State column, double click, and from drop-down list, select status
of contact in normal state: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close).
NO: closure of contact causes to alarm signal;
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of buzzer contact;
– To remove contact, select it and press the Remove Contact button;
– Specify the all necessary buzzer contacts.
5. In the Output Silence Contacts group settings, make the following:
by closing/unclosing of which the specified outer source alarm will be silenced
from the BAM server;
– In the Normal State column, double click, and from drop-down list, select the
status of contact in normal state: OC (Pulse mode: Normally Close – Open –
Close, or CO (Pulse mode: Normally Open – Close – Open).
CO: contact closes for one second on silence command from the BAM server;
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of Output Silence
contact;
– Specify the all necessary Output Silence contacts;
– To remove contact, select it and press the Remove Contact button.
6. In the Input Silence Contacts group settings, make the following:
for receiving from the outer source the information on pressed “Silence”
button;
of contact in normal state: OC, or CO (typical setting CO: pressing on
“Silence” button causes to silence command);
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of Input Silence
contact;
– Specify the all necessary Input Silence contacts;
– To remove contact, select it and press the Remove Contact button.
7. To use the buttons at the top of the screen (Load XML, Load Alerts from 4000, Save
XML, Get From Server and Send To Server), see above paragraph Connections
Page, items 8-12.

BAM Configuration
BNWAS Params Page

For the BNWAS description, see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
(V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, Chapter 6, section Description of
BNWAS, paragraph BNWAS Operation Algorithm.
1. Switch to “BNWAS Params” page by pressing the appropriate tab at the bottom
of the screen.
2. If necessary, change a time interval in the following input boxes:

– Emergency/Reset Duration – to set a time interval of pressing of the button for
Emergency call (i.e. second stage); by default, 2 seconds.
It means, to turn on the Emergency call, press and hold the hardware “Reset
Button” for more than 2 sec.;
– Light On Duration input box – to set a time interval of flashing light signal (the
light blinks when the dormant period is over);
– Light Off Duration – to set a time interval of the pause between the flashing light
signals;
– Dormant Period – to set a time interval during which there is no officer on watch
(OOW) action on the system (from 3 to 12 minutes);
– Second Stage Alarm Time –set the delay (by default, 30 sec) between the
internal MFD alarm generation and its relay for the simultaneous triggering off
of the second stage of the BNWAS alarms
(see document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). ADDITIONAL
FUNCTIONS, Chapter 6, section Description of BNWAS, paragraph
BNWAS Operation Algorithm);
Note: For the transfer to the second stage remote audible alarm, the checkbox
Backup Officer for the “Backup navigator” alert (Pub Id 9999999) must be
checked on the “Alerts Settings” page of the “INS” panel in the System
Configuration utility. Also the “Backup navigator” alert should be specified on
the “Alerts” page.

BAM Configuration
– Second Stage Duration – to set the delay between the second and third stage
alarms within 90 –180 sec;.
3. In the Modbus Connections field, select the name of connection (see above
4. In the Emergency/Reset In Contacts group settings, make settings connected with

the BNWAS alarms Reset and Emergency call:
intended for receiving BNWAS alarms Reset or Emergency call;
of contact in normal state: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close), or OC
(Pulse mode: Normally Close – Open – Close, or CO (Pulse mode: Normally
Open – Close – Open);
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of Emergency/Reset
In contact;
– In the Emergency or Reset column for specified contact, check the appropriate
checkbox for Emergency call or Reset, depending on for what this contact is
to be used.
If CO or OC is selected, in the Normal State column, it is possible to select the
Emergency and Reset checkboxes. Thus, the same contact can be used for
Emergency call and Reset BNWAS alarms.
Use the Reset checkbox for Motion sensor setting and for reset the dormant
period from the external source;
– Specify the all necessary Emergency/Reset In contacts;
– To remove contact, select it and press the Remove button.
5. In the Light Button Out Contacts group settings, make settings for the “Reset”
buttons backlighting:
– Double click in the Contact # column, and specify the WAGO module contact
intended for backlighting the “Reset” button;
– In the Normal State column, double click, and from drop-down list, specify the
backlighting turn-on mode: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close);
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of Light Button Out
contact;
– Specify the all necessary Light Button Out contacts;
6. In the First Stage Out Contacts, make settings for the transfer to the first stage
remote audible alarm:
– In the Contact # column, double click, and specify the WAGO module contact,
intended for triggering off the alarm on the bridge;
– In the Normal State column, double click and from drop-down list, specify the
alarm transferring mode: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close), or
OC (Pulse mode: Normally Close – Open – Close, or CO (Pulse mode:
Normally Open – Close – Open);
– In the Name column, double click and specify the name of First Stage Out
contact;
– Specify the all necessary First Stage Out contacts;

BAM Configuration
7. In the Second Stage Out Contacts group settings, make settings for the transfer to
the second stage remote audible alarm:
– In the Contact # column, double click and specify the WAGO module contact,
intended for transferring the alarm to the external location;
alarm transferring mode: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close), or OC
– In the Name column, double click, and specify all the possible external
locations which the Back-up officer alarm will be relayed to;
– Specify the all necessary Second Stage Out contacts;
8. In the Third Stage Out Contacts group settings, make settings for the transfer to the
third stage remote audible alarm:
– In the Contact # column, double click and specify the WAGO module contact,
intended for transferring the alarm to the external location;
alarm transferring mode: NO (Normal Open), or NC (Normal Close), or OC
– In the Name column, double click, and specify all the possible external
locations which the Back-up officer alarm will be relayed to;
– Specify the all necessary Third Stage Out contacts;
9. If there are two Bridge (Fore and Aft), uncheck the Single Bridge checkbox and in
the appeared field, specify the location of the Emergency/Reset buttons and the
sources of alerts by checking the appropriate checkboxes.

BAM Configuration
10. To use the buttons at the top of the screen (Load XML, Save XML,
Load Alerts from 4000, Get From Server and Send To Server), see above paragraph
Settings Page
1. Switch to the “Settings” page by pressing the appropriate tab at the bottom of
the screen.
2. The BAM Servers window, located in the left part of the “Settings” page, allows to
set all servers in the system. Two networks are required for redundancy.
There is also a display of the server operating status.

– To delete server, select it and press the “Remove Server” button:
– For testing of connection to specified BAM servers, use the “Check

servers” button:
3. In the BAM Server group settings, specify the parameters in the following input
boxes:
– Address – IP address of the BAM Server Master to send to it the configuration.

The settings will be sent to other servers automatically;
– Port – port of connection.
4. In the BAM Settings group, it is possible to make the following settings:
– Escalation Time – to set a time interval for escalation of warning type of alerts
(the column Repeat As on the Alerts page, see above paragraph Alerts Page);

BAM Configuration
– Silence Time – to set a time interval for silence of alert (category A and C)
which cannot be acknowledged from the BAM Viewer (see above paragraph
Alerts Page);
– Limit Alert’s Title Length – to set limit up to 16 characters in the Title column on
the Alerts page (see above paragraph Alerts Page);
– Registered Alerts Only – to receive alerts specified on the Alerts page only.
5. In the BAM Server SFI group settings, in the BAM SFI for 450 input box, specify the
BAM server unique system function ID (SFI) for communication with network
devices of 61162-450 standard: BM0000, by default.
In the BNWAS SFI for 450 input box, specify the BNWAS unique system function
ID (SFI) for communication with network devices of 61162-450 standard:
BN0000, by default.
6. In the Malfunction group settings, check the Power Failure checkbox and make the
following settings for triggering off the power failure alert in the BAM Viewer:
– Connection – to select the Modbus device intended for receiving alert signal
from the power unit;
– Contact – to specify the contact on the Modbus device intended for receiving
alert signal from the power unit;
– Normal State – to select contact’s normal state (N/C – normal closed or N/O –
normal opened);
– Alert Id – to specify the power failure alert identifier.
7. In the Sensor Connection Lost field, specify the common Alert Id of every “No data”
or “No connection” alert (see above paragraph Connections Page).
8. In the BAM Server is not available group settings, specify the following:
– Alert Id – to specify the BAM server “No connection” alert identifier;

– From the Priority drop-down list, select a type of alert, which will be triggered
off in case of disconnection from the BAM server;
– In the Title input box, enter a title of “No connection” alert, which will be
displayed in the column Title of the Alerts page in the BAM Viewer application.
9. In the Palettes group settings, select the required palette.
10. In the Themes group settings, select the required skin.
11. In the Languages drop-down list, select the appropriate language English or
Russian.
12. In the right top window of the screen, it is displayed the information about
Product name, BAM and BNWAS version.
13. To use the buttons at the top of the screen (Load XML, Save XML,
Load Alerts from 4000, Get From Server and Send To Server), see above paragraph
15. To exit the “BAM Config”, press Exit button in the Exit application field.

BAM Configuration
BAM Viewer Servers Configuration

1. Run the “BAM Viewer” application by selecting the appropriate item in the
START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\\BAM VIEWER):
2. Open “Settings” page by pressing the appropriate tab.
3. Press the Servers Config button in the left top corner of the page.

BAM Configuration
4. In the open ”Password required” window, enter the password and press “OK”
button.
The “BAM Servers” window will appear:

– To delete server, select it and press the “Remove Server”
button:
– For testing of connection to specified BAM servers, use the
“Check servers” button:
5. From This BAMViewer on bridge drop-down list, select a location of workstation

where BAM server is installed:
Once you have completed settings, press ”OK” button.

BAM Configuration
6. In the Enabled bridge field, use the Fore and After buttons to select the appropriate
workstation with BAM server depending on its location:
After pressing the Fore and After buttons, it is necessary to enter the password and
press “OK” button.

Autorun Configuration
AUTORUN CONFIGURATION
ATTENTION!
This procedure is performed for each WS.
Run the Autorun Configuration utility by selecting the appropriate item in

the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\AUTORUN CONFIGURATION):
After the program loading, the “AutoRun” window will be displayed.

Activation of Transas Integrator
Check the checkboxes of the names of the tasks which will be run automatically
during the WS start.
In the General Settings group, check the Enable Autorun checkbox.
In the Initial delay text box enter the delay time after the end of the Windows OS
loading and before the first task start (at least 20 sec is advisable).
Press the “OK” button.
ACTIVATION OF TRANSAS INTEGRATOR
ATTENTION!
This procedure is performed for each WS.
Activate the Transas Integrator by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\ACTIVATE INTEGRATOR):

Commissioning Table Creation and System Configuration Back Up
Upon computer restart, the Transas Integrator window will be opened, and default
task will be run:
Run all the tasks on the all the WS’s and check their correct operation.
COMMISSIONING TABLE CREATION AND SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION BACK UP
Restart all the WS’s.
Press button for run the System Configuration utility.

Commissioning Table Creation

Press Commissioning Table icon:
In Filename input field specify the path to Commissioning Table file (by default,
C:\Transas\IBS). Press “Save” button.
When the Commissioning Table is created, this should be done at each WS.
Also, after each change of configuration (e.g., if a new GPS is connected),
the Commissioning Table should be made anew at each WS.
MFD Configuration Back Up
Press Backup button in the left bottom corner of the window.

Press “Yes” button.
Specify the path where backup the file will be stored, and press “OK” button.
Note: The Navi-Conning configuration in the new product version is saved

simultaneously with the MFD configuration backup.

MFD Registry
Press button for run the First Aid utility.
Switch to “Registry” page:
Fill in all the lines and press the Make Registry button and wait for collecting system
information:

In the open window, press “Copy to…” button and select the USB memory stick to
save the system information files:
To register MFD system, send the system information files to Transas support
service.
See also document MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (V.3.00.340). UTILITIES,

Chapter 6.

Software Upgrade
SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Upgrade All Product MFD

Deactivate the Transas Integrator on each WS. To do this, press <Ctrl>+<Alt>+
<Shift>+<F8> keys.
Enter password and press “OK” button: PC will be restarted.

Run to START\CONTROL PANEL. Click “Add or Remove Programs” icon:
Select “Multifunctional Display”:
Press “Remove” button.

Software Upgrade

After program deinstallation, restart PC.
Install new version of MFD (see above section MFD Software Installation).
Run the First Aid utility by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\FIRST AID):
On “Product” page in Name drop-down list, press button and select MFD product
(if necessary).
Press Navigation program would not start or has hung up at the start button.

Software Upgrade
Press Restore button.
Specify the path to back up file and press “Open”.

Software Upgrade
The configuration will be restored. Press “OK” button and close the First Aid utility.
Activate the Transas Integrator (see section Activation of Transas Integrator).
Upgrade of Most Recent MFD Versions

Starting from NS 4000 MFD (v. 2.00.010) and later, the upgrade is made as follows.
Copy the installation folder from the CD to the HDD as describes in section MFD
Software Installation.
On each workstation, perform the following procedure.

Run the Setup.exe file in the C:\MFD folder:
Press the “Next>” button.

Software Upgrade
Check “Transfer the old configuration data” checkbox, and press “Next>” button (this
checkbox must be checked only at the first workstation which is being upgraded).
Press the “Custom” button.

Software Upgrade
Select components to be installed by the Setup Wizard (on each WS as

per the licensed MFD configuration). To prohibit installation of the selected
component, select the “This feature will not be available” option.
Select the “Transas Integrator” component and set the “This feature will be installed
on local hard drive” option.
Keep the “Integrator Activation” feature unavailable, it will be activated later:
Press the “Next >” button.

Software Upgrade
Press the “Install” button.
The program will perform the product installation.

Press the “Yes” button and restart the PC:
After the PC restart, wait for a minute to complete the product installation:

Software Upgrade
In the window which will open up, press the “Finish” button:
Press the “Yes” button and restart the PC:
After the PC restart, the “Configuration update wizard” window will open up:
At this step, on the WS where configuration was not saved, it is necessary to

continue the procedure. On the WS where the configuration was saved (the Transfer
the old configuration data checkbox was checked (see above)), it is necessary to wait
until the wizard completes its operation on the other WS and then to continue the
procedure.
Press the “Next >” button.

Software Upgrade
Press the “Finish” button:
After the end of the wizard operation, a source configuration will be created on all
the WS’s.

Software Upgrade
Upgrade Navi-Conning 4000

To start the Data Tool utility, press the button.
After the utility is run, the screen displays a control window. In Feature list select
Conning file group.
In External group press call button to the right of the window and specify
the path to the folder with new configuration file CONNING.dat.
Press Copy button in the utility toolbar.

Software Upgrade
To replace old file CONNING.dat, press “OK” button.
To exit from the Data Tool utility, press “Yes” button.
Restart Navi-Conning.

Radar Diagnostics and Typical Faults
RADAR DIAGNOSTICS AND TYPICAL FAULTS
Radar Diagnostics
The regular diagnostics is performed for the timely troubleshooting. The equipment
should be installed as per the wiring diagram.
It is necessary to set up the software: select the correct radar model,
set the RIB6/RIB6B parameters and perform the RIB6/RIB6B input calibration
procedure. The radar should be adjusted as per the manual.
Diagnostics should be performed regularly: every 1-2 days.
After the application start, check the magnetron operation time. The magnetron service
life should not be exceeded. The service life is determined by the radar manufacturer.
Press the mode button in the top right corner of the Display Panel
and select TX to switch the scanner to the transmission mode.
If possible, check that the radar antenna is rotating.
Check that there is radar scan on the radar screen.

Set the 24 NM range scale by selecting from the RNG drop-down list
Having increased the gain to the maximum, check the availability of
noises at a range of more than 6 miles.
If there is not scan and alarms appear, check the RIB6/RIB6B settings and quality
of connections.
Set the initial gain level and check that targets are displayed at a distance of more
than 6 miles.
Check the TUNE indicator level, and if the level is low, adjust the radar as per the set
procedure.
Press AUTO button.

Switch the scales and the radar pulse lengths. Check that the mode is not turned
off spontaneously. If it is, adjust the radar as per the set procedure.
On “Radar-Scanner” page press Diagnostics button.
Check the radar diagnostic parameters.

Typical Troubleshooting
Fault Cause and cure
After the Navi-Radar start, the Network scanner or RIB6/RIB6B (if available) not energised –
screen displays “Network radar check the unit power supply
disconnected”
No network connection – check connection of RJ-45 cables.
Restart the radar processor (if available)
Faulty scanner unit or power supply/interface unit ASU41000 if
available – the units should be repaired
Check the radar processor (if available) IP address
Faulty radar processor (if available) – the unit should be replaced
The radar warm-up process is No data exchange in the radar control channel. Check connection
not shown, no Stand By mode of network scanner or connection of radar processor (if available)
indication and radar serial port
Faulty radar processor (if available) – the unit should be repaired
Impossible to turn on the radar Faulty scanner unit or power supply/interface unit ASU41000 if
transmit mode – after a press on available – the units should be repaired
the TX button the Stand By status
Faulty radar processor (if available) – the unit should be repaired
sets in
After the transmit mode has been Check visually the radar antenna rotation. If the antenna is not
turned on, the “Radar Video rotating, check the safety switch.
failed” message appears
The Heading Failure alarm is Check connection of the scanner
generated
If RIB6/RIB6B is available, open “RIB6” page of the “Settings”
panel. Keep varying the threshold voltage value until the antenna
revolution period is correctly determined. The indicator should be
green.
If the indicator remains red, use the oscillograph to check if there
are pulses on the RIB6/RIB6B connector. The absence of pulses
means the damaged cable or faulty radar. The availability of
pulses means faulty RIB6/RIB6B
The Bearing Failure alarm Check connection of the scanner

is generated
panel. Keep varying the threshold voltage value until the antenna
rate of revolutions is determined correctly. The Hp and Bp
indicators should be green.
are pulses on the RIB6/RIB6B connector. The absence of pulses
means the damaged cable or faulty radar. The availability of
pulses means faulty RIB6/RIB6B
The Trigger Failure alarm Check connection of the scanner

is generated
If RIB6/RIB6B is available, check connection of the Trigger high
frequency connector
panel. Keep varying the threshold voltage value until the radar
sweep period is determined correctly. The indicator should be
green.
are pulses on the RIB6/RIB6B connector (use the T-connector).
The absence of pulses means the damaged cable or faulty radar.
The availability of pulses means faulty RIB6/RIB6B
The Radar Low video alarm is Check connection of the scanner
generated
If RIB6/RIB6B is available, check connection of the Video high
frequency connector

Fault Cause and cure

Set the maximum radar gain by using the GAIN control. Open
“RIB6” page of the “Settings” panel. Turn on the display of an
oscillogram. Keep varying the amplification level, signal polarity
and offset until the signal appears.
are pulses on the RIB6/RIB6B connector (use the T-connector).
The absence of pulses means the damaged cable or faulty radar.
The availability of pulses means faulty RIB6/RIB6B
With the GAIN control at the Check the radar adjustment as per the set procedure and check
maximum, some noises are the TUNE LEVEL indicator in the top right corner of the Display
discernable on the screen whereas Panel level and the radar diagnostic parameters. Check the
the targets and coasts are magnetron operation time. Adjust the radar. If the detection range
discernable at short distances only has not increased, the radar should be repaired
(not more than 5 miles)
There is a large number of If RIB6/RIB6B is available, open “RIB6” page of the “Settings”
reflections on the radar screen, panel. Turn on the display of an oscillogram. By varying the
the use of the suppression amplification level, reduce the signal amplitude down to an
controls has failed to provide a acceptable level: 85% of the maximum
high quality picture

CHAPTER 3
Technical Specification

General
GENERAL
The MFD (v.3.00.340) equipment fully complies with the IEC 62388 standard.
According to this standard, ship radars are classified for fitting out ships of three
categories as per the table below:
Table 81. Performance requirements for categories of ship/craft for SOLAS V
Category of ship/craft
CAT 3 CAT 2 CAT 1
Size of ship/craft <500 gt 500 gt to <10 000 gt All ships/craft ≥10 000
and HSC<10 000 gt gt
Minimum operational 180 mm 250 mm 320 mm
display area diameter
Minimum display 195 195 mm 270 270 mm 340 340 mm
area
Auto acquisition N/A N/A Yes
of targets
Minimum acquired 20 30 40
radar target capacity
Minimum activated 20 30 40
AIS target capacity
Minimum sleeping 100 150 200
AIS target capacity
Trial manoeuvre N/A N/A Yes
Depending on the configuration, the MFD (v.3.00.340) equipment can be installed

on the following ship categories:
• If with the 23” and 26” monitors (PPI diameter of 340 mm) – CAT 1;
• If with the 19”, 23”, 24” and 26” monitors (PPI diameter not less than 265 mm) –
CAT 2.
SOFTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Radar
Video Signal Processing
• Reception of a video signal and its digital processing;
• Clutter filtering;
• Reception of synchronizing pulses, information on the antenna turn angle
in the form of succession of pulses, as well as in the form of synchro or resolver
voltage. Reception of the bearing pulse, video signal and start pulses in the form
of a composite signal is provided.
Display of Radar Information

• Set of ranges: 0.25; 0.5; 0.75; 1.5; 3; 6; 12; 24; 48 nautical miles;
• Display of radar information in the following orientation modes:
– North-up display;
– Course stabilised display;
– Head-up display.
• Display of radar information in the true and relative motion modes. Display
of the targets. True and relative vectors are provided;
Chapter 3. Technical Specification 495

Software Technical Specification
• Display of radar information with the center shifted to up to 2/3 of the screen radius.
Display of Auxiliary Information

• For the range measurements, the radar screen displays stationary range rings
and a range marker;
• Display of two electronic range and bearing lines;
• Display of the electronic azimuth scale along the edge of the effective screen
area.
Control of the Radar Operation

The control of the radar operation is via RS422 channel:
• Control of operation mode;

• Control of the outgoing pulse length;
• Control of the receiver tuning.
Radar Maps
To enable the generation and display of information not connected with official chart
correction data, the MFD features a capability to make up a separate layer of objects
which is called a radar map. It is advisable to use this functionality for the chart
preparation, storage of notes and service chart related information.
After the loading and turning on of the display, the radar map is presented. On the
MFD screen it is shown as a transparent layer with radar map objects plotted on it.
ARPA
Fulfilment of ARPA Tasks:
• Performance of ARPA functions in compliance with IMO resolution A.823 (19);

• Target extraction, acquisition and tracking;
• Facility for the automatic and manual selection of targets for the display;
• Facility for the automatic numbering of tracked targets;
• Facility for a trial collision avoidance manoeuvre with the set course and speed
parameters.
Chart Related Features

Chart Formats
• Vector TX-97 Chart Format.
TX-97 vector data (TX-97 format charts) is produced according to Transas Marine
standard. The production of TX-97 data is organised according to ISO 9001 product
quality management standard.
TX-97 data is produced with the use of two technologies: vectorising (digitising
based on the paper charts) and converting procedure enabling the official
ENC data to be converted to TX-97 format.
• Vector ENC (TX-97 Presentation) Chart Format and update.
The Chart Manager utility allows official ENC data to be converted to vector
TX-97 data by using the built-in converter. During the conversion, all the
information required for ensuring safety of navigation is fully converted.
The following data display in the MFD is in accordance with TX-97 standard.

The SENC data is updated as the correction file is loaded by using the Chart
Manager utility facilities.
• Vector ENC (S-57 standard presentation) and update.

The format of the vector form data produced under S-57 standard is determined
by ISO/IEC 8211 standard and is the sole official format of vector charts designed
for use in the ECDIS.
The chart producers are National Hydrographic Offices.
At the set regular intervals, the ENC producing national HO issues a carrier
with correction data. Like the ENC’s themselves, this data is distributed via
the producer’s distributor network.
The SENC data is updated as the correction file is loaded by using Chart Manager
utility facilities.
Charts Update
• Basic maintenance service for TX-97.
The base chart updating implies the quarterly renewal of the ship chart folio,
the changes made in the World Chart Folio CD taken into account. Supplied
together with the collection is the license for its use over a calendar year.
The base updating process consists in the replacement of a license and installation
of charts from the newly received WF CD.
World Chart Folio CD is issued 4 times a year and is supplied to the user in a way
specified in an agreement.
• Professional maintenance service for TX-97.
The professional updating includes base updating (see above) and Notices
to Mariners Correction Service implying the possibility of a bi-weekly addition
of updating information to the charts from the ship folio. The updating information
is accumulated during a calendar year. Therefore, the charts installed from
the last WF CD of the preceding year and the last updating file of the current
year will correspond to the updating level of the last WF CD in the current year.
The license for the use of this option is supplied for one year.
The updating information is prepared every two weeks and uploaded on the
company web site. The delivery option is settled with the user at the time when
the agreement is signed: via Internet or on the electronic data carriers via shore
agencies representing the user interests.
• Transas SENC Correction Service.
The updating service implies weekly uploading of SENC data for the SENC
Base CD (updating) on the company site (http://www.transas.com/support.asp).
SENC updating data consists of:
– Update – includes all the incremental updating files in S-57 received since
the time of SENC CD issue (Issue<NN>_WF<NN>). It should be noted that
available for installation is only the updating for charts purchased by the
customer;
– New Charts – includes all the new charts in Transas SENC format received
since the time of SENC CD issue;
– New Edition – includes all the new edition charts in Transas SENC format
not included in SENC CD.

The updating information is stored in the form of self-unpacking archives

(e.g., Update47_WF21.exe). For Transas format SENC, the following updating
can be used:
– Open S-57 updating;
– S-57 updating encoded in accordance with S-63 standard
(if valid permits are available);
– Transas encoded S-57 updating;
– Binary updating (received with e-mail from the Transas Chart server).
Chart Orientation
Charts may have the following orientation on the MFD screen (according
to the radar orientation mode):
• North UP;
• Head Up;
• Course Up.
INFO
General Chart Information – display of information on the issue number and date,
coordinates offset, latest correction date and source.
Chart Control
• Layers control.
MFD implements a capability to select the display of different chart object
categories:
– DPTH Value – digital values of depths (for ENC format charts only);
– TSS – traffic separation schemes;
– SAF CON – to turn on display of depth contours;
– Abovewater – to turn on display of surface objects;
– Coast – to turn on display of coastline;
– Underwater – to turn on display of submerged objects;
– Route;
– All Layers simultaneously;
– Standard Display.
• Autoload.
Chart autoloading is a special MFD function which allows automatic display of
the largest scale chart optimum from the viewpoint of its position, and defines it as
the current chart.
• Autoscale.
The chart scale corresponds to the set radar scale.
• Color Palettes.

For easy perception of information displayed on the MFD screen, the MFD
implements a capability to select the following color palettes:
• Color;
• Gray;
• Color transparency;
• Gray transparency.
Navigation Tools
Alarms and Warnings
• RIB/Scanner.
This group of alarms in intended for checking the operating availability
of the Radar Integrated Board and the scanner in use.
• AIS.
This group of alarms is used in the operation with UAIS (IEC 61993-2 standard)
transponders.
• Chart/Antigrounding.
Safety monitoring during the sailing in the areas with a danger depth.
The monitoring is based on Safety contour set by the user.
Monitoring of agreement between the set scale and the scale of the chart under
the whip position with generation of an appropriate warning (Not recommended
scale and Dangerous scale).
• Sensors.
Alarm alerting about the availability of incorrect data from external sensors or
about the absence of this data (for active sensors only).
• Targets.
Alarm and warnings alerting about events connected with targets.
Ship Motion Data

Ship motion parameters are its course and speed.
The MFD uses the following parameter types:
• Ship course over the ground – COG;

• Speed over the ground – SOG;
• Heading from gyrocompass – HDG;
• Ship course over the water (only if DLOG is selected for the source of speed
through the water in SEA STAB mode) – CTW;
• Ship speed through the water – STW.
True/Relative Motion
There are two modes of displaying the ship motion on the PPI:
• True motion;
• Relative motion.

Sensors (Input/Output)
Operation according to the IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183.
Maximum 20 available Com ports for the external sensors connection.
Positioning
GGA, GLL, RMC, DTM, VTG, ZDA, sentences are processed:
• Positioning.
Capability to use positioning from the sensor (in GGA\GLL…NMEA sentence
format) of one of the following positioning systems: GPS (DGPS), GLONASS,
GNSS, LORAN-C.
• Time.
As a time sensor the positioning system receiver is commonly used
(GPS, GLONASS, etc.) or other equipment, which transmits this data type.
The ZDA sentence received on this channel can be processed by the MFD.
To receive time from an external source run System Configuration Utility/Sensors/

Sensors/UTC for indicating the port to which this source is connected. If the time
source is not connected in the System Configuration utility, the computer time
is used.
ATTENTION!
The computer date and time may be different from Greenwich date and time. This error
will not be taken into account in the MFD operation.
In order to avoid such situation, the transmission of data on Greenwich time and
date from an external source (e.g., GPS or transponder) should be ensured.
If no information on time and date, or only the information on time arrives,

it is necessary, before the system is run for the first time, to use Start/Control
Panel/Date/Time for setting the computer time and date as equal to Greenwich time
and date (in the case of time the accuracy of up to one hour would be sufficient).
This conformity should be checked at least once a month.
AIS Transponder Interface

AIS (Automatic Identification System) is used for the automatic transmission and
exchange of information with ships and different coastal objects fitted out with this
system receivers via the VHF channel.
AIS transponder interface is implemented in accordance with IEC/PAS 60936-5

Edition 1.0 2003-09 and IEC 61993-2 international standards, and takes into account
IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371-1 (Edition 1.3).
Interfacing of this device with the MFD produces the following capabilities:
• To receive and display data on other targets (Class A and Class B only) using
the AIS (coordinates, name, MMSI, Call Sign, COG, SOG, Heading, Rate of
turn, Status);
• To transmit information on targets displayed by the MFD via the output channel
to the connected external devices;
• To turn off the display of AIS target data on MFD screen and to fully turn off the
entire AIS interface;
• To dead reckon AIS targets by the user set parameters;

• To associate ARPA targets with AIS targets. This functionality allows the ARPA
target and its corresponding AIS target to be displayed as a single target
(the association parameters are set by the user). There is a capability to select
the priority of displaying an AIS or ARPA target on the PPI;
• To display the contour of an AIS target on the scales commensurate with the
ship dimensions.
Gyrocompass
HDT, VHW sentences are processed.
Reception of information from Gyrocompasses in the form of NMEA sentences.
Some other equipment (e.g., ARPA, GPS) connected to the gyrocompass can
re-transmit the course data. MFD can be interfaced with the sensors supplying
the course data in IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183 standards.
Speed Log
VHW, VBW sentences are processed.
Reception of own ship speed values (LOG) from the connected log.
Some other equipment (e.g., ARPA, GPS) connected to the Speed log can
retransmit the log data. MFD can be interfaced with the sensors supplying the log
data in IEC 61162-1 or NMEA 0183 standards.
Filtering Incoming Sentences

Incoming NMEA sentences can be filtered by talkers and sentence names.
Output
• Navigational data OSD sentence is processed.
Transmission of information on the own ship motion parameters to any external
device connected to the MFD.
• Radar data TTM, RSD sentences are processed.

Transmission of the following radar data to any external device connected
to the MFD:
– Information on the radar display settings;
– Data associated with a tracked target relative to own ship position.
• Transmission of data on AIS targets relative to the own ship position
(TTM sentences) is provided.
GUI Capabilities
User Configurable GUI
Selection of one of offered MFD user interface displayed layouts – “skin”.
Screen Resolution
• 1920 1200 pixels;
• 1920 1080 pixels;
• 1600 1200 pixels;
• 1280 1024 pixels;
• 1024x768 pixels.

Hardware Technical Specification
Screen resolution is determined by the size of the installed monitor.
Legibility of Alphanumeric Data, Information and Text

Distance between the top and bottom edges of the smallest capital letter used
on the screen is 11 pixels.
The nominal viewing distance for the display equipment is 1 meter.

Advanced Software and Hardware Application for Automatic Integration with
Transas Electronic Navigation Products.
Software Module:
• Analogue/digital conversion of video signal;

• Formation of a radar picture;
• Capability to be interfaced with various types of navigational radars.
HARDWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Scanners
GEM Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW Open Array X-Band Up Mast
Table 82. 4/12/25 kW X-band transceiver technical specification
Scanner Units
Peak power (normal) 12 kW (SU70-14E) – Part.No.: 18031316;
25 kW (SU70-25E) – Part.No.: 18031322;
4 kW (SU78-14E) – Part.No.: 18031324
Radiation frequency 9410 ± 30 MHz
Transmission pulse width and Range, nm Pulse Width, µs Pulse Repetition
repetition frequency (P.R.F.) for Frequency, Hz
transceiver 12 kW (Jitter P.R.F. 20%
typical)
SP – Short Pulse; 0.062 0.08 (SP) 3200
MP – Medium Pulse;
LP – Long Pulse; 0.125 0.08 (SP) 3200
EP – Extra Long Pulse 0.25 0.08 (SP) 3200
0.5 0.08 (SP) 3200
0.75 0.08 (SP) 3200
0.2 (MP) 1600
1.5 0.08 (SP) 3200
0.2 (MP) 1600
3 0.2 (MP) 1600
0.4 (LP) 800
6 0.2 (MP) 1600
0.4 (LP) 800
12 0.4 (LP) 800
0.8 (EP) 500
24 0.4 (LP) 800
0.8 (EP) 500
48 0.8 (EP) 500

Transmission pulse width and 0.062 0.08 (SP) 2000

repetition frequency (P.R.F.) for
0.125 0.08 (SP) 2000
transceiver 25 kW
0.25 0.08 (SP) 2000
SP – Short Pulse; 0.5 0.08 (SP) 2000
0.75 0.08 (SP) 2000
LP – Long Pulse;
EP – Extra Long Pulse 0.2 (MP) 1000
1.5 0.08 (SP) 2000
0.2 (MP) 1000
3 0.2 (MP) 1000
0.4 (LP) 750
6 0.2 (MP) 1000
0.4 (LP) 750
12 0.4 (LP) 750
0.8 (EP) 500
24 0.4 (LP) 750
0.8 (EP) 500
48 0.8 (EP) 500
Transmission pulse width and 0.062 0.05 (SP) 3200
repetition frequency (P.R.F.) for
0.125 0.05 (SP) 3200
transceiver 4 kW non-TA
0.25 0.05 (SP) 3200
SP – Short Pulse; 0.5 0.05 (SP) 3200
0.75 0.05 (SP) 3200
LP – Long Pulse;
EP – Extra Long Pulse 0.2 (MP) 1600
1.5 0.05 (SP) 3200
0.2 (MP) 1600
3 0.2 (MP) 1600
0.4 (LP) 800
6 0.4 (LP) 800
12 0.4 (LP) 800
0.8 (EP) 500
24 0.8 (EP) 500
48 0.8 (EP) 500
Transmitter type Magnetron
Modulator Fully solid state
Receiver type Fully solid state, low noise logarithmic
Dynamic rage > 100 dB
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.) 60 MHz ± 2 MHz
I.F. bandwidth 20 MHz short and medium pulses;
4 MHz with long and extra long pulses (with 10% tolerance)
Front End Microwave integrated circuit
Noise figure < 3.5 dB
Duplexer Ferrite circulator with solid state limiter diode
Antenna rotation rate 22 ± 2 r.p.m. (33 r.p.m. for 4 and 12 kW HS)
Power supply/consumption +24 VDC / < 70 W
EMI Fully compliant with CEI 80-3 (IEC-945)
Operative temperature From -25°C to +55°C
Relative humidity Up to 95% at +35°C
Weight 14.5 kg
Dimensions See drawing in CHAPTER 1, section Installation of
Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast

Table 83. X-band antenna array specification

Array Model AU11-04N (non-TA) AU11-06N AU11-07N
Length 4 feet 6 feet 7.5 feet
Type Slotted wave guide
Frequency band X-band, I = 3.2 cm, frequency range 9410 ± 50 MHz
Polarization Horizontal
Horizontal beam width (-3dB) 1.8° ± 0.1° 1.2° ± 0.1° 1.1° ± 0.1°
Vertical beam width (-3dB) 25° ± 2°
Side lobe level within < -26 dB
± 10° from main lobe
Side lobe level outside < -30 dB
±10° from main lobe
Gain 27 dBi ± 0.5 dB 29 dBi ± 0.5 dB 30 dBi ± 0.5 dB
Weight 3.8 kg 5.8 kg 11 kg
Antenna length 1400 mm 1940 mm 2210 mm
Antenna clearance 1800 mm 2340 mm 2610 mm
GEM Network Scanners 2/4 kW Radome X-Band Up Mast

Table 84. 2/4 kW X-band transceiver technical specification
Scanner Units
Peak power (normal) 2 kW Radom (SU82-01/S) – Part.No.: TBD;
4 kW Radome (SU82-12S) – Part.No.: 18031316
Radiation frequency 9410 ± 30 MHz
Transmission pulse width and Range, nm Pulse Width, µs Pulse Repetition
repetition frequency (P.R.F.) for Frequency, Hz
transceiver 2/4 kW (non-TA) (Jitter P.R.F. 20%
typical)
SP – Short Pulse; 0.062 0.05 (SP) 2600
LP – Long Pulse; 0.125 0.05 (SP) 2600
EP – Extra Long Pulse 0.25 0.05 (SP) 2600
0.5 0.05 (SP) 2600
0.75 0.05 (SP) 2600
0.08 (MP) 2100
1.5 0.05 (SP) 2600
0.08 (MP) 2100
3 0.08 (MP) 2100
0.3 (LP) 1200
6 0.3 (LP) 1200
12 0.3 (LP) 1200
0.8 (EP) 600
24 (only for 4 kW) 0.8 (EP) 600
Transmitter type Magnetron
Modulator Fully solid state
Receiver type Fully solid state, logarithmic
Dynamic rage (nominal) 100 dB
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.) 60 MHz ± 2 MHz
I.F. bandwidth 20 MHz short and medium pulses;
4 MHz with long and extra long pulses (with 10% tolerance)
Noise figure Nominal 3.5 dB
Antenna rotation rate Standard speed – 24 r.p.m.; High speed - 33 r.p.m.
Power supply 12 to 24 VDC
Power consumption <70 W

Operative temperature from -25°C to +55°C

Relative humidity Up to 95% at +35°C
Weight 2 kW - 5.8 kg; 4 kW – 8 kg
Dimensions See table below and drawings in CHAPTER 1, section
Installation of Network Scanners 2/4 kW Radome
X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Mechanical Installation
Table 85. X-band Radome antenna specification

Array Model Radome 46 Radome 62
Length 1.4 feet 1.8 feet
Type Microstrip
Frequency band X-band, I = 3.2 cm, frequency range 9410 ± 50 MHz
Horizontal beam width (-3dB) 5.2° ± 0.2° 3.8° ± 0.2°
Vertical beam width (-3dB) 22° ± 2°
Side lobe level within -19 dB
± 10° from main lobe
Side lobe level outside -21 dB
±10° from main lobe
Gain 19 dBi 21 dBi
Weight 5.8 kg 8 kg
Antenna diameter 501 mm 610 mm
Antenna hight 233 mm 237 mm
Bearing Configuration Reference Table
Table 86. Network scanners bearing configuration reference table

Transas Part Type Power RPM ACP
Number
SU 82-01/S RADOME 2 kW Variable 4096
SU 82-12/S RADOME 4 kW Variable 4096
SU 78-14E/S Open 4 kW 24 2048
SU 70-14E/S Open 12 kW 24 2048
SU 70-25E/S Open 25 kW 24 2048
SU 78-14E/B/S Open 4 kW 38 4096
SU 70-14E/B/S Open 12 kW 38 4096
NGSM Scanner 30 kW S-Band Up/Down Mast

Table 87. 30 kW S-band transceiver technical specification
Transmitter
Peak power (normal) 30 kW
Radiation frequency 3050 MHz ± 10 MHz
Pulse length (nominal) 0.05μs/1800Hz (Short Pulse);
0.05μs/3000Hz (Short Pulse optional X-band only);
0.25μs/1800Hz (Medium Pulse);
0.75μs/785Hz (Long Pulse)
Pulse generator Solid-state with Pulse Forming Network driving the Magnetron
Receiver
Receiver type Logarithmic, with Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
Tuning AFC/Manual
Intermediate Frequency (I.F.) Centred at 60 MHz
I.F. bandwidth (nominal) 20 MHz on short pulse and medium pulses;
3 MHz on long pulse

Noise factor (nominal) 5.0 dB

Dynamic range (nominal) 80 dB
Performance Monitor
Monitored Performance Radar Receiver and entire Radar System
Type Transponder
Presentation Four concentric arcs on the Display Unit. The arcs are of reducing
brightness outwards. They show degradation in performance
(including the antenna) in 5dB increments relative to the inner arc
Transceiver Interface
Radar video output Peak amplitude -2.0V to -5.0V;
Shoulder Noise -0.25V minimum;
Input Impedance 75Ω ± 10%
Trigger output RS422 differential signals
RIB6/RIB6B to Transceiver RS422 differential signals
data
Power Requirements
Transceiver Unit power supply 92-276 VAC / 47-64 Hz
Maximum Input Power
Transceiver Unit 120 VA
Scanner Motor
Standard speed unit - single 750 VA
phase
Standard speed unit – 3 phase 500 VA
(per phase)
All Units exept S-Band Scanner Motor Unit Characteristics
Power factor Better than 0.9
Transient protection Overvoltage transient of up to 40 % above nominal input voltage with
maximum duration of one second. Pulse transient of up to +/- 1200 V
peak, with a rise time of 2 to 10 µs and duration up to 20 µs
Protection facilities Output short circuit;
High and low input voltage;
Output overvoltage;
Slow start
Mechanical Specification
Dimensions (scanner unit+12ft 800 (H) x 718 (D) x 3700 (W) mm
antenna+integral transceiver)
Weight (scanner unit+12ft 176.5 kg
antenna+integral transceiver)
Dimensions (scanner unit+12ft 800 (H) x 675 (D) x 3700 (W) mm
antenna)
Weight (scanner unit+12ft 163.5 kg
antenna, no integral
transceiver)
Bulkhead tranceiver unit 515 (H) x 318 (D) x 402 (W) mm
Weight bulkhead tranceiver unit 25 kg
Compass Safe Distances
Scanner Unit 30 kW Std: 4.1 m;
Steereng: 2.4 m
Scanner Unit (without Std: 0.8 m;
transceiver) Steereng: 0.5 m
Bulkhead transceiver unit 30 Std: 4.3 m;
KW Steereng: 2.6 m
Scanner Control Unit Std: 0.8 m;
Steereng: 0.4 m

Table 88. 12 feet S-band antenna specification

Parameter Data
Length 12 feet (3.7 m)
Frequency 3050 MHz ±10 MHz
Horizontal beam-width at -3 dB (max.) 2.0°
Vertical beam-width at -3 dB (max.) 30°
Side lobes within 10° of Beam (min.) -23 dB
Side lobes outside 10° of Beam (min.) -30 dB
Gain (nominal) 26 dB
Rotation speeds standard 50/60 Hz 25/30 rpm
Operating temperature -25°C though to +55°C
Storage temperature -30°C though to +70°C
Relative humidity Up to 95% at 40°C
Rain proof According to IEC 945 Chapter 8, paragraph 8
Limiting Relative Wind Speed 100 knots
Slave Junction Box

Table 89. Slave Junction Box 65849A specification
Parameter Data
Power Requirements
Power supply +11 V min; +13 V max (measured at input
+12 VDC: terminals of unit);
Current: +12 V input 180 mA; +11 V input 200 mA
Power supply -11 V min, -13 V max (measured at input
-12 VDC: terminals of unit);
Current: -12 V input 60 mA, -11 V input; 65 mA
The +12V current is reduced by 24mA for each
output that is not used
Environmental Specification
Temperature Operating: -15°C to +55°C;
Storage: -25°C to +70°C
Relative Humidity 95% at 40°C (non condensing)
Weights and Dimensions
Height x Depth x Width (mm) 346 x 109 x 374
Nominal weight (kg) 5.0
Compass Safe Distance
CSD Standard: 0.9 m;
Steering: 0.6 m

NGSM Scanner 10/25 kW X-Band Up/Down Mast

Table 90. 4/6/8 feet X-band antenna specification
Parameter Data
Aperture size 4 ft (1.2 m) 6 ft (1.8 m) 8 ft (2.4 m)
Operating Frequency 9410 MHz +/-30 MHz
Horizontal Beam Width, -3 dB (maximum) 2° 1.3° 1.3
Vertical Beam Width, -3 dB (nominal) 24°
Sidelobes within 10° of Beam (minimum) -23 dB
Sidelobes outside 10° of Beam (minimum) -30 dB
Gain (nominal) 29 dB 30 dB 31 dB
Limiting Relative Wind Speed 100 kt
Rotational Speed Standard – 28 rpm
High – 45 rpm
Table 91. Transceiver specification
Transmitter
Parameter Data
Magnetron Frequency 9410 MHz +/-30 MHz
Magnetron Peak Power 10 or 25 kW nominal
Pulse Length/PRF 0.05 µs/1800 Hz nominal (Short Pulse)
0.25 µs/1800 Hz nominal (Medium Pulse)
0.75 µs/785 Hz nominal (Long Pulse)
Pulse Generator Solid-state with pulse forming network driving the
magnetron
Receiver
Parameter Data
Type Logarithmic, with Low Noise Front End (LNFE)
Tuning AFC/Manual
IF (Intermediate Frequency) Centered at 60 MHz
IF Bandwidth 20 MHz on short and medium pulses (nominal)
3 MHz on long pulse (nominal)
Noise factor 5.0 dB nominal
Dynamic range 80 dB nominal
IF amplifier Logarithmic
IF centre frequency 50 MHz
IF- Bandwidth 16–20/4–5/1.5–2 MHz
Overall noise figure 3.5 dB
Table 92. Performance Monitor specification
Parameter Data
Performance Monitored Separate monitors for Radar System and Radar
Receiver
Type Transponder
Pulse Length/PRF Four concentric arcs on Display Unit. Arcs are of
reducing brightness outwards, showing
degradation in performance (including antenna) in
5 dB increments relative to inner arc.

Table 93. Power supply specification

Parameter Data
Input voltage range 92 – 276 VAC RMS
Input voltage frequency range 47 to 64 Hz
Maximum Input Power X-band Scanner (incl. Transceiver and Motor)
Standard Speed Unit 250 VA
High Speed Unit 370 VA
Transient protection Overvoltage transient of up to 40 % above
nominal input voltage with maximum duration of
one second. Pulse transient of up to +/- 1200 V
peak, with a rise time of 2 to 10 µs and duration
up to 20 µs
Protection facilities Output short circuit;
High and low input voltage;
Output overvoltage;
Slow start
High voltage multiphase operation Via a suitable transformer
Table 94. Mechanical specification
Component Height Depth Width Weight
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
X-band scanner unit with 1.2 m antenna 440 586 1305 49 (42*)
Bulkhead tranceiver unit (658xxA,B,P,T,W) 607 327 370 23
Bulkhead tranceiver unit (658xxE,F,G,H,L) 607 330 370 19
*- Excluding transceiver.
Table 95. Compass safe distances
Component Standard Steering
X-band scanner unit 10 kW 1.4 m 0.8
X-band scanner unit 25 kW 3.3 m 2.0
Scanner unit (without transceiver) 0.4 m 0.3 m
Bulkhead transceiver 10 kW 1.3 m 0.7 m
Bulkhead transceiver 25 kW 3.3 m 2.0 m

MTBF for NGSM Masthead and Bulkhead Radar Top Units

Table 96. Mean Time Before Failures – MTBF for Masthead and Bulkhead Radar Top units
Item Part Number MTBF, h
S Band Radar
S Band Radar Antenna 12' 65612A 102300
S Band Radar Turning Unit 65830BHR 88230
Scanner Control Unit 65837AC 100000
S Band 30 kW Bulkhead TX/RX 65831B 59100
S Band Radar Installation Kit 115/MIK/67 0
S Band Co-axial Feeder/Cable Kit 10m 112/MIK/10 0
S Band Despatch Kit 65612610 0
X Band Radars
X Band Radar Antenna 8' 65608/A 102,300
X Band Radar Turning Unit 65801BAR 88,230
X Band 25 kW Bulkhead TX/RX 65825B 90,600
X Band Waveguide/Cable Kit 116/MIK/10 0
X Band Installation Kit 119/MIK/67 0
Interswitch Unit
6 x 6 Interswitch Unit 65846A 101,400
Interswitch Cable Installation Kit 114/MIK 0
Winterisation Heater Kits for NGSM Turning Units Technical Data

Design Parameters
The primary function of the Winterisation Heater Assemblies is to keep the turning
unit mechanisms and contents above the minimum operating temperature of the
equipment when it is not heated, which is -40°C.
The actual temperature of the Turning unit structures, when heated by the
Winterisation Heater Assemblies depends significantly on the weather conditions.
The heater assemblies have been shown to enable the equipment to be cold started
in an ambient temperature of -55°C in an airflow of approximately 5 msˉ¹, without
precipitation.
Electrical and Thermal Characteristics
The heating elements are made up of self-regulating thermistors i.e. the current
drawn is temperature dependent: At lower temperatures, the heaters dissipate more
power. The heaters have a high inrush current (see the table below).
The Winterisation Heater kits are designed to comply with the requirements of
IEC60945 Ed 4 2002, in the ‘Exposed’ environmental class. In particular, the
equipment is designed to meet the following environmental aspects of IEC 60945 in
the condition stated described in the table below.
For weights and dimensions overall see below paragraph Outline Drawings.
Compass Safe Distance

Due to the low magnetic material contained in the heater assemblies, the compass
safe distance of Turning units is unaffected by fitting the heater kits. The compass
safe distance of Turning units remains as indicated on their nameplates.

Table 97. Heaters technical specification

Parameter Data
Electrical and thermal characteristics
Supply voltage AC 187 to 264 V rms 40-70 Hz
Heating element design temperature 70°C self regulating at the hot plate
Heating element maximum temperature Surface temperature can exceed 100°C
X-band heater and S-band housing end cover heaters:
Heating element power rating 1500 W nominal at -55°C
Inrush current (230 V) 60 A typical
Steady-state current 7.5 A typical at -55°C
Circuit Breaker rating 16 A curve C
S-band gearbox shaft-end cover heater:
Heating element power rating 300 W nominal at -55°C
Inrush current (230 V) 10 A typical at -55°C
Steady-state current 2.5 A typical at -55°C
Circuit Breaker rating 5 A curve
Environmental category
Vibration Heaters on and off
EMC Heaters on and off
Humidity and temperature Heaters off
Weights of units
X-band heater assy 65901675 5.5 kg
S-band transceiver cover heater assy 65830657 9 kg
S-band PM / BH cover heater assy 65830658 9 kg
S-band gearbox heater assy 65830659 2 kg
Installation Kits Lists

Table 98. X-band winterization heater kit list (type 65901730)
Part No. Description Qty Remarks
65901055 Outline dawing X-band heater 1
65901010 Manual winterization heaters 1
65901192 Cable clamp 1 To secure power cable to the top housing
65901191 Heater clamp 2 For securing heater assy to top of TU
4709284 Washer M6 plain 8
RA00013573 Spring disc 12.5 mm O/D 8
RA00013581 Nut, hardlock M6 4
RA00013599 Screw, cup point M4 4 For securing cable clamp to TU top housing
and locking off
RA00002220 Cable tie 3.5 mm x 150 2 To secure the cable to the cable clamp
9037446 Densopaste tube 30 g 1 Use on external fixings to prevent corrosion

Table 99. S-band winterization heaters kit list (type 65830730 and 65830731)
Part No. Description Qty Remarks
65830057 Outline dawing 1 For Masthead Turning unit
SHT 1
65830057 Outline dawing 1 For Bulkhead Turning unit
SHT 2
65901010 Manual winterization heaters 1
65830669 Heater interface plate 1 Adaptor plate between gearbox and heater
assembly assembly
4006100 Screw, cap head skit 8 For securing interface plate to Rehfuss
M4 x 12 mm gearbox and heater assy to interface plate
4709187 Washer M4 spring 8
4707699 Washer M4 plain 4
4006178 Screw, cap head skit 4 For securing interface plate to Zuerrer type
M5 x 12 mm gearbox
4709195 Washer M5 spring 4
9037446 Densopaste 1 Use on external fixings to prevent corrosion
MA00013789 Petroleum jelly 1 Seal groove in TU housing and mating cover
surfaces to be liberalty coated
Outline Drawings
Fig. 226 X-band scanner with heater kit outline drawing 65901055

Fig. 227 S-band masthead scanner with heater kit outline drawing 65830057
Fig. 228 S-band bulkhead scanner with heater kit outline drawing 65830057

Installation Set
Protection Key (Dongle)
Dongle is a MFD protection key. A protection key is a special device that determines
the right of authorized use of Transas Marine navigation systems.
The dongle is designed to be “transparent” for the data transfer onto the printer and
does not interfere with the computer’s operation in the ordinary modes. The dongle
should be all the time be connected to the computer when the navigation system
operates.
The MFD systems are supplied with Rainbow Sentinel SuperPro dongles
(LPT or USB).
Fig. below presents dongle options now in use:
Fig. 229 View of dongles produced by Rainbow Sentinel
License
The license is a floppy disk which contains license files for protection of the MFD
system, and text files describing the license and delivery set:
• SETUP.ID;
• ITEMS.LST;
• ITEMS.DAT;
• LICENSE.DAT;
• LISENCE.TXT;
• PACKING.TXT.
RS6B Computer
Technical Specifications
Table 100. Specifications
CPU Intel Core i5 520E (BGA CPU package), 2.4 GHz,
3 MB cache
OS Windows XP Pro SP2or SP3/Windows 7 Pro SP1
System Chipset Intel QM57 Express Chipset
DRAM 2 GB DDR3 SDRAM
USB USB 2.0 host x 2, USB 1.1 host x 4
Storage
Storage Support 1 internal SATA storage for SSD/HDD;
1 removable SATA storage slot for storage
expansion
Other Peripherals
DVD-R/W 1 internal DVD Writer/Reader
Audio MIC-in/Line-out interface

Display
Graphics Controller Onboard Intel HD graphic
VGA Interface 15-pin D-Sub connector x 1(female), with
resolution up to 1920 x 1080
DVI-I Interface 25-pin DVI-I connector x 1 (female)
Ethernet Interface
LAN 2 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 Mbps ports (RJ45)
Magnetic Isolation Protection 1.5 KV built-in
Serial Interface
Serial Standards 2 RS-232/422/485 ports, software-selectable (DB9
male);
2 RS-232 ports (DB9);
4 NMEA ports (Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector)
Serial Communication Parameters
Data Bits 5, 6, 7, 8
Stop Bits 1, 1.5, 2
Parity None, Even, Odd, Space, Mark
Flow Control RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF, ADDC® (automatic data
direction control) for RS-485
Baudrate 50 bps to 921.6 Kbps (supports non-standard
baudrates)
Serial Signals
RS-232 TxD, RxD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, DCD, GND
RS-422 TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-4w TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-2w Data+, Data-, GND
Digital Input
Four (4) general purpose inputs/outputs in the
back that accept closing switch input;
The inputs: ESD protected;
The inputs: Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector;
The inputs do not have to be isolated. TTL levels
will be detected;
Up to two (2) inputs are allowed to share one (1)
ground terminal; 6-pin connector
Digital Output
Four (4) general purpose outputs in the back must
be provided by means of internal, isolated
relays;
The relays must be capable of switching at least
36 VDC and 100 mA. The outputs must be
Normally-open (N.O.) dry relay contacts;
8-pin connector
LEDs
System Power, Storage
LAN LAN: 10M/Link x 2, 100M/Link x 2 (on connector)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Aluminum, sheet metal
Weight 6.85 kg
Dimensions 300 x 221 x 150 mm (11.81 x 8.70 x 5.91 in)
Mounting Wall
Environmental Limits
Operating Temperature -15 to 55°C (5 to 131°F)
Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH
Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)

Anti-vibration 0.7 @ DNV 2.4 (Class A), sine wave, 2-100 Hz, 1
Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis;
1 grms @ DNV 2.4, random wave, 3-100 Hz, 2.5
hr per axis;
2.1 g @ DNV 2.4 (Class C), sine wave, 2-50 Hz, 1
Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis
Anti-shock 50 g @ IEC 60068-2-27, half sine wave, 11 ms
Power Requirements
Input Voltage 24 VDC (2-pin terminal block) with tolerance from
-10% to +30%
Power Consumption Less than 100 W
2.5 A @ 24 VDC
Regulatory Approvals
EMC CE (EN 55022 Class A, EN 55024, EN 61000-3-2,
EN 61000-3-3);
FCC (Part 15 Subpart B, Class A)
Safety DNV, IEC 60945 (4th), IACS-E10
Dimensions
Fig. 230. RS6B dimensions

TPC24 Computer
Technical Data
Table 101. TPC24 technical description
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology High Quality TFT with LED Backlight;
24.0 inch viewable image size, Widescreen, Aspect ratio 16:9;
TFT active-matrix liquid crystal panel;
MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment) LCD Technology
Native Resolution 1920 x 1080 (FHD)
Pixel Pitch (RGB) 0.276 (H) x 0.276 (V) mm
Response Time 25 ms (typical), “black” to “white”
Contrast Ratio 3000:1 (typical)
Light Intensity 250 cd/m² (typical)
Viewable Angle +/- 89 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Active Display Area 531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) mm
Max Colors 16.7 millions (RGB 8-bit)
Computer Specifications
OS Windows XP Pro Eng SP2/SP3, 32bit
Storage 2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA);
Default configuration: 1 x 250GB HDD;
Raid: 0,1
CPU Intel® Celeron® P4505 (2M Cache, 1.86 GHz);
Front Side Bus (FSB) 800MHz
Installed Memory 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz SO-DIMM
System Chipset Intel® BD82QM57
Graphics Chipset Intel® Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0
Ethernet LAN 1 Intel® 82577LM Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Ethernet LAN 2 Realtek RTL8111C Gigabit LAN10/100/1000Mbps
Audio Chipset Realtek ALC888-GR (+ 2W Amplifier)
BIOS UEFI AMIBIOS
Speaker / Buzzer No speaker / 3500 Hz Buzzer
Watchdog Timer 256 Segments, 0, 1, 2...255 sec/min
Power Manager ACPI S3/S4
Monitoring Temperature and voltages status
Other Features GPIO, LAN Wakeup, USB Boot and Wakeup
DVI-I OUT Resolution From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
RGB OUT Resolution From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Power Specifications
Multi-power Supply 115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC.
Note: You may connect either AC power or DC power or both. In
case both sources are connected, power will be sourced from
the AC input. If AC input is lost, there will be a uninterrupted
switch-over to DC input
Power Consumption Operating AC/DC: 125 W (max)
Physical Considerations
Dimensions 593.00 (W) x 348.00 (H) x 76.40 (D) mm
23.35" (W) x 15.12" (H) x 3.01" (D);
4 x M6 for VESA mounting, Max 12mm deep
Weight 11.2 kg / 24.6 lbs
User Controls
Behind front bezel - Glass Display Power On/Off, Brightness Control (-/+), Hotkeys (left/right);
Control™ (GDC) IP66 Power LED, HDD/SSD LED, Mode Status Indicators (ECDIS,
Service);
Buzzer (not visible), Light Sensor (not visible)

Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature -15 to +55°C
Humidity up to 95 %
Storage Temperature -20 to +60°C
Humidity up to 95 %
IP Rating Protection IP66 front – IP22 rear (EN60529)
Compass Safe Distance Std: 1.6 m;
Steereng: 1.05 m
Safety Considerations Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a
maximum operating temperature of 55°C, continuous operation
of all electronic components should, if possible, take place at
ambient temperatures of only 25°C. This is a necessary
prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Input/Output Connectors
COM ports 1 x DB9M RS-232 non-isolated;
1 x DB9M RS-422/485 non-isolated;
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA Compliant
(Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible connector). For more
detailed information see below COM Module specification.
Ethernet GBLAN 2 x RJ-45
Keyboard and Mouse 2 x PS/2 (keyboard - purple, mouse – green)
USB USB 1.1 (>10m) – 1 x USB Type A;
USB 2.0 (<10m) – 3 x USB Type A.
2 x Pin Header (=4 USB)
LPT/Parallel 1 x Pin Header
DVI or RGB OUT 1 x 29p DVI-I or as RGB with adapter
RGB OUT 1 x 15p HD D-SUB
AC Power 1 x Std IEC inlet
DC Power 1 x Phoenix 2pin 1927564 MSTB 2,5/ 2-GF-5,08 THT
Line Out 1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Lime)
Speaker L/F 1 x mini-DIN 5pin
Mic In 1 x 3.5mm mini jack (Pink)
HDD/SSD Tray 2 x 2.5" Sized Tray/Bay (1 x factory default occupied)
COM Module RS-422/RS-485 (PCA100293-1) Specification
Absolute Max voltage applied to -8V to +13V
outputs
Data Rate / Technical Data Output Outputs 230kbps (theoretically 400kbps);
±15kV using the Human Body Model on all RS-485 signals;
Isolation rating = 2000VRMS, not intended for connection to live
power nets
Transmitter enable mode Standard mode is automatic;
Standard mode will accept send by RTS, but will in fact ignore
RTS;
Each channel have a overide jumper which can be used to force
the transmitter to always be active
Approvals and Certificates
IEC60945 4th (EN 60945: 2002), GL - Germanischer Lloyd, DNV - Det Norske Veritas, LRS - Lloyd’s
Register of Shipping, BV - Bureau Veritas, ABS - American Bureau of Shipping, ClassNK - Nippon
Kaiji Kyokai, CCS - China Classification Society, IACS E10

Dimensions
Fig. 231. TPC24 dimensions
Fig. 232. TPC24 desktop brackets

Fig. 233. TPC24 portrait mode mounting plate
Fig. 234. TPC24 flush mounting

Fig. 235. Panel cutout for TPC24, flush mounting
PPCi7 Maritime Multi Computers Series X

Technical Data
Table 102. HD 15T21 MMC, HD 17T21 MxC and HD 19T21 MxC technical description
HD 15T21 MMC HD 17T21 MxC HD 19T21 MxC
Part No. 18131125 TBD 18131129
Hatteland Part HD 15T21 MMC-xxx- HD 17T21 MxC-xxx-xxxx, HD 19T21 MxC-xxx-xxxx,
No. xxxx MxC, where x – MxC, where x –
M=Standard (MMC) or M=Standard (MMC) or
E=ECDIS Calibrated E=ECDIS Calibrated
(MEC) (MEC)
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology High Quality TFT active- High Quality TFT active- High Quality TFT active-
matrix liquid crystal matrix liquid crystal panel matrix liquid crystal panel
panel with LED with LED Backlight; with LED Backlight;
Backlight; 17.0 inch viewable image 19.0 inch viewable image
15.0 inch viewable size, Aspect ratio 5:4 size, Aspect ratio 5:4;
image size, Aspect ratio MVA (Multi-domain
4:3 Vertical Alignment) LCD
Technology
Native 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024
Resolution
Pixel pitch 0.297(H) x 0.297(V) mm 0.264(H) x 0.264(V) mm 0.294(H) x 0.294(V) mm

(RGB)
Response Time 8 ms (typical), “black” to 5 ms (typical), “black” to 20 ms (typical), “black” to
Std “white” “white” “white”
Response Time 19 ms (typical), “black” NA NA
High Bright to “white”
Contrast Ratio 700:1 (typical) 1000:1 (typical)
1000:1 (typical)
Std
Contrast Ratio 800:1 (typical) NA NA
High Bright
Light Intensity 400 cd/m² (typical) 350 cd/m² (typical) 300 cd/m² (typical)
Std


Light Intensity 800 cd/m² (typical) 1000 cd/m² (typical) 800 cd/m² (typical)
High Bright
Viewable Angle +/- 80 deg. (typical) +/- 80 deg. (typical) +/- 89 deg. (typical)
Standard (Up/Down/Left/Right) (Up/Down/Left/Right) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Viewable Angle +/- 80 deg. (D/L/R), NA NA
High Bright +/- 60 deg (U) (typ)
Active Display 304.1(H) x 228.1(V) mm 337.92(H)x270.336(V) mm 376.32(H)x 01.056(V) mm
Area
OS Win XP Pro Eng SP3 or SP2;
Win 7 Pro Eng, 32bit/64bit
Storage Default configuration: 1 x 250GB 2.5” HDD;
Option 2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA), Raid: 0,1
CPU 1 x Intel® Core™ i7-620LE, 2.0GHz, 4MB Cache,
FSB 1066MHz
Installed 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz
Memory
Graphics Intel® Arrandale IGD supports DVMT 5.0
Chipset
BIOS UEFI AMIBIOS
Speaker / No speaker / 3500 Hz Buzzer
Buzzer
DVI-I OUT From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Resolution
RGB OUT From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Resolution
Sync. Range Hor: 31.5 kHz to 91.1 kHz, Ver: 60 Hz to 85 Hz
Multi-power 115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC.
Supply Note: You may connect either AC power or DC power or both. In case both sources
are connected, power will be sourced from the AC input. If AC input is lost, there will
be a uninterrupted switch-over to DC input
Power 60 W (max) 60 W (max); 125 W (max);
Consumption 43 W (typ) at max 49 W (typ) at max
Operating backlight, idle CPU load, backlight, idle CPU load,
AC/DC Windows® 7 Windows® 7
Dimensions 356(W)x307(H)x77.9 (D) 390(W) x351(H)x79.9 (D) 429(W)x382(H)x80.9(D)
mm mm mm
14.02”(W)x12.09"(H)x 15.35”(W)x13.82"(H)x 16.89"(W)x15.04"(H)x
3.07"(D); 3.15"(D); 3.19"(D);
4 x M6 for VESA 4 x M6 for VESA 4 x M6 for VESA
mounting, 280x150 mm, mounting, 280x150 mm, mounting, 280x150 mm,
Max 12mm deep Max 12mm deep Max 12mm deep
Weight 6.0 kg / 13.2 lbs 7.5 kg / 16.5 lbs 8.6 kg / 18.9 lbs
User Controls
Behind front Power On/Off, Brightness Control (-/+), Hotkeys (left/right);
bezel-Glass Power LED, HDD/SSD LED, Mode Status Indicator (ECDIS, Service);
Display


Control™(GDC) Buzzer (not visible), Light Sensor (not visible)
Operating Temperature -15 to +55°C / Humidity up to 95 %
Storage Temperature -20 to +60°C / Humidity up to 95 %
Compass Safe Std: 55 cm; Std: 115 cm; Std: 70 cm;
Distance Steereng: 40 cm Steereng: 70 cm Steereng: 45 cm
Safety Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating
Considerations temperature of 55º C, continuous operation of all electronic components should,
if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only 25 C. This is a necessary
prerequisite for a long life and low service costs
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA Compliant (Phoenix 3.81 mm
compatible connector). For more detailed information see below COM Module
specification.
Ethernet GBLAN 2 x RJ45
Keyboard and 2 x PS/2 (keyboard - purple, mouse – green)
Mouse
USB 2.0 (<10m) – 3 x USB Type A
DVI or RGB 1 x 29p DVI-I or as RGB with adapter
OUT
Absolute Max -8V to +13V
voltage applied
to outputs
Data Rate / Outputs 230kbps (theoretically 400kbps);
Technical Data ±15kV using the Human Body Model on all RS-485 signals;
Output Isoltion rating = 2000VRMS, not intended for connection to live power nets
Transmitter Standard mode is automatic;
enable mode Standard mode will accept send by RTS, but will in fact ignore RTS;
Each channel have a overide jumper which can be used to force the transmitter to
always be active
Register of Shipping, BV - Bureau Veritas, ABS - American Bureau of Shipping, ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji
Kyokai, CCS - China Classification Society, IACS E10

Table 103. HD 24T21 MxC and HD 26T21 MxC technical description

HD 24T21 MxC HD 26T21 MxC
Part No. 18131126 TBD
Hatteland Part No. HD 24T21 MxC-xxx-xxxx, HD 26T21 MxC-xxx-xxxx,
MxC, where x – M=Standard (MMC) MxC, where x – M=Standard (MMC) or
or E=ECDIS Calibrated (MEC) E=ECDIS Calibrated (MEC)
TFT Characteristics
TFT Technology High Quality TFT active-matrix liquid High Quality TFT with CCFL Backlight;
crystal panel with LED Backlight; 25.54 inch viewable image size,
24.0 inch viewable image size, Widescreen, Aspect Ratio 16:10;
Widescreen, Aspect ratio 16:9; S-MVA, Active Matrix, Thin Film
MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Transistor (TFT);
Alignment) LCD Technology, RGB Vertical Stripe
RGB vertical stripe
Native Resolution 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1200
Pixel Pitch (RGB) 0.276 (H) x 0.276 (V) mm 0.2865 (H) x 0.2865 (V) mm
Response Time 25ms (typical), “black” to “white” CCFL: 8 ms (typical), "gray" to "gray"
LED: 20 ms (Tr+Tf)
Contrast Ratio 3000:1 (typical) 1500:1 (typical)
Light Intensity Std 300 cd/m² (typical) 350 cd/m² (typical)
Viewable Angle +/- 89 deg. (typical) +/- 88 deg. (typical)
(Up/Down/Left/Right) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Active Display Area 531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) mm 550.08 (H) x 343.8 (V) mm
OS Win XP Pro Eng SP3 or SP2;
Win 7 Pro Eng, 32/64bit
Storage Default configuration: 1 x 250GB 2.5” HDD;
Option 2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA), Raid: 0,1
CPU 1 x Intel® Core™ i7-620LE, 2.0GHz, 4MB Cache,
FSB 1066MHz
Installed Memory 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz
BIOS UEFI AMIBIOS
Speaker / Buzzer No speaker / 3500 Hz Buzzer
DVI-I OUT From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Resolution
RGB OUT From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Resolution
Sync. Range Hor: 31.5 kHz to 91.1 kHz, Ver: 60 Hz to 85 Hz
Multi-power Supply 115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC.
Note: You may connect either AC power or DC power or both. In case both
sources are connected, power will be sourced from the AC input. If AC input is
lost, there will be a uninterrupted switch-over to DC input
Power 125 W (max); 125 W (max);
Consumption 50 W (typ) at max backlight, idle CPU TBD (typ) at max backlight + high CPU
Operating AC/DC load, Windows® 7 load

HD 24T21 MxC HD 26T21 MxC

Dimensions 593(W)x384(H)x76.4(D) mm 621(W)x435(H x97.7(D) mm
23.35"(W)x15.12"(H)x 3.01"(D); 24.45"(W)x17.13"(H)x3.85" (D);
4 x M6 for VESA mounting, 280x150 4 x M6 for VESA mounting,
mm, Max 12mm deep 280x150 mm, Max 12mm deep
Weight 11.2 kg / 24.6 lbs 16.2 kg / 35.6 lbs
User Controls
Behind front bezel - Power On/Off, Brightness Control (-/+), Hotkeys (left/right);
Glass Display Power LED, HDD/SSD LED, Mode Status Indicator (ECDIS, Service);
Control™ (GDC) Buzzer (not visible), Light Sensor (not visible)
IP66
Humidity up to 95 %
Humidity up to 95 %
Compass Safe Std: 115 cm; Std: 125 cm;
Distance Steereng: 70 cm Steereng: 80 cm
Safety Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
Considerations operating temperature of 55°C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only 25°C.
This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA Compliant (Phoenix 3.81
mm compatible connector)
Ethernet GBLAN 2 x RJ-45
Keyboard and 2 x PS/2 (keyboard - purple, mouse – green)
Mouse
USB 2.0 (<10m) – 3 x USB Type A.
DVI or RGB OUT 1 x 29p DVI-I or as RGB with adapter
Absolute Max -8V to +13V
voltage applied to
outputs
Data Rate / Outputs 230kbps (theoretically 400kbps);
Technical Data ±15kV using the Human Body Model on all RS-485 signals;
Output Isolation rating = 2000VRMS, not intended for connection to live power nets
Transmitter enable Standard mode is automatic;
mode Standard mode will accept send by RTS, but will in fact ignore RTS;
Each channel have a overide jumper which can be used to force the transmitter
to always be active
Kyokai, CCS - China Classification Society, IACS E10

Dimensions
Fig. 236. HD 15T21 MMC dimensions
Fig. 237. HD 17T21 MxC dimensions


PanelPC MPC-2240X
Technical Data
Table 104. PPC MPC-2240X technical description
Display
Panel Size 24” viewable image size
Aspect Ratio 16:9
Pixels 1920 x 1080 (WSXGA+)
Pixel Pitch (RGB) 0.276 (H) x 0.276 (V) mm
Response Time 25 ms (gray to gray)
Contrast Ratio 5000:1
Light Intensity 300 cd/m2
Viewing Angles 178°/178°
Active Display Area 531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) mm
Max Colors 16.7M (8 bit color)
Resolution VGA: 640 x 480;
SVGA: 800 x 600;
XGA: 1024 x 768;
SXGA: 1280 x 1024;
WSXGA+: 1920 x 1080 (benchmarked setting)
Panel Type MVA
Computer
CPU lntel Celeron® Processor 1047UE (2M Cache, 1.40GHz), TDP
17 Watts (standard) or
lntel Core™ i3 processor 3217UE (3M Cache, 1.60GHz), TDP
17 watts or
lntel Core™ i7 processor 3517UE (4M Cache, 2.80GHz), TDP
17 watts

OS Windows 7 Professional, Windows XP Embedded, Windows

Embedded Standard 7, Windows XP SP3, Linux Debian 7
(models with OS pre-installed available on request)
System Chipset Intel HM65
System Memory 8 GB capacity, 4 GB pre-installed: 1 slot of 4 GB
DDR3-1600 204 pin SO-DIMM SDRAM
Storage 2 SATA III interfaces: 6 Gbps, 2.5” removable storage trays
USB 4 bootable USB 2.0 hosts, type A connectors
BIOS 64 Mbit Flash BIOS with SPI, ACPI
Graphics Controller Intel HM65 Express chipset built-in
Video Output 2 outputs: 1 DVI-D, 1 VGA (female)
Other Peripherals
Audio Line in/out, 3.5 mm mini jack
KB/MS 2 PS/2 interfaces supporting standard PS/2 keyboard and
mouse
Ethernet Interface
LAN 2 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 Mbps ports (RJ45)
Magnetic Isolation Protection 1.5 kV built-in
Serial Interface
Serial Standards 2 RS-232/422/485 ports, software-selectable (DB9
male)
Serial Communication Parameters
Data Bits 5, 6, 7, 8
Stop Bits 1, 1.5, 2
Parity None, Even, Odd, Space, Mark
Flow Control RTS/CTS, XON/XOFF, ADDC® (automatic data direction
control) for RS-485
Baudrate 50 bps to 921.6 Kbps (supports non-standard baudrates; see
user’s manual for details)
Serial Signals
RS-485-4w TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
NMEA Interface
Serial Standards 8 NMEA 0183 ports
Base Serial Standard RS-422
Optical Isolation Protection ±6 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Voltage Differential -15 V to + 15 V
Baudrate 4800 bps
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1, 1.5, 2
Parity None
Handshake None
LEDs
System Storage, Power
LAN 100M/Link x 2, 1000M/Link x 2 (on connector)
Front Panel
LED Storage
SavvyTouch Display Control ECDIS, INFO, Brightness (+, -), Power
Buttons
Housing Aluminum sheet metal

Weight 12.4 kg
Dimensions 595 x 393 x 75 mm (23.44 x 15.48 x 2.95 in)
Mounting Flush mounting
Operating Temperature -15 to 55°C (5 to 131°F)
Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
IP Rating IP22 (IP65 models available on request)
Anti-Vibration 0.7 g @ DNV2.4 (Class A), sine wave, 2-100 Hz, 1 Oct./min.,
1.5 hr per axis;
1 Grms @ DNV2.4, random wave, 3-100 Hz, 2.5 hr per axis;
2.1 g @ DNV2.4 (Class C), sine wave, 2-50 Hz, 1 Oct./min., 1.5
hr per axis
Power Requirements
Input Voltage 24 VDC (18 to 36 VDC), screw-type terminal block;
100 to 240 VAC, AC power inlet
Power Consumption 40 to 75 W
Standards and Certifications
Safety UL/cUL, CCC
EMC EN 55022 Class B, EN 55024-4-2, EN 55024-4-3,
EN 55024-4-4, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Marine IEC 60945 4th, IEC 61174, IEC 61162, DNV2.4, IACS E10
Reliability
Automatic Reboot Trigger Built-in watchdog timer (WDT), configurable for resets following
1-255 second hang intervals; software programmable
Dimensions
Fig. 241. PanelPC MPC-2240X dimensions

Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit UPS6

General
This Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is designed to prevent blackouts,
brownouts, sags and surges from reaching computer with MFD. This UPS also filters
out small utility line fluctuations and isolates equipment from large disturbances by
internally disconnecting from the utility line, while supplying power from its internal
batteries until the utility line returns to safe level.
UPS6 consists of following Phoenix modules:
• EMC Filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A;

• Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20;
• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20;
• Battery Module 24 V DC, 3.4 Ah QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH (7.2 or 12 AH).
QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 Primary-Switched Power Supply

with SFB technology, 1 AC, output current 20 A
Description
QUINT POWER power supply units – highest system availability due
to SFB technology.
Compact power supply units of the new QUINT POWER generation maximize the
availability of your system. Even the standard power circuit-breakers can be tripped
reliably and quickly with the SFB technology (Selective Fuse breaking Technology)
and six times the nominal current for 12 ms.
Defective current paths are is connected selectively, the defect is limited and the
important system parts remain in operation. A comprehensive diagnostics is carried
out by continuously monitoring the output voltage and current. This preventive
function monitoring visualizes the critical operating modes and reports them to the
control unit before an error occurs.
Features
• Quick tripping of standard power circuit breakers with dynamic SFB technology
power reserve;
• Reliable starting of difficult loads with static POWER BOOST power reserve;
• Preventive function monitoring;
• High degree of operational safety due to high MTBF >500,000 h, long mains
buffering times >20 ms, high dielectric strength up to 300 V AC.
Ordering Data
Product: Primary-switched power supply with SFB technology, 1 AC, output current 20 A.
Type: QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20.
Order No: 28668776.

Technical Data
• Input data:
– Nominal input voltage range: 100...240 V AC;
– Input voltage range: 85...264 V AC, 90...350 V DC;
– Short-term input voltage: 300 V AC;

– Frequency range: 45...65 Hz (0 Hz at DC input);

– Current consumption: approx. 5.1 A (120 V AC) and 2.3 A (230 V AC);
– Inrush current limitation <20 A (typical);
– Power failure bypass: >20 ms (for 120 V AC) and >20 ms (for 230 V AC);
– Typical response time: <0.5 s;
– Protective circuit: transient surge protection varistor;
– Input fuse, integrated: 12 A (slow-blow, internal);
– Recommended backup fuse: circuit breaker 10 A or 16 A (characteristic B);
– Discharge current to PE: <3.5 mA;
– Stripping length: 7 mm.
• Output data:
– Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC ±1%;
– Setting range for the output voltage: 18...29.5 V DC (>24 V constant capacity);
– Output current: 20 A (-25...+70°C), 26 A (with POWER BOOST,
<40°C permanent), 120 A (with SFB technology, 12 ms);
– Derating: from +60°C 2.5% per Kelvin;
– Control deviation: <1 % (change in load, static 10%...90%), <2% (change
in load, dynamic 10%...90%), <0.1% (change in input voltage ±10%);
– Power loss nominal load max: 46 W;
– Maximum power dissipation idling: 10 W;
– Efficiency: >93% (for 230 V AC and nominal values);
– Ascent time: <0.5 ms;
– Residual ripple: <80 mVpp (with nominal values);
– Connection in parallel: yes, for redundancy and increased capacity;
– Connection in series: yes;
– Surge protection against internal surge voltages: yes, limited
to approx. 35 V DC;
– Resistance to reverse feed: max. 35 V DC;
– Stripping length: 7 mm.
• Signal output DC OK active:
– Output description: Uout >0.9 Un: high signal;
– Voltage: +24 V DC;
– Current: ≤1 A (short circuit resistant);
– Status display: “DC OK” LED green/Uout <0.9 Un: LED flashing.
• Signal output DC OK floating:
– Output description: relay contact, Uout >0.9 Un: contact closed;
– Voltage: ≤30 V AC/DC;
– Current: ≤1 A;
– Status display: “DC OK” LED green/Uout <0.9 Un: LED flashing.

• Signal output POWER BOOST active:

– Output description: Iout < In: high signal;
– Voltage: +24 V DC;
– Current: ≤1 A (short circuit resistant);
– Status display: LED “BOOST”, yellow/Iout > In: LED on.
• General Data:
– Insulation voltage input/output: 4 kV AC (type test)/
2 kV AC (routine test);
– Insulation voltage input/PE: 3.5 kV AC (type test)/2 kV AC (routine test);
– Insulation voltage output/PE: 500 V DC (routine test);
– Mounting position: on horizontal NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 60715.
– Degree of protection: IP20;
– Protection class: Ι, with PE connection;
– MTBF: >500,000 h according to IEC 61709 (SN 29500);
– Housing version: steel sheet, zinc-plated;
– Weight: 1.7 kg;
– Dimensions (width height depth) state of delivery: 90 130 125 mm;
– Dimensions (width height depth) 90° tuned: 122 130 93 mm.
• Ambient conditions:
– Ambient temperature (operation): -25°C... 70°C (>60°C derating);
– Ambient temperature (storage/transport): -40°C... 85°C;
– Max. permissible relative humidity (operation): 95% (at 25°C, no
condensation).
Dimensions
Fig. 242. Power supply unit QUINT PS/1AC/24DC/20 dimensional drawing

Fig. 243. EMC filter ME-MAX/NEF/QUINT20A dimensional drawing
Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit for Universal Use

Description
• Uninterruptible Power Supply Units for Buffering Long-Term Power
Interruptions;
• Saves space thanks to the compact, uniform design;
• Integrated diode saves money through isolation of loads;
• Maximum system availability through optimum battery management and reliable
signaling;
• Minimum installation time due to ready-to-use plug-in bridges and integrated
timeout.
QUINT-DC-UPS uninterruptible power supply units with long-life lead-acid batteries
provide long buffer times at high currents. Even in the event of a longer supply
voltage failure, the units ensure that all connected devices continue to operate
without interruption.
The devices have a narrow and uniform design, which makes them ideal for use on
the DIN rail where space is limited. In addition, short wiring paths ensure order and
clarity in the control cabinet.
The high level of availability and the particularly long service life of the battery
modules are achieved through professional battery management. An automatic
presence check (every minute), automatic quality test (once a week), temperature-
determined charging, and electronic over current protection ensure the battery
modules are ready to operate at all times. Power is therefore available in the event
of an error and the service life of the battery module is maximized.

The actual state must be determined quickly so that the right decision can be made
in an emergency. Optimum signaling is thus required for maximum system
availability. Three floating PDT contacts and three LED’s are provided for function
monitoring, which indicate all the operating states clearly.
So that relay signaling is more reliable and more durable than before, an additional
positive supply output has been provided. The contact, which is current-limited
and resistant to continued short circuits, is located next to the relay connections
and enables easy bridging. In the event of wiring errors, the shortcircuit protection
prevents any welding of the relay contacts. This ensures that the user can rely on
an OK signal. Even in the event of connection errors, currents remain below
100 mA, which prevents damage to the relay contacts.
A system is switched off after a specific time that can be set on the device or by
an external signal.
No additional installation is required for shutdown. In addition, ready-to-use plug-in

bridges minimize the installation time.
The connected devices can be divided into buffered and unbuffered loads using the
isolated input. This extends the buffer time, which depends on the output current.
If only critical devices are protected using fuses, smaller battery modules can be
used that save money and space in the control cabinet. In addition, the isolated
input protects the connected devices against errors in the internal network.
Ordering Data
Product: Uninterruptible power supply unit.
Type: QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20.
Order No: 2866239.
Technical Data
• Input data:
– Nominal input voltage: 24 V DC;
– Input voltage range: 22.5–30 V DC;
– Current consumption (no load/charging/maximum): 0.1 A/2.0 A/22.0 A;
– Switching threshold: Ua <22 V; dynamic Uin -1 V/0.1s;
– Buffer time (can be configured): 0.5; 1; 2; 3; 5; 10; 15; 20; 30; continuous;
– Input fuse: internal, 25 A;
– Maximum power dissipation (ready/buffer mode): 15 W/20 W.
• Output data:
– Can be connected in parallel (battery module): yes, to increase the buffer
time.
• Output data in normal operation:
– Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC;
– Output current: 20 A;
– Current limit: None;
– Overload fuse: Internal, 25 A.

• Output data in buffer mode:

– Nominal output voltage: 24 V DC;
– Output voltage (maximum): 27.9 V DC;
– Output current: 20 A;
– Current limit: 27 A;
– Overload fuse: electronic;
– Level of efficiency (typical): 95%;
– Remote shutdown: yes.
• Charging:
– Charge characteristic curve: I/U characteristic curve;
– End-of-charge voltage: temperature compensated;
– Charge current: <2.5 A;
– Battery presence check/time interval: 60 seconds;
– Battery quality test/time interval: 180 hours.
• Memory medium: external:
– Nominal voltage: 24 V DC;
– Nominal capacity: 3.4 Ah, 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah;
– Charge current: <2.5 A.
• Signaling:
– Power In OK: green LED;
– Alarm: red LED, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A, maximum;
– Battery mode: yellow LED, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A,
maximum;
– Battery charge: yellow LED, flashing, floating PDT, 30 V AC/DC, maximum;
1 A, maximum.
• General data:
– Insulation voltage (Input/output to housing): 1 kV AC type test/1 kV AC routine
test;
– Mounting position: on a horizontal 35 mm (1.378 in.) DIN rail EN 60715;
– Class and degree of protection: II, IP20;
– MTBF According to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500): >500,000 h;
– Housing version: AluNox (AlMg1), closed;
– Dimensions (W H D) default upon delivery: 66 130 125 mm;
– Dimensions (W H D) rotated 90°: 122 130 69 mm;
– Weight (approximately): 0.8 kg.
• Ambient conditions:
– Ambient temperature (operation): -25°C... 70°C (>60°C derating);
– Ambient temperature (storage/transport): -40°C...85°C;
– Max. permissible relative humidity (operation): 95% (at 25°C, no cond.).

Dimensions
Fig. 244. UPS unit QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 dimensional drawing
Battery Modules 24 V DC
Technical Data
Technical data of Battery modules presented in the table below:
Table 105. Battery modules technical specification
Technical data/Type QUINT- QUINT- QUINT-
BAT/24DC/3.4AH BAT/24DC/7.2AH BAT/24DC/12AH
Order No. 28 66 34 9 28 66 35 2 28 66 36 5
Nominal voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC
Nominal capacity 3.4 Ah 7.2 Ah 12Ah
Max. charging current 0.8 A 1.8 A 3.0 A
End-of-charge voltage (at 20°C) 27.6 V 27.6 V 27.6 V
Buffer period 20 A/4,5 min. 20 A/10 min. 20 A/22.5 min.
25 A/3 min 40 A/4,5 min 40 A/9 min
Nominal output current, max. 25 A 50 A 50 A
Output fuse, internal 25 A 2 25 A 2 25 A
Connection in parallel, Yes
to increase the buffer time
Degree of protection/ IP20/III
Protection class
Service life (years) 6 (20°C)
Housing Galvanized sheet steel
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 112 145 123 164 156 123 231 156 123
Weight approx 3.54 kg 6 kg 9 kg
Rechargeable battery type Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic
UP-RW1220P1 LC-R127R2PG LC-RA1212PG

Dimensions
Fig. 245. QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH battery dimensional drawing
Fig. 246. QUINT-BAT/24DC/7.2AH battery dimensional drawing
Fig. 247. QUINT-BAT/24DC/12AH battery dimensional drawing

Fig. 248. Battery modules mounting brackets dimensional drawing
Weidmüller UPS
CP DC UPS 24V 20A/10A
General
The UPS control unit together with the associated battery module and the power
supply unit form a complete DC UPS system. In normal operation, the input voltage
from the UPS control unit is connected directly to the load. In the event of a mains
failure (drop of the DC input voltage) the system switches instantly to battery
operation.
Once the mains supply has been restored, the system switches back to normal
operation and the battery is fully recharged by the integrated charger.
Three relay outputs, as well as three additional active transistor outputs and a
control input to lock battery operation, provide full remote control by means of SPS
or DCS control. Numerous modes of operation and an easy-to- use status display
provide rapid fault diagnosis and optimum customisation to the application.
Fig. 249. Module CP DC 24V 20A/10A

Technical Data
Table 106. CP DC 24V 20A/10A technical characteristics

Dimensions and weights
Width x Height x Depth 66 x 130 x 150 mm
Weight 980 g
Net weight 1,146 kg
General Data
Operating temperature -25 °C...70 °C
Storage temperature -40 °C...85 °C
Humidity 5...95 %, no condensation
Buffer times Depending on the connected battery
Current limiting > 120 % In
Housing version Metal, corrosion resistant
Degree of efficiency ≥ 96% normal mode, battery is being charged,
≥ 98% normal mode, battery is charged,
≥ 98% buffer mode
MTBF > 500,000 h acc. to IEC 1709 (SN29500)
Clip-in foot Metal
Protection against reverse voltages from the 32…34 V DC
load
Storage medium 3.4 Ah, 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah, 17 Ah,
Selectable with rotary switch
Mounting position, installation notice Horizontal on TS35 mounting rail, with 50 mm of
clearance at top and bottom for air circulation. Can
be mounted side by side with no space in between.
Power loss < 10 W
Short-circuit protection Yes
Surge voltage category III
Order No. 1370050010
Battery module
Parallel connection option [battery] Yes, max 2
Storage medium [battery] 3.4 Ah, 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah, 17 Ah,
Selectable with rotary switch
Rated voltage 24 V
Integrated battery charger
Battery availability test Every minute
Charging feature IU characteristic curve
Charging current 0.15 CA
Charging voltage (temperature compensated) 27, 48 V @ 20°C
Temperature coefficient - 48 mV / °C
Operating interfaces and control inputs
DIP switch Inversion of transistor outputs,
Operation without temperature probe
Selector switch battery 1.3 Ah, 3.4 Ah, 7.2 Ah, 12 Ah, 17 Ah, No Battery,
Service
Temperature probe NTC 100 kΩ
Remote disconnection (Interlock) Yes
Selector switch buffer times 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min, 30 min,
45 min, ∞, ∞ w/0
Output current selector switch 20 A, 10 A
(CP DC 24V 20A/10A)
Input
Input current ≤ 13 A for 10 A, ≤ 23 A for 20 A

DC current consumption Max. 200 mA (without battery), max. 0.5 A (with fully
charged battery)
Max. approved input current 28 A
DC input voltage range 20...30 V DC
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Input fuse (internal) Yes
Wire connection method Screw connection
Output
Output current, max. 24 A
Output voltage Vo = Vin - 0.2 V normal operation (Imax), Vo = Vin -
0.3 V battery operation (Imax)
Overload protection Yes
Powerboost @ 24 V DC, 60 °C 24 A for 1 min, ED = 5 %
Rated (nominal) output current @ Unom 20 A @ 60 °C
Residual ripple, breaking spikes < 50 mVss @ 24 V DC, In
Continous output current @ 24 V DC 24 A @ 45 °C, 20 A @ 60 °C, 15 A @ 70 °C
Parallel connection option Yes, max 2., Yes, with diode module
Protection against inverse voltage Yes
Rated output voltage 24 V DC ± 1 %
Temperature coefficient - 48 mV / °C
EMC/Shock/Vibration
Noise emission acc. to EN55022 Class B
Interference immunity test acc. to EN 61000-4-2 (ESD), EN 61000-4-3 and
EN 61000-4-8 (fields), EN 61000-4-4 (burst),
EN 61000-4-5 (surge), EN 61000-4-6 (conducted),
EN 61000-4-11 (dips)
Vibration resistance IEC 60068-2-6 2.3 g
Shock resistance IEC 60068-2-27 30 g in all directions
Insulation coordination
Insulation voltage, input/output 1 kV DC
Class of protection III, with no ground connection, for SELV
Pollution severity 2
Electrical isolation, input-earth / output-earth 1 kV
Electrical safety (applied standards)
For use with electronic equipment Acc. to EN50178 / VDE0160
Electrical machine equipment Acc. to EN60204
Protection against dangerous shock currents Acc. to VDE0106-101
Safety extra-low voltage SELV acc. to EN60950, PELV acc. to EN60204
Protective separation / protection against VDE0100-410 / acc. to DIN57100-410
electrical shock
Connection data (input)
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, max. 6
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, min. 26
Conductor cross-section, flexible, min. 0.5 mm²
Wire connection cross section, flexible (input), 16 mm²
max.
Conductor cross-section, rigid, min. 0.5 mm²
Conductor cross-section, rigid, max. 16 mm²
Reverse polarity protection Yes

Tightening torque, max. 1.5 Nm

Tightening torque, min. 1.2 Nm
Connection data (output)
Conductor cross-section, flexible, max. 16 mm²
Connection data (signal)
Wire connection cross-section, flexible 16 mm²
(signal), max.
Wire connection cross-section, flexible 0.5 mm²
(signal), min.
Wire cross-section, AWG/kcmil [Signal], max. 12
Wire cross-section, AWG/kcmil [Signal], min. 26
Wire cross-section, solid [Signal], max. 16 mm²
Wire cross-section, solid [Signal], min. 0.5 mm²
Wire connection method [Signal] Screw connection
Signalling
Floating contact Yes
Status indicator Three-colour LED: battery capacity > 85% green,
> 40% yellow, > 20% red, < 20% red (blinking),
Green/yellow LED: normal / buffering, Yellow/red
LED: temperature alarm / alarm, Yellow/red LED:
switch off / battery fault
Status relay (max. load) Fault (alarm) (30 V AC/DC 0.1 A), Battery operation
(buff.) (30 V AC/DC 0.1 A), Laden (Charg.)
(30 V AC/DC 0,1A)
Dimensions
Fig. 250. CP DC 24V 20A/10A dimensional drawing

Power Supply Unit PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A

General
PROmax offers diverse solutions for demanding automation.
Our high performance and durable PROmax switchmode power supply units are
designed for especially demanding requirements. PROmax reliably copes with
continuous overload of up to 20% or short-term peak loads of 300% occurring with
high control cabinet temperatures.
High boost capability and full power are also made possible in a wide temperature
range. Our switch-mode power supply units can be used around the world and are
also suitable for confined spaces thanks to their low width.
Together with our uninterruptible DC USPs, the diode modules or CAP modules, you
can create a power supply solution that is tailored to your requirements.
Fig. 251. Module PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A
Technical Data
Table 107 PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A technical characteristics

Width x Height x Depth 90 x 130 x 150 mm [3.543 x 5.118 x 5.905 inches]
Weight 2.000 kg
Net weight 2.000 kg
Temperatures
Operating temperature -25 °C...70 °C
General Data
AC failure bridging time @ Inom Min. 20 ms
Current limiting > 120 % In
Housing version Metal, corrosion resistant
Degree of efficiency 92 %
Earth leakage current, max. 3.5 mA
Indication LED red/green and relay (≥21.6 V DC LED green,
relay on/ ≤20.6 LED red, relay off)
MTBF >500.000h (25°C, IEC 61709)
Derating > 60°C / 75% @ 70°C
Power loss, nominal load 41.7 W
Power loss, idling 4.8 W
Protection against reverse voltages from the 30…35 V DC
load
Protection degree IP20
Start-up ≥ -40 °

Series switching capability Yes

Mounting position, installation notice Horizontal on TS35 mounting rail, with 50 mm of
clearance at top and bottom for air circulation. Can
be mounted side by side with no space in between.
Power factor (approx.) > 0.95 @ 230 V AC
Order No. 1478140000
Input
AC current consumption 2,3 A @ 230 V AC / 4,8 A @ 115 V AC
DC current consumption 1,5 A @ 370 V DC / 4.8 A @ 120 V DC
Frequency range AC 45...65 Hz
Input fuse (internal) Yes
Rated input voltage 100...240 V AC (widerange input)
AC input voltage range 85…277 V AC
DC input voltage range 80...370 V DC
Input fuse Yes
Inrush current max. Max 15 A
Recommended back-up fuse Recommended back-up fuse 16 A, Char. B circuit
breaker, 10 A, char. C circuit breaker
Output
Output current 20 A
Output voltage 22.5...29.5 V (adjustable via potentiometer on front)
Output voltage type DC
Output power 480 W
Powerboost @ Urated 24 A (1 min), 30 A (4s), 100…240 V AC
Rated output voltage 24 V DC ± 1 %
Rated (nominal) output current @ Unom 20 A @ 60 °C
Residual ripple, breaking spikes < 50 mVss @ Unenn, Full Load
Continous output current @ Urated 24 A @ 45 °C, 15 A @ 70 °C
Parallel connection option Yes, max 3
Pulsed current capacity @ Urated 60 A (2ms)
EMC/shock/vibration
Vibration resistance IEC 60068-2-6 2.3 g
Interference immunity test acc. to EN 55024, EN 55022, IEC61000-3-2,-3,
IEC61000-4-2,-3,-4,-5,-6,-8,-11
Shock resistance IEC 60068-2-27 30 g in all directions
Class of protection I, with PE connection
Insulation voltage 4 kV input/ouput; 3.5 kV input/earth; 0.5 kV
output/earth
Pollution severity 2
Electrical safety (applied standards)
For use with electronic equipment Acc. to EN50178 / VDE0160
Electrical machine equipment Acc. to EN60204
Protection against dangerous shock currents Acc. to VDE0106-101
Safety extra-low voltage SELV acc. to EN60950, PELV acc. to EN60204
Protective separation / protection against VDE0100-410 / acc. to DIN57100-410
electrical shock

Safety transformers for switch-mode power Acc. to EN 61558-2-17

supplies
Wire connection cross section, flexible (input), 4 mm²
max.
Connection system [Input] Screw connection
Screwdriver blade 0.8 x 4.0, PZ 1
Number of terminals [Output] 3 for L/N/PE
Conductor cross-section, flexible, max. 4 mm²
Connection system [Output] Screw connection
Screwdriver blade 0.8 x 4.0, PZ 1
Number of terminals [Output] 8 (++,---,11,13,14)
Signalling
Contact load (NO contact) Max. 30 V DC / 1 A
Status indication LED red/green and relay (≥21.6 V DC LED green,
relay on/ ≤20.6 LED red, relay off)
Floating contact Yes
Dimensions
Fig. 252. PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A dimensional drawing

CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH/12AH

General
The Weidmüller battery modules consist of high-quality Panasonic batteries. These
are sealed, maintenancefree lead-fleece batteries. The battery modules are fitted
with a temperature sensor to provide optimum battery charging and battery life.
This facilitates temperaturecompensated charging of the batteries.
The neat design as well as the plug-in connections for the battery connection and
the temperature sensor allows the batteries to be fitted safely and quickly.
Fig. 253. CP A BATTERY 24V DC3.4AH
Fig. 254. CP A BATTERY 24V DC12AH
Technical Data
Table 108. CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH/12AH technical characteristics

Width x Height x Depth 108x144x137 mm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
229x155x134 mm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Weight 3.6 kg (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
9.22 kg (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Net weight 3.660 kg (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
9.12 kg (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
General Data
Operating temperature 0 °C...40 °C
Ambient temperature 0°...+40°C (Charging); -15°…+50°C (Discharging)
Max. perm. air humidity (operational) 5...95 % RH
Battery type Maintenance-free AGM lead-acid battery
Latest commissioning 9 months
Operating life 6…9 years @ 20°C
Series switching capability No
Vibration DIN rail/wall in accordance with 0.7 / 0.7 g
IEC 68-2-6
Clip-in foot Metal
Shock wall acc. to IEC 68227 30 g

Order No. 1251070000 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);

1251090000 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Input
Charging current, max. 0.51 A (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
1.8 A (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Rated input voltage 24 V DC
Output
Buffer time 10 A 11.3 min (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
51 min (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Buffer time 20 A 5 min (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
22.7 min (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Buffer time 40 A 9.2 min (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Output current, max. 25 A (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
50 A (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Overload and short circuit protection 25 A fuse (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
2 x 25 A (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Protection against inverse voltage Yes
Parallel connection option Yes
Class of protection III, with no ground connection, for SELV
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, max. 10 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, min. 22 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, flexible, min. 0.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
0.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Wire connection cross section, flexible (input), 6 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
max. 16 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Conductor cross-section, rigid, max. 6 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
16 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Tightening torque, max. 0.6 Nm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
1.5 Nm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)
Tightening torque, min. 0.5 Nm;
1.2 Nm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC12AH)
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, max. 10 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, AWG/kcmil, min. 22 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, flexible, min. 0.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, flexible, max. 6 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Conductor cross-section, rigid, max. 6 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Tightening torque, max. 0.6 Nm (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Tightening torque, min. 0.5 Nm;
Number of terminals [Output] 2 (+ / -)
Connection data (signal)
Wire connection cross-section, flexible 1.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
(signal), max. 1.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH)

Wire connection cross-section, flexible 0.2 mm²

(signal), min.
Wire cross-section, AWG/kcmil [Signal], max. 16 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Wire cross-section, AWG/kcmil [Signal], min. 28 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC3.4AH);
28 (CP A BATTERY 24V DC12AH)
Wire cross-section, solid [Signal], max. 1.5 mm² (CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH);
Wire cross-section, solid [Signal], min. 0.2 mm²
Wire connection method [Signal] Pluggable screw connection
Number of terminals [Signal] 2
Dimensions
Fig. 255. CP A BATTERY 24V DC Battery dimensions
Fig. 256. CP A BATTERY 24V DC 3.4AH dimensional drawing

Fig. 257. CP A BATTERY 24V DC 12AH dimensional drawing
Transas BAM/BNWAS Components

WAGO Ethernet Programmable Fieldbus Controller 750-882
Table 109. WAGO 750-882 Fieldbus controller specification
Device Data
Width 62 mm
High (from upper edge of DIN 35 rail) 65 mm
Length 100 mm
Weight Approx. 160 g
Degree of protection IP 20
System Data
Number of controllers Limited by ETHERNET specification
Transmission medium Twisted Pair S/UTP, STP 100 Ω Cat 5
Bus coupler connection RJ-45
Max. length of fieldbus segment 100 m behind hub and 750-882
Max. length of network 2000 m
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Protocols MODBUS/TCP (UDP), HTTP, BootP, DHCP,
DNS, FTP
Programming WAGO-I/O-PRO CAA
IEC-61131-3 AWL, KOP, FUP (CFC), ST, AS
Max. number of socket links 3 HTTP, 15 MODBUS/TCP, 10 FTP,
5 for IEC-61131-3 programs,
2 for WAGO-I/O-PRO CAA
Powerfail RTC Buffer At least 6 days (This value is valid for brand-new
devices with an ambient temperature of 25 °C.
The guaranteed buffer time for the real time clock
is reduced with rising temperature and operating
time
Number of I/O modules - with bus extension 64;
250
Configuration Via PC
Program memory 1024 kByte
Data memory 512 kByte
Non-voltatile memory (retain) 32 kByte (16 kByte retain, 16 kByte flag)
Supply
Voltage supply DC 24 V (-25% ... +30%)
Input current max. 500 mA at 24 V
Efficiency of the power supply 90 %

Internal current consumption 450 mA at 5 V

Total current for I/O modules 1700 mA at 5 V
Isolation 500 V system/supply
Voltage via power jumper contacts DC 24 V (-25 % ... +30 %)
Current via power jumper contacts max. DC 10 A
Fieldbus MODBUS/TCP
Input process image max. 2040 Byte
Output process image max. 2040 Byte
Input variables max. 512 Byte
Output variables max. 512 Byte
Accessories
Miniature WSB Quick marking system
WAGO-I/O-PRO CAA
Wire Connection
Wire connection CAGE CLAMP®
Cross section 0.08 mm² ... 2.5 mm² / AWG 28-14
Stripped lengths 8 ... 9 mm / 0.33 in
Power jumper contacts Blade/spring contact, self-cleaning
Voltage drop at Imax. < 1 V/64 modules
Data contacts Slide contact, hard gold plated 1.5 μm,
self-cleaning
Climatic Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature range 0 °C ... 55 °C
Storage temperature range -20 °C ... +85 °C
Relative humidity max. 95 % without condensation
Resistance to harmful substances Acc. to IEC 60068-2-42 and IEC 60068-2-43
Maximum pollutant concentration at relative SO2 ≤ 25 ppm;
humidity < 75% H2S ≤ 10 ppm
Special conditions Ensure that additional measures for components
are taken, which are used in an environment
involving:
– dust, caustic vapors or gases;
– ionization radiation
Note: Reduced buffer time at high storage temperature!

Ensure that the storage of devices with a real time clock at high temperatures leads to a
reduced buffer time for the real time clock.
Mechanical strength
Vibration resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6,
Comment to the vibration resistance:
a) Type of oscillation:
sweep with a rate of change of 1 octave per
minute 10 Hz ≤ f < 57 Hz, const. Amplitude 0,075
mm 57 Hz ≤ f < 150 Hz, const. Acceleration 1 g;
b) Period of oscillation:
10 sweep per axis in each of the 3 vertical axes
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27,
Comment to the shock resistance:
a) Type of impulse: half sinusoidal;
b) Intensity of impulse:
15 g peak value, 11 ms maintenance time;
c) Route of impulse:
3 impulses in each pos. And neg. direction of the
3 vertical axes of the test object, this means 18
impulses in all
Free fall Acc. IEC 60068-2-32,
≤ 1m (module in original packing)

Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button Dimensions

The Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button dimensional drawings are presented below:
Fig. 258. Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button housing box cut-out dimensions
Fig. 259. Alarm Buzzer and Reset Button housing box dimensional drawing

Fig. 260. Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer front panel dimensional drawing
Fig. 261. Reset Button and Alarm Buzzer mounting brackets dimensional drawing
Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40

General
QUINT DIODE provides:
• 100% decoupling of power supplies connected in parallel;

• Can be installed in potentially explosive areas;
• Load currents up to 60 A supported;
• Easy assembly by snapping onto the DIN rail.
Fig. 262. Redundancy module QUINT-DIODE/40

Description
The redundancy module can be used to 100% decouple two power supplies of the
same type, which are connected in parallel on the output side to increase power or
provide redundancy.
The reliability of a power supply determines the availability of individual components

in a system and whether complex systems can function safely.
Redundant connections are designed for supplying systems, which place particularly
high requirements on operational safety. The redundant configuration of the power
supply ensures continuous system availability.
The power supply of a system can be configured redundantly through

the connection of at least two power supply units in parallel. Together they then
supply the connected devices. The connected power supplies must be large enough
that the total current requirements of all devices can be fully met by one power
supply. In the event of an internal fault on one device or a mains voltage supply
failure on the primary side, the other device automatically takes over the complete
power supply without interruption, and vice versa.
Ordering Data
Product: Redundancy module.
Type: QUINT-DIODE/40.
Order No: 29 38 96 3.
Technical Data
• Input data:
– Input voltage, Un/Umax: 24 V DC/< 30 V DC;
– Input current, In: 2x20 A, 1x40 A;
– Transient surge voltage protection using Transil diode: Yes;
– Protection against polarity reversal with diode: Yes, < 60 V;
– Input/output voltage drop: 0.5 V, approximately;
– Maximum power dissipation with nominal load: 20 W, approximately.
• General data:
– Insulation voltage (Input, output/housing): 1 kV;
– Mounting position: S 35 DIN rail according to EN 50 022;
– Can be mounted with spacing: vertical 5 cm (1.969 in.), horizontal 2 cm
(0.787 in.);
– Class and degree of protection: II, IP20;
– Efficiency: > 97%;
– Housing version: AIMg (enclosure), GD-ZnAICu (heatsink);
– Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail: 62x84x102 mm [2.441x3.307x4.016 in.];
– Weight: 0.7 kg, approximately.
• Climatic data:
– Ambient temperature operation: -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F);
– Ambient temperature storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F);
– Humidity: > 95%.

ES6 Dedicated Keyboard with Trackball

General
• ES6 keyboard with Trackball (the ES6 in what follows) is a control unit inside
the Transas systems.
• The ES6 consists of:
– The PC compatible keyboard unit with two fields (QWERTY- and function-
keys);
– Separate trackball unit with trackball, two left buttons (one on each side of
the Trackball), one right button and an optional scroll wheel.
• Power supply 24VDC (-10/+30% according to IEC 60945);
• USB or PS2 connection to computer;
• Up to 7 devices ES6 keyboard or ES6 trackball can be connected via the inbuilt
CAN-bus interface (with connection speed 250 kb) to the same computer;
• USB port on top, connected to computers USB interface, for connection of
external data storage media;
• RS232 interface.
Keyboard Unit Overview

The keyboard unit is made up of basically four parts:
• Plastic front part with holes for keys, indicators and rotational controls,
e.g., Rain, Gain, Dimmer;
• Silicon rubber keypad with contact pads for the QWERTY-keys;
• Printed circuit board with LED’s for background light and indicators, tactile
switches for function keys, rotary encoders, control electronics and connectors;
• Plastic back cover.
Keyboard QWERTY-Field
The keys are designed (looks and feel) and placed in a way to resemble a standard
English-American laptop keyboard.
All keys are backlit with orange/yellow LED’s (Light Emitting Diodes). The keys
are printed with a “hiding-effect”, i.e. the key legends are normally invisible when
not lit. The QWERTY-field is normally not lit, when a key is pressed the backlight
is switched on and this first key press is not sent to the PC. When no key
of the QWERTY-field is pressed for more than 30 seconds, the backlight
will be switched off.
Keyboard Function Field

All function keys have a tactile switch on the PCB to give a distinct “click” feeling.
The tracking keys are printed with a “hiding-effect”, i.e. the key legends are normally
invisible when not lit. They are lit only when the tracking function is active.

Fig. 263. ES6 keyboard view
Functional Keys
Table 110. ES6 Functional Keys
N/N ES6 key/control Function Comment
1 ECDIS To turn on the ECDIS task
2 RADAR To turn on the RADAR task
3 CONNING To turn on the CONNING task
4 AUX Not used
5 TX/STBY To switch on/off TX and STBY
mode
6 SHOW RADAR To backlight the radar picture For RADAR task as you press this
on the screen button and keep it depressed:
Display of ARPA and AIS targets
is turned off;
Turns off CHARTS and MAPS. Display
of chart information is switched to
“Gray transparency” colour
palette;
Display of “Radar Rings” is turned off.
For ECDIS task as you press this
button and keep it depressed:
To turn on the overlay;
Transparency value – 0;
Chart Base display.
As the button is released, the system
returns to the initial display mode
7 SHOW CHART To backlight chart information For RADAR task as you press this
on the screen button and keep it depressed, contours
of chart objects are backlighted.
For ECDIS task as you press this
button and keep it depressed:
Transparency value – 3;
No targets are displayed;
No tides or currents are displayed;
No Add Info objects are displayed.
As the button is released, the system
returns to the initial display mode
8 ALL LAYERS To turn on display of all the
possible chart information layers
9 OVERLAY To turn on/off the Overlay mode


10 DAY/NT To switch successively colour Daylight;
palettes in the MFD Twilight;
Dusk;
Night;
Dusk inverted;
Night inverted
11 AHEAD To turn on the Navigation mode For RADAR task also:
“Ahead” function in the Relative Motion
mode, with Course Up display
orientation, is used for switching
to a new stabilisation course value;
In True Motion the own ship symbol will
shift to the side opposite to the
direction of its motion to a
distance of 2/3 scan radius from
the Plan Position Indicator centre
12 TGT To turn on/off display of ARPA
and AIS targets on MFD screen
13 MOB To turn on the Man Overboard
alarm mode
14 EVENT To make an instant position
recording in the electronic log
15 ST. DISP To turn on presentation of the
Primary Chart Information Set
16 N/H/C UP To switch successively the North Up;
display orientation modes Head Up;
Course Up
17 TM/RM To switch between True Motion
and Relative Motion modes
18 EBL 1 2 To control EBL1 and EBL2. For ECDIS task:
A press on this switches the EBL 1 is shown on the Chart panel
control between EBL1 and EBL2 as a dashed lines.
EBL 2 is shown on the Chart panel
as a dashed lines with another length of
the dash.
By default, the direction of EBL is set
at 0º
For RADAR task:
EBL1 is displayed on the PPI in the
form of a solid light blue coloured line
originating from the centre of the own
ship mark.
EBL2 is displayed on the PPI as
dashed light blue coloured line.
By default, the direction of EBL
is set at 0°
19 EBL ON/OFF To turn on/off EBL
20 VRM 1 2 To control VRM1 and VRM 2. For ECDIS task:
A press on this switches the VRM 1 is shown on the Chart panel
control between VRM1 and as a dashed lines.
VRM2 VRM 2 is shown on the Chart panel
as a dashed lines with another length
of the dash.
By default, VRM1 radius is set to
0.25 mile
For RADAR task:
VRM1 is displayed on the PPI in the
form of a solid light blue coloured ring
with centred on the own ship mark
centre. VRM2 is displayed on the PPI
as dashed light blue coloured ring.
By default, VRM1 radius is set to
0.25 mile
21 VRM ON/OFF To turn on/off VRM1 and VRM2


22 TRACK To turn on the Track Control
mode
23 Qtrack To turn on the mode for creating
a temporary route (Quick Track)
24 STOP To turn off the Track Control
mode
25 ZOOM OUT To reduce the chart display
scale in the ECDIS task.
To reduce the radar picture
scale by one value with a single
press in the RADAR task
26 ZOOM IN To increase the chart display
scale in the ECDIS task.
To increase the radar picture
scale by one value with a single
press in the RADAR task
27 ALARM To display and acknowledge Each press on the button
MFD alarms acknowledges successively active
alarms in MFD system.
The indicator can assume the following

values depending on the alarm status:
The button is highlighted in red,
flashing red indicator – active
unacknowledged alarm;
The button is highlighted in red – active
acknowledged alarm;
The button is not highlighted in red – no
active alarms
28 DIM To control the keyboards’s The illumination intensity is controlled
backlighting by using Dimmer
29 GAIN To adjust the video signal gain
level
30 SEA To adjust the sea clutter
suppressions
31 RAIN To adjust the rain clutter
suppressions

Dimensions
Fig. 264. ES6 keyboard and trackball dimensional drawing
Fig. 265. ES6 keyboard and trackball desktop housing dimensional drawing

Fig. 266. ES6 keyboard flash mounting frame dimensional drawing
Fig. 267 ES6 trackball dimensional drawing
Fig. 268 ES6 trackball desktop housing dimensional drawing

NSI Marine Keyboards and Trackball

Models KSML106 F0001-W-MC1/KSMX106 F0001-W-MC1
This „Duralight“ 106 key backlit keyboard is approved for use with Solas Marine
applications (f.i ECDIS). The keyboard has a multifunctional layout with separate
numerical- and control keypads and integrates a large 50 mm industrial trackball.
Features
• Certificate of Conformity fully compliant with IEC60945;
• User-friendly layout with separate numerical-, control- and function keypads;
• High brightness LED's with fibre optics;
• Illumination of the key legends and contour, the trackball contour and even
customer logo's or trademarks;
• Low power LED's warrant for a long life;
• No external power supply necessary, keyboard port power sufficient;
• Dimmable backlighting at 8 levels by two dedicated keys;
• Intelligent luminosity setting of “numlock” and capslock” LED's;
• White backlighting as standard, other colours on request.
Panel mount version:
• Aluminium carrier and silicone sponge panel sealing;

• Front panel mounting by means of M3 threaded studs;
• Added silicon sponge seal for perfect sealing into the user's panel;
• The rear side components are protected by a covering metal plate.
Technical Data
• Sealing: IP65 sealed;
• Keys: 106 short travel switches, tactile feel switches with 0,3 mm travel and
2,55 N operating force;
• Pointing Device: 50 mm trackball, black epoxy resin ball;
• Output: USB output for keyboard and trackball via shielded cable of 1,8 meter;
• Power requirements: Directly from USB port;
• Operating temp.: -15°C to +60°C;
• Front layer: Black polyester front layer with embossed keys, scratch and
chemical resistant;
• Compass safe distance: 0.2 m (KSML106 F0001-W-MC1), 0.55 m (KSMX106
F0001-W-MC1);
• Dimensions / weight: 432 x 152 x 45 mm / 1,2 kg.

Dimensional Drawings
Fig. 269 KSML106 F0001-W-MC1 dimensional drawing

Fig. 270 KSMX106 F0001-W-MC1 dimensional drawing
Model KSML92 F0001-W-MC1

This „Duralight“ 92 key backlit keyboard is approved for use with Solas Marine
applications (f.i ECDIS). The keyboard features a compact full MF keyboard with
integrated numpad and a large 50mm laser trackball with removable ball.
Features
• Certificate of Conformity fully compliant with IEC60945;
• Compact layout;
• Removable 50 mm laser trackball;
• High brightness LED's with fibre optics;
• Illumination of the key legends and contour, the trackball contour and even
customer logo's or trademarks;
• Low power LED's warrant for a long life;
• No external power supply necessary, keyboard port power sufficient;
• Dimmable backlighting at 8 levels by two dedicated keys;
• Intelligent luminosity setting of “numlock” and capslock” LED's;
• White backlighting as standard, other colours on request.

Panel mount version:
• Aluminium carrier and silicone sponge panel sealing;

• Front panel mounting with holes (for countersunk M4 screws, not
• included);
• Added silicon sponge seal for perfect sealing into the user's panel;
• The rear side components are protected by a covering metal plate;
Technical Data
• Sealing: IP65 sealed;
• Keys: 92 short travel switches, tactile feel switches with 0,3 mm travel and
2,55 N operating force;
• Pointing Device: 50 mm laser trackball, black epoxy resin ball;
• Output: USB output for keyboard and trackball via shielded cable of 1,8 meter;
• Power requirements: Directly from USB port;
• Operating temp.: 0°C to +60°C;
• Front layer: Black polyester front layer with embossed keys, scratch and
chemical resistant;
• Compass safe distance: 0.5 m;
• Dimensions / weight: 385 x 185 x 50 mm / 1,2 kg.

Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 271 KSML92 F0001-W-MC1 dimensional drawing
Trackball Units TSX50 Series

The TSX series are waterproof and vandalproof industrial trackball units and uses
the latest generation of laser trackballs. These trackballs are highly suited for harsh
industrial environments thanks to their robustness and ease of maintenance. They
feature a removable top ring facilitating the cleaning of ball and ball compartment for
use in even the most dusty environments. The concept itself of these laser trackballs
make them waterproof as well.
The use of stainless steel for the various parts ensures the best resistance in salty
or greasy environments. Due to its outstanding sealing, its professional style and its
industrial robustness, this trackball unit is the best suited pointing device for all harsh
or hostile environments, indoor and outdoor.
All panel mount types are supplied with a silicone sponge seal ring for adequate
sealing into the customers' panel or console. A cover plate on the rear side protects
the components.

Fields of applications are very wide : public access- and information kiosks,
internetand entertainment terminals, navigation controls, food industry, processing
industries and many others.
Fig. 272 Trackballs unit TSX50x
Main Features
• 50 mm laser trackball – vandalproof;
• IP65 / IP68 sealed;
• Removable top for easy cleaning of bal compartment;
• Combo PS/2 & USB output.
Connectivity
These combo PS/2 & USB trackball units have a 1,6 meter long shielded straight
cable ended by a USB type A plug. An adaptor to PS/2 is added. No special device
driver is needed, use standard available drivers of your operating system.
Technical Data
• Sealing: IP68 waterproof;
• Carrier plate: brushed stainless steel;
• Ball diameter: 50.8 mm (2'');
• Ball material: polyester;
• Dimensions / weight:
– Panel mount: 100 x 116 x 50 mm / 0.6 kg;
– Enclosed: 200 x 120 x 63 cm / 1,3 kg;
• Lifetime: >/= 2 million ball revolutions;
• Tracking force: nom. 50 grams;
• Output: PS/2 & USB Combo;
• Cable: 1 shielded, straight 1.6 m long;
• Operating temperature: -10°C to +60°C;
• Storage temperature: -25°C to +80°C.

Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 273 Trackballs units TSX50x range dimensional drawing
Raytheon Trackballs
Trackball 50 mm
Fig. 274 Trackball unit 50 mm
Main Features
• 50 mm laser trackball;
• IP23/IP65 Front-Sided;
• PS/2;
• 3 button mouse.

Connectivity
PS/2 trackball units supplied with 3m cable. No special device driver is needed, use
standard available drivers of your operating system.
Technical Data
• Sealing: IP23/IP65 Front-Sided;
• Ball diameter: 50 mm;
• Dimensions:
– Overall Dimensions: 158 x 131 mm;
– Mounting depth: 32 mm;
• Weight: 0.5 Kg;
• Operating temperature: -25°C to +50°C;
• Storage temperature: -25°C to +80°C.
Fig. 275 Trackballs unit 50 mm dimensional drawing

Trackball 38 mm
Fig. 276 Trackball unit 38 mm
Main Features
• 38 mm laser trackball;
• IP23/IP65 Front-Sided;
• PS/2;
• 3 button mouse.
Connectivity
PS/2 trackball units supplied with 3m cable. No special device driver is needed, use
standard available drivers of your operating system.
Technical Data
• Sealing: IP23/IP65 Front-Sided;
• Front plate: 5mm Aluminum, recessed membrane keypad;
• Ball diameter: 38 mm;
• Dimensions:
– Front plate: 96 x 96 x 50 mm;
– Mounting depth: 48±1 mm;
• Weight: 0.5 Kg;
• Operating temperature: -25°C to + 50°C;
• Storage temperature: -25°C to + 70°C.

Fig. 277 Trackballs unit 38 mm dimensional drawing
Hatteland Maritime Multi Displays Series X

General
As a dedicated part of MFD system, the following new types of monitors are used:
• 19” TFT Hatteland HD 19T21 TRD, Series X;
• 24” TFT Hatteland HD 24T21 TRD, Series X;
• 26” TFT Hatteland HD 26T21 TRD, Series X.
Features
The Series X display range is a flexible monitor solution designed and type
approved for the professional maritime segment, where reliability and long life time
are key pre-requisites for the industry. The product range combines stunning design
and technology with innovative features and options, making it all that the integrator
needs for top class type-approved marine systems.
The entry level STD models provide a wide choice of display size and format for
shipboard applications where simple data input (RGB & DVI) is required.
Be it for ship navigation or automation, this range with all it’s possible options
provides a robust and cost effective platform from which to display and manage
data.
The Series X displays feature Glass Display Control™, LED Backlight Technology,
full dimming and multipower as standard, and can also accomodate and combine a
number of options such as multitouch screen, optical bonding, sunlight readability
and ECDIS calibration.
WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
display of ECDIS colors.
Time can be 20-45 minutes depending on the surrounding temperature.

WARNING!
Important Note!
information, particulary when using the night colour tables.
Series X Displays HD 19T21, HD 24T21, HD 26T21 Specification

Table 111. Series X Displays HD 19T21, HD 24T21, HD 26T21 characteristics
Display Type 19” TFT Hatteland 24” TFT Hatteland 26” TFT Hatteland
HD 19T21 HD 24T21 HD 26T21
Part No. 11111416 11111417 11111418
Hatteland Part No. HD 19T21 STD-MAE- HD 24T21 STD -MAE- HD 26T21 STD -MAE-
FAGA FAGA FAGA
TFT Characteristics
TFT technology High Quality TFT with High Quality TFT with High Quality TFT with
LED Backlight; LED Backlight; LED Backlight;
TFT active-matrix liquid TFT active-matrix liquid S-MVA, Active Matrix,
crystal panel; crystal panel, Thin Film Transistor
MVA (Multi-domain RGB Vertical Stripe; (TFT);
Vertical Alignment) MVA LCD Technology RGB Vertical Stripe;
LCD Technology
TFT size 19.0 inch viewable 24.0 inch viewable 25.54 inch viewable
image size; image size – image size – Widescreen,
Aspect Ratio 5:4 Widescreen, Aspect Aspect Ratio 16:10
Ratio 16:9
Native resolution 1280 1024 1920x1080 (FHD) 1920x1200
Pixel pitch (RGB) 0.294 (H) 0.294 (V) 0.276 (H) x 0.276 (V) 0.2865 (H) x 0.2865 (V)
mm mm mm
Response time 20 ms (typical), 25 ms (typical), 20 ms (Tr+Tf)
“black” to “white” “black” to “white”
Contrast ratio 1000:1 (typical) 3000:1 (typical) 1500:1 (typical)
Light intensity 300 cd/m2 (typical) 300 cd/m2 (typical) 350 cd/m2 (typical)
Viewable angle 89 deg. (typical) 89 deg. (typical) 88 deg. (typical)
(Up/Down/Left/Right) (Up/Down/Left/Right) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
Active display area 376.32 (H) 301.056 (V) 531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) mm 550.08 (H) x 343.8 (V)
mm mm
Max colors 16.7 million
Synchronization
Sync signal Digital separate synchronization;
Composite synchronization;
Synchronization on green;
Video signal: Analog RGB 0.7 Vp-p. Input Impedance 75 Ohm
Auto detects VGA -> Auto detects VGA -> WUXGA, interlaced and non
SXGA, interlaced and interlaced
non interlaced
Synchronization Range
Horizontal 31.5 kHz to 91.1 kHz
Vertical 60 Hz* to 85 Hz*Recommended for optimum picture quality
Supported Resolutions and Signals Inputs
Supported VGA: 640 x 480 VGA: 640 x 480 VGA: 640 x 480
resolutions (including 640 x 350); (including 640 x 350), (including 640 x 350),
SVGA: 800 x 600 SVGA: 800 x 600 SVGA:800 x 600
(including 720 x 400); (including 720 x 400), (including 720 x 400),
XGA: 1024 x 768; XGA: 1024 x 768, XGA:1024 x 768,
SXGA: 1280 x 1024* SXGA: 1280x1024, SXGA: 1280x1024,
UXGA: 1600x1200, UXGA: 1600x1200,
FHD: 1920x1080*, FHD: 1920x1080

Display Type 19” TFT Hatteland 24” TFT Hatteland 26” TFT Hatteland
HD 19T21 HD 24T21 HD 26T21
WUXGA: 1920x1200 WUXGA: 1920 x 1200*
*Recommended 1280 x 1024 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1200
resolution (for
optimal picture
quality)
Power supply option 115 & 230VAC – 50/60 Hz + 24 VDC,
Note: You may connect either AC power or DC power or both. In case both
sources are connected, power will be sourced from the AC input. If AC input is
lost, there will be a uninterrupted switch-over to DC input.
Power consumption, 33W (typ)–125 W 40W (typ)–125 W (max) 125 W (max)
operating AC/DC (max)
Mechanical description
Physical dimensions 429.00 [16.89''] (W) x 593.00 [23.35”] (W) x 621.00 [24.45”] (W) x
382.00 [15.04''] (H) x 384.00 [15.12”] (H) x 435.00 [17.13”] (H) x
74.50 [2.93''] (D) mm 70.00 [2.76”] (D) mm 98.20 [3.86”] (D) mm
[inch] [inch] [inch]
Mounting 4 x M6 VESA mounting 280x150 mm, Max 12 mm deep
Weight 7.8 kg / 17.2 lbs 10.1 kg / 22.2 lbs 14.8kg / 32.6lbs
Signal Terminals
DVI-D signal In 1 x 24p DVI (female)
RGB signal In 1 x 15p HD-SUB (female)
SCOM RS-422/485 1 x 5-pin Terminal Block 3.81, non-isolated+Buzzer
SCOM RS-232 1 x 9p D-SUB (female), non-isolated
If Touchscreen 1 x USB TYPE B connector. (female)
AC power IN 1 Std IEC Inlet
DC power IN 1 x 2-pin Terminal Block 5.08
User Controls
Behind front bezel - Power On/Off, On Screen Display Menu, Brightness Control (-/+);
Glass Display Hotkeys (left/right), Mode Status Indicators (ECDIS, Service);
Control™ (GDC) Buzzer (not visible), Light Sensor (not visible)
IP66
Operating Temperature -15 C to +55 C.
Humidity up to 95 %
Storage Temperature -20 C to +60 C.
Humidity up to 95%
IP rating IP66 front - IP22 rear (EN60529)
Compass safe Std: 1.25 m; Std: 1.25 m; Std: 1.25 m;
distance Steereng: 0.75 m Steereng: 0.75 m Steereng: 0.80 m
Safety considerations Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55º C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25 C. This is a necessary prerequisite for a long life and low service costs
Kyokai, CCS - China Classification Society, IACS E10, EU RO MR - Mutual Recognition

Displays HD 19T21, HD 24T21 and HD 26T21 Dimensions
Fig. 278. 19” TFT Hatteland HD 19T21 dimensions


DuraMON 19”/24”/26” Marine Monitors

General
As a dedicated part of MFD system, the following monitors are used:
• DuraMON LED 19” Glass for ECDIS;
• DuraMON WS 24” Glass Wide Screen for Radar & ECDIS;
• DuraMON WS 26” Glass Wide Screen for Radar & ECDIS.
Features
• Standardisation and easy integration;
• Simplicity in operation;
• Modularity & space saving;
• Low weight;
• Long up time and less service;
• High quality display;
• Compliant with IEC 60945 and IACS E10;
• ECDIS/RADAR options;
• Membrane keys with dimmable backlight;
• Backlight dimmable 100% to 0%;

• Keys dimming control options.

• Desk / wall / roof mounting-brackets available.
Table 112. DuraMON 19”/24”/26” displays characteristics
Display Type DuraMON LED 19” DuraMON WS 24” DuraMON WS 26”
Part No. TBD TBD TBD
TFT Characteristics
Display size 19” LCD 24” Wide Screen LCD 26” Wide Screen LCD
Size – active area 19”-376 x 301 mm (4/3) 24”-521,28 x 293,22 mm 26”-550,08 x 343,8 mm
(aspect) (16/9) (16:10)
Pixel pitch 0,294 x 0.294 mm 0,2715 x 0,2715 mm 0,2865 x 0,2865 mm
Luminance 300 Cd/m2 250 Cd/m2 350 Cd/m2
Contrast 2000:1 (typical) 1000:1 (typical) 1500:1 (typical)
Colors 16,7 mill.
Response time 20 ms (BtB) (typical) 14 ms (GtG) (typical) 25 ms (GtG) (typical)
Resolution 1280 1024 1920x1080 1920x1200
View angle 89° (L/R/T/B) (typical) 89° (L/R/T/B) (typical) 88° (L/R/T/B) (typical)
Viewing distance 1,02 m 1,0 m 1,0 m
Materials Front: Sea Water Resistant Aluminium w. black power coating RAL 9005;
Rear: Sea Water Resistant Aluminium w. black power coating RAL 9005
Window Anti Reflection coated front glass
Protection IP65 front / IP20 rear
Input/Output
Video input RGB Analogue 0.7 Vpp positive at 75 Ohm;
Separate sync or sync on green;
Generally all VESA compatible video modes are supported up to 165 MHz (up to
UXGA 60 Hz and WUXGA 60 Hz reduced blanking);
Horizontal sync: 15-100 kHz (automatic);
Vertical sync: 30-85 Hz up to 1280x1024; 30-60 Hz up to 1920x1200
Video input DVI Generally all VESA compatible video modes are supported up to 160 MHz (up to
UXGA 60 Hz and WUXGA 60 Hz reduced blanking);
Special modes supported on request.
Control inputs 1x RS232 – for remote control
Power supply Standard: 90-264 VAC. 50-60Hz input or 18-36 VDC input;
options Optional: Dual power, AC/DC (option)
Power consumption 35 (typ.) - 40 (max.) 30 (typ.) - 35 (max.) 50 (typ.) - 55 (max.)
Compas safe Std:165 cm; Std: 225 cm; Std: 190 cm;
distance Steereng: 105 cm Steereng: 135 cm Steereng: 115 cm
Environmental Conditions
Operating temp. -15 to 55 °C
Storage temp. -25 to 70 °C
Relative humidity 8 to 90 %
Approvals
CE mark EN61000-6-2 & EN61000-6-4
Marine IACS E10 Rev. 5 & IEC 60945 Ed. 4
ECDIS IEC 61174
Radar / Navigation IEC 62388 and IEC 62288
Type approvals DNV
Physical dimensions
Dimensions 429 x 382 x 92,8 (mm) 593 x 384,1 x 76 (mm) 621 x 435 x 96,8 (mm)
(WxHxD)
Weight app. 8 kg app. 11 kg app. 14.5 kg
Bracket Desk / wall / roof bracket and IP22 rear-cover available (optional extra)

Dimensions
Fig. 281. DuraMON LED Glass 19” outline
Fig. 282. DuraMON WS Glass 24” ACDC outline

Fig. 283. DuraMON WS Glass 26” outline
General Considerations on Installation and Operation

The DuraMON GLASS is designed to work at conditions according to IEC 60945.
However, keeping the temperature and vibration level at a minimum will extend the
life time of the product. ISIC recommend operating this product at normal room
temperature (20-25 °C), with the lowest level of vibration and humidity.
DuraMON GLASS Installation
In order to obtain the best possible operating conditions, please note the following
precautions:
• Room for cooling:

When designing the cabinet/console for the DuraMON GLASS, please ensure
that air can flow freely around the cabinet, in order to avoid any unnecessary
rise in temperature. If it is not possible to have an adequate natural airflow, use
a fan to force the airflow to be higher.
• Mounting positions:
To obtain adequate cooling by convection ISIC recommends that the DuraMON
GLASS is mounted at least 30 degrees from horizontal. If this is not possible,
forced cooling must be applied directly to the unit in order not to overheat it.
• Sunlight:
If the unit can be exposed to direct sunlight, there is a potential risk that the unit
can be overheated. Please take measures to prevent direct sunlight. Do also
consider forced cooling on the back of the unit.

DuraMON GLASS Operation

To ensure that colors and luminance on the display is correct in ECDIS applications,
do not use the monitor until the warm-up period has completed.
WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
display of ECDIS colors.
The warm-up period is as follows:

Table 113. DuraMON GLASS operation
Model Day mode Dusk mode Night mode
DuraMON 19 GLASS 1 hour 1 hour 1 hour
DuraMON 24 GLASS 40 min 40 min 40 min
DuraMON 26 GLASS 40 min 40 min 40 min
WARNING!
Important Note!
DuraMON GLASS Connections

Below is a view of optional connections to the monitor. The default inputs are:
power, RS-232, DVI and VGA.
Fig. 284. DuraMON19GLASS connections
Fig. 285. DuraMON24GLASS / DuraMON26GLASS connections

DuraMON GLASS Front Panel Controls (ECDIS and Radar)

The front panel is illuminated and will be dimmed continuously depending on
changing of backlight brightness.
Fig. 286. DuraMON Glass front panel controls
• STATUS:
This LED will illuminate green when the monitor is powered on and red when the
monitor is powered down. The LED will blink green if no active signal is found.
• ECDIS:
This LED will illuminate when the backlight level is at calibrated setting.
• ON/OFF:
This key is used to turn the product on or off. Pressing it will turn the power on,
while holding it pressed will turn the power off. The status light will change from
green to red to indicate it’s powered down. It is important to notice that, when
powered off, the product still consumes some power from the mains.
To cut off the power from the product it is necessary to unplug its power cord
from the mains.
If there is no active signal, the monitor will go to suspend mode until an active
signal is detected. While the monitor is in suspend mode, the status light will
blink.
• MENU:
Pressing this key the Popup menu will appear (see item Popup Menu below for
details).
• UP/DOWN:
Used to adjust backlight or to navigate and adjust settings in menus. Pressing
UP and DOWN together will restore the backlight level to the last selected
ECDIS mode by the serial link.
• ENTER:
This key is used to confirm and to enter the advanced OSD by pressing ENTER
and thereafter MENU while holding ENTER pressed.

Popup Menu
Press MENU button once, and the Popup Menu will appear. While the Popup Menu
is active, no settings sent over the serial link will be executed.
• Press once on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to adjust the backlight level by pressing either up- or down
key.
– For ECDIS calibrated displays, the default value is the value for the backlight
level for ECDIS “Day” mode.
• Press twice on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to default backlight, brightness and contrast by pressing the

ENTER key.
– For ECDIS calibrated displays, the backlight level will be set to the last
selected ECDIS mode by the serial link.
• To leave Popup Menu, press three times on the MENU key.
If color control in the advanced menu is set to user mode, the Popup Menu will
include Brightness and Contrast adjustments.
• Press once on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to adjust the backlight level by pressing either up- or down
key.
• Press twice on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to adjust the brightness level by pressing either the up- or
down key.
– Default value is 50.
• Press three times on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to adjust the contrast level by pressing either the up- or
down key.
– Default value is 50.

• Press four times on the MENU key:
– It is now possible to default backlight, brightness and contrast by pressing the

ENTER key.
– For ECDIS calibrated displays, the backlight level will be set to the last
selected ECDIS mode by the serial link.
• To leave Popup Menu, press five times on the MENU key.
MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X Marine Displays

General
As a dedicated part of MFD system, the following monitors are used:
• MOXA MD-219X 19-inch type approved ECDIS marine display, 5:4 aspect ratio,
1280 x 1024 resolution;
• MOXA MD-224X 24-inch widescreen marine display, 16:9 aspect ratio,full HD
1920 x 1080 resolution;
• MOXA MD-226X 26-inch wide screen marine display, 16:10 aspect ratio, full HD
1920 x 1200 resolution.
The MD-219X/224X/226X series of marine displays come with full range dimming,
wide viewing angles, and optional optical bonding. These displays are built with a
small-profile modular design that allows easier integration into industrial marine
systems, reducing deployment costs and overall time-to-market.
The innovative and user-friendly SavvyTouch display controls offer several unique
features not found on any other marine display console: a proximity sensor for
convenient adjustments in dark conditions, an info button for immediate updates on
hardware status, and a quickswitch to adjust between day, dusk, and night-time
ECDIS modes (for color-calibrated ECDIS models only).
The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays are compliant with IEC 60945, DNV, and
IACS-E10, verifying their resilience and durability in maritime conditions.
Their IP54 rated enclosure provides additional protection against dust and moisture
above and beyond the limits established by these international standards bodies.
ECDIS-approved models are also available, offering an excellent HMI solution for
ECDIS charting and navigation stations.
Features
• High quality LCD with LED backlight;
• Color calibrated for ECDIS compliance;
• Full range dimming, 0 to 100%;
• SavvyTouch™ display controls;
• Built-in RS-232/422/485 interfaces;
• Dual power supplies (AC & DC);
• IP54 (front) / IP22 (rear) rated;
• Optical bonding available on request.

Table 114. MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X displays characteristics
Display Type MD-219X MD-224X MD-226X
Part No. TBD TBD TBD
Display
Panel size 19” viewable image 24” viewable image size 26” viewable image size
size
Panel type MVA
Aspect ratio 5:4 16:9 16:10
Pixels 1280x1024 (SXGA) 1920 x 1080 (WSXGA+) 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
Pixel Pitch (RGB) 0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) 0.282 (H) x 0.282 (V) 0.2865 (H) x 0.2865 (V)
mm mm mm
Response time 20 ms (gray to gray) 25 ms (gray to gray) 15 ms (gray to gray)
Contrast ratio 2000:1 5000:1 1500:1
Light Intensity 300 cd/m2
Viewing angles 178°/178° 178°/178° 176°/176°
Active display area 376.32 (H) x 301.06 (V) 531.36 (H) x 298.89 (V) 550.08 (H) x 343.8 (V)
mm mm mm
Max colors 16.7M (8 bit color)
Display interface VGA input x 1,
DVI-D input x 1
Resolution VGA: 640 x 480; VGA: 640 x 480; VGA: 640 x 480;
SVGA: 800 x 600; SVGA: 800 x 600; SVGA: 800 x 600;
XGA: 1024 x 768; XGA: 1024 x 768; XGA: 1024 x 768;
SXGA: 1280 x 1024 SXGA: 1280 x 1024; SXGA: 1280 x 1024;
WSXGA+: 1920 x 1080 WSXGA+: 1920 x 1080;
(optimal setting) WUXGA: 1920 x 1200
(optimal setting)
Serial Interface
Serial standards 1 RS-232 port (DB9),
1 RS-422/485 port, (terminal block)
Optical isolation 4 kV
protection
Serial signals
Front panel
LEDs MENU, brightness, INFO, ECDIS, Day/Dusk/Night
Smart OSD Yes
Housing Aluminum sheet metal
Weight 7.8 kg 12 kg 15.2 kg
Dimensions 429 x 387 x 75 mm 595 x 393 x 75 mm 621 x 440 x 90 mm
(16.89 x 15.24 x 2.95 (23.43 x 15.47 x 2.95 in) (24.45 x 17.48 x 3.57 in)
in)
Mounting VESA, panel, or desktop mountings
Operating -15 to 55°C (5 to 131°F)
temperature
Storage -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
temperature
Ambient relative 5 to 95% (non-condensing);
humidity Note: If you expect the storage temperature to exceed 40°C, please ensure that
the ambient relative humidity remains below 60%.

Display Type MD-219X MD-224X MD-226X

IP rating Front: IP54,
Rear: IP22
Anti-vibration 0.7 g @ DNV2.4 (Class A), sine wave, 2-100 Hz, 1 Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis;
1 Grms @ DNV2.4, random wave, 3-100 Hz, 2.5 hr per axis;
2.1 g @ DNV2.4 (Class C), sine wave, 2-50 Hz, 1 Oct./min., 1.5 hr per axis
Power Requirements
Input voltage DC: 24 VDC (with tolerance from 18 to 30 VDC, DC: 24 VDC, 6 A or
2-pin terminal block); (18 to 34 VDC, 8 A max.),
AC: 100 to 240 VAC screw-type terminal
block;
AC: 100 to 240 VAC,
50 to 60 Hz, 2 A, AC
power inlet
Power consumption 40 W (max.)
Standards and Certifications
Safety UL 60950-1, CCC UL 60950-1, EN 60950-1,
IEC 60950-1
EMC EN 55022 Class B, EN 55022/24, CISPR 22,
EN 55024-4-2, FCC Part 15B Class A
EN 55024-4-3,
EN 55024-4-4,
FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Marine standards IEC-60945 4th, IEC 60945 4th, DNV, IEC 60945 4th, DNV,
and type approval IEC-61162, IEC-61174, IACS E10, IEC 61174 IACS E10, IEC 61174
DNV 2.4 and
IACS E10, ABS
Green product RoHS, cRoHS, WEEE
WARNING!
We recommend taking the following precautions to minimize heat build-up within the
display:
• Position the display within ±40° of the vertical.
• Install an external fan to increase airflow upwards through the display if
(a) the display is not positioned within ±40° of the vertical,
(b) the ambient temperature exceeds 25°C, or
(c) the display is used in a location with minimal ventilation.
55°C, it is best to ensure that the ambient temperature does not exceed 25°C. Doing
so will increase the life of your display and minimize service costs.

Appearance
Fig. 287. MOXA MD-219 display

Dimensions
Fig. 290. MOXA MD-219 display dimensions
Fig. 291 MOXA MD-224 display dimensions

Fig. 292. MOXA MD-226 display dimensions

The MD-219X/224X/226X displays come with SavvyTouch display controls situated
in the lower right corner of the screen. These intelligent buttons will light up
automatically when your fingers draw near. Refer to the following table for more
information on each button.
Table 115. Display control buttons

Name Displayed Control Function/Color Legend
Color
Green Display is powered on and functioning normally
Red No input signal detected. Display on standby
Power
Off Power is down and the display is off
White +: To increase brightness of panel
-: To decrease brightness of panel
Brightness
Off AC/DC power functioning normally
Red AC/DC power error
Info
White Switch between DAY/DUSK/NIGHT brightness modes
Off Panel brightness out of ECDIS default range
Display mode
WARNING!
Important Note!

WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
Please note, that it take some time for the display to warm and providing
correct display of ECDIS colors.
Placement Guidelines
Before installing and mounting the MD-219X/224X/226X series displays, please
read the following notes:
1. The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays are designed for various installation or

mounting methods, including desktop mounting, panel mounting, and VESA
mounting. Please refer to the relevant mechanical drawings in the next sections.
2. Good ventilation is necessary to prolong the life of the product. The chassis
heat-sink area MUST keep clear from other heat generating items, or the
motherboard could be damaged. The minimum distance is 150 mm.
3. Keep sufficient space for ventilation improvement, cable inlet or wiring
installation, and maintenance purposes.
4. DO NOT install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), since the heat
from inside the unit will not dissipate effectively, resulting in damage to the LCD
panel. We recommend installing the unit in a vertical position (±30 degrees) for
better heat dissipation.
5. Exposure to extreme direct sunlight may cause a considerable increase in the
temperature of the unit, and under certain circumstances might cause the
temperature to increase beyond the recommended value. Be sure to keep this
point in mind when planning the placement of bridge equipment (sun shades,
distance from the windows, ventilation, etc.).
6. Exposure to strong vibration or acoustic noise might affect functionality and
expected lifetime. During system assembly and installation, be sure to mount
the display carefully to avoid exposure to amplified vibrations.
7. For maximum safety, at least two people should work together to lift, place, and
fasten the display to its mounting point. Before you lift or move the display, first
verify that any power to the system is turned off. In addition, make sure you
have prepared the correct screws for panel mounting.
Fig. 293. Desktop mounting

Installation Notes
Follow these steps when installing the MD-219X/224X/226X series display:
1. Fasten the mounting kit on the display first, and then mount the display.
2. Connect cables (DVI-D, VGA, Power cord, etc).
3. Power on the MD-219X/224X/226X series display, and then power on the
computer.
Desktop Mounting
The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays come with optional brackets that allow you
to install it on a horizontal surface, such as a desktop. Three round screws are required
for each bracket. See the figure below for detailed screw specifications and their torque
values.
Fig. 294. MD-219X/224X/226X desktop mounting

Fig. 295. MD-219X desktop mounting
Fig. 296. MD-224X/226X desktop mounting
Place your MD-219X/224X/226X on a clean, flat, well-ventilated desktop. For better

ventilation, leave some space between the MD-219X/224X/226X series display and
other equipment.
Do not place equipment or objects on top of the MD-219X/224X/226X series display,

as this might damage the display’s internal components.

Note: These desktop brackets are intended for temporary use when conducting lab
tests, and are not intended to be used in permanent deployments.
Panel Mounting
The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays come with 14 optional clamp mounts that
allow for installation onto a wall (where space has been cut out to accommodate the
rest of the hardware) or into computing stations where a flush mount is desired.
The maximum thickness of the surface to which the display can be clamped is
11 mm.
For a secure mounting, use all 14 clamps (for MD-226 and MD-224 models) or 10
clamps (for MD-219 models). The clamp arms are fastened into slots on all four
sides of the MD-219X/224X/226X series displays.
To fasten the clamp arms to the MD-224 mounting slots as shown in the following
figure, use the short M4 SUS (stainless) screws. Then, use the clamps to fasten the
display to its mounting point. Note the torque values shown in the figure below.
Fig. 297. MD-219X/224X/226X panel mounting
Fig. 298. MD-219X/224X/226X panel mounting

VESA Mounting
The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays also come with an optional VESA
mounting kit. Six flat screws and four round screws are required to fasten the VESA
mounting bracket. See the figure below for detailed screw specifications and torque
values.
An additional four screws (not included in the kit) are required to mount the display
on a VESA rack. For this purpose, use M6 screws with a length between 10 and 12
mm.
Fig. 299. MD-219X VESA mounting



Safety Precautions
ATTENTION!
Safety First!
Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or wiring your MD-219
Series.
Wiring Caution!
Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire and common wire.
Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire
size. If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring could overheat,
causing serious damage to your equipment.
Temperature Caution!
Be careful when handling the unit. When the unit is plugged in, the internal
components generate heat, and consequently the outer casing may feel hot to the
touch.
We recommend taking the following precautions to minimize heat build-up within the
display:
• Position the display within ±40° of the vertical;
• Install an external fan to increase airflow upwards through the display if (a) the
display is not positioned within ±40° of the vertical, (b) the ambient temperature
exceeds 25°C, or (c) the display is used in a location with minimal ventilation.
Important Safety Precaution!
55°C for marine applications, it is best to ensure that the ambient temperature does
not exceed 25°C. Doing so will increase the life of your display and minimize service
costs.
Grounding
Be sure to ground the MD-219X/224X/226X series displays before powering it on.
Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic
interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw to the grounding
surface prior to connecting the power.
Fig. 302. Grounding
ATTENTION!
This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded mounting surface, such as
a metal panel.

Powering On/Off MD-219X/224X/226X Series Displays

To power on the MD-219X/224X/226X series displays you may connect the Terminal
Block to Power Jack Converter to the MD-219X/224X/226X series DC terminal block
(located on the bottom surface) and then connect a power adapter; or, alternatively,
you may power the device with the AC power cord. Touch the MENU button (in the
lower right corner of the display panel) for 1 second or use a UART command (MCC-
0x9F-Power Down/Up Display) to turn on the display.
To power off the MD-219X/224X/226X series, touch the MENU button for 4 seconds
until the green LED light of the MENU button turns off, or use a UART command
(MCC-0x9F-Power Down/Up Display) to turn off the display.
Fig. 303. Grounding
Note: If the MD-219X/224X/226X series display is powered using a DC converter,

an “OFF” message will appear when the INFO dialog displays the AC power
status and vice versa. This will not affect the MD-219’s operation.

The MD-219 Series comes with five SavvyTouch display control buttons located on the
front surface. These intelligent controls will light up as your hand draws near the area
of the screen where they are located.
Fig. 304. Control Buttons
MENU
To configure the panel display settings, open the on-screen display (OSD)
configuration panel by pressing the MENU button. The LCD panel will then display a
configuration menu superimposed over the currently displayed image. The MENU
button is for opening and closing the OSD, and brightness buttons "+/-" for
navigating the OSD menus.
The MENU button operates like a power button in that it enables users to turn the
display on and off. When you press the button for 1 second, the display will power
on and indicate the status with a solid green color.
To power off the MD-219X/224X/226X series display, press and hold the MENU
button for 4 seconds to turn the display and MENU button LED to OFF. On the OSD
MAIN MENU page, use the same action to confirm or exit.

Brightness
Two brightness buttons are available for brightness control. Press the + button to
increase the brightness of the panel; press the – button to decrease the brightness
of the panel. On the OSD MAIN MENU page, the + and - buttons are used to
increment and decrement values, and to move up and down between options.
INFO
The INFO button indicates the display status for power components, including AC
and DC. “ON” indicates that the display is working well. An OFF message will be
shown when the AC or DC power is not working.
Fig. 305. System status
Note: If the the MD-219X/224X/226X series display is powered using a DC

converter, an “OFF” message will appear when the INFO dialog displays the
AC power status and vice versa. This will not affect the MD-219’s operation.
ECDIS
The ECDIS button is specially designed to support ECDIS for maritime applications.
Touch the button to switch between the three different brightness modes (DAY,
DUSK, and Night).
Fig. 306. System status
Note: Pressing the ECDIS button will override the display's current brightness
setting.

Connecting Data Transmission Cables

Connecting MD-219X/224X/226X Series Display to Computer
Use a serial cable to connect your computer to the display's serial port. The serial
port uses a male DB9 connector and terminal block. It can be configured by a UART
command or OSD control. Only one of the three interfaces (RS-232/422/485) can be
used at the same time. The pin assignments are shown in the following diagrams:
Fig. 307. Connecting display's serial port to computer
Configuring RS-232/422/485 Serial Ports

For configuring the RS-232/422/485 serial port, open the on-screen display (OSD)
configuration panel by pressing the MENU button. The LCD panel will then display a
configuration menu superimposed over the currently displayed image. The OSD
controls consist of five LEDs (MENU, BR+/-, Info, and ECDIS).
Select the Management→Communication menu item:
Fig. 308. Configuration of the serial port

Set up serial communication mode for remote control and/or accessing internal
information about the unit, including brightness, firmware version, and other values.
• RS232 = Sets to use standard RS-232 protocol through DB9 connector.

• RS422 = Sets to use standard RS-422 protocol through terminal block
connector.
• RS4852W = Sets to use RS-485 protocol (Half duplex) through terminal block
connector.
• Address RS = Set the unit address (0x00 to0x0F).
Connecting Video Input Cables

The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays come with VGA and DVI-D inputs,
allowing you to connect two computers or laptops. Pin assignments are shown
below:
Fig. 309 Connecting video input cables

Connecting the Built-in Buzzer

The MD-219X/224X/226X series displays come with a built-in buzzer terminal block
located on the bottom of the product. It is normally used to connect more buzzers.
Fig. 310. Connecting the Built-in Buzzer
AHD 1119 G Display

General
The display with Glass Front AHD 1119 G visualize the vessel’s data and devices.
The display AHD 1119 G has a screen a screen diagonal of 19”.
The displays can be operated by a PC connected to their USB port. They can be
remote controlled by e.g. the Control Unit for Color Displays and Monitors with
Rotary Push Drive AHD-DRM R, Control Unit for Color Displays and Monitors with
Trackball AHDDRM T, and Control Unit for Color Displays AHD-DC.
The display AHD 1119 G can process visualization data from several video sources.
The user can comfortably select the desired video source with the press of a button.
High luminosities ensure good readability even during strong sunlight. When cruising
at night, the automatic dimming with adjustable minimum brightness ensures glare-
free operation of the displays AHD 1119 G. Thermal protection automatically
reduces screen brightness at high temperatures to prevent equipment damage and
reduce energy consumption.
Structure
Fig. 311. AHD 1119 G structure

(1) – Visualized ship data:
Data drawn from a connected video source are shown in this section of the screen.
(2) – DEFAULT key:
Resets the display to the default setting.
(3) – DISPLAY BRILLIANCE keys:

These keys set the display’s minimum brightness.
(4) – SOURCE/ON/OFF key:
This key switches the display 1119 G on and off and selects the video source.
DVI, VGA, and FBAS are available.
Designed for bulkhead or console installation, the display AHD 1119 G includes all
electronics and standardized plug connections in a single, compact unit.
Due to the passive cooling system, fans and vents can be omitted from the housing,
allowing the greatest degree of tightness.
Specially developed for maritime use, this box is completely maintenance free.
Device Electronics
The display AHD 1119 G include an internal voltage control which ensures the
required supply voltages. Therefore, the device’s supply voltage (24 V DC) from the
external distribution can vary in the range from 18 V DC to 32 V DC (+30%/-25%).
Software
The current function-relevant software versions of the device are displayed on the
screen for at least 5 seconds when powering up the display (switching on the main
power supply) as well as when the SOURCE/ON/OFF key is pressed long.
Viewing Angle
The display on the screen can be best viewed from above at an angle of less than
80° to the vertical plane of the screen, from the sides at an angle of less than 70°,
and from below at an angle of less than 40°.
Fig. 312. Viewing angle from above and below
Fig. 313. Viewing angle from the side

Interfaces
• CAN-Bus: 2 x CAN-bus interfaces operate the remote bus, by which the display
AHD 1119 G can be remote controlled via e.g. the Control Panels AHD-DRM R,
AHD-DRM T, and the Control Unit for Color Displays
AHD-DC. For technical reasons, the interfaces on the device are designated as
CAN 5 and CAN 6.
• RS232: the integrated RS232 interface is used for internal purposes of the
display AHD 1119 G.
• LAN: LAN interface is used for internal purposes of the display AHD 1119 G.
• USB: 1 x USB Out Touch (coupling A) is used to connect an external computer
operating the display AHD 1119 G.
• Video: 1 x Video IN each (50 Hz PAL, DVI, best resolution:
1280 x 1024, VGA, best resolution : 1280 x 1024).
Technical Data
Table 116. Technical specification
Description Value/Unit/Type
General Data
Dimensions, W x H x D 454 x 384 x 91.5 mm
Panel Cutout, W x H 424 x 352 mm
Req. Installation Depth min. 140 mm
Weight appr. 12 kg
Environmental Data
Operating Temperature -30°C…+55°C (-30°C…70°C at an internal console
temperature of max. +45°C)
Storage Temperature -50°C…+85°C
Req. Minimum Distance to Compass Steering Magnetic Compass: 100 cm;
Standard Magnetic Compass: 170 cm
Protection Class IP 56 (frontside);
IP 20 (rear)
Electrical Data
Power Supply 24 V DC (+30 / -25%)
Power/Current Consumption appr. 60 W
Interfaces
2 x CAN
1 x RS232
1 x LAN
1 x USB Out Touch (coupling A)
1 x Video IN (50 Hz, PAL)
1 x Video IN (DVI)
1 x Video IN (VGA)
Display
Resolution 1280 x 1042 Pixel (H x V; max., SXGA);
Pixel Pitch 0.294 mm
Luminosity 1200 cd/m²
Classifications
GL, RS
Device Class according to EN 60945:2002 B (protected against weather)

Dimensions
Fig. 314. AHD 1119 G dimensions
Fig. 315. AHD 1119 G panel cutout and drill holes

Device Connections
Fig. 316. AHD 1119 G connectors
Installation and Initial Startup
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from improper handling and selection of installation
locations!
Installing the products in locations that to not meet the requirements of the technical
specifications and improper handling can lead to system errors and equipment
damage.
Therefore:
• Observe the products’ technical specifications when selecting the installation
location.
• Only trained personnel may perform the installation.
• Never install the products in areas that are not of the required protection type.
• Never install the products in extreme high or low temperature areas.
• Never install the products on ceilings that cannot support their weight.
• Never bump or shake the products vigorously.
• Install the products in such a manner that unauthorized persons cannot access the
interfaces used for the configuration.
• Install the products in such a manner that the cooling system cam function
properly.
Installation Requirements
• All required connecting cables are of the required version, equipped with plug
connectors according to technical specifications or project drawings, led to the
intended installation location, and are properly installed and stripped.
Free cables are of sufficient installation length and are secured against short
circuit and earth fault.
• The product is not connected to the supply voltage and switched off-circuit.

ATTENTION!
For the installation the required minimum distance to compass must be observed.
• Steering magnetic compass: 100 cm.
• Standard magnetic compass: 170 cm.
In exceptional cases (for example on smaller ships) a lower distance can be
selected in consultation with the responsible shipping authority.
• Steering magnetic compass: 60 cm.
• Standard magnetic compass:105 cm.
ATTENTION!
Observe the correct installation angle when installing the display.
The installation angle is 40° – 90° to the horizontal plane.
A smaller installation angle can affect the visualized data’s visibility.
Please observe the instructions regarding the viewing angle above in item “Viewing
Angle”.
Fig. 317. AHD 1119 G installation angle to the horizontal plane
ATTENTION!
Ensure that the interfaces can be accessed when installing the display!
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from insufficient cooling!
If the display is not sufficiently cooled, equipment damage or system errors can
occur.
Therefore:
• Only install the devices in housings/panels with air vents.
• Select an installation depth that allows an airstream to circulate for cooling the
devices.
The distance between the cooling element and the housing/console wall must be at
least 70 mm to ensure sufficient cooling.

CAUTION!
Equipment damage and system errors when not earthed!
If the display is not earthed, equipment damage or system errors can occur.
Therefore:
• Earth the device when installing! Use the earth bolt installed on the device rear to
earth the device!
Fig. 318. AHD 1119 G earthing
Installation
1. Install the AHD 1119 G properly in the intended installation location according to
technical specifications or project drawings.
2. Wire all inputs and outputs of the unit according to project drawings.
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from incorrect cable connections!
Improperly connected cables can cause system errors and equipment damage.
Therefore:
• Always verify cable and wire designations before connecting them. Check for
secure seating of the connecting wires in the terminals.
• To avoid short circuits, verify that all wires are connected in the terminal.
• To not over tighten the terminal clamps.
• When using pluggable terminal strips or plug connectors, it is imperative to ensure
insertion in the correct socket and secure seating.
3. Test the system for earth/ground fault.

CAUTION!
System failure or malfunction from missing ground!
During earth/ground fault, incorrect data can be transmitted and lead to overall
system failure or malfunctions.
Therefore:
• Immediately correct any discovered earth/ground fault.
• Console Installation.
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from insufficient cooling!
If the display is not sufficiently cooled, equipment damage or system errors can
occur.
Therefore:
• Only install the devices in housings/panels with air vents.
• Select an installation depth that allows an airstream to circulate for cooling the
devices. The distance between the cooling element and the housing/console wall
must be at least 70 mm to ensure sufficient cooling.
Fig. 319. AHD 1119 G cooling
• Correct Installation.
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from incorrect installation!
Installing the display incorrectly can lead to equipment damage.
Therefore:
• Ensure that the surface is straight and even, so that the device does not warp and
there are no gaps in the seals!
• Always install the device so that it is straight (use mounting frame). Do not tilt!
• Ensure that there is no tension on the bolts, and do not tilt the bolts (drill the
corresponding holes exactly)!
• Tighten the bolts with a maximum torque of 3 Nm (use a torque wrench!).

Initial Startup
Startup Requirements
• The display AHD 1119 G is properly installed and equipped with all required
connections.
• All external devices connected to the display has also been installed according
to technical specifications or project drawings and are operational.
• All required power supplies are available and error free.
• The display and all connected external devices are not connected to the power
supply or are switched off-circuit.
1. Establish the 24 V DC power supply for the intended display according to
technical specifications or project drawings.
2. Establish the power supply for all devices connected to the display according to
their respective operating manuals.
3. Test the power supplies.
CAUTION!
Equipment damage from improper voltage!
Connecting an incorrect supply voltage can lead to equipment damage.
Therefore:
• Review all relevant project documents and operation manuals of the devices used
and verify their correct supply voltage and polarity before connecting them.
4. Switch on the power supply of the AHD 1119 G and all connected external
devices from the corresponding circuit breakers in the power distribution and the
device internal starting devices according to the corresponding operation
manuals.
5. When the power supply of the display has been established, the device displays
the start page.
6. Log any errors or functional deviations that may occur and correct errors
through proper measures, referring to the errors described in the chapter titled
“Errors.”
7. You may need to review the installed configuration and adjust it to the
necessary operating conditions. Log the final configuration for the project
documentation.
Operation
Powering the Monitor On
WARNING!
Earth before power-up!
Earth the device with its earth bolt before power-up (see above item “Installation
Requirements”).
The monitor of the display AHD 1119 G is powered on by holding down the
SOURCE/ON/OFF key.

When the monitor is successfully switched on, the screen lights up and displays the
preset main page.
Powering the Monitor Off
The monitor of the display AHD 1119 G is powered off by holding down the
SOURCE/ON/OFF key.
The displays are automatically switched off when no visualization source is

connected or when a visualization source does not provide any image information.
Using the Keys
The basic functions of the display AHD 1119 G is operated via keystroke,
independent of any possible project specific control via an external PC.
Table 117.Using the keys

Keys Description
The DISPLAY BRILLIANCE keys set the displays’ minimum brightness.
Pressing the key marked “-“ reduces the minimum brightness by 1%.
Pressing the key marked “+” increases the minimum brightness by 1%
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
The DEFAULT key restores the default value for the monitor’s brightness
DEFAULT
The SOURCE/ON/OFF key selects the visualization source and switches
the display on and off.
| Holding down the SOURCE/ON/OFF key switches the monitor of the
SOURCE/ON/OFF display on or off.
Pressing the SOURCE/ON/OFF quickly cycles the preset visualization
sources of the display
in DVI–VGA–VIDEO sequence. If a source is not present, the display
automatically switches to the next.
Brightness Control
WARNING!
Important Note!
WARNING!
Important Note!
Display warm up.
Please note, that it take some time for the display to warm and providing
correct display of ECDIS colors.

The displays of the AHD 11xx G series can be dimmed in several modes:
1. In Mode 1 the brightness is set individually and automatically for each display by
a built-in LDR sensor.
2. In Mode 2 the brightness is set automatically by the LDR sensors built into the
operation panels (AHD-DRM T/R, AHD-DC), that is, the according signal is sent
via CAN to the display.
3. In Mode 3 the brightness of all displays connected to CAN5 or the signals from
their built-in LDR sensors, respectively, are captured and the highest value is
set on all displays, resulting in a similar brightness on all displays.
4. In Mode 4 the brightness is set manually with the keys (+/-) of the device.
To activate the configuration mode, the DEFAULT key must be pressed and held
pressed for at least 3 seconds.
An active configuration mode is indicated by a green blinking DEFAULT key. At the
same time, the (+) key is blinking red and white twice.
The currently set mode can be recognized from how often the (+) key blinks in red,
before blinking in white twice again (1x red / 2 x white = Mode 1; 2 x red / 2x white =
Mode 2 and so on).
By pressing the (+) key the mode can be changed in steps:
• From 1 to 2, from 2 to 3, from 3 to 4, from 4 to 1.

By pressing the DEFAULT key for at least 3 seconds the settings are applied and
the configuration mode is quit.
Manually setting the brightness of the displays is only possible after setting Mode 4
in configuration mode and returning to normal operation. In this mode the display’s
brightness is set to 50% by default (user offset) and can be changed by pressing
either the (-) or the (+) key.
Note: At elevated temperatures, the screen brightness can be automatically reduced

with the built-in thermal protection.
Aspect Ratio Setting

The displays of the AHD 11xx G series allow changing the aspect ratio in order to
accurately display various external video signals. The aspect ratio can be set in
configuration mode.
Note: This instruction is valid only for devices of the 2012 series with installed
PRISMA 3A – card!
The displays can be set to 4 different aspect ratio modes.
• Mode 1: Full Screen (standard configuration);

• Mode 2: Letter Box (Expand);
• Mode 3: Pillar Box (Expand);
• Mode 4: Panoramic.
Note: The aspect ratio of the standard visualization cannot be changed!

How to set the aspect ratio:
1. Select the video source you wish to set the aspect ratio for by pushing the
SOURCE button.
2. To activate the configuration mode, press and hold the DEFAULT key for at
least 3 seconds. The DEFAULT key starts to blink.
3. Now push the (-) button until you have reached the desired aspect ratio.
Wait a short moment when you have pushed the button before you push it
again (the software needs some time to accept the new setting).
4. To deactivate the configuration mode, press and hold the DEFAULT key for
at least 3 seconds. The DEFAULT key stops blinking.
Note: Depending on the selected source it may occur that pushing the (-) button
shows no effect. Push the button again until the supported aspect ratio for the
selected source is activated.
Fig. 320. Aspect ratio setting
How to Dim the Display

The displays of the AHD 11xx G series can be dimmed in several modes:
1. In Mode 1 the brightness is set individually and automatically for each

display by a builtin LDR sensor.
2. In Mode 2 the brightness is set automatically by the LDR sensors built into
the operation panels (AHD-DRM T/R, AHD-DC), that is, the according signal
is sent via CAN to the display.
3. In Mode 3 the brightness of all displays connected to CAN5 or the signals

from their built-in LDR sensors, respectively, are captured and the highest
value is set on all displays, resulting in a similar brightness on all displays.
4. In Mode 4 the brightness is set manually with the keys (+/-) of the device.
To activate the configuration mode, the DEFAULT key must be pressed and held
pressed for at least 3 seconds.
An active configuration mode is indicated by a green blinking DEFAULT key. At the
same time, the (+) key is blinking red and white twice.
The currently set mode can be recognized from how often the (+) key blinks in red,
before blinking in white twice again (1x red / 2 x white = Mode 1; 2 x red / 2x white =
Mode 2 and so on).

By pressing the (+) key the mode can be changed in steps:
• From 1 to 2, from 2 to 3, from 3 to 4, from 4 to 1.

By pressing the DEFAULT key for at least 3 seconds the settings are applied and
the configuration mode is quit.
Manually setting the brightness of the displays is only possible after setting Mode 4
in configuration mode and returning to normal operation. In this mode the display’s
brightness is set to 50% by default (user offset) and can be changed by pressing
either the (-) or the (+) key.
Fig. 321. Dimming

General Description
The Radar Integrator Board (what’s follow RIB6/RIB6B) is designed for the reception
of analog video signals from the radar and their digitizing, pre-processing and relay
of the radar signal to the dual network as per network protocols for the Transas
navigational products.
The RIB6/RIB6B is intended as means to connect radars from different

manufacturers to a personal computer executing the Transas Navi-Radar and
Navi-Sailor software.
The signal processing is performed in the following order.
At a Trigger signal, the digitizing of the input signal is performed in a pulse sweep
whose size is calculated from the set number of output samples and decimation
coefficients.
The random pulse interference rejection algorithm and pulse matched filter is
implemented. The resulting sector presented at stage “A” in the figure below.
Stage “B” in the figure below presents the result after the azimuth integration
algorithm. The resulting sector shall correspond to the center of all sectors used
in the integration which is presented in stage “C” in the figure below.
The incoming data flow, regardless of the trigger repetition rate and antenna rpm
is reduced to the set number of sectors per an antenna revolution. So before
sending the determined outgoing sector, RIB6/RIB6B has to perform range
compression and sector interpolation of the 16-bits samples related to stage “D” in
the figure below.

Concurrently with the operation of the data reception and processing algorithm, data
is transmitted and received via the RS422 serial port.
Fig. 322. Radar signal processing
Electrical Characteristics
• Control Signal:
– Electrical format: RS422;
– Signal type: binary or alpha numeric (NMEA);
– Information:
TX ON/OFF;
Rotation ON/OFF;
Pulse length;
Trigger PRF;
Magnetron current
Heating;
Tuning indicator;
BIT;
PM control.
• Generic radar video signal:
– Maximum voltage: 25 V;
– Input Impedance: 1.2 kOhm, 75 Ohm, 50 Ohm (manually selectable by
switch);
– Signal type: analog;
– Singled ended;
– The video and the combined video signal shall use the same connector.

• Trigger:
– Input Impedance: 1.2 kOhm, 75 Ohm, 50 Ohm (manually selectable by
switch);
– Signal type: pulse;
– Singled ended and differential input (manually selectable by switch);
– Pulse length is not less than 100 ns. Protection from pulse interference
of less than 50 ns. Implemented by means of a low pass filter;
– Electronic adjustment of the operation threshold within 10 V.
• Azimuth:
– Input Impedance: 1.2 kOhm, or a pull up resistor of 560 Ohm to 12 V power
supply for connection to open collector driver (manually selectable by switch);
– Signal type: pulse;
– Singled ended;
– Rejection of pulse interference is not less than 1 us. Valid pulse assumed to
be at least 2 us;
• Heading:
– Input Impedance: 1.2 kOhm, or a pull up resistor of 560 Ohm to 12 V power
supply for connection to open collector driver (manually selectable by switch);
– Singled ended;
– Rejection of pulse interference is less than 1 us. Valid pulse assumed to be at
least 2 us;
• Output: 2 100 Mbit LAN;
• Power supply: 24 VDC.
Environmental Requirements
• RIB6/RIB6B is for “Protected” category of IEC 60945 standard (temperature
range: from -15 C to +55 C);
• Weight: 1.275 kg.

Dimensions
Fig. 323. RIB6/RIB6B dimensional drawing
Data Collecting Unit DCU6

General
Data Collecting Unit (what’s follow DCU), this device through which is realized
connection of navigational data sources (such as GPS, GYRO, LOG, AIS, etc.)
using NMEA standard (IEC 61162) to Transas Workstations.
DCU power supply is performed with the cable connected to the external 24 VDC
power supply.
The purpose of Data Collecting Unit (DCU) is:
• To convert data from RS 422 to Ethernet and visa versa;

• To share resources (data) between multiple clients.
DCU6 maximum dimensions are shown in the figure below.
General Technical Characteristics

Table 118. Technical characteristics
Input voltage 24 V DC
Power consumption, max 25 W
Humidity (relative, operating and storage) 0–95%, without condensation
EMC IEC 60945 edition 4
Working temperature -15 C…+55 C
Storage temperature -25 C…+70 C
Dimensions 430(+40) 200 44 mm
Weight 2 kg

Interfaces Description
Table 119. Input/Output channels
Description Notes
Quantity 16 RS 422 bi-directional 1–14 ports are RS 422 bi-directional channels.
channels (default 15 and 16 ports are RS 422 bi-directional channels
configuration) by default and may be configured by jumpers X16
and X17 accordingly as follows:
Output channels transmit RS 232 signal;
Input channels receive RS 422 signal
Data format IEC 61162 ed. 1/2
(NMEA 0183)
Any type of binary data
Parity None
Even
Odd
Baud rate 1200 Limitations:
2400 In case if all 16 RS ports will be loaded by bi-directional
4800 data transferring with baud rate between 1200
9600 and 38400 then no more than 25 Transas
Workstations could work with same DCU;
19200
Baud rate 57600 – then no more than 15 Transas
38400 Workstations could work with same DCU;
57600 Baud rate 115200 – then no more than 10 Transas
115200 Workstations could work with same DCU
Data transfer 30 to 255 msec Adjusted by operator
delay
Ethernet 2 (two) LAN 10/100 Mbits/sec
adapters
Dimensions
Fig. 324. DCU6 dimensional drawing

DCU Raytheon NautoPlex 8 / NautoPlex 8plus8
Fig. 325. View of NautoPlex 8 / NautoPlex 8plus8
Technical Data
NautoPlex 8
• Power supply: 24V DC (9 – 36 V DC). In- and outputs: 8x RS422 acc. to IEC
61162-12 x RS232 reversible.
• All channels settable as input or output (extendable to 18 ports!).
• PC interfaces RS232. – The speed of each IEC 61162-1 port is adjustable from
1.200 to 115.200 Baud.
• Network interface 100Mbit.
• Inputs and outputs galvanically and optically isolated.
• Protection category of the housing: IP 54.
• Temperature range (use) of -15°C up to + 55°C (air temperature).
• Storage down to -20°C.
• Power consumption: 1,5 - 2 W.
• Shock and scratch resistant box made of anodised aluminium (powdered).
• Weight: 2 kg (NautoPlec 8) / 2,2 kg (NautoPlex 8plus8)
• Reset-button.
• Status indication (illuminating diode).
NautoPlex 8plus8
Base data NautoPlex 8 see above item NautoPlex 8.
• Additional I/O Board with 8 x Inputs galvanic isolated with DC/DC converter.
• Configurable as contact input (self-generated 24V) or external power supply (9-
30V DC).
• 8 x relays max 50V=/1A per channel.
• Each relays has 2 states (normally open / normally close).
• Status-LEDs for all I/O.
• Simple proprietary NMEA-protocol for control of the I/O over network.
Ambient conditions
• Atmospheric moisture: 20% - 80% rel. air moisture.
• No aggressive or corrosive gases.
• No dirt or dust.
• No electro-magnetic disturbances pursuant to IEC 60945;

• EC Declaration of Conformity for Device Safety Regulations and EMC:

IEC 61162-1 (Third Edition, 2007-04);
IEC 61162-2 (1st Edition, 1998-09);
NMEA 0183;
IEC 60945.
Dimensions
Fig. 326. Dimensional drawing
Connections
Fig. 327. NautoPlex 8plus8 connections

Fig. 328. NautoPlex 8 connections
Software Configuration
Authentication
When starting the software configuration, enter:
• Username: Admin;
• Password: configure.
Device Listing

The next window allows you to request the whole network about your current
devices. By clicking “List devices on network”, you can get, within a few seconds
(indicated by the progress bar), a listing of all the NautoPlex devices available on the
network.
On this example, you can see a list, being populated, of two present multiplexers on
the network, represented by their hostname, IP address, netmask, and default
gateway (which is an optional settings and can be empty).
By double clicking a line of this list, you can then enter the configuration of this
specific multiplexer. The settings of this multiplexer will be downloaded automatically
(see progress bar).
ATTENTION!
To be able to modify the configuration of a multiplexer, the current computer (where
this configuration software is executed) must be in the same subnet as the
multiplexer, at least during configuration. If you double click on a line representing a
multiplexer which is in another subnet, you will get an error message, and will need
to modify your network settings before going any further. If you want to handle the
configuration for a multiplexer that has a version older than 2.3.49.1 (i.e. not
supporting device listing), or if, for some reason, you want to do the whole
configuration manually, you can click on "Manual configuration". You will then have
to download the multiplexer settings manually (see below). Clicking “Exit” simply
closes the complete application.

Settings in the Base Menu “General”
Table 120. “General” page description

Position Description
1 “General”:
The “General” tab is the base menu. Here, the necessary basic settings such as the rate
of recording (interval) or the filters to be set for the different NMEA protocols can be
selected and saved.
2 “IP”:
The IP address of the NautoPlex 8 you want to configure (default is 192.168.2.175).
You must enter it before being able to download a multiplexer configuration (or upload one
to it). To be able to download or upload the configuration from/to the multiplexer, the
computer where the configuration software is executed needs to be in the same subnet as
the multiplexer. With factory settings, this means computer must have an IP address
between 192.168.2.1 and 192.168.2.254 (and different from the one of the multiplexer).
3 “Logging”:
For this filter setting you must have a sufficient knowledge of the NMEA183 protocol or of
the protocols to be used of the different boxes.
4 “Add”:
By clicking the “Add” button, the logging datasets (e. g. GGA) typed into the field (3) is
added to the list (6). The protocols shown in window (6) will be saved according to the
selected interval.
5 “Delete selected”:
The “Delete selected” button deletes the (stored) protocols selected and clicked on once in
the selection window (6) (taken from the storage).
6 “Selected filters”:
In this list are displayed the current filters used for logging. The number of stored filters is
unlimited.
Note that scrollbars appear automatically when the list is too small.
7 “Interval”:
By using the arrow keys or by overwriting the values in the field, you can set the interval
(in seconds) for the logging. Valid values are between 15 and 5000 seconds.
8 “Debug Port”:
This field is used to enter the IP port on which debug information from the box can be
read.
9 “Set Time and Date (UTC)”:
These fields can be used to set a new date and time on the box. The two fields are used to
define the value of the date and time to use, then clicking the button “Set Time and Date
(UTC)” will configure the box to use these as the current date and time. The given values
must be UTC values.

10 “Read Firmware Version”:

By clicking this button, the current version of the box firmware will be displayed
in the field 17.
11 “Save Configuration”:
By using the “Save Configuration” button you save the actual settings of the nautoplex8 on
the computer.
12 “Download Config”:
By using the “Download Config” button you download the actual configuration from the box
and take it over into the configuration software. This will restart the configuration software.
13 “Upload Configuration”:
By clicking on “Upload Configuration”, the new configuration will be transferred to the box.
The box will then restart by self.
14 “Firmware Update”:
This button allows you to update the firmware on the multiplexer. You have then to select
the .insf file which contains the instructions to update the firmware. The required files will
then be updated to the multiplexer, which will automatically restart after the update.
15 “Exit”:
By using the “Exit” button the configuration software NautoPlex 8, NautoPlex 8plus8 is
closed.
16 “Configuration Name / Configuration Date”:
Information fields displaying the name of the current configuration, and the date and time
when it was created.
17 “Firmware Version”:
In this field, the current version of the box firmware is displayed after the user clicks on the
button “Read Firmware Version” (10).
18 “Network configuration”:
See below.
This image represents the software as it is started if the user double-clicked a
multiplexer in the previous step.
If you choose “Manual configuration” the button “Change Network configuration” is

disabled.
Network Configuration of the NautoPlex 8
If you did not choose the "Manual configuration", these fields are enabled and pre-
filled with the current information about the selected multiplexer. You can change
here the IP address, the netmask, the default gateway and the hostname of the
current multiplexer.
By clicking "Change network configuration", you will send this new network
configuration to the multiplexer.
ATTENTION!
The network configuration is independent from the rest of the configuration. All other
settings (port configurations, logging, etc.) must be set by using the "Upload
configuration" function.

• Data validation:
Data validation is done before trying to change the network configuration. If these
controls fail, then an information message is displayed and nothing happens.
The following controls take place:
– The IP address must be of the form X.X.X.X where X are numbers between 0
and 255. Additionnally, the first number must be between 1 and 223
(inclusive), and different from 127.
– The netmask must be of the form X.X.X.X where X are numbers between 0
and 255. It must respect the constraints of a netmask (i.e. as a binary
representation, it must be a continuous sequence of 1 followed by a
continuous sequence of 0). 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255 are forbidden.
– The combination of the IP address and the netmask must make sense: the
"host" part of the IP address (not masked by the netmask) cannot be 0.
– The default gateway can be empty (no default gateway will be used), but if
not, it must be of the form X.X.X.X where X are numbers between 0 and 255.
The first number cannot be 0.
– The hostname can be any combination of small unaccentuated letters (a-z),
capital unaccentuated letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9), dashes (-), underscores
(_) and points (.). It must contain between 1 and 32 characters (inclusive).
This means for example that it can not contain any space.
• After configuration
If these controls succeed, clicking "Change network configuration" will send a
message to the multiplexer for starting the update. The multiplexer should normally
send a reply and reboot.
Waiting for connection after configuration:
ATTENTION!
As the system uses multicast, it can happen that the multiplexer does not reply. After
a few seconds, you should see this window instead.
This does not mean that the modifications were not taken into account, so it is
recommended to restart the configuration software to list the devices on the network
again.
If the multiplexer correctly replied, then, after approximately 30-40 seconds, you
should get a message indicated that the device has restarted.

No response:
Device restart:
You can then go on with the rest of the configuration. If no connection to the
multiplexer, it is possible after approximately 2 minutes, then you get an error
message.
Device did not restart:
You should then check your network configuration and restart the configuration
software.
• Special case: new subnet:

If you changed the IP address and/or netmask of the multiplexer, it can be that the
multiplexer will not be any more in your subnet once it is restarted.
This is indicated by such a message:
In that case, you need to change the network configuration of your own computer, to
put it in the same subnet as the multiplexer before being able to connect to it.

Example Setting Port 0 (Serial Port)
Table 121. “General” page description

1 “Type”:
Here you can define what type of port the current port (in that case, Port 0) is. By clicking
on the “scroll down” button you can chose between:
• Off = port is deactivated;
• Line In = port is fixed as input;
• Line Out = port is fixed as output;
• Line In and Out = port can work both input and output;
• High Speed Line In (50 Hz) = port is fixed as input, with a 50 Hz reading capability
2 “Alias Name”:
At this point it makes sense to enter the product name or the product type of the box which
sends and/or receives data to/from the port. The name can freely be chosen - but it can be
used for a later identification
3 “Speed”:
Here, by clicking on the “scroll down” button you must define the appropriate baud rate (in
this example 4800).
Please only define the baud rate fixed by the transmitter (here GPS).
Please also see the information given under "Filters" and "Buffer Size"!
4 “Parity”:
Here you switch between "None" = no parity, "Even"= equal parity, or "Odd" = odd parity
5 “Stopbits”:
Here, by clicking on the “scroll down” button you can switch between 1 (standard setting)
or 2
6 “Databits”:
Here, by clicking on the “scroll down” button you can switch between 5, 6, 7 and 8
(standard setting)
7 “FlowControl”:
Here you can chose between "off" (standard setting) and "on"
8 “RS422 ON/OFF (default on use RS422)”:
See below item “Port 0 and 1 as RS232 Interface”
9 “Set GPS Time”:
If this field is checked, then the first valid ZDA or RMC sentence coming on this port will be
used to set the new date and time of the multiplexer
10 “Logging on/off”:
Enables logging of the data, using parameters defined above in item “Settings” in the Base
Menu “General”. Should be used for service purposes only

11 “Buffer Size”:
If on one output several inputs (sources) are defined, it sometimes makes sense to
increase the size of the buffer to avoid unnecessary data loss/failure recording. The buffer
can be changed between 5 and 60. The standard setting is 5.
Note that data or signals of several inputs on one output lead to a so called bottle neck.
Please choose the number of inputs always in a meaningful way to avoid unnecessary
failure recording. This is when the data input is bigger than the output can treat.
Example: input = 38000 bits per second and output = 4800 per sec.
Please see the information given under "Filter settings"
12 “Destinations”:
This part is only enabled if the current port (here Port 0) is defined as input
or input/output). In the list are displayed all output (or input/output) ports.
By clicking one or more of these ports, you can define where the incoming data of this port
will be forwarded. For example, here, all the incoming data to Port0 will be transferred to
Port2 (which is an output or an input/output)
13 “Set Dest from Header”:
This checkbox must be checked if you want the incoming data to be routed to a port
depending on its TCP header. The routing using the list as described in point 12 is then
disabled.
Incoming NMEA sentences having a TCP header containing the field d: Alias
(e.g. “\d:GPS2,c:168574.31*A3“) will then be rerouted to the port having the alias Alias
(here GPS2)
14 “Redundancy”:
See below item “Configuration of the NautoPlex 8, NautoPlex 8plus8 Redundancy“
15 “Filters”:
See below item “Configuration of the NautoPlex 8 und NautoPlex 8pus8 Filters”
Port 0 and 1 as RS232 Interface

The ports 0 and 1 can be configured as RS232 interface.
You must pay attention to the following:
• Make sure that the RS232 interface is correctly connected to the appropriate
port (0 or 1), if necessary, connect it (see section 6.5).
• By taking off the check mark in the field "RS422 ON/OFF (default on use
RS422)" in the port (0 or 1) of the configuration you must communicate which
port (0 or 1) is used as RS232 interface.
• The basic setting is a set check mark; this means the interface is defined as
RS422.

Configuration of the NautoPlex 8 und NautoPlex 8pus8 Filters

Filters are important characteristics to enhance the efficiency and performance of
the multiplexer. Especially when data are routed from a fast port or several ports to a
slow port there is a possibility of a bottleneck effect. There are 2 different
possibilities of filtering:
• Output filters let the data sets, which have been set in the filter, pass through
and refuse all others.
• Input filters are barriers, which refuse the data sets that have been set in the
filter.
You can define for each port a list of filters to be applied to this port. A filter is a part
of a NMEA sentence. For example:
• The filter "GGA" will filter "GPGGA" sentences but not "GPGLL" sentences.
• The filter "GLL" will filter "GPGLL" sentences but not "GPGGA" sentences.
• The filter "GP" will filter "GPGGA" sentences and "GPGLL" sentences.
To enable filters, check the Filter On/Off checkbox (1).
Type the filters you want to use in the text field (2) and click "Add" (3).
To remove a filter that has been set, select it in the list (4) and click "Delete
selected" (5).
Configuration of the NautoPlex 8, NautoPlex 8plus8 Redundancy

Redundancy enables you to receive data in order of priority which means that the
ports of low priority are sleeping as long as the port of higher priority are receiving
(valid) data. A port is considered receiving no valid data if it receives:
• No data within 2 seconds or

• Only invalid data within 2 seconds (checksum is examined).
Redundancy does not apply to output ports.
Redundancy filters can also be applied: you can define which type of data must be
received so that the port is still considered receiving valid data.

In the following example, the port 4 is used as a backup for the port 0. As soon as
the port 0 does not receive any NMEA sentence containing GGA or GLL for more
than 2 seconds, then the port 4 will be activated.
If ports of higher priority get data again (here Port0), the settings get automatically
back to the port of highest priority receiving valid data.
To enable Redundancy, check the On/Off checkbox (1).

Set the backup port number in the field (2).
If you want to define filters, check the checkbox "Sentences on/off" (3), then type the
filters you want to use in the text field (4) and click "Add" (5). To remove a filter that
has been set, select it in the list (6) and click "Delete selected" (7).
Network Port Configuration

Table 122. Network port configuration

1 “On/Off“:
As for the other ports, you can choose to enable or disable the network port.
By leaving this checkbox unchecked, no network port will be activated and all other
parameters on this screen will be ignored
2 “Protocol“:
Here you can choose what kind of protocol you want to use for the port, between UDP,
Multicast and TCP.
3 “Type“:
Here you can choose what type of port it will be, between Reader, Writer and Server. Note
that, if you chose the UDP protocol, you cannot choose the Server type
4 “Broadcast“:
Only usable if you chose UDP Reader or UDP Writer. Check it if you want to use a
broadcast address
5 “Set Dest from Header“:
Only usable if you chose Reader or Server. Checking it will disable and ignore the field 10.
If checked, incoming NMEA sentences having a Tag block containing the field d: Alias
(e.g. “\d:GPS2,c:168574.31 *A3“) will then be rerouted to the port having the alias Alias
(here GPS2)
6 “Add Tagblock“:
If checked, all outputs will be prefixed by an Ethernet header of the form
\s:Alias,c:168574.31*A3, containing the Alias of the port and a timestamp
7 “Cut Tagblock to serial output“:
If checked, removes the Tag block of the incoming data, if any, before forwarding it
8 “Destination IP and port”:
Here, you have to enter the destination IP address and port, if you chose a Writer type.
(In case of a Multicast Writer, this must be a multicast group).
If you chose a TCP Reader, you must enter the parameters of the TCP server to which it
should connect
9 “Multicast groups”:
In case of the Multicast protocol, you can define one multicast group for destination if you
chose “Writer”, several multicast groups as input if you chose “Reader” and both of them if
you chose server.
The destination group is to be entered in field 8.
The input groups have to be entered in field 9.
Note that using the Multicast Server type will disable the logging functionality!
10 “Destinations”:
This part is only enabled if the port is defined as reader or server. In the list are displayed
all output (or input/output) ports. By clicking one or more of these ports, you can define
where the incoming data of port 9 will be forwarded
11 “Filters“:
Filters on the network port work the same way as on serial ports.
See above item “Configuration of the NautoPlex 8 und NautoPlex 8pus8 Filters”

I/O Board Activation and Configuration (Only NautoPlex 8plus8)
Table 123. Configuration of I/O Board

1 “enable I/O Board”:
Enable/Disable the I/O Board, all Setting are generated automatically
2 “Portnumber of TCP/IP Server“:
Here you can choose your Port number for communication with the TC/IPServer.
Note that the TCP/IP Server is standard. If other protocol is required (UDP, Multicast etc.,
serial) it is possible by manual configuration. Please contact the service!
3 “Address of I/O Board“:
Here you can change the Address of the I/O Board. Normally the address is given on the
board with 0X20. Change is only required if you have changed the switch on the Board
4 “Add Tagblock“:
If you enable that, Tag block will be added to every NMEA protocol.
See below ”Communication Protocol of the I/O Board”

Communication Protocol of the I/O Board

Client command to set relays:
\d:aaa,c:xxxxxxx.xxx*XX\$NOMSET,2,x1,x2,x3,x4*XX
The red marked part of the telegram is the tag block which is not required.
Parameter Name Description
d: descriptor Destination Destination, aaa is string and contains the name of the
Port in the Nautoplex DefaultValue are “IO1”
c: parameter Timestamp Posix datetimestamp seconds, millseconds
XX Checksum of the Tagblock
$NOMIOP NOM = Talker ID ,SET = command
2 Command number , use number 2 as default , after 2
follow 3 command params
X1 Board number default 0(if only used 1 Board , if more
then 1, 2, 3 Note: numbering begin with 0
X2 Channel number , Note : numbering begin with 0 up to
7, in real it means Relays 1-8
X3 Set on or off , 0 = Off , 1= On
xa Max on time in seconds . If this parameter is set to 0,
the timer does not expire. If this parameter is set for
ex.10 .the relays goes off after 10 seconds if no other
new command is coming
XX Checksum of the telegram
Sample:
\d:IO1,c:1394636245.251*0B\$NOMSET,2,1,1,1,10*10
this command is for the IO Port , and set the second relays (pin1) on board number
1(0) on, if no other command is received within the next 10 seconds, the relays
switch back(off).
Info telegrams from Nautoplex 8, contains the status of all in and outputs:
\s:aaa,c:xxxxxxx.xxx*XX\$NOMIOP,x1,x2,x3,x4*XX
Parameter Name Description

s: descriptor Destination Source, aaa is string and contains the name of the Port
in the Nautoplex DefaultValue are “IO1”
C: parameter Timestamp Posix datetimestamp seconds.millseconds
XX Checksum Checksum of the Tagblock
$NOMSET Talker and Command NOM = Talker ID ,IOP = Status telegram
X1 command param1 Number of Boards (Status values ,HEX Values of every
Board), also gets info how many params follow after this
parameter)
X2 command param1 Hex Value of the first Board (Board1). The first 8 bit
Relays the last 8 Bit are the Inputs 0 = Off(Low)
1=On(High)
XX Checksum Checksum of the Telegram
Sample:
\s:IO1,c:1394639122.412*10\$NOMIOP,2,101,0*47
this telegram sends the status of the IO Port IO1 .It contains the values of 2 Boards
(1param ) . the parameter 2 holds the hex value for Board 1 and parameter 3 the
value of Board 2.
The Hex Value 101 is in binary 0000000100000001.

The green are the Inputs (High byte) and the blue the Outputs(Low Byte).
The least significant bit holds the value of the first input or output.
The most significant bit holds the value of the last input or output.

Network Switch 8xRJ45 EDS-G308

Part No.: 10001511.
Fig. 329. Appearance of network switch EDS-G308
The EDS-G308 switch is equipped with 8 Gigabit Ethernet ports, making it ideal for
applications that demand high bandwidth. The built-in relay warning function alerts
network engineers when power failures or port breaks occur. The EDS-G308 series
can be easily installed with DIN-Rail mounting as well as distribution boxes.
Features
• High Performance Network Switching Technology:
– 10/100/1000BaseT(X) (RJ45), auto negotiation speed, F/H duplex mode, and
auto MDI/MDI-X connection, 100/1000 BaseSFP slot;
– IEEE 802.3/802.3u/802.3ab/802.3z/802.3x;
– Store and Forward switching process type, 1024 address entries.
• Industrial Grade Reliablity:
– Power failure, port break alarm by relay output;
– Redundant dual AC/DC power inputs.
• Rugged Design:
– Extended operating temperature of -40 to 75°C for (-T) models;
– IP30, rugged high-strength case;
– Redundant dual 12/24/48 VDC, or 18 to 30 VAC at 47 to 63Hz Power inputs.
Specification
• Technology:
– Standards: IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT, 802.3u for 100BaseT(X), 802.3ab for
1000BaseT, 802.3z for 1000BaseSX/LX/LHX/ZX;
– Flow control: EEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control.
• Interface:
– RJ45 ports: 10/100/1000BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed;
– LED indicators: PWR1, PWR2, FAULT, 10/100M/1000M;
– DIP switch: Port/power break alarm, broadcast storm protection;
– Alarm contact: One relay output with current carrying capacity
of 1A @ 24 VDC.

• Power Requirements:
– Input voltage: 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60 VDC), or 18 to 30 VAC (47 to 63 Hz),
redundant dual inputs;
– Input current (@ 24 VDC): 0.35A;
– Overload Current and Reverse polarity Protection: Present;
– Connection: One removable 6-pin terminal block;
• Physical Characteristics:
– Housing: IP30 protection, metal case;
– Dimensions (W H D): 53.6 135 105 mm (2.11 5.31 4.13 in.);
– Weight: 850 g;
– Installation: DIN-Rail, wall mounting (optional kit).
• Environmental Limits:
– Operating temperature: -40°C to 75°C (-40°F to 167°F) (T models);
– Storage temperature: -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F);
– Ambient relative humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
• MTBF: 307116 hrs (25°C).
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 330. EDS-G308 dimensional drawing

Network Switch 8xRJ45 IE-SW-BL08T-8TX

Part No.: 10001510.
Fig. 331. Appearance of network switch IE-SW-BL08T-8TX
Features
• 10/100BaseT(X) (RJ45 connector), 100BaseFX (multi/single-mode, SC or ST
connector);
• Redundant dual 12/24/48 V DC, 18 to 30 V AC power inputs;
• IP30 aluminum housing;
• Rugged hardware design well suited for hazardous locations (Class I Div. 2
/ATEX) and maritime environments (DNV/GL);
• -40 to 75 °C operating temperature range.
Specification
• Technology:
– Standards: IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT, 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and
EEE 802.3x for Flow Control;
– Processong Type: Store and Forward;
– Flow control: EEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control.
• Interface:
– RJ45 ports: 10/100BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed, Full-/half-duplex mode,
Auto MDI/MDI-X port;
– LED indicators: Power, 10/100M (TP-Port);
– DIP switch: Broadcast storm protection enable/disable.
– Input voltage: 12/24/48 VDC (9.6 to 60 VDC), 18 to 30 VAC (47 to 63 Hz),
redundant dual inputs;
– Input current (@ 24 VDC): 0.13A;
– Overload Current protection: 1.1 A
– Reverse polarity Protection: Present;
– Connection: One removable 4-pin terminal block.
• MTBF: 425000 h.

– Housing: IP30 protection, aluminium case;
– Dimensions (W H D): 50 115 70 mm (1.96 x 4.52 x 2.76 in);
– Weight: 275 g;
– Type of mounting: mounting rail.
– Operating temperature: -40°C to 75°C (-40°F to 167°F);
– Operating temperature: -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F);
– Ambient relative humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 332. Network switch IE-SW-BL08T-8TX dimensional drawing
Network Switch EDS-G509-T

Introduction
Part No.: EDS-G509-T.
Fig. 333. Appearance of network switch EDS-G509
The EDS-G509 is equipped with 9 Gigabit Ethernet ports and up to 5 fiber optic
ports, making it ideal for upgrading an existing network to Gigabit speed or building
a new full Gigabit backbone. Gigabit transmission increases bandwidth for higher
performance and transfers large amounts of video, voice, and data across a network
quickly. Redundant Ethernet Turbo Ring, Turbo Chain, RSTP/STP, and MSTP
increase system reliability and the availability of your network backbone.

The EDS-G509 series is designed especially for communication demanding

applications, such as video and process monitoring, shipbuilding, ITS, and DCS
systems, all of which can benefit from a scalable backbone construction.
Features and Benefits

• Command Line Interface (CLI) for quickly configuring major managed functions;
• IPv6 Ready logo awarded (IPv6 Logo Committee certified);
• Software-based IEEE 1588 PTPv2 (Precision Time Protocol) for precise time
synchronization of networks;
• DHCP Option 82 for IP address assignment with different policies;
• Support EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP protocols for device management and
monitoring;
• Compatible with PROFINET protocol for transparent data transmission;
• Turbo Ring and Turbo Chain (recovery time < 50 ms @ 250 switches),
RSTP/STP, and MSTP for network redundancy;
• IGMP snooping and GMRP for filtering multicast traffic;
• Port-based VLAN, IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, and GVRP to ease network planning;
• QoS (IEEE 802.1p/1Q) and TOS/DiffServ to increase determinism;
• Port Trunking for optimum bandwidth utilization;
• TACACS+, SNMPv3, IEEE 802.1X, HTTPS, and SSH to enhance network
security;
• SNMPv1/v2c/v3 for different levels of network management;
• RMON for efficient network monitoring and proactive capability;
• Bandwidth management prevents unpredictable network status;
• Lock port function for blocking unauthorized access based on MAC address;
• Port mirroring for online debugging;
• Automatic warning by exception through e-mail, relay output;
• ABC-01 (Automatic Backup Configurator) for system configuration backup.
Specification
• Technology:
– Standards: IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT; 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and
100BaseFX; 802.3ab for 1000BaseT(X); 802.3z for 1000BaseX; 802.3x for
Flow Control; 802.1D-2004 for Spanning Tree Protocol; 802.1w for Rapid
STP; 802.1s for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol; 802.1Q for VLAN Tagging;
802.1p for Class of Service; 802.1X for Authentication; 802.3ad for Port Trunk
with LACP;
– Protocols: IGMPv1/v2, GMRP, GVRP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, DHCP Server/Client,
DHCP Option 66/67/82, BootP, TFTP, SNTP, SMTP, RARP, RMON, HTTP,
HTTPS, Telnet, SSH, Syslog, EtherNet/IP, Modbus/TCP, SNMP Inform,
LLDP, IEEE 1588 PTPv2, IPv6, NTP Server/Client;
– MIB: MIB-II, Ethernet-Like MIB, P-BRIDGE MIB, Q-BRIDGE MIB, Bridge MIB,
RSTP MIB, RMON MIB Group 1, 2, 3, 9;
– Flow Control: IEEE 802.3x flow control, back pressure flow control;

• Switch Properties:
– Priority Queues: 4;
– Max. Number of Available VLANs: 64;
– VLAN ID Range: VID 1 to 4094;
– IGMP Groups: 256;
– MAC Table Size: 8 K;
– Packet Buffer Size: 1 Mbit.
• Interface:
– Fiber Ports: 100/1000BaseSFP slot;
– RJ45 Ports: 10/100/1000BaseT(X) auto negotiation speed;
– Console Port: RS-232 (RJ45 connector);
– DIP Switches: Turbo Ring, Master, Coupler, Reserve;
– LED Indicators: PWR1, PWR2, FAULT, 10/100/1000M, MSTR/HEAD,
CPLR/TAIL;
– Alarm Contact: 2 relay outputs with current carrying capacity of 1 A @ 24
VDC;
– Digital Inputs: 2 inputs with the same ground, but electrically isolated from the
electronics:
+13 to +30V for state “1”;
-30 to +3V for state “0”;
Max. input current: 8 mA.
– Input Voltage: 12/24/48 VDC, redundant dual inputs;
– Input Current: 0.81 A @ 24 V;
– Overload Current Protection: Present;
– Connection: 2 removable 6-contact terminal blocks;
– Reverse Polarity Protection: Present.
– Housing: Metal, IP30 protection;
– Dimensions: 87.1 × 135 × 107 mm (3.43 × 5.31 × 4.21 in);
– Weight: 1510 g;
– Installation: DIN-rail mounting, wall mounting (with optional kit).
– Operating Temperature: Wide Temp. Models: -40 to 75°C (-40 to 167°F);
– Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F);
– Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing).

• Standards and Certifications:

– Safety: UL 508, EN 60950-1;
– EMI: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A, EN 55022 Class A;
– EMS: EN 61000-4-2 (ESD) Level 3; EN 61000-4-3 (RS) Level 3;
EN 61000-4-4 (EFT) Level 3; EN 61000-4-5 (Surge) Level 3;
EN 61000-4-6 (CS) Level 3; EN61000-4-8;
– Marine: DNV, GL, LR, ABS, NK;
– Rail Traffic: EN 50121-4;
– Shock: IEC 60068-2-27;
– Freefall: IEC 60068-2-32;
– Vibration: IEC 60068-2-6;
• MTBF (mean time between failures):
– Time: 330,000 hrs;
– Database: Telcordia (Bellcore), GB.
Dimensional Drawing
Fig. 334. EDS-G509 dimensional drawing

Network Switches IES-0104FT-DNV / IES-0204FT-DNV

Introduction
Fig. 335. Appearance of network switch IES-0104FT-DNV
The IES-0104FT-DNV (4 10/100TX + 1 100FX) and IES-0204FT-DNV (4 10/100TX

+ 2 100FX) industrial switches are a cost-effective solution and meets the high
reliability requirements demanded by industrial applications.
High-Speed Transmissions
Switches provide you with fiber port for your fiber optic cable to make a long-
distance connection. Switches include a switch controller that can automatically
sense transmission speeds (10/100 Mbps). The RJ-45 interface can also be auto-
detected, so MDI or MDI-X is automatically selected and a crossover cable is not
required. All Ethernet ports have memory buffers that support the store-and-forward
mechanism. This assures that data is properly transmitted.
Dual Power Input

To reduce the risk of power failure, switches provide +9 ~ +56 VDC dual power
inputs. If there is power failure, switches will automatically switch to the secondary
power input.
Flexible Mounting
Switches are extremely compact and can be mounted on a DIN-rail or a panel, so it
is suitable for any space-constrained environment.

Advanced Protection
The power line of IES-0104FT-DNV industrial switch support up to 3,000 VDC EFT
protection, which secure equipment against unregulated voltage and make systems
safer and more reliable. Meanwhile, 6,000 VDC ESD protections for Ethernet ports
make switch more suitable for harsh environments.
Wide Operating Temperature
The operating temperature of switches are between -20 ~ 60ºC (standard model).
The industrial switches support the wide operating temperature in the range
between -40 ~ 75ºC (wide operating temperature model). With such a wide range,
you can use switches in some of the harshest industrial environments that exist.
Easy Troubleshooting
LED indicators make troubleshooting quick and easy. Each 10/100 Base-TX port
has 2 LEDs that display the link status, transmission speed and collision status. Also
the three power indicators P1, P2 and Fault help you diagnose immediately.
Features
• IES-0104FT-DNV provides 4 x 10/100TX + 1 x 100FX Mbps Ethernet ports;
• IES-0204FT-DNV provides 4 x 10/100TX + 2 x 100FX Mbps Ethernet ports
• TX ports support full/half duplex flow control;
• Supports MDI/MDI-X auto-crossover;
• IES-0104FT-DNV supports surge (EFT) protection 3,000 VDC for power line;
• IES-0104FT-DNV supports 6,000 VDC Ethernet ESD protection;
• IES-0104FT-DNV provides broadcast storm protection;
• Embedded with a switch controller, supports auto-negotiation;
• Supports store & forward transmission;
• Supports redundant +9 ~ +56 VDC / +12 ~ +36 VAC (optional) power input;
• Provides flexible mounting: DIN-rail, wall mounting;
• W/ wide operating temperature industrial switch can operate in the range of
temperature between -40 ~ 75ºC; the standard model of switch is in the range of
temperature between -20 ~ 60ºC.
Hardware Description
In this paragraph, we will introduce the Industrial switch’s hardware spec, port,
cabling information, and wiring installation.

Physical dimensions
The figures below illustrates the dimensions 30 (W) x 95 (D) x 140 (H) mm for the
industrial switches IES-0104FT-DNV and IES-0204FT-DNV.
Fig. 337. IES-0104FT-DNV and IES-0204FT-DNV network switches dimensions
Front Panel
The front panel of the IES-0104FT-DNV industrial switch is shown as follows.
Fig. 338. Front panel of IES-0104FT-DNV
The front panel of the IES-0204FT-DNV industrial switch is shown as follows.
Fig. 339. Front panel of IES-0204FT-DNV

Top View
The top panel of the industrial switches is equipped one terminal block connector of
two power inputs.
Fig. 340. Top panel
Wiring the Power Inputs

Please follow the steps below to insert the power wire.
1. Insert the positive and negative wires into the V+ and V- contacts on the
terminal block connector.
Fig. 341. Power inputs
2. To tighten the wire-clamp screws for preventing the wires to loose.
Note: The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range between
12~ 24 AWG.
Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact
The fault alarm contact is in the middle of terminal block connector as the picture
shows below. Inserting the wires, it will detect the fault status which the power is
failure or port link failure (for managed model) and form an open circuit.
Insert the wires into the fault alarm contact (No. 3 & 4):
Fig. 343. Fault alarm contact
12~ 24 AWG.

Dip Switch Function

The DIP switch is used to configure power alarm. The default value of DIP switch is
OFF.
Fig. 344. DIP switch
Table 124. DIP switch status

DIP-1 DIP-2 Description
OFF OFF Power failure relay alarm disabled
ON OFF PWR-1 failure, relay alarm enable
OFF ON PWR-2 failure, relay alarm enable
LED Indicators
There are few LEDs display the power status and network status located on the front
panel of the Industrial switch, each of them has its own specific meaning as the table
below.
Table 125. LEDs indicators
LED Color Status Description
On Power input 1 is active
P1 Green
Off Power 1 is inactive
P2 Green
On Power 1 or 2 is inactive
FAULT Red
Off Power input 1 and 2 are both active, or no power
input
Link/Active On Connected to network
(1~5 for Green
Flashing Networking is active
1x100FX);
(1~6 for Off Not connected to network
2x100FX)
On Ethernet port full duplex
Duplex/Collision Orange
Flashing Collision of packets occurs
(1~4)
Off Ethernet port half duplex or not connect to network
Ports
RJ-45 ports (Auto MDI/MDIX): RJ-45 ports are auto-sensing for 10Base-T or
100Base-TX devices connections. Auto MDI/MDIX means that you can connect to
another switch or workstation without changing straight through or crossover
cabling. See figures as below for straight through and crossover cable schematic.
• RJ-45 Pin Assignments:

Table 126. RJ-45 pin assignment
Pin Number Assignment
1 Tx+(transmit)
2 Tx-(transmit)
3 Rx+(receive)
6 Rx-(receive)
Note: “+” and “-” signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire
pair.

All ports on this industrial switch support automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, you can
use straight-through cables (see figure below) for all network connections to PCs or
servers, or to other switches or hubs. In straight-through cable, pins 1, 2, 3, and 6, at
one end of the cable, are connected straight through to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6 at the
other end of the cable. The table below shows the 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX MDI
and MDI-X port pinouts.
Table 127. MDI/MDI-X pins assignment
Pin Number MDI Port MDI-X Port
1 TD+(transmit data plus) RD+(receive data plus)
2 TD-(transmit data minus) RD-(receive data minus)
3 RD+(receive data plus) TD+( transmit data plus)
6 RD-(receive data minus) TD-( transmit data minus)
• 10/100Base-TX Cable Schematic:
Fig. 345. Straight-through cable schematic
Fig. 346. Cross over cable schematic
• Fiber Port:
The fiber port of SC type connector can work in multi mode (2Km) or single mode
(30Km).
When you connect the fiber port to another one, please follow the figure below to
connect accordingly. Wrong connection will cause the port cannot work normally.
[Multi-Mode] power budget : Min: 9dB , MAX: 19dB.
[Single-Mode] power budget : Min: 19dB , MAX: 26dB.
Fig. 347. Fiber port connection

ATTENTION!
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Don‘t stare into the Laser/LED Beam.
Cabling
• Using four twisted-pair, Category 5 cabling for RJ-45 port connection. The cable
between the converter and the link partner (switch, hub, workstation, etc.) must
be less than 100 meters (328 ft.) long.
• Fiber segment using single-mode connector type must use 9/125 um single-
mode fiber cable. User can connect two devices in the distance up to 30
kilometers.
• Fiber segment using multi-mode connector type must use 50 or 62.5/125 um
multi-mode fiber cable. User can connect two devices up to 2 km distances.
Mounting Installation
DIN-Rail Mounting
The DIN-Rail is screwed on the industrial switch when out of factory. If the DIN-Rail
is not screwed on the industrial switch, please see the following figure to screw the
DIN-Rail on the switch. Follow the steps below to hang the industrial switch.
1. Use the screws to screw on the DIN-Rail on the industrial switch.
2. To remove the DIN-Rail, reverse the step 1.
3. Insert the top of DIN-Rail into the track.

4. Then, lightly push the button of DIN-Rail into the track.
5. Check the DIN-Rail is tightly on the track.
6. To remove the industrial switch from the track, reverse the steps above.
Wall Mount Plate Mounting
Follow the steps below to mount the industrial switch with wall mount plate.
1. Remove the DIN-Rail from the industrial switch; loose the screws to remove the
DIN-Rail.
2. Place the wall mount plate on the top & bottom side of the industrial switch.
3. Use the screws to screw the wall mount plate on the industrial switch.
4. Use the hook holes at the corners of the wall mount plate to hang the industrial
switch on the wall.
5. To remove the wall mount plate, reverse the steps above.
Fig. 348. Wall mounting

Installation Steps
1. Unpack the Industrial switch packing.
2. Check the DIN-Rail is screwed on the industrial switch. If the DIN-Rail is not
screwed on the switch. Please refer to DIN-Rail Mounting item above
for DIN-Rail installation. If you want to wall mount the Industrial switch, then
please refer to Wall Mount Plate Mounting item for wall mount plate
installation.
3. To hang the industrial switch on the DIN-Rail track or wall, please refer to
Mounting Installation item.
4. Power on the Industrial switch. How to wire the power; please refer to Wiring
the Power Inputs item. The power LED on the Industrial switch will light up.
Please refer to LED Indicators item for meaning of LED lights.
5. Prepare the twisted-pair, straight through Category 5 cable for Ethernet

connection.
6. Insert one side of Category 5 cables into the industrial switch Ethernet port
(RJ-45 port) and another side of category 5 cables to the network devices’
Ethernet port (RJ-45 port), ex: switch, PC or Server. The UTP port (RJ-45) LED
on the Industrial switch will light up when the cable connected with the network
device. Please refer to LED Indicators item for LED light meaning.
7. When all connections are all set and LED lights all show in normal, the
installation is complete.
Troubleshooting
• Verify that you are using the right power cord/adapter. Please don’t use the
power adapter output higher than the power input of this switch, or it will burn
this switch down.
• Select the proper UTP/STP cable to construct your network. Please check that
you are using the right cable. Use unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shield
twisted-pair (STP) cable for RJ-45 connections: 100 Ω Category 3, 4, or 5 cable
for 10 Mbps connections or 100 Ω Category 5 cable for 100 Mbps connections.
Also be sure that the length of any twisted-pair connection does not exceed 100
meters (328 feet).
• Diagnosing LED Indicators: To assist in identifying problems, the switch can be
easily monitored through panel indicators, which describe common problems the
user may encounter and where the user can find possible solutions.
• If the power indicator does not light on when the power cord is plugged in, you
may have a problem with power cord. Then check for loose power connections,
power losses or surges at power outlet. If you still cannot resolve the problem,
contact your local dealer for assistance.
• If the LED indicators are normal with the correctly connected cables and the
packets still cannot transmit, please check your system’s Ethernet devices’
configuration or status.

Table 128. Technical description of IES-0104FT-DNV
Communications
Compatibility IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x
LAN 10/100Base-TX, 100FX
Transmission distance Multi-Mode Fiber 2KM (50/125μm ~ 62.5/125μm);
Single-Mode Fiber 30KM (9/125μm);
UTP/STP up to 100 meters
Transmission dpeed Up to 100 Mbps
Broadcast storm rate limit 200pps (100M), 20pps (10M)
Interface
Connectors 4 x RJ-45;
1 x SC type 100M fiberv (4 10/100TX + 1 100FX model),6-pin
removable screw terminal (power).
[Multi-Mode] power budget: Min: 9dB , MAX: 19dB;
[Single-Mode] power budget: Min: 19dB , MAX: 26dB.
LED indicators Unit: P1, P2, Fault;
TX port: Link/Active, Duplex/Collision
Power
Power consumption 4 10/100TX + 1 100FX model:
4.44W (standard);
4.2W (wide operating temp.)
Power input 2 x Unregulated +9 ~ 56 VDC;
+12 ~ 36 VAC (optional)
Fault output 1 Relay Output
Mechanism
Dimensions (WxHxD) 30 x 95 x 140 mm
Enclosure IP30, metal shell with solid mounting kits
Mounting DIN35 rail, wall
Protection
ESD (Ethernet) 6,000 VDC
Surge (EFT for power) 3,000 VDC
Power reverse Yes
Environment
Operating temperature -40 ~ 75ºC (wide operating temperature model);
-20 ~ 60ºC (standard temperature model)
Operating humidity 5% ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -40 ~ 85ºC
Certifications
Safety UL, cUL, CE EN60950-1
EMC FCC Class A; CE EN61000-4-2 (ESD); CE EN61000-4-3 (RS);
CE EN61000-4-4 (EFT); CE EN61000-4-5 (Surge);
CE EN61000-4-6 (CS); CE EN61000-4-8; CE EN61000-4-11;
CE EN61000-4-12; CE EN61000-6-2; CE EN61000-6-4
Free fall IEC60068-2-32
Shock IEC60068-2-27
Vibration IEC60068-2-6

Table 129. Technical description of IES-0204FT-DNV

IEEE standards IEEE 802.3 10Base-T Ethernet; IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX and
100Base-FX Fast Ethernet; IEEE802.3x Flow Control
Transfer rate 14,880pps for Ethernet port;
148,800pps for Fast Ethernet port
Mac address 2K MAC address table
Connectors 10/100TX: 4 x RJ-45 with auto MDI/MDI-X function;
100M fiber: 2 x SC type connector for Single-mode or Multi-mode
type fiber cable.
[Multi-Mode] power budget: Min: 9dB , MAX: 19dB.
[Single-Mode] power budget : Min: 19dB , MAX: 26dB.
Network cable 10Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5 cable EIA/TIA-568 100-Ohm
(100m);
100Base-TX: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable EIA/TIA-568 100-Ohm
(100m)
Optical cable Multi-mode: 50/125um~62.5/125um;
Single-mode: 9/125um;
Available distance: 2 km (Multi-mode)/30 km (Single-mode);
Wavelength: 1310 nm (Multi-mode/Single-mode)
Protocol CSMA/CD
DIP Switch DIP Switch 1: Enable/Disable Power Fault alarm;
DIP Switch 2: Enable/Disable Power Fault alarm
LED Per port: Link/Activity (Green), Full duplex/Collision (Amber);
Per unit: Power 1 (Green), Power 2 (Green), Fault(Amber)
Reserve polarity protection Present
Overload current protection Present
Power supply 9~56VDC, 12~36 VAC (optional), Redundant power with polarity
reverse protect function and removable terminal block
Power consumption 7 Watts
Operating temperature -20°C~60°C / -4°F~140°F (Standard model);
-40°C~75°C / -40°F~167°F (-E model)
Storage temperature -40°C~85°C / -40°F~185°F
Case dimension Metal case. IP-30,
26.1mm (W) x 94.9mm (D) x 144.3mm (H)
Weight 382 g
Installation DIN Rail and Wall Mount Design
EMI & EMS FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A EN61000-4-2 (ESD),
EN61000-4-3 (RS), EN61000-4-4 (EFT), EN61000-4-5 (Surge),
EN61000-4-6 (CS), EN61000-4-8, EN61000-4-11
Safety CE/EN60950-1
Stability testing IEC60068-2-32 (Free fall); IEC60068-2-27 (Shock); IEC60068-2-6
(Vibration)
MTBF 668,306 hrs

Network Switch IES-1204FT-DNV

Introduction
The IES-1204FT-DNV industrial smart-ring switch is cost-effect and powerful

industrial switch with many features. This switch can work under wide temperature
and dusty environment and humid condition.
Features
Software features:
• World’s fastest Redundant Ethernet Ring (Recovery time < 10ms over 250 units
connection);
• Supports Ring Coupling, Dual Homing and RSTP over Pro-Ring;
• Support fast recovery mode;
• Easy-to-configure: Web / Windows utility;
Hardware features:
• Wide operating temperature: -40 to 70ºC;
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85ºC;
• Operating humidity: 5% to 95%, non-condensing;
• 10/100Base-T(X) Ethernet port;
• 100Base-FX SFP port;

Hardware Overview
Physical dimensions
The figure below illustrates the dimensions 26.1 (W) x 95( D) x 144.3 (H) mm for the
industrial switch IES-1204FT-DNV.
Fig. 350. IES-1204FT-DNV network switch dimensions
Front Panel
Table 130. Labels that stick on the IES-1204FT-DNV
Port Description
10/100 RJ-45 fast Ethernet 10/100Base-T(X) RJ-45 fast Ethernet ports support auto-negotiation.
ports Default Setting:
Speed: auto
Duplex: auto
Flow control: disable
Reset Push reset button 2 to 3 seconds to reset the switch.
Push reset button 5 second to reset the switch into Factory Default.
Fig. 351. Front panel
1 – Model name.
2 – LED for PWR1&PWR2 When the PWR links, the green led will be light on.
3 – LED for Fault Relay. When the fault occurs, the amber LED will be light on.
4 – LED for Ring. When the led light on, it means the Pro-Ring is activated.

5 – LED for R.M (Ring master). When the LED light on, it means that the switch is
the ring master of Pro-Ring.
6 – Dip Switch setting when the Dip set:
P.F：Power fault;
R.E：Ring Enable;
R.M：Ring Master;
R.S：Ring Select (P1/P2:Port1 and Port2 , P5/P6:Port5 and Port6).
7 – 100 Base Fiber port on SFP.
8 – LED for SFP LINK/ACT.
9 – 10/100Base-T(X) Ethernet ports.
10 – LED for Ethernet ports ACT status.
11 – LED for Ethernet ports LINK status.

Front Panel LEDs
Table 131. Front panel LEDs
PWR1 Green On DC power module 1 activated
PWR2 Green On DC power module 2 activated
R.M. Green On Pro-Ring Master
Ring Pro-Ring enabled
Green Slowly blinking
Pro-Ring topology has problem
On Pro-Ring work normally
Fault Amber On Fault relay. Power failure or Port down/fail
10/100Base-T(X) Fast Ethernet ports
On Port link up
LINK / ACT Green
Blinking Data transmitted
LINK Amber On LINK LED
100Base Fiber port on SFP
Blinking Port link up
LINK / ACT Greeen
On Data transmitted
Bottom Panel
The bottom panel components of IES-1204FT-DNV are showed as below:
Terminal block includes: PWR1, PWR2 (12-48V DC) and Relay output
(1A@24VDC).
Fig. 352. Power connection

Cables
Ethernet Cables
The IES-1204FT-DNV switch have standard Ethernet ports. According to the link
type, the switches use CAT 3, 4, 5,5e UTP cables to connect to any other network
device (PCs, servers, switches, routers, or hubs). Please refer to the following table
for cable specifications.
Table 132. Cable types and specifications
Cable Type Max. Length Connector
10BASE-T Cat. 3, 4, 5 100-Ohm UTP 100 m (328 ft) RJ-45
100BASE-TX Cat. 5 100-Ohm UTP UTP 100 m (328 ft) RJ-45
• 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Pin Assignments:

With 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T cable, pins 1 and 2 are used for transmitting data, and
pins 3 and 6 are used for receiving data.
Table 133. RJ-45 pin assignment
1 TD+(transmit)
2 TD-(transmit)
3 RD+(receive)
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RD-(receive)
7 Not used
8 Not used
The IES-1204FT-DNV switches support auto MDI/MDI-X operation. You can use a
straight-through cable to connect PC and switch. The following table below shows
the 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX MDI and MDI-X port pin outs.
Pin Number MDI Port MDI-X Port
1 TD+(transmit) RD+(receive)
2 TD-(transmit) RD-(receive)
3 RD+(receive) TD+(transmit)
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 RD-(receive) TD-(transmit)
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
pair.

SFP
The switch has fiber optical ports with SFP connectors. The fiber optical ports are in
multi-mode and single-mode with LC connector. Please remember that the TX port
of switch A should be connected to the RX port of switch B.
Fig. 353. SFP connection
Mount IES-1204FT-DNV on DIN-Rail
Each switch has a DIN-Rail kit on rear panel. The DIN-Rail kit helps switch to fix on
the DIN-Rail.
1. Slant the switch and mount the metal spring to DIN-Rail:
2. Push the switch toward the DIN-Rail until you heard a “click” sound:

Mount IES-1204FT-DNV on wall

1. Remove DIN-Rail kit:
2. Use 8 screws that can be found in the package to combine the wall mount
panel. Just like the picture shows below:
Installation Steps
For installation steps, see above the appropriate item of Network Switches
IES-0104FT-DNV / IES-0204FT-DNV paragraph.
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting, see above the appropriate item of Network Switches
Table 135. Technical description
Technology
Ethernet standards IEEE802.3 10BASE-T;
IEEE802.3u 100BASE-TX;
IEEE802.3x Flow Control and Back pressure;
IEEE802.1D Spanning tree protocol;|
IEEE802.1w Rapid Spanning tree protocol;
IEEE802.1AB LLDP
MAC addresses 2048
Flow control IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back-pressure
VLAN Port based
Processing Store-and-Forward
Firmware upgrade TFTP
Ring redundancy RSTP;
Pro-Ring;
Fast recovery
Interface
RJ45 ports 10/100Base-T(X), Auto MDI/MDI-X
Fiber ports 100 Base SFP;
Multi-Mode SFP module;
Single-Mode SFP module

LED indicators Per unit: Power x 2(Green);

RJ45 ports:
Per port : Link/Activity(Green/Blinking Green), Full LINK(Amber);
Fiber ports:
Per port: Link/Activity/(Green/Blinking)
Power Requrements
Power Input voltage PWR1/2: 12 ~ 48V DC in 6 pin Terminal block
Reverse polarity protection Present
Power consumption 7 Watts max.
Environmental
Wide operating temperature -40 ~ 70ºC
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x D x H) 26.1 mm (W) x 95 mm (D) x 144.3 mm (H)
Casing IP-30 protection
Regulatory Approvals
Regulatory approvals FCC Part 15, CISPER (EN55022) class A
EMC EN61000-4-2 (ESD), EN61000-4-3 (RS), EN61000-4-4 (EFT),
EN61000-4-5 (Surge), EN61000-4-6 (CS)
Free fall IEC 60068-2-32
Shock IEC60068-2-27
WEB Management
An embedded HTML web site resides in flash memory on the CPU board. It contains
advanced management features and allows you to manage the switch from
anywhere on the network through a standard web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later.
The default value is as below:
• IP Address: 192.168.10.1;
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
• Default Gateway: 192.168.10.254;
• User Name: admin;
• Password: admin.
IP Configuration
You can configure the IP settings and DHCP client function through IP Configuration
interface (Basic Settings→IP Configuration):

Network Switch IES-2008B-DNV

The 8 10/100TX managed industrial switch is a cost-effective solution and meets the
high reliability requirements demanded by industrial applications. Using fiber port
can extend the connection distance that increases the network elasticity and
performance.
Physical dimensions
The figure below illustrates the dimensions 74 (W) x 114 (D) x 152 (H) mm for the
industrial switch IES-2008B-DNV.
Fig. 354 IES-2008B-DNV network switch dimensions
Front Panel
Bottom View
The bottom panel of the industrial managed switch has one terminal block connector
of two DC power inputs and one fault alarm.
Fig. 356. Bottom panel


Please follow the steps below to insert the power wire.
1. Insert AC or DC power wires into the contacts 1 and 2 for power 1, or 5 and 6
for power 2.
2. To tighten the wire-clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosing.
12~ 24 AWG.
Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact
The fault alarm contacts are in the middle of the terminal block connector as the
picture shows below. Inserting the wires, the switch will detect the fault status of the
power failure, or port link failure (available for managed model) and then forms an
open circuit. The following illustration shows an application example for wiring the
fault alarm contacts.
Insert the wires into the fault alarm contact (No. 3 & 4):
Fig. 359. Fault alarm contact
12~ 24 AWG.

LED Indicators
The diagnostic LEDs that provide real-time information of system and optional status
are located on the front panel of the industrial switch. The following table provides
the description of the LED status and their meanings for the switch.
On The switch unit is power on
PWR Green
Off No power
On The industrial switch is the master of Pro-Ring2s
R.M. Green group
Off The industrial switch is not a ring master in Pro-
Ring2s group
On Power 1 is active
PWR1 Green
PWR2 Green
On Power or port failure
FAULT Red
Off No failure
On A network device is detected
Green
Blinking The port is transmitting or receiving packets from the
TX device
P1~P8 Off No device attached
On The port is operating in full-duplex mode
Amber
Blinking Collision of packets occurs
Off The port is in half-duplex mode or no device is
attached
Green A powered device is connected utilizing Power over
FWD (P1 ~ P8) Green Ethernet on the port
Off No device is connected or power forwarding fails
Ports
The UTP/STP ports will automatically sense for Fast Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-
TX connections), or Gigabit Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
connections). Auto MDI/MDIX means that the switch can connect to another switch
or workstation without changing straight through or crossover cabling. See the
figures below for straight through and crossover cable schematic.
• 10/100BASE-TX Pinouts:
With10/100BASE-TX cable, pins 1 and 2 are used for transmitting data, and pins 3
and 6 for receiving data.

Table 137. RJ-45 assignment
1 Tx+(transmit)
2 Tx-(transmit)
3 Rx+(receive)
6 Rx-(receive)
pair.

The table below shows the 10/100BASE-TX MDI and MDI-X port pinouts.
Pin Number MDI Signal Name MDI-X Signal Name
• 10/100/1000Base-TX Pinouts:
Fig. 362. 10/100/1000 Ethernet RJ-45 pin outs
• 10/100/1000Base-TX Cable Schematic:

Cabling
Use four twisted-pair, Category 5 or above cabling for RJ-45 port connection.
The cable between the switch and the link partner (switch, hub, workstation, etc.)
must be less than 100 meters (328 ft.) long.
DIN-Rail Mounting
The DIN-Rail is screwed on the industrial switch when out of factory. If the DIN-Rail
is not screwed on the industrial switch, please see the following pictures to screw
the DIN-Rail on the switch. Follow the steps below to hang the industrial switch.
1. First, insert the top of DIN-Rail into the track:
2. Then, lightly push the DIN-Rail into the track:
3. Check if the DIN-Rail is tightened on the track or not.
4. To remove the industrial switch from the track, reverse above steps.
Wall Mount Plate Mounting
Follow the steps below to mount the industrial switch with wall mount plate.
1. Remove the DIN-Rail from the industrial switch; loose the screws to remove the
DIN-Rail.
2. Place the wall mount plate on the rear panel of the industrial switch.
3. Use the screws to screw the wall mount plate on the industrial switch.
4. Use the hook holes at the corners of the wall mount plate to hang the industrial
switch on the wall.

5. To remove the wall mount plate, reverse the above steps.
Installation Steps
1. Unpack the industrial switch.
2. Check if the DIN-Rail is screwed on the Industrial switch or not. If the DIN-Rail is
not screwed on the Industrial switch, please refer to DIN-Rail Mounting item
above for DIN-Rail installation. If users want to wall mount the Industrial switch,
please refer to Wall Mount Plate Mounting item for wall mount plate
installation.
3. To hang the industrial switch on the DIN-Rail track or wall, please refer to
Mounting Installation item.
4. Power on the industrial switch. Please refer to Wiring the Power Inputs item
for knowing the information about how to wire the power. The power LED on the
Industrial switch will light up. Please refer to LED Indicators item for indication
of LED lights.
5. Prepare the twisted-pair, straight through Category 5 cable for Ethernet

connection.
6. Insert one side of RJ-45 cable (category 5) into the industrial switch Ethernet
port (RJ-45 port) and another side of RJ-45 cable (category 5) to the network
device’s Ethernet port (RJ-45 port), ex: Switch PC or Server. The UTP port
(RJ-45) LED on the industrial switch will light up when the cable is connected
with the network device. Please refer to LED Indicators item for LED light
indication.
Note: Make sure that the connected network devices support MDI/MDI-X.
If it does not support, use the crossover category-5 cable.
7. When all connections are set and LED lights all show in normal, the installation
is complete.
Note: This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial

environment.
Troubleshooting

Hardware Features
Standard IEEE 802.3 10Base-T Ethernet; IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX/ FX;
IEEE802.3x Flow Control and Back Pressure; IEEE802.3ad Port trunk with
LACP; IEEE802.1d Spanning Tree / IEEE802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree;
IEEE802.1p Class of Service; IEEE802.1Q VLAN Tag IEEE 802.1x User
Authentication (Radius); IEEE802.1ab LLDP
Switch architecture Back-plane (Switching Fabric): 1.6Gbps,
Packet throughput ability(Full-Duplex): 8.3Mpps @64bytes
Transfer rate 14,880pps for Ethernet port;
148,800pps for Fast Ethernet port;
1,488,000pps for Gigabit Fiber Ethernet port
Packet buffer 1 Mbits
MAC address 8K MAC address table
Flash ROM 4 Mbytes
DRAM 32 Mbytes
Connector 10/100TX: 8 x ports RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDI-X function,
RS-232 connector: RJ-45 type
Network cable 10Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5/ 5E cable EIA/TIA-568 100-Ohm
(100m);
100Base-TX: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5/ 5E cable EIA/TIA-568 100-Ohm (100m)
Protocol CSMA/CD
LED Per unit: Power (Green), Power 1 (Green), Power 2 (Green), Fault (Red),
Master (Green), FWD (Green);
8 port 10/100: Link/Activity (Green), Full duplex/Collision (Amber)
Power supply External Power Supply: DC 12~48V, Redundant power DC 12~48V and
connective removable terminal block for master and slave power
Power consumption 7.86 W at full load operating
Operating humidity 5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Operating -40 ~ 75ºC
temperature
Case dimensions IP-30, 72mm (W) x 105mm (D) x 152mm (H)
Installation DIN rail and wall mount ear
EMI FCC Class A, CE EN61000-4-2, CE EN61000-4-3, CE EN-61000-4-4,
CE EN61000-4-5,CE EN61000-4-6, CE EN61000-4-8, CE EN61000-4-11, CE
EN61000-4-12, CE EN61000-6-2, CE EN61000-6-4
Safety UL, cUL, CE/EN60950-1
Stability testing IEC60068-2-32 (Free fall), IEC60068-2-27 (Shock),
IEC60068-2-6 (Vibration)
Software Features
Management SNMP v1 v2c, v3/ Web/Telnet/CLI
SNMP MIB RFC 1215 Trap, RFC1213 MIBII, RFC 1157 SNMP MIB, RFC 1493 Bridge
MIB, RFC 2674 VLAN MIB, RFC 1643, RFC 1757, RSTP MIB, Private MIB,
LLDP MIB
VLAN Port Based VLAN IEEE 802.1Q Tag VLAN (256 entries)/ VLAN ID (Up to 4K,
VLAN ID can be assigned from 1 to 4094.) GVRP (256 Groups)
Port Trunk with LACP Port Trunk: 4 Trunk groups/Maximum 4 trunk members
LACP
LLDP Supports LLDP allowing switch to advertise its identification and capability on
the LAN
Spanning tree IEEE802.1d spanning tree; IEEE802.1w rapid spanning tree
Pro-Ring2s Supports Pro-Ring2s. Provides redundant backup feature and the recovery
time below 20ms
Quality of service The quality of service determined by port, Tag and IPv4 type of service, IPv4
Different Service
Class of service Supports IEEE802.1p class of service, per port provides 4 priority queues

Port security Supports 100 entries of MAC address for static MAC and another 100 for MAC
filter
Port mirror Supports 3 mirroring types: “RX, TX and Both packet”
IGMP Supports IGMP snooping v1, v2, 256 multicast groups and IGMP query
IP security Supports 10 IP addresses that have permission to access the switch
management and to prevent unauthorized intruder
Login security Supports IEEE802.1X Authentication/RADIUS
Bandwidth control Support ingress packet filter and egress packet limit.
The egress rate control supports all of packet type and the limit rates are
100K~102400Kbps(10/100).
Ingress filter packet type combination rules are Broadcast/Multicast/Unknown
Unicast packet, Broadcast/Multicast packet, Broadcast packet only and all of
packet. The packet filter rate can be set from 100K~102400Kbps(10/100)
Flow control Supports Flow Control for Full-duplex and Back Pressure for Half-duplex
System log Supports System log record and remote system log server
SMTP Supports SMTP Server and 6 e-mail accounts for receiving event alert
Relay alarm Provides one relay output for port breakdown, power fail
Alarm Relay current carry ability: 1A @ DC24V
SNMP trap 1. Topology Change;
2. Power Trap;
3. MAC-Violation
DHCP Provides DHCP Client/ DHCP Server/ Port and IP Binding
DNS Provides DNS client feature and supports Primary and Secondary DNS server
SNTP Supports SNTP to synchronize system clock in Internet
Firmware update Supports TFTP firmware update, TFTP backup and restore
Configuration Supports binary format configuration file for system quick installation
upload/download
ifAlias Each port allows importing 128 bits of alphabetic string of word on SNMP and
CLI interface
WEB Management
Before using the web management, install the industrial switch on the network and
make sure that any one of the PCs on the network can connect with the industrial
switch through the web browser. The industrial switch default value of IP, subnet
mask, username and password are listed as below:
• IP Address: 192.168.16.1;
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
• User Name: root;
• Password: root.
IP Configuration
You can configure the IP settings and DHCP client function through IP Addressing
interface (IP Addressing-IPV4):

Network Switch IES-2208F-DNV

Introduction
The 8 10/100TX + 2 100FX w/ Pro-Ring managed industrial dwitch is a cost-
effective solution and meets the high reliability requirements demanded by industrial
applications. The 8 10/100TX + 2 100FX w/ Pro-Ring managed industrial switch can
be easily managed through the Web GUI. By using fiber port can extend the
connection distance that increases the network elasticity and performance. It also
provides the X-Ring function that can prevent the network connection failure.
Fig. 365. Appearance of network switch IES-2208F-DNV
In this paragraph, it will describe the Industrial switch‘s hardware spec, port, cabling
information, and wiring installation.
Physical dimensions
8 10/100TX + 2 100FX w/ Pro-Ring managed industrial switch dimensions
(W x H x D) are 72 mm x 152 mm x 106.2 mm.
Fig. 366. Network switch IES-2208F-DNV dimensions

Front panel
The front panel of the 8 10/100TX + 2 100FX w/ Pro-Ring managed industrial switch
is shown below.
Top View
The bottom panel of the 8 10/100TX + 2 100FX w/ Pro-Ring managed industrial
switch has one terminal block connector with six contacts.
Fig. 368. Top panel
LED Indicators
The diagnostic LEDs located on the front panel of the industrial switch provide real-
time information of system and optional status. The following table provides
description of the LED status and their meanings for the switch.


On System power on
PWR Green
Off No power inputs
On The switch is the master device of X-Ring group
R.M. Green
Off The switch is not the master device in X-Ring group
PWR1 Green
PWR2 Green
On Power or port linking failure occurs
P-Fail Red
Off No failure occurs
On Connected to network
Green
Blinking Networking is active
Off Not connected to network
P1~P8
On Ethernet port full duplex
Amber
Blinking Collision of packets occurs
Off Ethernet port half duplex or not connected to
network
On Fiber port is connected to network
P9 ~ P10 Green
Blinking Networking is active
Link/Active
(100 Fiber) Off Not connected to network
Ports
• RJ-45 Ports:
There are 8x 10/100Mbps auto-sensing ports for 10Base-T or 100Base-TX devices
connection. The UTP ports will auto-sense for 10Base-T or 100Base-TX
connections. Auto MDI/MDIX means that the switch can connect to another switch
or workstation without changing straight through or crossover cabling. See below
figures for straight through and crossover cable schematic.

Table 141. RJ-45 pin assignments
1 Tx+(transmit)
2 Tx-(transmit)
3 Rx+(receive)
6 Rx-(receive)
pair.
All ports on this industrial switch support automatic MDI/MDI-X operation, user can
use straight-through cables (see figure below) for all network connections to PCs or
servers, or to other switches or hubs. In straight-through cable, pins 1, 2, 3, and 6, at
one end of the cable, are connected straight through to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6 at the
other end of the cable. The table below shows the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX MDI and
MDI-X port pin outs.


• Fiber Port:
There are two 100Base-FX ports. The fiber port is SC type connector in multi mode
(2 km) or single mode (30 km).
When a user connects the fiber port to another fiber port, please follow the below
figure to connect it. Wrong connection will not allow the port to work normally.
Fig. 371. Fiber port connection
ATTENTION!
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Don‘t stare into the Laser/LED Beam.

Cabling
– Using four twisted-pair, Category 5 cabling for RJ-45 port connection. The
cable between the converter and the link partner (switch, hub, workstation,
etc.) must be less than 100 meters (328 ft.) long.
– Fiber segment using single-mode connector type must use 9/125 um single-
mode fiber cable. User can connect two devices in the distance up to 30
kilometers.
– Fiber segment using multi-mode connector type must use 50 or 62.5/125 um
multi-mode fiber cable. User can connect two devices up to 2 km distances.
Please follow the steps below to wire power lines connecting to the compliant
external DC power source.
1. Insert the positive and negative wires into the PWR1 (V1+, V1-) and
PWR2 (V2+, V2-) contacts on the terminal block connector as the figure shown
below.
Fig. 372. Terminal block front view for Power1&Power2 contacts
2. Tighten the wire-clamp screws shown below to prevent the wires from loosing.
Fig. 373. Terminal block top view
ATTENTION!
Use copper conductors only, 60/75ºC, tighten to 5 lb-in.
The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range between 12~ 20 AWG.
Wiring the P-Fail Alarm Contacts

The P-Fail alarm contacts are in the middle of the terminal block connector as the
picture shows below. By inserting the wires to form a Normally Close circuit, system
will detect the fault status including port linking failure (managed industrial switch
only) or power failure. Please refer to the diagrams below for the P-Fail alarm
connection, and the application example for the fault alarm operation.

Fig. 374. Wiring the P-Fail alarm contacts
Note: Use copper conductors only, 60/75ºC, tighten to 5 lb-in. The wire gauge for
the terminal block should be in the range between 12~ 24 AWG.
ATTENTION!
For mounting installation, see above the appropriate item of Network Switch
IES-2008B-DNV paragraph.
Installation Steps
For installation steps, see above the appropriate item of Network Switch
Troubleshooting
Hardware Features
Standard IEEE 802.3 10Base-T Ethernet;
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX;
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back Pressure;
IEEE802.3ad Port trunk with LACP;
IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree/ IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree;
IEEE 802.1p Class of Service;
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tag;
IEEE 802.1x User Authentication (Radius);
IEEE802.1ab LLDP
Switch architecture Back-plane (Switching Fabric): 1.6Gbps,
Packet throughput ability(Full-Duplex): 8.3Mpps @64bytes
Transfer rate 14,880 pps for 10Base-T Ethernet port;
148,800 pps for 100Base-TX/FX Fast Ethernet port
MAC address 8K MAC address table
Connector 10/100TX: 8 x RJ-45;
100Fiber: 2 x Fiber (SC/ ST);
RS-232 connector: RJ-45 type
Network cable 10Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm
(100m);
100Base-TX: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (100m)

Protocol CSMA/CD
LED Per unit: Power (Green), Power 1 (Green), Power 2 (Green), P-Fail (Red),
Master (Green);
8 10/100TX: Link/Activity (Green), Full duplex/Collision (Amber);
Fiber: Link/Activity (Green)
Optical cable Fiber (Multi-mode): 50/125um or 62.5/125um;
Fiber (Single-mode): 9/125um
Back-plane 2Gbps
Power supply 12 ~ 48 VDC,
Redundant power with polarity protection and removable terminal block
Power consumption 8.0 Watts (max.)
Operating temperature -40 ~ 75ºC (wide operating temperature model)
Case dimensions IP-30, 72 mm (W) x 152mm (H) x 106.2 mm (D)
Installation DIN rail and wall mount design
EMI FCC Class A; CE EN61000-4-2 (ESD); CE EN61000-4-3 (RS);
CE EN61000-4-6 (CS); CE EN61000-4-8; CE EN61000-6-2;
CE EN61000-6-4
Safety UL508, Class I/Division 2
Stability testing IEC60068-2-32 (Free fall), IEC60068-2-27 (Shock),
IEC60068-2-6 (Vibration)
Maritime GL & DNV
Software Features
Management SNMP v1v2c,v3/ Web/Telnet/CLI
SNMP MIB RFC 1215 Trap, RFC1213 MIBII, RFC 1157 SNMP MIB, RFC 1493 Bridge
MIB, RFC 2674 VLAN MIB, RFC 1643, RFC 1757, RSTP MIB, Private
MIB
VLAN Port Based VLAN IEEE 802.1Q Tag VLAN (256 entries)/ VLAN ID (Up to
4K, VLAN ID can be assigned from 1 to 4094.) GVRP (256 Groups)
Port Trunk with LACP LACP Port Trunk: 4 Trunk groups/Maximum 4 trunk members
LLDP Allow switch to advise its identification and capability on the LAN
Spanning tree IEEE802.1d spanning tree; IEEE802.1w rapid spanning tree
X-Ring X-Ring, Dual Homing and Couple Ring
Quality of service The quality of service determined by port, Tag and IPv4 type of service,
IPv4 different service
Class of service Supports IEEE802.1p class of service, per port provides 4 priority queues
Port security Supports 100 entries of MAC address for static MAC and another 100 for
MAC filter
Port mirror TX packet only; RX packet only; Both of TX and RX packets
IGMP Supports IGMP snooping v1, v2, 256 multicast groups and IGMP query
IP security Supports 10 IP addresses that have permission to access the switch
management and to prevent unauthorized intruder
Login security Supports IEEE802.1X Authentication/RADIUS
Bandwidth control Support ingress packet filter and egress packet limit.
The egress rate control supports all of packet type and the limit rates are
100K~102400Kbps.
Ingress filter packet type combination rules are
Broadcast/Multicast/Flooded Unicast packet, Broadcast/Multicast packet,
Broadcast packet only and all of packet. The packet filter rate can be set
from 100k to 102400Kbps
Flow control Supports Flow Control for Full-duplex and Back Pressure for Half-duplex
System log Supports System log record and remote system log server
SMTP Supports SMTP Server and 6 e-mail accounts for receiving event alert
Relay alarm Provides one relay output for port breakdown, power fail
Alarm Relay current carry ability: 1A @ DC24V

SNMP trap Up to 3 Trap stations;

Cold start, Port link up, Port link down, Authentication Failure, Port Alarm
configuration, P-Fail alarm, X-Ring topology change
DHCP Provides DHCP Client/ DHCP Server function
DNS Provides DNS client feature and supports Primary and Secondary DNS
server
Firmware update Supports TFTP firmware update, TFTP backup and restore
Configuration Supports binary format configuration file for system quick installation
upload/download
ifAlias Each port allows an alphabetic string of 128-byte assigned as its own
unique name via the CLI or SNMP interface
WEB Management
On CPU board of the switch there is an embedded HTML web site residing in flash
memory, which offers advanced management features and allow users to manage
the switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0.
Before to use Web management, install the industrial switch on the network and
make sure that any one of PC on the network can connect with the industrial switch
through the web browser. The industrial switch default value of IP, subnet mask,
username and password is as below:
• IP Address: 192.168.16.1;
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
• Password: root.
IP Configuration
interface (Suystem→IP Configuration):

Network Switch IGS-2404-E-DNV

Introduction
Fig. 375. Appearance of network switch IES-2404-E-DNV
To create the reliability in your network, the Managed Industrial Switch comes
equipped with a proprietary redundant network protocol X-Ring II, which provides
users with an easy way to establish a redundant Ethernet network with ultra high-
speed recovery time less than 10ms.
The Managed Industrial Switch comes equipped with 4 gigabit SFP sockets which
can be used for the application of wideband uploading and especially long distance
transmission to fit the field request flexibility.
• Heavy duty:
Designed with metal housing, the Managed Industrial Switch provides the rugged
construction which complies with IP30 standards.
• Dual power inputs:

The redundant power input design for the Managed Industrial Switch gives a backup
power solution. With both the power inputs supplied, If either one fails the other one
will be activated to keep the system operating continually. If one of the power inputs
fails, the P-Fail LED indicator lights up and send an alarm through the relay output
for notification purposes.
• Flexible mounting:
The Managed Industrial Switch can be mounted on the wall or a standard DIN rail,
so it is suitable for any space-constrained environment.
• Wide operating temperature:

The operating temperature of the Managed Industrial Switch is between -40 and
75oC. With such a wide range, you can deploy the Managed Industrial Switch in
some of the harshest industrial environments.
• Easy troubleshooting:
LED indicators make troubleshooting quick and easy. Users can identify status of
the switch by observing the LED indicators with the definition table.

Features
• 16 Gbps back-plane (switching fabric);
• 4 x 100/1000Base-FX dual mode SFP;
• Wide-range redundant power;
• IPv6;
• X-Ring II path redundant supported;
• TFTP firmware update and system configuration restoration/backup.
In this paragraph, it will describe the industrial switch‘s hardware spec, port, cabling
information, and wiring installation.
Physical dimensions
The figure below illustrates the dimensions 59.6mm x 152mm x 105mm (W x H x D)
for the managed industrial switch.
Fig. 376. IGS-2404-E dimensions

LED Indicators
LED indicators located on the front panel display the power status and network
status of the Managed Industrial Switch. Please refer to the following table for further
details.
On The switch is the master device of X-Ring group
R.M. Green
Off The switch is not the master device in X-Ring group
PWR1 Green
Off Power input 1 is inactive
PWR2 Green
Off Power input 2 is inactive
P-Fail On Power or port linking failure occurs
(depends on Red
Off No failure occurs
Fault Relay
Alarm config.)
On Connected to network
Green
Blinking Data is transmitting or receiving
P1~P4
(10/100/1000T) Off Not connected to network
On 1000M
Green
Off Disconnected or 10/100M
P5 ~ P8 On Connected to network
(100/1000 Green
Blinking Data is transmitting or receiving
SFP)
Off Not connected to network
RJ-45 Cabling
Use four twisted-pair, Category 5e or above cabling for RJ-45 port connection.
The cable between the switch and the link partner (switch, hub, workstation, etc.)
must be less than 100 meters (328 ft.) long. The RJ-45 copper ports will auto-sense
for 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or 1000Base-T connections. Auto MDI/MDIX means that
the switch can connect to another switch or workstation without changing straight
through or crossover cabling.
• 10/100Base-TX Pinouts:
Table 145. 10/100Base-TX pinouts
pair.
• 10/100Base-TX Cable Schema:
Fig. 377. 10/100Base-TX straight-through cable schematic

Fig. 378. 10/100Base-TX cross over cable schematic
• 10/100/1000Base-T Pinouts:
The table below describes the gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 pinouts.
Table 146. 10/100/1000Base-T pinouts
Pin Number Signal Name Description
1 BI_DA+ Bi-directional pair A+
2 BI_DA- Bi-directional pair A-
3 BI_DB+ Bi-directional pair B+
4 BI_DC+ Bi-directional pair C+
5 BI_DC- Bi-directional pair C-
6 BI_DB- Bi-directional pair B-
7 BI_DD+ Bi-directional pair D+
8 BI_DD- Bi-directional pair D-
• 10/100/1000Base-T Cable Schema:
Fig. 379. 10/100/1000Base-T straight-through cable schema
Fig. 380. 10/100/1000Base-T cross over cable schema

SFP Cabling
• SFP Connection:
To connect the transceiver and the LC cable, please follow the steps shown below.
1. Insert the transceiver into the SFP slot. Notice that the triangle mark indicates
the bottom of the slot.
Fig. 381. SFP Connection
2. Insert LC connector of the fiber cable into the transceiver.
Fig. 382. LC connector to transceiver
• SFP Disconnection:
To remove the LC connector from the transceiver, please follow the steps below:
1. Press down the latches and pull the LC connector out of the transceiver.
Fig. 383. Removing LC connector

2. Push down the metal loop and pull out the transceiver by the handle.
Fig. 384. Pull the transceiver out of the slot
Grounding
Follow the instructions below to attach the industrial switch to ground.
When installing the industrial switch, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
ATTENTION!
When installing the industrial switch, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.
1. On the top of the industrial switch, locate and remove the dome screw which
has a ground symbol beside it.
2. Attach the ground wire to the screw hole with the dome screw.
Fig. 385. Pull the transceiver out of the slot

Please follow the steps below to wire power lines from the terminal block to the
compliant external DC power source.
1. Before wiring, make sure the power source is disconnected.
2. Using the wire-stripping tool, strip a short piece of insulation from the output
wires of the DC power source.
3. Identify the positive and negative feed positions for the terminal block
connection. See the symbols printed on the panel indicating the polarities and
DC input power range in voltage.
Fig. 386. Plugs for Power 1 & Power 2

4. Insert the exposed wires into the terminal block plugs. Only wires with insulation
should extend from the terminal block plugs. Note that the polarities between the
wires and the terminal block plugs must be positive to positive and negative to
negative.
5. Use a slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive screws.
Fig. 387. Captive screws for fixing wires
ATTENTION!
Wiring the “P-Fail”Aalarm Contacts

The “P-Fail” alarm relay is provided to signal critical error conditions that may occur
on the switch. The contacts are energized upon powering up of the switch and
remain energized until a critical error occurs including power failure and Ethernet
port disconnection. Take the wiring illustration below as an example that illustrates
the proper relay connection forming a normally closed circuit, and the connection is
to be broken when an error occurs.
Fig. 388. Wiring the “P-Fail” alarm contacts
For mounting installation, see above the appropriate item of Network Switch
Installation Steps
For installation steps, see above the appropriate item of Network Switch
Troubleshooting

Communications
Standard IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3ad, 802.3ab, 802.3z,
IEEE 802.1ab, 802.1d, 802.1p, 802.1Q, 802.1w, 802.1x
LAN 10/100/1000BaseT, 100/1000BaseFX
Transmission speed Up to 1000 Mbps
MAC address table 8K-entry
Interface
Ethernet 4 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000T);
4 x SFP/mini-GBIC (100/1000FX)
Console 1 x RJ-45 (RS-232)
Power & Relay alarm 1 x 6-plug terminal block
receptacle
LED indicators System: Power1, Power2, P-Fail, R-Master;
10/100/1000BaseT: Link/Active, Speed;
SFP: Link/Activity
Management
Configuration Web browser, serial console, SNMP v1/v2c/v3, Telnet, TFTP, IPv6,
SNTP
SNMP MIB RFC 1215 Trap, RFC1213 MIBII, RFC 1157 SNMP MIB, RFC 1493
Bridge MIB, RFC 2674 VLAN MIB, RFC1643 , RFC 1757, RSTP
MIB, LLDP MIB, Private MIB
VLAN IEEE 802.1Q tagged, GVRP
Redundancy 802.1w/d RSTP/STP;
X-Ring II (Recovery time < 10ms)
Security SSL, SSH, DHCP Server with Port-IP binding, IP access security,
user authentication, 802.1X port access control
Traffic control Port trunking with LACP, rate limit and storm control, IGMP
Snooping/Query for multicast group, multicast filtering, IEEE 802.3x
flow control, IEEE 802.1p QoS
Diagnostics Port mirroring, real-time traffic statistics, MAC address table,
system event log, E-mail alert, SNMP trap, RMON, LLDP,
DMI for SFP
Power
Power consumption 11.2 Watts @ VDC (max.)
Power input 12 ~ 48 VDC; 18 ~ 30 VAC
Fault output 1 Relay Output
Mechanism
Dimensions (WxHxD) 59.6 x 152 x 105 mm
Enclosure IP30 protection, aluminum shell
Installation Wall/DIN-rail mounting
Protection
ESD (Ethernet) 6,000 VDC
Surge (EFT for power) 3,000 VDC
Power Reverse Yes
Environment
Operating temperature -40 ~ 75ºC (-40 ~ 167ºF)
Storage temperature -40 ~ 85ºC (-40 ~ 185ºF)
Certifications
Safety UL508 (suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D
locations)

EMC CE, FCC Class A; CE EN61000-6-2; CE EN61000-6-4;

CE EN61000-4-2 (ESD); CE EN61000-4-3 (RS);
CE EN61000-4-6 (CS); CE EN61000-4-8 (Magnetic Field);
CE EN61000-4-11 (Voltage Dip)
Free Fall IEC60068-2-32
Shock IEC60068-2-27
WEB Management
This industrial switch provides a convenient configuring way via Web browser.
Your host PC should be in the same VLAN setting with the industrial switch, or the
management will not be configured.
Connect the industrial switch to the Ethernet then your host PC could be configured
via Ethernet. Or you can directly connect it to your host PC with a straight-through or
cross over Ethernet cable.
Before to use web management, install the industrial switch on the network and
make sure that any one of the PCs on the network can connect with the industrial
switch through the web browser. The industrial switch default value of IP, subnet
mask, username and password are as below:
• IP Address: 192.168.16.1;
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0;
• Password: root.
[NOTE]
Note: Don‘t set “0”’ for the first segment of the subnet mask and default gateway
(000.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Refresh the web screen if the web could not be displayed while you change
the setting.
IP Configuration
interface (System-IP Configuration):

Network Switch LGS-2624C-DNV

Introduction
Lantech LGS-2624C-DNV is a 20-port 10/100/1000 Base-TX + 6 100 /1000M SFP
L2 managed switches which supports full SNMP features, including QoS for 4
queues, 801.q VLAN, IPv6, IGMP snooping and query mode as well as SNTP and
SMTP.
The switch features advanced security function including SSH, SSL, RADIUS and
TACACS+ authentication, PVE, ACLs as well as supports IP Source Guard to anti-
fake DHCP server or illegal IP address to access the network.
With advanced SNMP and security function, LGS-2624C-DNV is the best switch to
connect with IP Camera, Setup box, VoIP phone / router, Wireless Equipments for
MTU, Transportation or Surveillance applications.
The LGS-2624C-DNV meets with the most critical test criteria in DNV Type test
directives consisting of MED (Marine Equipment Directive), EMC (Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive) and LVD (Low Voltage Directive) in which vibration, high
voltage, compass safe distance, salt mist tests, humidity etc are conducted to
ensure the switch sustaining the harsh on-board environments often founded in
Ships, Crafts and Offshore platforms.
Fig. 389. Appearance of network switch LGS-2624C-DNV
Features
• IGMP v1/v2/v3 snooping, query and proxy;
• Port Based VLAN, Tag VLAN, GVRP;
• Voice VLAN;
• Port Trunk with LACP;
• TFTP Firmware Update and System Configure;
• 9K Jumbo Frame support;
• 8K MAC address table;
• Support IPv4 & IPv6;
• Quality of Service;
• Port Mirror;
• MSTP /Spanning Tree / Rapid Spanning Tree;
• SNMP v1, 2c and 3 with support for traps;
• Advanced Security: SSH/SSL,ACL, IP Source Guard, PVE, Port Security.

Physical dimensions
The figure below illustrates the dimensions 442mm (W ) x 170.3mm (D) x44mm (H)
for the switch.
Fig. 390. LGS-2624C-DNV network switch dimensions
RJ-45 Cabling
See above the appropriate item of Network Switch IGS-2404-E-DNV paragraph.
SFP Cabling
See above the appropriate item of Network Switch IGS-2404-E-DNV paragraph.
Wall Mounting
To hang the Ethernet switch on the wall, please follow the steps below:
• Prepare the 4 wall-mount plates and M3 screws (long 4 mm) included.

• Align the screw holes bewteen the wall-mount plates and the unit as the figure
illustrated.
• Secure the plates to the unit with the accompanying screws.
Rack Mounting
When installing the LGS-2624C-DNV switch in a 19 inch rack, it must always be
mounted horizontally with the top side up, This procedure requires the following
items:
• Eight bracket screws (included with the switch);

• Four equipment rack brackets for panel installation(included with the switch).
Fig. 391. Panel installation kit x4 / 2 kits for each side

Hardware Features
Standard IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast
Ethernet, IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T, IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Fiber,
IEEE802.1p COS IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back-pressure
IEEE802.1x RADIUS authentication IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree,
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree, IEEE 802.3ad Port trunk with LACP
IEEE802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet Task Force IEEE802.1q VLAN
Tagging, IEEE802.1ab Link Layer Discovery(LLDP), LLDP MED
Switching fabric 52 Gbps
Jumbo frames Up to 9KB supported on Gigabit interfaces (default enabled)
MAC address 8K Mac address table
Throughput 38.69 Mpps
Power supply 100-240 VAC 50~60 Hz, internal , universal
Power consumption Unload:
11.52 W @ AC 110 V;
12.90 W @ AC 220 V;
12.70 W @ AC 240 V.
Full-load:
21.6 W @ AC 110 V;
22.80 W @ AC 220 V;
22.73 W @ AC 240 V
Operating temperature -20 ~ 70ºC
Case dimensions 442 mm (W ) x 170.3 mm (D) x44 mm (H)
EMI CE, FCC Part 15 (CFR47) Class A
Software Features
Management SNMP v1v2v3/Web/Telnet/CLI
Firmware update -Web browser upgrade (HTTP/ HTTPs) and TFTP;
-upgrade through console port as well;
-utility to deploy the switch firmware
s-Flow s-Flow is a modern standard-based network export protocol (RFC 3176)
that addresses many of the challenges that network managers face today.
By embedding s-Flow technology into network switch delivers an
"always-on" technology that operates with wire-speed performance. Cost
of implementation is driven down dramatically compared to traditional
network monitoring solutions using mirrored ports, *probes, and line tap
technologies. (The function will be released at FW v1.10 and the available
schedule is August 2011*).
* - optional
UPnP The UPnP (ISO/IEC 29341) architecture allows device-to-device
networking of personal computers, networked home appliances, consumer
electronics devices and wireless devices. It is a distributed, open
architecture and zero configurations networking protocol based on
established standards such as the Internet Protocol Suite (TCP/IP), HTTP,
XML, and SOAP. (The function will be released at FW v1.10 and the
available schedule is September 2011*).
* - optional
Port trunk Support for IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP):
-Up to 12 groups;
-Up to 8 ports per group
SNMP Voice traffic is automatically assigned to a voice-specific VLAN and
treated with appropriate levels of QoS
VLAN Support for up to 4K VLANs simultaneously (out of 4096 VLAN IDs):
-Port-based VLAN;
-Tag-based VLAN;
-MAC-based VLAN -Management VLAN;
-Private VLAN Edge (PVE);
-GVRP / MVR
Voice VLAN Voice traffic is automatically assigned to a voice-specific VLAN and
treated with appropriate levels of QoS

Quality of service -Support 4 hardware queues (Low / Normal / Medium / Hign).

-Ingress policer; egress shaping and rate control; per VLAN, per port and
flow base
QoS scheduling Strict priority and 8,4,2,1 weight fair queue scheme Queue assignment
based on DSCP and class of service (802.1p/ CoS)
Class of service Port based; 802.1p VLAN priority based; IPv4/IPv6 precedence/ type of
service (ToS) / DSCP based; Differentiated Services (DiffServ);
classification and re-marking ACLs, trusted QoS
IPV6 Web/ SSL, Telnet/ SSH, ping, Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP),
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), SNMP, RADIUS, Syslog, DNS
Client, protocol-based VLANs
IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack Coexistence of both protocol stacks to migration
Remote monitoring Embedded RMON software agent supports RMON groups 1,2,3,9 (history,
(RMON) statistics, alarms, and events) for enhanced traffic management,
monitoring and analysis
Dual image Dual image provides independent primary and secondary OS files for
backup while upgrading
Rate lLimiter The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value
and units with pps or kbps
Energy Detect Compliant IEEE802.3az Energy Efficient Ethernet Task Force.
Automatically turns off power on Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port when
detecting link down or Idle of client. Active mode is resumed without loss
of any packets when the switch detects the link up
Cable length detection Adjusts the signal strength based on the cable length. Reduces the power
consumption for cables shorter
Spanning tree Support Spanning Tree, Rapid Spanning Tree, enabled by default Multiple
Spanning Tree instances using 802.1s (MSTP)
Port mirror Supports TX/RX/Both packet mirror. (8 source port)
IGMP -Supports IGMP v1/v2/v3 snooping.
-IGMP querier is used to support a Layer 2 multicast domain of snooping
switches in the absence of a multicast router.
-Support IGMP Proxy.
-MLD v1/v2 snooping : Deliver IPv6 multicast packets only to the required
receivers
DHCP Relay of DHCP traffic to DHCP server in different VLAN. Works with
DHCP Option 82 DHCP Client/ DHCPv6 Client
SNMP SNMP version1, 2c and 3 with support for traps, and SNMP version 3
user-based security model (USM)
SMTP Support SMTP Server and 6 e-mail accounts for receiving event alert
LLDP Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a
network analyzer or RMON probe. Up to 8 source ports can be mirrored to
single destination port. A single session is supported
System log Supports system log record and remote system log server
Port security Locks MAC addresses to ports, and limits the number of learned MAC
addresses
IP security Supports illegal IP address to access to specific port in the switch.
Support SSH/SSL
RADIUS / TACACS+ IEEE802.1X: RADIUS authentication, authorization and accounting, MD5
hash, guest VLAN , single/multiple host mode and single/multiple
sessions.
Supports IGMP-RADIUS based 802.1X Dynamic VLAN assignment.
Supports RADIUS and TACACS+ authentication.
Switch as a client
Storm control Broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast
ACLs Support for up to 4096 entries. Drop or rate limitation based on source and
destination MAC, VLAN ID or IP address, protocol, port, differentiated
services code point (DSCP) / IP precedence, TCP/ UDP source and
destination ports, 802.1p priority, Ethernet type, Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP) packets, IGMP packets, TCP flag

Network Switch LGS-2816C-RPS-DNV

Introduction
Lantech LGS-2816C-RPS-DNV, a 24-port Gigabit L2 Plus Managed Switch, is a
standard switch that meets all IEEE 802.3/u/x/z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet
specifications.
The switch includes 24-Port 100/1000Mbps Dual Speed SFP Fiber interface with 8-
Port Combo Gigabit TP/ (100/1000Mbps SFP) Fiber. The switch can be managed
through RS-232 serial port, or through Ethernet port using CLI or Web-based
management unit, associated with SNMP agent.
With the SNMP agent, the network administrator can logon the switch to monitor,
configure and control each port’s activity in a friendly way. The overall network
management is enhanced and the network efficiency is also improved to
accommodate high bandwidth applications.
In addition, the switch features comprehensive and useful functions such as QoS
(Quality of Service), IPv6,Spanning Tree, VLAN, Port Trunking, Bandwidth Control,
Port Security, MVR, SNMP/RMON, LLDP and IGMPv3 Snooping capability,
SSL/SSH, TACACS+ via the intelligent software. It is suitable for both metro-LAN
and central management applications when needs high density fiber aggregation.
The LGS-2816C-RPS supports +12VDC redundant power supply via optional

connector to ensure the switch power system. The working temperature is from -
20°C to 60°C where meets with the challenge of harsh environments.
It is suitable for surveillance, transportation, factory floors, etc.
Lantech DNV-Type Approval model meets with the most critical test criteria in DNV
Type test directives consisting of MED (Marine Equipment Directive), EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive) and LVD (Low Voltage Directive) in which
vibration, high voltage, compass safe distance, salt mist tests, humidity etc are
conducted to ensure the switch sustaining the harsh on-board environments often
founded in Ships, Crafts and Offshore platforms.
Fig. 392. Appearance of network switch LGS-2816C-RPS-DNV
Features
• 16-Port 100/1000Mbps dual speed SFP fiber interface;
• 8-Port dual media with UTP/(100/1000Mbps SFP) for flexible connection;
• Supports Jumbo Frame size up to 9KB;
• IEEE 802.1X Access Control improve network security;
• Port Mirroring helps supervisor monitoring network;
• Supports Q-in-Q(Double-tag);
• IEEE802.1Q tag-base VLAN, 4094 entries and port-base VLAN;
• IEEE 802.1D Compatible, 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree and 802.1s Multiple
Spanning Tree;
• Unknown Unicast/Broadcast/Multicast Storm Control;
• Multicast Vlan Registration for IPTV;
• Support IPv6;

• IP-MAC-Port binding for security;

• Supports QoS (QCL/QCE) for traffic control;
• ACL based on Ethernet Type / ARP / IPv4 for packets permit or deny, rate
limitation and port copy;
• DHCP Snooping (Including DHCP Option 82);
• Supports IGMPv3 snooping and IGMP proxy;
• Supports SSL/SSH for network security;
• Supports TACACS+ for management security and authentication
• Supports “power saving” for Green Ethernet requirement;
• Supports LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) provides a standards-based
method for enabling switches to advertise themselves;
• Supports Syslog for device management as well as generalized informational,
analysis, and debugging messages.
Hardware Features
Standard IEEE 802.3 10Base-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX Ethernet,
IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-TX Ethernet, IEEE 802.3z 1000Base-X Ethernet,
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control Capability, ANSI/IEEE 802.3 Auto-negotiation,
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, IEEE 802.1p Class of Service, IEEE 802.1X Access
Control, IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree, IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree,
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree, IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP), IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol
(LLDP)
Switching capacity 48Gbps
Packet buffer 1392KB
Jumbo packet Up to 9KB
MAC address 8K
Throughput 35.712Mpps
ROM 128M
DRAM 512M
Connector 16 100/1000M SFP and 8 dual media, RJ-45/SFP
LED POWER:
Green, Lit when +12V DC power is on and good.
10/100/1000Ethernet TP Port 1 to 8 LED:
LINK/ACT, Green, Lit when connection with remote device is good.
Blinks when any traffic is present.
Off when cable connection is not good.
10/100/1000Mbps:
Green/Amber, Lit Green when 1000Mbps speed is active.
Lit Amber when 100Mbps speed is active.
Off when 10Mbps speed is active.
1000SX/LX Gigabit Fiber Port 1 ,24 LED:
SFP (LINK/Speed/ACT), Green, Lit when connection with the remote
device is good.
Blinks when any traffic is present.
Off when module connection is not good
Power supply 100-240 VAC 50~60 Hz
Redundant 12 VDC
Power consumption 40 Watts (max.)
Operating temperature -20 ~ 70ºC
Case dimensions 442mm(W ) x209mm (D) x44mm (H)
Weight 2900g

EMI Comply with FCC Part 15 Class A & CE Mark Approval

Software Features
Management SNMPv1,v2c,v3, Web Interface, CLI
SNMP MIB RFC 1213 MIB (MIB-II):
Interface MIB, Address Translation MIB, IP MIB, ICMP MIB, TCP MIB,
UDP MIB, SNMP MIB.
RFC 1757 RMON MIB:
Statistics Group 1, History Group 2, Alarm Group 3, Event Group 9.
RFC 1493 Bridge MIB.
RFC 1643 Ethernet.
MIB Enterprise MIB
VLAN -Supports SVL/IVL configuration to meet your VLAN requirement;
-Port-base VLAN;
-IEEE802.1Q tag-base VLAN, up to 4k active VLANs;
-Supports the Q-in-Q (Double-tag);
-Supports MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
VSM (Virtual Stacking -Up to 16 switches by single IP address;
Management) -Virtual stacking, no extra stacking hardware is required;
-Distributed stacking, no physical central wiring closet is needed
QoS -Supports Port Based, 802.1p and Diffserv (IPv4 /IPv6) QoS packet
classification;
-Supports two scheduling, WRR and Strict;
-Supports 802.1p QoS with four level priority queue
Quality of service -Support 4 hardware queues (Low / Normal / Medium / Hign).

-Ingress policer; egress shaping and rate control; per VLAN, per port and
flow base
QoS scheduling Strict priority and 8,4,2,1 weight fair queue scheme Queue assignment
based on DSCP and class of service (802.1p/ CoS)
Class of service Port based; 802.1p VLAN priority based; IPv4/IPv6 precedence/ type of
service (ToS) / DSCP based; Differentiated Services (DiffServ);
classification and re-marking ACLs, trusted QoS
Spanning tree Supports 802.1D STP/1w RSTP/1s MSTP
Port mirror -Supports 1: N mirroring;
-Supports port sniffer function with Ingress and Egress
IGMP -Supports IGMPv3 snooping including active and passive mode;
-Supports IGMP proxy including active and passive mode
LACP -Port trunking with 12 trunking group;
-Up to 16 ports for each group
Bandwidth control Supports bandwidth rating per port ingress and egress rate limit
500Kbps~1000Mbps with 1Kbps
GVRP/GARP 802.1Q with GVRP/ GARP
Broadcast storm Multicast/Broadcast/Unknown-Unicast Storm suppression
Network security -802.1X access control for port based and MAC based authentication;
-Management Access Policy Control;
-Access Control List;
-IP-MAC-Port binding;
-DHCP snooping and DHCP option 82;
SSL/ SSH for Management;
-TACACS+ for Management Authentication

Physical dimensions
The figure below illustrates the dimensions 442mm (W ) x209mm (D) x44mm (H) for
the switch.
Fig. 393. Network switch LGS-2816C-RPS-DNV dimensions
Transas Gateway
Table 150. Transas Gateway technical description
UTM-1 Edge N Industrial
Security Functionality Firewall, VPN, Intrusion Prevention, Antivirus
Anti-spam, URL Filtering Yes
On-board Management Yes
Software Edition Embedded NGX
Ethernet Ports 4 x 10/100/1000 Base-T RJ45 LAN, 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ45 or
1 x 1000Base-F DMZ, 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ45 WAN
Firewall Throughput 1 Gbps
VPN Throughput 200 Mbps
IPS Throughput 180 Mbps
Concurrent Sessions 60,000
VLANS 64
Physical Attributes
Dimensions 200 x 32 x 128 mm (7.87 x 1.26 x 5.04 inches)
(width x height x depth)
Weight Without DIN rail adapter: 678 g (1.49 lbs); with DIN rail adapter:
778 g (1.71 lbs)
Retail Box Weight 1.5 kg (3.3 lbs)
MTBF 300,129 hours at 30ºC
DC Power Input
Power Supply Nominal Input +12V DC@2A, +12 to +60V DC@2A to 0.4A, -48V DC@0.5A
12V Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Nominal Input 100 ~ 240 VAC; 50 ~ 60Hz
Power Supply Nominal Output 12V DC @ 2A
Max. Power Consumption 9W (11.5W including USB devices)

Certifications
Safety IEC 60950-1, EN 60950-1, UL60950-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-
1, Quality, ISO 9001, 9002, 14001
Emissions EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3, EN 55024, IEC
61850-3, IEEE 1613, FCC Part 15 B,
CISPR 22 Class B, ICES-003, Class B, VCCI (V-3/V-4), AS/NZS
3548A Class B
Environment RoHS & WEEE
Environmental Conditions
Storage -40ºC to 70ºC
Operation -5ºC to 55ºC (for DC input - up to 55 ºC,
for adapter DC input - up to 40 ºC)
Humidity 50% to 95% (non-condensed)
(storage and operation)
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector (TFAP)

General
Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector (further TFAP) is intended for performing
automatic chart updating and for downloading data directly from Transas Chart server.
TFAP is required to be installed between Transas MFD and communication
equipment on-board of vessel providing firewall and antivirus protection.
TFAP is based on RS7 or I330 computers.
Internal Ethernet port is connected to MFD and External Ethernet port is connected
to communication equipment.
Computers were successfully tested according IEC60945 and type approved by
DNV (certificate № A-11024).
For connection TFAP to workstations and communication equipment, see
“Connection TFAP to ECDIS MFD WS. Block Diagram” enclosed in Annex J.
RS7 Computer Technical Data

Part No.: 18131116.
The RS7 computer is based on the Intel® Celeron P4505 processor and has two
Gigabit Ethernet ports to maintain Internal and External networks connection. The
unit has a dual input power supply which will accept both AC and DC input, ensuring
that they are compatible with all power systems on all vessels. If both inputs are
connected, the units will be powered by AC. If AC power is disconnected, it will
automatically switch over to DC without affecting the operation of the unit. It makes it
possible to use AC as primary power and a 24V battery as secondary power,
eliminating the need for expensive UPS systems when it is approved by Flag and
Class. It is also fan-less with no moving parts inside which will prolong lifetime and
reduce service costs.
Fig. 394. RS7 computer front view

Fig. 395. RS7 computer rear view
Table 151. RS7 computer description

OS Windows XP Pro Eng SP2, 32bit
Storage 2 x 2.5" removable HDD (SATA);
Default confi guration: 1 x 250GB HDD;
Raid: 0,1
CPU Intel® Celeron® P4505 (2M Cache, 1.86 GHz);
Front Side Bus (FSB) 800MHz
Installed Memory 1 x 2GB DDR3 1066/800MHz SO-DIMM
BIOS AMIBIOS
DVI-I OUT Resolution From 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
RGB OUT Resolution From 640 x 480 to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz
Multi-power Supply 115&230VAC - 50/60Hz + 24 VDC
Note: You may connect either AC power or DC
power or both. In case both sources are
connected, power will be sourced from the AC
input. If AC input is lost, there will be a
uninterrupted switch-over to DC input
Power Consumption Operating AC/DC: TBD W (max)
Dimensions 221 (W) x 90 (H) x 300 (D) mm
Weight TBD kg (approx)
Humidity up to 95 %
Humidity up to 95 %
COM ports 1 x DB9M RS-422/485 non-isolated;
1 x DB9M RS-232 non-isolated;
4 x COM isolated RS422/RS485, ECDIS/NMEA
Compliant (Phoenix 3.81 mm compatible
connector)
Ethernet 2 x RJ-45
Keyboard and Mouse 2 x PS/2
USB USB host x 6 Type A
LPT1 1 x Pin Header
DVI OUT 1 x 29p DVI-I

DC Power 1 x Phoenix 2pin 1927564 MSTB 2,5/ 2-GF-5,08

THT
Speaker L/F 1 x mini-DIN 5pin
RS7 Computer Dimension
Fig. 396. RS7 computer view dimensions
Fig. 397. RS7 computer front view dimensions

Fig. 398. RS7 computer side view dimensions
Fig. 399. RS7 computer top view dimensions
VL-66112 DVI-KVMA Switch

General Description
The VL-66 112 DVI KVMA switch provides the ability to operate up to 4 PCs from a
central workstation.
The following peripheral devices can be connected to:
• Monitor (via DVI);

• Mouse (via PS/2);
• Keyboard (via PS/2);
• Microphone (via jack);
• Loudspeaker (stereo, via jack).
The KVM switch provides at each input a PS/2 code detection, which supports a
failure-free computer boot also at non selected channels.

Fig. 400. View of VL-66112 DVI-KVMA switch
Table 152. VL-66112 DVI-KVMA switch specification

Operating voltage 230V /50Hz
Dimension 293 mm x 189 mm x 50 mm
Case Stainless steel
Weight 2,26 kg
Power Connection IEC connector
Connection Video DVI
Connection Mouse /Keyboard PS/2
Connection Audio (micro/ speaker) via PS/2 (input 4x);
jack cable (output 1x)
DDC DDC2B
Max. input DVI cable length 9m
Max. output DVI cable length 3m
Resolution Up to 1920x1200
Max. input PS/2 cable length 10 m, cable: LAPP UNITRONIC® LiNCH 4 x 0,34 0037504
Max. output PS/2 cable length 10 m, cable: LAPP UNITRONIC® LiNCH 4 x 0,34 0037504
Temperature (storage); -40 up to 85°C;
Temperature (working) -15 up to 55°C
Humidity 93% not condensing
Dimensions
Fig. 401. VL-66112 DVI-KVMA switch dimensions

Connections
Fig. 402. VL-66112 DVI-KVMA switch dimensions
Start-up
• Switch on monitor (minimum in stand-by);
• Switch on distributor (at the front of the device, LED „Power“);
• Switch on cComputer.
Operation
To power on the device via the power switch on the front page. The determination
made after the initialization is turning by flashing the LED push button connected to
channel 1 is displayed (about 3 seconds). After initialization, the key lights up and
the unit is operational.
The channel selection for the PC `s can be made by 3 ways:
• 1-st - Operation via the keypad on the front panel;

• 2-nd - Switching by hotkey-functions on the console keyboard (see item below);
• 3-rd - Connection of remote controls on the front panel of the unit.
Note: The standby feature can be used only via the remote control.
The selected channel is displayed through light up of the associated push-button or
through the connected remote.

Hot-key functions
Table 153. Hot-key functions
Command Hotkey Description
Decoupling the Video-/PS/2- [Roll]+[Roll]+[W] After decoupling of the Audio-/Micro- and
and Audio-/Micro-function Video-/PS/2- function both units can
switched separately
Coupling the Video-/PS/2- [Roll]+[Roll]+[Q] After coupling of the Audio-/Micro- and
and Audio-/Micro-function Video-/PS/2- function both function could
switched together
Direct dialling channel 1-4 [Roll]+[Roll]+[1..4] Selection of a desired Workstation
Next channel [Roll]+[Roll]+[Page ↑] Selection of the next higher channel
Previous channel [Roll]+[Roll]+[Page ↓] Selection of the next lower channel
Beep-Sound on/off [Roll]+[Roll]+[B] Command tones
Reset the console mouse [Roll]+[Roll]+[END] Console mouse reset (e.g. by the
impairment in connecting to another mouse)
Troubleshooting
Table 154. Troubleshooting
Error Possible reason Troubleshooting
No audio / video Hardware is off: Switch on device;
signal to all outputs Power LED at the front panel Check power cord;
does not light Check fuse
No audio / video signal at the Ensure that the audio / video source is
DVI Distributor input turned on;
Check the connectors at the inputs or
outputs of the devices for tightness
No video signal at The resolution for the Change resolution
one or more outputs connected monitors is too high
At Chanel 1 is not a DDC2B Use a DDC2B-efficient monitor
efficient monitor connected
Signal quality at the monitor is User better quality video cables;
too bad Use shorter video cables
No function of the Computer did not recognized Restart computer
keyboard and / or the mouse or the keyboard;
mouse Changed the keyboard or
mouse in operation

Autopilots
AUTOPILOTS
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400

General
The NautoPilot 5400 is part of the Steering System Family AS (Advanced Steering)
and is used to control navigation at sea for all sizes of seagoing vessels.
The NautoPilot 5400 was designed for use in high speed craft, but is equally suited
for all types of mono-- and multihull vessels with any kind of rudder control.
The NautoPilot 5400 complies with IMO resolutions.
By setting a number of easily accessible parameters, the Autopilot’s steering
characteristics can be adjusted to the vessel’s dynamic behavior and the prevailing
conditions (sea state, load).
For more detailed description of the autopilot’s installation and configuration,

see NAUTOPILOT 5000 SERIES INSTALLATION MANUAL, NAUTOPILOT 5000
SERIES OPERATOR MANUAL and NAUTOPILOT 5000 SERIES AUTOPILOT
INTERFACE AS SERVICE MANUAL documents supplied as part of the equipment
delivery set.
Features
• Automatic adaption to weather and sea state using a rudder variance control;
• Increased rudder performance by adjusting ECONOMY/PRECISION mode
(ECONOMY = low rudder activity; PRECISION = higher steering accuracy);
• Track change in Track Control with radius cross track distance parameters
(XTD);
• Fast drift compensation by implementation of Kalman filter technology;
• Option to select Acceleration Monitor;
• Heading Control;
• Course Control;
• Track Control in combination with ECDIS.
Technical Data
Operator Unit (102-890 NG001/NG002)
The NautoPilot Operator Unit is made up of an aluminium casing with operating
elements such as a touchscreen display panel, buttons and a combined rotary
knob/button on the front side. Inside the casing are three PC boards:
– Connector PCB (version NB05-396) for performing all connections to external

devices;
– CPU PCB, (version NB06-347) for data processing;
– Console PCB (version NB05-395) for processing of the operator elements.

Autopilots
Fig. 403. NP5400 Operator Unit construction

Autopilots
Fig. 404. NP5400 Operator Unit connection
• Mechanical Data:
Fig. 405. NP5400 Operator Unit 102-890 NG001 dimensional drawing

Autopilots
• Electrical Data:
– Supply voltage (plug B12): 24V DC (18 to 36V DC);
– Power consumption approx.: 25W;
– Ambient temperature (operation): -25° C to +55° C
– Ambient temperature (storage): -40° C to +70° C;
– Outputs:
Status and alarm contacts (plugs B3, B4, B5 and B6): output load 30V
DC, I max. 1A.
– Inputs:
Status (plugs B10 and B11): 24V DC, I max. 5mA.
– Outputs/Inputs:
Serial in/out (plugs B8 and B9): RS422 (NMEA);
CAN bus (plugs B21 and B22): according to RAN CAN bus specification;
LAN: ETHERNET.
– Signal Inputs:
Gyro, Satellite Compass: Course Bus or NMEA (IEC61162-1/2);
Magnetic Compass/Fluxgate: Course Bus or NMEA;
Speed Log: Course Bus or NMEA;
Position Receiver: NMEA;
ECDIS (for Track Control): according to IEC 62065, APB NMEA.
• Distance from Magnetic Compass:
– Standard type: 1.0 m;
– Steering type: 0.65 m.
• Cable length and diameters:
– CAN bus: 4x2x0.75 twisted/screened, max. 400 meters;
– Status lines: 1 mm²;
– Power lines: 1.5 mm².
Autopilot Interface AS (102-891. NG001 E01)
The Autopilot Interface AS consists of two PC boards (Plug and display PC board
and Processor PC board), both are integrated in an aluminium casing. At the bottom
of this casing there are 12 cable inlets.
The main task of this Autopilot Interface AS is to interface with and convert serial
data (input and output) into CAN bus format.
In addition, this device is used to control the difference between set and actual
rudder values to compensate.
Set rudder values comprise data from the Autopilot via a DUAL CAN bus; actual
rudder values comprise data either from the single CAN bus or from the analogue
feedback input.

Autopilots
Fig. 406. NP5400 Interface AS unit
Fig. 407. NP5400 Interface AS connection

Autopilots
• Mechanical Data:
Fig. 408. NP5400 Interface AS dimensional drawing
• Electrical Data:
– Supply voltage (plug B38): 24V DC (18 to 36V DC);
– Power consumption: 25W;
– Ambient Temperature (operation): -15° C to +55° C;
– Outputs:
Analogue1 (plug B39): ±10V, I max. 5mA;
Analogue2 (plug B44): ±10V, I max. 5mA;
Status and alarm contacts (plugs B13, B17, B20, B30, B36, B41 and
B46): Output load 30V, I max. 1A;
Pump control (plugs B33 and B34): 24V DC/2A max,
110V DC / 450mA max
Serial Out (plug B43): RS422 (NMEA).
– Inputs:
Analogue inputs (plug B28): ±10V, (Ri≈50kOm);
Input load (status contacts): 24V DC, I max. 5mA.
– Outputs/Inputs:
Data via CAN bus (plugs B22, B23 and B24): according to RAN Can bus
specification;
Serial In (plugs B25, B29, B35, and B45): RS422 (NMEA).
• Distance from Magnetic Compass:
– Standard type: 0.50 m;
– Steering type: 0.35 m.
• Cable length and diameters:
– CAN bus 4x2x0.75 twisted/screened, max. 400 metres;
– Status lines 1 mm²;
– Power lines 1.5 mm².

Autopilots
Autopilot Navis AP4000

AP4000 structure depends on the ordered AP4000 configuration for the single/linked
or independent rudders.
For detailed information, see NAVIS AP4000. HEADING CONTROL SYSTEM

INSTALLATION GUIDE and NAVIS AP4000 DRAWINGS LIST supplied as a part of
the equipment delivery set.
Basic Units
• “Control Panel 1” - APH4000 Control Panel (1 pc) is delevered with the system
by default (up to five operator units can be supplied optionally in case of network
configuration);
• “Control Unit CU-M” – Main autopilot control unit contains Central Control
Module, APM3000 PCB inside. All navigational sensors and other AP modules
connected to the Central Control Module APM3000;
• “Control Unit CU-MPR” is needed for connection to the Steering System or to
the Steering Gear. Second Control Unit CU-MRR can be supplied optionally in
case of the ship configuration with independent rudders or two Z-Drives;
• “Mode Selector (SMS-B Type 1 or 2)” is supplied optionally with AP4000
Heading Control System. Selector has two or three positions (“AUTO OFF” –
“AUTO ON” or “NFU” – “FFU” – “AUTO”) depending on availability of the FFU
control mode in AP4000. Customized or existed steering mode selector on the
Navigational Bridge may be used instead of SMS-B Type 1 or 2 by customer
request.
Optional Units
• “FFU Override” / “ROT Tiller” Box, IB-FFU-2 (Optional) – FFU Override Box is
needed for connection of the additional FFU steering stations for the rudder or
Rate-Of-Turn control via AP4000. Additional FFU/ROT tillers are connected and
calibrated via FFU Override Box IBFFU-2, if ordered (up to five FFU/ROT
Interface boxes can be supplied optionally if necessary);
• “Thruster” Interface Box, PU-P-2 (Optional) – Propulsion Unit interface box is
needed for connection to the Bow tunnel thruster and their quantity can be 1 or
2 units in one network, depending on the ordered units and quantity of the
tunnel thrusters (maximum – 2). AP4000 can operate with one or two tunnel
thrusters in the “Low Speed Heading Control” mode;
• “TCS Box”, IB-TCS-2 (Optional) – Track Control Box is only needed for
connection to the Steering System with one or linked rudders in case of the
certified TCS Category C. TCS Box allows to meet the following requirements
for Track Control System in case of single failure in AP4000:
– If sailing on a curved path, the turn is completed with commanded Rate of
Turn for heading changes and the track course of the next straight leg is
taken over as present heading for heading control;
– If sailing on a straight leg, the actual heading is taken over as the preset
heading for the heading control;
– IB-TCS-2 Interface Box has NMEA input for heading information from gyro or
heading transmission device independent from AP inputs.

Autopilots
Autopilot Heading Control System overview is shown on the picture below.
Fig. 409. NAVIS AP4000 structure diagram
Fig. 410. NAVIS AP4000 block diagram for FFU proportional steering control systems

Autopilots
Basic Autopilots Units Dimensions
Fig. 411. Control panel APH4000 dimensions
Fig. 412. Control unit CU-M dimensions

Autopilots
Fig. 413. Control unit CU-MPR dimensions
Fig. 414. Interface boxes dimensions

Autopilots
Fig. 415. Mode selector SMS-B type 1 dimensions
Fig. 416. Mode selector SMS-B type 2 dimensions

Autopilots
Operating and Storage Conditions

Operating Conditions
• Control Panel APH4000:
– Temperature: -25…+70ºC;
– Humidity: up to 95% relative humidity, non-condencing.
• Control Units and Interfaces Boxes:
– Humidity: up to 95% relative humidity, non-condencing at 25ºC, up to 75% at
45ºC.
Storage Conditions
• Control Panel APH4000:
– Humidity: up to 95% relative humidity, non-condencing.
• Control Units and Interfaces Boxes:
– Humidity: up to 95% relative humidity, non-condencing at 25ºC, up to 75% at
45ºC.
Protection Degree (IP level) – Control Panel APH4000

• Front side: IP67;
• Rear side: IP22 (if used by default without any special IPx6 enclosure).
Power Requirements
• Power supply: 24V DC;
• Power consumption (without optional units): 40W minimum.
Autopilot EMRI SEM200

Autopilot System Parts
• AEU511: Autopilot Electronic Unit;
• MIP31-100: Autopilot Control Panel. 1 or 2 panels installed;
• CABLES: MIP31 to AEU511 connections. Factory supplied – one each control
panel;
• Optional SFF10: Steering Failure Alarm Rudder Order Freeze Unit
(for some steering systems where the rudder “freeze” function is not possible);
• Autopilot SW version: SEM200 Version Aeu2_3;
• Panel SW version: MIP2 Version Mip2.

Autopilots
Autopilot control system overview shown on the picture below:
Fig. 417. Autopilot control system
Autopilot Interface Parts

• Gyro:
– One or two gyros. Two heading sources necessary to provide independent
course monitoring (compass compare alarm);
– Serial NMEA “XXHDT”, “XXTHS” sentences with update rate 10 times per
sec, RS422/NMEA.
• Speed Log:
– One or two sources (main speed source & back-up speed source);
– Either contact signal, 200 pulses/nm. Galvanically isolated contact
(contact loading 5 mA, 15 V DC);
– Or serial NMEA “XXVBW”, “XXVHW”, RS422/NMEA.
• 24 V DC supply:
– Main supply: 24 V DC;
– Alarm system supply: 24 V DC.
• Navigation Computer: Serial interface, NMEA sentences, RS422/NMEA;
• Alarms:
– Compass comparison alarm, NMEA;
– Power supply failure alarm, dry contact;
– Autopilot failure alarm, including hardware supervision detected failures and
software detected failures including Off course alarm, NMEA;
– Autopilot alive contact for rudder freeze in case of fail, dry contact
(option ordered separately);
– All opening contacts in case of alarm. Max. 50 mA/50 V DC.
• Rudder order: 0.25 V/deg neg./stbd (parameter set-up). Max. ±10 V DC,
5 mA max. load.

Autopilots
Serial Interface
The AEU has four bi-directional serial channels: A, B, C and D and two input
channels: F and G.
Normal set up:
• Two RS422 serial channels A and B. These to be used for interface to: Serial
Log, Gyro, Navigation computer. If installed, the Navigation computer must be
connected to channel A. VDR/Alarm system NMEA sentences are transmitted
on channel B;
• Two RS422 serial channels C and D. Channel C is used as interface to MIP
panels, if there are two panels installed, D is also used as panel serial interface
channel, else it is used for as Log or Gyro input;
• Two RS422 as extra serial inputs channel F and G for Log or Gyro signals.
System Power Supply

Mains supply: 24 V DC priority supply, +30%/-25%, switchboard fuse min. 6 A.
Panels are supplied through the AEU unit.
Power supply requirements:
• AEU consumption: max. 1 A;

• Panel consumption: max. 1.2 A (at lamp test);
• Mains fuse placed in AEU left terminal strip, TS1. Fuse: 5 A.
Alarm supply: 24 V DC priority supply, +30%/-25%, switchboard fuse min. 2 A:
• Alarm system consumption: max. 100 mA (Fuse in AEU 1 A);

• Fuse 1 A, mounted on left side of AMC board in AEU box.
AEU Alarms via Dry Contact

Alarm Systems are built in both in the AEU and in the MIP panels.
The alarm supervision covers:
• Detection of power supply failures on all internal power supplies;

• Detection of other hardware failures by a watch-dog circuit;
• List of software detected malfunctions.
Alarms must be acknowledged to silence the buzzer. This can be done, either from
the MIP-panel front or by an external, galvanic free closing contact. The Autopilot
can also send a galvanic free contact to an external alarm system.
Autopilot power supply failure alarm displayed in ECDIS via dry contact 37–39 of
X4 terminal and dry contact 3–6 of J11 terminal.
Watch dog alarm (software execution stopped or low voltage on CPU supply)
displayed in ECDIS via dry contact 3–6 of J11 terminal.
For connection these contact to DI of RS6B (RS6) computer, see “Autopilot EMRI
SEM200. Connection Diagram” presented in ANNEX J.

Autopilots
Steering Failure Alarm Rudder Order Freeze Unit SFF10

General
The SFF10 unit is designed to “freeze” a rudder order signal to the actual rudder
angle in case of an autopilot failure.
As long as the autopilot processor unit is working, this will be taken care of by
the autopilot itself.
If the autopilot is NOT ALIVE, then the rudder freeze function is normally implemented
by changing to NFU steering mode as a simple response to an autopilot NOT ALIVE
contact signal. This is a simple feature included in most normal designed steering
control systems.
The SFF10 Unit is designed to complete the missing functionality in some steering
systems where this automatic change over to NFU is not possible. These missing
features then calls for arrangement of an extra observation of the actual rudder
position, and use of this information in a separate freezing of the rudder order.
The AEU shall be of a type with ALIVE Relay built in.
Inputs to SFF10 Unit
• 24 V DC supply from ships switch board;
• Alive contact from the autopilot (open contact = NOT ALIVE);
• Rudder order signal from the autopilot;
• Mode information from the autopilot or directly from the mode control system;
• Actual rudder angle from a rudder feedback unit;
• 24 V DC from the autopilot to supply isolation amplifiers for rudder order signals.
Outputs from SFF10 Unit
• Rudder orders to the independent steering gear systems;
• SFF10 OK contact to the bridge alarm system: “Power OK & SFF10 Function
OK”;
• Alarm contact to the bridge alarm system: “Steering failure in autopilot mode”;
• Relay contact (both with NC and NO states) presenting the “freeze” state to
bridge alarm system;
• Serial NMEA string to VDR holding SFF10 status information.
The Rudder Freeze Function
The SFF10 supplies a rudder feedback potentiometer with ±10 V DC and the built in
processor module MPF11 tracks the actual rudder angle feedback.
In case of an autopilot failure (autopilot NOT ALIVE) the MPF11 freezes the actual
rudder angle, the rudder order from the autopilot is now replaced by this frozen
actual value.

Autopilots
Fig. 418. SFF10 rudder freeze function
The freeze function is only carried out if the autopilot is in control. If the autopilot is
NOT ALIVE when not being in control, then the SFF10 output just follows the failing
output from the autopilot.
The SFF10 unit will always fall back to transmitting the autopilot rudder order signal
in case of a power supply failure. The power supply to the SFF10 must be monitored
by the bridge Navigation Alarm system.
For more detailed information, see USER MANUAL FOR SFF10 supplied with SFF10.
Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK

For detailed information, see NAVIPILOT 4000. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
MANUAL (p/n 5001916) supplied as a part of the equipment delivery set.
Features
• Heading keeping with minimum rudder motion;
• Course change control by setting either turn rate or turn radius;
• Rudder limit setting (available as an alternative to setting rate or radius);
• Two redundant non-isolated analog outputs, configurable as proportional rudder
order or proportional rudder error;
• Direct RS-422 connection to external heading reference or navigation systems;
• Full alarm complement via the display unit and the alarm contacts;
• Self-tuning capabilities, which enable the system to monitor performance and to
automatically adjust rudder gain and counter rudder settings as needed, to keep
the tuning optimized even if vessel behavior is affected by changes in loading or
trim;
• Adaptive Self-Tuning feature enables the system to adjust control settings
automatically as sea conditions change, to continuously provide the best
possible steering performance and efficiency.

Autopilots
Equipment Description
Fig. 419. NAVIPILOT 4000 and ancillary equipment
The Control and Display Unit

The Control and Display Unit (CDU) contains the operator controls and indicators
used for Heading Control System operation. The CDU contains a Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD), which displays information during installation, operation, and
troubleshooting.
Displays at the CDU indicate the current heading, the ordered heading (set
heading), and related information. Also included at the CDU are various other
operator-accessible controls, which are used for testing the system, for adjusting the
intensity level of the CDU indicators for day or night time viewing, and all other
operator-controlled functions, including muting the audible alarm.
Fig. 420. Control and Display Unit (CDU)

Autopilots
CDU dimensions and weight:
• Width: 287.8 mm;

• Height: 143.8 mm;
• Depth: 44 mm (requires 150 mm minimum clearance for interface cable);
• Weight: 1.5 kg.
Steering Control Unit (SCU)
The SCU contains a microcomputer, input/output terminals, and other control
circuitry required for processing the steering commands and controlling the steering
gear.
Fig. 421. Steering Control Unit (SCU)
SCU dimensions and weight:
• Width: 413 mm;

• Height: 400 mm (requires 550 mm minimum for interface cable clearance);
• Depth: 152 mm (requires 280 mm minimum clearance for cover removal);
• Weight: 4.2 kg.
NAVINET 4000 Steering Control Network
The NAVINET 4000 Steering Control Network provides communications between
the SCU, the CDU, and various bus interface devices. The NAVINET 4000 Steering
Control Network utilizes a 120 Ohm controlled-impedance Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus. CAN is a two-wire, half-duplex, serial network technology which is well
suited for high-speed microcontroller applications.
Characteristics of the CAN bus in the NAVINET 4000 implementation are as follows:
• The data transfer rate of the bus is 250 kilobits per second (kbps);
• The maximum length of the backbone is dependent on the type of Bus Interface
Units being used. For a configuration in which the Bus Interface Units are
version 0.16.03 or later, the maximum bus length is 200 meters. In all other
configurations, the maximum bus length is 100 meters;
• When the NAVINET 4000 bus is powered by the SCU’s internal 15 V bus power
supply, up to 30 devices can be connected to the bus.
To attach bus devices, a splice with an in-line terminal block or a CAN Interface Unit
(CIU) is used to tap into the bus.

Autopilots
The figures below show a CAN Interface Unit and CAN bus cable stub used to
interface to Heading Control System units
Each end of the bus must be terminated with a 120 Ohm (1/8 Watt or greater)
resistor. The only exception to this rule is for a system in which the only devices on
the bus are a single Control and Display Unit (CDU) and a single Steering Control
Unit (SCU), which are directly connected together. In this case only, use of a single
120 Ohm resistor at the interface point is adequate termination.
The bus can be terminated in any of the following ways:
• Via discrete resistors;
• Via resistors R1 and R2 on a CAN Interface Unit;
• Via the built-in termination resistor on the Steering Control Unit PCB (only
Revision B or later SCU PCB’s have the built in termination resistor).
The installer must ensure that no more than two termination resistors are present.
Additional termination resistors may cause unreliable operation of the bus. If more
than two devices installed on the bus have built-in termination resistors, the installer
must remove or disconnect those resistors as needed, to ensure that terminations
are present only at each end of the bus. For example:
• On the SCU PCB, the termination resistor is connected to the bus when a
soldered bridge (earlier configurations) or a removable jumper (later
configurations) is connected across terminal pair E23-E24 (Fig. 179). If the
termination resistor on the SCU PCB is not to be used, remove the bridge or
jumper across E23-E24.
• On the CAN Interface Unit, each of the two resistors provides a separate bus
termination. Remove both resistors to provide no bus terminations at the CIU;
remove either resistor to provide a single bus termination at the CIU.
The CAN cable shield must be grounded at only one point on the bus. All other taps
or splices must pass the shield through to the connection at the destination device.
Equipment ground and other cable shield grounds must be kept separate. In all
cases, use proper shield grounding techniques, usually connecting the shield to the
vessel hull ground at only one point.
Stubs or taps to bus devices represent a load on the bus. The length of each stub
must be less than 3 meters. Assuming that the CAN bus is powered by the SCU’s
internal 15V bus power supply, the total number of loads on the bus should not
exceed 30 (load current for the 15V bus power supply is approximately equal to
25mA + (N-1)*8mA, where N is the number of nodes or loads.)
Fig. 422. CAN Interface Unit (CIU)

Autopilots
Fig. 423. Display CAN Bus drop cable
NAVIPILOT 4000 Base and Optional Equipment Part Numbers

Table 155. NAVIPILOT 4000 base equipment part numbers
Part Number Description Comments
074856-0000-000 Control and Display Unit (CDU) Includes cable
020456-0000-000
074851-0000-000 Steering Control Unit (SCU)
022923-0000-000 *Product Key – NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK
Note: *The Product Key is a hardware device, which is installed to each CDU at
the time of system installation, and which provides read-only data to the
NAVIPILOT for system licensing and security. The data that is stored at the
Product Key is used to unlock the system’s automatic pilot functions.
For detailed information about the Product Key, see NAVIPILOT 4000.
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL (p/n 5001916).
Table 156. NAVIPILOT 4000 optinal equipment part numbers
Part Number Description Functions
020040-0000-000 AC Solenoid Daughter PCB Interface to steering gear. 24-230 VAC, 4 A
(without relay-switched I/O) inrush, 1 A holding maximum
020041-0000-000 AC Solenoid Daughter Interface to steering gear. 24-230 VAC, 4 A
(with relay-switched I/O) inrush, 1 A holding maximum
020042-0000-000 DC Solenoid Daughter PCB Interface to steering gear.
(without relay-switched I/O) 12-110 VDC, 2 A maximum.
Pump on sense: contact closure
< 1 Ohm ON, > 100K OFF
020043-0000-000 DC Solenoid Daughter Interface to steering gear.
(with relay-switched I/O) 12-110 VDC, 2 A maximum.
020044-0000-000 Isolated Proportional PCB Interface to steering gear.
+/-10 VDC output (maximum load +/-20 mA).
022196-0000-000 CAN Interface Unit (CIU) Interface of devices to the NAVINET 4000
Steering Control Network bus

Autopilots
NAVIPILOT 4000 Technical Data

Vessel Application Rules
The NAVIPILOT 4000 TRACK are applicable to vessels meeting the following
requirements:
• Vessel Type - Displacement Hull;

• Vessel Size – Any;
• Vessel Speed - Up to 35 knots;
• Vessel Steering Devices - Any of the following: Rudders, Azimuthing Propellers,
Azipods.
In order to use the Adaptive Self-Tuning capabilities of the NAVIPILOT 4000, the
vessel must be rudder-controlled, with a Tau greater than or equal to 5 seconds.
Tau is the time (in seconds) that it takes the vessel to sail its own length
(at waterline) at its service speed. The figure below is a nomogram for determining
Tau (for additional information on calculating Tau, refer to document
NAVIPILOT 4000. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL, Appendix C).
Fig. 424. Tau Nomogram
The NAVIPILOT 4000’s minimum Turn Rate Order and maximum Turn Radius
Order are also dependent on the vessel’s Tau. Fig. 172 shows the minimum Turn
Rate as a function of Tau. Fig. 173 shows the maximum Turn Radius as a function
of Tau and the actual speed of the ship. These Rate Order and Radius Order
limitations are imposed by the software.
Note: The operator may have to select a higher Turn Rate Order than shown, in
order to control heading in high winds.

Autopilots
Fig. 425. Minimum Turn Rate Order chart
Note: The operator may have to select a lower Turn Radius Order than shown, in
order to control heading in high winds.
Fig. 426. Maximum Turn Radius Order chart
Interface Requirements
Interface specification is presented in the table below:
Table 157. NAVIPILOT 4000 interface specification
Power
SCU Primary Power Input 24 V AC/DC, 3 A (18 – 36 V range)
SCU Backup Supply Input 24 V DC, 3 A (18 – 36 V range)
SCU Power Output to 24 V DC, 1 A max. (unregulated, based on Primary Power)
CDU
SCU DC Supply Output to 24 V DC, 0.5 A max. (unregulated, based on Primary Power)
CDU
Power Dissipation 10 Watts max.
Heading Inputs
Heading 1 and Heading 2:
Interface Type RS-422, optically isolated
Message Format NMEA 0183
Selectable Message HDT (True Heading);
Types HEHDT (North-Seeking Gyro - True Heading);
NSD (Navigation Status Data);
HDM (Magnetic Heading);
HDG (Heading, Deviation and Variation);
HCHDT (Magnetic Compass - True Heading)
Message Rate 10 Hz
Fluxgate Interface to C.Plath Jupiter Magnetic Compassa

Autopilots
Speed Inputs
Serial Speed:
Interface Type RS-422, optically isolated
Selectable Message VBW (Dual Ground/Water Speed);
Types VHW (Water Speed and Heading);
VTG (Course Over Ground and Ground Speed)
Message Rate 1 Hz
Pulse Speed 200 pulse per nautical mile contact closure input, internal pull-up to
+24 V
Navigator Interface
Interface Type RS-422, opticcaly isolated
Selectable Message APB (Heading/Track Controller [Autopilot] Sentence B);
Types (Waypoint Mode) HSC/XTE (Heading-to-Steer Command/ Cross-Track Error)
Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) Interface
Interface Type RS-422, serial otput, 9600 baud rate
Selectable Message HTD (Heading/Track Control Data);
Types RSA (Rudder Sensor Angle)
External System Analog +/- 10 V range, via an onboard isolation amplifier
Input
Repeater Output
Interface Type RS-422, configurable to be On or Off
Message Types Depending on heading inputs:
AGHDT (Heading/Track Controller [General] - True Heading);
AGNSD (Heading/Track Controller [General] - Navigation Status Data);
AGHDM (Heading/Track Controller [General] - Magnetic Heading)
Central Alarm Interface
Interface Type RS-422. Central Alarm Manager (CAM) or Rudder Repeatback (RRB)
output (not optically isolated). Acknowledge input (optically isolated)
Alarm Message Format NMEA 0183
Configurable Functions CAM, RRB, Off
Baud Rates 38.4 k (RRB),
4800, 9600, 19.2 k, 38.4 k (CAM)
Alarm Contacts
Dedicated Primary Supply Failure, Backup Supply Failure, Off Heading Alarm,
System Alarm. NO and NC contacts provided for each. All contacts
rated 115 V AC @ 0.5 A max or 30 V DC @ 1 A max.
Configurable Three configurable relays. NO and NC contacts provided for each.
All contacts rated 115 V AC @ 0.5 A max or 30 V DC @ 1 A max.
Table 158. NAVIPILOT 4000 environmental specification
Power
Operating Temperature Meets or exceeds IEC 945, Class B
Storage Temperature -40 to +70º C
Humidity Meets or exceeds IEC 945, Class B
Vibrations Meets or exceeds IEC 945, Class B
EMI/RFI Meets or exceeds IEC 945, Class B
Degree of Enclosure Meets or exceeds IEC 529
Compass Safe Distance 0.4 m
Power Dissipation 10 Watts max.
Supply Power 24 V AC/DC, 3 A (18 – 36 V range)

Autopilots
Installation and Connection Requirements

When installing NAVIPILOT 4000, it is necessary to take the following into account:
• The Control and Display Unit (CDU) must be mounted using provided hardware
per the cutout shown below on the picture presented in
item Outlet and Installation Drawing.
• The NAVIPILOT 4000 interconnection cable provides for the cable length
between cable entry location on the display assembly and the Steering Control
Unit (SCU) of up to 3 meters, longer distances require a cable designed for the
CAN bus e.g. Unitronic 2170340. Bus communications will not operate reliably
over other types of cable.
• Suggested mounting angle of the NAVIPILOT 4000 display assembly is
between 15 and 45 degrees from horizontal.
• The CDU and SCU are not intended to be exposed to weather or submerged in,
or have continuous contact with seawater.
• Cabling:
– If armored cables are used, terminate armor outside of unit.
– Secure cabling to slots at enclosure opening using cable ties as required.
– For connection to SCU terminal board, strip wire end 5 to 8 mm.
• Electrical installation:
– RS422 serial interface may have transmit and receive lines split and routed to
different equipment. In these split applications, for NMEA 0183 compliance,
all RS422 receiver circuits shall be optically isolated and both the transmitter
and receiver must have the same baud rate. When it is necessary to connect
two lines to a single I/O terminal, splice the signals externally and run a single
wire to the I/O terminal.
– SCU application configuration jumpers, for complete jumper configuration list,
refer to document NAVIPILOT 4000. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
MANUAL.
Table 159. SCU jumpers configurations
Jumper Function Configuration Comments
E1-E2 Rudder Unit IN = STBD rudder All SCUs that are connected to the same
Selection SCU; rudder must have the same setting
OUT = PORT rudder (all PORT or all STARBOARD).
SCU For single-rudder vessels in which
a Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) is used,
all SCUs must be set to STARBOARD
(the VDR reads the rudder angle from the
starboard field of the NMEA message).
For dual-rudder vessels, all SCUs that
control the port rudder must be set to
PORT, and all SCUs that control
the starboard rudder must be set to
STARBOARD
E3-E4 NAVINET 4000 IN = SCU power to The internal supply is 15 VDC, 500 mA.
Steering Control CAN bus; If more than 500 mA is required to supply
Network – Bus OUT = External power all devices which communicate over
Power Source to CAN bus the bus, an external supply will be
required. A diode is inserted inline with the
internal supply, for protection with parallel
SCU operation
E15-E16 SCU IN = SCU 2; This jumper is needed only if the system
Identification OUT = SCU 1 has more than one SCU per rudder. If two
SCU's are connected to a rudder, set one
SCU to SCU 1 and other to SCU 2

Autopilots
E23-E24 NAVINET 4000 IN = Bus terminated at See above item NAVINET 4000
Steering Control SCU;
Network – Bus Steering Control Network for bus
OUT = Bus not
Termination termination instructions.
terminated at SCU
E23-E24 is either a soldered bridge
(earlier configurations) or a removable
jumper (later configurations)
E25 thru DC/DC E25-E26 jumpered; Normal input
E30 Converter E28-E29 umpered
Input Normal/
E26-E27 jumpered; Reversed input
Reversed
E29-E30 umpered
– CAN data lines must have a minimum of one 120 Ohm (1/8W min)
termination resistor.
– Maximum total CAN bus length not to exceed 200 m.
– Ground CDU and SCU to ships's hull using provided connection points.
Outlet and Installation Drawings

The table below describes the list of NAVIPILOT 4000 equipment.
Table 160. List of equipment
Item No Name Weight, kg
1 Control and Display Unit (CDU) 1.5
2 Product Key (installed on CDU) 0.02
3 3 m Interface Cable (installed on CDU) 0.4
4 Steering Control Unit (SCU) 4.2
5 Steering Gear Interface PCB (installed in SCU) 0.2
Fig. 427. CDU installation and dimensional drawing

Autopilots
Fig. 428. CDU installation drawing
Fig. 429. SCU installation and dimensional drawing

Autopilots
Fig. 430. SCU installation drawing
Fig. 431. CDU and SCU connection

Autopilots
Fig. 432. Steering Control Unit PCB
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900

For detailed information, see PT900 AUTOPILOT SYSTEM. USER’S MANUAL
(IM 80B20T01E) and PT900 AUTOPILOT MAINTENANCE MODE. OPERATION
MANUAL (SM80B22H01E) supplied as a part of the equipment delivery set.
Precautions for Installation
CAUTION!
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK:
Turn off the power supply before starting the wiring.
Precautions on Installation Position

In case the TRACK CONTROL SYSTEM is installed as the option, each one of
following override facility shall be installed around the conning position to comply
with IEC62065 Ed.2.
• MODE SELECTOR (MPH791);

• SYSTEM SELECTOR (MPH790) & NFU LEVER (MPB391);
• TAKE-OVER UNIT (MPH793) & NFU LEVER (MPB391);
• TAKE-OVER UNIT (MPH793) & DIAL STEERING UNIT (MPB394);
• NFU OVRD OPERATION UNIT (MPH795) & NFU LEVER (MPB391);
• FU OVRD OPERATION UNIT (MPH794) & DIAL STEERING UNIT (MPB394);
• Manual steering change-over device which is provided by steering gear or
azimuth thruster manufacturer.

Autopilots
Baseline of CONTROL STAND (MPM190)

The baseline of CONTROL STAND (MPM190) which has master gyrocompass shall
be parallel to the fore-and-aft line. The accuracy of baseline is within +/-0.5degrees
from fore-and-aft line.
Service area
Keep the service area around the CONTROL STAND (MPM190) for usual operation,
ventilation and maintenance.
In case PT900 is installed in the bridge center console, please keep enough space
(see below item Dimensional Drawings)
Precautions for Operation

MODE SELECTOR (MPH791)
WARNING!
Before you change the steering mode from AUTO to MAN, please set the steering
wheel to the midship position.
If there is a large difference between the actual rudder angle and steering wheel
position before changing the steering mode, the rudder may be steered excessively.
Alarm
• Change-over to NFU mode immediately when PT900 detects any "ALARM".
• Following alarms appear, switch-over S/G pump or stop abnormal S/G pump in
parallel operation.
Servo loop failure.
Rudder angle feedback signal failure.
MCU(ADAPT) time out.
CAUTION!
Do not execute the megger test except the on-board power supply terminals. A
megger test may damage the instrument.
While you maneuver the vessel with NFU lever, watch the rudder angle indicator to
avoid the rudder steered up to the mechanical limit.
Outline
PT900 fully conforms to the IMO MSC64(67) Annex3, Heading Control System
performance standards, and provides the economical efficiency, safety, usability,
extensibility.
PT900 can be adapted from small vessels to large vessels.
Features
• Economical efficiency:
The economical efficiency is improved by Batch Noise Adaptive Autopilot
Control (BNAAC) and course control function (Option).
• Visibility and usability:
The visibility and usability is improved by using 7 inch color LCD and touch
panel. This interface will make instinctive operation.

Autopilots
• Easy scalability:
Each unit interfaces with CAN-bus network. Thus, the system is scalable easily
by CAN-bus network.
• Interface with external equipment:
PT900 has 3 heading sensor input ports (IEC61162-1/2) and interfaces with
external navigational equipment (ECDIS, BAMS, BNWAS, etc.).
About Autopilot System
Autopilot is a system which controls the ship’s heading based on the heading sensor
input like a gyrocompass, magnet compass or THD (Transmitting Heading Device)
by activating the rudder. So the autopilot means the Heading Control System (HCS).
PT900 basically consists of the following units. This user’s manual is intended for
the basic configuration. The other option units are shown in the other manual.
• CONTROL STAND (MPM190):

CONTROL STAND is a stand-alone steering stand that we supplied. Each
human-machine interface can be installed on the upper panel. Each board and
terminal can be installed inside the CONTROL STAND.
• STEERING REPEATER COMPASS (MKR056):
STEERING REPEATER COMPASS is powered and receives serial signals from
the gyrocompass system. It drives the repeater compass card to indicate the
current heading of the vessel.
• AUTOPILOT CONTROL & DISPLAY UNIT: AP CDU (MPH490):
AP CDU is a human-machine interface which indicates the navigational
information on 7 inch LCD. AP CDU is not only indication but also calculation of
rudder order during AUTO steering mode.
• HAND STEERING UNIT (MPB390):
HAND STEERING UNIT indicates and commands the order rudder angle during
MAN steering mode.
• NFU LEVER (MPB391):
NFU LEVER activates the rudder actuator directly during Non-Follow-Up
steering mode.
• SYSTEM SELECTOR (MPH790):
SYSTEM SELECTOR selects the system in operation. SYSTEM SELECTOR
also selects the steering mode of Follow-Up or Non-Follow-Up.
• MODE SELECTOR (MPH791):
MODE SELECTOR selects the steering mode during Follow-Up steering.
Selectable modes are auto steering “AUTO” or manual steering “MAN”.
• NAV I/F UNIT (MPT590):
NAV I/F is connected with various external navigational equipment. It has input
and output ports for external navigational equipment.
• ANNUNCIATOR UNIT (MPH690):
ANNUNCIATOR UNIT is alert indicator unit. It mainly monitors the power supply
for Steering gear Control System, steering gear condition and PT900 operation
condition. It provides the audible and visible alerts.
• MAIN CONTROL UNIT: MCU (MPH291):MAIN CONTROL UNIT mainly controls
the steering system. It controls the steering mode and rudder order output etc.

Autopilots
Fig. 433. PT900 system configuration

Autopilots
Fig. 434. Standard and option PT900 system configuration
Composition and Type of System

PT900 series has 3 types of models. Each model has a different controller.
You can check which controller is installed on your vessel at AP CDU [Control
Mode] button in [HOME] screen.
• PT900D:
PT900D is Heading Control System (HCS) based on the digital PID controlling
method.
You can check “PID” indication at AP CDU [Control Mode] button.
This controller selects the PID gain automatically by inputting the vessel’s speed
manually.
You can set the fine adjustment of PID gain.
• PT900A:
PT900A is HCS based on the adaptive PID controlling method.
You can check “Adaptive” indication at AP CDU [Control Mode] button.
This controller selects the PID gain automatically according to the vessel’s
motion characteristics which is changed by ship’s speed and ship’s draft etc.
Batch Noise Adaptive Autopilot Control (BNAAC) function is activated while
operation mode is “Economy”.
• PT900A PLUS:
PT900A PLUS is HCS with more economical efficiency control.
You can check “Adaptive Plus” indication at AP CDU [Control Mode] button.
Batch Noise Adaptive Autopilot Control (BNAAC) function is activated during any
operation mode (i.e. Precision-1, Precision-2 and Economy).

Autopilots
Summary of Operation
• Checking items before power ON.
Check if the following items are normal before you turn on PT900:
– Check that the steering gear is ready to operate.

– Check that CONTROL & POWER BOX is turned on. Check also that the test
switch of the CONTROL & POWER BOX is set to “NOR” (Normal).
– Check that “PWR ON” indication of ANNUNCIATOR UNIT is on.
– Check that STEERING REPEATER COMPASS shows correct heading.
– Check that HAND STEERING UNIT is set to midship position.
• How to startup and shut down.
SYSTEM SELECTOR has the following 2 functions:
Power ON/OFF of PT900;

Select the system in operation.
– Select “NO.1” or “NO.2” position of SYSTEM SELECTOR to startup PT900.
– Steering mode is same one that PT900 was turned off.
– Select “OFF” position of SYSTEM SELECTOR to shut down PT900.
• How to select the Steering mode:
Steering mode which is same as the last one is selected when PT900 is turned
on. NFU mode is selected by SYSTEM SELECTOR, MAN/AUTO mode is
selected by MODE SELECTOR, AUTO/CRS mode is selected by AP CDU. NAV
mode is only selectable by ECDIS operation.
When you change the steering mode, the buzzer on AP CDU sounds to inform
the navigator.
Table 161. Steering mode selection
SYSTEM MODE AP CDU Steering Mode Remark
SELECTOR SELECTOR Steering
Mode
NO.1/NO.2 AUTO AUTO Heading control is selected
CRS Course control is selected Option
NAV Track control is in control Option
MAN - FU HAND wheel is
NFU - - NFU LEVER operation is selected

Autopilots
• [HOME] Screen:
Below figure shows the [HOME] screen of AP CDU. [HOME] screen indicates
the navigation information and each setting.
Fig. 435. PT900 [HOME] screen
A Heading deviation 1 Control mode 7 Speed

B Rate of turn 2 Steering mode 8 Alert button
C Heading 3 Selected compass 9 Full screen button
D Set Heading 4 Operation mode 10 MENU button
E Rudder angle 5 Draft mode 11 Display mode
F Guidance area 6 Turn mode 12 Spinner
• How to start the Heading Control (AUTO mode):

– Select “NO.1” or “NO.2” position of SYSTEM SELECTOR.
– Press “AUTO” key on MODE SELECTOR.
– Current ship’s heading is set as the preset heading and heading control
starts.
– After you select the turn mode (P-D, Rate”°/min”, “°/ τ” or Radius) on [HOME]
screen, you can change the set course.
– Set course can be changed by set course dial or touchscreen.
• How to start the Manual steering (HAND mode):
– Press “AUTO” key on MODE SELECTOR.
– After you edit the planned route on ECDIS, track control starts on ECDIS side
operation. Steering mode on PT900 is automatically changed from AUTO to
NAV mode.
– Track control can be finished by long tap of [Steering Mode] button on
[HOME] screen except ECDIS side operation.

Autopilots
• How to start the Manual steering (MAN mode):

– Press “MAN” key on MODE SELECTOR.
– You can steer the rudder by manual
– Order rudder angle can be changed by HAND STEERING UNIT.
• How to start the Non-Follow-Up steering (NFU mode):
– Select “NFU” position of SYSTEM SELECTOR.
– Manual steering by NFU LEVER is available.
– Rudder is steered while NFU LEVER is turned.
CAUTION!
While you maneuver the vessel with NFU LEVER, watch the rudder angle indicator
toavoid the rudder steered up to the mechanical limit.
Summary of Alert
In case that PT900 detects any trouble, audible and visible alerts are generated at
AP CDU and ANNUNCIATOR UNIT shown in the figure below.
Each alert is categorized as the following 3 priorities (Alarm, Warning and Caution).
Fig. 436. Alert indication
Table 162. Alerts

Priorities Definition (IMO resolution A.1021(26))
Alarm An alarm is a high priority of an alert.
Condition requiring immediate attention and action, to maintain the safe navigation
and operation of the ship
Warning Condition requiring no immediate attention or action.
Warnings are presented for precautionary reasons to bring awareness of changed
conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so when no action
is taken.
Caution Lowest priority of an alert.
Awareness of a condition which does not warrant an alarm or warning condition, but
still requires attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given
information.

Autopilots
• Alert Indication.
In case that PT900 detects any trouble, audible and visible alerts are generated
at AP CDU and ANNUNCIATOR UNIT. Buzzer sounds according to the alert
priority.
– Alert buzzer : Buzzer sounding changes depending on alert priority:
Alarm : Sounding short sound at 3 times every 7 seconds.
Warning : Sounding short sound at 2 times.
Caution : No soundings.
• How to acknowledge the alert.
You can acknowledge the alert at AP CDU or ANNUNCIATOR UNIT.
– AP CDU: by pressing the ALARM ACK key or tapping the [ACK] button on
[2 Alert List] screen, you can acknowledge the alert and stop the buzzer:
In case the alerts are rectified, the indications are removed.
In case the alerts are not rectified, the indications changes from blinking
to lighting.
– ANNUNCIATOR UNIT.
By pressing the ALARM ACK key, you can acknowledge the steering gear
alert mainly and stop the buzzer:
In case the alerts are rectified, the indications are removed.
In case the alerts are not rectified, the indications changes from blinking
to lighting.
• How to check the alert factor.
You can check the alert factors on [2 Alert List] screen of AP CDU.
By tapping the [Alert] button on [HOME] screen, the screen changes from
[HOME] screen to [2 Alert List] screen:
Fig. 437. Check of alert factor

Autopilots
Individual Units and Their Functions

CONTROL STAND [MPM190]
CONTROL STAND is a stand-alone steering stand that we supplied. Each human-
machine interface can be installed on the upper panel. Each boards and terminals
(NAV I/F and MCU, etc.) can be installed inside the CONTROL STAND.
Gyro master compass also can be installed inside the CONTROL STAND.
Fig. 438. CONTROL STAND [MPM190]
STEERING REPEATER COMPASS [MKR056]

STEERING REPEATER COMPASS is powered and receives serial signals from the
gyrocompass system. It drives the compass card to indicate the current heading of
the vessel. At the time of being supplied the power source, STEERING REPEATER
COMPASS starts zero adjustment. RUNNING LED blinks during zero adjustment.
It changes from blinking to lighting after zero adjustment.
Fig. 439. STEERING REPEATER COMPASS [MKR056]

Autopilots
Table 163. Steering Repeater Compass control elements

Operation / Indication Function
COMPASS CARD It indicates the ship’s heading
ERROR LED (red) It blinks or lights when STEERING REPEATER COMPASS
detects any error
RUNNING LED (green) It blinks during zero adjustment. It lights while STEERING
REPEATER COMPASS works normally.
ZERO ALIGNMENT SWITCH There is any deviation between other repeater compasses,
push it and align the indication.
Dimmer It adjusts the brightness of backlight and LEDs
SYSTEM SELECTOR [MPH790]

SYSTEM SELECTOR selects the system in operation. SYSTEM SELECTOR also
selects the steering mode of Follow-Up or Non-Follow-Up.
Fig. 440. SYSTEM SELECTOR [MPH790]
Table 164. System Selector function

OFF Shut down of PT900
NO.1 Startup of PT900 and selection of NO.1 system
NO.2 Startup of PT900 and selection of NO.2 system
NFU Startup of PT900 and selection of NFU steering mode
BRILL DOWN key Decrease of the brightness
BRILL UP key Increase of the brightness
MODE SELECTOR [MPH791]

MODE SELECTOR selects the steering mode during Follow-Up steering. Selectable
modes are auto steering “AUTO” or manual steering “MAN”.
Fig. 441. MODE SELECTOR [MPH791]

Autopilots
Table 165. Mode Selector function

AUTO key It lights during AUTO steering mode
MAN key It lights during MANual steering mode
AP CDU (AUTOPILOT CONTROL & DISPLAY UNIT) [MPH490]

AP CDU is a human-machine interface which indicates the navigational information
on 7 inch LCD. AP CDU is not only indication but also calculation of rudder order
during AUTO steering mode.
Fig. 442. AP CDU (AUTOPILOT CONTROL & DISPLAY UNIT) [MPH490]
Table 166. AP CDU function

LCD It indicates the various data and settings
TOUCH PANEL You can operate it by tapping screen
COURSE SETTING DIAL It can set the “Set heading” during AUTO mode or “Set
course” during CRS mode. This dial works by pushing and
rotating it
ALARM ACK key To press it stops the buzzer in the event of an alert and
allows the alert item to be acknowledged.
LED (red) blinks or lights while the alert appears
SELECT key To press it selects this AP CDU in case 2 or more AP CDUs
are installed. LED (green) lights while this AP CDU is
selected
HOME key To press it transitions to [HOME] screen
Buzzer Buzzer sounds for any alert or steering mode change

Autopilots
HAND STEERING UNIT [MPB390]

HAND STEERING UNIT indicates and commands the order rudder angle during
MAN steering mode.
Fig. 443. HAND STEERING UNIT [MPB390]
Table 167. Hand Steering unit function

STEERING HANDLE It inputs order rudder angle during MAN mode
STEERING ANGLE INDICATOR It indicates the order rudder angle during MAN mode
DIMMER It adjusts the brightness of STEERING ANGLE INGICATOR
backlight.
It does not work while the central dimmer control is on.
Rotate the dimmer knob to counterclockwise fully to escape
from central dimmer control and to adjust the brightness
individually.
Adjust the brightness of the steering angle indicator.
Then rotate knob to clockwise to adjust the brightness
BUZZER It sounds when wheel-off center alert appears. (Option)
NFU LEVER [MPB391]

NFU LEVER is self-returning lever switch to activate the rudder actuator directly
during Non-Follow-Up steering mode.
NFU LEVER is available while SYSTEM SELECTOR is set to NFU position.

Autopilots
Table 168. NFU Level function

NFU STEERING LEVER It activates the rudder actuator directly
CAUTION!
While you maneuver the vessel with NFU lever, watch the rudder angle indicator to
avoid the rudder steered up to the mechanical limit.
ANNUNCIATOR UNIT [MPH690]

ANNUNCIATOR UNIT is alert indicator unit. It mainly monitors the power supply for
Steering gear Control System, steering gear condition and PT900 operation
condition. It provides the audible and visible alerts.
The arrangement of indicator lamp depends on the specification of the vessel.
(Following figure is an example of two steering gear pumps type)
Table 169. Hand Steering unit function

PWR ON 100V AC power supply indicator lamps (green)
PWR FAIL 100V AC no-volt alert indicator lamps (red)
ACT RUN Actuator run indicator lamps (green)
ACT FAIL Actuator failure alert indicator lamps (red)
BATT 24V DC (ship’s battery) power supply indicator lamp (green)
BACKUP 24V DC (backup) power supply indicator lamp (green).
Note: This 24V DC is provided from AC power source.
ALARM ALARM lamp (red)
WARNING WARNING lamp (orange)
CAUTION CAUTION lamp (yellow)
AUTO Auto steering status indicator lamp (green)
MAN Manual steering status indicator lamp (green)
ALARM ACK key To press it stops the buzzer in the event of an alert and
allows the alert item to be acknowledged.
LED (red) blinks or lights while the alert appears
Buzzer Buzzer sounds for any alert

Autopilots
NAV I/F UNIT [MPT590]

NAV I/F is connected with various external navigational equipment. It has input and
output ports for external navigational equipment.
• NAV I/F receives the sensor data from each sensor like gyrocompass, speed log
and so on. It distributes these sensor data to other PT900 equipment with CAN-
bus line.
• NAV I/F sends alert information and control status to the external equipment
lime BAMS, VDR and so on.
MAIN CONTROL UNIT (MCU) [MPH291]
MAIN CONTROL UNIT mainly controls the steering system. It controls the steering
mode and rudder order output etc.
• MAIN CONTROL UNIT receives the digital signal of rudder order from HAND
STEERING UNIT or AP CUD and it converts and outputs as the analog signal to
CONTROL & POWER BOX installed in steering gear room.
• MAIN CONTROL UNIT receives analog signal of actual rudder angle and
contact status signal of steering gear from CONTROL & POWER BOX. It
converts and distributes them to other PT900 equipment with CAN-bus line.
Fig. 446. MAIN CONTROL UNIT (MCU) [MPH291]
Power Supply
The specification of power supply depends on the specification of each vessel.
The tables below show the standard arrangement of PT900.
Table 170. Power supply
Item Specifications
Main power supply 220/380/440V AC 50/60Hz
Backup power supply 24V DC
Power consumption (AC) 300VA (max.) - It depends on the steering gear specification.
Power circulation (24V DC) 0.5A (in normal)

Autopilots
Environmental Specifications (Under Normal Conditions)

Table 171. Environmental
Item Specifications
Power supply variation AC power supply Voltage: ±10%, Frequency:
±5%
Ship’s battery power supply -25% to +30%
Temperature -15℃ to +55℃
Humidity 0 to 95% R.H (no condensation)
Vibration 2.0 to 13.2Hz: 2mm p-p / 13.2 to 100Hz: 7m/s²
Protection IP22 (surface)
Input Signal
Table 172. Input signal
Input signal No. of Signal Specification
circuits
Ship’s heading, Rate of turn 2 circuits IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
Ship’s heading, Rate of turn 1 circuit IEC61162-2
Ship’s speed 1 circuit IEC61162-1 or 100 to 900 pulse/NM (100 Pulse step)
GPS (Position, COG, SOG 1 circuit IEC61162-1
and Time)
ECDIS 1 circuit IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
BAMS 1 circuit IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
Alert buzzer stop signal 1 circuit Contact
Output Signal
Table 173. Output signal
Input signal No. of Signal Specification
circuits
ECDIS 1 circuits IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
BAMS 1 circuit IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
VDR, MHR110A, MHR120, MDR290 4 circuit IEC61162-1 or IEC61162-2
(YOKOGAWA products)
BNWAS: Enable 1 circuit Contact
BNWAS: Watch timer Reset 1 circuit Contact
Power fail 2 circuit Contact
Actuator fail (from CONTROL & POWER BOX) 2 circuit Contact
System fail 2 circuit Contact
Off heading alert 2 circuit Contact
Alert buzzer stop signal 1 circuit Contact

Autopilots
External Input / Output Signal Specifications and Circuits

Table 174. External input / output signal specifications and circuits
Circuit Name Abbreviation Circuit/Signal Specification
IEC61162-1, RDxH
Input RDxC
(x=Number)
Input circuit : Photo-coupler;
Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal;
Transmission rate: 4800bps
IEC61162-1, TDxA
Output TDxB
FG
(x=Number)
Output circuit: RS485/RS422 Transceiver;

Transmission rate: 4800bps
IEC61162-2, RDxA
Input RDxB
ISOGND
(x=Number)
Input circuit : RS422 Receiver;

Transmission rate : 38400bps
IEC61162-2, TDxA
Output TDxB
COM
FG
(x=Number)
Output circuit: RS485/RS422 Transceiver;

Transmission rate : 38400bps
Ship's speed, IC1
Pulse signal COM
Input circuit : CMOS;

Withstanding voltage : 32VMax;
Pulse rate : 200 Pulse/NM
BNWAS, ENA
Contact output ENB
RSTA
RSTB
Output circuit : no-voltage contact;

Contact rating : 24V 0.5A
State JP1-2 JP2-3 (Normal)
Power off Close Open
Non Active Close Open
Active Open Close
CPU fail Close Open

Autopilots
Power fail, NV1A

Contact output NV1B
NV2A
NV2B Output circuit : no-voltage contact;
Power Output
On Close
Off Open
System fail, SFL1A

Contact output SFL1B
SFL2A
SFL2B

State JP1-2 JP2-3 (Normal)
Power off Open Close
Normal Open Close
Fail Close Open
CPU fail Before state holding
Alert buzzer BSA
stop, BSB
Contact output

State JP1-2 (Normal) JP2-3
Power off Open Close
Normal Open Close
Fail Close Open
CPU fail Open Close

Autopilots
Serial Input / Output Data Sentence

Table 175. Serial input / output data sentence
Input / Sentence Standard Data Interval
Output
Input HRC Proprietary Heading / Rate of turn -
sentence
HDM IEC61162-1/-2 Heading -
HDT IEC61162-1/-2 Heading -
HDG IEC61162-1/-2 Heading -
THS IEC61162-1/-2 Heading -
ROT IEC61162-1/-2 Rate of turn -
VMVSD Proprietary Ship’s speed -
sentence
VHW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed -
VBW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed -
VTG IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed -
VDR IEC61162-1/-2 Set & Drift -
ZDA IEC61162-1 Date and Time -
GGA IEC61162-1 Ship’s position -
XTE IEC61162-1/-2 Cross track error -
HSC IEC61162-1/-2 Heading steering command -
HTC IEC61162-1/-2 Heading/track control command -
ACM IEC61162-1/-2 Alert: Command -
HBT IEC61162-1/-2 Alert: Heartbeat supervision -
Output HTD IEC61162-1/-2 Heading/track control data 1 sec
RSA IEC61162-1/-2 Rudder angle (Feedback, Actual rudder) 1 sec
ROR IEC61162-1/-2 Rudder angle (Order) 1 sec
ALF IEC61162-1/-2 Alert : Alert sentence Event
ALC IEC61162-1/-2 Alert : Cyclic alert list 10 sec
ARC IEC61162-1/-2 Alert : Alert command refused Event
HBT IEC61162-1/-2 Alert : Heartbeat supervision 60 sec

Autopilots
Dimensional Drawings
Fig. 447. Control stand [MPM190]
Fig. 448 Steering repeater compass [MKR056]

Autopilots
Fig. 449 System selector [MPH790]
Fig. 450 Mode selector [MPH791]

Autopilots
Fig. 451 Autopilot control & display unit (AP CDU) [MPH490]
Fig. 452 Hand steering unit [MPB390]

Autopilots
Fig. 453 NFU level [MPB391]
Fig. 454 Annunciator unit [MPH690]

Autopilots
Fig. 455 NAV I/F unit [MPT590] and MAIN Control Unit (MCU) [MPH291]

CHAPTER 4
Interface Capabilities

General
GENERAL
In order to operate adequately in conjunction with navigational sensors, the MFD
should receive certain data from them. This data is required to be transmitted in
accordance with Standard IEC 61162-1 (Edition 4.0, 2010-11) “Maritime navigation
and radio communication equipment and systems. Digital interfaces. Part 1: Single
talker and multiple listeners” or in NMEA-0183 format. In addition, there is also a
range of navigation equipment using specific data exchange protocols. MFD allows
operation with several types of such equipment.
Note: Non-compliance of the sentence Talker ID with the specified standards does
not affect its processing in the MFD. This has been done for ensuring the MFD
compatibility with devices operating according to earlier versions of standards.
ATTENTION!
It is necessary to verify that GPS transmits geographical coordinates referred
to WGS-84 Datum. If it does not, use GPS settings to select WGS-84.
“Primary/Secondary Not WGS 84” alarm status does not change when invalid DTM
sentence is received.
In the processing of all NMEA sentences by the MFD, the maximum admissible
reception interval between them, whereby no alarm is triggered off, is accepted to be
equal to 5 seconds. The exceptions are provided by DTM (35 seconds).
The MFD has provision for a serial interface for a SDME according
to IEC 61162-1. An interface for pulsed/contact signals may also be provided.
When used jointly with the NR, MFD’s should meet the following requirements:
• Gyro equipment or equivalent shall update rate that is adequate for the ship’s
rate of turn;
• The connected own ship speed sensors (SDME) should comply with
the IMO requirements;
• The connected own ship position sensors (EPFS) should be approved in
accordance with requirements of the IMO Resolution MSC.112(73);
• The connected own ship speed sensors (SDME) should comply with
the IMO Resolution MSC.96(72);
• The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm
to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72);
• The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).
Chapter 4. Interface Capabilities 749

Format of Data Exchange Used in Accordance with IEC61162-1 Standard
FORMAT OF DATA EXCHANGE USED IN ACCORDANCE

WITH IEC61162-1 STANDARD
Input
Summary Table
The summary table shows the principles of operation with each navigation sensor.
Table 176. Summary Table of Data Exchange Messages
Sensor Data type transmitted by Sentences MFD channel which
sensor carrying this data the sensor
is connected to
GPS (GLONASS, Position GGA POS 1
DECCA, LORAN) (Lat. and Lon.) GLL (POS 2…)
RMC
COG and SOG RMC POS 1
VTG (POS 2…)
Satellite information GGA POS 1
(POS 2…)
Datum Reference DTM POS 1
(POS 2…)
GPS RAIM Indicator GBS POS 1
(POS 2…)
GNSS error deviation GST POS 1
(POS 2…)
UTC time ZDA UTC
UTC date ZDA UTC
INS (for NS 4100) Position (Lat. and Lon.) GLL INSPOS1
COG and SOG VTG INSPOS2
Heading HDT INSGYRO1

Direction and rate-of-turn ROT INSGYRO2
SOUNDER Depth under the sounder DBT SOUNDER 1

transducer DPT (SOUNDER 2...)
COMPASS Heading HDT GYRO 1 (GYRO 2…)
VHW
THS
MAGNETIC Heading HDG MAGN 1 (MAGN 2…)
COMPASS
RATE OF TURN Direction and rate-of-turn ROT ROT
INDICATOR
SPEED LOG Speed through the water VHW LOG 1 (LOG 2…)
VBW
DUAL AXIS LOG Dual Axis Speed VBW DLOG 1 (DLOG 2…)
ARPA Targets TTM ARPA_A (ARPA_B)
TLL
VRM’s, EBL’s, Cursor RSD ARPA_A (ARPA_B)
Heading OSD Compass
VHW
Speed through the water OSD Log
VHW

Sensor Data type transmitted by Sentences MFD channel which

sensor carrying this data the sensor
is connected to
AIS AIS targets information AIQ, ALR AIS
AIQ, SSD
AIQ, TXT
AIQ, VSD
ABK
ABM
ALR
BBM
SSD
TXT
VDM
VDO
VSD
For SAAB R4 also
proprietary format
used
DIGITAL Wind direction and speed MWD WIND
ANEMOMETER MWV
VWR
DIGITAL THERMO- Water temperature MTW TEMP
METER
YEOMAN WPT position WPL YEOMAN 1
DIGITIZER (Lat. and Lon.) (YEOMAN 2…)
ALARM STATION Alarm state and ALR ALARM STATION 1
acknowledgement ACK (ALARM STATION 2…)
NMEA NAVTEX NAVTEX Messages CRQ NAVTEX
NRX
NRM
ASCII NAVTEX NAVTEX Messages ASCII format ASCIINAVTEX
RDF “Rhotheta Direction finder value ASCII format RHOTHETA
RT202”
SEETRAC Seetrac targets Proprietary format SEETRAC
information
Format of Input Data

This paragraph describes format of all the sentences of IEC 61162-1 or/and
NMEA 0183 standards, received from different types of navigational sensors.
Format of the sentences consists of the following parts.
$--AAA,x.x,a,c---c,…*hh <CR><LF>.
N Field Description
1 $ Start of sentence
2 -- Talker ID
3 AAA Mnemonic code of data type identification
4 , Data field delimiter
5 x.x,a,c---c... Data
6 *hh Checksum field
7 <CR><LF> End of sentence

ACK – Acknowledge Alarm

1
$--ACK, xxx *hh<CR><LF>.
N Field Name Value Comments

1 xxx Local alarm identifier Alarm number
ACN – Alert Command

1 2 3 4 5 6
$--ACN,hhmmss.ss , aaa , x.x , x.x , c , a *hh <CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss Release time of the Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
alert command
2 aaa Manufacturer
mnemonic code
3 x.x Alert Identifier
4 x.x Alert Instance 1 to 999999
5 c Alert command A, Q, O or S
6 a Sentence status flag This field should be
“C” and should not
be null field
ALR – Set Alarm State

Local alarm condition and status. This sentence is used to report an alarm condition
on a device and its current state of acknowledgment.
1 2 3 4 5
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss ,xxx ,A ,A ,c--c *hh<CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss Time of alarm Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
condition change
3 A Alarm condition A – threshold exceeded,
V – not exceeded
4 A Alarm’s acknowledge A – acknowledged,
state V – unacknowledged
5 c--c Alarm’s description text
DBT – Depth Below Transducer

1 2 3 4 5 6
$--DBT, x.x , f , x.x , M , x.x , F *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Depth Depth value
2 f Measurement unit “f” – feet
4 M Measurement unit “M” – metres
6 F Measurement unit “F” – fathoms
DPT (Depth) – Depth

Contains values of depth measured from the sounder vibrator and the vibrator
position correction.
1 2 3
$--DPT, x.x , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Depth (in meters)
2 x.x Correction (in meters) Not processed


3 x.x Maximum range scale Not processed
in use
DTM – Datum Reference

Contains information on the reference ellipsoid which the received coordinates are
referred to.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--DTM, ccc , a , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , ccc *hh<CR><LF>.
1 ccc Local datum ““W72” – WGS 72 “W84” value is
“W84” – WGS 84 processed only
“IHO” – IHO terminology
reference ellipsoid
“999” – user determined
reference ellipsoid
“S85” – SGS85
“P90” – PE90
2 a Local datum sub- Not processed
division code
3 x.x Lat. offset, min Not processed
4 a Hemisphere “N” – North Not processed
“S” – South
5 x.x Lon. offset, min Not processed
6 a Hemisphere “E” – East Not processed
“W” – West
7 x.x Altitude offset, m Not processed
8 ccc Reference datum “W84” – WGS84 Not processed
“W72” – WGS72
“S85” – SGS85
“P90” – PE90
GBS – GPS Satellite Fault Detection

This message is used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM).
Given that a GNSS receiver is tracking enough satellites to perform integrity checks
of the positioning quality of the position solution a message is needed to report
the output of this process to other systems to advice the system user.
$--GBS,hhmmss.ss,x.x,x.x,x.x,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x* hh<CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss UTC time of the GGA Hours, minutes, seconds
or GNS fix associated
with this sentence
2 x.x Expected error in Meters due to bias,
latitude with noise = 0
3 x.x Expected error in longi- Metres due to bias,
tude with noise = 0
4 x.x Expected error in Metres due to bias, Not processed
altitude with noise = 0
5 Xx ID number of most Not processed
likely failed satellite
6 x.x Probability of missed Not processed
detection for most
likely failed satellite
7 x.x Estimate of bias on Metres Not processed
most likely failed
satellite
8 x.x Standard deviation of Not processed
bias estimate

GGA – Global Positioning System Fix Data

Contains time, position, and fix related data for a GPS receiver.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , x , xx , x.x , x.x , M , x.x , M , x.x ,
14
xxxx *hh<CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss UTC time of position fix Hours, minutes, seconds Not processed
2 llll.ll WPT latitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
3 a Hemisphere “N” – North
“S” – South
4 yyyyy.yy WPT longitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
5 a Hemisphere “E” – East
“W” – West
6 x GPS positioning quality 0 = Fix not available or invalid, Values from “6”
indicator 1 = GPS SPS Mode, fix valid, through “8” are
2 = Differential GPS, SPS not processed
Mode, fix valid,
3 = GPS PPS Mode, fix valid,
4 = RTK Mode, fix valid,
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system
used in RTK mode, floating
integers,
6 = Estimated (DR) mode,
7 = Manual Input mode,
8 = Simulator mode
7 xx Number of satellites in use From 0 to 12
8 x.x Horizontal dilution of
precision
9 x.x Antenna altitude above Not processed
mean-sea-level
10 M Measurement units “M” – metres Not processed
11 x.x Geoidal separation Vertical difference between Not processed
the WGS-84 earth ellipsoid and
mean-sea-level (geoid), “-” =
mean-sea-level below ellipsoid
12 M Measurement units “M” – metres Not processed
13 x.x Differential GPS data age
(in seconds)
14 xxxx Differential GPS station From 0000 to 1023
code
GLL – Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude

Contains: coordinates of the current vessel position, time of position fix, and data status.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
$--GLL, llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , hhmmss.ss , A , a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 llll.ll WPT latitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
“S” – South
3 yyyyy.yy WPT longitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
“W” – West
5 hhmmss.ss Position fix UTC time Hours, minutes, seconds Not processed
6 A Status of data received “A” – Data valid
from the sensor “V” – Data not valid


7 a Positioning system “A” – Autonomous Not processed
Mode indicator “D” – Differential
“E” – Estimated
(dead reckoning)
“M” – Manual input
“S” – Simulator
“N” – Data not valid
GST – GNSS pseudorange noise statictics

$--GST, hhmmss.ss1, x.x2, x.x3, x.x4, x.x5, x.x6, x.x7, x.x8*hh<CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss UTC time of the GGA or GNS fix associated with this
sentence
2 x.x RMS value of the standard deviation of the range
inputs to the navigation process
3 x.x Standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse m Processed
4 x.x Standard deviation of semi-minor axis of error ellipse m
5 x.x Orientation of semi-major axis of error ellipse Degrees
from true
North
6 x.x Standard deviation of latitude error m
7 x.x Standard deviation of longitude error m
8 x.x Standard deviation of altitude error m
HDG – Heading, Deviation, and Variation

1 2 3 4 5
$--HDG, x.x , x.x , a , x.x , a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Magnetic Sensor
Heading (degrees)
2 x.x Magnetic Deviation
(degrees)
3 A Deviation hemisphere E/W
4 x.x Magnetic Variation Not processed
(degrees)
5 A Variation hemisphere E/W Not processed
HDT – Heading, True

1 2
$--HDT, x.x , T *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Heading (degrees)
2 T Heading type “T” – True
MTW – Water Temperature

1 2
$--MTW, x.x , C *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Temperature
2 C Measurement units “C” – degrees, C

MWD – Wind Direction and Speed

Contains: wind speed and direction, data status.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--MWD, x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , x.x , M *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Wind direction In degrees (from 0 to 359)
2 T Wind type “T” – true
4 M Wind type “M” – magnetic
5 x.x Wind speed
6 N Measurement units “N” – knots
7 x.x Wind speed
8 M Measurement units “M” – metres/second
MWV – Wind Speed and Angle

Contains: wind speed and direction, data status.
1 2 3 4 5
$--MWV, x.x , a , x.x , a , A *hh<CR><LF>.
2 a Wind type “R” – relative
“T” – theoretical, calculated
actual wind
3 x.x Wind speed
4 a Measurement units “K” – km per hour
“M” – metres/second
“N” – knots
5 A Status “A” – Data valid
“V” – Data not valid
NSR – Navigation Status Report

This sentence is used to handle integrity and plausibility of data for a consistent
common reference system (CCRS) associated with an Integrated Navigation
System (INS).
Null fields are not allowed for this sentence.
The NSR sentence shall be sent periodically at intervals of not greater than 30 s. For
all state changes the NSR sentence is transmitted prior to relevant sentence
(e.g. GLL, THS etc.).
For the INS the talker id is “IN”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
$--NSR, a , A , a , A , a , A , a , A , a , A , a , a , A *hh<CR><LF>.

1 a Integrity of heading See Note 1
2 A Plausibility of heading See Note 2
3 a Integrity of position See Note 1
4 A Plausibility of position See Note 2
5 a Integrity of STW See Note 1
6 A Plausibility of STW See Note 2
7 a Integrity of SOG and COG See Note 1
8 A Plausibility of SOG and COG See Note 2
9 a Integrity of depth See Note 1
10 A Plausibility of depth See Note 2
11 a Mode of STW See Note 3 Not processed
12 a Integrity of time See Note 1
13 A Plausibility of time See Note 2
NOTE 1:
Integrity status:
P – Passed, integrity verification passed;
F – Failed, integrity verification not passed;
D – Doubtful, integrity verification not possible;
N – Not available, reporting device does not support integrity check.
NOTE 2:
Plausibility status:
A – Yes (Plausible);
V – No (Not plausible);
N – Not available, reporting device does not support plausibility check.
NOTE 3:
Mode of STW:
W – measured water reference;
E – Estimated/calculated from non-water referenced sources;
M – Manual input;
N – Not available.
RMC – Recommended Minimum Specific GPS Data

Contains: time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GPS receiver.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss , A , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , x.x , x.x , xxxxxx , x.x , a ,
12
a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss Position fix UTC time Hours, minutes, seconds
2 A Data status “A” = Data valid
“V” = Data invalid
3 llll.ll Latitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
“S” – South
5 yyyyy.yy Longitude Degrees, minutes, tenths of
minutes
“W” – West


7 x.x Speed over ground
(knots)
8 x.x Course over ground,
degrees true
9 xxxxxx Date (ddmmyy)
10 x.x Magnetic variation Not processed
11 a Hemisphere “E” – East Not processed
“W” – West
12 a Positioning system “A” – Autonomous mode
Mode indicator “D” – Differential mode
“E” – Estimated (dead
reckoning) mode
“M” – Manual input mode
“S” – Simulator mode
ROT – Rate of Turn

Contains: rate of turn and direction of turn.
1 2
$--ROT,x.x ,A *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Rate of turn Degrees, minute “-” = Bow turns to
port
2 A Status “A” – Data valid
“B” – Data invalid
RRT – Report Route Transfer

Note: Refer to IEC 61162-1 for a possible later version of this sentence.
This sentence is used as to notify a device about a route transmission and to report
the status of a received route transmission.
When the sentence is used to inform or notify a device that a monitored route has
been sent to that device, data fields 5 and 6 shall be null. When the sentence is
used to inform or notify a device that an alternate route has been sent to that device,
data fields 4, 5, and 6 shall be null. When the sentence is used to report the status
of receiving and processing a monitored route by the receiving device all data fields
are required. When the sentence is used to report the status of receiving and
processing an alternate route by the receiving device all data fields except data field
4 are required. In this case data field 4 shall be null.
The sentence may also be used to request route information for the case of an
ECDIS that was not powered when a route was sent over the network and thus will
not have the latest information.
After power on, an ECDIS shall send one or more sentences with a ‘Q’ to ask for a
retransmission. A receiver on receiving a sentence with a ‘Q’ shall resend any

monitored and alternate route. If no route is being monitored, the receiver shall
respond with an empty ‘M’ sentence ($--RRT,M,,,,,*hh<CR><LF>). If no alternate
route is active, then an empty ‘A’ sentence shall be sent.

$--RRT, a, c-c, c-c, c-c, a, a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 a Reported transfer type “M” – Monitored route This field should not be
“A” – Alternate route for editing null
“Q” – Query for transmitting any
monitored or alternative route for
editing
2 c-c Name of transferred Max. 30 characters. This
route field should not be null
except for a query or to
indicate that no route is
monitored in response to
a query
3 c-c Version of the Max. 20 characters. This
transferred route field should not be null
except for a query or to
indicate that no route is
monitored in response to
a query
4 c-c id of current waypoint Max. 10 characters. This
field is null for alternate
routes for editing
5 a File transfer status of “A” – successful reception of the This field shall be null
transferred route route file transfer; when informing the
“E” – error in reception of the transfer of a route
route file transfer.
6 a Application status of “A” – content of the received This field shall be null
transferred route route accepted and valid; when informing the
“V” – content of received route transfer of a route
rejected;
“P” – pending, application level
has not yet evaluated the
received route;
“N” – not applicable. This is used
when reporting the reception
status and when the file transfer
status of the transferred route
indicated an error in the
reception of the route file
transfer.
THS – True Heading and Status

1 2
$--THS,x.x ,a *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Heading Degrees true
2 a Indicator mode A – Autonomous
E – Estimated (dead reckoning)
M – Manual input
S – Simulator mode
V – Data not valid (including
standby)
VBW – DUAL Ground/Water Speed

Contains: X and Y components of speed through the water and over the ground.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
$--VBW, x.x , x.x , A , x.x , x.x , A , x.x ,A , x.x , A *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Longitudinal compo- Negative aftward
nent of speed through
the water, knots
2 x.x Transverse component Negative to
of speed through the the portside


water, knots
3 A Data status “A” – reliable data Shall not be null
“V” – unreliable data
4 x.x Longitudinal compo- Negative aftward
nent of speed over
the ground, knots
5 x.x Transverse component Negative to
of speed over the portside
the ground, knots
7 x.x Stern transverse water Negative to
speed (knots) the portside
9 x.x Stern transverse Negative to
ground speed (knots) the portside
10 A Data status “A” – valid data Shall not be null
“V” – invalid data
VDR – Set and Drift

1 2 3 4 5 6
$ -- VDR,x.x ,T ,x.x ,M ,x.x ,N *hh<CR><LF>
1 x.x Direction, degrees Process
2 T Orientation T – True Not process
3 x.x Magnetic compass Range: [0.0 to 359.9] Not process
direction, degrees degrees
4 M Source M – Magnetic compass Not process
5 x.x Set speed Process
6 N N – Knots Process
VHW – Water Speed and Heading

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--VHW, x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , x.x , K *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Heading (degrees) Not processed
2 Type “T” – True Not processed
3 x.x Heading (degrees) Not processed
4 M Type “M” – Magnetic Not processed
5 x.x Speed
6 N Measurement units “N” – Knots
7 x.x Speed Processed if
field ”5” is
transmitted empty
8 K Speed units “K” – Km/hr Processed if
field ”5” is
transmitted empty
VTG – Course Over Ground and Ground Speed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
$--VTG, x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , x.x , K , A *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Course over ground
(degrees)
2 T Type “T” – True


3 x.x Magnetic course Not processed
(degrees)
4 M Type “M” – Magnetic Not processed
5 x.x Speed
6 N Measurement units “N” – Knots
7 x.x Speed Processed if field ”5”
is transmitted empty
8 K Measurement units “K” – Km/hr Processed if field ”5”
is transmitted empty
9 A Positioning system “A” – Autonomous mode Not processed
mode indicator “D” – Differential mode
“E” – Estimated (dead
reckoning) mode
“M” – Manual input mode
“S” – Simulator mode
VWR – Relative (Apparent) Wind Speed and Angle

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--VWR, x.x , a , x.x , N , x.x , M , x.x , K *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Measured wind angle In degrees (from 0 to 180)
relative to the vessel
2 a Left/right of the vessel “L” – left
heading “R” – right
3 x.x Measured wind speed
4 N Measurement units “N” – knots
5 x.x Wind speed
6 M Measurement units “M” – metres/second
7 x.x Wind speed
8 K Measurement units “K” – Km/hr
WPL – Waypoint Location

Contains: WPT latitude and longitude.
1 2 3 4 5
$--WPL, llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , c—c *hh<CR><LF>.
1 llll.ll WPT latitude
“S” – South
3 yyyyy.yy WPT longitude
“W” – West
5 c—c WPT number Not processed
ZDA – Time & Date

Contains: UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
1 2 3 4 5 6
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss , xx , xx , xxxx , xx , xx *hh<CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss UTC time Hours, minutes, seconds
2 xx Day (UTC) 01–31
3 xx Month (UTC) 01–12
4 xxxx Year (UTC)

5 xx Local zone, hours 00 h to ±13 h Not processed

6 xx Local zone, minutes Time zone minutes Not processed
Output
The MFD system has a strictly fixed data transmission frequency (on a certain data
channel) for each group of data in use:
Data channel in Sentence transmitted

the System Configuration
utility
NMEA output APB, BOD, BWC, DTM, DPT, GBS, GGA, GLL, HDT, OSD, RTE,
ROT, TTM, VBW, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL, XTE, ZDA
Autopilot output APB, BOD, BWC, GLL, HDT, OSD, RTE, VTG, VHW, VDR, WPL,
XTE, ZDA
YEOMAN GLL
INSOUT (for NS 4100) GGA, VBW
Group of transmitted data Data channel in the System Sentence transmission
Configuration utility rate
NAV DATA NMEA output Every second
(ALR, ACK, DTM; GLL;
HDT; ZDA; OSD; DPT)
NAV DATA AUTOPILOT Every second
Ownship position (GLL) YEOMAN Once every 3 seconds
Ownship position (GGA); INSOUT (for NS 4100) Every second
Ship speed (VBW)
Device Channel for the sensor connection Type of transmitted data

via the System Configuration utility
Any navigation equipment NMEA output NAV DATA
which requires reception of
the ownship motion data
Autopilot Autopilot NAV DATA
YEOMAN digitizer YEOMAN Ownship position
INS INSOUT (for NS 4100) Ownship position and speed
Format of Output Data

This paragraph describes formats of all the output sentences of IEC 61162-1 or/and
NMEA 0183 standards output onto the navigational sensors connected
to the MFD system.
ATTENTION!
The sentences are transmitted to the output in the following order:
• for positioning system – sentences transmitted from the source selected as
Primary Positioning System;
• for the rest of data – sentences transmitted from the sources selected in
“Navigation” panel of the ECDIS task.

Sentence format consists of the following parts:
N Field Description
1 $ Start of sentence
2 -- Talker ID
3 AAA Mnemonic code of identifying the data type
ATTENTION!
System data and other data checked for integrity modified or generated by MFD, are
always transmitted with the Talker ID “IN”.
ACK – Acknowledge Alarm

1
$--ACK, xxx *hh<CR><LF>.

ALC – Cyclic Alert List

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--ALC, xx , xx , xx , x.x , aaa , x.x , x.x , x.x ,……..,aaa, x.x, x.x, x.x*hh
<CR><LF>.
1 xx Total number of sentences for 01 to 99
this message
2 xx Sentence number 01 to 99
3 xx Sequential message identifier 01 to 99
4 x.x Number of alert entries
5 aaa Manufacturer mnemonic code Alert entry 0 – n: Each alert
entry consists of four fields:
6 x.x Alert identifier
Manufacturer Identifier (see
7 x.x Alert instance ALF Manufacturer Identifier);
8 x.x Revision counter Alert Identifier (see ALF Alert
Identifier);
....... Additional Alert entries Alert instance (see ALF Alert
aaa Manufacturer mnemonic code instance);
Revision Counter (see ALF
x.x Alert identifier Revision Counter).
x.x Alert instance Each entry identifies a certain
alert with a certain state. It is
x.x Revision counter not allowed that an alert entry
is split between two ALC
sentences.

ALF – Alert Sentence

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
$$--ALF, x , x , x , hhmmss.ss , a , a , a , aaa , x.x , x.x , x.x , x , c---c *hh
<CR><LF>.

1 x Total number of ALF 1 to 2
sentences for this message
2 x Sentence number 1 to 2
3 x Sequential message identifier 0 to 9
4 hhmmss.ss Number of last change Hours, minutes,
seconds (UTC)
5 a Alert category A, B or C
6 a Alert priority E, A, W or C
7 a Alert state A, S, N, O, U or V
8 aaa Manufacturer mnemonic code
10 x.x Alert instance 1 to 999999
11 x.x Revision counter 1 to 99
12 x Escalation counter 0 to 9
13 c---c Alert text

1 2 3 4 5
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss ,xxx ,A ,A ,c--c *hh<CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss Time of alarm condition Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
change
3 A Alarm condition A = threshold exceeded,
V = not exceeded
4 A Alarm’s acknowledge A = acknowledged,
state V = unacknowledged
APB – Heading/Track Controller (Autopilot) Sentence B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
$--APB, A , A , x.x , a , N , A , A , x.x , a , c--c , x.x , a , x.x , a , a *hh<CR><LF>.
1 A Status A = Data valid,
V = LORAN-C blink or SNR
warning,
V = general warning flag for other
navigation systems when
a reliable fix is not available
2 A Status A = OK or not used,
V = LORAN-C cycle lock warning
flag
3 x.x Magnitude of XTE
4 a Direction to steer L/R
5 N XTE units Nautical miles
6 A Status A = arrival circle entered,
V = arrival circle not passed
7 A Status A = perpendicular passed at
waypoint,
V = perpendicular not entered
8 x.x Bearing origin to
destination

9 a M/T
10 c--c Destination waypoint ID
11 x.x Bearing, present
position to destination
12 a Magnetic or true
13 x.x Heading to steer to
destination waypoint
14 a Magnetic or true
15 a Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode; Values “E”, “M”,
D = Differential mode; “S” are processed
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) as “N”
mode;
M = Manual input mode;
S = Simulator mode;
N = Data not valid
ARC – Alert Command Refused

1 2 3 4 5
$--ARC, hhmmss.ss , aaa , x.x , x.x , c *hh <CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss Release time of the Alert Hours, minutes, seconds
Command Refused (UTC)
2 aaa Manufacturer mnemonic code
4 x.x Alert instance 1 to 999999
5 c Refused alert command A, Q, O or S
BOD – Bearing Origin to Destination

1 2 3 4 5 6
$--BOD, x.x , T , x.x , M , c--c , c--c *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Bearing Degrees
2 T True
4 M Magnetic
5 c--c Destination waypoint
ID
6 c--c Origin waypoint ID
BWC – Bearing and Distance to Waypoint – Great Circle

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
$--BWC, hhmmss.ss , llll.ll , a , yyyyy.yy , a , x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N , c--c ,
13
a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss UTC of observation
2 llll.ll Waypoint latitude
3 a N/S
4 yyyyy.yy Waypoint longitude
5 a E/W
7 T True
9 M Magnetic
10 x.x Distance Nautical miles
11 N Units Nautical miles

12 c--c Waypoint ID
13 a Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode, Values “E”, “M”,
D = Differential mode, “S” are
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) processed as “N”
mode,
M = Manual input mode,
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
DTM – Datum Reference

See Format of Input Data paragraph of this section.
DPT – Depth
EVE – General Event Message

This sentence is used to transmit events (for example actions by the crew on the
bridge) with a time stamp.
For example actions by the crew on the bridge for Navi-Radar: pressing of the
cursor or pressing of the keyboard.
1 2 3
$--EVE,hhmmss.ss ,c--c ,c--c *hh<CR><LF>.

1 hhmmss.ss Event time Hours, minutes, seconds (UTC)
2 c--c Tag code used for This may be a null field
identification of source
of event
3 c--c Event description This may be a null field
GBS – GPS Satellite Fault Detection

GGA – Global Positioning System Fix Data

GLL – Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude

HBT – Heartbeat Supervision

1 2 3
$--HBT,x.x ,a ,x * hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Configured
autonomous repeat
interval in seconds
2 a Equipment status “A” = Yes,
“V” = No
3 x Sequential sentence
identifier
HDT – Heading, True


OSD – Own Ship Data

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
$--OSD, x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Heading, true Degrees
2 A Heading status A = data valid,
V = data invalid
3 x.x Vessel course, true Degrees
4 a Course reference B = bottom tracking log,
M = manually entered,
W = water referenced,
R = radar tracking (of fixed target),
P = positioning system ground
reference
5 x.x Vessel speed
6 a Speed reference B = bottom tracking log,
M = manually entered,
W = water referenced,
R = radar tracking (of fixed target),
P = positioning system ground
reference
7 x.x Vessel set, true Degrees Manually entered
8 x.x Vessel drift (speed) Manually entered
9 a Speed units K = km/h,
N = knots,
S = statute miles/h
POS – Device Position and Ship Dimensions Report or Configuration

Command
This sentence is used to report the device position (X, Y, and Z) of the equipment
such as GNSS and radar antenna installed on board a ship and ship dimensions.
The consistent common reference position (CCRP) data may also be provided. This
can be used to configure or report the status and can be queried. This is a
command sentence.
Usage of this sentence is defined in the corresponding equipment standards.
Possible application may be to transmit this sentence at power up and repeatedly at
30 second intervals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
$--POS,cc ,xx ,a , x.x ,x.x ,x.x ,a ,x.x ,x.x ,a *hh<CR><LF>.
1 cc Equipment Equipment identification is the talker ID
Identification
2 xx Equipment number 00 to 99
Equipment number starts from one to
maximum same equipment number
(i.e. 1 = Radar 1, 2 = Radar 2)
Equipment number “0” is used for
(CCRP position) (see IMO MSC.252(83))
3 a Position validity flag A = Valid is used for configured device
V = Invalid is used for testing or non-
configured device.
This filed should not be Null
4 x.x Position X- m Origin (0,0) is
coordinate Starboard = positive value located at the
Port = negative value center of the
Center = zero ship’s aft most
point
5 x.x Position Y- m
coordinate Positive value or zero (forward distance
from the ship’s stern)


6 x.x Position Z- m
coordinate Positive value (height from IMO summer
load (see IMO Convention on Load Lines)
7 a Ship’s width/length A = Valid is used for configured device
V = Invalid is used for testing or non-
configured device.
This filed should not be Null
8 x.x Ship’s width m
9 x.x Ship’s length m The ship’s length
corresponds to
the maximum
overall length
10 a Sentences Status
Flag
RMB – Recommended Minimum Navigation Information

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
$--RMB, A , x.x , a , c--c , c--c , llll.ll, a , yyyyy.yy,a ,x.x , x.x , x.x , A , a
*hh<CR><LF>
1 A Status The positioning system mode
indicator field supplements the
status field (field No. 1) which
should be set to V = invalid for all
values of Mode indicator except for
A = Autonomous and D =
Differential. The positioning system
mode indicator and status fields
should not be null fields
2 x.x Cross track error nautical miles
If cross track error exceeds 9,99
nautical miles, display 9,99
4 c--c Origin waypoint ID
5 c--c Destination waypoint ID
6 llll.ll, a Destination waypoint
latitude, N/S
7 yyyyy.yy,a Destination waypoint
longitude, E/W
8 x.x Range to destination, nautical miles
9 x.x Bearing to destination degrees
10 x.x Destination closing knots
velocity
11 A Arrival status


12 a Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode,
D = Differential mode,
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
mode,
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
ROT – Rate of Turn

RRT – Report Route Transfer

RSD – Radar System Data

Radar display setting data.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
$--RSD, x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , a ,
13
a *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Origin 1 range, from Origin 1 and Origin 2 are located at
own ship the stated range and bearing from
own ship and provide for two
2 x.x Origin 1 bearing Degrees from 0º
independent sets of variable range
markers independent sets of variable
range markers (VRM) and electronic
bearing lines (EBL) originating away
from own ship position
3 x.x Variable Range
Marker 1 (VRM1),
range
4 x.x Bearing Line 1 (EBL1) Degrees from 0º
5 x.x Origin 2 range Origin 1 and Origin 2 are located at
the stated range and bearing from
6 x.x Origin 2 bearing Degrees
own ship and provide for two
independent sets of variable range
markers independent sets of variable
range markers (VRM) and electronic
bearing lines (EBL) originating away
from own ship position
7 x.x VRM2, range
8 x.x EBL2 Degrees
9 x.x Cursor range, from
own ship
10 x.x Cursor bearing Degrees clockwise
from 0º
11 x.x Range scale in use
12 a Range units K/N/S
13 a Display rotation C = Course-up,
course-over-ground
up, degrees True;
H = Head-up, ship's
heading (centerline)
0º up;
N = North-up, True
north is 0º up

RTE – Routes
1 2 3 4 5 6 n
$--RTE, x.x , x.x , a , c--c , c--c , … , c--c *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x.x Total number of
sentences being
transmitted
2 x.x Sentence number
3 a Message mode c = complete route, all waypoints,
w = working route, first listed
waypoint is “FROM”, second is “TO”
and remaining are rest of route
4 c--c Route identifier
5 c--c Waypoint identifier
6 c--c Additional waypoint
identifiers
n c--c Waypoint “n” identifier
TLB – Target Label

Common target labels for tracked targets. This sentence is used to specify labels for
tracked targets to a device that provides tracked target data (e.g., via the TTM –
Tracked Target Message). This will allow all devices displaying tracked target data
to use a common set of labels (e.g., targets reported by two radars and displayed on
an ECDIS).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
$--TLB, x.x , c--c , x.x , c--c , … x.x , c--c *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Target number ‘n’
reported by the device
2 c--c Label assigned to Null fields indicate that no common
target ‘n’ label is specified, not that a null label
should be used. The intent is to use a
null field as a placeholder. A device
that provides tracked target data
should use its “local” label (usually the
target number) unless it has received
a TLB sentence specifying a common
label
3 x.x Additional label pairs This sentence allows several target
number/labels pairs to be sent in a
4 c--c
single sentence, the maximum
5 … sentence length limits the number of
labels allowed in a sentence
6 x.x
7 c--c

TTD – Tracked Target Data

This sentence is used to transmit tracked radar targets in a compressed format. This
enables the transfer of many targets with minimum overhead. New target labels are
defined by the TLB sentence to reduce bandwidth use. Transmission of up to four
targets in the same sentence is possible.
1 2 3 4 5
!--TTD, hh , hh , x , s—s , x *hh<CR><LF>.
1 hh Total hex number of 01 to FF 1
sentences needed to transfer
the message
2 hh Hex sentence number 01 to FF The transfer of all tracked targets may
require the transmission of multiple
sentences. The first field specifies the
total number of sentences used for a
message, minimum value 1. The second
field identifies the order of this sentence
in the message, minimum value 1.
These cannot be null fields
3 x Sequential message identifier 0 to 9 The sequential message identifier
provides a message identification
number from 0 to 9 that is sequentially
assigned and is incremented for each
new multi-sentence message. The count
resets to 0 after 9 is used. For a
message requiring multiple sentences,
each sentence of the message contains
the same sequential message
identification number. It is used to
identify the sentences containing
portions of the same message. This
allows for the possibility that other
sentences might be interleaved with the
message sentences that, taken
collectively, contain a single message.
This should be a null field for messages
that fit into one sentence
4 s—s Encapsulated tracked target The tracked target data structure is
data described below. One sentence may
contain from one up to four structures of
15 characters in the same sentence.
This field supports a maximum of 60
valid characters for messages
transferred using multiple sentences
5 x Number of fill-bits 0 to 5 This cannot be a null field
Every target (tracked or AIS) is packed according to the structure below (see table
below). Data is stored most significant bit first. Every message character is
converted into six bits. The structure is encapsulated as 15 characters. The
sentence may contain from one to four targets.
Parameter Number Range and Description
of bits resolution
Protocol version 2 0 to 3 The protocol version shall always be set to zero for
the structure defined below. Other values are
reserved for future modification of this structure
Target number 10 0 to 1 023 The target number associated with the label with
corresponding number. Target number zero is
reserved for no tracking target
True bearing 12 to 359.9°, North-up coordinate system.
Step 01° 409,5° = invalid or N/A data
Speed 12 to 409.4 kn, See speed mode and stabilization mode.
Step 0.1 kn 409,5 kn = invalid or N/A data
Course 12 to 359.9°, See speed mode and stabilization mode.
Step 0.1° 409,5° = invalid or N/A data


of bits resolution
Heading (AIS 12 to 3599°, Reported heading from AIS, north-up coordinate
target only) Step 01° system.
409,4° = invalid or N/A data;
409,5° = no data, radar tracking target
Tracked/AIS 3 Value Radar AIS
target status
000 Non-tracking No target to report
001 Acquiring target Sleeping target
(not established)
010 Lost target Lost target
011 Reserved Reserved
100 Established Activated target, no
tracking, no alarm alarm
101 Reserved Reserved
110 Established Activated target,
tracking, CPA/TCPA alarm
CPA/TCPA alarm
111 Established Activated target,
tracking, acknowledged
acknowledged CPA/TCPA alarm
CPA/TCPA alarm
Operation mode 1 0 = autonomous (normal);
1 = test target
Distance 14 to 163,83 NM Distance to target.
Step 0,01 NM 163,84 NM = invalid or N/A data
Speed mode 1 0 = true speed and course;
1 = relative speed and course
Stabilization 1 0 = over the ground;
mode 1 = through the water
Parameter = 2 Reserved for future use.
reserved Always set to zero
Correlation / 8 0 to 255 Number zero is reserved for no correlation /
association association.
number Correlated/associated targets are assigned
a common number
TOTAL 90 90/6=15 characters
N/A: Not available
Note: Theoretical maximum throughput for NMEA 0183 HS connections is

calculated with the formula: targets/second = baud rate/bits per sentence *
targets per sentence 38 400/[22+90/6*4)*10]=46 sentences/second
(4 targets per sentence) = 187 targets/second.
HSC: 60/40=1,5 s/revolution: 280 targets/revolution (9 bits address space
enough).
Normal: 60/20=3 s/revolution: 561 targets/revolution (10 bits address space
enough).
Overhead for TLB – target label and other sentences are not included in this
calculation.

TTD – Tracked Target Data, Protocol Version 1

This item defines protocol version 1 for the TTD sentence which includes information
for CPA and TCPA.

of bits resolution
Protocol version 2 0 to 3 The protocol version shall always be set to one
(1) for the structure defined below. Value zero
(0) is defined in IEC 61162-1. Other values (2
and 3) are reserved for future modification of
this structure
Target number 10 0 to 1 023 The target number associated with the label with
corresponding number. Target number zero is
reserved for no tracking target
CPA 14 to 163,83 NM CPA of target
Step 0,01 NM 163,84 min = invalid or N/A data
TCPA 14 From + 81,91 min Time to CPA of target, “-“ increasing
to -81,91 min + 81,92 NM = invalid or N/A data
Step 0,01 min
Parameter = 2 Reserved for future use
Reserved Always set to zero
TOTAL 42 42/6 = 7 characters
N/A: Not available
TTM – Tracked Target Message

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
$--TTM, xx , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , c--c , a , a , hhmmss.ss ,
15
a *hh<CR><LF>.

1 xx Target number 00 to 99
2 x.x Target distance from
own ship
3 x.x Bearing from own ship Degrees
4 a T – True,
R – Relative
5 x.x Target speed
6 x.x Target course Degrees
7 a T – True,
R – Relative
8 x.x Distance of closest-
point-of-approach
9 x.x Time to CPA min “-” Increasing
10 a Speed/distance units K/N/S
11 c--c Target name
12 a Target status L = Lost, tracked target has been
lost,
Q = Query, target in the process
of acquisition,
T = Tracking
13 a Reference target “R” – reference target
Null field otherwise
14 hhmmss.ss Time of data (UTC)
15 a Type of acquisition A = Automatic,
M = manual,
R = reported

VBW – DUAL Ground/Water Speed

VTG – Course Over Ground and Ground Speed

VHW – Water Speed and Heading

VDR – Set and Drift

1 2 3 4 5 6
$--VDR, x.x , T , x.x , M , x.x , N *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Direction, true Degrees
2 T True
3 x.x Direction, magnetic Degrees
4 M Magnetic
5 x.x Current speed Knots
6 N Knots
WPL – Waypoint Location

XTE – Cross-Track Error, Measured

1 2 3 4 5 6
$--XTE, A , A , x.x , a , N , a *hh<CR><LF.

1 A Status A = data valid,
V = LORAN-C blink or SNR warning
2 A Status A = data valid,
V = Loran-C cycle lock warning flag
3 x.x Magnitude of cross-
track error
5 N Units Nautical miles
6 A Mode indicator A = Autonomous mode, Values “E”, “M”,
D = Differential mode, “S” are
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode, processed as “N”
S = Simulator mode,
N = Data not valid
ZDA – Time & Date


Universal AIS Transponder Interface
UNIVERSAL AIS TRANSPONDER INTERFACE
Description of Universal AIS Transponder Interface

General
This section describes functionality associated with the data reception/transmission
with the Universal AIS Transponder connected to the MFD.
Universal AIS Transponder is an interface developed strictly in accordance with

the following standards:
• IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09 “Maritime navigation and radiocommunication

equipment and systems – Class A Shipborne installation of the Universal
Shipborne automatic identification system (AIS) using VHF TDMA techniques”;
• IEC 61162-1, 2001-07 “Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment
and systems – digital interfaces”;
• ITU-R M.1371, 2000 “Technical characteristics for a universal shipborne
automatic identification system using time division multiple access in
the VHF maritime mobile band”;
• IALA Technical Clarification on Recommendation ITY-R M.1371-1 Edition 1.3.
Reception of current own ship identifiers (IMO number, MMSI number) from
the transponder is by VDO sentence (VHF Data-link Own-vessel message).
Data on UAIS targets is received by using VDM sentence (VHF Data-link message).
Reception and transmission of different information between the transponders

are strictly on definite channels (A and B).
Level 3
Data processing is implemented to a full extent according to the descriptions
provided below in paragraphs:
• IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 Edition

1.3 Standard Sentences;
• Sentences Transmitted by the MFD via AIS Channel in the Operation

with a Transponder.
Table 177. Summary Table of UAIS Data Exchange Messages
Message MFD channel Direction Transmission Interval Standard
AIQ, ALR AIS Transmission • At the MFD start;
• At the transponder
restart
AIQ, AIS Transmission • At the MFD start;
SSD • As change occurs;
restart
AIQ, TXT AIS Transmission • At the MFD start;
restart
AIQ, AIS Transmission • At the MFD start;
VSD • As change occurs;
restart;
• Once in 10 minutes
ABK AIS Reception As event occurs IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
ABM AIS Transmission As event occurs IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09

Message MFD channel Direction Transmission Interval Standard

ACK AIS Transmission Alarm acknowlegment
ALR AIS Reception and As event occurs IEC 61162-1, 2001-07
Transmission
BBM AIS Transmission As event occurs IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
SSD AIS Reception and As event occurs IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
Transmission
TXT AIS Reception As event occurs IEC 61162-1, 2001-07
VDM AIS Reception AIS Data IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
VDO AIS Reception Own ship data IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
VSD AIS Reception and As change occurs IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09
Transmission
Data Exchange Format

Format of the sentences consists of the following parts:
N Field Description
1 $ or ! Start of sentence
2 -- Talker ID
3 AAA Mnemonic code of identifying the data type
As MFD system receives a sentence with a field containing an ignored value,

no processing of information in this field is performed.
IALA Technical Clarifications on Recommendation ITU-R M.1371

Edition 1.3 Standard Sentences
VDO – VHF Data-Link Own-Vessel Message
The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only. It contains information on the
own ship set in the ship UAIS station.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.

1 2 3 4 5 6
!--VDO, x , x , x , a , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>.

1 X Total number of sen- 1 to 9
tences needed to transfer
the message
2 X Sentence number 1 to 9
3 X Sequential message 0 to 9
identifier
4 A AIS channel “A” or “B”
5 s—s Encapsulated ITU-R See Note
M.1371 radio message
6 X Number of fill-bits 0 to 5
Note: Sentences 1, 2, 3, 5, 18 of ITU-R M.1371 standard are processed.

VDM – VHF Data-Link Message

The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only. It contains target information
received by the MFD from the ship UAIS station.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.

1 2 3 4 5 6
!--VDM, x , x , x , A , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x Total number of sen- 1 to 9
tences needed to
transfer the message
3 x Sequential message 0 to 9
identifier
4 A AIS channel “A” or “B”
5 s--s Encapsulated ITU-R See Note
M.1371 radio message
6 x Number of fill-bits 0 to 5
Note: Sentences 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22 of ITU-R M.1371
standard are processed.
1, 2, 3 – Position Report (in VDO and VDM Sentences)
The MFD for the reception uses this sentence only.
Standard: ITU-R M.1371, 2000.

Parameter Number Description Comments
of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for message 1, 2, or 3
Repeat Indicator 2 Not processed

by the MFD
User ID 30 MMSI number
Navigational 4 0 = Underway using engine

status 1 = At anchor
2 = Not under command
3 = Restricted manoeuvrability
4 = Constrained by her draught
5= Moored
6 = Aground
7 = Engaged in Fishing
8 = Underway sailing
9 = HSC (High Speed Craft)
10 = WIG (Wing In Ground)
11–14 = Reserved for future use
15 = Not defined = default
Rate of turn 8 0...+126 = turning right at up to 708 degrees per
ROTAIS minute or higher.
0...-126 = turning left at up to 708 degrees per
minute or higher.
Values between 0 and 708 degrees/min coded
by ROTAIS = 4.733 SQRT(ROTsensor) degrees/min
where ROTsensor is the Rate of Turn as input by
an external Rate of Turn Indicator. ROTAIS is
rounded to the nearest integer value.
+ 127 = turning right at more than 5º/30s
(No TI available).
-127 = turning left at more than 5º/30s
(No TI available).
-128 (80 hex) indicates no turn information
available (default).
ROT data should not be derived from COG
information


of bits
SOG 10 Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps
(0–102.2 knots).
1023 = not available;
1022 = 102.2 knots or higher
Position accuracy 1 1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of,
e.g., DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of,
e. g. GNSS receiver or of other Electronic
Position Fixing Device); default = 0
Longitude 28 Longitude in 1/10 000 min.
( 180 degrees, East = positive (as 2’s
complement), West = negative (as 2’s
complement).
181 degrees (6791AC0 hex) = not available =
default)
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10 000 min.
( 90 degrees, North = positive
(as 2’s complement), South = negative
(as 2’s complement),
91 degrees (3412140 hex) = not available =
default)
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (0–3599).
3600 (E10 hex)= not available = default;
3601–4095 should not be used
True Heading 9 Degrees (0–359)
(511 indicates not available = default)
Time stamp 6 Not processed
by the MFD
Reserved for re- 4 Not processed
gional applications by the MFD
Spare 1 Not processed
by the MFD
RAIM-Flag 1 Not processed
by the MFD
Communication 19 Not processed
State by the MFD
Total number of 168
bits
4 – Base Station Report (VDM)

of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for message 4
4 = UTC and position report from base station
by the MFD
UTC year 14 Not processed
by the MFD
UTC month 4 Not processed
by the MFD
UTC day 5 Not processed
by the MFD
UTC hour 5 Not processed
by the MFD
UTC minute 6 Not processed
by the MFD


of bits
UTC second 6 Not processed
by the MFD
Position accuracy 1 1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of
e.g., DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver, or of another Electronic Position
Fixing Device), default = 0
Longitude 28 Longitude in 1/10 000 minute ( 180 degrees,
East = positive (as 2’s complement),
West = negative (as 2’s complement)).
default
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10 000 minute ( 90 degree, North =
positive (as 2’s complement), South = negative
(as 2’s complement)).
default
Type of Electronic 4 Use of differential corrections is defined by field
Position Fixing “position accuracy” above:
Device 0 = Undefined (default);
1 = GPS
2 = GLONASS
3 = Combined GPS/GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
6 = Integrated Navigation System
7 = Surveyed
8–15 = Not used
by the MFD
by the MFD
State by the MFD
Total number of 168
bits
5 – Static and Voyage Related Data (In Sentences VDO and VDM)

of bits
Repeat Indicator 2 Not
processed by
the MFD
AIS Version 2 Not
Indicator processed by
the MFD
IMO number 30 1–999999999; 0 = not available = default
Call sign 42 7 x 6 bit ASCII characters, “@@@@@ @@” = not
available = default
Name 120 Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII, “@@@@
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@” = not avai-
lable = default
Type of ship and 8 0 = not available or no ship = default
cargo type 1–99 = as defined in Table “Type of ship” (see above)
100–199 = reserved, for regional use
200–255 = reserved, for future use


of bits
Overall 30 Reference point (VDM 1, 2, 3) for reported position.
Dimension/Refe- Indicates the dimension of ship in metres (see SSD
rence for Position message)
Type of Electronic 4 0 = Undefined (default)
Position Fixing 1 = GPS
Device 2 = GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed
8–15 = not used
ETA 20 Estimated Time of Arrival; MMDDHHMM UTC
Bits 19–16: month 1–12
0 = not available = default
Bits 15–11: day 1–31
Bits 10–6: hour 0–23
Bits 5–0: minute 0–59
Maximum Present 8 in 1/10 m Maximum
Static Draught 255 = draught 25.5 m or greater permissible
0 = not available = default draft in the
in accordance with IMO Resolution A.851 MFD is 25.5
m
Destination 120 Maximum 20 characters using 6-bit ASCII;
“@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@” =
not available
DTE 1 Not
processed by
the MFD
Spare 1 Not
processed by
the MFD
Number of bits 424
6 – Addressed Binary Message (In VDM)


of bits
by the MFD
Source ID 30 MMSI number of source station
Sequence 2 0–3 Not processed
Number by the MFD
Destination ID 30 MMSI number of destination station
Retransmit Flag 1 Retransmit Flag should be set upon Not processed
retransmission: by the MFD
0 = no retransmission = default; 1 = retransmitted
by the MFD


of bits
Binary Data Max 936 Application Identifier always contains:
DAC (Designated Area Code) = 001
(IAI – International Application Identifier);
FI (Function Identifier) = 00 (text telegram using
6-bit ASCII, general FI Group) – 16 bit
Application Data – 920 bit maximum
Maximum Max Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length
Number of bits 1008 of subfield Message Content
8 – Binary Broadcast Message (In VDM)


of bits
by the MFD
Source ID 30 MMSI number of source station
by the MFD
Binary Data Max 968 Application Identifier always contains: DAC
(Designated Area Code) = 001 (IAI – International
Application Identifier);
FI (Function Identifier) = 00 (text telegram using
6-bit ASCII, general FI Group) – 16 bit
Application Data – 952 bit maximum
Maximum Max Occupies 1 to 5 slots
Number of bits 1008
9 – Standard SAR Aircraft Position Report (In VDM)


of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for message 9; always 9
by the MFD
Altitude (GNSS) 12 Altitude (derived from GNSS) expressed in metres
(0 – 4094 metres).
4094 = 4094 metres or higher
SOG 10 Speed over ground in knot steps (0–1022 knots)
1022 = 1022 knots or higher
Position 1 1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of
accuracy e.g., DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of
e. g. GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
Fixing Device); default = 0
Longitude 28 Longitude in 1/10 000 min
( 180 degrees, East = positive (as per 2´s
complement), West = negative (as per 2´s
complement).
default)


of bits
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10 000 min
( 90 degrees, North = positive (as per 2´s
complement), South = negative (as per 2´s
complement).
default)
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (0–3599).
by the MFD
Reserved for 8 Not processed
regional by the MFD
applications
DTE 1 Data terminal ready (0 = available 1 = not
available = default)
by the MFD
by the MFD
State by the MFD
Total number of 168
bits
12 – Addressed Safety Related Message (In VDM)


of bits
Message ID 6 Identifier for Message 12; always 12
by the MFD
Source ID 30 MMSI number of station which is the source
of the message
Sequence 2 Not processed
Number by the MFD
Destination ID 30 MMSI number of station which is the destination
of the message
Retransmit Flag 1 Not processed
by the MFD
by the MFD
Safety related text Max 936 6-bit ASCII
Total Maximum Max Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length of text
Number of bits 1008
14 – Safety Related Broadcast Message (In VDM)


of bits
by the MFD


of bits
Source ID 30 MMSI number of source station of message
by the MFD
Safety related Max 968 6-bit ASCII
Text
Total Number of Max Occupies 1 to 5 slots subject to the length of text
bits 1008
18 – Standard Class B Equipment Position Report (In VDO and VDM)


of bits
by the MFD
regional or local by the MFD
applications
SOG 10 Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps
(0–102.2 knots):
Position 1 1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of e.g.,
accuracy DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
complement).
default)
complement);
default)
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (0–3599):
True Heading 9 Degrees (0–359)
by the MFD
regional by the MFD
applications
by the MFD
by the MFD
State Selector by the MFD
Flag


of bits
State by the MFD
Total number of 168
bits
19 – Extended Class B Equipment Position Report (In VDM)


of bits
by the MFD
gional or local by the MFD
applications
SOG 10 Speed over ground in 1/10 knot steps (0–102.2
kn):
Position accuracy 1 1 = high (> 10 m; Differential Mode of e.g.,
DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (< 10 m; Autonomous Mode of e.g.,
GNSS receiver or of other Electronic Position
complement).
default)
complement);
default)
COG 12 Course over ground in 1/10 degrees (0–3599):
True Heading 9 Degrees (0–359).
by the MFD
gional applica- by the MFD
tions
Name 120 Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII, “@@@@@
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@” = not availa-
ble = default
Type of ship and 8 0 = not available or no ship = default
cargo type 1–99 = as defined in Table “Type of ship”
(see above)
100–199 = reserved, for regional use
200–255 = reserved, for future use
Dimension of 30 Reference point for reported position;
Ship/Reference Also indicates the dimension of ship in metres
for Position (see SSD message)
Type of Electro- 4 0 = Undefined (default) Not processed
nic Position 1 = GPS by the MFD
Fixing Device 2 = GLONASS


of bits
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed
8–15 = not used
by the MFD
DTE 1 Data terminal ready (0 = available 1 = not
available = default)
Assigned Mode 1 Not processed
Flag by the MFD
by the MFD
Total number of 312
bits
21 – Aids-to-Navigation Report

of bits
by the MFD
ID 30 MMSI number
Type of Aids-to- 5 See table below
Navigation
Name of Aids-to- 120 Maximum 20 characters 6 bit ASCII,
Navigation “@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@” =
not available = default.
The name of the Aid-to-Navigation may be
extended by the parameter “Name of
Aid-to-Navigation Extension” below
Position 1 1 = high (< 10 m; Differential Mode of
accuracy e.g., DGNSS receiver).
0 = low (> 10 m; Autonomous Mode of
e.g., GNSSW receiver or of other Electronic
Position Fixing Device). Default = 0
Longitude 28 Longitude in 1/10 000 min of position of
an Aid-to-Navigation.
( 180 degrees, East = positive, West = negative.
default)
Latitude 27 Latitude in 1/10 000 min of position of
an Aid-to-Navigation.
( 90 degrees, North = positive, South = negative,
default)
Dimension/Refe- 30 Reference point for reported position; also
rence for Position indicates the dimension of Aids-to-Navigation in
metres1
1
– the following should be observed:
for fixed Aids-to-Navigation, virtual and pseudo A-to-N’s, and for off-shore structures,
the orientation established by the dimension A should point to true north;


of bits
Type of Elec- 4 0 = Undefined (default)
tronic Position 1 = GPS
Fixing Device 2 = GLONASS
4 = Loran-C
5 = Chayka
7 = surveyed. For fixed A-to-N’s and
virtual/pseudo A-to-N’s, the surveyed position
should be used. The accurate position enhances
its function as a radar reference target
8–15 = not used
Time Stamp 6 UTC second when the report was generated by
the EFPS (0–59, or 60 if time stamp is not
available, which should also be the default value,
or 61 if positioning system is in manual input
mode, or 62 if Electronic Position Fixing System
operates in estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
or 63 if the position system is inoperative)
Off-Position 1 For floating Aids-to-Navigation only:
Indicator 0 = on position;
1 = off position.
Note: This flag should only be considered valid by
receiving station, if the Aid-to-Navigation is
a floating aid, and if Time Stamp is equal to or
below 59. For floating A-to-N, the guard zone
parameters should be set on installation
Reserved for 8 Reserved for definition by a competent regional or Not processed
regional or local local authority. Should be set to zero, if not used by the MFD
application for any regional or local application. Regional
application should not use zero
by the MFD
Virtual/pseudo 1 0 = default = real A-to-N at indicated position;
A-to-N Flag 1 = virtual/pseudo A-to-N, does not physically
exist, may only be transmitted from an AIS station
nearby under the direction of a competent
authority2
Assigned Mode 1 Not processed
Flag by the MFD
Spare 1 Spare. Not used. Should be set to zero
Name of Aid-to- 0, 6, 12, This parameter of up to 14 additional 6-bit-ASCII
Navigation 18, 24, characters for a 2-slot message may be combined
Extension 30, 36,... with the parameter “Name of Aid-to-Navigation”
84 at the end of that parameter, when more than
20 characters are needed for the Name of the
Aid-to-Navigation. This parameter should be
omitted when no more than 20 characters for the
for floating aids larger than 2 2 m, the dimensions of the Aids to Navigation should
always be given approximated to a square, i.e. the dimensions should always be
as follows A=B=C=D≠0. (This is due to the fact, that the orientation of the floating
Aid to Navigation is not transmitted. The reference point for reported position is
in the center of the square.);
A=B=C=D=1 should indicate objects (fixed or floating) smaller than or equal to 2 2 m.
(The reference point for reported position is in the center of the square.)
2
– when transmitting virtual/pseudo Aids to Navigation information, i.e. the virtual/pseudo
Aids to Navigation Target Flag is set to one (1), the dimensions should be set to A=B=C=D=0
(default). This should also be the case, when transmitting “reference point” information
(see table below).


of bits
name of the A-to-N are needed in total. Only the
required number of characters should be
transmitted, i.e. no @-character should be used
Spare 0, 2, 4, Spare. Used only when parameter “Name of
or 6 Aid-to-Navigation Extension” is used. Should be
set to zero. The number of spare bits should be
adjusted in order to observe byte boundaries
Number of bits 272–360 Occupies two slots
Note: The competent international body for Aids-to-Navigation, IALA, defines

an Aid-to-Navigation as: “a device or system external to vessels designed
and operated to enhance safe and efficient navigation of vessels and/or
vessel traffic” (IALA Navguide, Edition 1997, Chapter 7).
The IALA Navguide stipulates: “A floating aid to navigation, which is out of
position, adrift or during the night is unlighted, may itself become a danger
to navigation. When a floating aid is out of position or malfunctioning,
navigational warnings must be given”. Therefore, a station, which transmits
Message 21, could also transmit Safety Related Broadcast Message
(Message 14) upon detecting that the floating Aid-to-Navigation has gone
out of position or is malfunctioning, at the competent authority’s discretion.
Table Type of Aids to Navigation
The nature and type of A-to-N can be indicated with 32 different codes, as shown below:
Code Definition
0 Default, Type of A-to-N not specified
1 Reference point
2 RACON
3 Structure off shore, such as oil platforms, wind farms, rigs.
(Note: This code should identify an obstruction that is fitted with an Aid-
to-Navigation AIS station.)
4 Spare
Fixed A-to-N 5 Light, without sectors
6 Light, with sectors
7 Leading Light Front
8 Leading Light Rear
9 Beacon, Cardinal N
10 Beacon, Cardinal E
11 Beacon, Cardinal S
12 Beacon, Cardinal W
13 Beacon, Port hand
14 Beacon, Starboard hand
15 Beacon, Preferred Channel port hand
16 Beacon, Preferred Channel starboard hand
17 Beacon, Isolated danger
18 Beacon, Safe water
19 Beacon, Special mark
Floating A-to-N 20 Cardinal Mark N
21 Cardinal Mark E
22 Cardinal Mark S
23 Cardinal Mark W
24 Port hand Mark
25 Starboard hand Mark
26 Preferred Channel Port hand
27 Preferred Channel Starboard hand

Code Definition
28 Isolated danger
29 Safe Water
30 Special Mark
31 Light Vessel/LANBY
Note: The types of Aids to Navigation listed above are based on the IALA Maritime
Buoyage System, where applicable.
There is potential for confusion when deciding whether an aid is lighted or
unlighted. Competent authorities may wish to use the regional/local section
of the message to indicate this.
Sentences Transmitted by the MFD via AIS Channel in the Operation

with a Transponder
AIQ, ALR – Monitoring of Set Alarm State
This sentence is transmitted by the MFD in following cases:
• at the MFD start;

• at the transponder restart.
1
$xxAIQ, ALR *hh<CR><LF>.
N Field Name Comments
1 ALR Request for set alarm In response to this request, the MFD receives
state information the sentence from the SAAB R4 transponder
AIQ, SSD – Monitoring of Static Ship Data


• as change occurs;
1
$xxAIQ, SSD *hh<CR><LF>.
1 SSD Request for static ship In response to this request, the MFD receives
data the sentence from the SAAB R4 transponder
AIQ, TXT – Monitoring of Text Transmission


1
$xxAIQ, TXT *hh<CR><LF>.
1 TXT Request for static ship In response to this request, the MFD receives
data the sentence from the SAAB R4 transponder
AIQ, VSD – Monitoring of Voyage Information


• as change occurs;

• at the transponder restart;

• once in 10 minutes.
1
$xxAIQ, VSD *hh<CR><LF>.

1 VSD Request for voyage In response to this request, the MFD receives the sen-
information tence from the SAAB R4 transponder
ABK – Addressed Binary And Safety Related Message

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception only via AIS channel in MFD.
The ABK-sentence is generated when a transaction, initiated by reception

of an ABM, AIR, or BBM sentence, is completed or terminated.
This sentence provides information about the success or failure of a requested

ABM broadcast of either ITU-R M.1371 messages 6 or 12. The ABK process utilizes
the information received in ITU-R M.1371 messages 7 and 13. Upon reception
of either a VHF Data-link message 7 or 13, or the failure of messages 6 or 12,
the AIS unit delivers the ABK sentence to the external application.
This sentence is also used to report to the external application the AIS unit’s
handling of the AIR (ITU-R M.1371 message 15) and BBM (ITU-R M.1371
messages 8 and 14) sentences. The external application initiates an interrogation
through the use of the AIR-sentence, or a broadcast through the use of
the BBM sentence. The AIS unit generates an ABK sentence to report the outcome
of the AIR or BBM broadcast process.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.

1 2 3 4 5
$--ABK, xxxxxxxxx , a , x.x , x , x *hh<CR><LF>.

1 xxxxxxxxx MMSI of Identifies the distant addressed AIS unit
the addressed involved with the acknowledgement. If
destination AIS unit more than one MMSI are being addressed
(ITU-R M.1371 message 15), the MMSI of
the first distant AIS unit, identified in
the message, is the MMSI reported here.
When the Message ID is a general
broadcast (ITU-R M.1371 messages 8
or 14), this field is null
2 a AIS channel of Not
reception processed
by the MFD
3 x.x ITU-R M.1371 This indicates to the external application
message ID the type of ITU-R M.1371 message that
this ABK sentence is addressing. Also see
the message ID’s listed in Note 1
4 x Message Sequence See note 1
Number
5 x Type of acknow- See note 2
ledgement
Note: The message sequence number, together with the ITU-R M.1371 message
ID and MMSI of the addressed AIS unit, uniquely identifies a previously
received ABM, AIR, or BBM sentence.
Generation of an ABK sentence makes a sequential message identifier available
for reuse. The ITU-R M.1371 Message ID is used to determine the origin of the
message sequence identifier number. The following table lists the origins by
message ID:

ITU-R M.1371 Message Sequence Number source

Message ID
6 Sequential message identifier from ABM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
7 Addressed AIS unit’s message 7, sequence number, ITU-R M.1371
8 Sequential message identifier from BBM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
12 Sequential message identifier from ABM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
13 Addressed AIS unit’s message 13, sequence number, ITU-R M.1371
14 Sequential message identifier from BBM-sentence, IEC 61162-1
15 No source, field shall be null
Note: Acknowledgements provided are:

• 0 = message (6 or 12) successfully received by the addressed AIS unit;
1 = message (6 or 12) was broadcast, but no acknowledgement by
the distant addressed AIS unit;
• 2 = message could not be broadcast;
• 3 = requested broadcast of message (8, 14, or 15) has been successfully
completed;
• 4 = late reception of a message 7 or 13 acknowledgement “addressed
to ownship” MMSI – identified by; destination MMSI, acknowledgement
source MMSI, message sequence identifier, and message type. Late
reception means that the AIS unit did not have an acknowledgement
process active for the acknowledgement that was received.
ABM – Addressed Binary And Safety Related Message
This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission only via AIS channel in MFD.
This sentence supports ITU-R M.1371 messages 6 and 12. It provides an external
application with a means to exchange data using AIS. The message data is defined
by the application only – not the AIS. This message offers great flexibility for
implementing system functions that use the AIS like a communications device.
After receiving this sentence, the AIS initiates a radio broadcast on the VHF Data
Link (VDL) of either message 6 or 12. The AIS will make up to four broadcasts of
the message. The actual number will depend on the reception of an acknowledgement
from the addressed “destination” AIS. The default time between retries is 4 sec.
Retries will not be attempted more frequently than 4 sec. Retries stop when
the appropriate acknowledgement (see ITU-R M.1371 messages 7 and 13) is
received. The AIS will make up to 4 broadcasts, original broadcast plus three retires.
This process could take 32 sec to complete.
The success or failure of the reception of this broadcast by the intended AIS
unit is confirmed through the use of the “Addressed and binary Broadcast
Acknowledgement (ABK)” sentence formatter, and the processes that support
the generation of an ABK-sentence. The AIS is also limited in the amount
of encapsulated data that can be sent in each slot and frame. If the length of
the message would exceed five slots, or the AIS broadcast would exceed the limit
of 20 RATDMA slot transmissions for the current frame, the AIS will return an
ABK-sentence with an acknowledgement of “2” – message could not be broadcast.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
!--ABM, x , x , x , xxxxxxxxx , x , x.x , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>.
tences needed to


identifier
4 xxxxxxxxx The MMSI of destination
AIS unit for the ITU-R
M.1371 message
5 x AIS channel for broad-
cast of the radio
message
6 x.x ITU-R M.1371 6 or 12 6 – normal text
message 12 – safety text
7 s--s Encapsulated data 156 characters if field “6” = 12
153 characters if field “6” = 6

This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission and reception via
AIS channel in MFD.
Local alarm condition and status. This sentence is used to report an alarm condition
on a device and its current state of acknowledgment.
Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2001-07.
1 2 3 4 5
$--ALR, hhmmss.ss , xxx , A , A , c—c *hh<CR><LF>.
1 hhmmss.ss Time of alarm
condition change, UTC
2 xxx ID number of the alarm
source
3 A Alarm condition A = threshold exceeded
V = not exceeded
4 A Alarm’s acknowledge A = acknowledged
state V = unacknowledged
BBM – Broadcast Binary Message

This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission only via AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
!--BBM, x , x , x , x , x.x , s--s , x *hh<CR><LF>.
tences needed to
identifier
4 x AIS channel for broad-
cast of the radio
message
5 x.x ITU-R M.1371 8 or 14 8 – normal text
message 14 – safety text
6 s--s Encapsulated data 156 characters if field “5” = 14
153 characters if field “5” = 8

Note: Transmission of a target from the MFD is made in ABM, BBM safety related
sentences in the form of text information containing the target identifier,
coordinates, COG, SOG as of the moment of the target acquisition by
the MFD operator.
SSD – SHIP STATIC Data
This sentence is used by the MFD for the transmission and reception via
AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
$--SSD, c--c , c--c , xxx , xxx , xx , xx , c , aa *hh<CR><LF>.
1 c--c Ship’s call sign 1 to 7 Set in the System
Configuration utility
2 c--c Ship’s name 1 to 20 Set in the System
Configuration utility
3 xxx Pos. ref. Point distance 0 to 511 (metres) See Note
“A”, from bow
4 xxx Pos. ref., “B”, from 0 to 511 (metres) See Note
stern
5 xx Pos. ref., “C”, from port 0 to 63 (metres) See Note
beam
6 xx Pos. ref., “D”, from 0 to 63 (metres) See Note
starboard beam
7 c DTE indicator flag Transmitted by
the with value = 0
8 aa Source identifier Not transmitted by
the MFD
Note: Coefficients A, B, C, D depend on LOA, BOA, X/Y Conning Station or External

GPS parameters set in the System Configuration utility. MFD transmits to
SAAB R4 transponder parameters (A, B, C, D) of the internal and external
GPS receiver antenna units, by using the internal data exchange protocol.
In this case, fields 3–6 in SSD sentence are transmitted empty.
Fig. 456. Dimensions of the vessel
TXT – Text Transmission

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception only via AIS channel in MFD.
For the transmission of short text messages. Longer text messages may be
transmitted by using multiple sentences.

Standard: IEC 61162-1, 2001-07.

1 2 3 4
$--TXT, xx , xx , xx , c—c *hh<CR><LF>

1 x.x Total number of 01 to 99 Not processed by
messages the MFD
2 x.x Message number 01 to 99 Not processed by
the MFD
3 x.x Text identifier The text identifier is a number,
01 to 99, used to identify
different text messages
4 c--c Text message ASCII characters, and code
delimiters if needed, up to
the maximum permitted
sentence length (i.e. up to 61
characters including any code
delimiters)
VSD – Voyage Static Data

This sentence is used by the MFD for the reception and transmission via
AIS channel in MFD.
Standard: IEC 61993-2, 2001-11-09.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
$--VSD, x.x , x.x , x.x , c--c , hhmmss.ss , xx , xx , x.x , x.x *hh<CR><LF>.
1 x.x Type of ship and cargo 0 to 255 See the table below
category
2 x.x Maximum current static 0 to 25.5 (metre)
draught
3 x.x Persons on board 0 to 8191
4 c--c Destination 1 to 20 characters
5 hhmmss.ss Est. UTC time of arrival Hours, minutes, and seconds Only hours and
at destination minutes are
processed in MFD
6 xx Est. day of arrival at 00 to 31 (UTC)
destination
7 xx Est. month of arrival at 00 to 12 (UTC)
destination
8 x.x Navigational status 0 = Underway using engine
1 = At anchor
2 = Not under command
3 = Restricted manoeuvrability
4 = Constrained by draught
5 = Moored
6 = Aground
7 = Engaged in fishing
8 = Under way sailing
9 = High Speed Craft (HSC)
10 = Wing In Ground (WIG)
15 = Undefined (default)
9 x.x Regional application 0 to 15 Transmitted by
flags the MFD with
value = 0
Ship and Cargo Type

Ships/Cargo type VSD message
identifier
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 21
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 22
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 23

Ships/Cargo type VSD message

identifier
WIG (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 24
WIG (no additional information) 29
Fishing vessel 30
Towing vessel 31
Towing vessel (length of the tow exceeds 200 m, breadth exceeds 25 m) 32
Vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations 33
Vessel engaged in diving operations 34
Vessel engaged in military operations 35
Sailing vessel 36
Pleasure craft 37
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 41
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 42
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 43
HSC (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D) 44
HSC (no additional information) 49
Pilot vessel 50
Search and rescue vessel 51
Tug 52
Port tender 53
Vessel with antipollution facilities 54
Law enforcement vessel 55
Medical transport (as defined in the 1949 Geneva Conventions) 58
Ship according to Resolution No 18 (Mob – 83) 59
Passenger ship. All ships of this type 60
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 61
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 62
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 63
Passenger ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D) 64
Passenger ship (no additional information) 69
Cargo ship. All ships of this type 70
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 71
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 72
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 73
Cargo ship (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D) 74
Cargo ship (no additional information) 79
Tanker. All ships of this type 80
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 81
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 82
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 83
Tanker (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D) 84
Tanker (no additional information) 89
Other type. All ships of this type 90
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category A) 91
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category B) 92
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category C) 93
Other type (carrying DG, HS, or MP IMO hazard or pollutant category D) 94
Other type (no additional information) – (its default) 99

Additional Information
Position Sensors Fallback Conditions
Priority Position Sensor status Position
(Latitude/Longitude)
1 External DGNSS in use (differential corrected) Lat/Lon (external)
2 Internal DGNSS in use (differential corrected) Lat/Lon (internal)
3 Internal DGNSS in use (differential corrected, beacon). Lat/Lon (internal)
Applicable only if (optional) an internal beacon receiver
is provided
4 External Positioning Fixing System in use (differential Lat/Lon (external)
uncorrected)
5 Internal GNSS in use (differential uncorrected) Lat/Lon (internal)
6 Manual position input Lat/Lon (manual)
Dead reckoning position Lat/Lon (dead reckoning)
No position Not available
The AIS automatically selects the position source with the highest priority available.
If data availability changes, the AIS automatically switches to the position source
with the highest priority available after 5 sec when switching downwards, or 30 sec
when switching upwards. During this period, the latest valid position is used
for reporting.
Class A Shipborne Mobile Equipment Reporting Intervals
Type of Ship Reporting interval
Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots 3 min
Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots 10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots 10 sec
Ship with a speed of between 0–14 knots and changing course 3 1/3 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots 6 sec
Ship with a speed of between 14–23 knots and changing course 2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots 2 sec
Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots and changing course 2 sec
Note: The reporting rate shall increase to once per 2 sec in accordance with
Recommendation ITU-R M.1371-1, Annex 1, Chapter 4.2.1, Footnote (1),
when the station determines that it is the semaphore.
If the autonomous mode requires a higher rate than the assigned mode,
the AIS shall use the autonomous mode.
Reporting Intervals For Equipment Other Than Class A Shipborne Mobile

Equipment
Platform’s Condition Nominal Reporting Interval
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment not moving faster than 2 knots 3 min
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 2–14 knots 30 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving 14–23 knots 15 sec
Class B Shipborne Mobile Equipment moving >23 knots 5 sec
Search and Rescue aircraft (airborne mobile equipment) 10 sec
Aids to Navigation 3 min

NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format
Platform’s Condition Nominal Reporting Interval

3
AIS base station 10 sec
ROT Sensor Fallback Conditions

The AIS automatically select the ROT source with the highest priority available as
given in table below:
Priority Position Sensor Contents of ROT field
status Affected data in messages 1, 2, 3 (ITU-R M.1371, 2000)
1 Rate of Turn Indicator 0…+126 = turning right at up to 708 degrees per minute or
in use4 higher;
0…-126 = turning left at up to 708 degrees per minute or higher.
Values between 0 and 708 degrees/min shall be coded by
ROTAIS = 4.733 SQRT (ROTsensor) degrees/min
ROTsensor is the Rate of Turn as input by the external Rate of
Turn Indicator (TI).
Values of 709 degrees per minute and above shall be cut
to 708 degrees per minute
2 Other ROT source +127 = turning right at more than 5°/30s (No TI is available);
in use5 -127 = turning left at more than 5°/30s (No TI is available)
3 No valid ROT -128 (80 hex) indicates no turn information available (default)
information available
NAVTEX SENSOR DATA EXCHANGE FORMAT
NMEA Format
NRX – NAVTEX Received Message
The NRX sentence is used to transfer the contents of a received NAVTEX message
from the NAVTEX receiver to another device. As the length of a single NAVTEX
message may exceed the number of characters permitted in a single sentence,
many NRX sentences may be required to transfer a single NAVTEX message.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
$--NRX,xxx ,xxx ,xx ,aaxx ,x ,hhmmss.ss ,xx ,xx ,xxxx ,x.x ,x.x ,A ,
13
c--c *hh<CR><LF>.
1 xxx Number of sentences 001–999
2 xxx Sentence number 001–999
3 xx Sequential message 00–99
ID
4 aaxx NAVTEX message The first character identifies
code the transmitter coverage area,
and the second character
identifies the type of message.
The remaining two characters are
restricted to numerals with
a range of 00 to 99 and represent
a serial number for each type of
message
3 1
– the base station rate should increase to once per 3 /3 seconds after the station detects
that one or more stations are synchronizing to the base station.
4
– rate of turn indicator according to IMO A.526 (13); determined by Talker ID.
5
– i.e., based on compass information.

NAVTEX Sensor Data Exchange Format

5 x Frequency table The frequency indicator identifies
index 0–9 the frequency that the NAVTEX
message was received on:
0 = not received over air (e.g.,
test messages);
1 = 490 kHz;
2 = 518 kHz;
3 = 4209.5 kHz
6 hhmmss.ss UTC of receipt of
message
7 xx Day 1–31
8 xx Month 1–12
9 xxxx Year
10 x.x Total number of The total number of characters
characters in this indicates the expected size
series of NRX of the message body sent in this
sentences sequence of NRX sentences
11 x.x Total number of bad
characters
12 A Status indication A = correct message reception,
V = incorrect message reception
13 c--c Message body
NRM – NAVTEX Receiver Mask

This command is used to manipulate the configuration masks that control which
messages are stored, printed, and sent to the MFD port of the NAVTEX receiver.
1 2 3 4
$--NRM,x ,x ,hhhhhhhh ,hhhhhhhh *hh<CR><LF>.

1 x Function code The function code is used to further
identify the purpose of the sentence.
The meaning of the function code is as
follows:
0 – request messages for the given
mask;
1 – set/report the storage mask;
2 – set/report the printer mask;
3 – set/report the MFD mask
2 x Frequency table index The frequency indicator identifies
the frequency that the NAVTEX
message was received on:
1 = 490 kHz;
2 = 518 kHz;
3 = 4209.5 kHz
3 hhhhhhhh Transmitter coverage The transmitter coverage area mask is
area mask defined as a 32 bit hex field where
the least significant bit represents
transmitter coverage area “A”, the next
bit is “B” and so on up to bit 25 which
is ”Z”
4 hhhhhhhh Message type mask The message type mask is defined as
a 32 bit hex field where the least
significant bit represents message type
“A”, the next bit is “B” and so on up to bit
25 which is “Z”
When another device wishes to determine the current values of the bit masks,
it sends a query sentence to the NAVTEX receiver as follows:
$--CRQ,NRM*hh<CR><LF>.

Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface
ASCII Format
NAVTEX messages have the following format (the message shown in the drawing
serves as an example):
Fig. 457. NAVTEX message
• ZCZC – message start identifier;

• S – transmitting station identifier (S – Nitone);
• A – message type identifier (A – navigational warnings);
• 43 – message number (43);
• Error rate – message reception error transmitted by the NAVTEX receiver;
• WZ 250 – warning type identifier and its current number: text of the message;
• CANCEL WZ 247 (SA41) indicates cancellation of WZ 247 warning sent
in message SA41. It is highlighted with the red colour;
• NNNN – message end identifier.
DESCRIPTION OF THE MFD AND RHOTHETA RT-202

RDF INTERFACE
The MFD is processing a constant data flow supplied by Rhotheta RT-202 radio
direction finder according to certain rules. No messages are transmitted from
the MFD to RT-202. The message format is described in detail in RHOTHETA
RT-202. OPERATING INSTRUCTION. This document specifies the rules of
processing messages from RT202:
• Data output protocol.
Each message starts with a header-sign (ASCII-sign for identifying the type of
message). Following headers are possible: “S” = hex53, “P” = hex50, “V” = hex56,
“A” = hex41, “L” = hex4C, “N” = 0x4E. Then follows the proper information,
consisting of three ASCII decimals: “0” to “9” = hex30 to hex39. As end mark two
ASCII final marks are used: “CR” = hex0D (CarriageReturn) and “LF” = hex0A
(LineFeed).
Header Content Specification
S XXX Status output:

= 0xx no received signal (no bearing);
= 2xx received signal but active frequency storage; no bearing/error caused by
exceeding frequency deviation of transmitted signal (> ±6 kHz);
= 1xx receiving signal (bearing active)
P XXX Level of received signal/field intensity in %
= 000 099
V XXX Display of supplied voltage, e.g., 132 corresponds to 13.2 V
= 050 280
N XXX Low audio-frequency (averaged about 100 ms) in 10 Hz,
= 000 255 e.g., 124 corresponds to 1240 Hz
A XXX Averaged DF value in degrees (average-value, resolution 2 degrees)
= 000 353
1 XXX Unvaried DF value in degrees (momentary value, resolution 1 degree)
= 000 359

Description of the MFD and Rhotheta RT-202 RDF Interface
• Remarks.
The unaveraged DF value shows a certain spread, depending on the received
signal. It can be used, if required, as indicator of the DF value quality. When working
with the direction finder only, the displayed averaged value should be used:
– Field “S” is the first to be processed. The message is further ignored if “S”
field contains 0xx or 2xx parameters. And, vice versa, it is processed if
the message contains 1xx parameter meaning that a bearing signal has
been received;
– The second step is to analyse “P” field. Field “P” contains information
(in per cent) on the intensity level of the received MOB bearing signal
(transmitter of 121.5 MHz signal). Accordingly, the lower the level, the weaker
signal has been received. It should be noted that the signal processing level
is set direct from RT-202 sensor (for a detailed description, see RHOTHETA
RT202. OPERATING INSTRUCTION). The optimum condition would be
to make an identical setting of the processed signal level in RT-202 sensor
and in on “SAR” page of “Tasks” panel of ECDIS task. The signal is analysed
by comparing a parameter from “P” field and data entered by the operator
in ”Use the signal with the level of intensity more than XX %” input window
on ”SAR” page of “Tasks” panel of ECDIS task. If “P” parameter is lower than
the signal processing level set by the operator, the message is ignored.
Otherwise, the message is accepted for further processing;
– If the two above conditions are fulfilled, the MFD processes field “A”
containing information on the MOB object bearing. It should be noted that this
is a relative bearing, whereas to be plotted in the ECDIS task or transmitted
to other ships via the AIS, the bearing should be corrected to true.
ATTENTION!
For the MFD “MAN OVERBOARD” functionality to operate with the radio direction
finder and AIS, the MFD is required to receive a valid compass heading value.
Otherwise, it will be impossible to plot a true MOB object bearing on the electronic
chart, or to transmit it to other targets via AIS facilities.

ANNEX A
Additional Settings
for Navi-Conning

Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules
ADJUSTMENT OF MFD OPERATION

WITH WAGO MODULES
General
in the START menu (START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\SYSTEM CONFIGURATION):
Press INS button and switch to “WAGO” page. This page is intended for creating
and editing the database of parameters supplied to the MFD via WAGO modules.
Configuration of WAGO modules connection to the MFD ports is performed on the
page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors”. WAGO_ADC sensor should be selected.
Settings). If WAGO modules are not connected, the page will be blank.
Annex A. Additional Settings for Navi-Conning 803

In WAGO modules group, press New button. Position the cursor on a cell in Type column
and double click the left trackball/mouse button:
In the drop-down list, which will open up, select the device included in WAGO module.
ATTENTION!
The first unit to be adjusted is the one, which is located next to 750-314 “Main Module”
on the DIN rail.
In WAGO module parameters group, press New button to adjust parameters supplied by
the installed unit:

Use the Name column to enter the parameter name:
If necessary, in Backup officer column check alarm checkbox; if no acknowledgement

is received within a certain time interval, the Backup officer alarm should be triggered
off; set the necessary time interval in seconds.
In the Alarm if no input column, after the input of the parameter name, the screen
displays automatically the name of the alarm (warning) which will be shown in the
MFD in the absence of a signal at the WAGO module input. Edit the alarm (warning)
name as required.
From the drop-dawn list in Alm type column, select the type of an alarm generated by
the absence of a signal at the WAGO module input:
• None – no alarm;
• ALM – an alarm is triggered off;
• WRN – a warning is triggered off.

From drop-dawn list in Chan. column, select the channel of the WAGO unit,
which the parameter is supplied by:
In Unit column, set translation coefficient (“1” by default).
In Min Phys. column, set the minimum, and in Max Phys. column, set the maximum
physical value (of current, voltage, etc.), which is supplied to the ADC and
corresponds to the maximum and minimum parameter value.

ATTENTION!
In Min Phys. and Max Phys. columns, the voltage value is required to be set in
millivolts (10 V are specified as 10000), whereas the current value should be
specified in microamperes (for 4 mA 4000 is specified).
In Min Val. column, set the minimum, and in Max Val. column, set the maximum value
of the associated parameter:
Another parameter can be set for other ADC channel. By using New button
in WAGO module parameters window, specify all the parameters, which received
via this WAGO module.

By using New button in WAGO modules window, specify all the units, which WAGO
Conning Box consists of.
ATTENTION!
Adjustment of WAGO units should be performed in the order of their positions
on the DIN rail from 750-314 “Main Module”.
Press “OK” button to save the settings you have made, and exit from the System
Configuration utility.
Connection of External MOB Button

Press the Sensors button. The drop-down Workstation list specifies the name
of the workstation which the external MOB button will be connected to.
Open “Sensors” page.
Select WAGO_ADC sensor from the drop-down list in the column Sensor:
In the column Port, select from the drop-down list the required COM port
of the Workstation computer, which this sensor is physically connected to.
Specify in the drop-down list the following COM port parameters:
• Baud Rate: 9600;

• Data Bits: 8;
• Parity: None;
• Stop Bits: 1.
Press “Apply” button.
Press INS button. Switch to “WAGO” page.

In WAGO modules group, press New button. Position the cursor on a cell in Type column
and double click the left trackball/mouse button. Select “750-403 Digital Inputs Module”:
In the WAGO module parameters group, press the New button. Use the Name column
to enter the parameter name. It is exactly the following “MOB_ON_CONTACT”
name which should be entered:

Adjustment of MFD Operation with NMEA Custom
From the drop-down list in the Channel column, select the channel of
the WAGO unit which the external MOB button is connected to:
Press “OK” button to save the settings you have made, and exit from the System
Configuration utility.
ADJUSTMENT OF MFD OPERATION WITH NMEA CUSTOM

Press INS button and switch to “NMEA Custom” page. This page is intended for
creating and editing the database of user sentences supplied to the MFD input.
Configuration of NMEA Custom sensor connection to the MFD ports is performed on
the page “Sensors” of the panel “Sensors” (see chapter System Settings, section
MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings). There is a possibility to
connect up to 20 NMEA Custom sensors.

If NMEA Custom sensor is not connected, the page will be blank.
General
Sentence Structure
A special Sentence Editor is used for the aforementioned purposes. The Editor
contains the database of like NMEA sentences, which are processed by the MFD.
When creating or editing sentences, the user specifies to the MFD the rules which
this sentence will be processed by.
The first step in the setting of parameter extraction rules is the determining
of the structure of a sentence containing parameters. Press New button:

While creating the sentence structure, the user sets the criterion for checking
the correctness of the sentence, which is being received. If at least one of
the characteristics of a newly created sentence does not correspond to
the characteristics of the sentence, which is being received, it will be ignored.
The sentence has the following characteristics:
• Start Symbol – sentence start symbol;

• Talker – information source identifier. If the identifier is specified, only those
sentences, which have the set identifier, will be processed. The rest of
the sentences, even if they have the same structure, will be ignored. If a
identifier isn’t specified, all the sentences which have this structure, will be
processed regardless of the information source identifier;
• Name – sentence identifier. If the identifiers of the sentence which is being
received and which is being created do no match, they will be ignored;
• Number of fields – number of fields in the sentence (up to 60 fields long). Where
the number of fields in a received sentence does not correspond to the value set by
the user, the sentence will be ignored;
• Checksum – a mandatory validity check performed on the data contained
in the sentences, calculated by the external device, appended to the message,
then re-calculated by the MFD for comparison to determine if the message
was received correctly. If these checksums do no match, the sentence
will be ignored.
Set several fields and press the “Next >” button. An example of creating a custom
NMEA will be provided in the next paragraph:
The next step is to determine the structure of sentence fields. Each field in a sentence
can contain the following characteristics:
• Value – parameter value;

• Unit – parameter measurement units;
• Status – parameter status;
• Reference – parameter reference;
• Empty field.

By default, fields in the sentence structure are empty, which corresponds

to the pressed Empty button.
To determine which parameter characteristics the selected field contains (value,

measurement units, status or reference), position the cursor on the necessary field
and press the appropriate button.
Parameter Value
Parameters may have digital and symbol values, which may be of constant or variable
length; this is why it is necessary to determine the format of the field containing
the parameter value. These settings are made at the fields’ structure formation stage.
Field formats are provided in the table below:
Format type Format Notation in the sentence Field description

structure
Normal Free-type x.x Fields of variable length containing
Format integers or numbers with floating point
Normal Strong x Fixed length field containing the number
Format of digits as determined by the user
String Text c– –c Variable length field containing
any permitted characters
–– Empty field

Parameter Measurement Units

The parameter has the measurement units determined by the measurement unit
identifier, which arrives in a separate field of the same sentence as the parameter
itself. It is necessary to specify all the possible identifier values, which may arrive
in this field. Appropriate measurement units will be selected according to this identifier.
These settings are made at the field structure formation stage.
Factors for re-calculating all the measurement units to the system which
the MFD operates with are specified separately in MultiUnit column.
Parameter Status
The parameter may have a status, which determines its reliability. The status always
has two values: Valid/Invalid. The user determines characters, which may arrive
in Status field, at the field structure formation stage.

Parameter Reference
The parameter may have an additional characteristic: a reference, which may be
of two types:
• Parametric, which differs the parameter from other parameters, whose value
arrives in the same sentence field. E.g., in MWV sentence, the reference
indicates theoretical or relative wind is specified in the given sentence;
• Sign, which allows a positive or negative value to be assigned to the parameter

and then taken into account in the further processing. This reference always has
two values only. E.g., it is used in GLL for the ship coordinates (“+” – North,
“-” – South) or XTD to specify the direction (“+” – starboard, “-” – port).
Characters, which may arrive in Reference field, are determined by the user
at the field structure formation stage.

Empty Fields
An empty field (Empty button is pressed) is not processed by MFD.
Creating New Sentences Structure

As an example, we will consider an algorithm for retrieving parameters from
the NMEA MWV sentence, which can be used in much the same way for retrieving
parameters from any customised NMEA like sentence.
In “NMEA Custom” page press New button:
In “Sentence header and structure” window, which will open up, in Start symbol group
set the necessary start symbol by choosing the appropriate option button.
E.g., for MWV sentence, select “$”:
In Talker box, set the identifier of the device, which the sentence is supplied by;
to do this, enter it in block letters in Manual input box. The number of entered
identifier characters should be two. E.g., for MWV sentence which is supplied
by the wind sensor imitator, the identifier will be “TE”. Use Name text box to enter
the sentence identifier. The number of entered sentence identifier characters
should be three:
Use Number of Fields text box to enter the number of fields in the sentence, which is
being created. E.g., for MWV sentence, it is 5. If necessary, check Check Sum
checkbox for checksums comparison:

The formed sentence structure will be displayed in the information line in the top part
of “Sentence header and structure” window:

Specify the fields, which will contain parameter characteristics. E.g., for MWV
sentence, position the cursor on the first field containing the parameter value,
and press Value button:
Specify the format type for the field describing the parameter value. To do this,
select the required value from the drop-down list. E.g., “Normal” for the given value
of a MWV sentence parameter:

For Normal field type, set the format by selecting the appropriate option button
in Normal field group. E.g., for “Wind Angle” parameter of MWV sentence,
set Free-type format. This will be a variable length field containing integers
or numbers with floating point. If Strong format is set, the field will have a fixed value
and contain numbers with a set number of digits:
Use a similar procedure to specify fields containing values of other parameters,

e.g., the third field for MWV sentence.
Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter measurement units
(e.g., wind speed measurement units in MWV sentence) and press Unit button:
Press Add button. Position the cursor on a cell in Symbol column and double click
the left trackball/mouse button. Enter the measurement unit symbol and press <Enter>.
In MultiUnit column, enter the coefficients for re-calculating the measurement units
to the system which the MFD operates corresponding to the unit symbol, and
press <Enter>.
Use Add button to enter all the possible measurement units for the given parameter:

Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter status, and press Status button:
Set the symbols corresponding to reliable and unreliable data in Symbol column.
As the set symbols are received, the MFD as valid or invalid will assess the edited
parameter.
Position the cursor on the field containing the parameter reference (e.g., the second
field in MWV sentence) and press Reference button:
In Type line, select the reference type (for MWV sentence – Parameter).
Press Add button. Position the cursor on Symbol column cell and double click
the left trackball/mouse button. Enter the reference symbol and press <Enter> key.

Use Add button to enter all the possible reference symbols for the given sentence:
Formation of the sentence structure is completed. Press “OK” button.
In Messages and parameters group the entered sentence will be added in the top part
in Sentence column:
It is then necessary to set rules for the extraction of parameters from the sentence
which you are editing.

Defining Parameter Extraction Rules

To define rules for extracting parameters from the sentence, press Parameters button:
Addition of New Parameters
ATTENTION!
The previously set sentence structure is displayed in “Parameters list” window and
cannot be edited at this stage.
To add a parameter, which the extraction-from-sentence rules should be defined for,

press Add button of “Parameters list” window:
In Name field, enter the parameter name.
Note: There should be no spaces in the parameter name; it is advisable to replace

them with underlines. The parameter name cannot be the same as that
of indicators on the Navi-Conning.

Position the cursor on the field of the sentence containing the value
of the necessary parameter, and press the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter value, select SET AS VALUE line from the pop-up menu.
E.g., for MWV sentence, the first field should contain the value of the wind angle.
The field, which you are editing, will be colored in red.

Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter status, and press the right
trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter status, select SET AS STATUS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in khaki.
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter reference, and press
the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter reference, select SET AS REFERENCE line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in dark blue.
Use Reference Value input box of Reference group to select a reference from
the drop-down list corresponding to the parameter, which is being set
(see paragraphs Parameter Reference and Creating of New Sentences).
E.g., for “Wind angle, 0 to 359 degrees, Relative” parameter in MWV sentence,
this will be “R”.

If necessary, check Backup officer alarm checkbox; if no acknowledgement is

received within a certain time interval, the Backup officer alarm should be triggered
off; set the necessary time interval in seconds.
If necessary, in the No data scheme group use the Type drop-down list to select
the type of the alarm generated by the absence of the parameter:
In the Name text box, after the input of the parameter name, the screen displays
automatically the name of the alarm (warning) which will be generated in
the MFD by the absence of this parameter. Edit the alarm (warning) as required.

If necessary, in the Out of range scheme group use the Type drop-dawn list to select
the type of an alarm generated by the parameter exceeding the set values:
In the Name text box, after the input of the parameter name, the screen displays
automatically the name of the alarm (warning), which will be generated in
the MFD if the parameter exceeds the set values. Edit the alarm (warning)
as required.
In the Min and Max input boxes, set the minimum and maximum parameter values.
When these are exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
For parameters such as for example Rudder_Angle, check the Value recalculation
checkbox.

In Physical min input box, set the minimum, and in Physical min input box, set the
maximum physical value (of current, voltage, etc.), which is supplied to the MFD
input and corresponds to the maximum and minimum parameter value.
In Value min input box, set the minimum, and in Value max input box, set the maximum
value of the associated parameter.
The setting Alarm code is not used in this version of MFD.
“Parameters list” window will open up. Input of rule for the extraction of a sentence
parameter is completed. The parameter is added to the table.
Enter the rules of retrieving the next sentence parameter, e.g., “Wind Speed Relative”,
which contains measurement units. To do this, press Add button:
In Name field, enter the parameter name.

Note: There should be no spaces in the parameter name, it is advisable to replace

them with underlines. The parameter name cannot be the same as that of
indicators on the Navi-Conning.
Position the cursor on the field of the sentence containing the value
of the necessary parameter, and press the right trackball/mouse button:
To set the parameter value, select SET AS VALUE line from the pop-up menu.
E.g., for MWV sentence, the third field should contain the value of the wind speed.
The field, which you are editing, will be colored in red.

Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter units, and press the right
To set the parameter measurement units, select SET AS UNITS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in green.
Position the cursor on the field determining the parameter status, and press the right
To set the parameter status, select SET AS STATUS line from the pop-up menu.
The edited field will be coloured in khaki.

If necessary, in the No data scheme and Out of range scheme groups set the type and
name of alarms for the parameter in question (see above).

The entered sentence with set parameters is displayed in the table. Input of new
sentence and its parameters in the databases is completed.
Press “OK” button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in
the appropriate databases, and exit from the System Configuration utility.
Editing of Parameters
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose parameter is required
to be edited, and press Parameters button:
Use the table to select the parameter required to be edited.

Press Edit button. Edit the parameter characteristics:
ATTENTION!
In the editing mode, it is possible to change parameter characteristics within
the framework of the existing sentence structure. For the editing of the sentence
structure, see the next paragraph.
Press “OK” button:

Press “OK” button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in the appropriate
databases and exit from the System Configuration utility.
Parameters Deletion
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose parameter is required to be
edited, and press Parameters button:
Use the table to select the parameter required to be edited.

Press Delete button:
The parameter will be deleted from the table.

Editing Sentence Structure

In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence whose structure is required to be
edited. Press Edit button:
In “Sentence header and structure” window, you can change start symbol, talker,
sentence name, number of fields and leave or remove checksum. Press “Next” button:
In “Sentence fields description” window, you can change the order of sentence fields
and edit their structure by using Value, Unit, Status, or Reference buttons. You may
leave the field empty as required by pressing Empty button.

Set the parameters anew in the edited sentence structure (see the previous paragraph).
Sentences Deletion
In Messages and parameters group, select a sentence, which is required to delete:

Check of Settings and Connection of Parameters to Navi-Conning
Press Delete button. The sentence will be deleted from the database:
Press “OK” button to save the entered parameters and the sentence in the appropriate
databases, and exit from the System Configuration utility.
CHECK OF SETTINGS AND CONNECTION

OF PARAMETERS TO NAVI-CONNING
ATTENTION!
For the parameters (supplied via the WAGO modules or extracted from custom
NMEA sentences), set and saved in the System Configuration utility, to be
processed in the MFD, it is necessary to run the ECDIS task.
Run ECDIS task by selecting the appropriate item in the START menu
(START\PROGRAMS\MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY\NAVI-SAILOR):

Open “Config” panel by selecting the appropriate line of TASKS LIST menu in the tabs
zone of the ECDIS task screen.
Use the tab in the top part of “Config” panel, which will open up, to switch
to ”COM trace” page:
To display the traffic between the MFD and NMEA Custom external device, press
the button in the Connected sensors column:
The data flow will be shown in the Trace window. If the data is not displayed, it may
not be arriving in the MFD. This can only be checked on the WS which the NMEA
Custom external device is physically connected to. Press the Record COM trace
button.

In the “COM Trace” window which will open up, in Ports list column press the button
with name of port, which NMEA Custom external device connected to:
If the data is supplied to the port but is not processed by the MFD, this means that
the NMEA Custom sentence or extracted parameters set in the System
Configuration utility do not correspond to the received sentence. Check the settings
described in the previous chapter. Also check parameters which are supplied via
the WAGO modules.

ANNEX B
Transas Firewall and
Antivirus Protector
Adjustment

Workstations Settings
WORKSTATIONS SETTINGS
ATTENTION!
Workstation settings should be done only for workstations connected to Transas
Firewall & Antivirus Protector (TFAP)!
Network Settings
Go to SETTINGS/CONTROL PANEL/NETWORK CONNECTIONS/NETWORK 1 PROPERTIES/INTERNET PROTOCOL
(TCP/IP) PROPERTIES and enter the following values for each WS connected to TFAP:
• IP address for workstation W01: 10.8.1.101 (for workstation W02: 10.8.1.102;

for workstation W03: 10.8.1.103, and etc.).
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0;
• Default gateway (Firewall’s internal IP address): 10.8.1.100.
Press “Close” button in the window “Network 1 Properties”.
Annex B. Transas Firewall and Antivirus Protector Adjustment 841

Onboard Firewall Settings
ONBOARD FIREWALL SETTINGS
Startup Procedure
For connection, see TFAP’s technical specification enclosed in Chapter 3.
There are two main setup options: Network setup and Local setup.
Network Setup
• Connect TFAP power and “Internal” LAN port to WS LAN1 directly or via
Ethernet switch;
• Startup TFAP on main switch “Internet Breaker”;
• Wait for 5 minutes for computer loading;
• Use any workstation and start Internet Explorer;
• In address field type http://10.8.1.100 and continue network settings as
described in paragraph Network Settings below.
Local Setup
• Connect keyboard, mouse and display to TFAP;
• Startup TFAP on main switch “Internet Breaker”;
• Wait for TFAP to load;
• Click “Launch Client” icon in lower left corner;
• Continue network settings as described in paragraph Network Settings below.
Network Settings
Login
In the open window, enter login and password:
• In the field “Username”, type username;

• In the field “Password”, enter password;
• Press “Login” button.

Configuration
In the open window, perform the following steps:
• Press “Config” tab below Transas logo;

• Below “Config” tab press “Networking” button.
• Click on “edit” External Interface:

• Depending on what type of information you have received from vessels

IT department choose either “dynamic” or “static” from “Config Type” drop-down
list.

Dynamic Setting
Configuration
• Connect External LAN cable to communication equipment;
• Select “dynamic” from “Config Type” drop-down list;
• Check “Is WAN Interface” checkbox;
• Press “Renew Lease” button and wait for new settings:
• Check in the “Current status” field that you have received IP address, Netmask,
Gateway and DNS:
• Leave “Internal” interface settings unchanged.

Troubleshooting
• If you have not received any data, please verify in the “Interfaces” page that you
are connected:
• It will state “connected” and the circle will be green instead of grey.
• Click on “edit” External Interface to go to “Configure Interface” page and try
again with “Renew Lease”.
• If you have not received any data, wait for 15 minutes and check “Current
Status”.
• Unplug and plugin network cable, and make sure that it is green circle on
external interface.
• Check with vessels IT department that DHCP server is working.

Static Settings
• Select “static” option from “Config Type” drop-down list and enter values that
you have received from vessels IT department:
Configuration
• You must have received IP address, Gateway and DNS number;
• In the field “Primary IP Address and Netmask”, enter IP address and Netmask
received from vessels IT department;
• In field “Default Gateway”, enter Gateway IP address;
• In the field “Primary DNS Server” enter DNS address, if not specified
use 8.8.8.8;
• In the field “Secondary DNS Server” enter DNS address, if not specified
use 4.2.2.2;
• Leave “Internal Interface” settings unchanged.
Troubleshooting
• Please verify in “Interfaces” page that you are connected;
• It will state “connected” and the circle will be green instead of grey;
• For complete test/verification see paragraph Troubleshooting and Test
Connection below.

Troubleshooting and Test Connection

Internet Connectivity Test
Press “Troubleshooting” tab and perform the following steps:
• Click on “Connectivity Test”:
• Click on “Run Test”:
• If “Test Successful!” appears you have Internet connection:

• Press “Close” button in the window “Run Test”. TFAP is ready for use;
• If test fails, try “Ping Test” below.
Ping Test
• Click on “Ping Test”:

• Enter Default Gateway IP in address field (for Default Gateway IP, see
“Configure Interface” page) and click on “Run Test”:
• If ping to gateway address fail, there are problems with IP settings or

Network cable;
• If ping to gateway are successful ping any external IP address, ex 8.8.8.8;
• If ping to ex. 8.8.8.8 is ok, there are problems with DNS but hopefully system will
be OK. DNS is not needed for TFAP or MFD.
Transas Chart Server Test

• Click on “Connection Test”;

• In the field “IP address” enter “82.140.75.17”;

• In the field “Port” enter “9000” and Click “Run Test”:
• If test successful both TFAP and Chart server is working correct.

Network Settings for Yacht Viewer
NETWORK SETTINGS FOR YACHT VIEWER
TFAP Settings
Connection
1. Connect monitor, keyboard and mouse to sufficient ports of Transas Firewall
and Antivirus Protector (further TFAP).
2. Startup TFAP on main switch “Internet Breaker” and wait for 5 minutes for
computer loading.
Note: You can also reach TFAP from any connected workstation by using Web
interface as described above in section Onboard Firewall Settings,
paragraph Startup Procedure.
TFAP’s Rules Settings

1. .Click on “Launch Client” icon:

2. Enter password and press “Login” button:
3. Press Firewall’s “Settings” button:

4. To create the new rule for Yacht Viewer access, press “Add” button on the
“Rules” page:
5. In the open window, make the following settings:
• Make sure that “Enable Rule” checkbox is checked;

• In the “Description” input box, type “Allow YachtViewer”;
• Press “Add” button:

6. In the column “Type”, select “Destination Interface” from drop-down list:
7. Check the “Internal” checkbox in the column “Value” and press “Add” button:

8. In the column “Type”, select “Destination Address” from drop-down list:
9. In the “Destination Address” input box, enter the range of workstations

IP addresses: 10.8.1.101-10.8.1.120 (W01-W20), or IP address of the
workstation that will be used for Yacht Viewer.
Press “Add” button:

10. In the column “Type”, select “Destination Port” from drop-down list:
11. In the “Destination Port” input box, enter port number “9091” and press “Add”
button:

12. In the column “Type”, select “Protocol” from drop-down list:
13. Check the “TCP” checkbox in the column “Value” and press “Add” button:

14. In the column “Type”, select “Source Interface” from drop-down list:
15. Check the “External” checkbox in the column “Value” and press “Add” button:

16. In the column “Type”, select “Source Address” from drop-down list:
17. In the “Source Address” input box, enter the range of IP addresses assigned by
DHCP server of the external router to the Wi-Fi clients. Where the range of
addresses is unknown, it is permissible to enter “any”.
Check the “Flag” checkbox and press “Done” button:

18. Press “Apply” button in the open page:
19. Reorder rules by using cursor in the column “Reorder” as shown on the picture
below:
20. Press “Apply” and “OK” buttons.

Port Forwarding Settings

1. Open “Config” panel and press “Networking” button:
2. In the open window from “External Interface” group settings in the field
“Address”, remember external TFAP IP address assigned by DHCP server of
router (in our case, 10.10.78.109). Press “Port Forwards” tab:

3. To create the new rule for Yacht Viewer port forwarding to workstations, press
“Add” button:
4. In the open window, perform the following settings:
• Make sure that “Enabled” checkbox is checked;

• In the field “Description”, type “YachtViewer”;
• Make sure that “TCP” is chosen from drop-down list “Protocol”;
• Select “Other” from drop-down list “Port”;
• In the “Port Number” input box, enter port number 9091;
• In the “Local IP” input box, enter the range of workstations
IP addresses 10.8.1.101-10.8.1.120 (W01-W20), or IP address of the
workstation that will be used for Yacht Viewer, and press “Update” button.

21. Press “Apply” button:
22. Press “OK” button:

23. Close the page:
24. TFAP is ready to work:

Yacht Viewer Connection Options and Rules

General
For operation in a network on the iPad, the Yacht Viewer uses a standard transport
level TCP/IP communication protocol. Connection with one of the bridge
workstations is established via an External Router on port number 9091.
TFAP and External Router without uplink

iPad and Workstation Adjustment
• Start the workstation, run one of the NaviSailor, Conning or Radar applications.
Check that a green icon with a white bird has appeared in the right bottom
corner: the NSS (Navigation Sub System) process is running;
• Switch on the iPad with the installed Yacht Viewer;
• Select the “Settings” icon;
• Select Wi-Fi and check that there is a Wi-Fi connection with the External Router
– the selected checkbox next to the network name;
• Close the window;
• Run the Yacht Viewer;
• In the right bottom corner select “Settings” – an icon with gearwheels;
• In the window which will appear, select “Sensors”;
• To add a new connection, in the “Connection Settings” field select “None”, then
“Add Connections”;
• Fill in the fields as follows:
– Use the “Name” field to enter the <connection name >;
– Use the “Address” field to enter the TFAP’s external IP address (see above
paragraph Port Forwarding Settings, item 2);
– Use the “Port” field to enter “9091”.
For TFAP settings, see above paragraph TFAP Settings.

TFAP and External Router with an uplink (with the Internet as a rule)
With this type of connection, the following settings must be made for router:
• Protocol type: TCP/IP;

• Port number: “9091”;
• Use the Local IP field to specify the range of IP addresses which are local for
External Router;
• Rule name – arbitrary.
The External Router setup is required to be made by the router supplier’s competent
engineer.
For iPad and workstation adjustment, see above the appropriate item.
TFAP and External switch (Access Point) without an uplink
For External Router operation in the Access Point mode, it requires no additional
settings.

Electronic Chart Systems and External Router
With this type of connection, the router should filter all the ECS traffic in the direction
of the external network, and all the external network traffic in the ECS direction,
except for the connection with the iPad. To fulfil these conditions, it if necessary to
add a relevant rule to the router settings – redirecting port number 9091, DHCP for
LAN, etc.

ANNEX C
Upgrade RS3/RS4
to RS6B Computers

RS6B/RS6 Computer with DRSE-00-0017 Extension Board
RS6B/RS6 COMPUTER WITH DRSE-00-0017 EXTENSION

BOARD
General
RS6 computer with additional extension serial board is delivered for upgrade of RS3
and RS4 computers.
The serial extension board has three Dsub connectors (see figure below):
• J3 – Dsub-37 connector – 2 x NMEA0183, 2 x configured as NMEA0183

or RS232;
• J4 – Dsub-37 connector – 2 x NMEA0183, 2 x configured as NMEA0183
or RS232;
• J5 – Dsub-62 connector – 8 x RS232.
Fig. 458. Extension Board connectors layout
The board is connected inside the RS6 to the motherboard with a 26 pin ribbon cable.
If the ribbon cable is connected to the header J1 marked “168-mode”, the J5 is active.
If the ribbon cable is connected to the header J2 marked “114-mode”, the J3 and J4
are active.
Annex C. Upgrade RS3/RS4 871

to RS6B Computers
RS6B/RS6 Computer with DRSE-00-0017 Extension Board
Ports Configuration
Each configurable port has 4 jumpers to move to change from NMEA0183 to RS232.
Fig. 459. RS232/RS422 ports configuration jumpers
The jumpers to select NMEA0183 or RS232 are placed between the J1 and J2
headers inside the RS6.
Fig. 460. Jumpers position

ANNEX D
Scanners Cables Handling

GEM Network Scanners Cables Installation
GEM NETWORK SCANNERS CABLES INSTALLATION
Cables Installation
Hand tool crimp for contact diameter of 1.6 mm. Refer to figure below for examples
of crimping for standard and coaxial conductor.
1. Arrange in advance 30 mm of shrinkable sleeve with inner diameter of 25 mm.
2. Insert the piece of the shrinkable sleeve and the components of the core hitch
(contained in the installation kit of the cable) along the cable to fix it in the
special hole of the scanner unit.
3. Strip the cable for about 90 cm; collect the braided wire shield and shorten it to
obtain a length suitable to tighten it between the dies situated just after the input
hole of the cable.
4. Tighten the cable on the scanner unit with the components of the core hitch
inserted in advance.
5. Shrink the piece of shield in correspondence of metallic cable-stop and tight

it to assure a first fixing point of the cable.
6. The second fixing point is constituted by an adhesive plastic support already

present in the scanner unit. The cable is fixed with a cable-stop band contained
in the kit.
7. Strip all the conductors for about 5 mm. The procedure to prepare coaxial
cables is the following: strip the cables for about 5 cm, then separate the
metallic core from the shield; roll-up the shield and protect it with the shrinkable
sleeve so that the shield is drawn for about 5 mm. Strip also the metallic core
for about 5 mm. Crimp all the conductors with respective spade lugs for terminal
board supplied with the kit.
For scanner units SU70-14E and SU78-14E in reference with CHAPTER 1,

section Installation of Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast,
paragraph Electrical Installation, item Connections of Scanners Units,
carry out the connection with the terminal board J8A and the RJ45 connector J7
separating the conductors assigned to J8A from those assigned to J7 with a
band tighten-wire for a length of 10 cm. For these scanners, cable CB24 is used.
For Radome scanner units SU82-01 and SU82-12S non-TA in reference with
CHAPTER 1, section Installation of Radome Scanners X-Band Up Mast,
paragraph Radome Electrical Installation, item Connections of Radome
Scanner, carry out the connection with the conectors J5 and J8. For these
scanners, cable CB24 is used.
For scanner unit SU70-25E in reference with CHAPTER 1, section Installation of

Network Scanners 4/12/25 kW X-Band Up Mast, paragraph Electrical
Installation, item Connections of Scanners Units and paragraph below
CB25 Cable Handling for 25 KW Scanner, carry out the connection with the
terminal board J8 and the connector J7 fixing the conductors assigned to
terminal board J8 with a band tighten-wire for a length of 10 cm. For this
scanner, cable CB25 is used.
Annex D. Scanners Cables Handling 875

Note: Be sure that no pieces of conductor or other pieces remain inside the unit
after this task.
CB25 Cable Handling for GEM 25 KW Scanner

J7 J8
№ Function Conductor № Function Conductor
1 TXD+ White/Green 1 P_MOT 3
2 TXD- Green 3 N_MOT 5
3 RXD- Orange 5 GND 4
4 RXD+ White/Orange 7 +24V 1
9 +12V 2
11 -12V 7
13 GND 6
Cable CB25 diam. Est. 19,50 mm

Ref. mmq Colour Reference
Specification
Number
1-7 Tinned-copper wire AWG16) 1,25 Numbered from 1 to 7
FTP FTP wire Cat.5e 0,22 White/Orange, Orange,
CEI EN 50288-2-1 White/Green, Blue,
Wihte/Blue, Green,
White/Brown, Brown
8 Polyester tape Black 8
9 Tinned-copper plate, covering > Green
85%
10 Outer PVC sheath grey RAL7001; Brown
Mark “GEM CB25” step 50 cm;
External diameter max/19,50 mm

NGSM Scanners Cables and Waveguide Installation
NGSM SCANNERS CABLES AND WAVEGUIDE

INSTALLATION
Fitting RF Feeder Cable (S-band Coaxial Cable)

A RF coaxial cable is used for the run between the bulkhead Transceiver unit and
the Turning unit with S-band radars. The cable used is Andrew Antennas Heliax
AVA 5-50 50-Ohm, overall diameter 28 mm (1.1 in).
Although robust, the cable must be protected against strain and kinking, and must
be treated with the greatest care at all times. The ends of the cable must be kept
sealed against the ingress of moisture before the connectors are assembled.
Wherever possible, bends should have as great a bending radius as practicable. A

single bend may be made when necessary with a minimum bending radius
(measured from the axis of the cable) of 250 mm (10 in).
For convenience, the upper (Turning unit) connector can be fitted before you install
the cable. Because of the possibility of movement of the inner conductor relative to
the outer conductor the following precautions must be taken:
1. Any bend required within 1 m (3 ft) of the cable end must be formed before
carrying out the cutting and assembly procedure detailed in subsequent
paragraphs. No bend may be closer that 250 mm (10in) from the end of the
cable.
2. To allow for movement between the Turning unit and mast, whenever possible,
a double bend should be formed in the cable to produce an offset immediately
below the Turning unit.
3. The cable and assembled connector should be fitted to the Turning unit so that
a minimum amount of distortion of the cable occurs between the connector and
the pre-formed bend.
4. The cable should be installed and secured in position (using the waveguide
supports) as far as is practicable before the lower (Transceiver unit) connector is
fitted to the cable. The precautions given in paragraph 1 above must be
observed if a bend is required adjacent to the Transceiver unit.
Assembling the Connectors

General
A straight connector assembly (type L45DM) is used to terminate the feeder cable at
each end. The assembly comprises a clamping nut, spring ring, outer connector,
cable cutting guide and compression cap.
Tools required
A fine-toothed blade hacksaw, a 1¼ in open-ended spanner and a 13/8 in open-
ended spanner will be sufficient for fitting the connectors to the cable.
Procedure
The procedure that follows applies to the straight connectors at each end of the
feeder cable. It is very important that swarf and other foreign matter is prevented
from entering the cable.

Prepare the cable end and assemble the connector as follows:
1. Using a knife, remove approximately 2 in (50 mm) from the end of the jacket.
2. Make sure the end of the cable is straight by attaching the cable cutting guide
approximately 1 ½ in (38 mm) from the jacket and cutting the end of the cable
using a hacksaw.
3. Deburr the inside edge of the inner conductor and the inside edge of the outer
conductor.
4. Deburr the outside edge of the outer conductor. Be sure outer conductor is
round and undistorted.
5. Using a wire brush carefully remove debris from the end of the cable.
6. Add the clamping nut to the end of the cable, push the nut up the cable until it
covers the jacket end.

7. Add the spring ring to the cable end.
8. Attach the compression cap to the cable end and using a twisting motion
compress the cable foam against the clamping nut.
9. Attach the outer connector to cable end and screw onto the clamping nut.
10. Tighten the outer connector using the 1¼in and 13/8in spanners. Hold the outer
connector with one spanner and turn the clamping nut; do not turn the outer
connector. Make sure there is good metal to metal contact between the
clamping nut and outer connector.
Fitting the Deck Gland

The 7/8 in RF feeder cable passes through its own separate deck gland, positioned
near the foot of the mast. The gland kit consists of:
• A rubber boot;
• Adjustable tension clamp (with screws);
• Gland half plates;

• Six sealing washers;

• Butyl sealing tape.
In addition you will need the following (obtained locally) (see figure below):
• Six M6 bolts (of suitable length);

• Six M6 flat washers;
• Six M6 lock washers;
• Six M6 nuts.
To fit the deck gland do the following:
1. Cut a 40 mm diameter entrance hole in the deck, having installed and secured
the cable from the Turning unit down the mast; pass the Transceiver unit end
through the entrance hole.
2. Remove the paper from the Butyl tape.

Cover the cable in the area of the deck gland with the butyl tape.
3. Place the boot around the feeder, position the boot over the butyl tape, and fit
the tension clamp. Offer the boot up to the entrance hole in the deck and mark
the location of the six holes for the fixing bolts.
4. Withdraw the boot from the hole and drill six 7 mm mounting holes through the
deck.
5. Slide the boot back over the entrance hole in the deck and tighten the tension
clamp. Apply sealant to the face of the gland boot.
6. Align the holes in the gland half plates with the holes in the boot and the holes in
the deck. Secure the assembly in position with six M6 bolts, flat washers, lock
washers and nuts, together with the sealing washers provided in the kit.
The bolts are inserted downwards and the sealing washers only go under the
bolt heads, see figure below for location details.

Installing Cable Supports

Cable Hangers are supplied (Andrew Hanger Kit Type 42396A-5) to support the
cable along the cable run between the scanner unit and the bulkhead transceiver.
Each kit contains 10 Hangers. Their associated Fixing Kit (Andrew Type 31769-1) is
included as part of the Installation Kit.
Normally, a hanger is attached to a cable tray, using suitable bolts, at a

recommended spacing of 0.9 metres (3 feet). The support brackets must be fitted to
the hangers to prevent distortion when the hanger is wrapped around the coaxial
cable as shown in the figure below.
The figure also shows additional hardware (not supplied in the Installation Kit) that
helps with special mounting arrangements. If required, these can be purchased from
Andrew Corporation.

Fitting RF Elliptical Waveguide

For X-band radars a 33.5 mm x 22.9 mm corrugated elliptical waveguide is used for
the run between the bulkhead Transceiver unit and the Turning unit. The waveguide
used is Andrew Antennas Type EW85.
A 12" flexible waveguide (Part No 1189.z, supplied) must be fitted between the
elliptical waveguide and the Turning unit. Although apparently robust, the waveguide
must be protected against strain and kinking, and must be treated with great care.
The ends of the waveguide must be kept sealed against the ingress of moisture
before the connectors are assembled. The maximum permissible twist is 3°/metre
(39").
Bends should have the largest bending radius practicable. A single bend may be
made when necessary with a minimum bending radius (measured from the axis of
the waveguide) of 203 mm (8 in) in the ‘E’ plane, and 482 mm (19 in) in the ‘H’
plane.
Fig. 461. Waveguide planes
For convenience, the upper (Turning unit) connector can be fitted before installation
of the waveguide (waveguide kits supplied by Sperry Marine have one connector
fitted) but the following precautions must be taken:
1. Any bend required within 1 m (3 ft) of the waveguide end must be formed before
carrying out the cutting and assembly procedure described in subsequent
paragraphs. No bend may be nearer than 250 mm (10 in) from the end of the
waveguide.
2. Whenever possible, to allow for movement between the Turning unit and mast,
a double bend should be formed in the waveguide to produce an offset
immediately below the Turning unit.
3. Remove the waveguide plug from the underside of the antenna and the yellow
sealing cap from the waveguide aperture on the Turning unit.
Do NOT remove the plastic membrane over the Turning unit waveguide
aperture.
4. The waveguide and assembled connector should be fitted to the Turning unit so
that a minimum amount of distortion of the waveguide occurs between the
connector and the pre-formed bend.
5. The waveguide should be installed and secured in position (using the

waveguide supports shown in the figure below) as far as is practicable before
the lower Transceiver unit connector is fitted to the waveguide.
The precautions given in Chapter 1 above must be observed if a bend is
required adjacent to the Transceiver unit.

Assembling Connectors to Waveguide Using Andrew Antenna

Waveguide Kit
General
A straight connector (Type 185BC) is used to terminate the waveguide at each end.
Tools required
You will need a hacksaw (with a fine-toothed blade) and 1-15/16" openended
spanner to fit the connectors to the waveguide.
Procedure
The procedure that follows applies to the straight connectors at each end of the
waveguide. It is very important that swarf and other foreign matter is prevented from
entering the waveguide.
Prepare the waveguide end and assemble the connector as follows:
4. Make sure the end of the waveguide is straight for at least 250 mm (10 in). The
ends of the waveguide must be cut squarely, to ensure this wrap a straight
edged piece of paper around the waveguide. Tilt the waveguide downwards to
prevent copper swarf entering. Remove a 24 mm (15/16 in) length of the
polyethylene jacket. Clean the external copper with Comothene (or Ultraclean)
solvent and the interior with a bottlebrush.
Fig. 462. Cut jacket
5. Apply a thin film of silicone grease (MS4 or similar) to the large ‘O’-ring and
insert it in the internal groove of the clamping nut. Apply a thin film of grease to
the smooth internal surface of the clamping nut and slip the nut over the end of
the waveguide, as shown in the figure above. Wrap several turns of tape around
the clamping nut and jacket to prevent foreign matter from entering.
6. Grease the cut edge of the jacket. Slip the chamfered end of the compression
ring over until the recessed edge bottoms against the jacket (align the pin in
holes facing away from the jacket), as shown in the figures below.
Fig. 463. Fit compression ring
7. Turn the gasket inside out and fit it on to the end of the waveguide.
Apply a thin film of silicone grease to the gasket threads. Roll the gasket over to
the correct position and against the compression ring, see the figure below, and
apply a thin film of grease to the outside surface of the gasket. Clean any
grease from the exposed copper with solvent.

Fig. 464. Fit flare ring
8. Fit the recessed side of the flare ring over the gasket, with alignment holes of
the flare ring and compression ring corresponding. Push the flare ring firmly
against the compression ring.
Fig. 465. Cut tabs
9. With tin-snips, cut the bared end of the waveguide into tabs 1/8in wide and 1/8in
deep – as close to the flange as possible, see the figure above. Flatten the tabs
against the flare ring with a mallet using minimum force. Heavy blows will
reduce the thickness of the copper, see the figure below. Trim off any tab
protruding beyond the edge of the flare ring. Clean the tabs with solvent to
remove any silicone grease.
Fig. 466. Flare end
10. Make sure the mating RF contact face of the Type 185AC connector body is
clean and thoroughly grease-free. Clean the inside of the waveguide with a
bottlebrush.
11. Fit the smaller ‘O’-ring to the external groove on the connector body without any
grease, see the figure below. Apply a thin film of grease to the rear outer surface
of the compression ring (so that the large ‘O’-ring in the clamping nut will slide
over the compression ring and seat in the recess).
Fig. 467. Fit connector

12. Place the connector body against the flare ring. Insert the alignment pin in the
holes of the flare ring and compression ring. Remove the tape from the clamping
nut. Slide it over the rings and screw it to the thread on the connector body.
13. Hold the rectangular part of the connector body with an adjustable spanner and
tighten the clamping nut with 1-15/16 in set spanner across the flats. DO NOT
turn the connector body.
Assembling Connectors to Waveguide Using RFS Waveguide Kit

The following instructions and below figures are reproduced by permission of RFS
(Radio Frequency Systems).
Tools and Materials Required

The following tools and materials are required.
• Tape measure, hammer, pliers, fine-toothed saw, brush, half-round file (fine),
solid small tin shears, knife, open-ended spanners 12 mm set of allen wrenches,
cloth, Plast 2000 20 ccm, adhesive tape.
Termination Disassembly
Refer to the figure and list below for components in mounting of terminations.
Fig. 468. Termination disassembly
1 - Adapter section;
2 - Sealing ring;
3 - Back end;
4 - Sealing profile;
5 - Screw set with lock washers;

6 - Plastic screw (filling port for Plast 2000).
Waveguide Trimming
1. Cut waveguide at right angle to axis. Tilt the waveguide downwards to prevent
swarf from entering the centre of the waveguide, or block off the waveguide
centre using a cloth. Remove 35 mm length of polyethylene jacket as shown in
the figure below. Remove burrs and swarf.
Fig. 469. Waveguide trimming

Waveguide Flanging
2. Slide the sealing profile (4) onto the corrugated tube, as shown in the figure
below.
3. Slide back end (3) onto waveguide up to sealing profile.
Fig. 470. Waveguide flanging
4. Cut in the corrugated copper tube circumferential up to the back end using tin
shears. The distance between the copper tube end and the back end should be
approximately 4 mm. Cut evenly with a space of approximately 3 mm, with
spacing smaller than 2 mm at ends of larger elliptical axis, see the figure below.
Fig. 471. Cutting copper tube
5. Bend the feathered ends of the copper tube out and flange to the back end
using a hammer, see the figure below. Do not deform the inner bending area. If
necessary, flatten the contact surface with a file. Remove cloth and any swarf
from the inside of the waveguide.
Fig. 472. Treating the copper tube end
Assembly of Adapter Section

6. Screw together the back end (3) with sealing ring (2) and adapter section (1).
Tighten allen screws rigidly alternating crosswise.
7. Wrap up the gap between the back end and the waveguide jacket with adhesive
tape.

8. Screw Plast tube into the M9 filling port, tilt the assembly downwards and slowly
fill up with the Past 2000, see the figure below. The back end is filled completely
when the tape swells all around.
9. Remove the tube and close the port with the plastic screw (6). Clean surplus
Plast from the area.
Note: The curing time for Plast 2000 is at least 24 hours. The waveguide must not
be pressurized before this period.
Fig. 473. Injection of plast 2000
Fitting the Deck Gland

The EW85 waveguide passes through its own separate deck gland (part number
9391991 (sks86347/a), positioned near the foot of the mast. The kit consists of a
deck gland, gasket, upper and lower pressure plates, four m6 x25 screws and four
split gaskets.
To fit the deck gland:
1. Cut the deck and fit the flange using suitable fixings (not supplied – see the
figure below).
2. Assemble the deck flange split gaskets (refer to note below) loosely around the
waveguide section from below.
3. Slide the assembly upwards into the deck gland, see the figure below.
4. Secure the waveguide down the mast.
5. Tighten the four split gasket screws carefully. Do not over-tighten the screws.
This avoids possible distortion of the waveguide.
6. Fill the space between the waveguide and deck gland with hermastic oil-proof
compound.
Note: Split gaskets must be fitted in alternative positions to make sure the split
does not line up with the split of an adjacent gasket.
Initially, assemble the gaskets loosely before inserting them into the deck flange,
see the figure below. The assembly may be inverted to give you better access to the
screws.

Fig. 474. Deck gland fixing
Fig. 475. Deck gland details
Note: If cables are not routed via conduit into a deck gland, make sure the cable
entry hole is fully sealed using a suitable silicone sealant.
Installing the Waveguide

Waveguide hangers are supplied (Andrew hanger kit type 42396a-5) for supporting
the waveguide along its run between the scanner unit and the bulkhead transceiver.
Each kit contains 10 hangers.
Their associated support assembly (Andrew type 1116.b) and fixing kit (Andrew type
31769-1) are included as part of the installation kit.
Normally, a hanger is attached to a cable entry tray using suitable bolts at the
recommended spacing of 0.9 metres (3ft). The support brackets must be fitted to the
hangers to prevent distortion when the hanger is wrapped around the waveguide, as
show in the figure below.
The figure also shows additional hardware (not supplied in the installation kit) that
can be used for special mounting arrangements. If required, these can be purchased
from Andrew Corporation.

Fig. 476. Waveguide support details

ANNEX E
GEM Network X-Band Up
Mast Scanners Diagrams
The following Diagrams are enclosed in this Annex:
MFD WS. 4/12 kW Scanners. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. 4/12 kW Scanners. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. 25 kW Scanner. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. 25 kW Scanner. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. 4/12/25 kW Scanners. System Configuration Settings;
MFD WS. 4/12/25 kW Scanners. Power Distribution. Connection Diagram;
4/12 kW Scanners Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram;
25 kW Scanner Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram;
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Block Diagram;
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Connection Diagram;
Workboat Radar/ECS WS. Radome Scanner. Configuration Settings;
Radome Scanner Interfaces. Connection Diagram.

MFD WS. 4/12 KW SCANNERS. BLOCK DIAGRAM
X-Band Antenna 4 / 6 / 7.5 feet 1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC

2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter
8
3 - X1 Connection Board 24 VDC
10 4 - Computer RS6B
5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball
J7, J8A
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - 4 or 12 kW X-Band Up Mast Scanner
7 8 - X-Band Array Unit 4 or 6 or 7,5 feet
9 - PM Power Supply Unit APM-030
10 - PM Sensor Unit SPM-010
9 11 - Safety Switch
APM-030
6
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
5
To Alarm panel
4 DI3 DO1
To VDR
DI4 DO2
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
RS6B
LAN2
11
DI1 Safety
DI2 Switch
** From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2
2
EMC AC/DC UPS

CU
Battery
Pack
3
Filter Convertor
NOTE 1: * - Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm2 might be used if length < 10 meter.
If cable length > 10 meter, cross section must be 2x2,5 mm2
220 VAC 1 PH.
1
NOTE 2: For protection against short-circuit, cable overheating and fire,
it is required to install the fuses or thermal breakers for each power cable
For power cable with cross-section 1,5 mm2, fuse 10 A or less should be used
NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NC)
For power cable with cross-section 4 mm2, fuse 32 A or less should be used
*** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC)
These fuses have to be included in the X1 Connection Board
MFD WS. 4/12 KW SCANNERS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To Scanner Unit J7 Connector and J8A Terminal Board

NOTE 1:
To PM Sensor Unit SPM-010

* - Low battery alarm signal (NC)
** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC)
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
*From contacts 11 & 12 of UPS to DI 1
**From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS to DI 2 ES6 Trackball
UPS6
EMC AC/DC Control Battery Pack

Filter Convertor Unit
Performance Monitor
RS6B Computer Power Supply Unit
APM-030
Safety
Switch ON/OFF
Alarms Ack. Alarms Sensors signals 4xRS422
X1
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1 Ph.
NOTE 2: For connection wires Y10 (Y26), Y19 (Y26), Y25 (Y26) and cables Y20, Y21,
see "4/12 kW Scanners Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram"
MFD WS. 25 KW SCANNER. BLOCK DIAGRAM
1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC

X-Band Antenna 6 / 7.5 feet
8 4 - Computer RS6B
11 5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball
6 - TFT Monitor
J7, J8
7 - 25 kW X-Band Up Mast Scanner
8 - X-Band Array Unit 6 or 7,5 feet
7 9 - Power/Interface Unit ASU41000
10 - PM Power Supply Unit APM-030
11 - PM Sensor Unit SPM-010
10 12 - Safety Switch
APM-030
6
J2
9
ASU41000
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
J3 J1
From External Power Supply 24 VDC

TRACK CONTROL
ES6
5
To Alarm panel
4 DI3 DO1
To VDR
DI4 DO2
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS
RS6B
LAN2
DI1
DI2
Safety
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 Switch
2
12
AC/DC UPS Battery
EMC
Filter Convertor CU Pack 3
220 VAC 1 PH.
1
NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NC) For power cable with cross-section 4 mm2, fuse 32 A or less should be used
*** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC) These fuses have to be included in the X1 Connection Board
MFD WS. 25 KW SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To Scanner Unit J7 Connector and J8 TB

NOTE 1:
To PM Sensor Unit SPM-010

** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC)
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
*From contacts 11 & 12 of UPS to DI 1
**From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS to DI 2 ES6 Trackball
UPS6

Interface/ Performance Monitor

RS6B Computer Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit
ASU41000 APM-030
24 VDC Power
X1
Connection
Boards Safety
Switch ON/OFF
220 VAC 1 Ph.
NOTE 2: For connection cables Y10, Y19, Y20, Y21, Y25 and Y26,
see "25 kW Scanner Units Interfaces. Connection Diagram"
MFD WS. 4/12/25 KW SCANNERS. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
CONNECTIONS SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
NO
Sensor ES_KEYBOARD, COM 17, baud rate 19200, other settings by default
Y11 ES6 Keyboard USB - RS6B USB 1.1 See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensors Settings"
items 1-2 and paragraph "Workstation Settings", item 1
Y12 RS6B VGA - Monitor VGA See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Workstation Settings", item 2
Sensor LCD_DISPLAY, COM 3, baud rate 9600, other settings by default

Y13 RS6B COM 3 - Monitor COM port See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraphs "Sensor Settings", items 1-2
and "Workstation Settings", item 1
UPS6 CU - RS6B DI1/DI2 ports Contacts 1 and 2, N/C - normal closed, Low battery and Main Power Failure alarms
Y14 Contacts 11/12 - DI1: alarm Low battery See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensor Settings", item 8
Contacts 21/22 - DI2: alarm Buffer mode and section "BNWAS Setup", items 1-3
Y15 POS, COM 5; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Position sensor - RS6B COM 5
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensor Settings", items 1-2
GYRO, COM 6; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y16 Heading sensor - RS6B COM 6
LOG(DLOG),COM 7; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y17 Speed sensor - RS6B COM 7
AIS, COM 8, for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y18 AIS sensor - RS6B COM 8
RS6B LAN 2 - 4/12 kW Scanner Unit J7 See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Radar Settings", items 1, 3, 4 and
Y19 section " Radar Adjustment", paragraph "Network X-Band and S-Band Scanners Adjustment"
RS6B LAN 2 - ASU41000 J3 for 25 KW and paragraph "Distance and Bearing Offset"
See Chapter 1, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Performance Monitor PM 30-02

Y21 APM030 Unit J3 - SPM030 Unit
Installation", item "Performance Monitor Mode Setup"
Y23 -Y24 RS6B DI/DO ports - Alarm Panel See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensor Settings", items 7 and 8
MFD WS. 4/12/25 KW SCANNERS. POWER DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To RS6 Digital Inputs (DI1&DI2)
NOTE 1:
From contacts 11 & 12 of UPS* to DI 1
UPS6 From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS** to DI 2 ** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC)
L E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
QUINT-BAT/24DC/3.4AH
RS6B
L E N L E N + - + - + - + - + -
Rear Side
Rear Side
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1Ph.
24 VDC Power to APM-030 Unit
24 VDC Power to Scanner Unit SU70-14E (SU78-14E) J8A Terminal Board

24 VDC Power to Monitor
24 VDC Power to ES6 Keyboard
24 VDC Power to RS6B Computer
NOTE 2: # - Y10 power cable only for 4 and 12 kW scanners.

25 kW scanner should be powered by 24 VDC from external power supply
4/12 KW SCANNERS UNITS INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
25 KW SCANNER UNITS INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NOTE: *Pins 12-25 (ON+,ON-) must be wired or connected to Safety Switch

WORKBOAT RADAR/ECS WS. RADOME SCANNER. BLOCK DIAGRAM
2 or 4 kW Radome 1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC

J5, J8
2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional)
6 4 - 15" or 19" or 24" or 26" PPCi7 Computer
5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball (Kbd optional)
6 - 2 or 4 kW Radome Network Scanner
7 - Safety Switch
PPCi7
GPS
GYRO W01 LAN2 Safety
LOG
Switch
AIS
COM3-
COM6
SERVICE
HDD
- + +
ECDIS
7
BRILLIANCE - ON/OFF
USB
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
2 NOTE 1: * - Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm 2 might be used if length < 10 meter.
If cable length > 10 meter, cross section must be 2x2,5 mm 2
EMC AC/DC UPS Battery NOTE 2: For protection against short-circuit, cable overheating and fire,
CU Pack
Filter Convertor
3 it is required to install the fuses or thermal breakers for each power cable
For power cable with cross-section 1,5 mm 2, fuse 10 A or less should be used
220 VAC 1 PH.
1 24 VDC
For power cable with cross-section 4 mm 2, fuse 32 A or less should be used
WORKBOAT RADAR/ECS WS. RADOME SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To Scanner J8 and J5 TB
UPS6
EMC AC/DC Control Battery Pack PPCi7

Filter Convertor Unit Computer
X1
Connection
Boards ES6 Trackball
Sensors
ES6 Keyboard
220 VAC 1 Ph.
Safety
Switch ON/OFF
NOTE: For connection wires Y14 (Y26), Y15 (Y26) and Y25 (Y26),
see "Radome Scanner Interfaces. Connection Diagram"
WORKBOAT RADAR/ECS WS. RADOME SCANNER. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO
Display - PPCi7 COM7 (virtual COM)
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraphs "Sensor Settings", items 1-2
and "Workstation Settings", items 1-2
Y9 ES6 Keyboard USB - PPCi7 USB 1.1 See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensors Settings"
Y10 POS, COM 3; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of connected sensor
Position sensor - PPCi7 COM 3
GYRO, COM 4; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of connected sensor
Y11 Heading sensor - PPCi7 COM 4
LOG (DLOG), COM 5; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y12 Speed sensor - PPCi7 COM 5
AIS, COM 6, for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of connected sensor
Y13 AIS sensor - PPCi7 COM 6
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Radar Settings", items 1, 3, 4 and
Y15 PPCi7 LAN 2 - Scanner Unit J8 section " Radar Adjustment", paragraph "Network X-Band and S-Band Scanners Adjustment"
and paragraph "Distance and Bearing Offset"
RADOME SCANNER INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ANNEX F
NGSM 30 kW S-Band
Up/Down Mast Scanners
Diagrams
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner. Power Distribution;
Connection Diagram;
NR Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner.
Connection Diagram;
Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Masthead Scanner;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Configuration Settings;
MFD WS. NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner. Power Distribution;
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner.
Connection Diagram;
Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Bulkhead Scanner.

MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW MASTHEAD SCANNER. BLOCK DIAGRAM

4 - Computer RS6B
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - S-Band Turning Unit with 30 kW Transceiver
9 - S-Band Antenna 12 feet
10 - PM Arm 9
11 - Scanner Control Unit (SCU) 10
12 - DCU6 (optional)
13 - Isolating Switch (see "Interconnection Diagram
for S-Band Masthead Scanner")
Scanner TFT
Control
Unit
11
6 GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
5
To Alarm panel 7
To VDR
DI3 DO1 RIB6
13 COM5-
DI4 DO2
V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER
COM8
RS6B COM3
LAN2
LAN1
DI1
DI2 4
**From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 12
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 LAN 1
2
NOTE 1: * - Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm2 might be used if length < 10 meter
EMC AC/DC UPS Battery
Filter Convertor CU Pack NOTE 2: For protection against short-circuit, cable overheating and fire,
3
1 For power cable with cross-section 2,5 mm2, fuse 16 A or less should be used
220 VAC 3Ф
220 VAC 1Ф

MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW MASTHEAD SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To Scanner Unit (TSB 9,10)
Scanner
Control To Scanner Unit Motor Supply (TCH)
Unit
NOTE 3: For connection cables Y28, Y32, Y33 and Y34 ,

see "Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Masthead Scanner"
NOTE 1: TFT Monitor

* - Low battery alarm signal (NC) From contacts 11 & 12 of UPS* to DI 1
** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC) From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS** to DI 2 ES6 Keyboard
UPS6

RS6B Computer
X1
Connection Alarms Ack. Alarms
Boards Sensors signals
220 VAC 1 Ph.
220 VAC 3 Ph.
RIB6 DCU6
220VAC Power to Scanner (TSE)
From Scanner Unit (TSB) Sensors signals
From Scanner Unit (SKV)

NOTE 2: For connection cables Y26 and Y27,
see "NR Interface. RIB6/RIB6B - NGSM 30 kW Masthead Scanner.Connection Diagram"
MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW MASTHEAD SCANNER. POWER DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To RS6B Digital Inputs (DI1&DI2)
NOTE:
L E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6B
L E N L E N + - + - + - + - + -
Rear Side
Rear Side
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1Ph.
220VAC 3Ph.
24 VDC Power to DCU6
24 VDC Power to RIB6

220 VAC Power to Scanner Unit (TSE )
220 VAC 3 Ph. Power to SCU (2T1,4T2,6T3,GND)

MFD INTERFACE. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 KW MASTHEAD SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR S-BAND MASTHEAD SCANNER
MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW BULKHEAD SCANNER. BLOCK DIAGRAM

4 - Computer RS6B
6 - TFT Monitor
7 - RIB6
8 - S-Band Turning Unit
9 - S-Band Antenna 12 feet 9
10 - PM Arm 10
11 - Scanner Control Unit (SCU)
12 - Transceiver Unit
14 - Isolating Switch (see "Interconnection Diagram
for S-Band Bulkhead Scanner")
Scanner TFT
Control 12
Unit 11
Transceiver
Unit
6 GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
14
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
5
To Alarm panel 7
To VDR
DI3 DO1 RIB6
DI4 DO2
COM5-
COM8
RS6B COM3
LAN2
LAN1
DI1
DI2 4
**From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 13
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 LAN 1
2
NOTE 1: * - Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm2 might be used if length < 10 meter
If cable length > 10 meter, cross section must be 2x2,5 mm 2
Filter Convertor CU Pack NOTE 2: For protection against short-circuit, cable overheating and fire,
3
1 For power cable with cross-section 2,5 mm 2, fuse 16 A or less should be used
220 VAC 3Ф
220 VAC 1Ф

MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW BULKHEAD SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To Transceiver Unit (TSB 9,10)
Scanner
Control To Scanner Unit Motor Supply (TCH)
Unit
NOTE 3: For connection cables Y28, Y32, Y33 and Y37,

see "Interconnection Diagram for S-Band Bulkhead Scanner"
NOTE 1: TFT Monitor

** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC) From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS** to DI 2 ES6 Keyboard
UPS6

RS6B Computer
X1
Connection Alarms Ack. Alarms
Boards Sensors signals
220 VAC 1 Ph.
220 VAC 3 Ph.
RIB6 DCU6
220VAC Power to Scanner (TSE)
From Transceiver Unit (TSB) Sensors signals
From Transceiver Unit (SKV) NOTE 2: For connection cables Y26 and Y27,
see "MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B - NGSM 30 kW Bulkhead Scanner.
Connection Diagram"
MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW BULKHEAD SCANNER. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO
Y12 ES6 Keyboard USB - RS6B USB 1.1 See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensors Settings",

POS, COM 5; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y15 Position sensor - RS6B COM 5
For COM ports exchange parameters, see technical description of connected sensors
Y19-Y22 Sensors - DCU6 COM Ports
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensor Settings", items 4, 1-2
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Radar Settings", items 1 and 5.
Y26-Y27 Scanner Unit - RIB6 See also section " Radar Adjustment", paragraph "Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6" and
Chapter 1, section "Workstation Installation", paragraph "Radar Integrator Board RIB6"
Y30-Y31 RS6B DI/DO ports - Alarm Panel See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Sensor Settings", items 7 and 8
MFD WS. NGSM 30 KW BULKHEAD SCANNER. POWER DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
To RS6B Digital Inputs (DI1&DI2)
NOTE:
L E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6B
L E N L E N + - + - + - + - + -
Rear Side
Rear Side
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1Ph.
220VAC 3Ph.
24 VDC Power to DCU6

220 VAC Power to Transceiver Unit (TSE )
220 VAC 3 Ph. Power to SCU (2T1,4T2,6T3,GND)

MFD INTERFACE. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 30 KW BULKHEAD SCANNER. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR S-BAND BULKHEAD SCANNER
ANNEX G
NGSM 10/25 kW X-Band
Up/Down Mast Scanners
Diagrams
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners. Configuration Settings;
MFD WS. NGSM 10 kW Masthead Scanners. Power Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 kW Masthead Scanners.
Connection Diagram;
Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Masthead Scanner;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Block Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Connection Diagram;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Configuration Settings;
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners. Power Distribution.
Connection Diagram;
MFD Interface. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 kW Bulkhead Scanners.
Connection Diagram;
Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Bulkhead Scanner.

MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW MASTHEAD SCANNERS. BLOCK DIAGRAM

3 - X1 Connection Board 24 VDC NGSM X-Band Scanner 4/6/8 feet
4 - Computer RS6B
6 - TFT Monitor with Buzzer 9
7 - RIB6
8 - 10 kW X-Band Up Mast
Turning Unit with Transceiver
9 - X-Band Antenna 4 or 6 or 8 feet
10 - Isolating Switch 8
(see "Interconnection Diagram
for X-Band Masthead Scanner")
TFT
Monitor
5
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
4 DI3 DO1
To VDR
7 DI4 DO2
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS

RIB6
RS6B
LAN1

DI1
DI2
it is required to install the fuses or thermal breakers for each power cable.
2
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 For power cable with cross-section 2,5 mm2, fuse 16 A or less should be used
Filter
Convertor CU Pack
3 NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NC)
1
220 VAC 1 Ph.
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW MASTHEAD SCANNERS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1: ES6 Keyboard
** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC) From contacts 21 & 22 of UPS** to DI 2
UPS6

RS6B Computer

220 VAC 1 Ph.
RIB6
From NGSM Scanner Unit (TSB)
From NGSM Scanner Unit (SKV)
220VAC Power to NGSM Scanner Unit (TSE)
NOTE 2: For connection cables Y3, Y16 and Y17, see "MFD Interface.
RIB6/RIB6B - NGSM 10/25 Masthead Scanners. Connection Diagram" and
"Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Masthead Scanner"
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW MASTHEAD SCANNERS. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO

MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW MASTHEAD SCANNERD. POWER DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

NOTE:
L E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6B
L E N L E N + - + - + - + - + -
Rear Side
Rear Side
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1Ph.

220 VAC Power to NGSM Scanner Unit (TSE)

MFD INTERFACE. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 KW MASTHEAD SCANNERS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR X-BAND MASTHEAD SCANNER
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW BULKHEAD SCANNERS. BLOCK DIAGRAM
1 - X1 Connection Board 220 VAC NGSM X-Band Scanner 4/6/8 feet

4 - Computer RS6B 9
6 - TFT Monitor with Buzzer 8
7 - RIB6
8 - X-Band Up Mast Turning Unit
9 - X-Band Antenna 4 or 6 or 8 feet
10 - Transceiver Unit 10 or 25 kW
11 - Isolating Switch
(see "Interconnection Diagram
for X-Band Bulkhead Scanner") TFT
Monitor
10 Transceiver
Unit
5
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL
ES6
To Alarm panel
4 DI3 DO1
To VDR
7 DI4 DO2
GPS, Gyro, Log, AIS

RIB6
RS6B
LAN1
DI1
11 DI2
***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2
2
Filter
Convertor CU Pack
1 These fuses have to be included in the X1 Connection Board
220 VAC 1 Ph.

MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW BULKHEAD SCANNERS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
NOTE 1: ES6 Keyboard
UPS6

RS6B Computer

220 VAC 1 Ph.
RIB6
From NGSM Transceiver Unit (TSB)
From NGSM Transceiver Unit (SKV)
220VAC Power to NGSM Transceiver Unit (TSE)
NOTE 2: For connection cables Y3, Y16 and Y17, see "MFD Interface.
RIB6/RIB6B - NGSM 10/25 Bulkhead Scanners. Connection Diagram" and
"Interconnection Diagram for X-Band Bulkhead Scanner"
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW BULKHEAD SCANNERS. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO
See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Workstation Settings", item 2
Y13 RS6B VGA - Monitor VGA
MFD WS. NGSM 10/25 KW BULKHEAD SCANNERS. POWER DISTRIBUTION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

NOTE:
L E N
EMC Filter
AC/DC Convertor
Control
Unit
Battery Pack
RS6B
L E N L E N + - + - + - + - + -
Rear Side
Rear Side
X1 Power
Connection
Boards
220 VAC 1Ph.

220 VAC Power to NGSM Transceiver Unit (TSE)

MFD INTERFACE. RIB6/RIB6B – NGSM 10/25 KW BULKHEAD SCANNERS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
]
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR X-BAND BULKHEAD SCANNER
ANNEX H
MFD Power Supplly
Distribution Diagrams
MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Distribution. Block Diagram No.1;
MFD. Five Workstations. UPS6 Power Distribution. Block Diagram No.2;
MFD. Five Workstations. 220 VAC Main and 24 VDC Emergency Power Distribution.
Block Diagram;
MFD. Five Workstations. MGE UPS Power Distribution.Block Diagram.

MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. UPS6 POWER DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM NO.1
TFT TFT TFT TFT TFT
W01 W02 W03 W04 W05

ECDIS BACKUP
RADAR X-BAND ECDIS RADAR S-BAND ECDIS CONNING
MASTER BACKUP ROUTE PLANNING
ES6 KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES6 TRACKBALL
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL
ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6
USB USB USB USB USB

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
optional
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
connections
GPS
RS6B LAN1 GPS
RS6B LAN1 GPS
RS6B LAN1 GPS
RS6B LAN1 GPS
RS6B LAN1
GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO GYRO
LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2
RIB6 LAN1 RIB6 LAN1

RIB6 RIB6
UPS6 V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER UPS6 UPS6 V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER UPS6 UPS6
EMC
AC/DC UPS Battery EMC
AC/DC UPS Battery
FROM RADAR X-BAND
FROM RADAR S-BAND

CONVERTOR CU Pack 24 VDC CONVERTOR CU Pack CONVERTOR CU Pack
24 VDC CONVERTOR CU Pack CONVERTOR CU Pack
FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN

220 VAC MAIN
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1
LAN2 LAN1 DCU6 LAN2 LAN1 DCU6

AIS
Sensors (RS422) Sensors (RS422)
NOTE 1: The base sensors (GPS, GYRO, LOG) must be connected to each of the four workstations (COM5-COM7) via NMEA distributors
NOTE 2: The AIS sensor must be connected to DCU port
NOTE 3: The Monitor's COM port should be connected to RS6B COM3

NOTE 4: The Monitor's video input should be connected to RS6B VGA out
NOTE 5: Up to 8 DCU can be connected to the system. In this case it is possible to connect 64 different duplicated sensors
MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. UPS6 POWER DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM NO.2
TFT TFT TFT TFT TFT
W01 W02 W03 W04 W05

ECDIS BACKUP
RADAR X-BAND ECDIS RADAR S-BAND ECDIS
CONNING
MASTER BACKUP
ROUTE PLANNING
ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6
USB USB USB USB USB

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
optional
connections
GPS RS6B LAN1 GPS RS6B LAN1 GPS RS6B LAN1 GPS RS6B LAN1 GPS RS6B LAN1
LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2 LOG
LAN2
RIB6 RIB6
RIB6 RIB6
UPS6 V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER UPS6 UPS6 V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER UPS6 UPS6
LAN1 LAN2 LAN1 LAN2

EMC
AC/DC UPS Battery
FROM RADAR X-BAND
FROM RADAR S-BAND

CONVERTOR CU Pack 24 VDC CONVERTOR CU Pack CONVERTOR CU Pack
24 VDC CONVERTOR CU Pack CONVERTOR CU Pack
FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN

220 VAC MAIN

ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1

AIS
NOTE 2: The AIS sensor should be connected to DCU port

MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. 220 VAC MAIN AND 24 VDC EMERGENCY POWER DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT TFT TFT TFT TFT
W01 W02 W03 W04 W05

ECDIS BACKUP
ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6
USB USB USB USB USB

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
optional
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO connections VIDEO
GPS
RS6B LAN1
GPS
RS6B LAN1
GPS
RS6B LAN1
GPS
RS6B LAN1
GPS
RS6B LAN1
LOG LAN2 LOG LAN2 LOG LAN2 LOG LAN2 LOG LAN2
RIB6 LAN1 RIB6 LAN1

RIB6 RIB6
V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER
EMC
AC/DC EMC
AC/DC EMC
AC/DC EMC
AC/DC EMC
AC/DC
FILTER CONVERTOR FILTER CONVERTOR FILTER CONVERTOR FILTER CONVERTOR FILTER CONVERTOR
24 VDC EMERGENCY
24 VDC EMERGENCY
24 VDC EMERGENCY
24 VDC EMERGENCY
24 VDC EMERGENCY
FROM RADAR X-BAND
FROM RADAR S-BAND

24 VDC 24 VDC
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN

QUINT- QUINT- QUINT- QUINT- QUINT-

DIODE/40 DIODE/40 DIODE/40 DIODE/40 DIODE/40
REDUNDANCY REDUNDANCY REDUNDANCY REDUNDANCY REDUNDANCY
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE ETHERNET
SWITCH 2
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1

AIS

MFD. FIVE WORKSTATIONS. MGE UPS POWER DISTRIBUTION. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT TFT TFT TFT TFT
W01 W02 W03 W04 W05

ECDIS BACKUP
ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6 ES6
USB USB USB USB USB

RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
RS6B LAN1 RS6B LAN1 RS6B LAN1 RS6B LAN1 RS6B LAN1
LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2 LAN2

GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GPS
GPS
GPS
GPS
GPS
LOG
LOG
LOG
LOG
LOG
optional
connections
RIB6 LAN1 RIB6 LAN1
RIB6 RIB6
V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER
AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC AC/DC

CONVERTOR CONVERTOR CONVERTOR CONVERTOR CONVERTOR
FROM RADAR X-BAND
FROM RADAR S-BAND

24 VDC 24 VDC

220 VAC
220 VAC
220 VAC
220 VAC
ETHERNET
MGE UPS SYSTEM
220 VAC
SWITCH 2
(UPS PULSAR EX 1500 RACK,
LOW FREQUENCY FILTER,
BATTERY PACK)
BATTERY
BATTERY
ETHERNET
SWITCH 1
BATTERY
BATTERY
BATTERY
UPS PULSAR EXTREME C 1500
LOW FREQUENCY FILTER

220 VAC MAIN

AIS

ANNEX I
NS 4000 Dual ECDIS
Diagrams
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Block Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS. Backup Workstation. Connection Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations.System Configuration Settings;
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Dual ECDIS and Back of the Bridge Workstation.
Block Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Backup Workstation.Connection Diagram;
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master and Backup Workstations.
System Configuration Settings;
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Back of the Bridge Workstation. Connection
Diagram.

NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Block Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS. MASTER AND BACKUP WORKSTATIONS. BLOCK DIAGRAM

ECDIS MASTER CONSOLE ECDIS BACKUP CONSOLE 2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional, for different power configuration
see diagrams in Annex H)
4 - Computer RS6B
WS1 WS2 5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball (for Backup WS Keyboard optional)
6 - TFT Monitor
ECDIS MASTER ECDIS BACKUP 7 - MOXA Ethernet Switch (optional)
8 - DCU6 (optional)
9 - RIB6 (optional)
6 6
ES6 KEYBOARD
ES6
5 5 optional
ES6
4
To Alarm panel
To Alarm panel DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2
DI3 DO1
DI4 DO2 RS6B LAN2 LAN2
RS6B GPS
GPS GYRO
LAN1 LAN1 LOG
GYRO
LOG
9 7
DI1 DI2 RIB6 DI1 DI2
4
** From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 2 ** From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 2

***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 ***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2
AC/DC AC/DC
FROM RADAR (V,T,H,B signals)
EMC UPS Battery EMC UPS Battery

FILTER CONVERTOR CU Pack FILTER CONVERTOR CU Pack
1 3 1 3
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
LAN1
8 NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NC)

NOTE 1:*-Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm2 might be used if length <10 m.
Sensors (RS422)
If cable length >10 m, cross section must be 2x2,5 mm 2

For power cable with cross-section 1,5 mm2, fuse 10 A or less should be used.
For power cable with cross-section 4 mm2, fuse 32 A or less should be used.
These fuses have to be included in the X1 Connection Board.
979 Annex I. NS 4000 Dual ECDIS Diagrams

NS 4000 ECDIS. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS. MASTER WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:
UPS6
RS6 or RS6B Computer


220 VAC 1 Ph.
Ethernet Switch
To WS2 RS6 LAN2

From WS2 RS6 LAN 1
DCU6
RIB6 X-Band Radar
Sensors signals 4xRS422
From Radar

NS 4000 ECDIS. Backup Workstation. Connection Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS. BACKUP WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:
UPS6
RS6 or RS6B Computer

To WS1 Ethernet Switch
To WS1 RS6 LAN 2

220 VAC 1 Ph.

NS 4000 ECDIS. Master and Backup Workstations. Configuration Settings
NS 4000 ECDIS. MASTER AND BACKUP WORKSTATIONS. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO
Y14 RS6B VGA - Monitor VGA port See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Workstation Settings", item 2

LOG(DLOG), COM 7; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y19 RS6B - Ethernet Switch - RS6B See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "MFD Settings", item 1
Y22 - Y27 AIS and other sensors - DCU COM ports
Y30 Scanner Unit - RIB6 See also section " Radar Adjustment", paragraph "Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6" and

NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Dual ECDIS and Back of the Bridge Workstation. Block Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. DUAL ECDIS AND BACK OF THE BRIDGE WORKSTATION. BLOCK DIAGRAM

ECDIS MASTER CONSOLE ECDIS BACKUP CONSOLE PLANNING STATION 2 - UPS6 with EMC Filter (optional,
ECDIS BACKUP CONSOLE for different power configuration
see diagrams in Annex H)
GPS
WS1 WS2 TPC24 4 - RS6B Computer
GYRO
LOG
WS3 5 - ES6 Keyboard with Trackball
ECDIS MASTER ECDIS BACKUP
PLANNING STATION 6 - ES6 Trackball
BACK OF THE BRIDGE STATION
7 - TFT Monitor
LAN1 8 - TPC24 Computer
+
9 - MOXA Ethernet Switch (optional)
7 7 -
SERVICE
+ ECDIS
HDD
BRILLIANCE - ON/OFF
8
11 - RIB6 (optional)
ES6
5 ES6
5
4
To Alarm panel
DI4 DO2
DI3 DO1
RS6B GPS ES6
GYRO
6
GPS
LAN1 LAN1 LOG
GYRO
LOG
11 9
DI1 DI2 RIB6 DI1 DI2
4
** From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 2 ** From cont. 11 & 12 to DI1 2 2

***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2 ***From cont. 21 & 22 to DI2
AC/DC UPS Battery AC/DC UPS Battery AC/DC UPS Battery

EMC EMC EMC

FILTER CONVERTOR CU Pack FILTER CONVERTOR CU Pack FILTER CONVERTOR CU Pack
3 3 3
1 1 1
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN

LAN1
NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NC) NOTE 4:

10 *** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NC) **** - Connect sensors if Planning Station is used
as Back of the Bridge Station (BOB)
Sensors (RS422)


NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master Workstation. Connection Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. MASTER WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:
UPS6
RS6B Computer

220 VAC 1 Ph.
Ethernet Switch
To WS2 RS6B LAN2

From WS2 RS6B LAN 1
DCU6
RIB6 X-Band Radar
From Radar

NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Backup Workstation. Connection Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. BACKUP WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TFT Monitor
ES6 Keyboard
NOTE:
UPS6
RS6B Computer
To WS1 RS6B LAN 2

220 VAC 1 Ph.

NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Master and Backup Workstations. Configuration Settings
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. MASTER AND BACKUP WORKSTATIONS. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CABLES
NO
Y14 RS6B VGA - Monitor VGA port See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "Workstation Settings", item 2

Heading sensor - RS6B COM 6 GYRO, COM 6; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y17
LOG(DLOG), COM 7; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y19 RS6B - Ethernet Switch - RS6B - TPC24 See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "MFD Settings", item 1
Y22 - Y27 AIS and other sensors - DCU COM ports
Y30 Scanner Unit - RIB6 See also section " Radar Adjustment", paragraph "Signal Gain Level Setup by RIB6" and

NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. Back of the Bridge Workstation. Connection Diagram
NS 4000 ECDIS MFD PREMIUM. BACK OF THE BRIDGE WORKSTATION. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
TPC24 Computer
UPS6 (optional)

ES6

Trackball
220 VAC 1 Ph.
CABLES
NO
Display - TPC24 COM7 (virtual COM) See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraphs "Sensor Settings", items 1-2
and "Workstation Settings", items 1-2
For USB mode, switch 4 on the DIP-Switch should be set to "ON".
Y13 ES6 Trackball USB - RS6B USB port See Chapter 1, section "Workstation Installation", paragraph " Transas ES6 Dedicated
Keyboard with Trackball Installation", item "Trackball Connections"
LOG, COM 5; for COM port exchange parameters, see technical description of the sensor
Y19 TPC4 - Ethernet Switch - RS6B See Chapter 2, section "MFD Configuration", paragraph "MFD Settings", item 1

ANNEX J
MFD Additional Diagrams
WAGO Modules for Conning. Functional Diagram;
Dual ECDIS. Weidmuller UPS/New Hardware. Connection diagram;
ES6 Keyboard with Three Trackballs. Connection Diagram;
Remote Keyboard. Typical Connection Diagram;
Connection TFAP to ECDIS MFD WS. Block Diagram;
Connection Four Scanners to MFD. Block Diagram;
Connection of RIB6 to Some Radar Types. Connection Diagrams;
Autopilot Raytheon NP5400. Connection Diagram;
Autopilot NAVIS AP4000.Typical Connection Diagram;
Autopilot NAVIS AP4000. CU-M Unit Internal Connection Diagram;
Autopilot EMRI SEM200. AEU511 Unit. Connection Diagram;
Autopilot Sperry Marine NAVIPILOT 4000 Interfaces. Connection Diagram;
Autopilot Yokogawa PT900 Overall System Diagram.

WAGO Modules for Conning. Functional Diagram
WAGO MODULES FOR CONNING. FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
Annex J. MFD Additional Diagrams 999

DUAL ECDIS. WEIDMULLER UPS/NEW HARDWARE. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

2 - UPS Weidmuller
4 - Computer RS6B
5 - ES6 or NSI Keyboard with Trackball (Raytheon 50/38 mm Trackball
for Backup WS)
6 - TFT Monitor (Hatteland, DuraMon, MOXA, AHD 1119G)
WS1 WS2
7 - Ethernet Switch (MOXA EDS; Weidmuller IE; Lantech IES, IGS, LGS)
ECDIS MASTER ECDIS BACKUP 8 - DCU6 or DCU Raytheon NautoPlex 8
9 - RIB6B
6 6
ES6 KEYBOARD
ES6
5 5 optional
ES6
4
To Alarm panel
DI4 DO2
DI3 DO1
RS6B GPS
GPS GYRO
LAN1 LAN1 LOG
GYRO
LOG
9 7
***From cont. 21 & 24 to DI2 DI2 DI1 RIB6
***From cont. 21 & 24 to DI2 DI2 DI1
4
+ - + -
4 3 4 3
12 11 14 + + - - - + - + - + -
12 11 14 + + - - - + - + - + -
INPUT BATTERY OUTPUT INPUT BATTERY OUTPUT
PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A CP DC UPS 24V DC 20A/10A CP A BATTERY 24V DC 20A/10A PRO MAX 480W 24V 20A CP DC UPS 24V DC 20A/10A CP A BATTERY 24V DC 20A/10A
Power Battery Power Battery

Supply DC UPS Module Supply DC UPS Module
1 3 1 3
220 VAC MAIN
220 VAC MAIN

1 2 3 4 5 11 21 31 1 2 3 4 5 11 21 31
L(+) N(-) PE L(+) N(-) PE

6 7 12 14 22 24 32 34 2 6 7 12 14 22 24 32 34
1 1 2
2 2
Temperature Sensor Temperature Sensor
LAN1
8
NOTE 3: ** - Low battery alarm signal (NO) NOTE 1:*-Cable cross section 2x1,5 mm2 might be used if length <10 m.
*** - Buffer mode alarm signal (NO) Sensors (RS422)
If cable length >10 m, cross section must be 2x2,5 mm2

These fuses have to be included in the X1 Connection Board.
ES6 KEYBOARD WITH THREE TRACKBALLS. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
REMOTE KEYBOARD. TYPICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Touchscreen Display TFT
Remote Keyboard
Remote Keyboard 1
NS4000 Display TFT NS4000 Display TFT NS4000 Display TFT Computer
NC5000 NC5000 NC5000 RS6B
NR4000 NR4000 NR4000
BAM/BNWAS HMI BAM/BNWAS HMI BAM/BNWAS HMI
W01 W02 W03
MFD MFD MFD
Computer Computer Computer

RS6B RS6B RS6B
CAT5
CAT5
CAT5 CAT5
CAT5 CAT5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery Network Switch 1
ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH 16xRJ45 TA
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
CAT5
CAT5
3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5 3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5 CAT5
Network Switch 2
16xRJ45 TA
2x2x0.75 2x2x0.75
3x1.5
3x1.5
2x2.5 2x2.5
TB TB
Console Console
terminal terminal
CAT5
Power supply 220V AC
CAT5
2x1.5 CAT5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
Touchscreen Display TFT
Remote Keyboard
Remote Keyboard 2
2x1.5
Computer
RS6B
2x1.5
CONNECTION TFAP TO ECDIS MFD WS. BLOCK DIAGRAM
TFT TFT TFT

Monitor Monitor Monitor
W01 W02 W03
IP 10.8.1.101 IP 10.8.1.102 IP 10.8.1.103

RS6B RS6B RS6B LAN1
LAN1 LAN1
GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM GAIN SEA RAIN DIM
TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL TRACK CONTROL
ES6 ES6 ES6
TFAP Ethernet Switch
11
12
5
9
1
3
Communication RS7
EDS-316-M-SC
EXTERNAL INTERNAL IP 10.8.1.100
100M
10M
10
12
14
6
8
4
2
Equipment
15
16
Rx
Tx
100M
PWR2
PWR1
EtherDevice Switch
FAULT
NOTE: TFAP's external IP address may be static or dynamic
CONNECTION FOUR SCANNERS TO MFD. BLOCK DIAGRAM
Scanner S-1 Scanner S-2
Scanner X-1 Scanner X-2
TFT TFT
Ethernet
Monitor Monitor
Switch
(LAN2)
W01 W02
IP 10.8.2.209
IP 10.8.2.210
IP 10.8.2.211
IP 10.8.2.212
ES6 Keyboard ES6 Keyboard
RIB6 X-1 RIB6 S-1 RIB6 X-2 RIB6 S-2

RIB6 RIB6 RIB6 RIB6

V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER V T B H Tx Rx LAN1 LAN2 POWER
ES6 ES6
IP 10.8.1.209
IP 10.8.1.210
IP 10.8.1.211
IP 10.8.1.212
RS6 or RS6B Computer RS6 or RS6B Computer
IP 10.8.2.101
IP 10.8.2.102
Ethernet
Switch
(LAN1)
IP 10.8.1.101 IP 10.8.1.102
UPS6 24VDC UPS6

Connecion 24VDC
Board Connecion
Board
EMC AC/DC UPS Battery EMC AC/DC UPS Battery

Filter Convertor CU Pack Filter Convertor CU Pack
220 VAC 1 PH.
220 VAC 1 PH.

CONNECTION OF RIB6 TO SOME RADAR TYPES. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
JRC JMA 9000 SERIES SPERRY RASCAR FURUNO FR 15XX SERIES
DISPLAY UNIT DISPLAY UNIT
RIB6 RIB6 RIB6

DISPLAY UNIT
RAYTHEON PATHFINDER FURUNO FR 21XX, FR 28XX SERIES
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
RIB6 RIB6
AUTOPILOT RAYTHEON NP5400 INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
AUTOPILOT NAVIS AP4000 INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
AUTOPILOT EMRI SEM200. AEU511 UNIT. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
2X0.75 SQ. CABLE NO.5 WIRE AUTOPILOT FAIL ALARM

1 DI2 TO ECDIS VI A D RY
2X0.75 SQ. CABLE NO.2
2 DI2 CONTACT
BK
SCR.
B
J1/1 24VDC+ J4 PIN-JUMPER: MPB 11/W 2
OII12
J1/2 24VDC-
GND TO 0V CONNECTION ISOL ATED RS422 DB15
CABLE NO. 11
2X0.75 S Q.
PIGG Y-BACK MALE
J1/3 GND MODULE
VCC(5V+) J10/5
DB15
MPB11/J2 J10/4 FEMALE
DO(3)
CABLE NO.1
AMC 11 DO(2) J10/3 ETS 11 CONNE C.MODULE
AUTOPILOT DO(1) J10/2 CH.C CH.D
IO-MOTHERBOARD DO(0)
RXD1+
RXD2+
J10/1
TXD1+
TXD2+
RXD1-
RXD2-
TXD1-
TXD2-
NC
NC
MPB 11 24V+_OUT J11/8 X6
PROCE SSOR MODULE J11/7
SCR. 24V-_OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
AUTOP.FAIL.AL.CON T. J11/6
B
OR PILOT GAIN MOD. E NABLE

AL24V+_OUT J11/5 B
BK
BN
BN
BK
BE
BE
CABLE NO.6
BK
B
BK
2x0.5SQ
AMC 11/J1 AL24V-_OUT J11/4
BK
2
AUTOP.FAIL.AL.CON T. J11/3
OR REMOTE SELECT
CABLE NO.4
FLAT CABLE CONNECTIONS TO GIP 11 MODULES
BK
BK
DI(7) SW_AL_RES' J11/2

B
B
4x0.5SQ
CABLE NO.7
FOR 1:1 GYRO SYNCHRO DECODING. MPB 11/J1
4x0.5SQ
24V-_ISO L J11/1
TIM 11
AMC 11/J2
(ISOL ATED RS232)
OR DB15
LINEFILTER 3A
OII12 MALE CABLE NO.10
CABLE NO.3
(ISOL ATED RS422)
CORCOM
3EQ1
COURSE MON CONT COM

CONTR REQ CONT.,DO(1)
CONTR REQ CONT.,DO(1)
NO PANEL CONTR.' DI(3)

TRACK GAIN/DAMP,AI(1)
COURSE MON CONT NO

COURSE MON CONT NC
WATCH ONE CONT COM

RATE,SHOW CH3,AO(3)
RUDDER ORDER,AO(0)
Y/G 0.75 SQ
AUTOP INCONTR' DI(0)

T.24V+)
T.24V+)
WATCH ONE CONT NO
WATCH ONE CONT NC

DI COM LOW,(INT.24V-)
DI COM LOW,(INT.24V-)
AUTOP READY ' DI(1)
WHEEL ORDER,AI(0)
SHOWE R CH1,AO(1)
SHOWE R CH2,AO(2)
J9/1
J9/2
DO(6) P ORT SOL.ORDE R J9/3
DO(7) S TBD SOL.ORDE R J9/4

DB15
MODE WHEEL DI(2)
TWO PUMPS RUN'

RUDDER FB,AI(2)
FEMALE
DI COM HI 1,(EX
DI COM HI 2,(EX
POW FAIL CONT
POW FAIL CONT

BK
2x0.5SQ
GYRO2 SEL.'
ETS 11 CONNE C.MODULE
VCC(5V +)
DG(0V)
B
+15V PROT
AL24V+ IN
CABLE CABLE
AL24V- IN
CH.A CH.B
LOG IN+
SCREENS SCREENS
+15VDC
+15VDC
LOG IN-
-15VDC
-15VDC
ISOGND
DO(2)
DO(3)
RXD1
RXD2
TXD1
TXD2
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
PG
NC
NC
Y/G 0.75SQ
Y/G 0.75SQ
5A
5A
DG
NC
NC
NC
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
24VDC+
24VDC-
GND
BN
X5 TERMINA L L AYOUT
B
X4
BK
BK
BK
BN
BK
BK
BK
BN
BE
BE
IF RS232 TYPE
B
1 2 3
X5 TERMINA L L AYOUT
X1 CORCOM X5 IF RS422 TYPE
TSI 11 SER.COM. MODULE LINEFI LTER 1 A
RXD1+
RXD2+
EITHER TSI 11 / RS422 1VK3
TXD1+
TXD2+
RXD1-
RXD2-
TXD1-
TXD2-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
OR TSI 11 / RS232
NC
NC
P1 P2
Y/G
BN
CH.F CH.G G 0.5 SQ.
B
G 0.5 SQ.
BK 0.5 SQ. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PLUGS FOR MI P PANEL CONNECTIONS.
ISOGND
PLUG P2 AND CABLE NO. 5,6 AND 7 TOGETHER WITH

RXD1
RXD2
TXD1
TXD2
RESREF
GREEN CORE TO P2 / PIN 9 ARE OPTIONA L
24V+AL
RESET
DG
24V-AL
NC
NC
NC
NC
CH.A CH.B
ONLY MOUNTED IN TWO PANEL SYSTEMS
GND
RS232
X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 X7
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
RXD1+
RXD2+
TXD1+
TXD2+
RXD1-
RXD2-
TXD1-
TXD2-
ALARM EXTERN. WIRE RS422 (4800 / 10Hz)

NC
NC
SUPP LY ALARM
RS422 RESET 1 TX- HEADING
2 TX+ NME A (HDT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4
CH.F CH.G
WIRE RS422 (4800)
1 2
1 RX+ TRACK CONTRO L D ATA
1 2 WIRE POWER SUPP LY NMEA (SSA, SSD, SSX)
2 RX-
WIRE AUTOPILOT POWER FAIL ALARM 1 24VDC+ FROM 24 VDC POWER 3 TX- STEERING COMMAND
MODE SELEC TOR
(optinal) 2 24VDC- SUPP LY 4 TX+ NMEA (SSA, SSD, SSX)
1 DI1 TO ECDIS VI A DRY
2 DI1 CONTACT
1 2 1 2
1 2
ANALOGUE SIGNA L
1 2 WIRE
0.25 V/deg negative stbd
1 R.ORDER
1 2 WIRE RS422 (4800) RUDDER ORDER
2 SG
1 TX- SHIP'S SPEED
WIRE RS422 (4800 / 10Hz)
2 TX+ NME A (VBW)
1 TX- HEADING
2 TX+ NME A (HDT)
1 2
WIRE POWER SUPP LY

1 24VDC+ FROM 24 VDC POWER
2 24VDC- SUPP LY
AUTOPILOT SPERRY MARINE NAVIPILOT 4000 INTERFACES. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
AUTOPILOT YOKOGAWA PT900 OVERALL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ANNEX K
BAM/BNWAS Diagrams
BAM/BNWAS. Transas Integrated Navigation System. Block Diagram;
BAM/BNWAS. Data Flow Diagram;
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W01. Connection Diagram;
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W02. Connection Diagram;
BAM/BNWAS. Workstation W03 – W05. Connection Diagram

BAM/BNWAS. TRANSAS INTEGRATED NAVIGATION SYSTEM. BLOCK DIAGRAM
Navi-Conning 5000 Display
CONNING DISPLAY
Navi-Sailor 4000 (Backup 0)

Navi-Radar 4000 (Slave)
Display Navi-Sailor 4000 (Backup 1)
Navi-Conning 5000
Navi-Conning 5000
Navi-Conning 5000
Display Navi-Sailor 4000 (Slave)
Navi-Conning 5000
Display
BAM Server Navi-Radar 4000 (Slave) Navi-Radar 4000 Navi-Radar 4000 Navi-Radar 4000 (Slave)
BAM Viewer BAM Server BAM Viewer BAM Viewer BAM Viewer
BAM Viewer
W01 W02 W03 W04 W05
ECDIS MASTER ECDIS BACKUP X-BAND RADAR S-BAND RADAR ECDIS SLAVE
ES6 RS6B ES6 RS6B ES6 RS6B ES6 RS6B ES6 RS6B
Keyboard Computer Keyboard Computer Keyboard Computer Keyboard Computer Keyboard Computer
LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1
LAN 2
Sensor 450 LAN 1

DCU Master DCU Backup
LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2
Network Switch 1
Network Switch 2
LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2 LAN 1 LAN 2
Emergency / Bridge Alarm Alarm Buzzer Alarm Buzzer Alarm Buzzer
Silence
Alarm
Buzzer 1
Alarm
Buzzer 2
Network WAGO Reset Button Buzzer Backup Backup
Crew
Network WAGO RIB6 RIB6
Officer 1 Officer 2
Button Bridge
BAM BAM BAM Visualisation 1-st Stage 2-nd Stage 2-nd Stage 3-rd Stage BNWAS
Lamp
From X-Band Scanner
From S-Band Scanner

Reset/Motion Sensor
Alert Silence
Alert Acknowledge
Alert State
Auto Mode
External
Device
External External Motion
Device Device Sensor
BAM/BNWAS. DATA FLOW DIAGRAM
Alerts Silence
Alerts State
DI/DO
Legacy Instruments Alerts Acknowledge
Sensors
Buzzer 1
Alerts Buzzer
DO DO DI DO Silence
Acknowledge
Silence
Button DI BAM WAGO Alerts Info
Silence
DO
Buzzer 2
BAM/BNWAS WAGO BNWAS Buzzer
Acknowledge
RS422 IEC61162-1ed.4
Emergensy/Reset Light Button Legacy Instruments
DI
Button Sensors
BNWAS WAGO
Bridge Visual Lamp DO
Emergensy
DO DO DO DO DI DI Reset BNWAS ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT
BNWAS Reset / Motion Sensor

ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT, EVE
Network IEC61162-450
Bridge Buzzer
First Stage
ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT

Backup Officer 1 Power Failure
Buzzer ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT, EVE MFD
Second Stage
Backup Officer 2 ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT

Buzzer
Second Stage ACN, ALC, ALF, HBT, EVE Data Collecting Unit DCU6
Crew Buzzer
Third Stage Alerts State
Config BNWAS State
Alerts History
BAM/BNWAS Config Config
BAM/BNWAS Server Master Config BAM/BNWAS Server Backup
Connection State Alerts History
BNWAS On/Off
Emergensy
Reset BNWAS Alerts List
Silence BNWAS List
Ship's
Acknowledge
Central Alarm Station Active Backup
Officer
BAM/BNWAS Viewer (HMI) BAM/BNWAS Viewer (HMI)

Central Alert Management (CAM)
BAM/BNWAS. WORKSTATION W01. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NC5000 Display TFT NS4000(Backup0) Display TFT Keyboard Trackball

NR4000(Slave) ES6 ES6
BAM/BNWAS Server
BAM/BNWAS HMI
Conning W01
Display ECDIS Master
Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery

ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH
Computer
RS6B
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5
2x2.5
2x2x0.75
3x1.5
Fuse 200 mA
2x2.5 CAT5
CAT5
Network Switch 1
16xRJ45 TA SENSOR 450
2x1.5
CAT5
CAT5
TB
Network Switch 2
Console 16xRJ45 TA
terminal
CAT5
CAT5
ALARM BUZZER ALARM BUZZER SILENCE BUTTON

11124210 11124210 11124211
WAGO ETHERNET PLC 4ch DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 2ch RELAY OUTPUT 2ch RELAY OUTPUT
2x1.5
750-882 750-403 WAGO 750-513 WAGO 750-513
BAM
2x1.5 2x1.5
2x0.75
2x0.75
2x1.5
2x1.5
BAM/BNWAS. WORKSTATION W02. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NS4000(Backup1) Display TFT Keyboard Trackball

NC5000 ES6 ES6
NR4000(Slave)
BAM/BNWAS Server
BAM/BNWAS HMI W02
ECDIS Backup
ALARM BUZZER Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery

11124210 ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH
Computer
RS6B
Crew
2x1.5
2x1.5
3-rd Stage
3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5
2x2.5
2x2x0.75
3x1.5
Fuse 200 mA
2x1.5 2x2.5
2x1.5
Data Collector Unit Master

DCU6
ALARM BUZZER
11124210
2x1.5
TB
Console
terminal
Backup Officer 1
2-nd Stage Data Collector Unit Master
DCU6
ALARM BUZZER ALARM BUZZER RESET BUTTON

11124210 11124210 11124211
WAGO ETHERNET PLC 4ch DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 2ch RELAY OUTPUT 2ch RELAY OUTPUT 2ch RELAY OUTPUT
2x1.5
750-882 750-403 WAGO 750-513 WAGO 750-513 WAGO 750-513
BNWAS
Backup Officer 2 Bridge

2-nd Stage 1-st Stage
2x1.5
2x1.5 2x1.5
2x0.75
2x0.75
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
BAM/BNWAS. WORKSTATION W03 – W05. CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NS4000(Slave) Display TFT Trackball NS4000(Backup2) Display TFT Keyboard Trackball NS4000(Backup3) Display TFT Keyboard Trackball
NC5000 ES6 NC5000 ES6 ES6 NC5000 ES6 ES6
NR4000(Slave) NR4000 NR4000
BAM/BNWAS HMI BAM/BNWAS HMI BAM/BNWAS HMI
W05 W03 W04
ECDIS SLAVE X-BAND RADAR S-BAND RADAR
Computer Computer Computer

RS6B RS6B RS6B
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
2x1.5
Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery Filter Power Supply UPS Unit Battery
ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH ME-MAX-NEF/QUINT20 A QUINT-PS/1AC/24DC/20 QUINT-DC-UPS/24DC/20 QUINT-BAT/24DC/3,4AH
Radar Integrator Board S-Band

RIB6/RIB6B
RIB6
3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5 3x1.5 2x2.5 2x2.5
2x2x0.75 2x2x0.75
3x1.5
3x1.5
Fm Scanner S-Band
2x2.5 2x2.5
TB TB
Console Console
terminal terminal
Radar Integrator Board X-Band

RIB6/RIB6B
RIB6
2x1.5
Fm Scanner X-Band
ANNEX L
System Certificates

Multi-Functional Display
Installation Guide Part I
Version: 3.00.340
Transas MIP Ltd.
Phone: +46 31 769 56 00.
E-mail: info@transas.com
24/7 Support: +46 771 460 100
WEB: www.transas.com

MFD 3 00 340 Installation Guide Part I PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MFD 3 00 340 Installation Guide Part I PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Multi-Functional Display

Installation Guide Part I

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I 1

2 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I 3

4 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I 5

6 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I 7

Copyright Transas MIP Ltd., 2016

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Electomagnetic Radiation Risk

Table 2. Radio-frequency radiation levels for NGSM scanners

Electrical Shock and Dangerous Voltage

Ground Protection to the Ship Ground

12 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

Compass Safety Distance

Equipment Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF)

14 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation.

Annex D Scanners Cables Handling.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). RADAR User Manual.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Additional Functions.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). ECDIS Quick Reference.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I.

Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II.

Navi-Sailor 4100 ECDIS (v.2.00.348). Special Functions.

Navi-Planner 4000 (v.3.00.346) User Manual.

The document “Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II”

Table 6. SW described in “Multi-Functional Display (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part II”

16 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

• DIS – Draught Information System;

• STW – Speed Through Water;

PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY To highlight names of documents

(V.3.00.340). RADAR USER

ECDIS To highlight, in a printed document, user interface

<Enter> To highlight names of keyboard keys

“Tasks” To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.

START\CONTROL PANEL\REGIONAL AND To highlight menu items

18 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

Copyright Transas MIP Ltd., 2016

MFD HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

– CPU: Intel® Core™ i7-620LE, 2.0GHz, 4MB cache, FSB 1066MHz;

Chapter 1. Hardware Installation 21

– System Memory: 8 GB capacity, 4 GB pre-installed: 1 slot of 4 GB DDR3-

• ISIC DuraMON 19”/24”WS/26”WS Marine Displays (see paragraph

• MOXA MD-219X/224X/226X Marine Displays (see paragraph

• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit: UPS6 (see paragraph Uninterruptible Power

• Uninterruptible Power Supply Unit: Weidmüller UPS (see paragraph Weidmüller

Operational System Requirements

MFD PHYSICAL LAYOUT

The following elements are included in the MFD:

22 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I

MFD display must be installed by taking into consideration the following:

The nominal viewing distance for the display equipment is 1 metre.

Fig. 1. Operator normal viewing distance

Chapter 1. Hardware Installation 23

Navigation Deck Console 6 consists of the following elements:

• Monitor bracket 6 – Part No.: 18141303;

Fig. 2. Navigation Deck console 6 dimensions

24 MULTI-FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY (v.3.00.340). Installation Guide Part I